Deeper

Insights into
the Illuminati
Formula
by
Fritz Springmeier & Cisco Wheeler

Part 1

How the Control Comes about

by Fritz Springmeier

*
Part 2

How help comes about

by Cisco Wheeler

Table of Contents
Pyramid of Satan

Important Explanation of the Contents

Dedication

Physical features of the skull & the face & the

personality .... i

Basic structure of Satanic Control over Gnostic

Religions .... ii

Memorandum for: Director of Central Intelligence

... iii
Introduction ...........

PART 1. DEEPER INSIGHTS into the 12 SCIENCES OF

MONARCH MIND-CONTROL

I. Deeper Insights on the SELECTION &

PREPARATION OF THE VICTIM ...................... 7

A. Who wants zombies?

............................................................................. 7
(Click on page number to enter sub-headings directly)

B. Selecting for Bloodlines, Genetics, Hypnotic &

Dissociative traits ..................................... 7-13

C. Training the Unborn Child

........................................................................ 13

D.Vanishing Twin Syndrome

........................................................................ 13-16

B. Selection & 5 steps for programming Adults from

scratch ................................................ 16

*
II. Deeper Insights on the TRAUMATIZATION &
TORTURE OF THE VICTIM ............... 19

A. Some of the Abusers using Day-to-day Trauma &

Torture techniques

B. What the Programmers look for during torture

F. 6 Specific Tortures

III. Deeper Insights about the USE OF DRUGS

...................................................................... 25

A. Classifying mind-drugs .......................... 25

B. Administering drugs for programming

................................................. 25

C. More programming drugs

........................................ 27

D. How drugs are used to program

................................................................. 27-30

E. How LSD is used for programming

..................................... 30

F. Chemically triggering Instincts

.......................................................... 35

G. Adrenalchrome ........................................... 36
 *

IV. Deeper Insights about the USE OF HYPNOSIS

................................................................... 37

A. Historical use & basics of Hypnosis

................................................................................
37-38

B. The Power of Hypnosis ........................................

38

C. Hypnotic Aids ........................................ 41

D. Early Hypnotic Training ............................... 42

B. Deep Trance Work ............................... 46

F. Lights & Color Programming ..............................

46

G. Hypnotic triggers, codes & cues

.................................................................... 51

*
V. Deeper Insights on the SKILL OF LYING, THE ART
OF DECEIT ................................... 65

A. The Impact of Deceit ...........................................

65-66

B. The Methods of Deceit ................................. 66

C. The Great Disney Deception

................................................................. 70

*
VI. Deeper Insights on the USE OF ELECTRICITY &
ELECTRONICS ................................ 137

A. An overview ...................................137

B. Tesla waves used to read minds & implant voices

............................................................ 175

C. ELF wave mind-control capabilities

.......................................................... 178

D. Body suits for implanting thoughts

................................................................... 147, 164

E. Specific types of implants: Audio implants, Body

Manipulation implants, Visual/holographic implants,
Memex/Brain Link implants, Torture/Nerve & Muscle
Stimulation implants
...............................................................................
159 - 172
F. Placing thoughts directing into the human mind
................................................................. 174, 176

*
VII. Deeper Insights on STRUCTURING OF AN MPD
SYSTEM .......................................... 187

A. Structuring of MPD worlds

.............................................................................................
187

B. How the Mind is in Parts

.................................................................................................
187

C. Processors & basic designs

.............................................................................................
190

D. Constructing alters and types of systems

.......................................................................... 190

E. Structuring the GDC

.....................................................................................
199

F. Using mirrors & spinning

...................................................................................
200-202

*
VIII. Deeper Insights on BODY MANIPULATION &
PROGRAMMING ............................ 203

A. Cranial manipulation ................................. 203

B. Genetic manipulation .................................. 232

*
IX. MIND MANIPULATION BY PSYCHOLOGICAL
PROGRAMMING

METHODS: BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION,

PSYCHOLOGICAL

MOTIVATION & NLP

..................................................................................
243

A. Consequences of the Destruction of Selfhood

................................................................. 243

B. Loss of Feelings .................................................

246

C. Dreams .................................................. 247

D. Programming Langauge ......................................
247

*
X. More on SPIRITUAL CONTROL TECHNIQUES,
POSSESSION

TRANCES, ETC ........................................................

251

A. Importance of Spiritual Programming

............................................................. 251

B. History of Programmed Golem

......................................................... 252

C. The 3 Foundations of Programming

........................................................... 253

D. A Complete Chronology of Early Programming

Rituals .................................................. 258

E. Specific Spiritual Programming Manouevers

.................................................................. 263

*
XI. Deeper Insights on INTERNAL CONTROLS
.................................................................. 267

A. Teaching occult philosophies & ideologies

.................................................................... 267

B. Internal computers
.................................................. 269

C. Internal hierarchies
................................................... 273

*
XII. Deeper Insights on EXTERNAL CONTROLS
................................................................ 275

A. Advertising for Control of Slaves

..................................................................................
275

B. Television ............................................................
279

C. Surveillance & Harassment

.............................................................. 278

D. Manipulating the Milieu, Using Families &

Communities ............................................... 279

*
APPENDIX 1. THE PROGRAMMERS
............................... 281

APPENDIX 2. THE PROGRAMMING SITES

..................................................................... 297

APPENDIX 3. CLONING .............................................

307

PART 2. HOW HELP COMES ABOUT FOR

MINDCONTROL VICTIMS

Collages
...................................................................................
314

Table of Contents
...................................................................... 320

WARNING !!! .......................................................

321

Introduction to Part 2
....................................................... 322

Overview of therapy ..................................................

324

Section A. Beginning Issues

ACCESSING, how to prevent

......................................................................... 325

BOUNDARIES & ROLES, establishment of

............................................................................ 326

COMMUNICATION ISSUES, undrstanding

........................................................................... 330

DENIAL, how to deal with therapist's

................................................................. 331

DEPRESSION, how to deal with initial d

..................................................................................
332

DETECTION, of mind-control
....................................................................... 334
EATING DISORDERS, how to deal with
................................................................................
337

EVALUATION FORMS
..................................................................................
340

FEAR, how to handle .....................................342

FEAR ISSUES, what kinds are faced

......................................................................................
343

HOPE
............................................................................ 345

INTAKE QUESTIONNAIRE
...................................................................... 347

INSOMNIA, suggestions for

..................................................................... 348
MULTIPLICITY, understanding
............................................................... 353

PANIC ATIACKS, suggestions

..................................................................... 355

PROGRAMMING, how to understand

................................................................ 356

PROTECTION, spiritual .........................................

364

SAFETY ISSUES, of slave

...............................................................................
369

SAFETY ISSUES, of support team

................................................................ 371
SELF-INFLICTED HARM, how to handle
............................................................................ 373

SPIRITUAL ISSUES, understanding

............................................................ 375

STRUCTURING, consequences of
........................................................................................
376

SUFFERING, how to deal with

.......................................... 378

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS, how to deal with

........................................................................... 380

SUPPORT TEAM, organizing one

.........................................................................................
382

TRAUMAS, foundational
...................................................... 385

TRIGGERS, how to defuse

.............................................................................
391

TRIGGERS, issues around

.............................................................................
392

TRUST, how to establish

............................................................................
..394

TRUST, how to handle t. issues

................................................. 394

TRUTH, discernment of
..................................................................................
397

Section B. Deeper Issues

ABREACTIONS, avoidance of
............................................................................................
402

ABREACTIONS, understanding
................................................. 403

ABUSE, what is the impact of systematic a

............................................................................ 405

ABUSERS, confrontations or not

..........................................................................................
411

ALTERS, deep, how to work with

........................................................................................
412

BACKACHES, suggestions for

.............................................................................................
415

BIOGRAPHY, chronology of victim’s history

........................................................................ 416

BURN OUT, of support team

................................................... 420

CONFLICT, resolving c. between alters

............................................................ 422

CORE, issues of c ..................................... 424

DELIVERANCE, understanding
............................................. 434

DREAM WORK, understanding

..................................................................... 440

EXTERNAL PROOFS, benefits of

......................................................................................
447

FAMILY, rebuilding a shattered f

............................................................. 448

FLOODING, how to deal with

...................................................449

GRIEF, how to deal with

..................................................................................
450

GUILT, how to deal with

.................................................................................
455

HYPNOSIS, self, ins & outs of

.................................................................... 456

IDENTITY, how to discover one’s i

................................. 460

IMPLANTS, dealing with

.............................................. 461

INTEGRATION, understanding
................................................. 463

INTERNAL INFORMATION, how to get

....................................................................... 465

JOBS, new ones for alters

................................................ 468

JUSTICE SYSTEM, dealing with broken j.s.

..................................................................... 469
MAPPING, how to m. a system
..................................................... 470

MAZES, how to deal with

...................................................... 472

MIRRORS, how to deal with

........................................................ 472

PROGRAMMING, destruction of foundation

...................................................... 473

RATIONALES, understanding cult r

......................................................... 487
REALITY VS. PERCEPTION, dealing with
..................................................... 489

RESPONSIBILITY, tips to face new ones

.......................................................... 490

SALVATION, to achieve .......................................

490

SANCTUARY FOR ALTERS, how to create

.................................................................. 495

SATANIC CULTS, understanding practices of

................................................................. 496

SELF-FORGIVENESS, to achieve
................................... 500

SPLIT-BRAIN PROG., how to understand

...................................................................... 501

SURVEILLANCE, dealing with

.......................................... 503
TIPS, for therapists ..............................................
504

TRANSFERENCE, issues of t
.........................................506

TWINNING, understanding & dealing with

..................................................... 508

WORLD, external, how to understand

............................................................ 511

WORLDS, destruction of internal w

............................................................. 514

--bibliographical notes
.................................................. 523

--index for entire book

...................................................527
To Contents
 Important Explanation of Contents

A successful treasure hunter of the sea said, "You have to convince

others of what you are looking for, and be incredibly persistent in
looking for it." I, Fritz, could really identify with what he was saying. I
have searched for truth like a treasure hunter, I have sifted the dusty
pages of documents, like a patient miner panning for gold. How far &
deep are you willing to search for truth? Cisco and I feel we are
accountable to tell you the whole truth as far as we know it, what you
do with that is up to you. This book will explain many occult ideas and
beliefs, many of them never before publicly revealed. There is an
important reason why these occult ideas and beliefs are introduced,
we need to study our enemy and know how he thinks. The U.S. Army
used indian scouts to track the indians. Gen. MacArthur learned
everything he could about the Japanese so that he could defeat them.
Christ was extremely savvy as to Satan’s tricks. The Apostle said, "We
are not ignorant of Satan’s devices." Time and time again, this author
has seen powerful Masonic clergyman do their handshakes, their
codewords, etc. in front of the common people and the Christians do
not catch on. On the one hand the Christians want proof of what is
happening, but on the other hand, they are not willing to learn how to
identify what the opposition is doing. Such doublemindedness has
contributed to the churches becoming, sad-to-say, fronts for the
Illuminati. I have included the Illuminati’s understanding of things and
other occult beliefs, because I have witnessed that knowing these
things can be helpful in defeating the mind-control. If I were trying to
help a refugee who was trying to escape the Yakuza, I would study the
tactics of the Yakuza. If I were trying to free a witch of JuJuism, then I
would learn about JuJuism. I strongly recommend that readers always
stand on the foundation of the Word of God, and that they use the
Word of God as a refreshing bath to cleanse their minds. This author
has found tapes with scriptures to be an encouragement.
Some Christians have criticized this author for the content of the
books, because it doesn’t portray the lighter side of Christianity
(whatever that is). It seems some people only want enough of God to
to make them cozy, but not so much that their sleep would be
disturbed. Some have even gone so far as to claim this author is not a
Christian because the content of the books is so heavy. It is sad that
many Christians do not know their own Scriptures nor where hope
comes from. True hope is given by the Spirit of God, because hope is
the vantage point that the Spirit of God has for the situation. A
therapist may be optimistic about a victim of mind-control, but the
therapist’s optimism only turns to sincere hope when they become
involved personally with the tragedies of the victim through caring and
prayer. The Biblical hope is not a warm fuzzy that has its head in the
sand pretending that everything is "rosy and peachy". Quite to the
contrary, if we look at the following portion of scripture, we will see
the Word of God portraying trauma after trauma with a light still at the
end of the tunnel! Such is the power of our hope, that we have hope in
spite of how fierce evil manifests.

Lamentations chapter 1

1 I am the man that hath seen affliction by the rod of his wrath.
2 He hath led me, and brought me into darkness, but not into light.
3 Surely against me is he turned; he turneth his hand against me all
the day.
4 My flesh and my skin hath he made old; he hath broken my bones.
5 He hath builded against me, and compassed me with gall and
travail.
6 He hath set me in dark places, as they that be dead of old.
7 He hath hedged me about, that I cannot get out: he hath made my
chain heavy.
8 Also when I cry and shout, he shutteth out my prayer.
9 He hath inclosed my ways with hewn stone, he hath made my paths
crooked.
10 He was unto me as a bear lying in wait, and as a lion in secret
places.
11 He hath turned aside my ways, and pulled me in pieces: he hath
made me desolate.
12 He hath bent his bow, and set me as a mark for the arrow.
13 He hath caused the arrows of his quiver to enter into my reins.
14 I was a derision to all my people; and their song all the day.
15 He hath filled me with bitterness, he hath made me drunken with
wormwood.
16 He hath also broken my teeth with gravel stones, he hath covered
me with ashes.
17 And thou hast removed my soul far off from peace: I forgat
prosperity.
18 And I said, My strength and my hope is perished from the LORD:
19 Remembering mine affliction and my misery, the wormwood and
the gall.
20 My soul hath them still in remembrance, and is bowed down within
me.
21 This I recall to my mind, therefore have I hope.
22 (It is of) Jehovah’s Iovingkindnesss that we are not consumed,
because his compassions fail not.
23 They are new every morning; great is thy faithfulness.
24 The LORD is my portion, saith my soul; therefore will I hope in
Him.
25 The LORD is good unto them that wait for Him, to the soul that
seeketh him.
26 It is good that a man should both hope and quietly wait for the
salvation of the LORD.
We are in a battle for our minds, are we willing to seize the hope that
is before us, or will we resign and say "all is lost"? Discouragement is
not of faith. Do you think Almighty God is a discouraged person? He is
calling people to serve others, because God knows that you will never
find happiness in selfishness. God is calling people to bind up the
broken shattered multiples and to let their deeper parts know that
they are loved and worthwhile. To adopt an attitude of defeat before
freedom loving men and women have exhausted all potential remedies
for this mind-control is inexcusable.
Next
DEDICATION
This book is dedicated to the two million Americans and
counting who have been programmed with Monarch-type
trauma-based mind control. This book is written to destroy
trauma-based mind control before it destroys the human race.
It’s time for this horrendous secret to end. It is also written as
part of God’s end time work to propel people of faith to the
high calling that is prophecied of the Body, but cannot be
attained without men of faith understanding these things.
Humanity’s great prophet said he came to heal those whose
hearts had been broken--literally split and crushed, and to free
those who are captive. That work needs to go forward. Blood,
sweat and tears are associated with this book. The blood of the
innocent victims of this mind-control cries out in a single
unison, along with the pungent sweat of those who have tried
to minister help to the shattered humanity left by the sadistic
programmers, and the pools of tears shed as this book was
written, "How long, O Lord, holy and true, do you not judge and
avenge our blood on earth?"

HOPE
.... Thou shalt know that I am Lord: For they shall not be
ashamed that wait on Me. Shall the prey be taken from the
mighty, or the lawful captive delivered? But thus saith Yahweh,
even the captives of the mighty shall be taken away, and the
prey of the terrible shall be delivered: for I will contend with
him that contendeth with thee, and I will save thy children.
Isaiah 49:23b-25

WARNING, READ THIS FIRST BEFORE READING THE BOOK.

IF THERE IS ANY CHANCE you the reader have had
mind-control done to you, you must consider the following
book to be DANGEROUS. If you are consulting a therapist for
DID (also known as MPD), it is recommended that you consult
your therapist before reading this book. The complications that
could result for those under mind control learning the
truth--could be fatal. The co-authors take no responsibility for
those who read or misuse this information. The reader’s mind
is like a garden. It may not be time to plant the truth in your
mind. Perhaps you need some weeding or ground preparation,
before the garden of your mind is ready. Perhaps the weather
is too stormy to plant the truth. Pray to the Lord of the Harvest.
The blessings that flow from planting the information of this
book in your mind, will require the presence of living waters of
love. If you do not have love in your heart, this book is not for
you. The information contained in this book is the biggest
news-story of the 20th century, and still the biggest secret. It
will challenge you, shock you, horrify you and hopefully
motivate you to redouble your efforts to humble yourself and
seek strength from God Almighty.
The programming procedures which are described in this book
are based on research and consultation with deprogrammers,
ex-programmers, therapists, counselors and pertinent
literature. To the best of our knowledge the statements made
in this book are factual, although they may not reflect the
latest or currently accepted methodology among each and
every faction of the New World Order which carries out
Monarch-type programming. This book tends to devote more
emphasis to Illuminati programming, which is the highest level
of programming. For individual application in understanding a
survivor of Monarch programming, therapists are admonished
to use this material with consideration for the Monarch victim’s
personal case and situation. The authors disclaim any
responsibility for therapeutic work based upon this material.
Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler have co-authored They
Know Not What They Do, An Illustrated Guidebook To Monarch
Mind Control. Both Fritz and Cisco bring years of experience in
dealing with Monarch programming to bear on the writing of
this book. Fritz has researched the Illuminati, while he has
worked with victims of its programming. He has authored The
Top 13 Illuminati Families, and several other books.

INTRODUCTION by Fritz
There are many dangers to the human race, some real and
some imagined. I believe that the trauma-based mind control
which this book exposes is the greatest danger to the human
race. It gives evil men the power to carry out any evil deed
totally undetected. By the time the astute reader finishes this
book, they will be as familiar with how to carry out
trauma-based mind-control as some of the programmers.
Ancient and more recent secrets will no longer be secrets. Over
the years, I have spent thousands of hours studying the
Illuminati, the Intelligence agencies of the world, and the
occult world in general. The centerpiece of these organizations
is the trauma-based mind control that they carry out. Without
the ability to carry out this sophisticated type of mind-control
using MPD, drugs, hypnosis and electronics and other control
methodologies, these organizations would fail to keep their
dark evil deeds secret. When one of the mind-control
programmers of the Church of Scientology, who has left
Scientology, was asked about MPD, he said, "It’s the name of
the game of mind control." Research into this subject will
never be complete. This book has tried to give a comprehensive
view of how the programming is done. The basic techniques
were developed in German, Scottish, Italian, and English
Illuminati families and have been done for centuries. Some
report that some of the techniques go back to ancient Egypt
and ancient Babylon to the ancient mystery religions. The Nazis
are known to have studied ancient Egyptian texts in their mind
control research. The records and secrets of the generational
Illuminati bloodlines are very-well guarded secrets.
Even when I’ve learned about the location of secret
depositories of some of the Illuminati’s secrets in Europe,
America, and Asia, their records and secrets are too
well-guarded to be examined. The intelligence agencies, such
as MI-6 began investigating these mind-control techniques
early this century, but their records have been routinely
destroyed and tampered with. There are some survivors and
professionals who know that the British used programmed
trauma-based MPD (DID) agents in W.W. I. In Jan., 1987,
Richard Kluft submitted an article to the American Journal of
Clinical Hypnosis about 8 MPD patients who were between 60
and 72 years of age. Traugott Konstantin Oesterreich
(1880-1949), who was professor of philosophy at Tubingen
University, Germany studied MPD and demonic possession and
wrote a classic study of it in 1921 entitled Possession
Demonical & Other, which was translated into english in 1930.
His classic work on this subject provides documented cases
which reveal that the basic trauma-based mind-control was
going on in Germany, France & Belgium long before the 20th
century. Although he is unable to put together all the pieces
and the clues for what they are, the reader of this book might
enjoy reading the 1930 English translation of his classic work
after they finish this book. Oesterreich’s research in early
1900s was the type of research that the Nazi mind-control
programmers were very aware of. In 1921, the Germans such
as Oesterreich would describe personality switches, by the
term "somnambuliform [hypnotic states] possession" or
"demonical somnambulism" or what might be called
"Besessenheit von Hypnotismus und bösen Geistern."
The ability to study both the spiritual & psychological aspects
of mind-control phenomena, is often lacking today. There are
exceptions such as Dr. Loreda Fox’s book The Spiritual
Dimensions of MPD. In the 1920s, the Germans also were
aware that the human mind has a variety of
ego-psycho-psysiological states rather than one unified mind,
which they termed "Sub jecklose Psychologie" or the
psychology of having correlated psychological states rather
than the concept of a single ego. The Germans and Italians
under the Nazi and Fascist governments began to do serious
scientific research into trauma-based mind control. Under the
auspices of the Kaiser Wilhelm Medical Institute in Berlin,
Joseph Mengele conducted mind-control research on thousands
of twins, and thousands of other hapless victims. Himmler
supervised genetic research. The Nazi research records were
confiscated by the Allies and are still classified. A trip can be
made from downtown Washington D.C. on a gray-government
van which serves as a shuttle to the Suitland Annex where the
government’s secrets are buried including research papers
captured from the Nazi Mind-Control research. Most of
Mengele’s concentration camp research is still classified. Much
of it dealt with mind control. A researcher can visit the top
floor, but underground below the top floor are the real secrets.
The real secrets are lying in millions of sheets of classified
documents hidden behind blast proof doors. There they have
vault after vault, and row after row of top-secret files that only
a few privileged persons with security clearances above
COSMIC--such as with a "C3" or "MJ" security clearance can
visit. Everyone with these high security clearances which I
have identified is connected to the Illuminati. Each
underground area at Suitland Annex has its own subset of
secret access words, known only to the initiated. Most of the
OSS records have been destroyed, a few have been left, the
important ones have been misfiled or remade. (This is
according to a reliable British intelligent agent.) Also according
to reliable inside sources the CIA is working night and day to
remake old records, to expunge all the real dirty secrets from
their records. The basement of CIA HQ is known as "the Pit," In
the Pit documents are being shredded and burned on a round
the clock basis. The large remains of these secrets are sold for
landfill. The Illuminati have developed secrecy to a fine art.
They train their people in the art of secrecy from the time they
are born. Most everything they do, is done orally. They are
trained not to write rituals and other things down. There is
very little paper trail left by the Illuminati.
The creation of slaves with photographic memories facilitates
this secrecy. But this book is not about how they have
managed to keep their trauma-based Monarch Mind-Control a
secret. They have managed only to keep it a secret to the
general public. They have not been able to completely cover-up
the millions of wasted lives that their programming has ruined.
For many years, they were able to shut-up and quietly discard
their programmed multiples by labelling them Paranoid
Schizophrenics. But therapists are now correctly identifying
these people as programmed multiples and are not only
diagnosing them better but giving them better treatment. After
Candy Jones’s husband deprogrammed her enough that she
could participate in writing a book exposing some of what had
been done to her, the secret was out. (See The Control of
Candy Jones Hypnotism and the CIA by Donald Bain.) Ever
since then, the intelligence agencies and the Illuminati have
been carrying out damage control. Their biggest damage
control campaign has enlisted the power of Hollywood and the
controlled Media. This campaign is known as the False Memory
Syndrome campaign, or as those of us who know the facts like
to call it ""the false memory spin-drome." The headquarters of
the False Memory Spin-drom Foundation is located at 3401
Market St., Suite 130, Philadelphia, PA 19104. Some of the
original founders were doctors of the University of
Pennslyvannia. The inside story about these early FMS doctors
of the University of Pennslyvannia is that they practiced
Satanic Rituals during their work days. What is unusual about
this--is that generally satanic rituals are performed at night,
but these doctors did their coven work during the day. I know
about these men. Now you can see why these men started the
FMS! They started it to cover their own sins, because many of
them were abusers themselves. In other words many of the
EMS people are abusers of trauma-based mind-controlled
slaves, or the victims of abuse who are in denial about their
own abuse from trauma-based mind-control. Martin T. Orn (the
person credited with founding the FMS) had ties to the CIA.
Two members of the EMS advisory board, Ralph Underwager,
Ph.D. and theologian, along with Hollida Wakefield, M.A. let the
cat out of the bag when they publicly supported pedophilia
(that is adults having sex with children). Their support of
pedophilia came in an interview with a Dutch magazine
Paidika, The Journal of Paedophilia (Winter, 1993).
Although the False Memory Syndrome Foundation gets upset at
any mention that there might be a conspiracy by the
perpetrators of mind-control, because conspiracies supposedly
don’t and can’t happen, they want us to believe that all
therapists are conspiring together to implant false memories of
abuse into their clients, which could not be further from the
truth. Monarch slaves typically run into a great deal of denial
by their therapists that anything like this could be happening.
The bottom line is that Multiple Personality Disorder (now
refered to as Dissociative Identity Disorder) is a recognized
bona fide diagnosis. False Memory Syndrome is not a
recognized medical or psychological diagnosis and does not
appear in the American Psychiatric Association’s Diagnostic
and Statistical Manual III-R nor the recently released DSM-IV.
Those who followed Fritz’s writings have learned about the
close working relationship between the Mondavi’s and the
Rothschilds (see his article about the Mondavi/Rothschild Napa
Valley winery). Guess who got the court precedence which
gives the EMS some legal ground to attack therapists? The
precidence was supposedly a wife who went to a doctor who
told her she had syphilis. The wife assumes she got it from her
husband and divorces him. Then she learns she doesn’t have
syphilis. The husband then sues the doctor. Upon this bizarre
case rests the legal precedence for a third party to sue a
person who gives advice, such as family members suing a
therapist.
Upon this weak precidence, an abusive father who worked for
Monday in a winery in California successfully destroyed a
legitimate therapist who was trying to save his daughter who
was a programmed Monarch victim. Supposedly the therapist
had implanted false memories of rape in his daughter, when
the record shows that the daughter’s mother told the therapist
the girl had been raped by the father. When a valid case of SRA
and repressed memories went to trial in Washington state
involving a police officer whose family was MPD, Dr. Richard
Ofshe of the False Memory Spindrom showed up to cause
mischief. And mischief he did work. The case involved the
children of a ""Christian"" police officer named Ingram who
had satanically ritually abused his family for years. The
daughter won in court, but Ofshe of the EMS was not above
writing a book full of lies and distortions about the case. Lynn
Crook, who was the abused daughter in the case wrote up a
paper exposing what EMS person Richard Ofshe did to her, The
controlled media is giving full license and great coverage to the
EMS people. Rather than fighting the government for scraps of
declassified documents which have had their secrets marked
out, and which may even be fake documents manufactured by
the CIA, I have decided that there is a much better approach to
expose the Monarch Mind Control to the world. If a person
could never go to Nepal, he can see pictures of it and believe it
exists. If a person can not get into the top secret records of the
CIA and Office of Naval Intelligence and MI6, they can be given
the exact RECIPE for creating a Monarch slave. I believe that
by giving the step by step recipe, people will see that A. all the
ingredients are available, B. it is possible to combine the
ingredients, C. all it takes is the motive to do it, and that
motive is self-evident. We’ll even provide some of the names
and places as we go along. This book will provide the
step-by-step recipe for making a Monarch Mind-Controlled
slave, It is a trauma-based mind control which programs
multiple personalities using every known technique of
mind-control. Every type of mind-control technique has been
combined into a group package which makes the total package
almost impossible to break. It is this ability to synthesize all
these methods into a group package which is so powerful.
Edward Hunter, author of Brainwashing In Red China, testified
in 1958 before a U.S. Congressional House Committee on
Un-American Activities: "Since man began, he has tried to
influence other men or women to his way of thinking. There
have always been these forms of pressure to change attitudes.
We discovered in the past thirty years, a technique to
influence, by clinical, hospital procedures, the thinking
processes of human beings. Brainwashing is formed out of a
set of different elements ... hunger, fatigue, tenseness, threats,
violence, and in more intense cases...drugs and hypnotism. No
one of these elements alone can be regarded as brain washing,
any more than an apple can be called apple pie. Other
ingredients have to be added, and a cooking process gone
through. So it is with brainwashing..." Hunter said
brainwashing was a Red Chinese threat. He said that the
chinese were the ones using these tactics. In reality, this mind
control was being done in the U.S. and Hunter was a pawn to
help justify the criminal activities of the programmers should
they ever be found out behind their cover of "National
security." The handlers of mind-controlled slaves carry around
a black or grey 3 ring notebook or a lap top computer with the
access codes and triggers. Some of the programmers and
handlers have this all memorized. The deepest parts,
core/gems/executive committee, false trinity etc. are charted
in esoteric language such as Enochian, Hebrew (which is
considered magical), and Druid symbols. I have never gotten
the opportunity to look at one of these, although a number of
the slaves who I’ve talked with have while they were being
programmed. These notebooks have color-coded graphs
showing the arrangement of alters, the structure of the
system, the training of the alters, the history of the alters and
other details. All the primary tortures carried out on a slave are
coded using dates/no.s so that the memories can be pulled up
by the programmers. There is a standard set of hand signals,
gestures, and codes that allow a handler to work with someone
else’s slave, but the accepted code among the handlers is to
leave another man’s slave alone. As one leading psychiatrist
put it, "Different ideologies use the same methodologies of
mind control."
The Illuminati have secretly put in base programming that
allows them ultimate control over many of the other groups’
slaves. This will be described within this book.
For both the ease of reading and the ease of writing, I have
dispensed with most footnotes. To provide my sources would
double the size of the book, and many of them are confidential.
(In the past, when I have attempted crediting information,
some people have gotten bruised feelings for having been
passed over or for being named. When information comes in
from several sources, it becomes difficult to pass out credit.) I
have made conservative judgement calls about what material I
could use. Most of this information has been verified by several
reliable sources. Confidential eyewitnesses are often the only
source, when there is such a powerful conspiracy to keep this
vast NWO mind control secret. Paper trails were not left or are
not available. Programmed slaves who have worked for the
military as mind-controlled slaves have witnessed their files
expunged and sanitized. The New World Order in 1981 made
training films for their novice programmers. Monarch slave
Cathy O’Brien was used to make both the film "How to Divide a
Personality" and "How To Create a Sex Slave." Two Huntsville
porn photographers were used to help NASA and the NWO
create these training films. Undoubtedly, other porn training
films exist too. In others words, there is film evidence of the
Monarch Total Mind-control but these porn films are kept in
very secure sites. During the last few years, I have visited with
ex-programmers, I have visited with hundreds of victims of the
Monarch type programming. I have gone to programming sites,
I have visited with therapists who work with the victims of this
mind-control, and I have met several of the programmers of
the CIA/Illuminati face to face in the adventures of trying to
save people from their programming.
I hope that God gives me the strength and the opportunity to
get the information I have learned out to the world in general.
When this information gets out, hopefully it will help lift some
of the secrecy of the Monarch Programming. The Monarch
Programming is a foundation rock of the New World Order that
when pulled up, will reveal the most evil two-legged bugs and
slimy critters. When their rock is lifted, they will have to scurry
to hide. Because the authors know what the programmers do,
they must honestly record several areas of programming that
will be controversial. The programmers are very much into
demonology. Before therapists close their minds to this
subject, the authors would like to point out, that they
personally know of cases where Monarch slaves whose
Christian personalities & other alters didn’t believe in
demonology were talked into participating in real deliverance,
and the slaves discovered much to their surprise that work
they had unsuccessfully tried to do for years with their
therapist was accomplished in a day or two. Some prestigious
researchers have decided the subconscious doesn’t exist
because they can’t find it--its mysterious. To the man in the
street the concept "subconscious" is as mysterious as the
concept "demon". Both have been the objects of intense
research by U.S./Brit./Ger. Intelligence groups. In fact, many
of the concepts in this book have been purposely obscurred by
the Illuminati’s control over the media and universities. These
obscurred concepts include M.P.D. (DID), recovered memories,
hypnosis, demonic possession, aliens, mind-control, the
subconscious, a conspiracy to bring in a NWO, truth, etc. The
smokescreens of controversy will continue; but those who love
the truth, if they seek it, will realize the importance of this
book. It’s on public record that MK ULTRA, the mind control
research which CIA director Admiral Stansfield Turner admitted
to in 1977 spent millions of dollars studing Voodoo, witchcraft,
and psychics. On August 3, 1977, at a Senate hearing the then
CIA director Admiral Stansfield Turner disclosed that the CIA
had been conducting mind control on countless numbers of
unsuspecting victims for years, without their knowledge or
consent. These CIA mind-control operations were carried out
with the participation of a least 185 scientists and at least 80
American institutions, including prisons, pharmaceutical
companies, hospitals, and 44 medical colleges & universities.
Many of America’s most prestigious institutes of medical
research, had cooperated with the CIA. as well as numerous
big name corporations. Casey admitted that day that the CIA
did mind-control consisting of drugs, hypnosis & electro-shock.
A few of the victims of the Monarch Project were even awarded
financial compensation for their misery. But what was admitted
was admitted in the spirit of covering up the extent of the full
truth. The compensation was actually hush money, because
victims were given "gag orders" by judges not to talk about
what had happened to them. It’s been a disaster for Monarch
victims that so many ministers have ignored those words of
their Scripture, "For we are not ignorant of the devil’s devices."
2 COR 2:11 This book is a must for those ministers who
seriously believe "Having therefore these promises, dearly
beloved, let us cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh
and spirit, perfecting holiness in the fear of God." 2 COR 7:1. In
2 TIM 2: 19-21, believers who "nameth the name of Christ" are
asked to purge themselves of their uncleanliness ( unclean
spirits). There are many top notch Christians in the churches
today who are under mind-control, incl. many of the Christian
leadership. I would like to remind Christian ministers that
Isaiah the great prophet said, "The Lord GOD hath given me
the tongue of the learned that I should know how to speak a
word in season to him that is weary: he wakeneth morning by
morning; he wakeneth mine ear to hear as the learned."
Ignorance is not godliness. Isaiah learned to speak with the
great learned men of his day, just as Paul the great apostle
could speak to the learned men of his time. One of the
character traits of God is that He is all-knowing. WHO says it is
godly to be ignorant? The prophet Daniel said Yahweh God
"reveals the deep and secret things." (Dan. 2:22a) God’s
instruments will do this revealing. Jesus’ advice to his disciples
was in effect to "Be wise as serpents, and gentle as a lamb".
This advice certainly applies in helping the victims of
trauma-based mind-control. Paul in his letter to the
Thessalonians (1 Thes 5:14) says that in effect that different
people need different counseling, but they all need to be
treated with patience. The first step in suggesting a cure is to
find out what happened. That is what this book is about. This
book is about how the Occult Network creates the problem that
therapists and a few ministers try to deal with. But the keys to
open doors to healthy solutions for the victims of trauma-based
total mind control will reveal themselves in this book for the
reader as this book reveals the nitty-gritty of how the total
mind-control happens. Christ came to free the captives (Isaiah
61:1). Satanic ritual abuse has a history that is almost as old as
history itself. Good King Hezekiah was a victim as a child of
SRA. (2 Chr. 29) who got free. Moses confronted the satanic
magic of Pharoah’s magicians who could create live snakes
from sticks. The Apostle Paul had to deal with Simon Magus, a
leader of what is now known as Satanism. Solomon, one of the
greatest men of faith, backslide and became one of the
greatest satanists of all history. We have "no fellowship with
unfruitful works of darkness, but rather reprove them" (as per
EPH 5:11). While we have no fellowship with evil, the
mind-control programmers are counting on us being so
ignorant of their devices that they can hide their control
devices behind perversion & filth that many people shy away
from. We must be strong enough to face evil and not shy away
from it. The victims of mind-control must look evil in the face &
not look away to gain their freedom. We, who want to help
them, must be courageous & strong enough to do this too. This
book is written for that divine goal "till we all come in the unity
of the faith, and of the knowledge of the Son of God, unto a
perfect man, unto the measure of the stature of the fulness of
Christ." Eph. 4:13 If the body of Christ is to attain fullness, we
need this book to weed out the hidden terrible cancer that is
consuming the body from within. This book is written for
ministers, secular and Christian therapists, and truth lovers of
all kinds. If you love the truth this book is for you. If you see
something good in the human race so that our species should
be preserved as well as the spotted owl and the sand flea, then
this book is for you. IF YOU LOVE THE TRUTH, this BOOK is for
YOU.

GLOSSARY OF HOW BASIC TERMS ARE USED IN THIS BOOK

For those readers who are not familiar with these basic terms
let us introduce you to the definitions under which this book
uses them.
Alter-Our usage is trying to follow the programmers usage of
this word. A dissociated part of the mind which has a seperate
identity and is given cue codes by the mind-control
programmers to trigger that dissociated part of the mind to
come to the front of the mind. The alter’s identity may be a
gem, rock, a tape recorder, a poodle, a white kitten, a dove, a
horse, or even think of itself as a person or a demon. It all
depends on its programming. An alter is different from an alter
fragment in that the alter fragment is a dissociated part of the
mind which serves only a single purpose. The programmers will
give an alter a history, and insure that shadow alters will
provide a full range of accessible emotions. Sometimes the
distinctions between alters and alter fragments is vague, but
examples from the two ends of the spectrum are easy to tell
apart. We use the word alter in this book to conform to what
the programmers’ charts are encoding as alters. A typical main
Mengele-created grid would be a grid of 13x13 principal
A-coded alters, which is 169 principle alter personalities. In
Illuminati systems, ceremonial "alters will consist of 3 alters
placed on a spinning pedistal together into triad goddesses or
gods. That means that an A-coded alter on some levels is
actually 3 alters spinning together, which must be locked in
place to communicate with, and then rotated to communicate
to the other two.

Beta--This is the second Greek letter, and it represents the

sexual models and sexual alters that the Programmers are
creating. The primitive part of the brain is involved in this type
of programming. An early sexual abuse event will be used to
anchor this programming. These sexual slaves will develop
sexual abilities that are far beyond what the public is aware is
even possible. They also receive the worst kind of abuse far
beyond what most people’s imagination can picture. Beta alters
generally see themselves as cats.

Councils (llluminati)--The Illuminati has frequent meetings.

Some of these meetings are organized to appear "acephalous"
and "accidential" in their meetings, when in reality they are
structured and planned. One group, MJ-12 has gone by the
following names: the Group, the Special Study Group, the Wise
Men, the Operations Coordinating Board (OCB), 5412
Committee, 303 Committee, 40 Committee, PI-40 Committee,
and Policy Planning Group (PCG). Some of the formal policy
and ritual groups have names that all Illuminati members who
have gotten high enough to learn, will recognize:
The Council of 3, Council of 5, Council of 7, Council of 9, The
Grand Druid Council, The Committee of 300, and the Committee
of 500 (known as Fortune 500). Many of the meetings are
conclaves without formal names. The Grand Druid Council is
not something fictional, but an actual body of people who
formally meet and whose membership, we have been trying to
keep track of. The groups which make decisions to control this
planet are networked together. Each decision has its own
origin and route that it takes.

Delta--This is a Greek letter shaped like a triangle which

symbolizes change in calculus. It has become a favorite word
to use in naming things for the occult elite. Delta teams are 4
person assassination teams which usually are secret teams.
Delta Forces is an elite unit that operates under the Joint chiefs
of staff that is made up of highly trained total mind-controlled
slaves. Delta models are slaves whose sole purpose is
assassination. Delta alters are alters within an Illuminati alter
system which are programmed to be assassins. These alters
are often some of the deepest in a system and in a Genie bottle
or with Umbrella programming.

Deliverance ministry-(This book is about HOW the mind-control

is done, it is not a textbook on solutions.) The use of the term
deliverance ministry in this book connotates any person(s)
who via faith in God is able to pray for divine help in a fashion
that a victim is helped from demonic activity. A deliverance
ministry is a natural outgrowth of a life in harmony and
fellowship with Yahweh God. However, this is not to be
confused with Exorcism of the traditional Catholic or witchcraft
nature in which certain spells and incantations are used in a
prescribed method. "Deliverance" connotates divinely inspired
faith, exorcism involves ritual. A deliverance ministry might
perhaps teach a person about forgiveness, or how they can
renounce an oath, or how to apply Jesus Christ’s atoning blood
to their life. In this fashion, the person finds deliverance
through biblical spiritual principles rather than the efficacy of
some ritual or hocus pocus spell. This book is in no way meant
as a blanket endorsement of every spiritual warfare tactic. If
anything, this book suggests that ministers learn more about
mind-control, as well as grow stronger in their walk with
Almighty God.

Illuminati--The Illuminati are 13 elite bloodlines which have

manuevered themselves into control over this planet. They lead
double lives, one for society and a hidden one which is based
on a gnostic luciferian philosophy which consists of lots of
blood rituals.

Monarch Programming--This was a specific Project carried out

by secret elements of the U.S. government and intelligence
groups. There were, according to someone a few years ago
who had access to the computer(s) which contains all the
names of active monitored human slaves, 40,000 actively
monitored Monarch slaves. However, this book uses the term
generically to include all victims who have suffered this type of
trauma-based mind-control. In the same way, that a brand
name like "Hyster" is used to describe all lifts--when we use
the term we use it in its broadest sense. This is the only way it
can be used and technically correct, because as of this date,
the authors have not seen who is on the active Monarch
Program list of slaves.
System-- This term is used in several ways. It is frequently
used to refer to a victim of total mind control because the
victim consists of alters, programming, implant(s), internal
computers, and numerous dissociative states which function
together as a system. The word is also used in this book to
refer to the body’s functional physiological units, such as the
respiratory system. The word is also infrequently used to
denote the established social-economic-political system
controlling the world, also known insiders as the Network.
Other standard meaning may also occasionally be used for the
word.
Multiple Personality (DID)--Multiple personalities or
MPD or Dissociative Identity Disorder is the situation where
different dissociative parts of a single brain view themselves as
separate persons. The DSM-IIIR definition of MPD is the
guideline for determining MPD for this book.

New World Order-- The New World Order is the global design
for a One-World-Government One-World-Dictator and its
constituents. Insiders call themselves the "network" and "the
neighborhood".

Satanic Ritual Abuse (SRA)--This is used to represent all

categories of ritual abuse which would be inspired by the
desire to rob, kill, or destroy something worthwhile in a
person, especially their freedom of thought. Many groups
carrying out SRA do not mention Satan by that name. They may
make Pacts to Baphomet, and call upon Rex Mundi, or Belair, or
Lucifer, or the Father of Light, God, or Kali or even "Jesus" or
"Jesus Christ" (there are demons which call themselves
"Jesus", who are not to be confused with Yeshua or Yehoshua
ben Joseph who is known as Jesus Christ of Nazareth.) SRA is
not a value judgement by the authors against some group, the
victims themselves on some level know that he or she is being
abused.

Switching--This is when one part (fragment) of the mind takes

over from another, or in simple terms, this is when one alter
personality (or alter fragment) takes the body from the alter
which is holding the body. Switching can occur via the
Programmers’ codes for calling up alters, or by external or
internal stimuli that trigger an alter to come out. Switching will
usually cause at least a flicker of the eyes, and for outside
observers, who know the different personalities, they will
observe another personality take the body.

Back Next
i
ii

Back to
Next
contents
iii

To Contents Next
Page 1 ...

INTRODUCTION
In Jan. '96, I bound the first copies of The
Illuminati Formula Used to Create Undetectable
Total Mind-Controlled Slave. Hundreds of people
in the United States and other countries were
reading this book, and were expressing their
appreciation and praise for the work. Some also
contributed more details about the Illuminati’s
mind-control. It was also gratifying that the
illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind-control,
which contains my co-author’s art work done
under programming, was translated and sold this
year (’96) as a paperback in Japan. The word is
getting out, and people with ears to hear are
grateful. The original goal was to write the Vol. 2
book to be about 300 pages long, but it spilled into
500 pages. At 500 pages, it was brought to a
grinding halt. In this DEEPER INSIGHTS book, I
bring you more profounder mysteries of the
Illuminati’s mind-control abilities. These deeper
insights were some items left out of the Vol. 2 due
to space, as well as some things that have been
found out since the Vol.2 book was written. Those
who were intrigued by the Vol. 2, and cut their
teeth on the subject of mind-control via my
writings over the past 5 years, will enjoy this
further expose of the deeper secrets of Illuminati
mind-control. For instance, scattered in several
sections including Chapter 3 is a great deal about
the base programs which are laid in using
controlled LSD trips in sensory deprivation tanks.
Another exciting set of new revelations are Cisco’s
information on the core, and her revelations giving
the chronology of layering in the mind-control
programming. I have also done a great deal of
research into Cranial manipulation (see Chapter 8),
which has been an extremely well-hidden
mind-control secret known only to a few select
people worldwide. Another area of intense
research has been to expose the role Disney played
in mind-control. Although other writers have
superficially touched on implants, nanobots,
thought-transfer, soul entrapment and other secret
technologies, I decided to provide many details to
expose these new technologies that are being used
in conjunction with the dissociative programmed
multiplicity. Beside learning countless
programming secrets, the reader will take another
quantum leap into understanding what has been
going on in this mixed-up world. If life is a riddle,
then this book contains many answers to the riddle
of life. During the summer of 1996, I had the
privilege to speak on mind-control to audiences in
12 major American cities, as well talk on over 50
radio stations. The response was encouraging.
People are beginning to wake up, and are hungry
to learn the truth about how the movers and
shakers of this world have developed sophisticated
methods to make children into undetectable
Illuminati robots (from the cradle to the satanic
throne), as well as their extensive abilities to
control the common person’s thinking from the
cradle to the grave. When Christ asked the
question, will I find faith when I return? it was a
serious question. We no longer live in a situation
where we can depend upon our mind and our
thoughts actually being our own. Our minds are
under a constant assault and manipulation by those
who control things. No one is exempt. Fortunately,
there are still some rational thinking humans, who
can challenge and expose their plans for total
control over the minds of the entire human race. I,
as a minister & researcher, along with the victims
represented by Cisco Wheeler and others, can’t
expose this mind control on our own. We need the
help of others. Will you help us get the message
out about the New World Order’s/the Illuminati’s
mind control? Cisco has consulted with me, and
we decided to make two continuations. The
Page 2 ...
continuation of the Illustrated guidebook would be
authored by her, and the continuation of the Vol. 2
book would be carried out by yours truly, Fritz
Springmeier. We have combined these two
continuations into this book called for short
DEEPER INSIGHTS into the Illuminati Mind
Control Formula. This volume is meant to be an
extension of the previous volumes. IF YOU
HAVE NOT READ the previous book entitled
Vol. 2 The Illuminati Formula used to create an
Undetectable Total Mind Controlled Slave, THEN
you are not really prepared to understand this
material. In my previous books, I have shown how
the intelligence agencies are simply prostitutes and
fronts of the Illuminati. The Illuminati always
"sterilize" their activities, so their actions can’t be
identified in the flurry of secret intelligence
activities. Recently, at one conference on
mind-control, victims of government mind-control
were told that their stories were not welcome
because the conference was on "cult"
mind-control. Dear reader, the intelligence
agencies are cults, and not only that, but they have
a dark satanic side to them, which not only brands
them as cults, but "occult cults." Witchcraft and
Freemasonry refer to themselves as "the Craft";
how appropriate it was for Allen Dulles, DCI-head
of the CIA, to entitle his book "The Craft of
Intelligence". How appropriate it was that people
within the CIA referred to their top management as
the Knights Templars. As the Vol. 2 Formula book
indicated, the intelligence agencies which work for
the Illuminati have kept only the minimum of
records, and the records they do keep are out of
reach of people like you and I. But that doesn’t
mean that the researcher like myself can’t work
backwards. One of the side effects of the traumas
that create multiple-personalities (DID) is that
sadistic or criminal alters are often formed, and
with careful research the historical record of
criminals with multiple personalities can be traced
back into history. The Illuminati have created
trained-multiples for centuries, but insiders say
that programmed DID (MPD) was developed in
the Nazi concentration camps. The worldwide
Illuminati planned the camps with the goal to
determine what programs would work on children,
and used the cover story of Nazi racial hatred to
hide the real purpose of the camps--mind-control
experiments which used large numbers of children
traumatized by their separation from their parents.
With today’s sophisticated programming and
structuring of MPD worlds, these evil alters can be
controlled better than in the past, and yet we still
have serial killers like Wayne Cox, and serial
rapists like William Stanley Milligan, who were
programmed multiples stalking our streets.
Kenneth Biani, the LA Hillside strangler who
killed 9 people was diagnosed as a multiple, but
claimed he had faked the disorder. Thomas W.
Piper in Boston in the 1870s, and Paul Miskamen,
one hundred years later in California, are examples
of multiples who had an alter capable of murder
and another alter who was a good Christian. One
of the best disinformation campaigns of the
Illuminati, is to make people think
programmed-multiples are just for espionage,
prostitution and assassination. They have taken
over our pulpits, like the Illuminati programmed
multiple Jimmy Swaggart, and they have taken
over our political offices, like Al Gore, and our
universities. Even with the elite’s secrecy intact
via their control of libraries, publishing houses,
and newspapers, the record still shows the traces
of the Illuminati’s history of creating controlled
multiple personalities. The historical record of
criminals with multiple personalities includes the
Illuminati coke multimillionaire Harry K. Thaw.
He was one of the elite of society, who had
charming sophisticated front alters, and sadistic
deeper alters. His position prevented him from
being convicted of a murder he committed in
public
Page 3 ...
on June 25, 1906. However, another multiple
Henry Spencer, who didn’t have such clout was
hanged after killing Allison Rexroat in 1914.
Another multiple William Heirens, who murdered
two women in the ’40’s, had one of his front alters
write in the mirror after a murder, "For heaven’s
sake, catch me before I kill more, I cannot control
myself." He had an alter George who was doing
the murders. The story doesn’t stop with evidence
of physical murders, but includes the vast numbers
of spiritual deaths that have resulted from the
spiritual manipulation of the masses via
programmed multiples. Programmed multiples
have been great for carrying out religious
deceptions. Many of the great spiritist mediums
were multiples. In the 1920’s, Patience Worth was
a famous name of an author. Patience was an alter
of Mrs. John Curran. As a child Mrs. Curran had
played the piano in her uncle’s Missouri Ozark
church when young and then she later grew up to
be a famous medium and writer. A Dr. Charles E.
Cory investigated her multiple-personality
disorder. He discovered that her author alter was
much more intelligent than the front alter who did
the housekeeping & normally held the body. The
occult world has manipulated MPD to manufacture
validation for their theories of reincarnation,
spiritism etc. Where once the Word of God was
accepted as truth by society as a whole, now
society questions whether there is such a thing as
truth. When it has come to finding out about mind
control from the first level of perpetrators, the
government, there have been a number of
manufactured (bogus), sanitized and original CIA
documents released to the public under the nearly
worthless Freedom of Information act. The
Freedom of Information Act has been manipulated
to lead people to think that the public has access to
secrets.
A letter of inquiry in 1995 requesting declassified
documents on Mind Control, Monarch, MK Ultra,
Artichoke and Blue Bird got the following
response from the CIA, "...as you might expect, we
have already conducted broad-ranging and
exhaustive searches and reviews on every
conceivable aspect of human behavior, including
mind control and brainwashing, and have located
and released 11, 336 pages of material on the
general subject of human behavior studies under
MKULTRA. Most of the 11,336 pages of this
previously released material are very limited in
scope and consist primarily of financial records."
(quote from a CIA letter of response in answer to a
request for declassified mind-control information.)
Yes, and long-story-short even those 11,336 pages
only got released due to a mistake.
In one CIA document pertaining to mind control
released under the Freedom of Information act,
which is a memorandum dated 20 Oct. 1975 to the
Director of Central Intelligence from the Inspector
General Donald F. Chamberlain, the Inspector
General states, "From his investigation of the
project [MKNAOMI], Dr. Stevens has concluded
that gaps in the files are the result of a conscious
policy on the part of those involved to keep very
little paper on the project from its inception in
1952 to its demise in 1970. People formerly
connected with the project interviewed by Dr.
Stevens asserted that the practice of keeping little
or no record of the activity was standard
MKNAOMI procedure." Philip Agee, who wrote
an expose of the CIA entitled Inside The
Company: CIA Diary (Toronto, Can.: Bantam
Books, 1975), said that as an employee of the CIA
"You get so used to lying that after a while it’s
hard to remember what the truth is." Philip Agee
writes, "The life of a CIA operations officer ...
There is not much time to think about the results of
your actions and, if you try to do it well, the job of
operations officer calls for dedication to the point
of obsession. But it’s a schizophrenic sort of
situation. You have too many secrets, you can’t
relax with outsiders. Sometimes an operative uses
several identities at once. If somebody
Page 4 ...
asks you a simple question, "What did you do over
the weekend?" your mind goes Click! Who does
he think I am? What would the guy he thinks I am
be doing over the weekend? You get so used to
lying that after a while it’s hard to remember what
the truth is. When I [Philip] joined the CIA I
signed the secrecy agreement... [now] I may have
violated that agreement. I believe it is worse to
stay silent, that the [security] agreement itself was
immoral." [bold added to quote] On Nov. 15,
1996, DCI Deutsch of the CIA paraded himself
and some politicians before a public meeting in
south L.A. (broadcast on C-Span) and told the
people the CIA would investigate allegations that
the CIA had run drugs. One man asked CIA
Director Deutsch, "Everyone knows that the CIA
was running drugs in Vietnam from the Golden
Triangle, and that they have continued doing it to
today, and you want to come here to south L.A.
and pretend to us that this hasn’t happened when
everyone knows it did. Are you crazy?" Deutsch
couldn’t help but show a revealing smile. (The
above quoted question was taken from C-Span’s
broadcast & is a closely paraphrased version.) One
of my questions to Deutsch would be, "When a
drug addict’s life gets out of control, he’ll go into
denial, and he’ll steal from everyone in his life,
including his own mother, and live a life of lies,
and when an intelligence agency gets out of
control, they are like an addicted person, they stay
in total denial and keep secretly hurting everyone
in sight, WHAT can and should the people do to
get an out-of-control intelligence agency to stop its
power addiction? Unfortunately, the problem with
power addiction, addiction to lying & deception,
and drug addiction began centuries before the CIA
within the Illuminati families that started the CIA.
The CIA is simply reflecting the problems of its
parent. Their addiction to lying keeps the common
gullible man in public ignorant. Their total
mind-controlled slaves are used extensively for
disinformation campaigns, and are helpful to
disseminate WHITE, GREY, & BLACK
propaganda for the New World Order’s Network.
To coordinate their lies requires a special
intelligence group that keeps meticulous records of
the disinformation that has been disseminated, so
that they don’t get mixed up in their lies. It is
extremely rare to get the truth out of the
perpetrators, the mind-control programmers.
Recently, on television a movie portrayed a victim
of trauma-based mind control trying to get one of
her programmers, who she’d taken prisoner, to
confess to what he’d done. He defied her, and did
all he could to make her think her memory was her
imagination. It was an excellent portrayal of how
hard it is to get the truth out of the perpetrators.
The sadistic programmers have exercised their
power for decades in secrecy. They have
understood the implications of their power for
decades. However, the implications of this
undetectable mind-control are staggering, actually
overwhelming and beyond the man in the street’s
ability to comprehend. It means every organization
can be infiltrated ("penetrated" as they say), and
used as a front or controlled. It means nothing is as
it appears. It means that Russia can hate America
on the surface, and be working hand in glove on
the secret level. It means every one of the millions
of new immigrants from Russia, China and Eastern
Europe into the U.S. is a potential time bomb. It
means much of what has been blamed on
Christians has had its origin in Satan. Satanic
programming has seriously damaged the
reputation of Christians. The programmers are
major players in how the world’s events unfold,
while they receive absolutely no attention. These
men are illegitimate rulers of the world. They have
never gained from the common man the right to
rule. Therefore they rule through puppets who owe
their total allegiance to their mind-control masters.
They are rapidly trying to establish legitimacy for
themselves, and plan to
Page 5 ...
culminate their plans to gain legitimacy with the
rule of the AntiChrist, who will rule based on
mass-produced myths and fantasies that the
Illuminati will articulate to the imaginations of
millions of slaves worldwide. They have already
begun to market the AntiChrist and his reign to the
world. The campaign for the acceptance of
homosexuality is just one part of this marketing
effort. They are also skillfully justifying their
AntiChrist’s rule, by creating problems that only
his superior management abilities and leadership
skills will be able to deal with. The strength of
New World Order and the AntiChrist’s rule is the
total and undetectable mind-control that is being
carried out on a mass scale to little children and
people who fit specific profiles. According to a
reliable deprogrammed source: Adults, who have
the following profile are subjected to
mind-control. This profile is:
· alone without a support system of family or
friends.
· an I.Q. above 120.
· good hypnotic candidate
· has other attributes worthwhile to exploit
More about this will be discussed in chapter 1,
where an entire overview of how the intelligence
agencies take adults and program them will be
given. Adults who are used by the intelligence
agencies for WET OPS or one-time one way
missions are programmed in stages. These stages
are designated levels 1-5. Level 4 is where these
slaves begin to resemble the total mind-controlled
slaves of the Illuminati who have been subjected to
mind-control since they were defenseless babies.
The men involved in the programming of little
defenseless children are skilled. They have been
earned their jobs on the basis of a dog-eat-dog
environment. They are ruthless. They operate out a
hidden zone, which I will call the twilight zone of
believability. Anyone who tries to expose what
they are doing, must write about things that are
outside of that box of things commonly believed
in. It is as they intentionally gauge what is
believable and then step outside of that zone in
which to operate. These ruthless programmers
have egos which think they are god-men.
Somewhere deep in their minds, they inwardly
know they are worms. There is a part of
themselves deep down that knows the truth, but
Satan has buried that so deep, that they cannot face
the reality of who they are. They seek eternal life
by stealing the life force of innocent victims. They
know that their father is Satan. They are victims of
Satan. Where does one draw the line between who
is a victim and who is an abuser? There is no line.
The word of God indicates that God has turned
many of these men over to Satan due to their
wicked minds. It’s sad to think that some of these
men are dependant on Satan for spiritual life.
Many of the slaves still have a spark of reality and
a spirit that cries for freedom. They have ears to
hear the truth, should it come their way. This book
is written for those who love the truth and love the
liberty that Almighty God has given us to seek and
to love the truth for ourselves. Although only a
minority of the people today have Total
Mind-Control, the Illuminati are attempting to
confuse and manipulate everyone. One of their
favorite tactics to scare people with is the
ambiguous bogeyman of national security. They
constantly use their spin-doctors to whip up fear,
so that the public will gladly surrender their
freedom to protect "national security".
Unfortunately, or ironically, the very concept of
"national security" is being used as a cover for the
Illuminati to steal every last vestige of freedom left
to the American people. American tax-dollars
support secret conferences such as the classified
conference sponsored by Los Alamos on Nov.
16-17, 1993 where the Applied Physics Lab of
John Hopkins University taught our military about
"non-lethal" weapons. The satanist/ ex-Green
Beret Dr. John Alexander, now head of the Los
Alamos National Lab, gave one of the opening
talks on 11/16/93. The next day, the military men
gave talks on
Page 6 ...
the technology involved in controlling people’s
minds electronically via both implants and energy
beamed at them. Dr. Dave Morgan, of Lockhead
Sanders also gave a specific talk on their
"syntel--synthetic voices they place in the heads of
victims with telemetry to auditory implants. You
will read more on their implants in chapter 5. The
battle for the freedom of the human mind must be
fought now. The battle gets increasingly difficult,
but we must fight it whether we win or lose, for
the human spirit and the human mind was not
created by God for slavery to Satan and his
AntiChrist. Over and over, the truth of Jesus’
words still shine forth, "And you shall know the
truth and the truth shall set you free." Let us
realize that the man who said those eternally
powerful words also said, "I am the way, the truth,
and the life." For His light shone in darkness, "and
the darkness has not overcome it." If those of us
who still have free minds must die--then let us die
for the TRUTH, that the Truth in Christ Jesus shall
live.
Back to Contents Chapter 1
The hidden World Order government that increasingly controls
our lives operates through many clandestine operations and
groups. What you see is not what you get. In order to maintain
total secrecy of such a vast scale of operations, they use
millions of mind-controlled slaves world-wide as well as
numerous willing servants who out of raw terror will not buck
the system. On the surface, EPIC is just another secret military
unit. The patch below belongs to the EPIC unit, a clandestine
unit which is doing the real banking for part of Mexico, much
of the U.S. and part of Canada. This agency (El Paso
Intelligence Center--EPIC) is obviously not a U.S.
jurisdictional agency, but operates under FINCEN (Financial
Crimes Enforcement Network- as in crimes against Big
Brother). This unit is stationed at Ft. Bliss, which contains
Army & Air Force units. American elections are rigged, and
there is no longer a government of the people, for the people
and by the people (if there ever was one). The American people
are kept in place because they think they elected the
government that rules them. Mind-control is pervasive and is
being used not just to create sexual slaves, or banking
employees, but to control society at all levels. Will we continue
to allow a shadow government to rule us? Will we continue to
let them tell us that these things have to be secret in the interest
of "national security", when in reality they are only in the
interest of NATIONAL SLAVERY?
EPIC is also involved with the NAFTA machinations, many of
which were done with the help of mind-controlled slaves.
Within the NAFTA agreement was the U.S./Mexico Border
XXI Framework Document, (based on the La Paz Agreement
signed in ‘83) which in effect ends American & Mexican
sovereignity over all land within 52.5 miles of the border.
Special international agencies have been created to regulate the
various environmental and legal needs of the Border XXI
region, as the border is dissolved into a border region. The
U.S./Mex. Border XXI document created the Border
Cooperation Project & the North American Development Bank.
The World Bank will also provide financing, and some funds
will come from Mexico. EPIC is well situated in the approx.
geographic center of this border region.

Page 7 ...

CHAPTER 1.
SCIENCE NO. 1 - SELECTION &
PREPARATION OF THE VICTIM

The average person who has been spoon-fed what he knows

from the controlled establishment (the establishment’s news,
churches, and schools) is overwhelmed and in denial that
mind-control can be happening. Who would want to carry out
mind-control? One category are those groups who use the
Cabala. Hasidic Judaism, Freemasonry, and Witchcraft are all
based on the Cabala. Llewellyn’s magazine New Worlds of
Mind and Spirit (a prominent witchcraft magazine) in their
June/July ’94 issue state on page 56, "The golem of Prague is
perhaps the most famous example of ‘practical cabala’- the use
of cabala for magical cabala." Golem are mind-controlled
beings. There are several cabalistic and witchcraft written
references that point out that the creation of mind-controlled
zombies (golem) was the highest goal of the cabala. Albert
Pike, perhaps the most important Freemason of all times,
clearly stated as the head of Freemasons worldwide that
Freemasonry is based on the Cabala. A cabalistic psychiatrist in
Psychoanalysis Review, ’44, issue 31, p. 180 wrote, "Victory
over the world would be secured by any man who possessed the
Shem...[We shall control the world (words to this
effect)]...when we shall attain the consciousness of the Shem
within us and will control the power of the Golem to regenerate
the world." [The Golem are energized by the magic
Tetragrammaton, which the Jehovah’s W.s emphasize so
much.] In The Worldwide Weekly, Defense News of
3/20-26/95, the Defense News an official military paper
indicated that the navy was attempting to produce an "Army of
Zombies". The Defense News stated:
"The research, called Hippocampal Neuron Patterning, grows
live neurons on computer chips, William Tolles, the recently
retired associate director of research at the Naval Research Lab,
said March 15. This technology that alters neurons could
potentially be used on people to create zombie armies,
Lawrence Korb, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institution,
said March 16 .... The research has captured the attention of the
U.S. Intelligence community."
I have taken the space to give you the reader a paper trail that
shows that YES INDEED, there are groups of people that
desire human zombies. So where do they select their candidates
for their zombie creating programs? That’s what this chapter
will deal with. You’ll have to go to some of my other books to
learn how these mind-control groups all interconnect.
The previous book by this author The Top 13 Illuminati
Bloodlines was intended to help people begin to understand the
major role bloodlines play within the Illuminati. When this
author was on speaking circuit, he ran into a number of
researchers who had researched the New World Order and the
Illuminati for years and not realized the significance of the
bloodlines. In tracking the bloodlines, it became apparent that
the European Illuminati bloodlines were trying to integrate
some of the American Indian bloodlines into their own
bloodlines. Why? They wanted the occult power that these
bloodlines contributed. And it seems that not only do
generational spirits help in many ways, but there are reasons to
believe that the Aborigines of Australia, the Bushmen of the
Kalahari, and some of the American Indian tribes such as the
Cherokee have high paranormal abilities in addition to their
demonic spiritual abilities. Some believe that the psi-gene was
valuable for the survival of primitive hunter tribes, while tribes
who went into agriculture lost some of the power of the primary
and secondary psi-genes since natural selection would not have
encouraged
Page 8 ...
psi-genes in agricultural based societies. The primary psi-genes
are thought by some to be some genetic coding which enhances
proteins to be better biophysical batteries, storage units, and
other roles. The secondary genetic psi-coding are thought to be
codes for creating richer and higher-functioning neural
pathways, and neural capabilities. Whether this was true, if the
Illuminati believed it was true, it could account for their
penchant for mixing in American Indian blood with their elite
"blue blood."
BREEDING GOOD SUBJECTS for HYPNOSIS-hypnosis
as it relates to selection & preparation of the victim.
Hypnosis and programming work well in the alpha state of the
mind. This is why the child is traumatized even in the womb, so
that it will naturally be in that alpha state even before birth. The
man in the street may think that the hypnotist looks for
weak-willed subjects, however the mind-control programmers
and professional stage hypnotists say that a "fighter", "a
determined forceful personality" are the types they search for to
have a successful hypnotic session. Weak-willed persons are
usually incapable of seriously concentrating for the successful
pursuance of any idea, and usually are the worst subjects.
Intelligence is often helpful, and (as stated in the first volume)
the ability to be creative is extremely important to the
programmers. An extremely important factor for the subject of
mind-control to have is the "emotional drive to pursue to its
successful completion a given objective." (McGill, Ormond.
Professional Stage Hypnotism. pp. 87-88.) One reason the
programmers like to work with children who were preemies is
that they are fighters. Another reason the programmers like to
work with intelligent children, and not waste time trying to
program lower-than-average intelligent children, is that they are
easier to hypnotize.
This does not mean that only people who appear intelligent are
programmed. During the programming process, many of the
victims are programmed to appear stupid to others and to
themselves. Only the master (and those who work with him) are
to use the full potential of the victim. The victims’ talents are
stolen from them. An intelligent child, who comes from an
intelligent family, and who is programmed with total
mind-control may grow up into adulthood thinking he or she is
of average or below average intelligence.
GENETICS
Pres. Theodore Roosevelt, who was blood related to both
President Martin Van Buren and to Franklin Delano Roosevelt,
is on record, "Some day we will realize that the prime duty, the
inescapable duty of the good citizens of the right type is to
leave his or her blood behind him in the world; and that we
have no business to permit the perpetuation of citizens of the
wrong type .... The problem cannot be met unless we give full
consideration to the immense influence of heredity .... I wish
very much that the wrong people could be prevented entirely
from breeding; and when the evil nature of these people is
sufficiently flagrant, this should be done .... The emphasis
should be laid on getting desirable people to breed." Many of
the people within the Illuminati bloodlines have made
statements like this, and have done all they could to leave many
secret offspring behind, because these elite bloodlines have felt
they were the chosen to lead humanity. Your ancient
aristocratic families such as the Cabots, Lodges & Delanos
have been in favor of placing the blame on society’s problems
on the "bad blood" of the common man. They forget all the
evils that have been perpetrated on these common people by the
blue blooded aristocratic families that think they are so
superior. For instance, Illuminati kingpin Harriman’s wife
purchased land at Cold
Page 9 ...
Springs, NY to promote a eugenics program. She said that
being raised around good race horses helped her appreciate
good breeding in man. Eugenics is the philosophy that some
humans are genetically superior to others, & that inferior
genetic races/individuals should be destroyed. The first
eugenics program started in the United States was by John
Humphrey Noyes, the cult leader of communist Oneida
communities. John Humphrey Noyes’ father was a Vermont
Congressman, and his mother was a relative of Rutherford B.
Hayes, the 19th U.S. President. His family was from the burned
out district, from Putney, Vermont. In 1833, Yale granted him a
license to preach. Noyes began creating his communist
communities around 1836, and he dictated all their major
decisions, including their group sex and eugenics policies. In
1869, John H. Noyes selected 53 women and 38 men to be the
only ones in his communities allowed to produce children. The
goal was to perfect the genetics of the community by only
allowing well bred children. This is believed to be the first
eugenics program. All members of the community were
encouraged to have sex with everyone else & not to form
emotional attachments around it. However, they were not to
have procreative sex. The Oneida group can clearly be tied in
with European occult groups that tie in with the illuminati. The
Oneida group used central committees and social control
through mutual criticism to keep their members in line. Their
social control methods were extremely effective. Years later,
Chinese communism began using these innovations of Noyes’.
Charles Guiteau, who assassinated Pres. Garfield, was a
member of Noyes’ Oneida community. He became a member
because his father, a disciple of Noyes, took him there as a boy.
Charles stated that at the Noyes’ community, he came under the
influence of Noyes and "I was unable to get away from that
influence ... A man was just as isolated from the world as if he
were confined in state’s prison or lunatic asylum. I suffered
greatly in mind and body and spirits during incarceration in that
community." He claimed he had never gotten free of the control
that began when he entered the Oneida community. In 1880, he
began hanging around the Republican Party’s NY HQ. This
was a very strange thing, because Charles Guiteau had never
had any interest in politics his entire life. He bought a pistol
from a "gentleman", and then shot President Garfield. Knowing
that Illuminati mind-control was already taking place at this
time, certainly makes this assassination an area for further
study. John Noyes had his groups conducting seances and
carrying out initiation rites. He personally sexually initiated the
girl children of his communities at these rites. In June, 1879,
when the authorities came to arrest him for mass rape of little
girls, he fled to British Canada, where the British government
gave him asylum. After Noyes skipped the country, the
community was incorporated as a joint-stock corporation called
Oneida Ltd., which later burned a large amount of the personal
records and the diaries of the members to keep their sexual
activities forever secret. It’s interesting to note, that long before
1879, in June, 1847, Noyes’ had treated a woman Harriet Hall
for tuberculosis & dropsy by holding a seance ritual and
sexually sealing the spiritual cure with intercourse with the
woman. After the woman’s husband reported this, a grand jury
indicted Noyes. He skipped bail and an almost sure conviction
by fleeing to New York. People have wondered how he
managed to practice his odd sexual behaviors for years and
never get into trouble with authorities.
Margaret Sanger, an early feminist, was also an advocate of
eugenics. In their zeal to make her a hero, modern feminists
have neglected to notice this side of her. Sanger advocated
sterilization of the feeble-minded by
Page 10 ...
the government. This all sounded good at the turn of the
century before legitimate research showed that genetics played
only a partial role in how people turned out, and that
environment and choices by individuals also played just as big
of a role in how people turned out. Many of the people who
were sterilized under eugenic laws were realized to have been
victims of pseudo-science and hysteria. The Great Depression
leveled many proud and haughty people down to the same level
as the common people they had sneered down upon. Rich and
poor found themselves in bread lines. The financial elite and
the academic elite were humbled and the eugenics racial
theories in the U.S. largely disappeared. Finally, H.J. Muller, a
famous and respected geneticist, gave an outstanding and
courageous speech to the Eugenics Society in NY in 1932
where he lambasted the eugenicists for using false
better-breeding theories to rationalize the criminal behavior of
the elite. The Illuminati had suffered a temporary setback in
legitimizing their criminal rule over humanity. In recent years,
the Illuminati’s evil ideas about superior and inferior blood
lines are being given more credence again. The National
Institute of Health funded a $1.7 million study at the University
of Hawaii’s Behavioral Biology Lab to get solid information on
how genetics relates to intelligence so that "informed
decisions" about population control can be made in the future.
Almost every state has now adopted genetic screening of
new-born babies in the U.S. While the Illuminati may not be
able to fully implement their superior blood theories in society
in general, they have been secretly working feverishly in labs
and in secret rituals around the world to redesign mankind to
their preferences. Many Illum. members are the end result of
carefully monitored genetic engineering. They want to
manufacture the future via control over human genetics. Many
years ago, the first step in the Illuminati genetic program was
the creation of specifications. When these specs, these criteria,
were set as goals, they then worked to realize them. They have
been working at them, and refining the results as they continue
to work toward specific goals. They have sought the perfect
assassin. They have sought the perfect slave. They have sought
the perfect baseball player and golf player. They have sought
the perfect soldier. The borders between these manufactured
Illuminati total mind-control slaves and an industrial robot are
fast becoming blurred. The end of the human race as we know
it, and civilization as we know it, is rapidly approaching. Via
molecular biology and genetics, humanoids that are vastly
different from normal humans have been created in secret
underground installations. They have been modifying humans
to design para-humans, and then applying mind-control to
them. The Illuminati is not only controlling humanity, but
under their control redesigning it. Lest anyone forget, the
descendants of John Noyes’ Oneida Colony, and the genetic
model wonder children born in Nazi Germany are still around.
According to one source, the Nazi’s produced numerous
offspring of Hitler which were secretly taken to many countries
and then later reassembled in certain special towns. These
children received mind-control as well as being specially
endowed with as many special traits as the Nazi’s could give
them. If this is true, it could have some significance in the
future. Illuminati kingpins are also able to store their semen via
cryogenics for all kinds of scenarios. Frozen sperm can be used
to create a son after the father had died. Should an Illuminati
kingpin want to impregnate his grand-daughter 10 years after
his death, it would be possible. On the flip side, single women
can choose semen from sperm banks. Another twist that the
Illuminati have taken advantage of is taking the fertilized egg
of one set of parents and implanting it into a brooder slave to
raise the child as a surrogate mother.
Page 11 ...
It should also be mentioned that ex-Illuminati members have
explained how planned births are coincided to have the child be
born on particular special occult dates. (The Illuminati have a
intense lifestyle of secrecy, so most of their members do not
carry the last name of the bloodline they belong to. Some
members are given significant occult names for their legal
name, and others use legal names which have no significance.
Having a legal occult-significant name is not essential, because
the alter system will receive a secret Illuminati occult name.)
The bottom line is that bloodlines, genetics and genetic
engineering is playing a role in the selection process of who is
programmed a certain way. Also the Illuminati has particular
research goals that have been structured into their 20 year, 30
year and 50 year plans. Case histories show that a child will
receive education and programming in order to participate in
secret research projects years down the road. Some of today’s
marked children are invariably being quietly educated to help
with future research goals. As might be suspected the
inbreeding within the secret Illuminati bloodlines and their
secret satanic lifestyles take their genetic toll.. How do the
Illuminati get rid of their leftovers, the children their bloodlines
have that aren’t going to amount to a great deal? In terms of
mind-control, the male children that are the programming
leftovers, the ones that are not really fit to make into politicians,
doctors and lawyers, will be made into stalkers, according to an
ex-Illuminati programmer, who worked in this area of
programming, the ratio of men to women that are programmed
for stalking is about 90% to 10%. Why discuss how the
Illuminati makes stalkers? First, many people doubt that there
is a controlled conspiracy by the Illuminati to control the world,
because in their limited understanding they think that there are
too many uncontrollable people around for the world to be
controlled. They don’t realize that a large share of those crazy
people were intentionally created by the Illuminati. The
Illuminati programmers and handlers during the 40’s through
the 60’s, according to insiders, had specific quotas on how
many people to have go crazy so that the mental institutions
(which were used for programming) could maintain their
government financing. Readers, who have followed this
author’s lectures, have heard him explain how a. the Illuminati
make a decision to "solve" a problem they have created, then b.
get the government and private groups to study the problem for
years so that eventually it looks like their (secretly preplanned)
decision is the best course of action for the country, and then c.
their lackey’s in the political process implement the decision
supposedly for the "good of the people". After 30 years of good
financing for the mental institutions so they could do their
assigned task of programming hundreds of thousands of people
with tasks for the NWO, the Illuminati then set things up so that
the mental institutions dumped their populations out onto the
streets, where they can carry out the missions they had been
programmed to carry out. They next step was to privatize the
prisons, which are being used for mind-control (not to mention
hard-core porn of women victims in prisons). The Illuminati’s
long range plans for mind-control included that they would turn
over the prisons to people like the Illuminati’s Order of the
Skull & Bone’s Wackenhut Services, Inc., Coral Gables, FL,
(ph. no. 305-666-5656), and the Illuminati’s GE Government
Operations, Cherry Hill, NJ under James Becker at
609-486-5042. In the 18 page Heritage Foundation’s study of
prison needs entitled "A Guide To Prison Privatization" (done
on May 28, 1988, Wash. D.C.), the Heritage Foundations gives
all the correct Illuminati answers to the question of
privatization of prisons, including listing the following
"corporations that provide prison services ... Behavioral
Systems SW, Inc.,... Eckerd Family Youth Alternatives, Inc., ...
GE Government Operations, Cherry Hill,
Page 12 ...
NJ.. .Wackenhut." All groups that this author’s research
indicates are Illuminati and involved with mind-control. An
example of several studies that this author has obtained that
were done to show us that privatization of prisons is the best
answer to our problems is The Development, Present Status,
and Future Potential of Correctional Privatization in America
by Charles W. Thomas, Prof. of Criminology & Dir, of Private
Corrections Project; Charles H. Logan, Prof. of Sociology,
Univ. of Conn., & Visiting Fellow, Fed. Bureau of Prisons.
This paper was done May 1991. Our government also got into
the act and the GAO wrote up a govt. report in Feb. 1991
stating that the government could save money by privatizing
prisons. The Illuminati need their people seeded at all levels of
society, at the gutter level as well as in palaces. This is where
the stalkers, their leftover children used for programming are
handy. Many of these stalkers had secret Illuminati lineages
that are hidden via adoption. As one ex-Illuminati member said,
"They are the weak links." The Illuminati must have
dependable people everywhere, even in the gutter and prisons.
Why create stalkers? There are a long list of reasons. It is
somewhat difficult to explain unless readers are already
familiar with the bigger picture. People, who have sat in on
Illuminati meetings where their 20, 30, and 50 year plans were
discussed, will explain how the Illuminati wanted to break
down the family structures and bring violence into the schools.
This is Ordo ab chaos. However, the schools had rules to
protect themselves from dangerous violent activity done by
children, so they had to create violence in the streets, to get
violence into the schools by the backdoor. Stalkers were part of
the program to create violence. Another purpose stalkers serve
for the Illuminati is that they make excellent spies if they get
attached to someone. They will find out everything they can
about that person. Their minds will creatively invent all kinds
of ways to get information about their fixation. How does the
Illuminati program a child to become a stalker? They have the
programming techniques to create a stalker down to a fine
science. In short, it consists of 1. they bond the child extremely
close to its mother or a woman as it grows up. This creates a
side-effect of homosexuality. The mental mechanics of this
side-effect are that the male has an unmet need for men. The
Illuminati will manipulate this latent homosexuality but not
allow its expression. They want to continue to strengthen the
apron strings that attach the child to the mother image.
Meanwhile they utterly destroy all self-respect and self-image
of the child. It is totally disgraced so that its only identity is its
identity with its mother figure. The child can not stand on its
own two feet without the support of the mother-figure. When
the boy approaches puberty, they are watched very closely by
the Illuminati, be that in a military school or tightly controlled
cult family setting, etc. They do not want the apron strings to
ever be cut. They want them to remain dependent when they
would naturally become independent. They want to insure that
the young boy doesn’t develop a sense of who they are. The
victim of stalker programming will never emotionally grow out
of that age of about 11-13 when boys would sever the ties to
their mother. They stop growing emotionally at about age 12.
This is all carefully crafted by the Illuminati. These young men
never understand themselves or their programming. They don’t
understand the impulses and uncontrollable drives that hit them.
They can’t get off their programming merry-go-round, because
it is rooted in the first brain, their maternal instincts, the
"reptilian brain" which has no conscience. Their stalking of
their mother figure is a survival instinct that they don’t
understand. They make good spies. They will persist in tracking
and stalking a victim, until they break down the victim’s walls
of privacy by their sheer tenacity, persistence, and force of will.
Page 13 ...
This is because it is a survival instinct that has been harnessed
by the Illuminati programmer. Because this programming is
laid in at the reptilian first brain level, these stalkers can be
violent without a higher brain conscience, and their minds will
manufacture some justification to protect this survival need to
stalk. The mind protects itself, so they have a strong denial
system. Every time someone "rejects" them, it triggers their
programming. Because they are driven by their reptilian first
brain (the various brains are explained later in this book) they
only think in the here-and-now, long-term projects bore them,
they don’t have the stick-to-itiveness needed for many jobs,
except their eternal quest for an identity with the mother-figure
they stalk.
TRAINING THE UNBORN CHILD
The Illuminati in its typical schizophrenic way, has not
neglected the opportunities to begin the programming process
in the womb. The scientific research in this area has been kept
quiet, but from an ex-Illuminati programmer it is clear that they
are aware of much more about the unborn child in the womb
and its thinking processes than the public knows about. I was
privileged to read the excellent book The Secret Life of the
Unborn Child by Thomas Veiny, M.D. with John Kelly. This
book is written from a loving Christian viewpoint and
incorporates scientific research about the thinking of unborn
children. Interestingly, Veiny studied research into the mind of
the fetus from researchers at the Max Plank Institute, Munich,
Germany, from the Esalen Institute, Big Sur, CA., from the
Center for Research on Birth and Human Development,
Berkeley, CA which are all institutions involved in
mind-control and mind-control research. Just one example of
the learning abilities of the unborn child, an autistic child
remembered the english her French speaking mother was
around during work while the child was in the womb. Veiny
writes, "The fetus can see, hear, experience, taste and, on a
primitive level, even learn in utero (that is, in the uterus--before
birth). Most importantly, he can feel--not with an adult’s
sophistication, but feel nonetheless." (p. 12) Research has
clearly showed that the fetus can think and is shaping its (his or
her) personality while in the womb. Maternal thoughts,
feelings, actions, and fears all reach the child in the womb and
affect the child. The maternal bonding with the child while in
the womb is also critical.
Researchers have been unable to pinpoint when a baby in the
womb begins to think, and have a consciousness, but some
theorize that it goes back clear to the beginning of conception.
One study taught fetus babies to kick on the cue of a vibration.
The researchers have determined that the unborn child hears
what is being said around it, and is beginning to associate its
language skills around the voices it hears. The unborn child
hears and reacts differently to different music played. Soothing
words and soothing music will calm a fetus. One conductor
remembered into his adult years, the cello music that had only
been played while he was an unborn child. According to
excellent research, the start of awareness is clearly evidenced
between the 28th and 32nd week. At that point, the brain’s
neural circuits are just as advanced as a newborns. This is why
the Illuminati can get away with causing so many preemie
births to enhance dissociative abilities. From the 32nd week on
the child shows that it carries out REM sleep. It is also
interesting the children, teenagers and adults have widely
divergent sleep patterns but the time spent in REM sleep stays
constant. Researchers have been able to trace memories going
back to the sixth month of pregnancy. In other words, from the
sixth month of pregnancy onward, some of what the unborn
child learns will be remembered. (See pg. 23 of Varny’s The
Secret Life of the Unborn
Page 14 ...
Child.) This is why the Illuminati has made a point of having
the unborn child hear the voices of people who will play a role
in the trauma and programming of the child. The child may
already know the hypnotic voice of one of its cult programmers
at birth. Researchers found that by playing a tape of a mother’s
heartbeat to new-born babies that the babies felt dramatically
more secure, and were much healthier and did much better. A
child who has been trained to its father’s soothing voice in the
womb, has been proven to remember it and hear it after birth
and to respond to it in a positive way. In fact, the emotionally
healthiest children have been found by researchers to have had
their father’s voice in their life prior to birth. Unborn children
do not like to be poked at. In the eighth week of life, the unborn
child is already using his physical abilities to show that he
dislikes intensely to be poked. One of the early fetus traumas,
that the Illuminati like to carry out is to poke the fetus with a
sharp object to make it dissociative in the womb. By the fourth
month, the unborn baby is making facial expressions. Four to
eight weeks later they are sensitive to touch, and don’t like to
be tickled while in the womb. Sometimes children are tickled
during medical exams. If cold water is injected into the
mother’s stomach, the baby intensely dislikes it. The child can
be overwhelmed while in the womb with horrible sounds, bad
tastes caused by what the mother eats, being touched in ways
that it dislikes, etc. Rock music drives unborn children crazy.
Programming drugs that cause particular thinking in the fetus
can also be administered. Can one see that the traumatization to
cause MPD can easily start in the womb? In fact, with many
Illuminati babies, they do create womb splits, and have even
started trying to teach Christ to the child while in the womb, to
speed up the process of when they will purposefully make the
child feel rejected by God and to experience the black
communion with Satan. The foundation of trauma-based total
mind-control is fear. A deep spirit of fear cripples a person
spiritually & emotionally. The foundation of fear can begin to
be layered in while the child is still unborn. The unborn child
has near-sighted seeing. He can detect light shined on his
mother’s stomach. In fact, the fetus’s eyes, which are living in a
dark world, will hurt when light is shined onto the mom’s
stomach. A long-term unresolved personal stress on the mother
will be one of the worst stresses her unborn child has to deal
with. Short term stresses don’t seem to have the long term side
effects that long term stress has. Short term stresses are soon
forgotten by the child. Somehow, the love that the mother has
for the child is transmitted to the child, and forms a protective
shield so to speak for the child to resist traumas and stresses.
When the mother is ambivalent (even though outwardly happy)
or cool in their emotions, the babies have been proven by
researchers to consistently have more physical and emotional
problems.
If the Illuminati want to create an effeminate gay man, they can
administer progesterone and estrogen to the mother during her
pregnancy, and this will influence the development of male
children to be effeminate. Certain researchers have been
warning about the hormones that are in our daily food because
modern techniques of raising cattle and producing milk include
giving hormones to the animals.
It is also known that the child’s concept of "I" the self starts in
the womb. Those children who have had a secure womb feeling
have been shown to be more confident with their sexual lives
later on in life. While those who were terrified in the womb had
a tendency to have sexual problems. The traumas that are
induced into some of the babies for programming purposes may
have a destabilizing effect on the sexual stability later on in life,
and it may be that the programmers
Page 15 ....
take advantage of the unsure destabilized feelings that are a
consequence of terror in the womb. Children born from induced
labor have a statistically high relationship to sexual sadism, and
males typically have masochistic personalities. (See pg. 19 of
The Secret Life of the Unborn Child). Since certain Illuminati
children have their birth’s induced to match certain dates of the
year, this is one contributing factor as to why Illuminati males,
born into bloodlines that have for centuries considered certain
birthdates important, have such a high incidence of sadistic
tendencies. Verny believes that C-section babies, due to what
happens to babies during the birthing process in contrast to a
normal birth, have certain emotional needs that later as adults
are expressed as promiscuous lives. Women due to their
C-section birth, develop a deep seated desire to be held, and
intercourse later becomes the price they have to pay to satisfy
this deepseated need.
COMMON ILLUMINATI WORK WITH TWINS
The Illuminati mask the removal of babies from pregnant
mothers with "alien abduction of fetus" cover stories. When
twins are in the uterus, it is common for the Illuminati to
skillfully take one of them. This is part of why the
disappearance rate for a twin baby is 75%. It is so prevalent that
it has been given the name "the Vanishing Twin Phenomenon".
The Vanishing Twin Phenomenon is well established by
statistics. Establishment doctors generally claim that one twin
has absorbed the other twin. Some researchers claim that this
can not be the real explanation for any part of the birthing
process. Elizabeth Noble in her book Having Twins, (Houghton
Mifflin, 1990) states, "With increasing use of ultrasound, it has
been observed that more multiples are lost in the uterus than
previously thought--some studies say as high as 80 percent of
twin pregnancies. Considering that there are still 2 in 75 people
born as twins, what a great number of twins would be born if
the disappearance rate were not so high. There are many cases
of two heartbeats being detected only hours before the delivery,
and yet only one baby being born. Many mothers have been
suspicious, but the doctors tell them that the second heartbeat
"was only a mistake." The explanations that doctors give for
disappearing babies who are never born often do not seem
satisfactory. There are different kinds of twins:
a. There are dizygotic, also called fraternal twins. Two
variations of this is when eggs from two consecutive ovarian
cycles are separately fertilized, or a single egg divides and each
of its halves gets fertilized.
b. There are monozygotic, which are identical, or clones so to
speak of each other. Identical twins are always of the same sex.
They share the same genes, the same fingerprints, dental
characteristics, etc.
c. There are monozygotic mirror twins, which have identical
characteristics on opposite sides of their body.
When one twin disappears, the surviving twin will often
develop psychological problems around the disappearance,
even if the child is never told that they had a twin disappear.
The Illuminati believe that the soul of a dead twin goes into the
live twin. They consider twins which have two souls very
powerful individuals. One doctor, William Baldwin, has written
in his book Spirit Releasement Therapy: A Technique Manual
that he believes that the dead twin astrally attaches its soul to
the surviving twin. Dr. Alice Rose believes that some eating
disorders are the result of a twin dying in the womb due to
competition for food.
To further complicate things, the Illuminati program their
slaves to believe that they have a twin somewhere. Elvis
Presley, a Monarch mind-controlled slave, believed he had a
twin that communicated with him spiritually. In the Angel
Times magazine, (Oct. issue), a childhood friend of Elvis states
that
Page 16 ...
Elvis communicated with beings as a child. These being had
showed Elvis a vision of dancing, and of people "dressed in
white with colors all around." While it is popular to dismiss the
vanishing twin phenomena with superficial medical
explanations, or with alien theories, at least of some of the
phenomena is the result of the Illuminati’ s massive system of
abuse, where they need babies for sacrifice, experiments and
programming.
SELECTION OF ADULT CANDIDATES FOR
MIND-CONTROL
There is an ongoing operation within the intelligence agencies
to identify adults who would make good candidates for
mind-control. For this reason, the CIA set up many years ago
chains of weight-loss centers (as well as stop-smoking centers
and stop-drinking centers) that help people with weight loss, &
breaking drinking & smoking addictions. At these centers,
people trained to identify clients with high levels of
suggestibility have been identifying for the intelligence
agencies, (esp. the CIA) potential mind-control victims.
Intelligence assets are located around the country and even
outside of the United States. The perpetrators try to look for
individuals that come through immigration, who come into
county clinics and hospitals, government hospitals, etc. who
have the following initial attributes:
a. they are over 120 I.Q.
b. they are alone without a support team of family and friends
c. they do well on their first session where hypnosis is
clandestinely perpetrated on the individual
d. they have other attributes that can be exploited to the
advantage of the intelligence groups.
If a person is identified at a weight-reduction center (which is a
CIA front) as having a weight problem that needs to receive
hospital treatment AND they are also highly suggestible, they
will be subjected to mind-control while hospitalized. According
to one source, IF the individual, who has been a. spotted, b.
singled out and c. placed under hypnosis without their consent,
d. looks likes a useful candidate for mind-control to the
psychologists and intelligence field officers, THEN a file will
be started and they will be placed in a CALL FILE. The initial
hypnotic session may be in a dirty doctor’s office, or in some
cases in emergency rooms. Dirty doctors working in emergency
room settings are careful to work undetected by clean hospital
workers. The hypnotic suggestion is implanted that the victim
return at a particular date to a location where more detailed
work can be done.
U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 1.
A proper candidate, that is one with an I.Q. above 120 and
proper hypnotic abilities, will be given a code cue, that is an
alpha-numeric code, or a number or a word code that identifies
them. This is embedded hypnotically. If the person has no
relatives that are important, they will be instructed and secretly
helped to move to a location chosen by the intelligence
agencies. The programmers will cover their tracks so that what
has happened at this level is deeply embedded in the
subconscious mind & can’t be retrieved.
U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 2.
At this level the person is used operationally at very easy and
unimportant tasks. He is also assigned someone. The hypnotist
programmer is beginning to soften the victim up and make
them more pliable to suggestions. If he successfully performs
these small jobs that have been hypnotically written into the
mind, then he will be given a RECALL SERVICE NOTICE by
the person who is in contact with the victim. Now the person
moves on to level 3, which is a fully operational level.
U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 3.
When the victim is instructed to come in, they do not realize
what is in store for
Page 17 ...
them. Now their own personality will be re-written according to
what script the programmers want it to have. The person will be
set to carry out his instructions as needed. The slave will now
be given specific trigger codes to carry out assignments. All
field agents of the intelligence agencies get level 3 control.
GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 4
This level is reserved for candidates who are very intelligent
and very loyal to hypnotic commands. Victims of this level of
mind-control will follow out any command they are given,
whether it be suicidal or harmful. Because these victims of
mind-control are now under total mind-control, just as many
members of the Illuminati grow up under, the intelligence
agencies want to protect their level 4 slaves. They will be given
a new life along with a total new identity. All the credentials
and paperwork that the new identity needs will be created. The
slave has now received a totally new life, and whatever
SCRIPT (agenda) the intelligence agencies want. The
programming that was placed in up to level 3 is erased in a
sense and an entire new life script is placed in. This is done
with the use of drugs, deception, and other sophisticated
mind-control techniques described in Vol. 2 and this book.
Complete areas of memory are erased at this stage and then a
new history is written into the pre-puberty area of memory.
This takes some time, and is accomplished using a number of
techniques our books have described. The old memory is erased
and OVERWRIITEN with the new history and script. The brain
assimilates this new knowledge as if it's always been there,
because it feels comfortable putting something into a void spot.
The programmers prefer to find a period in the original
person’s life when nothing happened. It is easy to erase a
memory block when nothing significant is in original memory,
i.e. it is basically blank anyway. As a sleeper the level 5 slave
may marry and lead a relatively normal life. One clue that the
person is going to be used on a mission is if he suddenly leaves
his wife & goes somewhere. This may be a clue that the
handlers are positioning the person for a mission. They may
also have nullified the slave’s external life, so there isn’t the
purpose of life to prevent a suicide mission.
U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 5
This level is reserved for people with an I.Q. of at least 130.
This level will require taking the slave to a special
programming center, where they are taken down to the
comatose level of subconscious awareness to place the
programming in at the deepest levels of the mind. The victim
may be comatose for days or months, and this requires a
catheter in the neck, urinary and digestive tracts to keep the
body properly functioning. Because the person will be
hospitalized for quite a while, a popular cover story is that they
had an automobile accident. Remember, in Vol. 2, it was
discussed how Roseanne Barr (now an actress with MPD/DID)
had as a teenager an "automobile accident" during which she
received significant programming. Many of these level 5 slaves
are placed as sleepers into organizations of all kinds, where
they lead "normal lives." The level 5 triggers activate programs
deeply embedded and NESTED into the memory of a person. A
team of programmers work on level 5 slaves. They must make
sure that the victim has a support system so that they do not
self-destruct. They may have psychologists in normal life set up
to serve as a support person for the slave. It was interesting to
see that AFTER learning from people in the know about how
memory is erased and a new identity given, that the show "No
Where Man" portrayed this happening to a black man. Whoever
wrote the scripts for No Where Man had an excellent
understanding of what is going on in mind-control.
TESTING YOUNG CHILDREN TO PLAN THE
PROGRAMMING.
In Vol. 2, chap.] it was explained how the programmers can test
the preverbal child
Page 18 ...
to determine & plan how they will program them. EEG’s &
Gittinger’s Tests were discussed. Here is more information.
Researchers have been able to study the personalities of unborn
children and to watch how these personality traits stay with the
children through their lives. In the Vol. 2 book it was explained
how the Illuminati has used EEGs to determine the
personalities of pre-verbal children so that they know what type
of programming is best suited for that personality. Interestingly,
on Mon., April 12, ’96, 11 p.m. after the Vol. 2 book was out
on the market, 20/20 did a show where they showed researchers
using EEG electrodes to monitor childrens’ brainwaves for
their happiness potential. It is known that brain potentials
associated with voluntary movements have been identified,
thereby giving big brother the potential to predict when a
person is going to make a particular movement. The brain is
dynamically looking at patterns and continously generating
hypnotheses about its environment which are then validated or
invalidated by information picked up by the senses. The P300
wave (known as the P3 wave for short) allows neuroscientists
to track decision making in a brain’s cortex. The P300 wave
shows when the mind’s thought processes have been internally
surprised. In this way, detection of the P300 gives a method of
lie-detection superior to the polygraph. When surprised the
brain creates P300 wave by internal brain functions--such as
what chapt. 4 will call "cognitive demon processes". Initially,
EEGs are taken of child victims, with an analysis of the
different wave forms. Next, will come tests of VERs (visually
evoked responses). This is valuable for instance, because bright
children will show asymmetric (high amplitude) responses
during VERs from the right hemisphere. Children with low I.Q.
show the same evoked response from both hemispheres. This is
just one window on the mind that the Illuminati programmers
have of the preverbal children. There are other evoked-potential
tests that are being used to determine personality traits too.
Evoked-responses can also be used to show whether the person
is conscious, or how deep they are in a coma. The early
components of the evoked-response, which occur 10-20
milliseconds after a stimulus, are believed to come from the
brain stem and can be used to determine a level of a coma.
Evoked-responses are also used to determine particular learning
disabilities within a child. Right-handed children will show
even prior to birth, an anatomical specialization that favors
language acquisition in the left hemisphere. So they can even
determine what handed-ness the child has very early on.

Back to Contents Chapter 2

Baron Guy de Rothschild, of France, has been the leading
light of his bloodline. The Baron is an Illuminati Kingpin
and slave programmer. For those who have bought the
cover story that the Catholic Church is not part of the
Illuminati’s NWO, I would point out that the Baron has
worked with the Pope in programming slaves. This photo
was picked for the trauma chapter because the Baron has
a droopy left eye. Many of the deeper Illuminati alters
show droopy left eyes due to the trauma they have
received. The authors are not aware of what the official
explanation for his droopy left eye would be.

Page 19 ...

CHAPTER 2.
SCIENCE NO. 2--
 THE TRAUMATIZATION
& TORTURE
OF THE VICTIM
The basis for the success of the Monarch mind-control programming is that different personalities
or personality parts called alters can be created who do not know each other, but who can take the
body at different times. Let’s review some important points that were mentioned in the Vol.2 book,
‘The amnesia walls that are built by traumas, form a protective shield of secrecy that protects the
abusers from being found out, and prevents the front personalities who hold the body much of the
time to know how their System of alters is being used. The shield of secrecy allows cult members to
live and work around other people and remain totally undetected. The front alters can be wonderful
Christians, and the deeper alters can be the worst type of Satanic monster imaginable--a Dr.
Jekyll/Mr. Hyde effect."
A great deal is at stake in maintaining the secrecy of the intelligence agency or the occult group
which is controlling the slave. The success rate of this type of programming is high but when it
fails, the failures are discarded through death." Each trauma and torture serves a purpose." To create
alters (dissociative parts of the mind) the worse the trauma, the better the amnesia walls, so
programmers have been spending years trying to outdo each other in creating the world’s worst
traumas that humans can survive, so they can program people. Readers may at first wonder why
cover this gruesome part of the programming? There are a number of reasons. People who pretend
to be helpful people--such as some ministers, and some professional therapists--are unwilling to
look at the facts of what have been done to the victims they claim to want to help. How can the
victim ever come out of denial and face the issues around their dissociation--IF the people helping
them who didn’t experience these traumas first hand can’t even face the existence and nature of
these traumas? Many therapists encourage the victim to maintain their amnesia walls, "let the past
be the past". They say, "You can’t change the past." No matter how appealing this advice sounds,
this advice for victims of trauma-based mind-control this is defective, idiotic simple advice. This
type of advice only continues the mind-control and the abuse of the victim. No wonder Christian
ministers who are under their mind-control are used to spout off this type of defective advice. It is
important to cover programming traumas because it validates the memories of recovering victims,
and because there are standard types of trauma that are used for certain types of programming. For
instance, traumas that desensitize a person to killing--i.e. traumas where the victim is forced to kill
innocent people--are used to program assassination alters. The base of the programming is FEAR
layered via trauma. Hopefully, the readers will be inspired and motivated like this author to try to
stop this horrendous mind-control.

DAILY ABUSE WORKS BEST FOR PROGRAMMING

To insure that the programming and abuse stays hidden from even the slave, the slave is given daily
traumas as a child to keep them dissociative. The Illuminati’s programmers get the cooperation of a
vast network of abusers who traumatize the children who are being programmed. One of the
Illuminati’s fronts is the Catholic church, which the Jesuits manage for the Illuminati. Under the
cover of religious retreats and their religious image, many Catholic clergymen have been
participants in the vast trauma network actively creating trauma-based mind controlled slaves. The
problem in exposing this is that first the people who are being traumatized
Page 20 ...
have trust in the clergymen who are doing the traumas. Second, if the victims or parents of the
victims suspect anything, they usually go to church officials rather than the police in order to clear
up the problem, yet protect the church. Additionally, in most cases both the corrupt religious
system, working behind the corrupt police and judicial system manoeuver to protect the abuser and
to further victimize the mind-control victim and anyone coming to the person’s rescue. The
following are but a few examples of a widespread network of secret abuse, that will not be
uncovered because the system to catch abusers has long ago been corrupted and infiltrated and
controlled by mind-controlled slaves, as well as by blackmailed or bribed dirty persons of authority.

· Roger Trott, a Catholic Priest in Delmont, PA convicted of molesting 12 boys, got a suspended
sentence by the judge. Can you believe such unbelievable leniency?
· Father John Engbers (b. 1922, in Holland), catholic pastor at Leroy outside of Lafayette, LA. He
baby-sat for a family, in which he sexually molested their children, their five daughters. He was
treated as a member of this family and the mother, who was of Amer. Indian descent, was very
close ("worshipped"-according to one daughter) to Father John. She spent long hours alone with
him. He would tell his victims that they were his "puppet, like Pinocchio." He molested some of the
girls almost every day, and had them under his control enough that they returned even when they
were living at a distance from him. He had what appeared to be a hypnotic type spell over them.
Father John Engbers molested many children during his years as a Louisiana priest, until he fled in
1985. He had lots of money to spend. The Catholic church had known he was molesting children
clear back in 1952, when some parents complained. The Catholic hierarchy helped him escape back
to Holland in mid-1985, when reports and law suits over how he sexually molested children came
out. The case of Father John Engbers has all the earmarks of a participant in the daily Monarch
mind-control abuse given to children.

· Dennis Dellamalva, a Pennslyvannia Catholic Priest, who molested boys, and the judicial system
protected him from prosecution. The judge, a catholic order the records of this paedophilia priest
sealed, and the catholic church which knew of his deviant behavior continued to give him a position
of authority.

· Michael Peterson, a child molesting priest, who was a drug addict and a homosexual, was one of
the catholic hierarchy’s main men involved with investigations of pedophilia, who died of AIDS,
and his rich sidekick Stephen B.C. Johnson II, who administered a catholic facility near Boston,
Mass. Michael Peterson lived a rich lifestyle in Marsalin, and later Suitland, next to St. Luke and
told people that he was not worried about anyone, because he had the goods on them to force them
to comply. Michael Peterson’s St. Lukes was used by the Catholic church to receive many priests
that were caught doing paedophilia. In the first six years, St. Lukes claimed to have cured 55 child
molesting priests.

· Monsignor William A. Kraft, (b. Rochester, NY), Knight of the Holy Sepulcher, was pastor of St.
Therese during the ‘60’s, and by 1978 the rich pastor of St. Charles Borromeo, San Diego. His
father was a chief executive with Eastman Kodak. Kraft’s sexual molestations of children have all
the earmarks of being a Monarch mind-control abuser. He was protected by the Catholic hierarchy
and the system from prosecution for molestation of children. When children are being tortured and
traumatized by persons who are respected in society, and when these children see the police and
judges protect these people, do you see why this further traumatizes them, and convinces them that
there is no hope? Once they lose hope of outside help, their minds are further propelled to obey the
commands of (continue with the picture below. The text continues under the girl in the left upper
corner. Editor's note)
Page 21
Page 22 ...

· ANGER-MANAGEMENT-PROGRAMMING TRAUMAS
The first type of abuse is prenatal. The second series of abuses occurs from 2 to 4. The third round
of programming abuse, is given to the child around 5 to 6 years of age. One of the specific
programming abuses is teaching the child slave to redirect their anger away from Papa or Daddy the
slave owner. The Papa Bear, Daddy figure in the slave’s young life will intentionally provoke the
child with teasing to aggravate the child into rage. Exactly what is done to provoke rage within the
child will vary, but the result is the same, the child feels rage. The question is then asked, "Are you
angry with daddy?" "Yes!" at that point electroshock is applied to the head, toes, tips of fingers,
nipples & inside the vagina, or penis by electrodes attached to the child. The child will be brought
to the level of rage, and then allowed to cool down for 30 minutes. The child’s alters are then via
behavior modification & hypnosis taught to redirect their anger toward themselves. "WHEN YOU
ARE ANGRY WITH YOUR FATHER, YOU WILL HURT YOURSELF. DO YOU
UNDERSTAND? The message will be played over & over & the question "Do you understand?"
will be played over & over. The child is shocked until they are compliant. The suicide programming
will be layered in. Part of layering in the suicide programming, is to create pain in the right ear via a
needle to the ear, with the creation of horrible disorienting sounds, while pulsing lights drive the
brain into its alpha programming state. At a certain brainwave state the programming begins with
repetitious self-destruct messages. These messages debase the value of the person to reinforce the
suicidal destruct messages. After the child has learned that they are to hurt themselves, then they
will learn specifically to cut themselves if they get angry at Papa or anyone in the Illuminati family
they belong to. After this training, the child will attach subconsciously a fear of pain to the concept
of anger toward its Illuminati controllers.

· SILENCE PROGRAMMING TRAUMAS to TEACH SILENCE

One way to teach silence is to repeatedly kill persons of all ages in front of the person being
programmed while telling the mind-control victim that the people who are being sadistically killed
because they talked. However, the "no-talk" lesson will be repeated and embedded in many
different fashions for Illuminati mind-controlled slaves. Perhaps a favorite Illuminati method is to
expose the victim to watching dental tortures. The viewing can be reinforced by subjecting the
victim to some dental tortures themselves. A common dental torture would be to extract the tongue
of a live and conscious victim. Then dental tortures are done to the victim, and the intense jaw pain
of the torture is linked to tripping the no-talk programming. If the person talks--their jaw hurts and
they may pull up the dissociated feelings of seeing a person lose their tongue. This then will be
further backed up by training an alter to carry out Russian Roulette if the system talks, and training
numerous other alters other types of suicide if the system talks. In other words many back up
programs mutually support each other in overkill. Considering that dental torture is used for no-talk
programming, it was with dismay that this author discovered that Virtual I-O Co. is now making
virtual reality eye glasses for dental work. Seashells and other images are linked to the concept of
"no-talk" via programming laid in using methods described elsewhere.
Another "no-talk" program is the "Don’t tel me" telephone no talk programming.

· TORTURE FOR NO-WRITE

The victim has their right hand bound behind their back and then is made to walk on their knees like
a dog.

· PAY ATTENTION TORTURE

There are a host of these, one example is a needle inserted up the nostril behind the
Page 23 ...
eyeball.

· A COMPLIANCE TORTURE -- The Black Slave Chair.

The Black Slave was invented by a Syrian doctor who helped supervise torture, hence its arabic
name al-Abd as-Aswad. The victim is strapped to this metal chair. What is unique about this chair is
its design & its hole so that a hot skewer can be shoved up the anus. Another device for
programming is a harness used as a suspension device. Yet another is an electrofied water bed for
turning one in an electric eel." Compliance is also taught by taking an eyeball out of the victim
(later replaced), and by dislocating an arm at the shoulder. After this the victim can be wrapped as if
in a cacoon within bandages. The supposed treatment for the dislocation, places the victim in
sensory deprivation, another trauma.

A TRAUMA TO DEVELOP ANIMAL ALTERS

Helpless humans will be displayed to child victim of mind-control. These helpless humans will be
visciously killed by some animal, a lion, a tiger, a snake, a wild dog or whatever. The programming
lie emphasized at this point is that it is better to be that particular type of animal than it is to be
human. Then the animal is sacrificed and its spirit is ritually joined to the child’s alters. Other
programming is added to insure the dehuminization process to make certain child alters into
particular animals. When finished, the child will contain viscious protector animal alters within
their system. The prior example of a programming trauma actually pertains to structuring. The
mind-control science of structuring MPD (DID) is discussed in chapter 7. It may be of significance
to stress to the reader that traumas come in many shapes. The traumas are not done without some
thought. Specific traumas are given for specific desired outcomes. The power and horror of a
trauma is hard to gauage. It often results in a type of subconscious adrenlin-rush addiction. The
traumas involving sensory deprivation and betrayals of trust can be just as devastating as painful
tortures. Sad to say, sometimes for programming purposes all three types may be skillfully
combined into one horrendous experience that overwhelms the mind.

TRAUMA TO ISOLATE THE VICTIM

A birthday party will be given for the victim. The birthday cake will contain a bean somewhere. It
is announced that whoever gets the bean will get a surprise. When someone gets the bean, the
mind-control victim finds out that the surprise is that they must take the life of the child who has
found the bean. This programming trauma is part of a series of traumas designed to make deeper
alters afraid of accepting any gifts from outsiders. The deeper alters are programmed that gifts
always come with a sacrifice. Gifts always cost something. Nothing comes free. "SEVER ALL
TIES, HAVE NO FRIENDS" are the programming messages. In reality, what Satan is doing with
this trauma on a spiritual level is what the British Empire did with small countries. The British
would warn small countries, "you are in danger, we will protect you. (The Spirit of Fear says, gifts
are dangerous, let me the Spirit of Fear protect you.) When the British moved into small countries
like this, they called them protectorates, & then they took over. (The Spirit of Fear, pretending to
protect the victim, takes over and the victim develops a deep-seated free-floating phobias towards
gifts from anyone. What pretends to protect, actually ends up controlling & enslaving.) As the
reader treks through this book, he or she will encounter places where other traumas are discussed,
such as tortures via implants, & traumas via rides in amusement parks, & spinning traumas during
the structuring for creating alter families from an alter. Finally, the waves of fear created by
repeated traumas layer in Spirits of Fear, which form a dark spiritual foundation.
Page 24

Back to Contents Chapter 3

Page 25 ...

CHAPTER 3.
SCIENCE NO. 3
The USE OF DRUGS
IN REVIEW
The science of Pharmacology (drugs) has given the Programmers a
vast array of mind-altering and body-altering drugs. Some of the drugs
are not used to directly alter the mind, but to change the body (make
the skin burn), or make the person vomit, or some other reaction that
can be harnessed to further their nefarious programming goals.

DRUG RESEARCH
One of the sites which has done research/programming into MPD and
drug action on the brain has been Bethesda, MD where Dr. Irwin J.
Kopin was Chief of the Laboratory of Clinical Science, at the National
Institute of Mental Health. He was active in research into how drugs
can affect the mind.

CLASSIFYING MIND-DRUGS
When this author studied differential equations, and higher
mathematical it became clear that everything can be reduced to a
mathematical explanation. Sometimes a mathematical notation is
easier and clearer, than other explanations. This author suggests that
drugs that affect the mind could be classified on three scales:
Scale X: the wakefulness or arousal scale, which runs from a coma, to
asleep, to alert, to hyperalert
Scale Y: the attitude, or affect scale, that is one's manner of feelings,
responses etc., running on a scale from suicidal and depressed to
euphoric, blissful and elated.
Scale Z: the integration of reality scale, which runs from confusion,
delusions, and psychotic thoughts to integrated, clear, lucid thinking.
Many (if not all) of the drugs that were listed in Vol. 2 and this
chapter can be plotted along one of these scales, and sometimes 2 or 3
of these scales, which means an x,y, z axis configuration can be used
to compare such drugs. In terms of naturally occurring brain
substances which are manufactured synthetically and injected
according to the programmers’ needs, it could be stated that the
original purpose of the substance can be malevolently tampered with.
ADMINISTRATION OF DRUGS FOR PROGRAMMING
The distribution into the brain of a drug is dependent upon many
factors. Under microscopic-level inspection, one discovers a person’s
brain is physically constructed to allow certain molecules to enter into
the brain in certain complex ways. Just because a substance is put into
the blood doesn’t mean it gets into brain tissue. Researchers have
discovered such drug properties such as lipid solubility, the ionization,
its tissue-protein bonding abilities, and its molecular size all play a
role in how well drugs get into the brain. Further, the Cerebrospinal
Fluid (CSF) which will be discussed indepth in Chapter 8 can play a
role in drug absorption. Several studies during the 1960’s showed that
the removal of drugs or substances from the CSF, can reduce the
effective concentration of a drug in the extracellular spaces which
make up perhaps 12% of the brain’s volume. These physical factors
are not the only factors involved.
Page 26 ...
Researchers have repeatedly discovered that different people respond
to mind-changing drugs in many different ways--including two
different people having opposite responses to the same drug. There
have been a number of studies about this phenomena, including:
(SarwerFoner, 1957), (Henninger, et. al., 1965), (Rickels & Downing,
1966), (McNair et al., 1966). Over the years, it has been discovered
that a person’s mental abilities, expectations, prior drug experience,
age, sex, race, personality traits, and personality types can all
potentially influence how a mind-altering drug will effect a person.
For instance, a sedative drug administered to an extroverted confident
athlete caused the athlete to feel anxiety and disorientation. In
contrast, an introverted nervous intellectual felt calmness when the
same drug was administered. Particle size of the drug and the rate of
dissolution will help determine the rate at which a drug is absorbed
(and eliminated) into the body. For instance, when colloidal silver has
been produced by a process that yields small particles, it will cleanse
the body, while larger particles of colloidal silver will kill a person.
Different companies and different preparations of the same drug may
have different outcomes upon the body. The persistence of a drug in
the body is calculated by programmers using half-lives of a drug. This
means that at one half-life, one half of a drug is left in the body. At
two half lives, one-half of one-half is left or (1/4). At three half-lives
there will be 1/8 left of original drug. In other words, the rate of
elimination decreases with time. When heroin is processed into
morphine, its characteristics change. The heroin takes affect quicker,
but doesn’t last as long as morphine. This is because of enzyme
mechanisms in the liver and how they react to the morphine in
contrast to the heroin. Different drugs react differently with the
complex enzyme mechanisms of the liver. Phenobarbital amazingly
increases the enzyme content of the endoplasmic reticulum with
habitual use of the drug. Phenobarbital will then enhance a particular
type of toxicity. Low doses do not hurt the body, but there is a
threshold where damage from phenobarbital will begin occurring to
the liver and kidneys. This is a sampling of why it is important that the
Illuminati use extremely skilled medical personnel in the application
of programming drugs. The programmers are far more skilled than
most legitimate therapists in understanding how much of what drug to
give to which alter personality. The mental makeup of an alter will
influence how that alter will respond to drugs. Some deeper alters can
resist drug influence due to training. Some deeper alters are so
fine-tuned that they only need small doses. With their superior
knowledge of how a System of Multiple Personalities has been created
within a victim’s mind, the programmers have a distinct edge over
deprogrammers in how to administer drugs. On top of that the
programmers, place in all types of programming to prevent anyone but
the programmers (or approved people) from administering drugs. An
example of how strong the mind can be over drugs--is when the
programmers "SET THE STAGE", "PRESENT THE SCRIPT’ and
then use Seconal to obtain deeply embedded programming commands.
Setting the stage is a programming term for talking to the victim in
such a way that the mind is receptive for what the programmer wants
the victim’s mind to do. Presenting the script is the actual set of
commands that the programmer gives to the victim. For instance, the
programmer functioning as a hypnotist tells the victim that a powerful
sedative will be given but that part of the mind will be strong enough
to overcome the sedative effect of seconal. The victim is instructed
"WHEN YOU HEAR THE WORD [trigger power code word, for
instance: ZEBRA COME FORTH]...YOU WILL RESPOND TO
WHAT I AM SAYING." The seconal is given and the person is
placed in an isolation
Page 27 ...
chamber. A good programmer skilled in hypnotism can actually get a
victim’s mind to respond under the influence of seconal in an isolation
chamber. Then the programmer will lay in deeply embedded
commands while the person is in a sleep deeper than a twilight sleep.
When the human body receives several different kinds of drugs,
sometimes drugs compete with each other during the
excretion/elimination phase. This may create a buildup or a retention
of one of the drugs. As discussed in Vol. 2, the programmers don’t
like to use combinations of several drugs because it complicates
things. There is still a great deal of unknowns concerning adverse drug
reactions. Some people do not show an allergic response to a drug
until it is administered several times. Because of the potential for
allergic reactions or side effects, the Programmers are helped because
the programming centers, according to ex-programmers are extremely
well stocked with different drugs, & the Programmer can if need be
shift to an alternative programming drug. Most slaves are programmed
to stay away from the use of drugs, except those drugs that the
programmer/handler approves. By reducing the use of drugs of all
kinds, the problem of adverse drug reactions, and other complications
is reduced for the programmers. Some people who are health freaks
who stay away from drugs are actually carrying out a front program
for their programmers.

MORE PROGRAMMING DRUGS (these were not listed in the

Vol.2 Formula book)

Acetophenzine aka Tindal--(this anti-psychotic has been used on

multiples, it mutes anxiety, suspiciousness and delusions. it would fall
more into the control category of uses rather than for actual
programming.)
Amines--(this is a general term for many types of the brain’s own
chemicals used to produce moods, and feelings)
Damiana--(aka Mex. Witching Herb, the extract is used w/ other herbs
during progamming for a relaxed pleasure state.) »An example is
Damiana-Biack Kava Kava-Valerian-Skullcap-Wild Lettuce Opium,
which makes a "it’s-nothing-but-a-dream" state.
Chloral hydrate--(which is a hypnotic put in pill form such as chioral
betaine, Beta-Chlor, and given with something like a glass of milk.
About 500 mg. of Chloral hydrate are given for a hypnotic for an
adult.)
Cyciohexamide--(produces retroactive amnesia)
Cylert--a type of speed
Datura aka Jimsonweed, or thorn apple--(sometlmes used to help a
child conjure up their personal spirit.)
Iminodibenzyis-- (used for sedation)
Lettuce Opium--(tradition Hopi shaman trance drug)
Mandrake--(from the Mandragora plant, an ancient occult drug, a
traditionai witchcraft drug for causing people to sleep)
Methaqualone--(a rapid hypnotic drug that produces a dissociative
high, it can be used to put someone into a coma)
Pemoline-magnesium hydroxide (aka PMH, helps enhance
conditioned avoidance training by acting as a stimulant, is helpful for
repetitive learning situations by a general alerting effect on the mind)
Phenothiazines--(used to raise the threshold of electrical stimulation
tolerance, to tranquilize or induce sleep)
Rowan--traditional sleeping/death herb of witches; May Day is also
called Rowan Tree Witch Day.
Seconal, aka Seconal Sodium or Secobarbital Sodium--(a popular
programming drug to stabilize programming, to set in deep
programming into the base of the mind such as dates and codes, and to
block out memory of missions by slaves, see various paragraphs
below for more explanations. Used in 10, 20, 30, 50, 100 mg.
increments. A tubal pregnancy/birth can be hid in a woman by
300-400 mg., while surgery on an adult man may require 500 mg.)
Tetradoxyn (made from the Puffer Blowfish, used by Voudoun, &
others to create a zombie state)

In our discussion of drugs used in programming, this chapter will

expand upon the previous book by discussing the application of drugs
to:
a. to stabilize the programming after torture b. hiding the codes
c. building in deeply embedded structures and beliefs, and the creation
of false identities
b. to influence the memory by drugs c. to stimulate instinctual
behaviors
d. to create moods and attitudes by synthetically manufacturing and
injecting the brain’s own natural amines.

STABILIZING THE PROGRAMMING

The total mind-control of the Illuminati is called "trauma-based
mind-control" because repeated traumas are inflicted upon the victim
is a very systematic calculated inhumane way. The tortures and stress
are all parts of a programming package. After a particular harsh
session of programming the victim’s mind will be in a high state of
terror, shock, dissociativeness and splintering. The victim’s
Page 28 ...
mind can’t take much more, and the potential of having uncontrolled
splintering of the victim’s mind and thereby having the destruction of
the mind and programming threatens the programmers’ control. The
programmer wants the mind and body to rest so that the programming
can set in, without destabilizing events occurring. For instance, after
severe water torture (drowning) the programmer will want the
programming (hypnotic script) to set in, and he will give seconal (aka
seconal sodium or secobarbital sodium) to induce a deep sleep. Sleep
occurs within 10 to 15 minutes. Sometimes a victim's heart has been
pushed to its limits during a trauma and they must shut the body down
to let the victim rest. Seconal is a drug of choice for this. Seconal is
administered in hospitals or programming sites where trained
personnel know how to give the drug. Dirty psychiatrists, who
understand the relationship between drugs and human behavior and
who are either programmers themselves or assistants to programmers
often are the ones who give the victims drugs like seconal.

EXTENSIVE RESEARCH DONE TO INFLUENCE HUMAN

MEMORY BY DRUGS
The complete list of researchers who have studied the effect drugs
have on memory would require a massive book. However, we will just
mention a few that pertain to this book briefly. One of the places the
effect of drugs on memory was researched was at the Univ. of
California at Irvine, CA. Another was at institutions in the Boston,
Mass. area such as the Massachusetts General Hosp., in Boston. Dr.
Talland in Boston tested the effects of PMH on human memory. He
discovered PMH could help people relearn material that had been
partially forgotten. The Illuminati programmer Cameron (aka Dr.
White) also tried out various approaches including the administration
of RNA and RNA- synthesis stimulants. John C. Lilly, who admits
being a member of an Esoteric Mystery School, was a government
researcher on the use of LSD to program people. He did part of his
work on LSD programming at the Maryland Psychiatric Research
Center under admitted government financing. His book Programming
and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer (NY: Julian Press, 1967,
& revised format 1972) is an excellent paper trail of how the
Illuminati has used LSD to program total mind-controlled slaves.
Originally, the book was given out only to a few select people. The
book attempts to hide what it talks about behind a long intro, long
sentences, big words and arcane psychological terms, but it does spell
out how they do the mind-control programming with LSD. A section
later in this chapter will lay out for the reader how they do this.

ONE TYPE OF EXPERIENCE OF VICTIM HYPNOTIC DRUG

A MIND-CONTROL
The drugged victim feels like he is looking through a keyhole and the
hypnotic voice of the programmer is the key hole. The world may be
very shadowy and drawn in on itself. The mind has its attention on the
hypnotist/programmer.

The BASIC PHASES of MEMORY

The human memory process can be basically broken down into 3
phases, the registration phase, the retention phase and the retrieval
phase. Great amount of research has gone into how to use drugs to
manipulate each of those phases. Great amount of research also went
into how to measure people’s abilities to a. learn, b. remember, c. and
to do non-learned behavior such as arm-hand steadiness and visual
time reaction.

WHAT the MIND-CONTROL PROGRAMMERS USE to

MANIPULATE memory.
Scopolamine was found to impair short-term memory. It was
discovered that retrograde
Page 29 ...
amnesia could be created by electroshock several hours after the brain
had learned something. This lesson caused the Illuminati and those
working in mind control with them to use cattle prods and stun guns.
If a person performed something they were to forget they can be
stunned or given scopolamine to deaden their memory. A quick
anesthetic applied immediately after something has been done might
also impair the retention of what had happened. Yet another way is
seconal, which will be discussed soon. Low doses of analeptic drugs
given about 10 to 20 min. before training were found to help learning.
Analeptic drugs include bemegride, diazadamantanol,
pentylenete-trazol, picotoxin, and strychnine. It was discovered that
strychnine helps enhance classical conditioning. It can be administered
either before or after the learning has taken place. It is believed that
memory storage is enhanced by strychnine and strychnine sulfate.
Strychnine was also found to help protect the mind’s memory against
the effect of electroshock. Abusers out on the street have been turning
to GHB and Rohypnol to decrease inhibitions and to cause memory
loss in their victims. Rohypnol (which sells for up to $10 a tablet) is
dependable but more expensive than the GHB. A number of women
who have been raped by adding these drugs to their alcoholic drinks at
the Club Boca, Palm Beach, FL made the paper after they were
drugged and raped after partying at the club. (The Palm Beach Post, Mar.,
1996 pp. 1B, 10B.) GHB (Gamma Hydroxy Butyrate) is a compound
essential to the body. It acts similar to a neurotransmitter. It helps
release the Human Growth Hormone and removes inhibitions around
intimacy, as well as some other beneficial effects. GHB crosses the
blood-brain barrier and metabolizes into GABA. GHB’s high degree
of safety was proved over 25 years of research, and was basically an
established fact before the FDA and the media demonized GHB.
Several sources seem to indicate that the FDA banned GHB --not
because it has dangerous side effects, which it doesn’t have inspite of
the established media’s disinformation campaign with half truths--but
because it is not patented by the drug companies and would cut into
their profits.
GHB also has a great aphrodisia effect. It reduces inhibitions to have
sex, but because the woman clitoris is more sensitive it interferes with
female orgasms. However, when the women do achieve it, it is longer
and more intense, according to GHB researchers. (This author got
much information on GHB from the Centurion Aging Research Lab.)
GHB is described here because it is a drug that is known by the type
of people who use sexual slaves and other people, and its use and
misuse pertain to mind control. Like so many things involved with
mind-control, GHB and many other items could be put to positive uses
if used in the proper way. Sometimes the programmers use drugs
rather than ECS (Electroconvulsive shock) to destroy the memory in
slaves after they have done some mission for the Illuminati, the
Syndicates, or Cult they belong to. The decision to use drugs rather
than ECS is largely personal tastes. The very sadistic programmers
enjoy using ECS, while the less sadistic ones often use the drugs,
which in some instances actually perform better, but are not as violent
to the victim of mind control. Retroactive amnesia can be caused by
an intracerebral or a subcutaneous (under the skin) shot of
Acetoxycycloheximide, cyclohexamide, or puromyxcin. A more
sophisticated technique incorporates the drug seconal (aka Seconal
sodium), the victim’s dissociativeness (the MPD), and hypnosis.
Seconal is a strong sedative that puts people into sleep. The
programmers have considered it "wonderful". The victim’s mind is
conditioned hypnotically to be able to remember the drugged-seconal
state. Then the hypnotic command is given that if anything about a
particular mission is remembered, the
Page 30 ...
person will immediately trigger (pull-up to the front of the mind) the
seconal memory. This is why many therapists discover their clients
getting sleepy when they get close to certain thoughts, or when they
try to do therapeutic work.

HIDING THE CODES

Chapter 4 provides some of the programming codes, some of which
are standard and some of which are unique to a particular slave.
Seconal was the standard drug used during the 1950’s and 1960’s to
hide the programming codes in the mind’s memory. The procedure is
to give a small child under 50 lbs. perhaps 10 mg. of seconal. The
programmer has already "SET THE STAGE" and presented the script.
After the child goes into its deep sleep, the programmer pulls the
child’s mind awake hypnotically (actually to be technically correct,
the programmer pulls up those alters/parts of the mind that the
programmer wants to work with). The child may awake on an satanic
altar or other programming setting. The child is then programmed.
After the programming, which may include satanic rituals, the child
slave is given 20 mg. more of seconal and allowed to go into a sleep
again. A cover program (a cover story--that is a false code will be
planted hypnotically in front of the real code. "IF YOU SHOULD
REMEMBER THIS..." If a slave starts to remember any code, in spite
of the hypnotic commands not to, and all the threats and alters trained
to protect the codes, etc. then the programming to sleep kicks in. Also
remember that the codes are placed in when the victim is groggy, so to
pull up the memory will cause the slave to abreact the drugged-state.
Not all the alters are drugged. In setting the stage, the programmer
orders some alters to back off from feeling or associating the
experience. They are hypnotically commanded not to experience the
drug’s effects, or to only experience it in a partial manner. This can be
done with small amounts of seconal. Larger amounts of seconal will
override the mind’s ability to block the drug’s effects. The
programming experience where the codes are put in, will likely be
remembered by the slave as something similar to the following, a
sleepy blurry picture of a nurse, then a doctor and a table, and then an
IV, then the memory fades, and the slave gets sleepy thinking about it.
It should be pointed out that the mind has strong natural abilities to
dissociate painful memories. Not only must the victim try to retrieve
memories by fighting the mind’s natural dissociative abilities, the
victim must fight the hypnotic suggestions, the irrationality of
conflicting ideas due to the false cover memories laid in, the DRUG
memories attached to induce sleep if the victim remembers, the
memory shattering from the shock of the stun guns, and the fear of
countless other threats internal and external if the memory is
recovered. It is no surprise that most victims of this horrendously
abusive mind-control have front alters who are totally unaware of the
mind-control and abuse.

PROGRAMMING WITH LSD-25 (Lysergic Acid Diethylamide)

The Programmers use controlled and manipulated LSD trips for
mind-control purposes when layering in the programming for the
Illuminati slaves. The victim’s mind is trained and mentally prepared
before actually being subjected to the drug. The programmers
understand how the mind unleashes its fears, including its fear of LSD
itself, while under the drug, so that small doses are given at first and
then increased. This is so the victim of mind-control can learn to face
and manage the effects of the drug.
When the Illuminati want to set the foundations for a system, they will
use LSD in a sensory deprivation tank on a child to program in such
things as: the hell-pit (a dungeon in a castle), the images of evil
guardians, worlds & stars & galaxies which contain alters, the outer
space in a system, and the protective program where the mind
Page 31 ...
spreads out like molecules and loses the ability to think. The sensory
deprivation tank will be set at 920 to 950 F. isothermal skin, saltwater
suspension, zero light, near zero-sound levels. The victim will be
naked without contact with the side of the tank and in remote isolation
for several hours. Electrodes can be hooked up to shock the victim if
they move to prevent the victim from wanting to move. Victims
usually are conditioned to like the sensory deprivation tank before
they are programmed inside it with LSD. After having listened to two
ex-programmers describe LSD sensory deprivation programming, this
author was amazed to discover that the LSD programmer John Lilly
had actually written a book about how to do the programming! (John
Lilly was also into witchcraft & aliens.) The government wasn’t quite
as thrilled with his book as I was, they withdrew research funds from
him in 1968 when only a few copies of his book came out. And now
finally almost twenty years later, the human LSD programming that
John Lilly described is finally being put into its larger context--that of
trauma-based total mind-control. On page 126-127, Lilly explains that
implanted programs in the child can be placed in below the level of
the mind’s awareness, but which will affect their entire outlook on
life, and which will control their thinking and behavior far into
adulthood. The programs can even be done to control the most basic
functions of life. Lilly says that the programming possible with the use
of LSD is "...not achievable outside the use of LSD-25. This amount of
control can be said to resemble other ways of achieving control and
visual projection but in actual intensity I know of no other way to
achieve it. Hypnosis is a possible exception." (Programming and
Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer, p. 20) On page 19, Lilly
states that LSD can be used to change an experience to have a
negative or a positive charge on it. Sometimes people who work with
the mind refer to negative experiences as "negative charges on an
experience", and good experiences as "experiences with a positive
charge". Apparently, according to Lilly, the brain can switch chemical
charges on an experience and shift its attitude from viewing as either
positive or negative. In fact, this very thing is done during Illuminati
programming. For instance, it may be done if a memory surfaces that
the programmer doesn’t want the alter being programmed to
understand. This last paragraph is interesting when one realizes that
under LSD the subconscious mind is allowed to release its thinking
into the conscious. If a person has been traumatized, the subconscious
mind under LSD will release the trauma memories and flood the
person with horrible thoughts. So before one can get to the
transcendental wonderful creative thoughts, a person has to deal with
this garbage. The sub-conscious erupts like molten magma. Before the
child is given the LSD, the child is going to have to be mentally
prepped. Just as Seconal could only be used after the hypnotist
programmer had SET THE STAGE, so also with the LSD. The LSD
programmer if he is experienced will have an idea how the victim will
react to the drug. Each person reacts in his or her own way, but there
are patterns of reaction. The programmer will hypnotically warn the
victim, YOU’RE NOT TO FEAR such and such thought. They may
tell the victim that it is just their imagination, when it is repressed
memories of trauma surfacing. The programmer will let one alter carry
the true feelings (such as fear) of the surfacing traumas, and another to
carry the story line being programmed in with LSD. The programmer
may have to calm the victim down while they are in the tank. The
Illuminati use hypnosis in conjunction with the LSD programming
trips. They also use some other mind-control items too. Further, LSD
is not the only programming hallucinogenic that they have used for
some of
Page 32 ...
this type of programming, they have tried Peyote, but LSD seems to
be the drug of choice. On page 20, Lilly describes the use of mirrors
along with LSD to create visually projected images. The Illuminati
programmer will play a movie, a script over and over so that it is
constantly in the forefront of the victim’s mind. Then the stage is set
and the script (such as TAKE WHAT YOU SEE INTO THE
MIRROR) is hypnotically given. The victim goes under LSD and in
about 15 minutes reaches their LSD high. Most people can be talked
to by the programmer during the programming, and the programmer
can get some feedback from what is happening in the victim’s mind.
The victim will be placed in front of a mirror. Then the victim will
project the image that was repeatedly shown him or her (say for
instance, Alice In Wonderland, or Tinkerbell, or Mickey Mouse) onto
their own image in the mirror. A special state of consciousness is
induced where the person’s perception is altered and they see the
projected image as their own reflection. While watching the projected
image on the mirror, the mind under LD will also project its own
feelings and facial features into the mirror. If the victim is angry,
happy, in pain, admiring themselves, etc. then projected image (for
instance, Mickey Mouse) will also been seen this way. Using this type
of programming, the programmers can create twinning parts. That is if
two people are to be twinned, parts that see themselves as the other
person are created using the LSD mirror programming. Ceremonies
and demons will also be added to strengthen the twinning, and this
may be done to a 13 year old teenager within the Illuminati. These
projections can be maintained and worked with for about 30-40 min.
during the drug’s high. After this length of time fatigue sets in and the
person must rest before being brought to another high. A clean slate
alter can be prepared by the script and then will actually believe that it
saw itself as the projected image. By the time, the session is through
the clean slate alter believes it is Alice in Wonderland or whatever
character the programmer(s) wants it to be. During the trauma of an
LSD programming trip, the mind may see flickering images, melting,
mosaics and other things. These distortions can form a cover memory
if the programmers wants them too. During the sensory deprivation
tank experience under LSD, the victim can be asked to open their
eyes, or close them. If asked to form a mental screen, the victim under
LSD will see a blank screen differently if their eyes are open as
compared to closed. If the victim is allowed to look while in a dark
tank out into the darkness under LSD, they will visualize themselves
as merging with the infinite universe and not even having a body. This
memory is used to build in the outer space of a system. On page 32,
Lilly describes the type of programming used to create an Infinity, a
Rubicon, or Outer Space within a system. He says, "The self is still
centered at one place but its boundaries have disappeared and it moves
out in all directions and extends to fill the limits of the universe as far
as one knows them. A person taking LSD may experience, whether
being programmed or not, that they are in touch with all the stars of
the universe.
LSD distortions in reality can also be used to protect the
programming. If the mind gets too close to remembering something,
then the mind triggers automatically a memory of its molecules
expanding into the universe and losing their ability to think. This is
simply a controlled LSD memory. When external stimuli is ceased,
the brain takes over the spaces that were formerly occupied in the
thinking process by external reality, and replaces it with feelings and
thoughts from the internal mind. Lilly states on pg. 24 that when
programming people under LSD, "The blank
Page 33 ...
screen is the most difficult one to work with but is the least ‘driving’
of the group. The blank screen interferes least with one’s creative
efforts;..." In other words, if the victim is closed off to external
stimuli, the mind can focus all its energy into free associative
creativity. Once the victim is in isolation, religious music can cause
the brain to free associate religious visions, cartoon voices can cause
the brain to free associate the cartoon figures, etc. The
Illuminati/Intelligence agencies must wait 3 to 6 months between LSD
programming sessions. If they do it more often, they run the risk of
hooking the person’s mind on the drug state. Then the person will lose
interest in reality, and simply try to escape reality into the LSD world
as a drug addict. From recollections from ex-programmers and
victims, its clear that as the child victim is traumatized during the [SD
sensory deprivation (including being shocked) experiences it goes
through a sequence or chronology of changes which are noted in detail
by the programmers. Certain splits occur at certain points in time
which will be used for special tasks. For instance, at a particular
extreme moment the victim may go into a "nothingness state" which is
between life and death, where the mind quits perceiving that it has a
body. This is not an out-of-body experience, it is a nothingness
experience due to an extreme near-death experience. This clean slate
can be used for the Cabalistic programming of the Ain Soph Aur. The
Ain Soph Aur is the cosmic egg from which the universe supposedly
began, ain = vacuum, soph limitless, and aur = limitless light. For
Satanists they interpret this to the light at the top of the pyramid,
Lucifer. Alters created in such a fashion may be placed in a succession
of realms. If true Caballism is followed this will consist of 4 realms
(worlds) of 10 clean slates. These four worlds are Atziluth =
boundless world of divine names, Briah the Archangelic World of
Creations Yetzirah = the Hierarchal World of Formations Assiah = the
Elemental World of Substances
The child victim in the sensory deprivation tank is not allowed to
move without being shocked. Gradually the will of the victim is
broken by the total control the programmer maintains over the child in
the tank. But the will of the child continues to be broken until the will
of the child to live is broken. At this point, when the mind has given
up the will to live, the programmer (or assistant programmer) will tell
the child in the tank, "If you create such and such types of persons and
such and such no. of them (perhaps 10 or 20 are asked for) then you
can come out and we’ll stop hurting you. Give me a signal that you’ve
done your job and I’ll stop hurting you when the job is done. Move a
finger or blink your eyes three times if you’ve done your job."
Blinking three times generally feels the safest for the child, and is
generally the limit of what the mind and body can muster to save
themselves. The alters, which are made when the mind & body have
lost the will to live, are the dissociated parts that will be made into
suicide alters. Their breathing is very shallow, they are in pain in the
tank. When these parts take the body, they still function in that state.
Years later, if the adult body has these suicide alters take the body,
there is a good chance they will commit suicide, if not simply die from
the shallow breathing. Lilly states on page 31, "One experiences
[under LSD programming] an immediate internal reality which is
postulated by the self. It is apparent to me that one’s own assumptions
about this experience generates the whole experience. The
experienced affects, the apparent appearance of other persons, the
appearance of other beings not human, one’s own past phantasies,
one’s own self-analysis, each can be programmed to happen in
interaction with those parts of one’s self beyond one’s conscious
awareness."
While the victim is in the sensory
Page 34 ...
deprivation tank, the programmer can ask the victim to create guard
alters within the castle images they create. These are equivalent to the
imagery that is done in witchcraft. These image alters are not the same
as a trauma-created dissociative alter. The following are the type of
beliefs that can be programmed into a person in the sensory
deprivation tank under LSD no matter what their prior beliefs (this is
substantiated by Lilly, pages 4 1-49 and ex-programmers).
a. The person could successfully park the body and leave the body
somewhere, astral project and explore new universes. The victim can
be brought during an LSD trip to this thinking and experience the
astral projection from around 20 mm. to 2 hours.
b. The victim can be made to feel as if they are a tiny mote, a tiny dot,
a single microflash of energy in their own view of time, a mere
particle. Time can become infinity and the victim a mere microflash.
The victim during this experience seeks a god who is a great being to
control him. This is used in the Illuminati alien programming to
program in the evil and good aliens, or evil or good gods. The gods or
the aliens on such a programming trip will not be so strange that the
victim as a mote can’t understand their purposes and activities. In
other words, the aliens on programming trips like this turn out
humanoid. The victim experiences being nurtured by these beings or
the god(s) that he sees. The victim may perceive these aliens on the
trip experimenting with us. One UFO researcher and author about the
aliens has used his LSD trips to research aliens. Sad to report, this
researcher is a programmed multiple. It is easy to see how the mind
could think that it was learning about aliens, because this is a common
easy-to-create LSD programming script. Again in summary, this
second set of beliefs is that the person is a mere mote, a small flash in
infinite time. When an alter of a slave thinks or goes internally where
it shouldn’t, this programming is attached to the mind so that the
victim loses sight of who they are and feels very insignificant and only
a dot.
c. The next program that LSD naturally lends itself to, is that the
victim is only part of a vast computer, only part of a vast mind. For
some reason, the LSD is able to hit a part of the mind that regulates
the perception of free-will. In this type of programming, the victim
under LSD is convinced that he or she has no free will and must
participate each second with some larger mind or computer.
d. Personalities that have been seen externally by the victim will be
incorporated within the person’s internal world.
e. LSD changes the victim’s perception of time, and can be used to go
back or forward in time in the mind. Under guidance, the programmer
can manipulate this ability to build into the mind false memories and
images.
f. If "white noise", that is random background noise is placed into an
isolation tank trauma, the programmers have found that under LSD the
brain tries to make sense of the random sounds and projects the voice
of God into the random noise as a method to turn chaos into
something comprehendible. With the right dose, and under the right
conditions, the programmers can get the voice of "God" to say about
anything they want. Because the sense of hearing in the sensory
deprivation tank is not feeding the mind anything, the human brain
under LSD can easily substitute in the voice of God.
g. For girls, who have been determined to have personalities with low
sexual appetites, the sexual desires of certain alter personalities can be
manipulated during an LSD trip by having these alters hold the body
and the body go through exaggerated pelvic movements and other
experiences. This is an example of the type of training that Gittinger
(see Vol. 2) discovered was necessary in order to change thinking
patterns within a person--in this case with the MPD (DID), some alters
can be radically changed from the original personality.
Page 35 ...
The overall effect of such LSD programming on anyone, whether
child or adult, is that the mind at a deep level begins to doubt its
ability to grasp the real from the imaginary. Therapists sometimes
wonder why alters are not more anxious to determine reality. Part of
this may be the side-effect at a profound level of the brain beginning
to doubt its abilities to separate reality from fiction. If the LSD trips
were not controlled by the programmers, insanity could result for the
victim. Further, the LSD trips pose a danger that they could clutter the
internal world of the victim and splinter their mind uncontrollably.
This is why the trips must be carefully guided, controlled and
monitored.

CHEMICALLY TRIGGERING NATURAL INSTINCTUAL

DRIVES
The brain when a child is born is like a computer which is ready to go,
and just needs the software loaded on. In other words, the brain is
already a functioning complicated programmed piece of hardware, it
is not a blank sheet. The mind is preprogrammed to carry out
important instinctual functions, such as drinking water, eating food
and sleeping. Likewise, the adult mother instinctively has maternal
instincts. Selectively applied chemical or electrical stimulations to the
brain will elicit the instinctual behaviors that are pre-programmed into
the brain. A microinjection of a soluble sex steroid into the
anteromedial hypothalamus would likely trigger the maternal instinct
in a person. The various instinctual behaviors that are triggered by
microchemical injections or small select electrical shocks will last for
up to an hour. (A.E. Fisher was one of the principal researchers in this
line of research during the 50’s and 60’s.) For instance, A.E. Fisher
and E. Vaughan, discovered that the male instinct for sex could be
stimulated by a small shock to a specific part of the brain. (See "Male
sexual behavior induced by intracranial electrical stimulation",
Science magazine, 1962, 137, pp. 758-760.) Steroids are one of the
chemicals that are used as well as selective minute electrical shocks to
trigger instinctual behaviors. Reliable responses can be obtained from
a victim, if the correct chemical is placed at a place in the brain where
the chemical will cause the brain to send an electrical signal to trigger
an instinctual behavior. A searching reaction can be created so that a
person or animal searches for something in his surroundings by
electrical stimulation of the hippocampus. Eating can be reliably
induced electronically or by drugs. Perfusate taken from ventricles or
neural tissue of a person who was starved before death, and placed
into the lateral hypothalamic area will cause the person to eat whether
they are hungry or full.

SEXUAL STIMULATION-PROGRAMMING
The users of slaves need some of the parts to be nymphomaniacs. In
order to program this type of behavior, the programmers not only use
the reversal effect when pain becomes pleasure (see Vol. 2), but they
also use hormones and drugs to make certain parts nymphomaniacs. If
they were not artificially stimulated they could not endure the
over-use they are subjected to at times.

THEIR ABILITY TO MANUFACTURE (SYNTHESIZE)

BRAIN CHEMICALS TO MAKE MIND-CONTROL DRUGS
Part of the ability to do mind-control has to do with their ability to
synthesize the actual specific chemicals that the brain produces to alter
itself. When the brain wants to relax, or excite itself it uses certain
compounds. A large number of the brain’s chemicals have been
cataloged and can be reproduced in the lab. The messages the brain
sends have to jump from one neuron to another via transmitters. The
rate that the brain releases these transmitters can be both directly and
indirectly changed by drugs. In other words, one can tailor make
moods and emotions in the brain chemically.
Page 36 ...
The term "Amines" (which are compounds that have a nitrogen atom
that can accept a proton) came to have a specific meaning for brain
researchers. The transmitters between neurons in the brain are Amines
such as dopamine, epinephrine, histamine, norepinephrine,
octopamine, serotonin, and tyramine. The principle method to
synthesize these transmitter amines is "decarboxylation of the parent
amino acid." In other words, the chemist takes Tyrosine and applies
Tyrosine Hydroxylase (an enzyme) and produces Dopa another
similar compound; and then the enzyme Dopa Decarboxylase is
applied and from that the similar Dopamine amine is created. Then
Dopamine-Beta-oxidase (another enzyme) is applied in the final step
of the three enzyme steps to create Norepinephrine. Both Dopamine
and Norepinephrine are neural transmitters. If norepinephrine is
diminished in the brain, sedation occurs. Alpha-methyl-p-tyrosine (as
well as other compounds) was found to be one of the things that
would prevent the brain from creating (synthesizing for itself)
norepinephrine. Serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine) is created in a
fashion similar to dopamine, in that tryptophan is taken and acted
upon by the enzyme Tryptophan hydroxylase to get
5-hydroxytryptophan, and then a decarboxylase converts this
compound to serotonin. To reverse things, and prevent the brain from
having serotonin, they can prevent selective parts of the brain from
creating it with p-chlorphenylalanine.

ADRENALCHROME (Adrenal Chromaffin)

This naturally occurring yellowish brown drug was not mentioned in
the Vol. 2 book, although it was mentioned in this author’s newsletters
in ’93 and May ’95 The drug is obtained by sacrificing a terrified
person, perhaps by plunging the athame into them, and then taking a
hypodermic needle and extracting the adrenalchrome from the base of
the neck in the pineal gland. A sacrificed person only yields about 10
c.c. so the drug is not only very secret on the black market but very
expensive. A Scientific American article by Carmichael and Winkler is
the best thing that I have discovered on the adrenalchrome. The Max
Planck Institute in Germany did research into Adrenalchrome. Dirty
law-enforcement officials and others have worked to keep the
existence of adrenalchrome a secret. It is not known if Adrenalchrome
has ever been used for programming, but it is a popular secret drug of
the elite Illuminati kingpins. For many years, they were not able to
synthetically produce the drug, and had to rely on human sacrifices as
their source. It is possible that in the last year or so, that some method
to synthesize the drug may have been found. Chromaffin cells secrete
adrenaline, noradrenaline and other substances into the bloodstream
which exert a great deal of control over tissue, and organs.

HERBS
Another place that programmed DID Satanic Ritual Survivors may
encounter herbs is the use of herbal charms to enhance magic spells.

OILS
The Illuminati have also used oils for their powerful properties.
Recently, a doctor who was trained by the Freemasons has been
helping people discover the powerful properties of these oils.
Christians also have been rediscovering the powerful healing powers
in pure Fennel, Frankincense, Juniper, Lavender, Peppermint, Pane
and other cold pressed Oils and combinations of oils.
Summary of Major Point.
The guided LSD trips in the sensory deprivation tanks are crucial for
laying in the foundational programming. Readers will learn more
about guided LSD trips & programming drugs throughout this book.
Back to Contents Chapter 4
Page 37 ...

CHAPTER 4.
SCIENCE NO. 4 - HYPNOSIS

HYPNOSIS & the OCCULT

From the Egyptian Sleep Temples to ancient shamans, the
occult world has been putting hypnosis (including
self-hypnosis) to work for centuries, even millennia. During the
18th and 19th century, the Masonic lodges put hypnotism to
use. In 1882 Jean-Martin Charcot, considered the world’s
greatest neurologist at the time, gave hypnotism respectability
by publishing his own studies, which included recovering A.
trauma memories blocked by amnesia, and B. memories
presumed permanently lost by organic amnesia. At that time, a
group of french medical doctors located at Nancy just a 100
kilometers southeast of the Mothers-of-Darkness castle, had a
school of hypnosis that influenced doctors all over the world
including Freud. These french doctors had caught on to the
power of suggestion to the subconscious.
In the 1780’s, Marquis de Puysegur was putting people into
deep hypnotic trances and then commanding them to forget the
hypnotic session. James Esdaile in his book Mesmerism in
India & its Practical Application in Surgery and Medicine.
(pub. Longman, Brown, Green, Longmans, 1846) pp.
xxiii-xxiv, describes and lists hundreds of surgeries (some quite
serious) which he did in India using hypnosis as his anesthesia.
He found his patients could heal quickly and experienced no
pain under hypnosis. In modern medical history, every type of
surgery has been successfully carried out without drugs and
"without pain" by using hypnosis. In the VoL 2 book, it was
brought out that perceptive researchers have figured out that the
pain under hypnosis is placed by the mind into a dissociated
piece of the mind, which is essentially what MPD (DID) is all
about. Tests have shown that hypnosis to reduce pain does not
work by the brain releasing endorphins (see Hilgard, 1975 &
Spiegel and Leonard, 1986). The mind simply diverts the pain
into a "mental floppy disk" that it doesn’t look at. In the early
1880’s, occult researcher Edmund Gurney found he could give
post-hypnotic commands that would be successfully carried out
in the future. What amazed him was that subjects would fulfill
commands exactly as commanded at a particular time on a
particular day without even looking at the clock. Various
european doctors, too numerous to mention, discovered in the
1880’s that they could cure various diseases via hypnosis. The
cure rate was not 100%, but significant enough to make
hypnosis an option in some treatments.
This author (Fritz) has reported that programmed multiples are
able to increase the temperature of one body part, or one side of
their body. Cisco, the co-author of this book, when she hits
certain programs, turns ice-cold on the right of her body and
burns on the left side. It was with great interest then when this
author located the 1920 work of hypnotist J.A. Hadfield who
published his work in Lancet, 2:
pp. 68-69, under the title "The influence of suggestion on body
temperature."Using hypnosis, Hadfield could get a subject to
drop his temperature in one hand to 680 while the other hand
stayed at 94º. Here is the paper trail to what they have been
doing to programmed multiples for half a century. Today, the
occult world uses sophisticated hypnotic techniques as one of
their programming tools to create mind-controlled slaves. The
slave’s mind is structured into a robotic-computer controlled by
a master. Parts (alters) of the slave will learn how to trance
(self-hypnosis) on cue. The better conditioned a subject is to
hypnosis, the easier they fall into trance. The victims of
mind-control are all very conditioned for
Page 38 ...
hypnosis, even though their programmers then hide that under
post-hypnotic suggestions that no-one else is to be allowed to
hypnotize the slave. The ancient saying is that a picture is
worth a thousand words. In conveying suggestions to the
subconscious mind, the occult world of black magic and the
programmers are very aware of the power that picture images
convey. The good programmer will be able to utilize images to
give him tremendous leverage in hypnotic techniques. An alter
which needs to create something in the mind can be prepped
with images, and can be asked to borrow images, such as
borrow such and such quality from this person or animal. The
child alter who becomes a Lion after eating a dead lion’s parts
can imagine the qualities (speed, agility, fierceness) of the lion
easily. The image of the lion is worth a thousand words to the
hypnotic programmer. If the programmer wants an alter that is
trained in karate to be agile, quick and fierce, they don’t mind
dehumanizing that alter to become a lion or tiger. One element
of why this is done is the power of the image for hypnotic
commands. The deeper Illuminati alters will be highly skilled
in self-hypnosis & the ability to change at will into various
states of consciousness. This is part of their witchcraft training
in order to practice witchcraft.

UNDERSTANDING THE BASICS ABOUT HYPNOSIS

The Programmer is attempting to produce suggestions that the
unconscious mind will accept. If the subconscious mind accepts
the programmer’s suggestions then the suggestion becomes
reality to the victim, just as if the victim had experienced it as
reality over a period of time. The programmer, if he is good,
will be able to get the subjects imagination involved. He will
also build rapport with his victim. For instance, the master
might hypnotically stroke the forehead of kitten sexual alters
before giving them their code to go back into the mind. The
good handler/programmer is not simply working off of fear, but
he wants to have the trust and cooperation of the victim. This is
similar to how Hitler was both feared and trusted by the
German masses. In fact, hypnosis was an element in Hitler’s
control of the masses. Nazi propaganda films showing Hitler
and other Nazi leaders giving directives always have the Hitler
Youth’s actions slightly speeded up so that subconsciously the
viewer is taught obedience to their commands.
The programmer will not tell the slave something is
hypnotically happening until it has already happened. He will
use the art of timing his words at the correct time, of using
repetition, of combining several mutually supporting
suggestions, and of having total confidence in his words to add
strength to his hypnotic commands. Muscular rigidity and deep
breathing are one way to increase suggestibility within the
victim being programmed via hypnosis. The programmer will
also use other hypnotic tricks, such using his own body
language to suggest something, and to use what is called a
"voice roll". When the programmer moves his voice into a
monotonous patterned style he is using the roll voice. Words
are delivered at the rate of 45 to 60 beats a minute. To empower
the suggestions, the programming hypnotist uses the victim’s
five senses. The victim visualizes something using his five
senses, such as the imagery of the holy spirit (done in mockery
of God) and then breathes this imagery in. For instance, the
victim breathes in the message of the programming and roots it
deep deep down into the oak tree. (In VoL 2, it was explained
that the oak tree is the structure that the programs are attached
to.)

THE POWER OF HYPNOSIS

During the hypnotic trance, the human mind is at the pinnacle
of its ability to quickly learn. What might take years to learn
and
Page 39 ...
weighing the evidence, will be accepted quickly by the victim’s
subconscious. The mind strings together a series of "cognitive
mental demons?? that is a series of mental processes--similar to
how a computer programmer writes a program. These strings
have been called K-lines. Much of what the mind does is
simply activations of various K-lines (a habitual ways of doing
things), so that the mind can focus its limited conscious
thinking. The mind also takes micronemes (such things as a
particular aroma, or a particular intonation for which it has no
word, but for which it has a series of sensory clues) and builds
these into K-lines too. Once a K-line works, the mind in order
to prevent itself from making reckless changes, gives priority to
those K-lines. Under hypnosis, the mind willingly allows the
hypnotist to change K-lines without the normal unconscious
conservative restraints. Under behavior modification
techniques, abnormal K-lines (that is K-lines that wouldn’t
normally develop) can be forced into the mind.
A hypnotic suggestion given to normal subjects lasts about a
week, so reinforcement is helpful. The programming
suggestions are layered in using methods far more powerful
than mere hypnosis, and are locked up in dissociated
subconscious states, so that these programming scripts which
are layered in are almost impossible for the victim to be aware
of to challenge them. The emotions of women have been found
to slightly detract from the hypnotic trance, while male victims
take the hypnotic words in an unemotional matter-of-fact way.
The male victims will simply accept the programming and
directly comply. That is one reason why the suicide programs
that are layered into the men are so deadly. The female victims
of programming may emotionally play the suicide out and
survive; the male slaves when they trigger suicide programs,
comply with the programming in an unemotional direct way.
How deep is the slave’s trance? There are tests for trance
depths, but from what this author can ascertain, sometimes it
can be difficult to determine exactly where the mind is at. If a
memory is laid in at a particular trance level, the slave may be
able to avoid an abreaction later on by going above or below
the memory’s trance level. A deep level, where for instance, the
person can’t move a body part due to hypnotic suggestion,
would be called the "cataleptic stage" or level.

UNDERSTANDING THE DEEPER MECHANICS of

HYPNOSIS
Let us suppose for the sake of discussion that as you are
reading this, it is supper time. You are hungry. You’ve starved
yourself all day, and even though you are on a strict diet, you
are trying to think of a good restaurant to go to. Now let’s see,
as your mind scans the different possibilities, it thinks of some
that are close, some that are quick. some that have lots of easy
parking and others that have good looking waitresses.
Mechanically, your thought processes went like this:
a. Particular sensations and chemicals cause the mind to feel
what it mentally describes as a pang of hunger. This is
perceived as an important need.
b. The mind has a process that we can call an Intention System
that creates specific intention messages that are sent throughout
the brain. It stores these Intentions temporarily. If an intention
is not freshly created and restacked at the top of the clutter of
intentions in the intention store, then it gets buried underneath
the "mind cluttered desk of things to do" and forgotten. In our
example, the mind is searching its memory banks for options on
how to satisfy its hunger.
c. The mind must decide upon one particular course of action.
The mind quits focusing on other matters, and concentrates
upon deciding which course of action to take. The mind has
now activated all kinds of what some researchers call
"demons". Because we are not talking about spiritual demons,
but rather we are referring to units of cognitive processes--
Page 40 ...
which are very similar to UNIX computer demons--we will
refer to these demons by the name "cognitive demon
processes." Some of these cognitive demon processes are action
demons and some are word demons, and some are recognition
demons. Recognition Cognitive Demon Processes go running
through the mind, "shouting" the wishes of the Intention store.
A number of lower level cognitive demon processes wake up
and make themselves known if they identify with what the
recognition demon is shouting about. Many may think they
match the request, but other demon processes check them out to
see how close they match. Now the checkers come up with a
list of cognitive demon processes who are concerned with
eating at restaurants, who have woken up and are all scrambling
for attention. Cognitive demon processes establish themselves
in families, and develop relationships that are automatic.
(Cognitive Demons do not die, but some go to sleep and others
can get somewhat rusty in their relationships.) The "demons"
that respond to the shouting of our recognition demon go
through a series of "interviews" with a hierarchy of other
demon processes, and soon the messenger demon can rush back
to the Intention Store with the name of the choices available.
All this happens extremely quick. If the mind did not set up a
series of automatic cognitive demon processes that become
habits, (called K-lines) it would find itself involved in the
conscious relearning of trivial matters that would make it
impossible to get much accomplished. Every skill would have
to be constantly relearned. A person might easily end up
spending all day dressing. As long as the mind remains in a
static environment, where habits work, it’s great. But life is
such a changing environment, that our entrenched habits can
cause the mind to pull up a cognitive demonic process out of
habit, when it is neither wanted nor appropriate. Emotions and
needs (which are tied to our emotions) will trigger the mind to
search out cognitive demon processes. For instance, if our
emotional need for someone we are looking for is great, let’s
say a wife waiting for a long expected war-husband, it may
send a need down the brain for the cognitive demons that are
attached to the identification of the long-awaited person, and
the mind triggers itself to see his face in the crowd at the busy
railway station before its owner arrives. Cognitive Demon
Processes live in close proximity to other demons, and when
one gets excited, others in the area do too, although their
excitement may be much less. If a cognitive demon is being
used a great deal, it will be on its toes, but little used demons
can go to sleep, and somehow need to be hollowed at very loud
to wake up. The Intention System after a while will set itself on
autopilot for certain mental functions, which frees the
conscious mind for other problems. The conscious mind can
only focus on a small amount of material--it is like a computer
which has limited memory. It is constantly in a state of
redeployment, and the Intentions system has only a small sway
over how the Attention part of the mind decides to focus. The
Attention part constantly asks itself, which tasks can be
relegated to habit. Then when the Intention system sends out
cognitive search demons, they do not have to involve the
conscious mind, because everything that is habitual is set up
like a script, with families of "cognitive demon processes"
already knowing the roles/relationships they are to play.
(Again, Behavior modification is used to strengthen the
relationships of demonic processes, and to make some well
used and awake, so that certain behaviors become habits.)
When our minds meditate or go into a hypnotic trance, what is
occurring is that our conscious mind is delegating its limited
computing memory for the focus of its attention upon one
object. What happens to the cognitive demon processes that
would normally take instructions from the conscious mind?
During meditation
Page 41 ...
the untrained cognitive demon processes bubble up to the top of
the conscious mind. However, the opposite happens during
hypnosis. During hypnosis, the mind has made the decision (for
whatever reasons) to accept control statements from the
hypnotist. The mind has surrendered or at least temporarily or
partially abdicated his or her position as the master of his or her
Intention System. Some of this power is given away. The
hypnotist now has access and control over many or all the
cognitive demonic processes, including some that the person
would not normally activate. Cognitive demon processes that
are asleep or deeply buried can be accessed by the hypnotist, in
a much quicker direct way than the Intention System would. By
suggesting that the subject has a cat on his lap, the hypnotist is
actually causing the recognition cognitive demon processes to
wake up and act out their jobs to such an extent that the subject
sees a cat. By suggesting that the subject’s body stiffen, the
hypnotist has gained control over those cognitive action
demons that cause the body to stiffen. Age-regression brings up
demons that are associated with the subject’s childhood.
Although it is unpopular to admit publicly that the hypnotist
has power over the subject, a close look at the process of how
hypnosis works at the neuronal "cognitive demon process"
level shows that the hypnotist has indeed been given power. In
fact, the hypnotist has been given power to activate cognitive
units of demon processes that the mind itself would allow to
remain inactive or asleep. The mind would not normally use its
ability to activate them. Today, it is politically incorrect to
admit that the hypnotist has power to make an individual do
what they wouldn’t normally want to do, but unfortunately
hypnosis does give this power.

PROGRAMMING AIDS
Because the programmers control the slave’s life to such a high
degree they can add other elements that move the brain into
programmable states. Fasting along with a high sugar intake
will make the brain more suggestive. (The military also used
this in basic training. This was done to this author at West Point
during Beast Barracks, where during the first two weeks he ate
all-total enough food for one regular meal; however, New
Cadets were allowed to go to chapel and eat all the brownies,
cookies and kool-aid they wanted.) Physical discomforts and
the chanting of rituals in witchcraft ceremonies are also ways to
move the mind into programming states. Lights, sounds (for
instance repetitive beats such as with any rock music), and
smells are all used to encourage the brain to go into a
programmable state. In the chapter on electronics, it discusses
how the functions of the mind-body such as breathing and the
heartbeat can be regulated by external stimuli ---that is lights
and sounds which are electronically produced. If the repetitive
beat is ranged between 45 to 72 beats per minute, many people
will go into a programmable state with their eyes open. This is
because this beat is close to the beat of the heart in a relaxed
state. Some secret Illum. programming centers have areas that
are constructed for the greatest hypnotic sound and lighting
effect. The child/ or adult victim is cut off from the world at
these programming centers. The victims’ freedom to walk
outside into normal life depends upon their cooperation with
the programmer(s). Lullaby music is used as a cue for some
alters of slaves to induce trance when their systems are older
because the child alters still respond to the cue. Anything can
be a cue, but it appears the programmers often pick cues that
are naturally reinforced by the mind. The lullaby or carousel
music is a good cue, because the lullaby is taking advantage of
the natural desire of the brain to retreat from reality to the
nostalgia of childhood fun. The retreat of the mind to childhood
naturally evokes the helplessness and dependence that a child
feels. The programmers are powerful
Page 42 ...
enough to place in cues that don’t need natural reinforcement,
but from observation it is apparent that they will often skillfully
strengthen the hypnotic power by the choice of a cue which
carries its own natural reinforcement. One supporting element
in programming is that the programmer sets himself up as "god
the creator" of the victim, or an alien of a far-advanced race. In
hypnotism, this fulfills the need that all hypnotic subjects must
have faith and trust in their hypnotist. Hypnosis is subjective in
nature. If the programmer is the creator of the alter being
programmed, and the alter is additionally under a hypnotic drug
that makes it willing to obey, it is easy to see how the victim
lets go of all inhibitions, because "god" or this "superior alien"
knows what is best. The better and stronger the relationship
between the victim and his master programmer, the better the
hypnotic commands work. If the slave sees the master as a
religious guru prophet (or a great doctor) it enhances his
willingness to accept hypnotic commands. Bear in mind that
the slave is conditioned to love their master without
reservation. Yes, the benevolent dictator has historically
received the devotion of the masses, (and many of the
Illuminati programmers are actually simply egotistical sadists).

USING HOLOGRAMS as an ACCESS AID

The Illuminati is now even resorting to creating talking
hologram images to access their slaves with their hypnotic
cues.

KEEPING THE MIND IN ALPHA STATE

The entire alter system of a Monarch slave has their sleep
patterns controlled. Many alters are programmed not to get real
sleep. They actually sleep in a hypnotic alpha-state sleep, or
what may be called trance sleep. Hypnotists (and brain
researchers) will tell you that true sleep and a hypnotic sleep
are not the same thing for the brain. Some alters (but not many)
must stay awake 24 hours a day internally and carefully watch
all that happens in the system of alters. Someone has to take the
body and sleep--but whichever alters are set up to do it, they are
hypnotically commanded to only sleep about three hours to
insure that the mind stays in an alpha state easy to program.
Because alters which do not hold the body "rest" mentally in a
sense--when they take the body they are fresh. The mind
dissociates when it is given unpleasant things to hear which it
doesn’t want to hear. The electronic implants that send voices
to victims are used to create dissociation within the slaves, plus
certain implants and devices send specific electro-magnetic
wave patterns to the mind to put the slave’s mind into the alpha
state. See chapter six for more on the mind-control implants.

PREPARING THE BRAIN

The programmer places the victim in an acute state of anxiety
and guilt. The tension reduces the power of the judgement part
of the mind. One of the tortures for slaves is to keep them from
going to the bathroom and relieving themselves. This is part of
the hypnotic programming package. The anxiety that this
creates increases the power of the programming in the brain,
because the anxiety causes slight malfunctions with the brain’s
judgment abilities. Mental and physical fatigue are also sought
in the victim. For instance, water deprivation is common. (This
was also done to the author at West Point, where one of this
author’s classmates was hospitalized for dehydration during
Beast Barracks.) Offensive language also helps drive the mind
into tension and encourages it into an alpha state.

EARLY TRAINING FOR SLAVES

The children who are being programmed are taught 4
IMPORTANT HYPNOTIC ABILITIES. These four abilities
are a. relaxation, b. visualization, c. concentration, and d.
projection, which work in handling the slave along with the
alpha state.
Page 43 ...
Relaxation and visualization go hand in hand each enhancing
each other. When given a good pleasant image to visualize, the
victim relaxes, which leads to the hypnotic concentration,
which then produces good projection. Initially, the child victim
is given drugs that induce euphoria and deep relaxation. They
are then taught to work toward that drug euphoria by going to it
mentally. They develop the ability to go into that euphoria
mentally as a trained behavior. Many of the children will have
their training in visualization and concentration reinforced
when they go to public schools, many of which are now
involved in the programming process. To teach the child
concentration and visualization, the child is given an apple and
trained to visualize it. The first time, the child will be given
drugs which will enhance the experience and perception greatly
to around 100 times the perception without the drugs. There is
no pain involved in this early programming at around the age of
3 or 4. After the child has gone through the visualization of the
apple in the drugged state he or she will work toward the
mental ability to visualize it intensely without the drugs. The
visualization script used with the apple (in both the drugged
and undrugged exercises) will vary slightly from programmer
to programmer, yet will be close to the following:
"VISUALIZE AN APPLE. HOLD IT IN YOUR HANDS;
TURN IT AROUND; FEEL IT. FEEL THE SHAPE, THE
SIZE, THE WEIGHT, THE TEXTURE. NOTICE THE
COLOR, THE REFLECTION OF LIGHT ON ITS SKIN.
BRING IT TO YOUR NOSE AND SMELL IT. BITE INTO
IT, TASTE IT; HEAR THE CRUNCH AS YOUR TEETH
SINK IN. EAT THE APPLE; FEEL IT SLIDE DOWN YOUR
THROAT. SEE IT GROW SMALLER. WHEN YOU HAVE
EATEN IT DOWN TO THE CORE, LET IT DISAPPEAR."
By the way, an apple training incident very similar to this
(which is given by the Illuminati to child slaves from the ages 2
to 4), strangely turned up occurring in a setting that the author,
who never was a slave nor never in the occult, found himself in
when this author was a 4-H counselor at a 4-H camp as a 16
year old. The first thing all the counselors were given was an
apple exercise so that we could appreciate each camper for
what he or she was. The person who led the exercise was a
psychologist. Where had he learned it? The apple visualization
must be done to a standard of excellence by the child victim.
The victim’s life depends upon learning to visualize vividly, so
that the internal structures (internal mental images) it builds
within the mind will stay strong and firm. The programmers
want the child to have good visualization so they will work
with the child to have the most successful experience. For
instance, the child will be offered a variety of apples to look at,
yellow, green, red etc. The child can choose the apple that it
likes so that its visualization exercises will be the most
successful. The entire imagery of an internal system will be
built upon the foundation of the child’s ability to visualize an
apple. The child will be taken through a succession of exercises
where the child learns to visualize the apple in greater and
greater detail using all the senses. Eventually, the child is able
to visualize his or her apple to the point that the child can
dissect or chop the apple up in any way and reconstruct it
mentally. The internal seeds of the apple can be seen brilliantly
by the child. Upon this ability to visualize, the programmer will
then teach the child that the apple can become anything the
child wants, a river, a couch, a book etc. The five seeds of the
apple will be turned into 5 castles. This is why essentially all
Illuminati Mind-controlled slaves have 5 major castles in their
system of programming. One approach by therapists has been
to cast out/remove the castles. However, the castle imagery is
based upon the apple seeds
Page 44 ...
which is based on the apple. The real thing to deal with for
therapists is the apple. If the castle is returned to its original
image of being an apple seed, and the rest of the apple-and its
tree imagery dealt with, then some progress can be made.
Unfortunately, not being aware of the original imagery, the
therapists have been frustrating themselves with the superficial
imagery rather than the foundational imagery.
Another script for teaching the young 2 to 4 year old slaves
simple visualization is to have the child close his or her eyes
and imagine that they are looking at a white wall or blank
screen. Then they practice visualizing simple geometric shapes,
and then visualize the screen in different colors, and then
finally visualize the objects changing colors.

MAGICAL TRAINING ON THE STARLIGHT LEVEL

The Illuminati begin training the child victim to work at the
starlight level. This is called magical training. The child’s
abilities to relax, visualize, concentrate and project are then
harnessed in the alpha state by "MAGICKAL TRAINING"
which opens up the STARLIGHT CONSCIOUSNESS.
Starlight consciousness is the other way of knowing that which
belongs to the right hemisphere, and it allows the victim to
make contact with the "DIVINE WITHIN". The Divine within
the victim is actually the generational spirits, which are placed
in during the Moon Child ceremonies described in detail in Vol.
2.
The generational spirits are laid in to help build the
programming and to guard it. However, as in so much spiritual
work, the victim’s (technically speaking, the alter’s) will &
thoughts work hand in hand with the spirits. The child must
learn to visualize and participate in the mental building of the
internal worlds, structures, etc. However, the demons will be
strategically placed to protect the structures once the
programming is built into the mind. (For more understanding of
this see Cisco’ s section on "Programming, foundational,
destruction of’.)

FINETUNING
The child victim’s mind is FINETUNED. This means that the
child can function excellently at visualization, relaxation,
concentration, projection, while in the alpha state and can work
with their subconscious mind. The mental work done in the
subconscious can not be retrieved easily. Only through outside
assistance or special training can most people access what is
done at the starlight level of the mind. The programmers are
using the child’s abilities with its 5 acute senses to develop the
6th sense (which is its ability to work in the Starlight
consciousness, which includes such mental activity such as
psychic abilities--which will be discussed in other locations in
this book.) Enhancing the mind so that it can work in the
subconscious area called the starlight consciousness is referred
to by many insiders as astral.

THE MONARCH PROGRAMMING SCRIPT FOR OVER

THE RAINBOW
One of the most important concepts of the programmers is
having slaves "go over the rainbow." Although in recent years
other methods have been substituted for this, there are many
hundreds of thousands of slaves for whom "going over the
rainbow" is part of their programming. What is the script for
programming this?

The PROGRAMMING SCRIPT FOR GOING OVER THE

RAINBOW
(Three dots in this script do not indicate missing parts, but
rather pauses. In other words, pauses are indicated by three
dots.)

INDUCTION TRAINING SCRIPT

"BREATHE DEEP --- YOU ARE FLOATING DOWN ...
DOWN ... ON A BEAUTIFUL RED CLOUD, AND YOUR
WHOLE BODY IS RED -- AS YOU GO DRIFTING AND
FLOATING .... ROCKING GENTLY ... DEEPER ... AND
Page 45 ...
DEEPER ... DOWN ... [this repeated, one time, for each color
of cloud-orange, yellow, green, blue, and violet clouds.]
"LAND VERY GENTLY ... VERY SOFTLY ... IN THE
CENTER OF A ROUND, BLACK PEARL. SEE IT
GLOWING, SOFTLY, GENTLY ... NOW TURN AND FACE
THE EAST ... AND THEN THE SOUTH ... AND THEN THE
WEST ... AND THEN THE NORTH OPEN ALL OF YOUR
INNER SENSES." [The rainbow gives the much abused victim
of mind-control and trauma, a safe mental place to travel to;
and this serves as a "home base" for the mind to return to when
things get difficult. If the programming begins to be destroyed
and a deeper alter experiences real life--its coping mechanism
to face the harsher realities of life will be a knee-jerk reaction
to go to safety over the rainbow.]

BRINGING THE SLAVE OUT OF TRANCE (Switching to

the FRONT PERSONALITIES after programming)
After the slave has been switched to deeper personalities who
are in trance in order to have the slave a. be programmed b. be
programmed & carry out a mission, c. go to a ritual, then it is
important that the programmer takes time to get the slave to
emerge slowly and gently from their altered state. The
induction process is reversed. The repetition of trances will
reinforce the depth of the trance state, and keep the
undetectable slavery operating smoothly:
"IN THE PEARL, PREPARE TO AWAKEN. WHEN YOU
AWAKE, YOU WILL FEEL REFRESHED, ALERT,
RENEWED, AND FILLED WITH ENERGY. YOU WILL
REMEMBER ALL THAT YOU HAVE EXPERIENCED.
NOW TURN AND FACE THE EAST ... THEN THE SOUTH
... THEN THE WEST ... THEN THE NORTH. [this helps the
slave orient themselves internally]
TAKE A DEEP BREATH ... INHALE ... EXHALE ...
"YOU ARE FLOATING UP ... UP ... ON A BEAUTIFUL
VIOLET CLOUD, AND YOUR WHOLE BODY IS VIOLET
AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY UPWARD ... "ON A BEAUTIFUL
BLUE
CLOUD ... UP ... UP ... AND YOUR WHOLE BODY IS
BLUE AND YOU ARE BEGINNING TO AWAKEN
GENTLY AND YOU DRIFT GENTLY UP ... ON A
BEAUTIFUL GREEN CLOUD ... AND YOUR WHOLE
BODY IS GREEN ... AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY ... UP ... UP
... "ON A BEAUTIFUL YELLOW CLOUD ... GETTING
MORE AND MORE AWAKE ... AND YOUR WHOLE
BODY IS YELLOW ... AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY ... UP ...
UP ...
"ON A BEAUTIFUL ORANGE CLOUD ... FILLED WITH
ENERGY AND VITALITY ... YOUR WHOLE BODY IS
ORANGE ... AS YOU FLOAT UP GENTLY ... "ON A
BEAUTIFUL RED
CLOUD ... ALMOST FULLY AWAKE NOW ... AND YOUR
WHOLE BODY IS RED AS YOU FLOAT GENTLY ...
"STAY ON THE RAINBOW ... [at this point the script for the
slave’s programming or mission or ritual will be placed into the
mind].
After the programming session, the mission, or the ritual the
handler/or programmer finishes...
"LEAVING THE MEMORY IN THE BLACK PEARL AND
CLOSING AND SEALING THE BLACK PEARL. YOU
WILL REMEMBER ONLY THOSE DETAILS THAT I TELL
YOU TO REMEMBER. AND IN A MOMENT YOU WILL
COUNT TO TEN AND GO BACK INTO YOUR
Page 46 ...
SPACE, AND RED 2001-A [whatever the code is for the alter]
WILL RETURN."

DEEP TRANCE PROGRAMMING

If we rate trance depths on a scale of 1 to 13, then the deep
trance that is being described here is 7-10. At this 7-10 depth,
the person must be constantly watched. The victim is turned on
his side so that the victim will continue to breathe. If the person
monitoring has doubts whether the slave is alive, the
programming staff will poke the lungs and neck. The person’s
breathing will be encouraged by the programmer breathing
along with the person being programmed as he says
"BREATHE ... BREATHE ... BREATHE". This is important
because at this level the slave is so tranced their body can
forget to breathe.

COLOR PROGRAMMING
While we are still on the subject of the rainbow and its colors,
and before we continue onto other parts of the hypnotic
programming process, let’s deal with color programming.
When Illuminati slaves are being programmed as little children,
they usually will get music and color programming. Most
readers are like this author, in that they are not interested in
learning magic. However, because this author (Fritz
Springmeier) was interested in helping victims understand
what’s been done to them, it was important to dive into trying
to understand the thinking of the occult world in regards to
colors. If I write that the occult world views yellow as a healing
color, and blue as a relaxing color, and purple (violet) as a
spiritually enlightened color, that is not because I want to teach
that as a doctrine, but so that therapists can begin to understand
the hidden mannerisms & thought patterns of these powerful
generational occult families, who believe in such odd practices
as child sacrifice. In the 1940’s, as the Illuminati were applying
scientific investigation to their ancient skills in mind-control, a
number of researchers investigated color psychology. Cecil
Stokes’ color research on the influence of colors on the mind
led to the Auratone films, which were used to treat the
"mentally ill". Walt Disney Studios produced one of the best
occult attempts to free associate color, light and music in their
movie Fantasia, especially Fantasia’s opening selection of
Stokowski’s adaption of Bach’s "Toccata and Fugue in D
minor". Walt Disney also used selections of music from the
Satanist composer Igor Stravinsky in Fantasia. Igor Stravinsky
is an anarchy-espousing satanist. Fantasia was a long labor of
occult devotion for Walt Disney and his studios. It took many
years to create the film, and when it was finished, it was used as
a programming foundation for alter systems. (Chapter 5 will
have more on Disney. Chapter 5 will also give a very detailed
script for HOW Fantasia has been used as the primary
foundation programming tool.) Disney’s Dick Tracy movie is
also a classic example of how color is employed in a movie
which is used covertly for mind-control programming.
The five primary areas of occult thinking that were investigated
by this author in terms of color programming were 1. witchcraft
books such as Raymond Buckland’s Practical Color Magick, 2.
an extensive study of several New Age Groups such as the I
AM Movement, and Church Universal & Triumphant (CUT)
using hundreds of documents that ex-insiders of these groups
provided, 3. masonic & rosicrucian sources, such as Manly P.
Hall’s book The Secret Teachings of All Ages, and 4.
Metaphysical books in general such as the excellent The
Rainbow Book being a collection of essays & illustrations
devoted to Rainbows in particular & Spectral Sequences in
general focusing on the meaning of color (physical &
metaphysically) from Ancient to Modem Times. The Rainbow
Book was done by the Fine Arts Museums of San Francisco in
assoc. with Shambhala of
Page 47 ...
Berkeley & London, 1975. And finally, the last primary source
-but not least- was interviews with an ex-programmer. What
did I find out? After lots of weeding, I have some siftings from
these sources to share. In Buckland’s Practical Color Magick,
we learn about a type of Voodoo called Poppet dolls. These
dolls are made according to the color that is appropriate for the
person’s problem. For instance, they make a green poppet doll
if the person needs help with finances. The name of the person
is written on the doll according to the color that corresponds to
their astrological birthdate. For instance, Leo is orange, and
Pisces is Indigo. Those who need success are advised by
Buckland to make a "Color Treasure Map" which is simply a
collage of the things they want, making sure that the pictures
are bright colors. This is another example of color magic.
Buckland provides a Color-Number Code as follows:
1 = Red; 2 = Orange; 3= Yellow; 4 = Green; 5=Blue; 6=Indigo;
7=Violet; 8=Rose; 9 = Gold
The letters of the alphabet then are corresponded to these 9
numbers and by adding up the numbers in someone’s name
(numerology), Buckland tells us we can get the name’s Color
from such a process.
What did I learn of value from Buckland? some tips on how
occultists assign colors to numbers and objects. For the average
person these witchcraft teachings are simply trite imaginations.
Even so, the fact remains for those of us confronting Occult
mind-control, colors are important to total-mind-control
programmers of the Illuminati. Colors are important to their
world-view. A programmer who knew color magic would
likely use color magic in their programming, programming
scripts and codes. Now, both you and I know some more about
how to second guess the programmer’s mind. (By the way,
Color programming was dealt with in a major way in Vol. 2,
but the tips in this chapter may also be useful.)
THE ASSOCIATION OF COLORFUL SIGHTS,
SOUNDS, RHYTHM & DANCE.
Dance has been associated with color from ancient times, to
greek and medieval courts up to modern times with the use of
colored floodlights. Keys in music have been associated with
colors by many famous musicians. Beethoven referred to B
minor as the black key. Schubert compared E minor to a "girl
robed in white with a rose-red bow on her breast".
Rimsley-Korsakov interpreted the keys of C, D, A, F, & F#
major as white, yellow, rosy, green, and grayish-green. Handel
had his own idea of how the keys related to the colors. The
brighter hues of a color have been associated by some with the
major scale, and the more subdued hues of a color with the
minor. Goethe stated that a painting of powerful effect was like
a piece of music with a sharp key, while a painting with a
muted effect was like music in a flat key.
Certain colors have been associated with violin music. In
Wassily Kandinsky’s book The Art of Spiritual Harmony, we
learn a great deal about color and music. The following comes
from Kandinsky’s observations, and may relate to Mengele’s
programming. The ringing notes of a violin have been
associated with a cool red. The largo of an old violin is
associated with orange. The placid middle tones of the violin
are associated with absolute green. A dark blue is like a cello.
White is like the pauses in music that temporarily break the
melody. Black represents "the final pauses, after which any
continuation of melody see the dawn of another world."

The Rainbow Book is definitely the most comprehensive book

this author has seen on the significance of color both physically
and metaphysically. An interesting chart is given on page 125,
which examines the relationship of the frequencies of
electromagnetic waves in the visible light spectrum with an
octave of music just above middle C. In order to make the
Page 48 ...
comparison (which is charted below) the light frequencies
which are 1012 are written without the powers of ten and taken
down 40 to match the note octaves. This gives us a chart which
we will arrange by:
COLOR/ORIG. FREK - 40 // OCTAVE FREK/NOTE
Using this arrangement we get:
Very dark red/391 .3 = 392/G NOTE darkish red/418 = 415/G#
note
Orangish red/445 440/A note light orange/464 = 466/A # note
yellow green/495 = 494/B note green/ 523 = 523/ C note
Bluish green/555 = 553/ C# note Indigo/573-600 = 587/D note
Indigo violet-light violet/618-627 = D# note
Dark violet/655-673 = 659/E note
Very dark violet/682 = 698/F note
Although there is no single one-to-one correspondence between
music and color, because there are different patterns to consider
and the role of association is such a complex issue, there are
several things that naturally suggest themselves: an increase in
pitch does seem to suggest an increase in brightness. An
increase in brightness also is suggested by an increase in tempo.
Colors also fit the mood of a piece of music. A mass of color
can suggest the musical ground. Musical intervals have also
been related by the ancients to the orbits of the planets. This
began with the spherical theory of the cosmos by Pythagoras,
where the different astrological bodies made different sounds.
Another correspondence with merit is to associate colors with
"properties", & then associate with music intervals, then assoc.
with related cords, and related planets, and then associate with
other things. For instance, Orange would be associated with the
Sun, Energy, Glory, and Power. In turn, it would be associated
with Re (pronounced "Ray" in music, the whole tone, D). Its
related cord would be minor, and its related planet would be the
Sun "Apollo." Violet would be death, separation, advanced
spirituality. It would be associated with Ti ("Tee") in music, the
Maj. 7th, B, and its related planet would be the moon "Diana".
There is no way all the different associations can be reviewed
here. The chinese have had a number of music-color
association schemes, as well as the Hindis, the Tibetans, and
others. Is this section on color going somewhere with these
associations? Yes, Joseph Mengele, the original Dr. Green (the
name Green got passed on to a least one of his proteges),
played the violin and piano while doing the color programming
to slaves. He was the original master at associating both a tone
or chord with a particular color or color scheme. He loved
using Fantasia for programming.

LIGHT & COLOR

According to Hilton Hotema’s book Ancient Sun God
(Mokelumne Hill, CA: Health Research, 1956), light & fire are
associated with Sun worship. "Pyra" is Greek for fire, and
"Midos" means measure. Pyramid is a combination of the greek
words pyra and midos, which together meant "light-measures".
In other words, the pyramid was the eternal ascending flame,
the spark returning to its maker. The eternal flame of
Prometheus is a recurrent theme within all the modern
revolutions (which by the way were all created secretly by the
occult hierarchy). The Tower of Babel most likely followed the
pattern which the ancient babylonian cylinders say was used by
the Babylonians in building their temples. Each level was
dedicated to one of the 7 planets, and was built in that color. In
other words the Tower of Babel looked like a rainbow. The
lowest was to Saturn and was black. The next was to Jupiter
and was orange. The next was to Mars and was red. The fourth
was the sun and was yellow. The fifth was Venus and was
green. The sixth was Mercury and was blue, and the top or
seventh level would be white.
Page 49 ...
A good example of color programming and a New Age group
which is involved with Illuminati/govemment mind-control is
Church Universal & Triumphant. In the Covert Action
Information Bulletin, No. 30, Summer, 1988, Church Universal
& Triumphant was exposed as a conduit of CIA funds. Another
clue as to how CUT connects in is that Elizabeth Clare Prophet,
CUT’s prophetess, speaks in Masonic emples. E.C. Prophet
claims she is Marie Antoinette. (One of the first Illuminati
programs that this author ran into when working with
programmed multiples was Marie Antoinette programming.)
Another obvious CIA asset (who is not part of CUT) has been
directing implant victims to go to CUT and solve their implant
problem by seeking the "I AM force" within them. (The I AM
is a system programmed into slaves.) Initiates into CUT have
received a letter, "Keeper of the Flame: the need for harmony
and love between all the master’s servants united in a common
effort cannot be overemphasized. Working and serving
together, we form a mandala of light through which the masters
of the Great White Brotherhood will awaken humanity." (Quote
from a letter by CUT Chairman of the Outreach Committee
Michael Veys to CUT’s Fraternity of the Keepers of the Flame,
c. 1980.) Elizabeth Claire Prophet’s "Fraternity of Keepers of
the Flame" as she calls her initiates learn such things as
astrology, crystals, white magic, color magic, Hinduism
(reincarnation, karma, meditation, chakra points), how to
decree, how to dress (for instance what color to where at what
time), and how to become divine at Summit University.
Elizabeth Clare Prophet (that’s the name she wanted)
established Summit University, and CUT’s headquarters in
Colorado Springs, a house in Santa Barbara, and an
underground fortress for the end times in a valley in Montana.
Details about Elizabeth Clare Prophet and her organization are
hard to come by. If a person gets serious about being part of her
organization, they are expected to make a once in a life-time
gift of everything they have to the CUT and its head Elizabeth
Clare Prophet. (Sources: Notes, Summit University Student and
Confidential Interview.) After that they are expected to tithe
(one-tenth). Church Universal and Triumphant Tenets,
Colorado Springs, CO: 1975, p.12 under Art. XII Law of the
Tithe. In return, they are initiated into what I call "the supreme
Grand Flattery", "You shall become an enlightened God." One
of the programming tricks by the Mind-control programmers is
to have some of the alters, incl. front alters believe that they are
divine gods. Although members are told they are divine, when
people on E.C. Prophet’s staff got revelations from the
Ascended Masters that she channels, she threatened to expel
them if they talked about their revelations. E.C. Prophet does
not want any one else to prophecy in her organization. CUT
makes their mind-controlled slaves think that they are too smart
and intuitive to ever be deceived. In this way, they use New
Age ideas and the person’s pride to blind them to the fact the
person is a mind-controlled slave who is fooled much of the
time. When students are invited onto staff it is a commitment.
They are told, "Your life will never be your own again, but was
it ever your own?" They have already been taught "Ascension
Keys". Elizabeth Clare Prophet tells her students that to Ascend
to Godhead is their birthright, the divine right of every person.
(see Pearls of Wisdom, Vol. X, No. 23, June 4, 1967, The
Summit Lighthouse, p. 41 -"...has robbed men of the birthright
of their Ascension...") This matches what the Illuminati teach
their people. See also Pearls of Wisdom, Vol. X, No. 19, (May
7, 1967), The Summit Lighthouse, p. 24 - "The Divine Right is
the Immortal Plan...Inherent pattern of unique Christ
manifestation..." In the Ascension Dossier of Serapis Bey
Page 50 ...
initiates are told "The capacity of the externalized self must be
given in toto." Also-"You must abandon your past to God." In
Lanello’s Message(a channeled message), 4/20/73 the students
are told, "You do not have to wait for the carnal mind to
evolve, for the carnal mind will never evolve. It must be put off
and cast into the Flame." (See Lanello 4/20/73 in the Pearls of
Wisdom, Vol. 16, #32, 8/12/1973.)
After emptying themselves of all their past and of what they
knew, the initiates are then restructured by CUT. In Serapis,
Ascension Class they are told, "The Ascension Flame is the
Flame of Mother."

SPECIAL COLORS
It can’t be overemphasized that Green is the highest color in
Satanism--it is Satan’s color. It is not by accident that green has
been used in uniforms, although the decision also was dictated
by its advantage in camouflage. In the Omega computer
programming a CODE GREEN for many victims means
"self-destruct", the ultimate sacrifice for one’s satanic
programming. Interviews with witches, as well as a person in
witchcraft who the Masons tried to recruit, and an ex-member
of CUT, and an ex-member of similar New Age group called
the I AM movement reveals that they all wear special colors of
clothes on certain days. Due to the large influx of new converts,
it has been difficult for CUT to keep up the teachings on
wearing different colored clothing during different times of the
day, and for different days. Newer converts may be unaware of
this teaching. The colors of purple and white are especially
esteemed. The magical properties that Masons & New Agers
believe are intrinsic to purple is why the 33rd degree has
written books using purple, and several New Agers have
published books on purple paper. The programmers also
manipulate such things so that child alters believe that color
"magic" has accomplished things.

HEALING BY CORRECT VIBRATIONS & RAYS

Masonic Sources match CUT teachings-
· "The second method of healing was by vibration. The
inharmonies of the bodies were neutralized by chanting spells
and intoning the sacred names or by playing upon musical
instruments and singing. Sometimes articles of various colors
were exposed to the sight of the sick, for the ancients
recognized, at least in part, the principle of color therapeutics,
now in the process of rediscovery." Masonic Hermetic
Qabbalistic & Rosicrucian Symbolical Philosophy, p. CXI
· "50. "The force of the obligation is therefore in the obligation
and not in the reason. As a matter of fact, the real reason is
scientific to the last analysis; scientific to a degree beyond the
penetration, up to the present time, of the ‘radiant matter’ of the
Roentgen Ray of Modern Science. The Word concerns the
science of rhythmic vibrations, and is the key to the equilibrium
of all forces and to the harmony of Eternal Nature." Ancient
Mystic Oriental Masonry, p.48.

USING HYPNOSIS TO HEAL THE SLAVE AFTER

ABUSE.
Sometimes the handlers "TRADE DOWN" the symptoms that
result from abuse so that the slave will heal quicker, others
attempt to remove the symptoms immediately. For burns, the
hypnotist can suggest cooling. For other injuries, suggestions
for warmth are applied. For bleeding suggestions for stopping
blood flow are used.

REINFORCING THE PROGRAMMING WITH A

DECOGNITION PROCESS
The programmer has gotten the results that he wants via drugs,
torture, hypnosis, and deception. Now he must build in
back-ups to insure the programming holds up.
The decognition process has 3 steps.

Page 51 ...

Step 1 is to program the slave to get inadequate sleep, eat

poorly, and work hard. It is called REDUCTION OF
ALERTNESS.
Step 2 is to create confusion in the mind via programmed
confusion using a series of alters. The person may go into
revolving from one alter to another, or may have alters coming
and going with conflicting messages so that the person remains
in a PROGRAMMED CONFUSED STATE. In military
"training" conflicting orders would be rapidly issued to confuse
the mind.
Step 3 is to cause the mind to have something simple to focus
on so that it goes into a FLAT STATE. In the military, this
author became aware that the beat of the drum and marching
would shift the mind to a flat state. For centuries the military
have known that they could shut off the critical thinking of the
mind and put their soldiers into a flat, non-thinking state by
training them to the beat of the drum and the sound of marching
feet. Now you know why those British Red-coats marched so
non-thinking into the barrels of American guns in battles such
as New Orleans and Bunker Hill. The mind feels good to shift
into this simple flat state. The brain quits thinking and
withdraws into a state that it quits thinking except for what the
controllers want it to think. This is why marching has been so
important in military training. Chanting and singing will also
move the mind into this flat state, which is why the French
Foreign Legion requires its men -to sing sing sing. When this
author lived in the Indian subcontinent, I saw Hindu holy men
who had meditated in a flat alpha state so long their brains no
longer functioned in anything but a flat state. This non-thinking
flat state is believed by Hindus to be nirvana, but God didn’t
give us minds to throw away and waste, but to use. He gave us
independent thoughts so that we could show our love for Him
by choosing to love Him. God didn’t want brainwashed
followers, which is what some of the churches think God is
calling for. The programmers can induce a mood or state of
mind hypnotically which will make retrieval of something
learned dependent upon going into that particular mood or
state.

And THE BEAT GOES ON...

It is clear that some of the psychologists have NOT got wind
that the mind-control is being exposed. The American Journal
of Clinical Hypnosis had a recent article (10/1996, p. 105-114)
promoting the use of the Wizard of Oz metaphor in hypnosis
with "treatment-resistent" children. For a therapist/hypnotist to
hypnotically use Wizard of Oz material on child victims of
mind-control will get a response from them! The authors of the
article say that they use the authoritarian approach to hypnosis
(p. 107) for "treatment-resistent" children. The Wizard of Oz
metaphor is given on page 108 of the article, which boils down
to: the Straw Man, Tin Man, Lion, Dorothy and Toto were
surprised at their success- and that they already had brains, a
heart, & courage.

HYPNOTIC CODES, CUES AND TRIGGERS

This chapter will provide some more of the hypnotic codes,
cues, triggers or whatever one wants to call these words, noises,
and sensory inputs that manipulate these poor victims turned
into Monarch robots. The reader is encouraged to refer to Vol. 2
for the principle list of codes. Other chapters will explain about
the structures these codes go to, and also the spiritual
dimensions of these codes and structures. Another way to see
things is to recognize that the programmers have created
"power words" to which they have attached memory and
programming. If a de-programmer observes closely the word
usage of the victim, you will begin to spot power words of the
abuser, for instance, "follow the yellow brick road".
Unfortunately, people who are not initiated into the arcane
world of handshakes,
Page 52 ...
grips, codes, signals and cues allow the appearance of these
things to be interpreted from their own frame of reference.
Usually, because these events are not perceived as being
significant, outsiders forget them immediately and therefore
remain oblivious to some of the most overt clues. Once the
reader is aware of the types of programming themes used: the
Wizard of Oz, Alice In Wonderland, and Star Wars and Star
Trek, etc., he will begin to realize our entire American culture
has been transformed into one big mind-control programming
center during the second half of the twentieth century!
Unfortunately for the victim, apparently harmless little things,
for instance, the arrival of flowers to their hospital bedside, a
dead bird on their doorstep, or the words "NEW
BEGINNINGS" and "NEW LIFE" may signify programming
commands. One Illuminati slave in this area has started a large
church called NEW BEGINNINGS. The name was not by
accident. A cipher is when symbols are used to represent
letters. One can use letter frequencies to break ciphers. There
are charts for letter frequencies for the chief languages.
Likewise, there are frequencies to codewords. The Illuminati’s
intelligence agencies have programmed thousands upon
thousands of slaves. There are only so many code words to pick
from and some of these code words are favorites. In the
previous book many of their favorite code words were listed,
but words starting with A’s, B’s, T’s, U’s, V’s, ‘W’s, X’s, and
Y’s, were not given and will be now. (A plus sign indicates
other words are attached to the root word.) From the co-author
Fritz Springmeier’s experience, the following is a continuation
of favorite code words that have been used to program slaves
with:
AARON, ABBY, ABIGAIL, ABLE, ABNER, ABRAHAM,
ACACIA. ACE, ADAM, ADELPHI, AGATE, AIR +,
ALABASTER, ALADIN, ALBERT, ALFA or ALPHA.
ALICE, ALLEY CAT, ALLIGATOR, AMOS, AMY, ANGEL,
ANNA, ANTHONY, APACHE, APOLLO, APOSTLE,
APPLE +, ARCHER, ARGUS, ARK, ARROW, ASK +,
ASTER, ATHANTIS, ATLAS, AUDREY, AURORA.
AUTUMN +, AZTEC, B +, BABE, BABY, BACK ROOM,
BACK BONE, BAD, BAKER, BALD, BAMBI, BANANA,
BANJO, BANKNOTE, BARBARA. BARK, BARON,
BEACH +, BEAST, BECKY, BEE HIVE, BEETHOVEN,
BELSHAZZER, BERMUDA, BERTHA, BETA, BETSY,
BETTY, BEULAH, BEWITCH, BICYCLE, BIG BROTHER,
BINGO, BIRD DOG, BIRTHDAY, BLACK, BLACK +,
BLACK
SHEEP, BLACK WIDOW, BLANCA, BLONDIE,
BLOODHOUND, BLOODY +, BLUE +, BOA. BOB CAT,
BOMBAY, BONANZA. BOODLE, BORAX, BOXCAR,
BRASS +, BRIDGET, BROOMSTICK, BUCCANEER,
BUICK, BULL, BULLDOG, BULLFROG, BUMBLEBEE,
BUNNY, BUTTERCUP, BUZZARD, BYRON, T-BIRD,
TADPOLE, TALISMAN, TAN, TANGO, TANYA, TARA,
TARZAN, TEACUP, TEARDROP, TEEPEE, TERRIER,
TERRY, TESTAMENT, THOR, THREE SISTERS,
THUNDER, THUNDERBOLT, THUNDERCLAP,
THUNDERFLASH, THUNDERSTORM, TIAMET, TIGER,
TILLIE, TITAN, TOM CAT, TONI or TONY, TOPAZE,
TOPSOIL, TORNADO, TOTENKOPF, TRINITY, TURTLE,
UGLY, ULYSSES, UMBRELLA, UNCLE +, UNDERDOG,
UNICORN, UNIFORM, URSULA, VAGABOND, VAMPIRE,
VANCOUVER, VARSITY, VELVET, VENUS, VERONICA,
VICKY, VICTOR, VIKING, VIOLA, VIOLET, VIPER,
VIRGINIA VOODOO, VULCAN, VULTURE, WAGON
WHEEL, WALDORF,
WALLFLOWER, WANDA. WARRIOR, WASP,
WATCHDOG, WEASEL, WHISKEY, WHITE +, WIDOW,
WILD CAT, WILLOW, WINNIE, WINTER +, WIZARD,
WOLF,
WOLF +, WYOMING, X-FORCE, X-RAY, XYZ, YANKEE,
YANKEE DOODLE, YELLOW, YOGI, & YO YO.
Page 53 ...
The intelligence organizations prefer to code a single project
with a single word, and an ongoing operation with two words.
A nickname of something will consist of two words. The reader
needs to bear several things in mind. First, the programmers
generally have intelligent, well sounding codes, that do form
patterns. For instance, a woman’s name from the Bible will be
used as a code, with subparts or subcodes having other female
names from the Bible. Deeper Illuminati parts will have
goddess & god names, and king & queen names for cult alters.
These are the names the handler or cult uses--NOT their access
codes. The codes for slaves follow patterns. There are standard
and unique codes. During the 1940’s through the 1960’s there
were only perhaps a dozen American master programmers
travelling around. (After that the number of programmers
appears to get quite large.) The master programmers would lay
in the foundational programs and codes. They developed the
scripts. The codes and systems used from system to system do
follow patterns. The child’s creativity & their purpose in life
would contribute to the uniqueness of the programming. Each
child visualizes differently and the programmer works with the
child’s mind. The master Illuminati programmer would allow
the handler--the "Daddy" figure in life to have the day-to-day
ownership. The Daddy figure, often the actual pedophile father
of the child victim, would be allowed to put in his own codes in
the sexual part of the system. Some Daddy figures used their
own songs, their own poetry and their own interests in this area
of the coding. In other words, most of the system’s codes will
reflect the master programmer (such as Dr. Mengele), and the
sexual part of the system will reflect the "Daddy" figure’s
programming. The standard method for many of the memory
and alter codes is to use a combination of the date of the child’s
birth along with the date of the trauma for part of the code. A
color will then be attached to this, to produce a
color-alpha-numeric code combination. These are placed into
the internal computers. The standard computer codes were
given in Vol. 2. They can be used to temporarily stop
programming to give a victim some respite and a chance to
regroup. The programmers did not especially care if the front
part of a system is discovered and although they hide the
anarchy (coven level) witchcraft alters, they don’t hide them
like they do the hierarchy alters. The coven alters have
simplistic codes. The hierarchy alters which are placed in
another area of the system and much deeper, receive a great
deal of cabalistic codes and mathematical codes. You will not
find the mathematical codes in the front part of a system. The
internal programming alters have the power to change codes if
they need to protect the programming. They will have to
hypnotically work with alters when they trance out at night. In
other words, most of their programming of front alters will be
done when a system lies down for "sleep"--more accurately
described as lies down "for trance." If the internal alters change
many codes, in their efforts to protect the system, they will
even make it difficult for the handler/programmer to get into
the system. The science of Ciphers developed rotors that
require lines to line up. Some simple schemes using this
principle appear in some Monarch systems. This is part of the
science of structuring. Intelligence codes often come from the
Bible or popular fiction books. The deeper codes are occult
words, often in foreign languages such as Arabic, which is an
important language in the upper occult world. Slaves will be
given COVER NAMES for ops, and often males receive female
names and vice versa. The patterns used in programming slaves
will represent the world view of the programmer. If the
interests of the
Page 54 ...
programmer are known, that will be a major clue to the codes
they like to install. For this reason, it would be worthwhile to
review the access clearance codes that are used for external
security of some agencies, because these same types of
clearance codes may be found in mind-controlled slaves. A
BIGOT list is a list of names of those who have clearance to a
particular set of information. Within a slave there would be
numerous BIGOT lists, because persons (personalities) are
compartmentalized somewhat like the CIA and the Puzzle
Palace (NSA). Agency Codes for clearances include B, C3, K,
L, M, N, 0, T, COSMIC, MAJIC (MJ), SI, SCI, and Staff D.
(As this author has only examined these secret societies from
the outside, some insiders may know of other clearances. In
other words, it would be foolish to think that this clearance
code list is comprehensive, but it has hit upon the major
clearances.) The exercise in judging whether a person can have
access to compartmentalized information is called
ADJUDICATION. A group of persons (agents) working under
one handler is called a NET. The FBI which also uses
mind-controlled slaves likes to call its groups NETS. FUNNY
NAME is intelligence slang for a pseudonym. GRANNY is a
CIA asset used in the US which is not under their direct
funding. The American military-intelligence groups publish a
periodical called JANAP 299 which lists the cover names (code
names) for many of the ongoing projects, groups, or
installations. There are other code books too. C can stand for
Controller or Control, which means the person(s) handling a
mind-controlled slave. A person, who is neither a controller,
nor a slave, nor asset, but who consciously advances the desires
of the controller is called a TRUSTED CONTACT. Sexual
slaves would not be expected to respond to such a term, but a
middle level slave/agent of an intelligence agency might be
familiar with this type of intelligence jargon. The BIRD was a
name for Fort Holabird, MD where intelligence operatives were
trained as well as subjected to mind-control. DIA used the code
name EMERALD for drug-trafficking. Boy, does this code
word have a double meaning. Since the DIA, which is playing
both sides, also is involved with drug smuggling & using
Monarch slaves heavily coded with EMERALD type coding.
Very shortly, we will provide more of the Monarch hypnotic
cues (codes) for the multitude of functions that a Monarch’s
mind must carry out. These cues are reinforced as a conditioned
response by the programmer. In other words the response
becomes so well trained that it becomes automatic. The type of
programming which is placed in a slave varies. Remember, for
intelligence operations the slave will have to have BONA
FIDES, which are codes to allow two people to meet. All slaves
are given CONTROL SIGNS which allow them to indicate via
a code that they are in trouble. A RECOGNITION signal
allows two people to make contact. For instance, the handler
might fly his distinctive sounding plane over a slave’s house in
a pre-arranged signal. It might also be a particular colored
scarf, and a particular set of phrases. A GO-AWAY code is a
prearranged signal that means it is unwise to make contact. The
go-away signal may be simply placing one’s hands in one’s
pocket or turning the porch lights off. A "GO TO GROUND"
signal means to go into hiding. A BLACK ENVELOPE, which
is in actuality a black-colored envelope, has been used by
intelligence to hold the real name of an agent being used. In the
case of multiples, a chief of a station might have a BLACK
ENVELOPE with the actual name of a mind-controlled agent
being used in his field of operations. A MAYDAY BOOK
exists for Illuminati and Intelligence slaves which allows them
to call if they are about to be arrested. A telephone number is
left open for just this
Page 55 ...
purpose. Also common universal Illuminati codes can be used
by the slave to get set free from police and judges.
BACKSTOPPING is an intelligence term for setting up proof
to support the cover stories the intelligence agencies give their
agents and assets. Some of the programmed multiples they use,
need BACKSTOPPING. Within the Jehovah’s Witnesses,
especially their headquarters, the Illuminati uses Enochian
language to program with. With Druidic branches Druidic
symbols are used. With the Jewish groups, Hebrew is used.
Other languages are also used. An Illuminati System can easily
have 6 different languages used as programming codes. The
foreign language codes will be for small parts of a system only.
Special artificial languages are also employed, as well as sign
language. The Illuminati employs signs which they teach some
of their slaves with pick-up sticks. This system of secret
symbols is a series of crosses and horizontal & vertical marks.
These marks can be drawn on anything, and consist of up to 7
lines. They are believed to be used in regards to ritual
dates/ceremonies. These secret signs resemble similar secret
symbols used by the Romany tribe of Gypsies. The masters of
mind-controlled slaves also use a technique where one signal or
code will carry several messages simultaneously. This is called
MULTIPLEXING. We are all aware of the phenomena of how
the brain can selectively hear. The brain can select certain
sounds to pay attention to, such as when a person is in a noisy
room listening to someone, or a football player is trying to hear
the quarterback’s calls, likewise certain alters hear certain
codes/cues/triggers while others don’t. The internal
programmers and reporting alters may internally hypnotically
make telephone noises that are fake, so that host alters loose the
ability to discern what is real and not real, so that they don’t
pay close attention to access calls. This ability of the brain is
manipulated in MULTIPLEXING.
MONARCH MIND-CONTROL CODES
contents:
A. ALPHA (basic) ... p. 55
B. BETA (sexual) ... 56
C. CHI (return to cult) ... 56
D. DELTA (assassination) ... 56
E. EPSILON (animal alters) ... 57
F. OMEGA (internal computers) ... 57
G. GAMMA (demonology) ... 57
H. HYPNOTIC INDUCTIONS ... 57
I. JANUS-ALEX CALL BACKS (end-times) ... 58
J. OMICRON ... 58
K. TWINNING (teams) ... 58
L. THETA (psychic warfare) ... 58
M. RHYMES, SONGS, TONES, etc ... 59
N. ZETA (snuff films) ... 60
0. Sample codes ... 61
P. Catholic programming ... 62
Q. MENSA programming ... 62
R. HAND SIGNALS ... 62
S. Scriptures in programming ... 63
U. Alien Programming ... 63

A. ALPHA (basic)
· Basic Commands. (These basic commands are also found used
in many slaves, although there will be exceptions to
everything.) Many of the basic structures/codes will be put in
using a sensory deprivation tank and LSD. For the most
foundational levels of a system, the programmers may use the
Hebrew letters associated with the attributes of God and the
angel names. This can also be worked into English, as there is a
cabalistic equivalent in the letters B through K for the Hebrew
letters associated with God’s names used in magic to conjure
angels. In the basic Alpha structuring, Illuminati slaves will
have stars as power sources, and the ditty Twinkle, Twinkle
Little Star will pertain to this programming. The Hansel &
Gretal story is used for obedience programming.
Page 56 ...
Another story line that is used in programming is the Cassandra
and Apollo myth. Common access triggers are "HELLO
PRINCESS’, 3 knocks, flashes of light, tones, and sequences of
blank phone calls.
If the slave leaves their answering machine on, a recording may
be left "IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO MAKE A PHONE CALL
PLEASE HANG UP & TRY YOUR 911" accompanied by a
beep-beep-beep. This activates a program within the slave to
call a prearranged phone number for further instructions.

B. BETA (sexual)
· SEXUAL ALTERS---most of the following codes are for
deep sexual alters. In Illuminati Systems these are called Beta
alters, in CIA systems they create Beta models whose primary
function is to provide sex, usually perverted sex and S&M for
the perverts who run our secret government and visible
government. BETA models are those who are primary job is
sexual, such as service as a Presidential Model (sex slave for a
President). These System models may be numbered BETA 1,
BETA 2...BETA 601, etc. Sexual programming for espionage
and seduction, such as is done at Disneyland, may well involve
the use of hundreds of dolls, such as Wonderwoman, Genie,
Barbie type dolls. The names/codes would tie in with these
dolls.
TIME CLOCK programming is placed in to cover the time that
the sexual alters were on a mission, so that they can switch
back to the - front and nothing be remembered.
Colors attached to sequences of numbers have been used for
some of the Beta programming. For other sexual operatives, the
intelligence agencies trigger them via specific sequences of
chess moves.
Betty Boop programming is used sexually. Betty Boop was a
1930’s cartoon character who was an attractive "vivacious
vamp". She was described in one cartoon as the "kitty from
Kansas City." She had cartoons about Gigolos, Bimbos, Little
Red Riding Hood, Mother Goose rhymes which were used as
programming themes. Plays on words such as "CHESS-NUT"
were used in the cartoons.
C. CHI (return to cult)
Chi programming uses a lot of idiosyncratic phrases, and little
ditties. Some of the nursery rhymes listed in the song section
will be Chi programming. Some of the Chi programming has
been listed in the Alpha programming section of Vol. 2.
The number
of hang-up
calls may
serve as a
code, incl.
when the
hang-up calls
happen.

D. DELTA
(assassination)
· Delta alters
--are activated
to kill by the
following
three things:
seeing
specific
clothing,
items held in a
persons hand,
and particular
words. Since
these items
would specific
for a
particular
murder there
is no
particular
specifics that
can be given.
Page 57 ...
It is thought by some
people that the
following TV ad may
have been used to
trigger Hinkley when
it was time for
Hinkley to attack
President Ronald
Reagan.

One man who was

programmed as an
Delta-type assassin
by the NSA in the NJ
region, was
programmed to be
activated for
assassination mission
via the David
Letterman program,
Clinton’s speeches
such as his speech
touching on the
baseball strike with
"little kid" wording,
and by several movie
stars (Arnold
Schwartzenegger,
Slyvester Stallone,
etc.). I Dream of
Jeannie
programming is used
for assassination, as
well as at the CIA’s
Farm the song Old
McDonald’s Farm is
used with
programming done
to CIA assassins.
Distinctive jewelry
& clothes. Emerald
ear rings used as a
signal to others that a
message was being
carried. Emeralds
mean drugs, rubies
mean prostitution,
diamonds
(rhinestones)
presidential model
work. Red, White &
Blue worn
sometimes by
presidential models.

E. EPSILON (animal alters)

F. OMEGA (internal computers)
The Omega programming works along with an Executive
Control Board (or Grand Druid Council) and Internal
programmers. The Executive Control Board is associated with
both numbers of the clock, and precious gems and metals such
as "9 O’CLOCK GOLD".
For G. Gamma programming see Cisco’s section on
"Programming, Foundations’s

H. HYPNOTIC INDUCTIONS
NICRO NECTRUM NECTO--take one back to one’s "true
time period". When the child victim is hypnotically inducted by
counting numbers during programming by a Doctor and a
Mother-of-Darkness, these two will reassuring they child that
things are O.K. and sweet talking to the child as it is inducted.
Page 58 ...

I. JANUS-ALEX CALL BACKS (end-times)

END-TIME ACTIVATION CODES
Most slaves have end-time programming. The programming to
activate a slave’s end-time programming often runs pages upon
pages of coded messages. A number of Monarch slaves have
been de-programmed enough that they began accessing and
spewing out pages and pages of these activation codes. In the
end times, there appears to be a great deal of color coding for
operations. Many of the people who are taking part in the end
times events are not American. For instance, the different lists
of people to round up are categorized by color. The Red list in
America are anti-NWO opposition leaders to be executed
approx. 2 weeks before martial law. The blue list are anti-NWO
order people who will be programmed or killed in the process.
The yellow list is people to be rounded up for reeducation
camps after martial law. Other countries apparently have
different color codes. The red & blue lists have been
distributed, & are periodically updated. The blue routes have
already been marked by blue patches of color to guide those
transporting prisoners when martial law is declared in the U.S.
Within Monarch slaves, some of them apparently have an
internal crystal/and or rocks that are programmed to explode at
a certain point in time--thus releasing the victim’s end time
programming. The internal crystal (mental image) contains at
least the four basic colors, red, green, blue, purple. One sample
of part of end time programming was given in the previous Vol.
2 book. Still another example is as follows:
BB 243-ABCD-XXZ² (blue ray)
CC-458 ABCD-42T (red ray)
CD-379 ABCD-H1² (yellow ray)
CE-211 -ABCD-JKL (green ray)
CF-531-ABCD-ZZU (purple ray)
TMFT.47 ZONES 7-12
17876747270 OCEAN SIDE
PORT 18,22,34,41 CONTACT
YELLOW RAY SHOVE 79230 A2
TO RIGHT SIDE DAGGER HANGS
LOW ON PART SIDE FISH
SCHOOL CLOSED ROOM 37-56
RAILS EXIT END
17876747270 COL. BLACK PATCH
TO MALL 76747270 THIEF
AZT FMT BZT CET
11,4,6,9,32,101, 70
YELLOW FLAGS AT HALF MAST
YELLOW DOG ON RUN
BLUE FISH AT HOME
[This program is related to a slave contacting
other slaves in some end time operation.]
A team leader will have a down line of around 4 people--which
are coded red ray, yellow ray, green ray, blue ray. When the
activation code hits a slave team leader during the end times,
they will in turn activate their people, who in turn will have
people who are team leaders and have a down line. At least two
false callback alarms will be sounded (tested) before the real
one.

J.>> Omicron programming—relates to programming of slaves

for the Combination (between Intelligence- the Mafia and
Government.)
K. TWINNING (teams)
L. THETA (Psychic warfare)
The following is only speculatory, but worth taking note of.
This author believes that some of the Theta models got chess
programming. Within the system of Enochian magic is the
magical system of Enochian Chess. The Golden Dawn has been
identified as one of the groups carrying out mind-
Page 59 ...
control. Some Golden Dawn leaders have recently put out a
reference book Enochian Chess of the Golden Dawn by Chris
Zalewski (St. Paul: Llewellyn Pub, 1994). Enochian chess is
played with four players, on a chess board that is divided up
into four squares, one for each of the magical watchtowers of
air, water, earth, and fire. It has only been since 1992 that
researchers within the Golden Dawn (specifically the New
Zealand branch which is called the Emerald of the Sea)
reinvented a set of rules to play enochian chess. The moves for
Enochian chess may have been used in recent years as a
programming script. Since only a few people have mastered the
game, and since the game is more than a game, it is magic, it
would stand to reason that the temptation would be there to use
it as a programming script if the programmer knew the game.

M. SONGS & NURSERY RHYMES

· What follow is a list of Nursery Rhymes Used As Triggers, &
Songs which have Monarch programming meanings &, such as
access parts, or soliciting a behavior or thinking.
NURSERY RHYMES
The Illuminati create imaginary worlds for many of the deeper
alters to live in. They keep these alters living in such unreality
and nonsense that deeper alters have a difficult time separating
their subjective programmed reality from the objective reality
of the outside world, which doesn’t understand them. Nursery
rhymes function well for programming in messages. Often
these nursery rhymes are distorted slightly to serve their
programming purpose. Some of the programming distortions
and uses of these nursery rhymes are provided below. Major
corporations and advertising groups working for the Network
place nursery rhymes into their television ads. These nursery
rhymes are constructed in the ad to activate on certain slaves
which usually are sleepers. Some were given in Vol. 2, here are
some additional nursery rhymes beyond those listed in Vol. 2:
A Tisket A Tasket
Baa, Baa, Black Sheep (used for money laundering scripts, and
drug money, drug carrying scripts)
Bye, Baby Bunting (used with actual rituals where the slave
child is placed within a skin, cocoon programming with a
butterfly coming forth etc.)
Diddle, Diddle Dumpling
Ding, Dong Bell (Dr. Mengele liked to use this--message: don’t
disturb the mouse that runs the internal system clock.)
Fa Fe Fi Fo Fum (Movement within the system’s bean sprouts
in the system, and also a death threat.)
Farmer in the Dell, The (Used by the CIA for a serious
program)
Georgy Porgy
Gingerbread Man
Hey! Diddle Diddle! (used for astral projection programming)
Hot-Cross Buns!
Humpty Dumpty (used for shattering the mind programming)
I’m a Gold Lock (used to instill cover programming to hide the
truth)
I Love Little Pussy (kitten programming)
Jack, Be Nimble
Jack and Jill
Jack Sprat (possibly cannibalism programming)
Little 80-Beep (come home to Papa programming)
London Bridge (This was used at the Presideo and other sites
for learning the chants, and the spells. At the Presideo it was
used with barber pole programming. They all fall into a stupor
at the end.)
North Wind, The
Queen of Hearts, The (swearing an obedience oath
programming)
Rub-a-Dub-Dub (refers to the 3 internal programmers)
Page 60 ...
There was an Owl
Three Blind Mice
Three Little Kittens
It should be pointed out that the mind-control programmers
have long ago discovered the power of a rhyme in the mind.
Rhymes have a hypnotic quality to them. An example of how
rhyming was used by internal programming alters to reprogram
an alter wanting free is given in Daniel M. Traver’s book (Phd
dissertation) Dissociative Disorders and Mind Control.
Wichita, KS: Daniel Traver, 1996, p. 52,
"What the hell man/ you can’t stand! a winter worse yet/ you’ll
cry and you’ll die/ as we place the mind-set/ you won’t know
what to do now/ you’ll hear every rhyme/ and you’re cravings
will be as an addict in crime...." This rhymed program would
accomplish its goal of wearing down the alter and bringing that
alter into line.

SONGS
Yankee Doodle (used for sexual obedience programming "mind
the step" and the word "girls" was changed to "boys" to make
"and with the boys be handy". "Yankee Doodle keep it up" was
ref ramed to mean "slave yank yankee doodle (the penis)
sexually up." MTV is blatantly using programming
rock-and-roll songs. Aleister Crowley is featured in some of
these. Maiden (a satanic rock and roll band) blatantly places the
words "POWER SLAVE" on one of their CD covers along with
snakes and an enlightening pyramid. Anton LaVey has had an
MTV song video shown, where he sings in detail how he is
going to make the listener into a sex-slave, etc. etc. Some of
this is blatantly mind-control in the open, it is so open it is
dismissed by many of the public.

TONES & CORDS

In the Vol. 2 book, it was written about how telephone tones are
used for codes. These type of codes tie in with the computer
and the lower levels, such as the dungeon. You will find that
access to items has been encoded by using the telephone tones
to spell them backwards. For instance, if we were to take castle,
find the numbers that correspond to C=1, A=1, S=8, etc. on the
telephone, and then put those tones out backward. But to make
this code unbreakable the programmers will add something like
some piano cords--something that can still be played out via the
tones. To make it further unbreakable the programmers will
have a code (such as a combination of cards) assigned to that
level which also must be toned in. An example of this in its
totality would be 14 tones + 3 cords to open up a person’s
dungeon (hell pit the lowest level). In other words, such an
access would take the programmer from a distance about 11/2
mm. to open up the dungeon, whatever time he needed to work
in it and 1 1/2 mm. to close it down. A 5 mm. phone call might
be sufficient. This gives the programmers the ability to
internationally use telephone tones to access deeper items
within the victim’s mind. And as standard practice the reversal
of the code closes down that part of the mind, and gets the
programmer out.

RINGS, CREDIT CARDS, TOKENS etc.

A ring with a snake swallowing its tail called Ouraboros
signifies rank in the Illuminati. Rings, credit cards, business
cards, tokens and keys are all used as codes, triggers and
signals. For instance, one slave had an old distinctive skeleton
key. In another instance, a slave was given a token from a
particular business as a BONA FIDE. In another instance, the
BONA FIDE was a programmer’s business card from his
notional job. In another instance, a particular credit card would
get the user into particular parts of the slave’s system.
Page 61 ...
Zeta is the sixth letter, and it’s ancient meaning was a sacrifice.
(These codes are not known by the author.)

O. SAMPLE CODES FOR ALTERS.

As an example of the type of code names (called operational
cryptonyms) used for an intelligence asset one intelligence
asset had the following cryptonyms: AECHALK, ARINIKA,
CHICKADEE, HERO, IRONBARK, RUPEE, & YOGA.
Monarch I.D. code reviewed:
These codes are purely a representative model-not any
particular real system. The overall system code at times
consists of [birthdate + programming site codes + birth order +
number of gener- ations family was in the Illuminati.] For our
hypothetical system Mary we have the hypothetical overall
system code of: 6-13- 51- 14 - 02 - 12. In order to give the
codes for a hypothetical alter system we will have to explain
some things as we go. The Programmers have for each slave
both medical programming files, and a grey or black binder
with the programmed access, trigger, codes & cues, &
structure. A typical Illuminati system will be a cube (although
spheres and pyramids are also used). The principle alters will
be the "a" alters. A typical section of alters will consist of a 13
x 13 grid of alters. These are alters who live in a world together
and must function together. A 13 x 13 section will have 13
families of "a" through "in" alters. The "a" alters will be the
primary alters that the Programmers will interact with. The
Programmer may call up an "a" alter and ask it to go get the "c"
alter in its family, rather than directly asking for it. This initial
page of alter codes will be the primary or "a" alters. If we are
dealing with a 13 x 13 x 13 cube of alters, then the initial page
has 13 "a" alters of each section. Each of these alters will have
an access code which will often include the following
components: AN ASSIGNED COLOR + AN ALPHA
NUMERIC CODE + A PERSONALIZED MAGICAL NAME.
This will equal 1/3 their access code. These code words must
be repeated three times to pull the alter up. However, if an alter
is trained well, and hears his master’s voice, an alpha-numeric
code can pull the alter up. For many of the alters, the reversal of
their access code puts them back to sleep. This is an important
point, because some alters would be dangerous to leave in
control of the body. The "a" alters are regular alters. Many of
them have been hypnotically age advanced to see themselves as
teenagers or adults. Sometimes "b" and "c" alters are also aged.
The "d" through "in" alters are generally left as they were split
and most of them are infantile, with little concept of how old
they are. The little ones will be the ones who often remember
the programming very well, and know things about the system.
The top alters will also sometimes receive personal names from
their handler. This is in addition to all their codes. If the alter is
responsive to its master, the personal name might pull the alter
up too. Do all of the alters get charted? There are several
groups of alters which get charted separate from the rest or
don’t get charted at all. Because of the competition and distrust
between the different programmers, they often place in secret
back doors into the person’s mind that only they know about.
Worlds of secret alters loyal and devoted to the programmer
may be built into the system and not appear on the regular
charts. The core, and some of the primal splits from the core
will not appear on the regular grids. They will be placed on a
separate sheet, and their codes will be in some magical
language. The Illuminati
Page 62 ...
commonly employs 20 magical languages, and Hebrew, Latin
and Greek are also often used for charting the core and its
primal splits. Enochian is a good example of a magical
language used by the Illuminati. Some alters will be created
solely by the slave in order to cope with life. Hour glass alters
have entire sentence access codes. Deaf & blind alters need
their access code signed on their hands by moving their fingers
up and down, etc. End time alters may have access codes that
may entail reading an entire page. Reporting alters are often
small children, that are hidden in each section, and may require
slaps to the face or jabs with a needle to pull them up. Spinner
kittens will be accessed via their mama cat, who acts like a
Madam in a "cat house". The codes for this was given in the
Beta section codes of Vol.2.
Telephone tones are frequently used to be able to key in (that is
access or trigger) parts of the computer program matrix.
Dominoes also are used for the computer programming. The
dominoes are put in so that the programmers can get a domino
effect, if they want to set off a series of programs. Dominoes
and flashing sequences of lights were used to train the child to
automatically respond to a certain pattern of dots.

P. Catholic Programming (by Jesuits etc.)

KEYS TO THE KINGDOM = world domination by mind
control
In the 1940’s, the Jesuit branch of the Illuminati placed tatoos
onto their mind-controlled slaves. These tatoos consisted of the
sacred heart with a rose & a dagger, & were generally placed
upon the left hand. The Jesuits have discontinued the practice
of tattooing their slaves. Now all types of people are using this
sacred heart tatoo.
The Rite to Remain Silent is a programming trauma which is a
satanic refersal of the Catholic Mass. The VOW OF SILENCE
is a keep quiet program activated by "THE WALLS HAVE
EARS & THE PLANTS HAVE EYES SO YOUR SILENCE
IS TANTAMOUNT TO SUCCESS." It is explained to the
victim that the sea shells & the plants have the ability to hear,
and that a sensitive occultist (programmer) can psychically pick
up what the plants and sea shells hear. "MAINTAIN IT" --is a
command to maintain the Vow of Silence. "MAINTAIN IT &
LISTEN."-- a command to keep silent & listen to a command.
"ENTER INTER INNER DIMENSION TWO" is a standard
Jesuit infinity program (2 is a sacred voodoo no.) Pontifax is a
demon &/or alter placed in Jesuit systems.
BABY BREATH, BLACK ROSE, and WHITE ROSE are
codes/triggers that are all used in Jesuit mind control. The Baby
Breath and the black rose relate to programming having to do
with death. The WHITE ROSE is a trigger to cue a person to
release programming. The black rose is also used by the Mafia.
The black rose was also used by George Bush, drug kingpin for
the Illuminati, on his no. 1 helicopter for the upholstery pattern.
When the Catholic Priests do the handsignal genuflection
across their chest, this has the second meaning which is a
programming meaning of north, south, east and west.

Q. Mensa Programming (by MENSA)

The MENSA codes are sequences of numbers.

R. HAND SIGNALS
Masons and monastic orders who program are very keen on
hand signals. A very skilled handler can do morse code with
winks and eye rolls.
Rotating the hands around each other and then gesturing with
the hands toward the person with both hands means--"did you
get the signal?"
Page 63 ...
Sign of distress. Arms raised over the head with palms forward.
Then lowing the arms to a bent position with the hands at head
level, and then lowing the hand to chin level, and then dropping
them to the side.
Drawing the right hand across the throat with the thumb of the
hand pointing to the throat. (used in connection with oaths,
such as fidelity to death.)
· Sign of faith. Hand on the heart.
· Sign of plucking out the heart.
· Sign of Reverence.
· Sign of Satan made over solar plexus.
· Sign of touching the crown of the head.
· Sign of two hands pointing to the solar plexus.
· Sign of Preservation. Consists of placing one hand over the
heart, and raising the other to form a right angle at the elbow,
with the hand pointing to heaven.
The movie "Dune" showed male & female Ilium, hierarchy
hand greetings, as well as showing signet rings, which are
indeed often worn on pinky fingers. (The movie also shows the
Karat goddess, how a man becomes a Grand Master by learning
control of the demons, astral projection through the spheres
which are conquered by the Grand Master, & control of the int.
weather, etc.)

S. SCRIPTURES USED IN PROGRAMMING (cont. from

Vol. 2. chap. 10)
· 1 KGS 7:21 --talks about 2 pillars on the outside of the
Temple. The pillars of Joachin and Boaz are important to
Freemasonry and are built in the slaves mind at an intermediate
level. Joachin is a white pillar
of light associated with fire. It is easy to see how this
association could be built by certain traumas. Boaz is the
shadowy pillar of darkness and is also associated with water. A
dark water torture would make
this association. The two pillars represent the two sides of the
Illuminati’s "the Force". Between them is the door to the
Illuminati’s House of God.
· 1 KGS 10:18--description of Solomon’s Temple used to build
the imagery and the lion guards to the internal Temple
programmed into victims.
· 23rd Psalm--used as a cue to signal a ritual time.
· Song of Solomon--Used in the ritual of the Great Rite, a ritual
pertaining to the Middle Earth, where the High Priest &
Priestess join in sexual union as the God & Goddess creating
fertility for the land.
· Ezekiel chap. 1 and chapter 12 are being used for endtime
callback codes.

T. ALIEN PROGRAMMING
· Blue beams of light are used as a hypnotic induction for slaves
who are given the cover story of being abducted by aliens.
· The All-Seeing Eye is used to represent the planet Sirius.
Sirius is important to the Hermetic magicians, and some of the
programmers are deeply into hermetic magic. Satan is said to
come from Draco or Sirius, esp. the dog star Canis major.
Masonic programming may well have the "blazing star"
portrayed in the programming as a pentagram, with the name
Sirius. Sirius may represent the Master, the creator of the
system in some systems where the programmer is steeped in
Masonic philosophy. A sickle may be involved with the Garden
of Eden story for some victims of this type of programming,
because supposedly the Golden Age ended with a sickle
splitting heaven from earth. The ability of the handlers signals
to the slave in so many mediums makes it difficult to
communication and accessing, to send different prevent
communication and accessing.
Page 64

Program Codes During 1972-1976

for Dr. Green
One mind-controlled slave, using her photographic memory,
managed to sneak into the programming files of her
programmer, who went by the code name Dr. Green. Her
information was included in the book U.S. Government Mind
Control Experiments On Children which was compiled by Jon
Rappoport and presented before a congressional committee &
put on public record. The co-authors recognize some of the
programs. In the late 60’s and early 70’s, all the programming
was revamped. The best programs were identified and then
used. The continual revamping, editing and modernizing of
programs has continued to strengthen the mind-control. The
recovering victim’s name is Chris De Nicola, b. 7/62. She
worked full-time at Disneyland for 7 years (from ’83-’90). Her
father Donald Richard Ebner worked with her major
programmer who was Dr. Green. She received standard
Illuminati trauma-based mind-control. In 1970, she received
Radiation Experiments on her neck, throat, & chest. In 1972,
the experiments concentrated on her chest, and in 1975 the
radiation tests concentrated on her uterus. She was programmed
in Kansas City Univ., Tucson, AZ, & in the desert in AZ.
During her programming, the assistants were careless and she
was able to sneak into the Programmer’s office and look at the
files with her photographic memory. She was caught twice in
the files, and tortured, but simply used her ability to nest
memories to their disadvantage. Chris was such a poor
programming subject, so much so that finally the programmer
tried to trigger her suicide programs to activate, but they failed
and she managed to survive. Suicide alters repeatedly tried to
kill her body, and they came very close to killing her. On 3
occasions she had to have her stomach pumped, and one
occasion when the paramedics found her she’d stopped
breathing. She has survived her suicide programming countless
times, praise the Lord, and provided what she saw with her
photographic memory. The following codes were remembered
by Chris without the aid of hypnosis. Cisco and this author
recognize some of these programs. What Chris saw were the
files. Each program (script) is given a name and then its file has
a standard access code assigned to it. Chris saw the standard
access codes. The standard method for coding a program is to
use the DAY OF BIRTH CODE, THEN THE DAY OF THE
TRAUMA that puts in the program into the slave’s mind, and
then the STANDARD ACCESS CODE. Evidently, Chris got
into the file with level D programs, which means she was
looking at programs 4 levels deep. Comments about the
programs are this author’s and reflect his understanding, and
may be subject to correction. [Spellings are exactly as program
names were spelled.]

Program Name Standard Code

Relevance D-1000
Kick-It-Back D-1010
Cross Fire D-1011
Sophis. Electromagnetic Fields D-1012
(D-1012 makes the slave think they have an electrical field on
them. In order to cover their electrical field tests, that they
actually do place on slaves, they have the ability to confuse the
slave, and prevent detection by activating a programmed
abreaction that makes the field seem real, when it doesn’t exist.
This prevents detection.)
Gorilla Warfare D-1013
Retreat D-1 014
Nautical Science D-1015
River Runs Deep D-1016 (D-1016 is a powerful program which
tells the slave that there is no escape, because the programming
runs deep through every fiber of the person.)
Educated Mentality D-1017 (D-1017 is a program to allow the
slave to look intelligent when needed.)
Glass House D-1018
Corporate Extrapulation D-1019
Closing In D-1 020
Frog Man D-2000
Catastrophic Indifferences D-2020
Quality Control D-2030
Protocol Virus D-2040
Operation 2000 D-2050 (This relates to Project 2000, which is
end time programming.)
Pro-Life-Go D-2060
Conspiracy Action D-2070
Verified Suggestion D-2080
Finish Line Protocol D-2080
Fraternity Leads D-2090
Rotten Egg D-3000
Kaiser Confrontation D-3010
Co-Op Protocol D-4701
Forensic Criterion D-4702
Mediator Response D-4703
Mentor Divisible D-4704
Biopsy Synchroization D-4705 [This is a very harsh program.]
OSH-AMP-RIE D-5000
D.O.A. D-6000
Laser Documentation D-7000
Freak Out [just what it sounds like] D-7010
-[From here on I will select specific programs, and will not
review the
entire list of programs that she saw the files for.]
Foolish Games D-7060
Periodic Mind Lapse [a forget code] D-7080
Creepy Crawlers D-8040
Shock Permanence [to shock oneself] D-9000
One-For-All D-95452
[punish all for 1 alter’s misbehavior]
Counter-Transference DIA-5001
Border-Line-Schizophrenic DIA-5009
[If the slave misbehaves, they can be triggered to act
schizophrenic
& get themselves incarcerated into a mental hospital for
prgrmmg.]
Lens-Reverse-Angle DIA-5011
Canary-Sings DIA-5015
[reporting alters tattle-tale or an alter sings a script.]
Suicidal Mission [just as it sounds] DIA-5017
Mission Completed [go to "sleep" prgm] DIA-5018
Train-Wreck-Perception DIA-5021
Starvation Tactics [starvation prgm] DIA-5022
Bare-Metric Pressure Process DIA-5023
Fundamental Theology [rel. cover prgm] DIA-5025
Project 2000 412-2000
[This is end-time programming. The word project followed by
a number usually refers to the date the project must be
completed. Standard methodology for coding then would be
that on 4/12/2000
this end-time programming must be completed.] -codes not
remembered for these programs which she saw in files-
Candy [candyland programming]
False Memory Syndrome [even in c. 1973 they were setting up
the False Memory Syndrome campaign to take down their
opposition.]
Forced Brain Wave Activity
Frenzied State [just as it sounds]
Call-Of-Wild [survival techniques]
Hocus Pocus [magic programming]
Mass [cath. mass programming]
Phoe-net-ical Difficulties [obvious]
Self Mutilation [obvious]
Van-der-built [related to Vanderbilts III. family]
Warped-Speed-9 [Star Trek programming]
-(Her med. file no.s of radiation lab experiments are given
chptr. 8)-

Back to Contents Chapter 5

Page 37 ...

CHAPTER 4.
SCIENCE NO. 4 - HYPNOSIS

HYPNOSIS & the OCCULT

From the Egyptian Sleep Temples to ancient shamans, the occult world has been
putting hypnosis (including self-hypnosis) to work for centuries, even millennia.
During the 18th and 19th century, the Masonic lodges put hypnotism to use. In 1882
Jean-Martin Charcot, considered the world’s greatest neurologist at the time, gave
hypnotism respectability by publishing his own studies, which included recovering A.
trauma memories blocked by amnesia, and B. memories presumed permanently lost
by organic amnesia. At that time, a group of french medical doctors located at Nancy
just a 100 kilometers southeast of the Mothers-of-Darkness castle, had a school of
hypnosis that influenced doctors all over the world including Freud. These french
doctors had caught on to the power of suggestion to the subconscious.

In the 1780’s, Marquis de Puysegur was putting people into deep hypnotic trances
and then commanding them to forget the hypnotic session. James Esdaile in his
book Mesmerism in India & its Practical Application in Surgery and Medicine. (pub.
Longman, Brown, Green, Longmans, 1846) pp. xxiii-xxiv, describes and lists
hundreds of surgeries (some quite serious) which he did in India using hypnosis as
his anesthesia. He found his patients could heal quickly and experienced no pain
under hypnosis. In modern medical history, every type of surgery has been
successfully carried out without drugs and "without pain" by using hypnosis. In the
VoL 2 book, it was brought out that perceptive researchers have figured out that the
pain under hypnosis is placed by the mind into a dissociated piece of the mind,
which is essentially what MPD (DID) is all about. Tests have shown that hypnosis to
reduce pain does not work by the brain releasing endorphins (see Hilgard, 1975 &
Spiegel and Leonard, 1986). The mind simply diverts the pain into a "mental floppy
disk" that it doesn’t look at. In the early 1880’s, occult researcher Edmund Gurney
found he could give post-hypnotic commands that would be successfully carried out
in the future. What amazed him was that subjects would fulfill commands exactly as
commanded at a particular time on a particular day without even looking at the
clock. Various european doctors, too numerous to mention, discovered in the 1880’s
that they could cure various diseases via hypnosis. The cure rate was not 100%, but
significant enough to make hypnosis an option in some treatments.

This author (Fritz) has reported that programmed multiples are able to increase the
temperature of one body part, or one side of their body. Cisco, the co-author of this
book, when she hits certain programs, turns ice-cold on the right of her body and
burns on the left side. It was with great interest then when this author located the
1920 work of hypnotist J.A. Hadfield who published his work in Lancet, 2:

pp. 68-69, under the title "The influence of suggestion on body temperature."Using
hypnosis, Hadfield could get a subject to drop his temperature in one hand to 680
while the other hand stayed at 94º. Here is the paper trail to what they have been
doing to programmed multiples for half a century. Today, the occult world uses
sophisticated hypnotic techniques as one of their programming tools to create
mind-controlled slaves. The slave’s mind is structured into a robotic-computer
controlled by a master. Parts (alters) of the slave will learn how to trance
(self-hypnosis) on cue. The better conditioned a subject is to hypnosis, the easier
they fall into trance. The victims of mind-control are all very conditioned for
Page 38 ...

hypnosis, even though their programmers then hide that under post-hypnotic
suggestions that no-one else is to be allowed to hypnotize the slave. The ancient
saying is that a picture is worth a thousand words. In conveying suggestions to the
subconscious mind, the occult world of black magic and the programmers are very
aware of the power that picture images convey. The good programmer will be able
to utilize images to give him tremendous leverage in hypnotic techniques. An alter
which needs to create something in the mind can be prepped with images, and can
be asked to borrow images, such as borrow such and such quality from this person
or animal. The child alter who becomes a Lion after eating a dead lion’s parts can
imagine the qualities (speed, agility, fierceness) of the lion easily. The image of the
lion is worth a thousand words to the hypnotic programmer. If the programmer
wants an alter that is trained in karate to be agile, quick and fierce, they don’t mind
dehumanizing that alter to become a lion or tiger. One element of why this is done is
the power of the image for hypnotic commands. The deeper Illuminati alters will be
highly skilled in self-hypnosis & the ability to change at will into various states of
consciousness. This is part of their witchcraft training in order to practice witchcraft.

UNDERSTANDING THE BASICS ABOUT HYPNOSIS

The Programmer is attempting to produce suggestions that the unconscious mind

will accept. If the subconscious mind accepts the programmer’s suggestions then
the suggestion becomes reality to the victim, just as if the victim had experienced it
as reality over a period of time. The programmer, if he is good, will be able to get
the subjects imagination involved. He will also build rapport with his victim. For
instance, the master might hypnotically stroke the forehead of kitten sexual alters
before giving them their code to go back into the mind. The good
handler/programmer is not simply working off of fear, but he wants to have the
trust and cooperation of the victim. This is similar to how Hitler was both feared and
trusted by the German masses. In fact, hypnosis was an element in Hitler’s control
of the masses. Nazi propaganda films showing Hitler and other Nazi leaders giving
directives always have the Hitler Youth’s actions slightly speeded up so that
subconsciously the viewer is taught obedience to their commands.

The programmer will not tell the slave something is hypnotically happening until it
has already happened. He will use the art of timing his words at the correct time, of
using repetition, of combining several mutually supporting suggestions, and of
having total confidence in his words to add strength to his hypnotic commands.
Muscular rigidity and deep breathing are one way to increase suggestibility within
the victim being programmed via hypnosis. The programmer will also use other
hypnotic tricks, such using his own body language to suggest something, and to use
what is called a "voice roll". When the programmer moves his voice into a
monotonous patterned style he is using the roll voice. Words are delivered at the
rate of 45 to 60 beats a minute. To empower the suggestions, the programming
hypnotist uses the victim’s five senses. The victim visualizes something using his
five senses, such as the imagery of the holy spirit (done in mockery of God) and then
breathes this imagery in. For instance, the victim breathes in the message of the
programming and roots it deep deep down into the oak tree. (In VoL 2, it was
explained that the oak tree is the structure that the programs are attached to.)

THE POWER OF HYPNOSIS

During the hypnotic trance, the human mind is at the pinnacle of its ability to quickly
learn. What might take years to learn and

Page 39 ...
weighing the evidence, will be accepted quickly by the victim’s subconscious. The
mind strings together a series of "cognitive mental demons?? that is a series of
mental processes--similar to how a computer programmer writes a program. These
strings have been called K-lines. Much of what the mind does is simply activations of
various K-lines (a habitual ways of doing things), so that the mind can focus its
limited conscious thinking. The mind also takes micronemes (such things as a
particular aroma, or a particular intonation for which it has no word, but for which it
has a series of sensory clues) and builds these into K-lines too. Once a K-line works,
the mind in order to prevent itself from making reckless changes, gives priority to
those K-lines. Under hypnosis, the mind willingly allows the hypnotist to change
K-lines without the normal unconscious conservative restraints. Under behavior
modification techniques, abnormal K-lines (that is K-lines that wouldn’t normally
develop) can be forced into the mind.

A hypnotic suggestion given to normal subjects lasts about a week, so reinforcement

is helpful. The programming suggestions are layered in using methods far more
powerful than mere hypnosis, and are locked up in dissociated subconscious states,
so that these programming scripts which are layered in are almost impossible for
the victim to be aware of to challenge them. The emotions of women have been
found to slightly detract from the hypnotic trance, while male victims take the
hypnotic words in an unemotional matter-of-fact way. The male victims will simply
accept the programming and directly comply. That is one reason why the suicide
programs that are layered into the men are so deadly. The female victims of
programming may emotionally play the suicide out and survive; the male slaves
when they trigger suicide programs, comply with the programming in an
unemotional direct way. How deep is the slave’s trance? There are tests for trance
depths, but from what this author can ascertain, sometimes it can be difficult to
determine exactly where the mind is at. If a memory is laid in at a particular trance
level, the slave may be able to avoid an abreaction later on by going above or below
the memory’s trance level. A deep level, where for instance, the person can’t move a
body part due to hypnotic suggestion, would be called the "cataleptic stage" or
level.

UNDERSTANDING THE DEEPER MECHANICS of HYPNOSIS

Let us suppose for the sake of discussion that as you are reading this, it is supper
time. You are hungry. You’ve starved yourself all day, and even though you are on a
strict diet, you are trying to think of a good restaurant to go to. Now let’s see, as
your mind scans the different possibilities, it thinks of some that are close, some
that are quick. some that have lots of easy parking and others that have good
looking waitresses. Mechanically, your thought processes went like this:

a. Particular sensations and chemicals cause the mind to feel what it mentally
describes as a pang of hunger. This is perceived as an important need.

b. The mind has a process that we can call an Intention System that creates specific
intention messages that are sent throughout the brain. It stores these Intentions
temporarily. If an intention is not freshly created and restacked at the top of the
clutter of intentions in the intention store, then it gets buried underneath the "mind
cluttered desk of things to do" and forgotten. In our example, the mind is searching
its memory banks for options on how to satisfy its hunger.

c. The mind must decide upon one particular course of action. The mind quits
focusing on other matters, and concentrates upon deciding which course of action to
take. The mind has now activated all kinds of what some researchers call "demons".
Because we are not talking about spiritual demons, but rather we are referring to
units of cognitive processes--

Page 40 ...
which are very similar to UNIX computer demons--we will refer to these demons by
the name "cognitive demon processes." Some of these cognitive demon processes
are action demons and some are word demons, and some are recognition demons.
Recognition Cognitive Demon Processes go running through the mind, "shouting"
the wishes of the Intention store. A number of lower level cognitive demon
processes wake up and make themselves known if they identify with what the
recognition demon is shouting about. Many may think they match the request, but
other demon processes check them out to see how close they match. Now the
checkers come up with a list of cognitive demon processes who are concerned with
eating at restaurants, who have woken up and are all scrambling for attention.
Cognitive demon processes establish themselves in families, and develop
relationships that are automatic. (Cognitive Demons do not die, but some go to sleep
and others can get somewhat rusty in their relationships.) The "demons" that
respond to the shouting of our recognition demon go through a series of
"interviews" with a hierarchy of other demon processes, and soon the messenger
demon can rush back to the Intention Store with the name of the choices available.
All this happens extremely quick. If the mind did not set up a series of automatic
cognitive demon processes that become habits, (called K-lines) it would find itself
involved in the conscious relearning of trivial matters that would make it impossible
to get much accomplished. Every skill would have to be constantly relearned. A
person might easily end up spending all day dressing. As long as the mind remains
in a static environment, where habits work, it’s great. But life is such a changing
environment, that our entrenched habits can cause the mind to pull up a cognitive
demonic process out of habit, when it is neither wanted nor appropriate. Emotions
and needs (which are tied to our emotions) will trigger the mind to search out
cognitive demon processes. For instance, if our emotional need for someone we are
looking for is great, let’s say a wife waiting for a long expected war-husband, it may
send a need down the brain for the cognitive demons that are attached to the
identification of the long-awaited person, and the mind triggers itself to see his face
in the crowd at the busy railway station before its owner arrives. Cognitive Demon
Processes live in close proximity to other demons, and when one gets excited,
others in the area do too, although their excitement may be much less. If a cognitive
demon is being used a great deal, it will be on its toes, but little used demons can go
to sleep, and somehow need to be hollowed at very loud to wake up. The Intention
System after a while will set itself on autopilot for certain mental functions, which
frees the conscious mind for other problems. The conscious mind can only focus on a
small amount of material--it is like a computer which has limited memory. It is
constantly in a state of redeployment, and the Intentions system has only a small
sway over how the Attention part of the mind decides to focus. The Attention part
constantly asks itself, which tasks can be relegated to habit. Then when the
Intention system sends out cognitive search demons, they do not have to involve
the conscious mind, because everything that is habitual is set up like a script, with
families of "cognitive demon processes" already knowing the roles/relationships
they are to play. (Again, Behavior modification is used to strengthen the
relationships of demonic processes, and to make some well used and awake, so that
certain behaviors become habits.) When our minds meditate or go into a hypnotic
trance, what is occurring is that our conscious mind is delegating its limited
computing memory for the focus of its attention upon one object. What happens to
the cognitive demon processes that would normally take instructions from the
conscious mind? During meditation

Page 41 ...

the untrained cognitive demon processes bubble up to the top of the conscious
mind. However, the opposite happens during hypnosis. During hypnosis, the mind
has made the decision (for whatever reasons) to accept control statements from the
hypnotist. The mind has surrendered or at least temporarily or partially abdicated
his or her position as the master of his or her Intention System. Some of this power
is given away. The hypnotist now has access and control over many or all the
cognitive demonic processes, including some that the person would not normally
activate. Cognitive demon processes that are asleep or deeply buried can be
accessed by the hypnotist, in a much quicker direct way than the Intention System
would. By suggesting that the subject has a cat on his lap, the hypnotist is actually
causing the recognition cognitive demon processes to wake up and act out their jobs
to such an extent that the subject sees a cat. By suggesting that the subject’s body
stiffen, the hypnotist has gained control over those cognitive action demons that
cause the body to stiffen. Age-regression brings up demons that are associated with
the subject’s childhood. Although it is unpopular to admit publicly that the hypnotist
has power over the subject, a close look at the process of how hypnosis works at the
neuronal "cognitive demon process" level shows that the hypnotist has indeed been
given power. In fact, the hypnotist has been given power to activate cognitive units
of demon processes that the mind itself would allow to remain inactive or asleep.
The mind would not normally use its ability to activate them. Today, it is politically
incorrect to admit that the hypnotist has power to make an individual do what they
wouldn’t normally want to do, but unfortunately hypnosis does give this power.

PROGRAMMING AIDS

Because the programmers control the slave’s life to such a high degree they can add
other elements that move the brain into programmable states. Fasting along with a
high sugar intake will make the brain more suggestive. (The military also used this
in basic training. This was done to this author at West Point during Beast Barracks,
where during the first two weeks he ate all-total enough food for one regular meal;
however, New Cadets were allowed to go to chapel and eat all the brownies, cookies
and kool-aid they wanted.) Physical discomforts and the chanting of rituals in
witchcraft ceremonies are also ways to move the mind into programming states.
Lights, sounds (for instance repetitive beats such as with any rock music), and
smells are all used to encourage the brain to go into a programmable state. In the
chapter on electronics, it discusses how the functions of the mind-body such as
breathing and the heartbeat can be regulated by external stimuli ---that is lights and
sounds which are electronically produced. If the repetitive beat is ranged between
45 to 72 beats per minute, many people will go into a programmable state with their
eyes open. This is because this beat is close to the beat of the heart in a relaxed
state. Some secret Illum. programming centers have areas that are constructed for
the greatest hypnotic sound and lighting effect. The child/ or adult victim is cut off
from the world at these programming centers. The victims’ freedom to walk outside
into normal life depends upon their cooperation with the programmer(s). Lullaby
music is used as a cue for some alters of slaves to induce trance when their systems
are older because the child alters still respond to the cue. Anything can be a cue, but
it appears the programmers often pick cues that are naturally reinforced by the
mind. The lullaby or carousel music is a good cue, because the lullaby is taking
advantage of the natural desire of the brain to retreat from reality to the nostalgia of
childhood fun. The retreat of the mind to childhood naturally evokes the
helplessness and dependence that a child feels. The programmers are powerful

Back to
Chapter 4 cont.
Contents
A programmed multiple can work at several different levels of
participation.

The Illuminati.
This is the secret hierarchy level. It is secret by virtue of almost
all (if not all) its members being programmed multiples from
elite powerful bloodlines- This is hardcore generational
Satanism that believes in a Gnostic Lucifer/an doctrine, hence,
they may be called your elite Luciferians.
The Network.
This level of activity is secret by virtue of its secret ties. It
includes the anarchy level of the Illuminati, the various
criminal syndicates, the music industry, the various fraternities,
new age institutions and people in power all over the globe. It is
held together by fear, blackmail, and common bonds of lust and
greed. The network includes atheists, self-made satanists,
opportunists, and many mind-control slaves. It is far more
cohesive and controlled than meets the eye. It is very eclectic. It
doesn’t matter at this level what you believe, what matters is
whose control are you under. This is the hidden seamy power
side of the World System.
The establishment, the System.
This level is open for the common people to participate in. This
level remains stably operating in their control because of secret
election fraud across the board in U.S. elections, extensive
blackmail, extensive control of the masses through the
establishment media (TV, radio, newspapers), interlocking
corporations and government agencies that control the
economic life, and many mass mind-control techniques that
these groups use. Most people are unaware of how powerful the
establishment is. As long as they drift in its current, they will
never see the control. It is only when one tries to swim
upstream against the current that you find out how powerful the
establishment is. The Illuminati sets up controlled opposition to
the System, such as the Hip pie movement, militant
environmentalists, Hell’s Mgels, Neo-nazis, John Birch
Society, the Communist Party, etc. Controlled opposition gives
people a chance to vent their anger without threatening their
control. It also gives them dialectic conflicts which they can
control to their advantage.

Page 65 ...

CHAPTER 5
SCIENCE NO. 5 - THE SKILL
OF
LYING, THE ART OF DECEIT
The Illuminati have refined the art of deception far beyond
what the common man has imagined. The very life & liberty of
humanity requires the unmasking of their deceptions. That is
what this book is about. Honesty is a necessary ingredient for
any society to function successfully. Deception has become a
national pastime, starting with our business and political leaders
and cascading down to the grass roots. The deceptions of the
Illuminati's mind-control may be hidden, but in their wake they
are leaving tidal waves of distrust that are destroying America.
While the CIA pretend to have our nations best interest at heart,
anyone who has seriously studied the consequences of
deception on a society will tell you that deception will seriously
damage any society until it collapses. Lies seriously damage a
community, because trust and honesty are essential to
communication and productivity. Trust in some form is a
foundation upon which humans build relationships. When trust
is shattered human institutions collapse. If a person distrusts the
words of another person, he will have difficulty also trusting
that the person will treat him fairly, have his best interests at
heart, and refrain from harming him. With such fears, an
atmosphere of death is created that will eventually work to
destroy or wear down the cooperation that people need. The
millions of victims of total mind-control are stripped of all
trust, and they quietly spread their fears and distrust on a
subconscious level throughout society. One problem about lies
is that one lie will call for another and then another. It's hard to
keep lies single. They seem to want to breed more of their kind
to protect themselves. Soon the liar becomes a victim of his
own lies, trapped in a dishonest web that demands lots of
energy to protect his false fronts. This is the sad fate that the
intelligence agencies have painted themselves into. They must
maintain groups that oversee their double-agents' lies to insure
that the lies that they have disseminated don't contradict
themselves. Finally, they have put out so much disinformation,
they lose track of reality themselves. Far from saving this
nation, the intelligence agencies have spread the cancer of
deception into all walks of life, so that this cancer is
contaminating and killing anything of value in the United
States. The soon-to-come death of this nation's sovereignty, as
well as the destruction of this nation's morals are the results of
this cancer. People who have attended high level Illuminati
meetings were instructed in how the Illuminati plan to bring in
the NWO AntiChrist reign by making everything appear as if it
has happened naturally. The Illuminati have decided to
camouflage their actions with the creation of normalcy to avert
any suspicions. An example of something which appears to
have happened naturally is the O.J. Simpson case, which was
planned based on previous murder scenarios which had been
successfully covered up. O.J. Simpson was a CIA
mind-controlled slave, and the entire Simpson case was
concocted as an elaborate effort to cause racial tensions. The
Mishpucka, the CIA, the Mob and the Illuminati have all had
their dirty hands involved in the entire affair. The entire affair
reeks of manipulation and planning. It is not the goal of this
paragraph to go into the case, but just to drop a couple details.
Joey Ippolito, Jr. is both CIA & Mob. Ippolito at one time lived
in Hallendale, FL, a mob housing subdivision which was
protected by a police force run by the mob. He has helped run
drugs and wet ops for "the Combination" which interconnects
with
Page 66 ...
the Illuminati. O.J. Simpson's friend Cowlings worked for Joey
Ippolito, as well as O.J. Simpson. Simpson distributed cocaine
for Joey Ippolito & the Combination. Simpson's lawyer also is
tied to the Illuminati, the CIA, and the mob. One of his lawyers
on TV said the trial reeked of government corruption. Nicole
Simpson lived next door to Carl Colby (former CIA director
Bill Colbys son). Colby's wife and kids have been subjected to
mind-control. Colby's wife testified in O.J. Simpson's trial, but
was addressed as "Miss Boe" rather than by her name. O.J.
Simpson's mother worked for a California State Mental
Hospital in San Francisco for 30 years. Many State Mental
Hospital workers have children who have been programmed.
When one of the jurors in Simpson's case, Tracy Hampton, had
her mind-control programming go haywire, she began staring
for long periods at a blank TV and hearing voices. She had to
be dismissed. During the Simpson trial, Judge Ito gave Joe
McGinniss the best front-row seat that a journalist could have.
Joe McGinniss was the coverup author who wrote a book
covering up about the McDonald-Fort Bragg Drug Smuggling
Case. The McDonald-Fort Bragg Drug Smuggling Case
involved the Illuminati drug smuggling operation within the
U.S. military during the Vietnam War. On and on the stink
goes. The manipulation of history by those in power has been
well-covered over. An example of how mind-control and its
role in manipulation of events has been covered up by the
perpetrators is an article written in the Journal of the American
Medical Association (JAMA) in the Sept. 11, 1967, Vol. 201,
No. 11 issue. The article, which was submitted to the magazine
from three CIA doctors (Mark, Sweet, and Ervin), claims that
riots are caused by brain disease. While the article is correct in
the subpoint that only a small percentage of underprivileged
urban dwellers participate in many of the riots, the article's
thesis is obviously a slide to prevent people from catching on
that the small number of deviants who create riots might be
under mind-control or might have some other motivation
beyond simply being brain-diseased. Any deception, whether it
is an exaggeration or an understatement of the NWO's
capabilities is considered a useful deception for the Illuminati's
double-agents to spread. The german battleship the Bismarck
was sunk due to a little lie sent to Germany by a double-agent
which underestimated the range of British radar. The Germans,
thinking they were out of British radar range, made some bad
decisions that cost them the battleship.

DECEPTION DIMINISHES POWER

Knowledge is power, and lies diminish the knowledge of
deceived dupes, and therefore diminishes the power of the
deceived. Deception obscures the alternatives that people have.
It also clouds up various objectives people would work toward.
Some people give up certain objectives due to their
mis-perceptions that the objective is undesirable or
unattainable.

PROGRAMMING DECEPTIONS
In the programming, colors and directions are used. Be
prepared to find out. that sometime programmers use their
creative imaginations such as using the color "octarine," or the
direction "TURNWISE" or perhaps "WIDDERSHINS". During
the most fundament programming which is done via LSD trips
in sensory deprivation tank to lay in foundations of the Alpha,
Beta, Delta, Ome and Theta programs, each programming
memory will be given a code. Where one popular programming
deception takes place that the programmer knows ahead of time
h to sequence his memory codes so that instance, the fifth
memory is coded as trip, and strenuous methods are used to
cover up the memories of the first four trips. The victim’s s
mind will be told to forget the first
Page 67 ...
four trips. The memory codes are deceptively designed to fool
the deprogrammer and the victim alike. Part of the reason the
programmer does this, is that they know that IF a therapist
should stumble onto these first memories, the backup
programming to protect these memories is so severe that the
therapist will shatter the victim’s mind. Backup programs such
as Atom bombs and vegetable programming are locked into
place to protect the fundamental programs.
BE WISE AS SERPENTS
The Holy Spirit moved an apostle to write, "We are not
ignorant of Satan’s devices." Christ warned his disciples to "be
wise as serpents and harmless as doves." The Israelites sent out
spies before entering the promised land. Within the text of The
Art of War by Sun-Tzu (a book studied today by men in
intelligence), he discusses "hidden provocation agents" in Book
13. Sun-Tzu was born in 534 B.C. and lived most likely until
after the year 453 B.C. In 500 B.C., some men were farmers,
and some were agent provocateurs. Today, both occupations
still exist. The modern American farmer is vastly superior to
the ancient farmer of 500 B.C., so how does the modern agent
provocateur compare? He is vastly superior also. It appears the
Word of God is accurate, for it warns that God’s people will be
destroyed for lack of knowledge. The difficulty in obtaining
honest information in today’s Big Brother world is aptly
described by an intelligence asset over the Internet, "If you are
lucky and work hard, you will find some of the truth. If you are
lucky and work REALLY hard, you might find the WHOLE
truth...as someone wants you to know it. If you are
PHENOMENALLY lucky and really work your tail off, you
might even go on to find the REAL truth. But no outsiders...and
in fact, very few insiders ever ... EVER ... learn the WHOLE
REAL truth." This book & our two previous books on
mind-control) are the result of extremely hard work and
numerous miracles of God, and what non-Christians would call
lots of luck". The story behind the books is amazing. This
book’s two authors have had to ,,swim upstream" for years in
search for the real truth. One thing is very clear to this author,
during the last seven years of exposing the NWO almost every
person who is believed to be a leader against the NWO has
tried to impede the work this author has been doing. People
need to be aware that the New World Order created their own
opposition long before some of us began sincerely trying to
expose it. This author’s informed opinion is that essentially all
(about 98% of the people leading the opposition to the NWO
are double agents), and no less than 50% of the therapists are
double-agents. In this state, this author knows as a fact that
50% of the licensed therapists working with programmed DID
patients are programmed DID (MPD) slaves themselves.
Recently, one of the therapists in this area, who the False
Memory "Spin"-drome & the Illuminati took down, was a
therapist who had also been on a local T.V. talk show revealing
that she was a multiple & a SRA victim.

DISINFORMATION TO MAKE THEIR DOUBLE-AGENTS

LOOK GOOD
"A Force" was MI-6’s group that carried out deception. They
would have their double agents pass out CHICKEN FEED
(which is what they call classified information that can be
thrown out to the public) to establish their double-agents’
credentials (BONA FIDES) as agents against the British.
Today, there are numerous anti-NWO people who are actually
double agents. They are distributing chicken feed to make
people think they are legitimate. By the way, it is interesting to
note for those who realize how important carousels are to
programming that MI-6 (HO in Vauxhall Cross, Eng., with a
training ctr. at Ft. Monckton, near Gosport, so. Eng.) is
nicknamed (actually its cryptonym) ,,Carousel" by its daughter
organization Mossad (officially aka Central Intelligence
Collection Agency). An example of a double-agent who is
popular among Christians is an Illuminati witch named
Gretchen Passantino, who tours around to Christian
conferences belittling the idea of mind-control. Dr. Loreda Fox
reports in The Spiritual and Clinical Dimensions of MPD that
74% of women abused by SRA come from "Christian
Page 68 ...
homes." The Christian churches are heavily infiltrated.

SLEEPER AGENTS
In the Vol. 2 book a number of references were made to sleeper
agents. The idea of placing someone somewhere in society and
letting them lead a normal life for years without ever being
used is designed to provide a legitimate smokescreen about
what they are all about. Mind-controlled slaves make excellent
sleepers. The concept of making sleeper agents in not a secret.
The CIA has publicly admitted that they tried to discover
long-range sleeper agents in the Los Niñios children of
Republican Spain who were the descendants of communist
spaniards who returned to Spain in the 1950’s. They also have
admitted to having tried to weed out long range sleepers in the
Trebizond Greeks who lived near the USSR in Turkey and
returned in the 1950’s to Greece. As the CIA and KGB
mirror-imaged each other in their manufactured Hegelian
Dialectic mock dual (which was very real for the "little"
person) you can well imagine that the CIA sent sleeper agents
against the KGB.

NAMES of TYPES of DISINFORMATION AGENTS

The intelligence agencies have their own lingo for the types of
disinformation agents they send against everyone else. So far,
we have named only double & sleeper agents. Here are some of
their disinformation agents:

AGENT OF INFLUENCE--These agents can be unwitting,

under mind-control, or ideologically motivated to use their
positions of influence to sway the minds of others. Examples of
Agents of Influence are anchor men on T.V., journalists, labor
leaders, TV commentators, academics quoted by the media, &
some politicians.

CONFUSION AGENT--An agent whose job is to produce

confusion by disseminating confounding information.

CONTRACT AGENT--These are the rogue agents, such as the

mob, who the CIA get to do particular jobs on contract. Their
connections can be denied.

DEEP COVER AGENT--A sleeper agent (often a programmed

multiple or person with mind-control programming) who has
been a long term sleeper agent.

DISINFORMATION AGENT--This is a highly placed agent

who passes disinformation to other governments.

NOTIONAL AGENT--A fictitious non-existent "agent" which

is created with a real-looking identity to mislead.

PROVOCATION AGENT--An agent sent in to provoke &

destabilize the target group to do foolish things.

SPOON-FEEDER AGENT--Someone who dribbles out

legitimate information, this is often done to build up a person's
credentials (bona fides). Lots of the people who are pretending
to expose the NWO are spoon-feeder agents who provide a
little new information, tons of already known secrets, and
sprinkle in a measure of disinformation for added fun.
Generally spoon-feeders increase their percentage of
disinformation once they gain respectability. There are very
few people really exposing anything of consequence about the
NWO. This author has endured the loss of several of the really
legitimate whistle blowers who were friends being assassinated
since he began writing exposes.
What this means is that agents for groups that do mind-control
may: have been sleepers for many years and look very
legitimately innocent, they may give good correct information
to our side, they may say all the right things and try to get us
motivated to do more than we would want, they may talk about
other friends who are giving them information who do not even
exist. It takes discernment to spot people who are not on our
side. Unfortunately, such discernment seems to be
fundamentally lacking within the public at large. For instance, I
have seen people choose obvious NWO agents over this author
as a source of "information" (which is in reality
disinformation). Most people have bought so much
disinformation during their lifetime, perhaps it’s unrealistic to
expect them to purge out all the junk they’ve accepted. Just as
people in the world need to toss out their worldly thinking,
people in the church need to
Page 69 ...
toss out all the indoctrination they’ve gotten from the numerous
kinds of harlot churches. At the moment, the system is set up so
that the perpetrators of the mind-control are in control of the
credentialing process, so that they can provide their stooges/and
agents with the best credentials. As the reader can see, the roots
of power behind the mind-control go deep.

TRICKING SUSPECTS
One trick (or variations of it) that has been used with suspects
is to arrest them, place the suspect in a situation where the
police are in two groups--one group looks like police, the other
group looks like the group the suspect has come from. After the
suspect arrives, the group pretending to be arrested group
members, overpowers the police contingent and escapes to
another setting where another police group pretending to be
even more of the suspect’s group ask him who he is and to
explain his credentials. Letting his guard down, the original
suspect explains what he is all about, thereby giving them the
information they needed in the first place. Variations of this
script can be run. English intelligence calls this basic script
CACKLEBLADDER because chicken blood is used on the
police actors that are overpowered to make them look injured.

THE NAMES OF DECEPTION TRICKS

FOUR FACES refers to pretexts used by agents to get
interviews. DANGLE is the craft word for luring a victim into a
provocation. A dangle operation would be an operation to
provoke a group or individual into a particular action. This was
done with Elohim City and many other groups that the NWO is
trying to set up as patsies.

STANDARD DECEPTION DEVICES

Agents use BLEEP-BOXES to tap telephones and in other
instances to make free-of-cost telephone calls. A CABMAN is
a device to remotely activate a telephone with a radio beam. It
can be used without entering the building where the telephone
is located.

MASKS
The use of masks in the occult world is ancient. For centuries,
the gypsies have used them for their hypnotic powers. Special
healing masks for their people are kept secret and never shown
to the public. Masks have a shock value & fascination value.
Gypsy and other occult groups have special rituals to create the
masks, including using hair clippings from the person who will
wear the mask. Gypsy healing masks are destroyed after the
patient gets well. Illuminati programming masks may or may
not be destroyed after their use. The Illuminati’s mask-making
abilities (according to deprogrammed victims of their
mind-control) are very high quality. Sometimes the
programmers simply wear halloween cartoon character masks
that anyone can obtain, to fulfill their role in the programming
script that they are involved in during the time.

COVERS
Some beginners who have just started into studying the World
Order question why the Illuminati would use legitimate
religious covers. Why would the Illuminati want to create a
slave who is an evangelist? Why? Because those new converts
will go to some establishment church where other programmed
multiples in leadership positions will demand obedience (and
then support those demands by quoting scriptures that make
them seem like they are God’ss authority over that new
convert). Because the evangelist or missionary and the bishop
or pastor are controlled puppets, the convert will never get the
full truth, just enough truth to keep him working hard for their
organization. Even though the convert "got God in my life", the
Illuminati never lose control over him. The Christians have as
much vested interest in preventing the exposure of the
Illuminati programmed multiples who are big name Christian
ministers running
Page 70 ...
Christendom, as the Illuminati has. Imagine what would happen
if the world found out that most of Christianity was run by the
human-sacrificing, slave-making Illuminati? This is one of the
sad effects of the infiltration. Perhaps the subject of covers can
be explained from another angle. The reader knows that the
elite like monopolies. They play monopoly for real--for us it’s
oniy a board game! To establish a monopoly, you find a good
product that everyone wants or needs, and then you eliminate
all the competition by either destroying them, or owning the
competition yourself. In the U.S., the Illuminati can’t have a
one-religion monopoly. In Russia, they had communism with
Marx, and Lenin as the Father God and Gon the son figure.
Communism had a monopoly on worship. In the U.S., they
have established a monopoly by controlling all the various
religious groups. (This author wrote an 800 page heavily
documented book Be Wise As Serpents to show the details of
how this is done.) It’s not a matter of what they teach, it’s a
matter of control, so that the elite have a monopoly. And when
you, as a mover & shaker in the world, control all these various
religions via money, blackmail, & programmed multiples under
your leadership, etc. which religion would you pick to
emphasize the most? You will pick the one that sells the best,
i.e. the best product. And which brand of Christianity will sell
the best? The televised charismatic brand will sell the best.
Covers that slaves use to explain what they do in life are almost
always "legitimate". A missionary, a military officer, a
salesperson, etc. will usually actually do their cover job most of
the time. Their cover is their occupation, their service as a
mind-controlled slave is almost an unwitting avocation.
Organizations are used as covers. The Illuminati use military,
social, intelligence, education, banking and other organizations
as covers. (See my Be Wise As Serpents book for many of
these.) Moriah’s front organizations, such as the CIA, in turn
use other organizations. Here is just a sampling of CIA fronts,
to show the variety of fronts used:
· Asia Foundation was an academic organization created by the
CIA.
· Castle Bank & Trust Co. has been a bank in the Caribbean that
is a CIA front.
· Forum World Features has been a front created for CIA
propaganda purposes and based in London, UK.
· Geschicter Foundation for Medical Research (as well as the
Josiah Macy Foundation) was used as an intelligence front to
launder money used for mind-control.
· Air-Sea Forwarders, Inc. was the legal corporation name of a
CIA front in North Hollywood, CA. The company was
involved in moving freight. In the last few years, this
corporation sued E-Systems, the company which builds the
CIA and the NWO’s electronic systems such as their
communications satellites. In court, the company proved that it
was a CIA front, in spite of CIA denials. As this chapter
provides information about some of the Illuminati/ intelligence
connections to Hollywood, bear in mind that this CIA front was
proven in court to be a CIA front in Hollywood. A feat that
rarely occurs.
__________________________________________________________

ONE OF THE GREATEST DECEPTIONS OF ALL TIME:

DISNEY
**********************************************************
INTRODUCTION
For years, I have heard many Americans say that something is
terribly wrong in this country & that things are "going to pot",
and yet Americans can’t put their finger on what exactly is
wrong. When I first began to receive reports from victims of
Illuminati mind-control about Disney’s involvement in their
mind-control, I kept an open ear, but I wanted some tangible
proof. After investigating for myself, there is now no doubt in
my mind that Disney (the man, the movies & the entertainment
parks)
Page 71 ...
has been a major contributor to the demise of America, while
maintaining a very well constructed front of wholesomeness. In
this chapter, you will learn why Disney is one of the best
deceptions of the Illuminati. This author has read a good
portion of what is available to the public concerning Disney.
This exposé is undoubtedly the deepest on Disney that has ever
been done. Perhaps part of my motivation is that I’ve tired of
Christians talking and acting like Disney stands for sainthood.
Christians, who should have known better, are some of the ones
who have swallowed "hook, line and sinker" the enormous
deception that entails Disney. They feed their children a steady
diet of occultism and witchcraft because they have been
programmed to think of Disney as wholesomeness and
everything that is good about America. Many writers over the
years have tried to expose Disney, most have been stopped
before they could get their books published. The few authors
who have managed have faced vicious attacks on their
character & integrity, and have faced enormous struggles
against public relations campaigns paid for by the Disneys. The
Disney’s power, and the power behind them, has frightened
most people away from challenging them. But someone needs
to speak on behalf of the victims. Whether anyone listens or
not, the victims will know that somebody cared enough to stand
up & write the truth. Disney has not only left mind-control
victims in its wake, but they have harassed land-owners, stolen
employee idea’s and left all kinds of hurting victims in their
path. Disney has risen to become the unquestionable largest
media-entertainment conglomerate in the world, & was ranked
company no. 48 in the top 500 companies by Forbes 500.
Observations about HOW THE ILLUMINATI LIKE TO HIDE
BEHIND PERFECT FRONTS.
There are numerous Illuminati homes, restaurants, wineries and
other institutions that are today carrying out the same type of
strict standards upon their employees that Walt Disney Studios
maintained. While Hollywood was immersed in moral filth
from the start, Walt Disney Studios had strict standards. In the
1930’s, Disney had a dress code that required men in ties, and
women in sober-colored skirts. If a man looked lecherously at a
woman at Walt Disney Studios he risked being instantly fired.
Walt was a shining example of the strictest legalism. Even
during the ’50's, if an employee were caught saying anything
considered a cussword such as "hell" they were instantly fired
no matter who they were. Walt would not allow his male
employees to have any facial hair, even though he himself
sported a mustache. He never allowed employees to have
alcohol at the studios, (which might not be a noteworthy
standard except that Walt himself drank heavy amounts of
alcohol in his private office at work for decades). Initially, Walt
was very reluctant to have his young artists, who were being
trained by Don Graham, draw live nude models, but reluctantly
gave approval. Again the motive was not to serve God, but to
make sure the Disney reputation remained untarnished. With
the power of the establishment media behind Disney, Walt had
nothing to worry about, news about the nude drawing classes
and their detailed drawings never reached the light of day.
Behind such strict fronts of legalistic morals, cleanliness &
soberness, you will often find lots of guilt and high level
satanic ritual. For instance, Hitler (who was by the way also a
failed artist & who liked mechanical things more than people)
obsessively washed his hands many times a day (out of guilt),
and so did Walt Disney. Walt obsessively washed his hands
several times an hour, every hour. Walt liked animals & his
trains more than people. This author has seen some alters who
were forced to take another human’s life, and when they relived
the memory, the alters then tried
Page 72 ...
to physically wash the blood guilt off of their hands. Another
example is that over the years this author has discovered that
many of the exclusive restaurants that are meticulous in every
detail are tied in with the mind-control and criminal activities
of the elite. Dirty money is keeping the places looking
sparkling clean. Walt Disney worked very hard at maintaining a
great image for himself and his company. An example of this,
is how he exploded in rage and wrote an angry memo when a
Disney character was placed in a beer ad. (Memo mentioned in
Thomas, Bob. Walt Disney An American Original. Hyperion,
1994, p. 7.) He had a personal image builder, Joe Reddy, who
worked full time to build Walt’s image. Joe Reddy was a
cigar-smoking irishman who loved the catholic college Notre
Dame’s football team. He also was a publicity agent for Shirley
Temple. But the Disney deception entails far more than Joe
Reddy’s decades of image making, and Walt’s own abilities to
create good images of himself. Just as with Billy Graham (see
Vol. 2 about Billy Graham), the entire Illuminati threw their
weight behind promoting Walt Disney. Ronald Reagan and
Walt Disney were good friends and both cut from the same die
in many ways. Both men were high ranking Freemasons, both
came from socialist backgrounds (Ronald’s mother was Eleanor
Roosevelt’s best friend, & Walt’s Dad was a socialist leader),
both were paid FBI informants, and both were involved heavily
in the abuse of mind-controlled slaves. Walt always generously
supported Reagan’s political campaigns, and in turn Reagan did
political favors for Walt as Gov. of California. For instance,
Disney’s Mineral King mountain resort needed an access route
through the Sequoia Nat. Park at a time when there was lots of
congressional pressure to preserve the last stands of redwoods.
Gov. Reagan got his friend Disney his road through the park.
Reagan served as the emcee for the opening day of Disneyland
on July 17, 1990. He returned with Illuminati TV host Art
Linkletter for the 35th anniversary. Ronald Reagan & Art
Linkletter both pumped Disney publicly. Another slave abuser
that spent time with Disney was Bob Hope, who would spend
time on the golf course with Walt. On the opening day’s
telecast, cameras showed Sammy Davis, Jr. (a member of the
Church of Satan) and Frank Sinatra (a mind-control slave
handler) driving the pint-sized Disney ears at the Autopia ride.
When Disney celebrated its fifty yr-anniversary with a two hour
special on May 20, 1991, the program included people like
occultist Bill Campbell and was named "Best of Disney, 50
Years of Magic." For the silver anniversary of Disney World in
Oct. ’96, the Clinton’s were invited to help open 15 months of
celebrations. The theme of the anniversary celebrations was
"Remember the Magic". A Boy’s & Girl’s Club sang ‘When
you wish upon a star’ (a popular programming song). Hillary
Rodham Clinton (herself an Illuminati Grand Dame and a
mind-control programmer) shared with the audience that she
and Bill "first brought daughter Chelsea to the Magic Kingdom
when she was four." Roy E. Disney, nephew of Walt, told the
public that Disney World "is the story of men and women who
took hold of a dream and never let go." There is a double
meaning to that. Many victims of trauma-based mind-control
have taken hold of the illusions that were programmed into
their mind secretly at Disney, and never let go. Among the
visitors to Disneyland have been all the American Presidents
from Eisenhower to Clinton, over a dozen kings & queens, as
well as Emperor Akihito of Japan, Anwar Sadat, and Robert
Kennedy (who rode the Matterhorn with astronaut John Glenn.)
Both Denmark’s & Belgium’s kings who are in the Illuminati
visited, as well as the dictators of Indonesia, the Shah of Iran
and Ceausescu of Romania. (As a side-note Roy E. Disney was
forewarned by Arab leader that the Shah was to be deposed.)
Organizations that have been actively
Page 73 ...
working for a New World Order for many years gave big
awards to Walt in his early years such as the B’nai B’rith (Man
of the Year Award to Walt) and the Chamber of Commerce. In
1936, Walt was given the Chamber of Commerce’s annual
,,Outstanding Young Man" award. The establishment’s Yale &
Harvard Universities gave him honorary degrees. Walt Disney
biographer Leonard Mosley, who researched Walt Disney for
years (as well as writing books on the duPonts, the Dulles
brothers, and Hirohito) wrote in his book on Walt Disney, "The
studio publicity machines in the film colony had, as usual, gone
out of their way to try to persuade me, as a writer for a
powerfully influential British newspaper, that this was a city of
lawless gods and goddesses, full of clean-living, sanitized stars.
"It was even more of a deodorized world at the Walt Disney
Studio where the publicity men insisted their boss was
faultless--never drank too much, never used a swearword, never
lost his temper, never quarreled with his wife or family, never
let down a friend. And woe betide anyone who tried to suggest
otherwise. Members of the resident foreign and local press
risked their jobs if they dared to write stories inferring that Walt
Disney could be domineering, implacable, and unforgiving (as
was the case, for instance, before, during, and after the 1941
studio strike). The Disney flacks were capable of exerting
heavy pressure on editors and proprietors or, through the
advertising pages, against anyone who inferred Walt Disney
was not the epitome of well-scrubbed and benevolent
perfection." (Mosley, Leonard. Disney’s World. New York:
Stein & Day, p. 10.) Disney is perhaps the epitome of
Illuminati abilities to create images. They have created great
images for things Disney, incl. Walt Disney, Disney movies,
and Disney’s Amusement parks. In some cases these things
have been overrated, in other instances the sinister side to them
has been carefully hidden. In order to make movies that contain
the typical smut of Hollywood, sex and violence, Disney did a
slight of hand and created subsidiaries which Disney runs,
which has allowed them to keep their good image. They also
never showed the public the hard core porn that was made for
years in secrecy for the elite. Behind Disney’s good front lies
hard porn, snuff films, white slavery, Illuminati mind-control,
and the seduction of several generations into witchcraft.
Disney’s involvement in these kind of things will be explained
in this chapter. Nobody has sold America witchcraft as well as
the Disney brothers. Movie after movie has cleverly brought
the occult into the warp & woof of American thought, all under
the disguise of entertainment. For instance, it was Disney that
brought us cannibalism and told us that it was a "triumph of the
human spirit" (a direct quote from Disney’s Touchtone
Producer Robert Watts concerning Disney’s movie "Alive"
featuring survivors of an airplane crash who turned to
cannibalism). Under the disguise of entertainment & showing
us how "triumphant" the human spirit was, they subtly
promoted cannibalism. Mickey Mouse plays a leading role in
"The Sorcerer’s Apprentice." And yet when this author has
suggested that Disney movies aren’t wholesome, many
Christian parents come unglued and have gotten angry with this
author. The deceptive image that Disney movies are wholesome
is a triumph in Illuminati deception. Parents would be surprised
what is slipped into cartoons. In Disney’s "The Little Mermaid"
the castles are male sexual organs. In one cartoon Mighty
Mouse is shown without comment clearly snorting cocaine.
Walt Disney Studios Chairman Joe Roth is in charge of Walt
Disney as well as subsidiaries Touchtone, Miramax, and
Hollywood Pictures, which were all created to camouflage the
Disney production of adult films. Disney operates in a
clandestine manner regarding the promotion, distribution and
Page 74 ...

DISNEY MAKES MALE PHALLUSES INTO CASTLES.

rating of the films produced by their subsidiaries. Roth oversaw
Disney’s subsidiary Hollywood Pictures’ Evita film. Evita has
as its main start "Material Girl" Madonna. Madonna is in reality
a mind-controlled slave who has appeared in numerous
underground porn/& ritual porn movies. (This author has an
underground catalog from a porn business, that has recently
changed its location of business. The catalog offered a film of
Madonna performing an actual blood sacrifice.) She also was
the main actress in Disney’s Dick Tracy film which is reported
to be used for mind-control. During an Arsenio Hall show,
Madonna, who as a guest acted dissociative, was picked up by
the cameras during the show kissing her Baphomet ring. Disney
controls the products that are associated with the movies of
their subsidiaries. In Evita’s case they are marketing hats and
other items, as just one more of Disney’s countless artificially
generated consumerism campaigns. In Ruth Stein’s interview
of Madonna, Madonna appeared bored with plugging Disney’s
consumer products. When asked about the tango dresses and
hats inspired by Evita that popped up in stores after the film,
Madonna said, "Believe me, I have nothing to do with it.
Disney is pushing the whole thing." (San Francisco Chronicle,
12/29/96, Datebook section). In one interview Madonna states
she wants her daughter to grow up knowing Catholicism, but
she doesn’t believe that it would be good for her daughter if
Madonna narried the father of her child from Lourdes, Carlos
Leon. In another interview, Madonna says, "Actually, I’m a
very good role model, because I say, ‘Look, these are my
standards’..." She then goes on to plug homosexuality, same
sex marriage, and single families in the interview. Walt Disney
stated that it plans to release an album by DANZIG, a heavy
metal band whose songs contain "dark themes". The Disney
press release announces on its by-line "Mickey Mouse is going
heavy metal." Disney’s album ,,BLACK ACID DEVIL" was
due to hit the music stores Oct. 30, 1996 during Halloween
time. According to Disney this music has no satanic references,
but does have "dark, Gothic and sexual" overtones. Glenn
Danzig denies that he is a satanist.

CONTENTS IN THE DISNEY DECEPTION SECTION OF

CHAPTER 5.
a. an introduction
b. an overview
c. Who was Walt Disney?
d. Who was Roy O. Disney?
e. Who is Roy E. Disney?
f. What do we know about the in general?
g. A history of Disney
h. Disney and its mob connections
i. Disney and its government connections
j. Disney and mind-control
k. Detailed Script of how one Disney movie is used for
programming.
1. Partial List of Sources

Page 75 ...

B. AN OVERVIEW
Disneyland and Disneyworld are world famous and the pride of
America. They are also extremely important programming
centers for the Illuminati to create total mind-controlled slaves.
Disneyland is also involved with providing a place for rituals,
porn and other satanic activities. In terms of deception, Disney
movies and Disney Amusement Parks rate as one of the best
deceptions. According to deprogrammed ex-Illuminati slaves,
the Illuminati in the 1960’s needed to shift their programming
away from the military bases, because too much publicity
(heat) was shined on the military bases. Their goal was to have
someplace that people from all over the world could come to
without raising any suspicions, and a place which would be the
perfect cover for many of their criminal activities. According to
a witness, the Illuminati Programmers got a big laugh out of
using Disneyland as a major Illuminati base for criminal
activity. Under the disguise of entertaining the world, they
carried out money laundering, child slavery laundering, and
mind-control. They nick-named Disneyland "the little syndicate
of mind-control." When a child of 3 or 4 was kidnapped, they
could torture the child and then put him on a ride such as a
ferris wheel or carousel that a. created dissociation from the
pain, while also b. going along with some fairy tale
programming script. An abducted child while waiting to be
picked up from one Illuminati non-parent caretaker by another,
could be kept happy and distracted while waiting for the
pickup. For years, Disneyland was an Illuminati center for
many of their world-wide activities. Now Disney has created
other sites around the world such as EuroDisneyland 20 miles
east of Paris and Tokyo Disneyland. Tokyo Disneyland in 1991
had 16 million people attend. With such hugh crowds, it
doesn’t take much imagination how the Illuminati have been
able to do sneaky criminal activities right in front of people,
and the public never sees it, in the middle of all the activity.
EuroDisney has been a money losing affair, but the Saudis who
benefit from its mind-control, gave Disney the money to keep it
financially in business. Walt Disney Records is the largest
children’s record label in the world. Disney through their
movies, books, toys, records, etc. has made a tremendous
impact on the children of the world. Their movie Return from
Witches Mountain was one of the most powerful witchcraft
promotions ever made. Ducktails, which has deliberate
Monarch mind-control triggers written into the script, is also
broadcast in Poland and the former USSR. From the time of the
Roman Empire (at least, if not before) the oligarchical
leadership, who have been in control of both the Mystery
Religions and European aristocracy, have known about
BREAD & CIRCUS. Bread and Circus refers to the concept
that IF the masses of people are given entertainment and food
staples, THEN they are easy to control. Walt Disney movies
have played a key role in providing entertainment for the
masses to insure Illuminati control. Walt Disney’s friend the
Masonic prophet H.G. Wells in his book A Modem Utopia that
there would be lots of shows in the New World Order. The
World Future Society in a book review in their publication
Future Survey Annual, 1993, (ed. Michael Marien, Bethesda,
MD: World Future Soc., p. 91) describes Disney: "Control of
commodities [such as entertainment] and access to
commodities translates into control over people. ‘The
postmodern US is a massive rush of disconnected commodities,
each seeking a moment of our attention." The world of
commodities is our soma, and entertainment is the current form
of public discourse. Walt Disney World, spread over 27,400
acres of central Florida swamp and scrub forest, ‘is the most
ideologically important piece of land in the U.S.’ What goes on
here is the
Page 76 ...
quintessence of the American way. It is visited by over 30
million people a year--not only the major middle-class
pilgrimage center in the US, but by far the most important
entertainment center in the world. It is clearly Oz, utopia as a
marketing device." Two Disney brothers Walt (Walter Elias)
and Roy O. Disney have been at the center of the creation of
amusement parks and popular Disney films. In more recent
times, two other men, Eisner and Katzenberg have been notable
at Disney. Eisner & Katzenberg, as well as others will be
discussed later. One of Disney’s directors, Victor Salva, was
convicted of molesting a boy and filming one of the sexual
molestations. Recently Disney Director Salva produced the
Disney movie "Powder". (Victor Salva’s sexual molestation
conviction was covered by newspaper articles such as Robert
W. Welkos of the LA Times, in newspapers such as The
Oregonian, Weds. Oct. 25, 1995, A sect.) The impact of the
Disney brothers is monumental. Mickey Mouse teeshirts can be
seen being worn by natives all over the world. Disney World
and Disneyland are the quest for a large segment of humanity,
who often esteem these amusement parks as the highlight of
their life. What is highly esteemed among men, is an
abomination to God according to the Word of God. The Bible
arbitrarily makes this claim, but sadly, research by this author
over the years proves that a close examination of Disney &
mankind’s esteem for "Disney" things does vindicate the
Biblical expectation. In other words, as readers of this article
will find out, behind the appearance of wholesomeness of the
Disney brothers and their creations lays abominations-- some of
the most grotesque aspects of generational occultism the world
has ever seen. Disney’s Magic Kingdom has become an
American Institution that impacts people all over the world
from the cradle to the grave.

C. WHO WAS WALT DISNEY?

In the large book The Art of Walt Disney from Mickey Mouse
to the Magic Kingdom by Christopher Finch (N.Y.: Harry N.
Abrams, 1975) on page 11 an interesting and revealing
statement is made: "By definition, public figures are known to
everyone; yet, even after talking with some of Disney's closest
associates, it is impossible to escape the conclusion that nobody
really knew him. Always there was some aspect of his
personality that was just out of reach." Those who got to know
Walt too closely make complaints such as he was
"self-satisfied, intractable, and arrogant." He could bring his
artists to tears or anger in a matter of seconds. Finch is not the
only author who has tried to warn his readers that the public’s
image of Walt Disney was just that--only a false image. Mosley
also writes in his biography of Walt Disney, "Since Disney is
regarded by millions of people, particularly in the United
States, as perhaps this century’s most brilliantly successful
creator of screen animation, I think I should make one thing
clear right away. I share the general admiration of a man whose
cinematic achievements were always so happily inspired and
inspiriting. But--and this is where I differ from uncritical
idolaters--I have to know all the facts, no matter how
unpalatable, as well as the romantic myths about any great man
or woman I admire. Many of the myths that have been created
by his publicists about Walt Disney are unpalatable,
unbelievable, and unsatisfactory because so much of the real
Walt Disney has been deliberately concealed.. .Walt
Disney...had grave flaws in his character." (Mosley. Disney’s
World, pg. 9) Years ago, an Illuminati Grand Master and
programmer stated, "If the world only had the eyes to see the
fibers which lay under the surface of Walt Disney’s image,
they’d tar and feather him, and drag him through the streets. If
only they knew what Disney’s primary goal s."
Page 77 ...

PERSONAL DETAILS
Walt had black hair with a black mustache, and bright quick
eyes and was about 6’ tall. He used his own facial features to
clue artists on how to draw Mickey Mouse’s features. He liked
specially rolled brown cigarettes which he smoked up to 70 a
day. He picked up the smoking habit in the army. He loved
expensive Scotch Whiskey, red sunsets, and horses. He had a
vacation home in Palm Springs, CA called the Smoke Tree
Ranch. He often wore the Ranch’s letter STR emblazoned on
his necktie. He played lots of golf with Bob Hope and Ed
Sullivan at the ST Ranch. His main home was an estate in
Holmby Hills. The Holmby Hills estate was located in a plush
area where lots of rich show-business families lived. It was
located between Bel-Air (an occult word for Satan) & Beverly
Hills.
Walt spent many of his nights at the Disney Studios and later
he had his own private quarters at the center of Disneyland. He
had reoccurring bouts of insomnia. (For his nerves and
insomnia he’d take alcohol and tranquilizers.) He’d go weeks
on end without stepping foot on the Holmby Hills estate and
seeing his family. The main topic at the studio by the staff
during different time periods was Walt’s bizarre behavior-- he
would not be available until late afternoon, when he would
emerge from the studio’s subterranean maze of tunnels, where
supposedly he was "chatting with the maintenance engineers"
everyday. The value of his estate when he died was 35 million
dollars of which Lillian his wife inherited half. In his later
years, when Disney took a vacation he went to Paris for 3
weeks, and 3 weeks at the Hotel du Cap, in Antibes, and then
cruised on Fritz Loew’s yacht with Ron and Diane Disney. In
England, Walt spent time with the British Royal family and met
privately with masonic prophet H.G. Wells. In Rome, Walt
visited privately with the Pope and the dictator Mussolini. In
1966, Walt Disney died. Prior to his death he had investigated
cryogenesis--being frozen, and it is believed by some that his
body is frozen somewhere in California, while others claim he
was cremated.

MICKEY MOUSE
According to one source, the inspiration for Walt to create
Mickey Mouse came when he was unemployed and saw a
mouse in the gutter. There are quite a few stories in circulation
as to where the idea came from. Ub Iwerks claimed he thought
Mickey up at an animator’s meeting in Hollywood. Walt once
said, "There is a lot of the Mouse in me." (biographical article
written by Elting E. Morison, p. 131) In fact, Ub Iwerks told
Walt that Mickey Mouse "looks exactly like you--same nose,
same face, same whiskers, same gestures and expressions. All
he needs now is your voice." Walt often did serve as Mickey’s
voice. A book put out by Walt Disney Co. in 1988 reveals that
Walt Disney told Ward Kimball "Quite frankly, I prefer
animals to people." Walt usually was the voice behind Mickey
Mouse, (even though he wasn’t the artist.) His mother was
chilly for years about the work Walt did. Around 1940, after
much pleading, he finally got her to watch Mickey Mouse. His
unsupportive mother (which he would within a few years learn
was not actually his biological mother) told him she didn’t like
Mickey Mouse’s voice, to which he told her it was his, and then
she responded by saying he had a horrible voice. The "cold
towel" she threw on Mickey Mouse helped convince Walt to
quit making Mickey Mouse cartoons. Very few came out of
Disney after that, and the very next Mickey Mouse full-length
feature cartoon, Fantasia, had Mickey mostly silent. Walt’s idea
for The Sorcerer’s Apprentice was based on some of his own
ideas. Walt had had the dream which was used for Mickey
Mouse in The Sorcerer’s Apprentice of having "complete
control of the earth and the elements." Disneyland and
Disneyworld were partial fulfillments of that
Page 78 ....
dream for control. Walt’s final pet project just prior to his death
was the meticulously restored version of the witchcraft film
,,Bedknobs and Broomsticks." (Disney Magazine, Winter
96-97, pub. by Disney, p. 96 mentions this.) As a programming
device, Mickey Mouse works well because it plays on the
subconscious genetically transmitted fear of mice that women
have. Mickey’s image can help create a love-hate relationship,
which is so valued during the traumatization & programming of
mind-controlled slaves. Some sources state that Walt’s love for
animals came from the time his family had a farm near
Marceline, Missouri. Walt began his schooling at Marceline,
but continued it after the age of eight at Benton School in
Kansas City, MO. Walt’s Dad had a serious gambling problem
and passed the spirit of gambling to his son Walt. Walt never
graduated from high school. He had a natural love and a flair
for art work, although (contrary to his public image) he never
became proficient at it. He joined the army in W.W. I as an
ambulance driver by lying about his age. During the war, he
also chauffeured dignitaries. He also did some other things that
are very revealing. He enjoyed drinking & gambling while in
the service, and he ran a scam where he doctored German
artifacts picked up on the battlefield to sell to people. War
relics were tampered with to get them in shape to get the most
money from them possible. Walt took the battle souvenirs - and
dressed them up, for instance, coating the insides of helmets
with grease, hair & blood and putting holes in them to make
them into expensive souvenirs. This shows that Walt was
willing to build illusions if it paid. He could be deceptive if he
saw an advantage to it. From gleanings from things Walt said to
people, it appears that as a child, he’d seen the darker side of
life (for instance, his father had a habit of beating him in the
basement) and had had some interest or exposure to magic as a
child. Bob Thomas writes, "Walt took a boyish delight in
playing tricks on his parents. He was fascinated with magic
tricks..." (Walt Disney, An American Original, p. 35.) After the
military, Walt hoped to have a career as an artist. He applied to
the advertising agency of Pesman-Rubin. Roy, his brother,
claimed that Pesman-Rubin hired Walt as a personal favor to
Roy who handled the agency’s account at the bank Roy worked
at. Walter lasted a month until the advertising agency let him
go due to Walt’s "singular lack of drawing ability." According
to Current Biography 1952, in 1923, Walt and Roy had
together $290. They borrowed $500 from another Disney, one
of their uncles named Robert Disney and began to try to make
cartoons. Robert Disney had retired in the L.A. area in
Edendale, CA after a successful mining career. Robert had
always been close to Walt’s father Elias, and helped Walt and
Roy out when they came to California. Walt loved to study
Charlie Chaplin (a member of the Collins family). He scrawled
notes about his body language, facial features, and his gag
methods. He also read everything he could about animation and
cartooning. They worked out of their uncle’s garage in
Hollywood, CA. They were finally able to make a good cartoon
Steamboat Willie in 1928, which became an instant hit. As with
many things in life, the cartoon was not only good, but Walt
finally had the right ,,connections." On Nov. 18, ’28, Steamboat
Willie was shown in a small, independent theater without any
advance promotion or advertising. But amazingly(!) the New
York Times, Variety, and Exhibitor’s Herald all ran rave
reviews of the cartoon the next day. Was this an accident? did
journalists from all these prestigious periodicals just happen to
go to this tiny independent theater? no it was connections. The
reason the elite decided to promote Walt Disney after
Steamboat Willie
Page 79 ...
came out as Hollywood’s newest "boy wonder" was to deflect
enormous bitterness that had been generated by the Stock
Market collapse toward Jewish financiers. Hollywood, even in
its first two decades, was known as "Babylon" and "Sin City".
The movie industry was well-known to be run by Jews, and
many people blamed the Stock Market Crash on the moral
degradation that Hollywood had introduced to this nation.
There were calls for government regulatory groups to stop the
smutty Hollywood films. Edgar Magnin, the spiritual leader of
the major movie makers who were part of the Los Angeles
B’nai B’rith reportedly encouraged those in the Mishpucka and
others who were B’nai B’rith movie makers that Hollywood
needed to protect itself by putting Walt Disney in the limelight
as a Christian "white knight with family values". (By the way,
Edgar Magnin was nicknamed "Rabbi to the Stars", because he
was "the Hollywood rabbi".) E. Magnin’s grandfather’s
department store chain was one of the first major accounts of
the Bank of Italy, and Edgar Magnin had continued his family’s
close association with the Bank of Italy. The closeness also
came from the Bank of Italy’s close ties to the B’nai B’rith and
ADL. In 1930, the movie industry made a production code
which stated that the industry must make a special effort to
make movies appropriate for children. Hollywood directly
praised Disney in that code as an exemplary model of what the
movie industry wanted to do. With the power of the B’nai
B’rith and ADL behind him, Walt began sailing to fame. Movie
studios that had been turning out smut, with lots of sex and
violence all jumped on the bandwagon to show Walt’s clean
wholesome cartoons. Walt was the facelift Hollywood needed
after the Depression caused Americans to think about
America’s morals. Many of the regular movie makers were so
corrupt they were out of touch with moral issues, but Walt
Disney knew black from white. The Jewish movie makers
"pushed the man [Walt] they considered their best hope to the
front of the pack" who was billed as a fundamentalist Christian
(albeit a masonic "Christian" who rarely stepped foot in a
church). (quote from Walt Disney Hollywood’s Prince of
Darkness, p. 50.) Strangely, the biographies indicate that Walt
quit doing the actual drawing in 1927, and Walt devoted
himself entirely to the development of the cartoon business,
such as raising money. In other words, the image of Walt
Disney being the artist who has created the Disney cartoon’s is
inaccurate. The Disney brothers actually hired many other
artists to do the art work. If Walt quit drawing in 1927, and
their first marketable cartoon was in 1928, that clearly shows
that Walt did not do the actual cartooning. He continued to
oversee the work, walking in and rigidly inspecting what was
being done to suit his own intuitive tastes. Actually the genius
cartoon artist (animator) who made Walt Disney a success was
Ub Iwerks, about whom Walt on a number of occasions said
was "the best animator in the world". Without Ub Iwerks to
take Walt’s ideas and turn them into reality, Walt would never
have become famous. Ub was an incredible genius who had a
sense of line, a sense of humor, patience, organization and a
great sense of what Walt wanted. Walt treated him cruelly at
times, interrupting him, playing tricks on him, and not being
totally honest with paying him, but he stayed with Walt over
the years and made Walt the success Walt became. (The books
Disney’s World and Disney Animation: The Illusion of Life
have information on the unheralded genius Ub Iwerks.)
Another unknown great artist was Floyd Gottfredson. Floyd
Gottfredson drew all the Mickey Mouse cartoons from 1932
until October, 1975--which is a period of 45 1/2 years. Floyd
Gottfredson was a Mormon born in a railway station in 1905,
and raised in a tiny Mormon town, Siggurd, 180 miles so. of
Salt Lake City. In 1931, before Floyd totally
Page 80 ...
took over the Mickey Mouse drawings, he would take
suggestions from Walt on what to draw. For instance, Walt
puzzled him by insisting he do a cartoon series of Mickey
Mouse committing suicide. Floyd had said, "Walt, You’re
kidding!" But Walt thought that a series on suicide would be
funny. Over the years the Walt Disney products never
mentioned Floyd’s name. The bulk of the fans were led to
believe Walt did the cartooning of Mickey Mouse himself. (See
the book Walt Disney’s Mickey Mouse in Color. Ed. Bruce
Hamilton, pub. The Walt Disney Co., 1988.) Fred Moore was
involved in the creation of Pluto and some other cartoon
characters. The idea for Pluto was Walt’s and it was Norm
Ferguson’s genius at drawing that took the idea and created the
actual images. Walt Disney was awarded 32 personal academy
awards for the work that was done by his studios. Walt
Disney’s famous signature was actually designed by someone
else, and was taught to Walt. (Schickel, Richard. The Disney
Version: The Life, Time, Art and Commerce of Walt Disney.
NY, 1968, p. 34.) Walt could only make a crude Disney
signature, so he delegated the writing of the signature to several
artists including Bob Moore, Disney’s publicity artist. Later,
after much practice he learned to make it well enough to do for
publicity. Many people who wrote letters asking for his actual
signature, and who actually did his signature, thought that they
had received forgeries by his staff, because the famous Disney
signature was so crude. The nicer looking ones were the
forgeries. One cartoon animator who joined Disney in 1940
recalled that Walt told him the first day, "You’re new here, and
I want you to understand just one thing. What we’re selling
here is the name Walt Disney. If you can swallow that and
always remember it, you’ll be happy here. But if you’ve got
any ideas about seeing the name Ken Anderson [his name] up
there, its best for you to leave right away."

OCCULT PORN KING

Walt grew up fascinated with the occult and in an abusive home
situation. He was fascinated with cartoons, nature and children.
He had an intuitive sense for quality cartoons that would appeal
to children. At some point, the syndicate got him indebted to
them. At that point he was their man. He owed them a debt that
they held over him. In secret, Walt became a porn king. A
victim remembers that he was sadistic and enjoyed snuff porn
films. His interest in children was far from altruistic. The
Hapsburgs of the 13th Illuminati bloodline had a sex salon in
Vienna, where a porn photographer named Felix Salten
worked. Felix Salten wrote a book Bambi, which was then
translated into English by the infamous communist Whittaker
Chambers. The elite were just beginning to form the roots for
today’s environmental movement. The book appealed to
Disney, because Disney liked animals better than people. In the
book, tame animals view humans as gods, while the wild and
free animals see humans as demons who they simply called
"Him." The book begins with both free and tame animal
viewing humans as rightly having dominion over them. In the
end, the animals view all humans as simply being on the same
level as animals, a vicious animal only fit to be killed. Disney
instructed his animators to make the animals "to be human. I
want people to forget they are watching animals." Bambi was
to receive a Christ-like manger birth, with the animals hailing
him as a "prince." Due to his sexual problems, Walt at one
point permitted himself to be subjected to the packing of his
genitals in ice for hours at a time. (Elliot, Walt Disney
Hollywood’s Dark Prince, p. 83.) Children were instructed to
call Walt "Uncle Walt." An example of this were the
Mouseketeers. For those who know how mind-control
programmers have traditionally liked to be called "uncle" by
their child victims, the insistence by Walt to be known as
"uncle" is
Page 81 ...
distasteful. From what this author has learned from some
sources about Walt’s non-public life as a hidden sadistic porn
king, it raises questions about other parts of his life. For
instance, Kenneth Anger in his book Hollywood Babylon II, p.
192, "Some animators stated that the boss [Walt Disney]
seemed to have fallen in love with the boy. There may be some
truth in this..." The boy, who Walt fell in love with, was a small
young attractive boy actor named Bobby Driscoll who signed
up in 1946 with Disney. He acted in Song of the South,
Treasure Island and Bobby’s voice was used in Peter Pan.
Bobby Driscoll was very intelligent and attractive. Did Disney
help or abuse him? If Disney was such an upbuilding
wholesome atmosphere, & this child actor had everything going
for him, why did Bobby become a methamphetamine addict at
17 & die within just a few years? Why didn’t his talent & early
career lead to something positive in his life? From those who
knew Walt personally one learns that he had an obsession with
the buttock part of anatomy. He enjoyed jokes about this part of
the anatomy, which he told to his staff quite frequently. The
staff edited out many of his crude posterior jokes from cartoon
scripts. Two examples that got by the editors are a Christmas
special where a little boy is unable to button the drop seat of his
pajamas. The little boy’s problem in maintaining his modesty is
the running gag of the cartoon. In the end, Santa gives him a
champer pot. The 2nd example is the paddling machine used on
the wolf in The Three Little Pigs. Numerous Disney cartoons
feature buttocks of characters provocatively twitching.

AS A WITNESS BEFORE CONGRESS

After W.W. II, Walt Disney was called upon by Hollywood to
testify in their defense at the Un-American hearings which were
being carried out by congressmen who were concerned about
the heavy communist influence within Hollywood. Walt
downplayed any communist influence in Hollywood to
Congress. Interestingly, Walt’s father was an outspoken
Socialist Party leader in the United States who advocated a
socialist New World Order. He regularly voted for socialist
presidential candidate Eugene Debs. One of the first drawings
Walt did as a boy was to duplicate the socialist political
cartoons he found in a socialist periodical Appeal to Reason
that his father subscribed to. When Walt asked in the 1930’s
how his father felt about socialism’s successes, his father Elias
said, "Today, everything I fought for in those early days has
been absorbed into the platforms of both the major parties. Now
I feel pretty good about that." (Thomas, Bob. Walt Disney, An
American Original, pg. 147-148) Walt’s movie Alice’s Egg
Plant (1925) was pure communist doctrine where the red hen
(communist) leads the working chickens on a strike against
Julius the farm manager (representing capitalists.) The strike at
Disney and unionization of Disney in 1940, soured Walt toward
communism. The workers at Disney publicly made personal
verbal attacks on Walt & he never forgave the humiliation. In
spite of his public distaste for communism, his Magic Empire
(his castle where he was king) was run like a socialist
dictatorship, similar to what the NWO plans. Employees at
Disney did not have titles; it was faceless egalitarianism with
an all powerful dictator Disney at the top. It was racially elitist
too. The only full-time African-American during Walt’s
lifetime at Disney was a black shoe shine man. Was Walt a
socialist of the National Socialist (Nazi) variety? Arthur Babbitt
claims, "On more than one occasion I observed Walt Disney
and Gunther Lessing there [at Nazi meetings], along with a lot
of other prominent Nazi-afflicted Hollywood personalities.
Disney was going to meetings all the time." Lessing was
mobster Willie Bioff’s crony. Bioff had spent his earlier days
running a whorehouse, before coming to Hollywood for the
mob. In the final panel of the Mickey
Page 82 ...
Mouse comic strip of 6/19/40 a swastika appeared. Some
people have wondered what this & other "secret signals" in
Disney’s work meant. Disney was not Illuminati. The powerful
elite are very skilled at controlling people that rub shoulders
with them, those who are beginning to become independently
wealthy. For instance, they destroyed Robert Morris, the great
financier of the American Revolution. They simply used
Hegelian Dialectics on Walt Disney. Their Unions and the Mob
made Disney’s studio one of their prime targets. In order for
Walt to protect himself from the unions, which he perceived as
communist, Walt got help from the FBI and the mob. Walt was
vulnerable to the unions, because he treated his workers
terrible, with long hours, low pay, in addition to repeated
abuses to their dignity. Walt’s large number of employees
essentially never received any credit or recognition for their
years of creativity and hard work, which was all essentially
stolen and credited to Walt by the establishment to build his
image. (I write "essentially", because someone might find some
obscure exception, but across the board, Walt got all the credit
for what his creative workers produced.) Perhaps Walt needed
the ego boost from all the purloined public praise which he
stole from his staff to be seen as a great animator, because he
had wanted to be an artist/cartoonist and failed. The praise
helped sooth the wounds. One worker recalls that Walt "had no
knowledge of draftsmanship, no knowledge of music, no
knowledge of literature, no knowledge of anything really,
except he was a great editor." This may not be much of an
exaggeration, because Walt was a high school drop-out, who
grew up in poverty on a Missouri farm. Walt’s first official
attempt to direct a film (and last) was the film The Golden
Touch in 1935. The film was an embarrassment. Walt had to
pull it from distribution. If Walt lacked abilities to animate, and
direct, what was Walt’s talent? Walt was the driving force, the
spirit so-to-speak behind Disney. He was the dictator who was
feared enough to demand more from his workers than they
knew they could give--and he could get it. He was the driving
force that took a mob of artists, and gag creators, etc. and
shaped them into a powerful force to make cartoons and later
movies. He was the hard-driving genius who knew what he
wanted and got others to create it for him. He was the driving
force that kept an army of costumed sanitation men
meticulously cleaning Disneyland. In normal year, Walt would
have 800,000 plants replaced at Disneyland, & Walt refused to
put up signs asking the "guests" (visitors) not to trample them.
How powerful was Walt? Here is a man who during his lifetime
and even up into the 1990’s had a rule in the studio &
Disneyland that no male employees could have any facial hair,
yet he himself wore a mustache for most of his life.

A possible CHRONOLOGY OF EVENTS surrounding WALT

DISNEY'S ILLEGITIMATE BIRTH
It is beyond doubt that Walt Disney was an illegitimate child,
but that fact resulted in a long list of mysterious happenings. It
also gave power hungry men, something to blackmail Walt
Disney with. Because this chapter 5 on Deception is focusing
on Disney, and the big boys used blackmail to keep Disney in
line, this information is pertinent. The following chronology of
events is what this author’s believes most likely happened.
Without any genetic tests, it is difficult to determine beyond a
shadow of a doubt who Walt’s biological parents were, and
what the actual history of Walt Disney was. Several people
have spent many years investigating the real facts surrounding
his birth. Many interesting and tantalizing clues have been
found. This author believes that the following chronology is
Page 83 ...
suggested by the evidence. (This author’s chronology is offered
without hundreds of pages of evidence, because the mysteries
around Walt Disney’s birth are here to stay, no matter what
excuses people come up with, and this author doesn't want to
stray from the intended purpose of the chapter. This is to show
that Walt Disney had a secret bastard birth which gave J. Edgar
Hoover --and his superiors-- blackmail leverage over Walt
Disney. Walt may also have had gambling debts and an
abnormal sexual appetite which also helped entrap him. For
those who want more evidence and facts, the following are
recommended: Almendros, Mojacar, Corner of Enchantment,
p. 83; Interview magazine, no. 242, ""Walt Disney Was from
Almeria"", and last but not least Eliot, Marc. Walt Disney,
Hollywood’s Dark Prince, chapter 11.)

1890--An attractive spanish woman Isabelle Zamora Ascenslo

of Mojacar leaves Spain and travels to California to a
Franciscan monastery. In the same year, but later on In
1890-Walt's future father Elias, who fancies himself a ladies
man, leaves his family to seek his fortune in the gold fields. In
California, he meets another newcomer to the state, Isabella
Ascensio, and the two newcomers in California have much in
common, have a sexual affair and fall in love.
1891--Elias fails to make a fortune and returns to Chicago, but
he doesn't forget Isabelle.
1893--Isabelle and Elias have a son, and Elias convinces his
wife to accept the baby as theirs rather than have the family's
reputation, their marriage, and their family ruined. The son
doesn't look like the first two boys at all.
1901--Isabelle and Elias have another bastard son, who Elias
brings home and names Walter after the minister of the church
he attends. The two bastard sons do not look like the older sons
of Elias, and they never have much to do with them, but cling
to each other as brothers.
1903--The minister of the church Elias attends finds out about
the bastard children and Elias quickly moves out of state so that
the scandal will remain secret. Elias has also run up gambling
debts.
1905--After moving to Marceline, Missouri, Isabelle is hired as
the Disney's maid, so that she has an excuse to move in with
them without creating suspicions. She probably does much of
the raising and care of the two boys.
1918--J. Edgar Hoover is busy involved with the prosecution of
draft dodgers in WW I, and it crosses his desk about the case of
Walt Disney committing the crime of forging his parents
signature to join the army. Cases like Walt's were watched
because people who could be blackmailed could be resources in
the future for Hoover. That year, Walt discovered that he had
no birth certificate. Waft observes his parents strange reactions
concerning his birth certificate & other questions, & begins to
deeply distrust his father.
1938, Nov. --Walt's mother dies by gas, and the Disney's maid
pulls Elias to safety from the fumes, but Walt's mother dies.
1939-40--Hoover offers Walt Disney to help Walt locate his
real parents if Walt will work for the FBI. Either Hoover
already knows that he is a bastard child, or he soon learns the
truth from an investigation. This gives Hoover blackmail power
over Walt Disney, and assures Hoover that Waft will be loyal.
Hoover informs Walt Disney of the truth, and then moves to
generously protect Disney & his father's reputation. Two FBI
men plant baptismal information of a child born to Isabelle in
1890 named Jose Guirao in Mojacar, Spain. This date is 10
years off of Walt's birthdate, and is intended to throw people
off track. They can't plant a fake birth certificate for Waft in the
records for 1901, because everyone knows from WW I that
none exists. Therefore, they plant a fake birth certificate for
Walt in the Illinois State records in the year 1890. They hope
people will think that somehow a filing error occurred. This
way if anything leaks, and worst came to worst, Waft could at
least pretend he was adopted and is not an illegitimate bastard.
They pay off townspeople in Mojacar to tell a particular story.
Townspeople probably receive ongoing payments.
1941--Walt confronts his father with the truth, and his father
commits suicide, and his real mother comes to live with him as
his maid.
1954--In order to reinforce the myth that Walt was born in
Spain, a group of Franciscan monks goes to Mojacar and
visibly inquires about the birth records of Jose Guirao and/or
Walt Disney. They spend time with the mayor and make sure
that everyone connects Waft Disney with Jose, who is a
fictitious (nominal) character that the FBI has created records
of.
1967--A year after Walt's death, a large group of Americans (a
large group was needed because they are not skilled like the 2
FBI men in 1940) pretend to be on "official" business for the
American government. They go to Majacar Spain to destroy all
the records of Jose Guirao to insure that there will be no
spanish claimants to Walt Disney's fortune.
Page 84 ..

Later to insure that the fictitious story is solidly in place to

mislead the few who might get by the cloud of secrecy over
Walt Disney, the Spanish government does a favor to certain
powerful people and pays an investigator to investigate the
spanish origins of Walt Disney. People of the village willingly
tell people without any fear or without any fanfare that Walt
Disney was born at their village. Unless they have recently
done so, the village has never done anything--no monuments,
no markers, or anything about the birth site of Disney. They
probably didn't do this for years, because some of the village
probably knew it was a lie. With the older people gone, the lie
has probably become well entrenched as truth and there is most
likely some type of memorial to Walt Disney.
WALT DISNEY’S CHARACTER
Because the Disney deception is such a major Illuminati
deception worldwide, and because Walt Disney was the major
catalyst behind all the Disney theme parks, movies, trinkets etc.
it is of importance to examine his character. In studying
historical figures, this author has tried to get to the rock bottom
truth. One may ask, how can this be done? -especially since
there have been decades of myths spread by the establishment
and their media? The following procedure which has worked
with other historical figures was also done by this author with
Walt Disney. The first part of this author’s own procedure is to
study everything that one can find on the man, paying special
attention to what bias and vantage point another author comes
from. Special attention is also paid to biographers who try to
give the whole truth as they have found it, rather than approved
biographies that repeat myths, platitudes, and flattery. The
investigator has to be careful because there are authors who
deceptively say in their introductions that they are "detached
investigators" who are "going to be painfully honest in their
reporting" when they actually are skillful coverup artists for the
person they write about. When your author, Fritz Springmeier,
finished investigating written material about Walt Disney, then
I mentally placed what I knew on the shelf temporarily, and did
a handwriting analysis based on the scientific principles of
Graphoanalysis as well as the broader field of Graphology. This
author is a Certified Graphoanalyst who has done handwriting
analysis professionally. Using Graphoanalysis/graphology is an
excellent way to get an unbiased very deep look at a historical
figure. It is a way to by-pass all the propaganda and myths.
However, a close historical look and the handwriting analysis
(of various historical figures) have always matched each other,
as they did in this case too. Here is what was found. The
following paragraphs are how Walt was in the 1920’s. The
personality profile you will read did not endure. Under the
pressure of micromanaging Disney Productions as well as
living with financial stresses, by the 1940’s, Walt could be
found in rages giving rough treatment to his wife, and rough
spankings to his two children. He went to psychiatric
counseling to cope with the stress. And unfortunately with the
progression of time, by the 1960’s Walt had become a sadistic
egotistical alcoholic. One biographer described him as ,,...a
bully and a know-it-all" (Disney’s World, p. 220) Even then
Walt had men working for him, such as Bill Walsh (who had
been a orphan as a child) who worshipped Walt. But here is
how he was in the 1920’s: Walt was a self-motivated individual
with lots of energy which was constantly seeking some outlet.
(People have written much about this trait of his.) He was more
the giver than the taker in relationships. (In the first few years,
when he was responsible for making business contracts he often
gave away his work without setting prices for profits. He even
wrote letters to his boss to the effect that his first priority was
good cartoons not profits, and that he’d work without profits,
but he did want some appreciation for his work. That was his
sensitive nature showing.) Walt wouldn’t wait for others to
come up with an idea or someone else to make a move--he was
there first. He could communicate his ideas with
Page 85 ...
clarity and ease and move easily from idea to another. (He
would storm into Disney Productions and spew one idea after
another into his workers’ ears.) He enjoyed competition. He
had a quick mind and keen perception. He frequently acted on
intuition and impulse, taking chances and endangering his own
security. (He frequently gambled all his life savings and
everything he could scrape together on a project.) Long projects
bored him. (Fortunately the real tedious work of cartooning was
done by a large staff of artists.) House chores and repetitive
chores bored him and he avoided them. (He was absolutely a
total slob around the house as a bachelor.) He was impatient
with vague philosophies, he liked concrete realities. He was
difficult to get along with because he had both a playful side
(even to the point of cruel practical jokes) to his personality and
an aggressive intolerant impatient side that wanted to achieve.
Naturally, people around him were disconcerted because on a
subconscious level they never knew which side of him they
would deal with. (The reference series Current Biography
"Disney" article p. 248 gives the following Walt Disney quote,
"We don’t even let the word ‘art’ be used around the studio. If
anyone begins to get arty, we knock them down.") He was
geared for action. He was always inventing ways to get what he
needed. He could be explosive when provoked. (The old time
associates of Walt remember his explosive temper.) He was a
person of dynamic energy, sensuality and keen thinking, and a
disciple of the pleasure principle. Because his father was so
abusive and misused his position of authority, Walt came to be
deeply ingrained with defiance toward authority. (The themes
of his films repeatedly sympathize with those who rebel against
authority, and the police and other authority figures are
consistently shown as absurd. One way he expressed
irresponsibility was with lively dance scenes, which has been a
hall-mark of teenage rebellion during the 20th century. "Comic
anarchy reaches its fullest expression in Alice Rattled by Rats,
which shows what the rats do when the cats goes away!) He felt
that rules were for others to follow. (That is one reason he
would step outside of the law and commit illegal acts. This is
one trait that may be responsible for some of the criminal
activities Walt ended up participating in.) Walt also didn’t like
to be closely supervised. (He wanted to manage his Disney
Magic Kingdom as if it were his own kingdom. He wanted to
be an authority figure, and indeed became the dictator of his
Magic Kingdom. When his workers differed with his own
views he felt that they were infringing upon his own inalienable
rights as an individual.) He was somewhat of a melancholic
temperament, that type of perfectionist who still enjoys life. He
felt a need to protect himself against intimacy with others. He
was most home in a setting which he made for himself. Walt
had the traits of an executive. He was slow to reveal his
innermost feelings, and definitely set his own goals. Walt was
one of those persons that when the going got tough, he hung in
there. Likewise he would cling to his ideas, plans, and
possessions. (His stubborn refusal to allow his brother Roy to
stop the creation of Disneyland led to events that split the
brothers. His determination to succeed was taken advantage of
by the crime syndicates to blackmail him with some debt. In
order to get his dreams, he was willing to give them what they
wanted.) A clue to Walt’s macabre sense of humor, at times
almost a graveyard sense of humor, and his high tolerance of
seeing pain in others, is that Walt was seriously thinking of
volunteering again as a medic after the W.W. I fighting in
France was over, when volunteers were needed for the Balkan
fighting. Walt loved animals more than people. The only
human being that he had rapport with while growing up on the
farm was his Uncle Ed (who he called Uncle Elf), who looked
like a cross between a leprechaun and a prune. Uncle Elf could
make animals sounds
Page 86 ...
and bird whistles to Walts delight. Walt loved the charm of the
farm and nature and he loved royalty, pageantry and a strict
social hierarchy such as Freemasonry provides. He often wove
a combination of the barnyard in with royal parades and other
trappings of royalty. For instance, in Alice the Piper, the King
Hamlin is a farmer who sleeps in a farmhouse. In Puss in Boots
the local king lives in an authentic palace incongruously placed
in a village. His early film Alice’s Day at Sea includes both the
features of a royal court and an American circus. In typical
Disney disdain for authority, he pokes fun at criminal fraternal
groups with their rituals and passwords in Alice & the Dog
Catcher, Alice Foils the Pirates, and Alice’s Mysterious
Mystery. And while he was a secret FBI agent, he went against
Hoover’s wishes and poked fun at the FBI’s authority. Walt
was loyal to what he believed and could be loyal to those
individuals who he deemed worthy of his loyalty, but he didn’t
want anyone to have authority over him. (Walt was a 320
Freemason & an occultist, he was loyal to that philosophy and
loyal in his early years to his older brother Roy O. Disney, who
was a father figure to him.) If anyone at the studios agreed with
him when he was angry at his brother Roy, he or she risked
losing their job. Both brothers were protective of each other,
and felt they were the only ones who could criticize the other
one.

D. WHO WAS ROY O. DISNEY?

Roy O. Disney was born in 1893, and his brother Walt in 1901.
They had three other brothers, but Roy and Walt (1901-1966)
were only close to each other and not to their other brothers,
who didn’t resemble them. Walt was named Walter Elias, his
middle name derived from his father’s first name. The Disney
family had immigrated from Ireland to Canada and then to the
U.S. The father of the brothers as stated was Elias, and their
mother of scottish descent, who may not have been the
biological mother, had the maiden name Flora Call. Roy died in
1971, shortly after the opening ceremonies for Walt Disney
World. He kept his promises to his brother to build Walt
Disney World. He reneged on his promises concerning the city
of Epcot (which was derailed into becoming EPCOT). Roy O.
during the 1930’s lived in North Hollywood. Roy’s family later
located in Napa Valley, CA, and was associated with the
Illuminati kingpins in the area. Napa Valley has been
nicknamed the Valley of Kings. This "Valley of Kings" plays a
major role in the dirty activities revealed in this chapter. Roy 0.
Disney played a bigger role at Disney Studios than people
realize. For example, it was Roy O. who made the decision to
cut 45 min. out of Fantasia, so that Walt’s pet project could be
distributed to movie theaters. Roy O., considered by some
insiders as the more evil of the two brothers, kept the financial
books for the Disney’s down through the years. It is known that
Disney kept two books during the 1950’s, so it is hard to
believe anything except that Roy 0. was fully aware of how
Disney brought in their money. The big boys always kept the
financial screws to Walt and Roy. The big boys often figured
out scams to take their money. When the Disney brothers had
an arrangement with Columbia Studio (run by Harry Cohn)
they were advanced $7,500 for each cartoon which cost them
an unprofitable $13,500 to make. Further, Cohn liked to cheat
them by not sending them their money, and taking a ridiculous
amount of time to pay them what he owed them. The cash flow
problems of the Disney brothers also came from Walt’s desire
to keep improving and upgrading the technology they used.
When Walt went to color over Roy’s objections, Disney’s
profit margin was damaged and the studio was left with
shortages of cash. In 1937, Walt’s repeated gambles with
cartoon production ideas caused Roy O. to say, "We’ve bought
the whole damned sweepstakes." From 1940 through
Page 87 ...
1946, Disney lost money every year. In '46, he lost $23,000.
Finally in 1947, things turned around and the Disney studio
made a profit of $265,000. Cartoons and movies were not really
big moneymakers for the Disney brothers, until it was realized
that old films could be replayed on television. Overall, from the
20’s through the 50’s, the Disneys may have broke even with
animation. This is why Disney Studios at Christmas, 1931 was
unable to pay its payroll. Pinocchio cost $2.6 million to make in
the late ’30’s, an amount hard to retrieve at that time from the
box office, and Fantasia’s original release in the ’40’s was a
dismal financial failure. When Sleeping Beauty was released in
1960, it was a loser, movie goers were apathetic towards it. The
real money made by the Disney brothers in the 1930-1950’s
came from the merchandising of Disney products, the
production of underground hard porn, and the kickbacks from
various groups which used Disney for mind-control
programming, and money laundering. When Walt died, his
shares in Disney were worth $18 million. His family all in all
held 34% of the stock in Walt Disney Productions. Roy o.
Disney’s daughter Dorothy Disney Puder & husband
Episcopalian Rev. Glen Puder purchased property at 1677 Sage
Canyon Rd., Napa Valley east of Rutherford. (This is close to
the Rothschild’s Opus One Temple mentioned in VoL 1.) O.J.
Simpson’s lawyer Johnnie Cochran Jr. was in the Rothschild’s
hard-to-enter Opus 1 when the jury arrived at a decision in O.J.
Simpson’s case.) It is very typical for Mafia families in south
Boston to have one family member in the clergy & one full
time in organized crime. (See author’s Be Wise As Serpents for
an expose on the Episcopalian Church, which is simply a
branch of Freemasonry.) All kinds of interesting Mafia figures,
Illuminati, and Bohemian Grovers live up the Sage Canyon Rd.
This is an area that has a large well-kept cemetery for pets.
Frank Well’s sister and Rich Frank, who will all be discussed
later in this chapter, also live on Sage Canyon Rd.
E. WHO WAS ROY B. DISNEY?
Roy Edward Disney (nephew of Walt) is the son of Roy Oliver
Disney (brother of Walt). Sometimes he has been called Junior.
The 9/5/94 Newsweek story on Disney’s Magic Kingdom called
him "Keeper of the Flame." Roy is an executive with Walt
Disney Co. at 500 5. Buena Vista St., Burbank, CA 91521. He
has worked as an asst. producer at Walt Disney Co. from 1954
to 1977. He has also been the vice-pres. of Walt Disney Co. He
is president of Roy E. Disney Prodns. in Burbank. He is
chairman of the board for Shamrock Broadcasting Co. As if
that weren’t enough, he is on the board of directors for St.
Joseph Med. Ctr., fellow U. Ky. Recipient of the Academy
award nomination for Mysteries of the Deep. He is a director of
the Guild American West, the Writers Guild, which is
important. He belongs to the 100 Club, the Confrerie des
Chevaliers du Tastevin, and St. Francis Yacht Club. He likes
speed boat racing. Roy E. Disney was the cocky son of Roy O.
He married a gal named Patricia. He was merely tolerated by
his uncle Walt, especially after Roy E. made some snide
remarks about Walt’s plans for Disneyland, which he and his
father opposed until Walt Disney personally got the project
going. Walt’s son-in-law Ronald Miller is one of the Disney
clan who can’t stand Roy E. The two never liked each other,
and in the power struggle between them after Walt’s death, Roy
E. won and ended up with Disney. Although people called Roy
E. "Walt’s idiot nephew", he eventually (with the help of his
father & outsiders) won the various power struggles at Disney
after Walt died, and is now a powerful figure. Roy E. Disney
and Stanley P. Gold work together in various ways, and are
both on the present Disney Bd. of Dir. They are
Page 88 ...
friends and worked to prevent hostile takeovers of Disney in
1984. Gold is in charge of Shamrock Holdings, Inc.
Back to Contents Ch 5 continue
 For picture #1 - click here!

Page 137 ...

CHAPTER 6
SCIENCE NO. 6-
THE USE OF ELECTRONICS &
ELECTRICITY
Developments in fiberoptics, computers, electronic
communications, nano-technology, bio-chips & neuro-electrical
research have combined to bring mankind to the point where
mankind can be controlled by one centralized monolithic Beast
computer. The ultimate mind-controlled slavery is now
possible. We are in the first stages of its implementation.
The chapter will be organized in the following sections &
subsections:

Section A. An Overview of the subject.

A1. Where this article is headed
A2. Where the NWO is headed

Section B. An intro to implants

B1. Three typical implant victims
B2. Documentation of implants
B3. GWEN Towers
B4. Body suits

Section C. Specific Implants

C1. Audio implants (a. public. b. secret)
C2. Body manipulation implants
C3. Visual holographic implants
C4. Memex/Brain Link implants

C5. Torture/Nerve & Muscle Stimulation Implants

C6. Tracking & LD. Implants.

Section D. Direct monitoring & manipulation of

the brain/mind
D1. Direct monitoring
D2. Direct manipulation

Section E. Auxiliary uses of electronics &

electromagnetic waves.
E1. hypnotic induction
E2. polygraphs
E3. attacks against people & objects
E4. virtual reality

A1. Where this article is headed

This chapter is designed to cover the complexities of hi-tech
mind-control in simple-to-understand language. To
accommodate those who are more technically literate and who
want more, some clues to more technical sources are given, but
time & space limitations mean that much has gone unsaid. My
deep thanks to the many victims, who placed their trust in me to
get their stories out to the world. I hope that I have vindicated
their trust. There are a number of disinformation agents that
appear to be putting out good information on implants, but are
actually disinformation agents. We can error by undershooting
or overshooting the truth. The principle topics that these
pretend "whistle blowers" have been discussing are the tracking
implants and remote viewing. (For RV info, see Theta
Programming material in Vol. 2.) Neither topic is any
revelation, nor are they the most dangerous items in the elite’s
electronic mind-control arsenal. If the reader has not skipped
chapter 5 on disinformation, then he will be aware how factual
information can be used in disception, such as in chicken feed
& building bona fides. Why is it that the TV program "The
Real X-Files" shown on channel 4 was created by a CIA
operative, Jim Schnabel? And why are all the "private" Remote
Viewing organizations run by what appear to be entirely all
intelligence operatives (such as Ed Dames, et. al.)? And why do
we see mind-control specialists, like "ex"-Intelligence officer
C.B. Scott Jones who gets involved with several UFO research
organizations & disseminating disinformation? One
"researcher", who is publicly exposing" the NWO, tried to
convince this author, "The government has no secrets." (A
word-for-word quote by the way.) He needs to read a
supplement to the National Industry Security Pro grain manual
(Mar. 92 release) where the Air Force teaches their DoD
contractors how to construct cover stories to lie about the
nature of their work for the
Page 138 ...
government. I will not take cheap shots at the World Order, & I
will not intentionally mislead the reader. You will get the whole
truth and nothing but the truth, as well a single chapter can
present it. Vol. 2’s chapter 6 which was on this same subject
was not the final word and neither is this chapter. Before I start
passing on lots of information, I should clarify one point.
Human brain cells communicate by superconductivity, not
electricity. Electricity travels near the speed of light, while
superconductivity is in the range of the speed of sound.
Government researchers have a device called a SQUID
(Superconducting Quantum Interference Device) which
actually monitors the light flowing from brain cell to brain cell.
This is why over 5% of the brain’s dry matter weight is iridium
and rhodium. However, this does not subtract from the fact that
electromagnetic waves have the ability to change what the brain
experiences and thinks. I must also provide a small glossary for
electronic mind-control terms that most people are not familiar
with.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS FOR UNDERSTANDING
ELECTRONIC MIND CONTROL
Bio-medical telemetry--Transmitter-receivers that are often
located at the base of the skull which record body functions &
brain wave activity. Their data is sent to remote computers for
monitoring. A bio-medical telemetry implant may also function
as the primary control implant on body suits of implants. Early
versions were used on astronauts.

EMF weapons--Electromagnetic Frequency weapons. These

basically are machines that can modulate and beam
electromagnetic waves in such a fashion that they control
biological/mental functions within the victim. Portals to the
central nervous system can be manipulated to create visual
images, project voices into the mind, and create pain, moods
and emotions.

Psychotronics--This word was originated from Soviet research.

The American public have mistakingly thought that the word is
equivalent to psychic activity. A more precise translation of the
Russian term would have been "applied psychoenergetics".
American psychotronics research was initially done at Stanford
Research Institute. This is the Theta Programming that Vol. 2
described.

Remote Viewing (RV for short)--This means psychic viewing

of something.

Syntel--This is short for synthetic telepathy, which is the

remote sending of voices and thoughts into a victim of
electronic mind-control. The military and intelligence agencies
have successfully achieved this capability and have carried out
countless meetings over their possible uses of syntel.

A2. Where the NWO is headed

Since 1991, this author has been in contact with various victims
of implants. The natural first reaction of many initial listeners
would be skepticism to the subject. The psychological
profession has had articles in their professional journals
ridiculing these poor victims. If a fair-minded person will
match the experiences of what one can witness happening to
these implant victims (as well as their evidence) to the cutting
edge of what science is researching and capable of doing, then
there is no doubt that implants are being used on an ever
increasing mass scale. The World Order is using amplifiers,
generators, electronics, listening devices, non-ionizing
electromagnetic radiation, a snapping type sound energy that
hits and burns the body, closed-circuit videos to monitor
implant victims, nanotechnology, and tracking devices that
scanners (incl. mobile hand-held scanners) can pick up-- JUST
to name a few. This chapter will provide an indepth overview
of
Page 139 ...
many of these electronic mind-control gadgets. Unfortunately,
the twilight zone of Big Brother is upon us. People (such as
limosine drivers) that have been around the movers and shakers
report that they brag about these technological controls. The
technology described in this chapter, such as nanobots, and
holographic implants are in the "R&D stage" of use. What is
meant by "R&D stage" means that the World Order is using a
large variety of experimental items, but the reader should be
forewarned that this does not mean that these items are any
indication of where the World Order’s actual secret R&D is at.
This author has worked with enough mind-control victims to
have established several facts:
· Society is getting only the crumbs of what is known by the
World Order’s hierarchy.
· The World Order is releasing technology at a control rate,
much of it through mind-controlled slaves who are
programmed to "discover" a particular "discovery". They are in
reality only disclosing what has been known in secret, and their
discoveries are actually helping cover up where the World
Order’s secret research is at. However, it’s not difficult to see
the direction the World Order is headed. They are working at
making virtual reality (aka cyperspace) the "in" thing. They are
fusing the human mind to computers. Computers/robots are
taking over human jobs, and humans are becoming more like
computers/robots. Sci-fi gurus, cyberpunks, and establishment
scientists are selling and advertising this technological direction
as "freedom", and the crowds of sheep are accepting things like
brain implants as "survival equipment" and "freedom". The
cool" technological pied pipers of our time are teaching our
children that gadgets that remove their minds from reality are
giving them new freedoms. But this chapter is written because
there are still a few people with the neural-receptors and the
computing capacity left in their craniums to comprehend the
dangers that these mind-controlling devices have for
humanity. Witnesses have told me that the creation of
"robocop" type cybergs (the fusion of man & other equipment)
has already been experimented on in secret. Indeed, the
government gave out research contracts for cyberg research
back in the 1960’s. And the use of electro-magnetic waves (esp.
Tesla waves), implants, and other electronic devices by the
Illuminati for mind-control is on the increase. How much of a
genuine threat do these things pose humanity? [I’ll spell it out
for the reader, but we must remain calm, a fear-based response
only makes things worse.] Yes, it is true that the NSA can
remotely track people if they know the specific EMF waves
(evoked potentials from EEGs in the 30-50 Hz, 5 milliwatt
range) of a person’s bioelectric field. Each person’s emissions
are unique, just like their fingerprint, paimprint, and their
voiceprint. This means that the NSA can remotely track anyone
in public. And yes, it is true that the NSA’s RNM system can
remotely send EMF Brain stimulation signals which create
visual images, subliminal audios, what appear to be audible
sounds, and thoughts into people’s minds. Yes, it is true that
body suits of implants are used to control people’s minds and
bodies, as well as track them. Yes, it is true they have voice
prints of hundreds of thousands of Americans and can identify
& track via their computers all electronic communications in
this nation. Most phone calls go through about 30 computers
before they reach their destination. The phone companies
computers, according to someone who worked for AT&T and
witnessed it, record ALL phone calls using computers.
However, to weed out the worthless from the worthwhile, the
Illuminati’s fronts use a list of key words, such as names or
phrases called THE WATCH LIST which the computer uses to
identify conversations worthwhile to listen to. Even though the
NSA uses
Page 140 ...
supercomputers, it is monitoring most communication on the
entire planet so they have to squeeze the WATCH LIST as tight
as possible. According to Bamford, James. The Puzzle Palace.
NY: The Puzzle Palace, 1983, p. 459, "...according to Raven,
programmers would simply reduce Malcolm X to the last two
letters in his first name (lm) followed by a space and then the
letter X. Then any time an intercepted data communications
containing that particular combination of letters and spacing
(lm X) streamed past the computer’s reading head, it would
automatically be kicked Out for further analysis. Part of the
reason that the computers are swamped with Watch list
submissions is that many items require numerous entries. When
searching for derogatory references to President Richard M.
Nixon, for example, technicians would have to program a
variety of possible key words, such as "Tricky Dicky". This,
according to the former G Group Chief would be converted to
The new technology which is being implemented in stages
includes computer imaging of a person which makes a "whole
body map" of the person’s body which is stored in the
computer. Something that has been only developed for a
narrow use by the NWO is the downloading of the holographic
image of a person’s thoughts so they can be transmitted to
another. (See Appendix 3 on cloning for more on this.) The
majority of the few people who know this is going on wouldn’t
waste time reporting it, because the public wouldn’t believe it
anyway. However, some prominent scientists are predicting
that it is just around the corner. The three top research institutes
in this field, Stanford Research Institute, MIT, and the
Carnegie-Mellon Univ. all have people saying that this
capability is "almost here". Austrian born Hans Moravec, dir,
of the Robotics Inst. at Carnegie Mellon Univ., is quoted in The
Indianapolis Star, 6/14/1987, in an article entitled
"Immortality", "In an astonishingly short amount of time,
scientists will be able to transfer the contents of a person’s
mind into a powerful computer, and in the process, make
him--or at least his living essence--virtually immortal." MIT
artificial intelligence researcher Gerald J. Sussman states, "I’m
afraid, unfortunately that I’m the last generation to die. Some of
my students may manage to survive a little longer.’’ But as
fantastic as all these powerful capabilities sound, there are
gliches in their electronic control of humans.
As an outsider looking inside for a number of years, this author
has been able to take note of some of the success and failures of
the New World Order’s electronic mind-control. First, the NSA
picks up so much intelligence information, they are drowning
in their own information. Only so many people can make
decisions, and they can only digest so much information. They
may try to manipulate people and events, but Christians (who
are free of the mind-control) can step through those
manipulations by having the mind of Christ. Next, if a person
understands who they are & believes in following Christ,
outside visions & outside or strange voices or thoughts do not
alter the course that a person will take. Most of the people this
author has met who have been subjected to remote electronic
control over their mind--HAVE REJECTED the instructions &
harassment of their electronic handlers. Not only is it clear that
the voices are being transmitted from an external source to the
victim, others can also detect that something is amiss. The
element of secrecy is missing. One man spent an afternoon
talking to this author about the World Order had tried to
electronically control his mind, and turn him into a drug pusher.
He had sucessfully foiled them for several years. Although he
has had to flee & try to go into hiding to keep his own mind.
The most powerful mind-control is still trauma-based mind
control built on a foundation of multiple personalities
(dissociated personalities and dissociated parts
Page 141 ...
of the mind). It appears that electronic mind-control is being
overlaid on top the mind-control based on dissociation. When
this is done, the electronic mind-control is frightening, because
the victim’s consciousness is not able to think passed the
electronic mind-control which catches their undivided attention.
They are too distracted to deal with the deeper issues of
trauma-based mind-control.
Imagine being a programmed multiple, and your handler
doesn’t have to even be near you to relay complicated codes
and instructions. He can use your implant. But again, how
serious is electronic mind-control? Let me relate to you about a
guided tour that a civilian friend of mine took through a
NWO’s major beast computer center in Alaska back in the
1970’s. The engineer, who was in charge of building and
getting the center operational, gave him a tour of the site’s
capabilities. At that point, the NWO had built a massive
computer center in Alaska, one in So. Africa (believed to be
located at the U.S. embassy in Johannisberg), and one in Pine
Gap, Australia. These three sites were very specific, because
they formed a triangle on the globe, and couldn’t be located
anywhere else, due to the naturally occuring lines of force of
the planet. These Beast Computer Centers consist of aisles and
aisles of big state of the art computers. They each have several
dozen people to run them. Even in the ’70’s, an operator could
speak into the computer and it would answer. For instance, if
you asked the computer about anyone on the planet, it could
usually pull up all kinds of information about that person. If
you asked the computer how could you get that person to kill
someone? or how can I isolate this person? The computer
would spill out a plan almost instantly, telling you all the
people around that subject who could be manipulated and in
what fashion those people need to be manipulated to cause the
end result. This is the end result of years of "BLACK
PSYCHIATRY--which means applying psychiatric techniques
to manipulate people and nations. These computers
electronically connect to some of those people who are
electronically controlled, so that the controllers can actually
control the world from a computer. These computers also store
vast amounts of personal information about people’s thought
processes and thinking. It is possible that electronic
surveillance is being done to read the thoughts of people and
that the computers are actually able to store this information in
some usable fashion. Because this is so secret, they can’t give
any hints of their vast ability to monitor thoughts, as well as
organize and store those thoughts. This sounds like science
fiction, but from people who invent & work at state of the art
technology, this is actually said to be old technology. They are
limited in how they use this technology because they want it to
remain secret. Meanwhile on the surface, the public system has
automated fingerprint identification with the AFIS system, and
has automated birth certificates electronically too. This all ties
in with the intense desire of the World System to use the
potential of their computers’ memories. Large Neural
computers that have artificial intelligence using neural
processing which is a type of learning similar to learning done
by the human brain are being used. Recently, the world
champion chess player was beat by a computer. This author’s
friend, who toured the Alaskan computer center, was shown
how a war could be created between any two nations. The
operator merely asked the computer what it knew about a
certain country and then ask it how could a war be created with
a neighboring country. This is the end result of countless
studies such as the U.S. military reference book Basic
Psychological Operations Study (BPS) which outlines country
by country, specifying where each country is vulnerable for
PSYOP operations (psychological warfare).
Page 142 ...
This kind of thing has a long history. For instance in W.W. II,
the Office of War Information and the 0SS cooperated in
psychological warfare projects. What this author’s friend saw
was a network of Cray-type computers, perhaps similar to the
EMASS system of Cray computers that E-Systems developed.
Such a system can store 5 trillion pages of text and work with
that data base with lightening speed.
The reason this author’s friend was allowed to see this
technology, was that he happened to be at the right place at the
right time, and the Engineer operator of the Beast Computer
said that this system was obsolete. Which is true, today’s 9
Beast computers are much better at speech than the computers
at these three control sites were in ’73. The Beast computers
can (according to another eye witness who used it) hear human
voices and determine what language is being spoken and then
can listen and answer in that language. These computers link
directly to thousands of mind-controlled slaves and can-- via
various methods-- almost instantly control the behavior of
numerous people. This, along with good old fashioned phone
calls, allows the elite to manipulate events very fast. Anchorage
is the site of a National Security Agency NSA listening
post(LP). The Beast computer was located northeast of
Anchorage, and so is the HAARP project. The HAARP facility
is near Gakona, a hamlet about 140 miles north of Prince
William Sound and its signals travel on a field line to Australia.
The Beast Computer is also linked to Australia as well as
satellite systems. The HAARP site took a 4-wheeled truck to
reach, and the Beast Computer site in 1973 was even more
remote. The University of Alaska Fairbanks (which has its own
super computer) and the Alaskan Poker Flat Rocket Range also
were involved with the HAARP project. 30% of the U of A’s
supercomputer’s use was for DoD projects. HAARP uses 3
powerful transmitter sites in Alaska. Somewhat on the flip side,
the human brain which they control can, IF it has a memex
implant, interface with the Beast computer which acts as a vast
repository of human knowledge as well as answering questions
to essentially all previously answered questions
instantaneously. If the human brain has some type of virtual
reality holodeck attachment, the computer can even walk the
slave through a realistic setting indistinguishable from the real
world. Robocop or robo-soldier has an incredible advantage
with such extended memex/remote viewing capabilities. The
World Order has experimented in memex/remote viewing along
several divergent paths. One method has been psychic
(demonic) method, where the "natural" mental facilities of the
human are trained. The other route has been high-tech.
According to eye-witnesses both methods have yielded positive
results, although it sounds like they are still refining their
capabilities. The word telematics has come into use to denote
the interconnection between computers and
telecommunications. France has a National
Telecommunications Research Center, which works with
groups such as CII-Honeywell Bull (Jean-Pierre Brule, Pres., &
Emmanuel de Robien, Sec.-Gen.). CII-Honeywell Bull did
telematics and implant research, and so has IBM France. IBM’s
subsidiary SBS developed satellite-based communications. In
Britain, their National Physical Laboratory NPL has been active
in telecommunications research. Professional computer groups
have umbrella groups such as the British Computer Society,
which help determine policies. In the U.S. the National Center
for Supercomputer applications works on virtual reality
interface with humans. Meanwhile SCAN (Swinburne Centre
for Applied Neurosciences, Hawthorn, Australia 3122) has
been working on how to monitor human thoughts. These are
just a few of a vast network of research groups applying their
efforts to the types of things you will read about in this chapter.
Around 1973, TRW began designining
Page 143 ...
a satellite that would allow the CIA to communicate with its
assets/agents in "denied areas". This was code-named
Pyramider, and used frequency hopping. The signals can be
hidden among random urban radio transmissions. (See Robert
Lindsey, The Falcon and the Snowman. NY: Simon &
Schuster, 1979, p. 218) Some people who are related (in some
fashion) to the CIA have been receiving Syntel implants that
are communicating to them using signals that frequency-hop.
So the proof is in the pudding, the CIA used Pyramider to
contact implant victims. The World Order does not use every
technological gadget they have in every situation. Use of secret
weaponry is restricted so that the weaponry remains secret.
This is one reason why victims of mind-control display such a
wide variety of symptoms and control mechanisms. But what is
scary is that any bozo can already purchase on the public
market a frightening array of electronic mind-control devices.
Information Unlimited puts Out a catalog that any bozo on the
street can order from which advertises 200,000 volt stun guns,
laser ray gun, compressed air guns (Alr Tasers) that knock
people down with probes that attach instantly to the human
target and jam their nervous system with T-waves, laser
listening devices to listen at long range via their windows,
implants along with the tracking system to keep track of people,
animals or objects. They also sell other novel devices. While
this author has that catalog that advertises for sale computer
chips to implant people with, the psychiatric profession is
helping cover-up Big Brother’s implant technology. For
instance the Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, Sept.
1995, Vol. 183 (9), pp. 603-604, has a story about two males
(aged 33 and 53 years old) who were labeled delusional
because they complained of implants hidden in their fillings in
their teeth. The article is entitled, "Delusional electronic dental
inplants: Case reports and literature review." The shrinks
concluded the two men were obviously mentally ill and needed
treatment with drugs because they are claiming that they have
electronic dental implants. The psychiatrists wrote, "neither had
any insight into the implausibility of the delusion." The doctors
gave antipsychotic drugs, and physically intervened to "prevent
an inappropriate dental extraction." According to the article, for
some unknown reason, the two men "responded poorly" to
anti-psychotic drugs. It never occurs to the psychiatrists that the
reason the anti-psychotic drugs didn’t work is possibly because
the men’s complaints were legitimate. The two shrinks were E.
Sherwood Brown and Michael T. Lambert. There are other
cases too, where people complaining of implants have been
labelled "delusional" by psychiatrists. The Amer. Psychiatric
Assoc. is guilty of refusing to seriously review evidence that
harassment & mind-control may be impacting people mentally.
DSM-IV reflects this continuing refusal to accord victims of
electronic mind-control any official recognition by the
therapeutic community. Based on research by Drs. W. Fry & R.
Meyers, the Network has learned how to make brain lesions of
a minute controlled size with ultrasonics, rather than doing a
lobotomy. In 1963, Dr. Peter Lindstrom at the Univ. of
Pittsburgh was able to use a single unfocused sonic beam to
destroy fiber tracts in the brain without damaging the nerve
cells near them. Sonic beams (sound waves) can be used to
control human thought. (We’ll discuss sonic beams some more
later, now let’s delve into a key part of their electronic
control--implants.)

SECTION B. AN INTRO TO IMPLANTS

B1. Three typical implant victims
Let’s look at three victims who suffer from of mind-control
implants & body-control implants, who are known by this
author. We can refer to them as "Amy", Victim No. 1001...,
"Betty", Victim No. 1002..., and "Cathy", Victim
Page 144 ...
No. 1003... --
"Amy" determined by using a spectrum analyzer that she had
waves of 750 mhz targeted on her. "Betty" determined that she
had the entire spectrum of radio-microwaves hitting her in a
Morse code pattern. The transceiver (transmitter/receiver) for
the signals was a fiber optic receiver made to look like a pubic
hair that repeatedly burned holes in her underwear. Apparently,
this side effect is a "bug" they haven’t gotten out of the
technology. "Cathy" has ELF & VLF waves of 435 & 1080
Mhz signals targeted on her. When she’s active both types of
waves come, and when she remains still the 1080 signal fades.
(435 is in the 400-450 Mhz band which is the window to the
human consciousness, and 1080 is in the 1000 to 1200 Mhz
band.) They are also using a Nitrogen particle beam, which
produces "nitrogen narcosis" (like the bends) in targeted
victims. Xenon lamps can affect the mind and body, too. 435
Mhz is converted to 1080 by interaction with the high-
atmosphere HAARP project. The 1100 (1000-1200) Mhz
frequency can affect genetics. Implant RF frequencies have
been damaging the eyes of implant victims. Although this gives
us a starting point in our discussion, these are not the only
frequencies that threaten mind-control victims. (See Section Dl
for direct monitoring /manipulating frequencies.) Author W.H.
Bowart in his Vol.1, No. 1, pg. 1 Freedom of Thought
newsletter quotes Brian Bard of Glendale, CA who wrote, "I
failed to discuss the utilization of power in modern mind
control implants. Like Delgrado’s stimoceiver, no internal
power source is necessary. The same electro-magnetic energy
which is collected through induction by such relays produces an
internal electrical charge of equal energy. Utilizing a
capacitance circuitry design, the charge is stored as a
mechanical distortion of the crystalline lattice and discharged
as a focused pulse of electro-magnetic energy at a lower
frequency. Higher frequency E-M has a higher energy state
than lower frequency. Thus, the effective output of photons
may be twice or thrice the potential of the relays. "A more
advanced design in use utilizes 50 or more distinct channels for
various functions. Not only the encrypted primary input signal
utilized for signal output, but several channels are reserved for
supplementary energy induction. With integrated switching,
both passive and active surveillance of brainwave activity may
be enhanced. Contrawise, signal output may be boosted and
focused on specific neural pathways. The devices remain
active, programmable signal relays with multiple selectable
channels so long as electro-magnetic induction continues to
occur."
Modern microchip implants will have 250,000 components.
Certain electrical freks will trigger certain neurochemicals. The
frek 7.83, which is the elec. field resonating between the planet
& its ionosphere, makes the subject feel in one with all
creation. But it isn’t quite that simple, because a 7.83 frek can
be sent in numerous different wave shapes, such as the rolling
sinusoidal pattern, jagged sawtooth waves, rectangular (flat on
top, flat on bottom) waves, and they all have a different effect
on the brain. (Mega brain, pp. 108-109) One can imagine the
potential power an implant that could create the proper
frequencies could have over an individual.

B2. Documentation of implants.

On the following pages, are the startling anechoic chamber
results when two victims of syntel implants were examined.
(Synthetic telepathy implants give thoughts & voices.) These
two pages document that they were receiving signals, in fact,
the anechoic chamber results helped to pin point what building
those signals were coming from!
Page 145
 For picture #2 - click here!

Page 146

For picture #3 - click here!

Page 147

For pictures #4-6 - click here!

Page 148

For picture #7 - click here!

Page 149

For picture #8 - click here!

Page 150

For picture #9 - click here!

Page 151

For picture #10 - click here!

Page 152 is picture 11

For picture #11 - click here!

Page 153

For picture #12 - click here!

Page 154

For picture #13 - click here!

Page 155

For picture #14 - click here!

Page 156 ...

REFERENCE PAGE FOR UNDERSTANDING

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES & MIND-CONTROL
The best way for people to understand electromagnetic waves is
to think of the ocean’s waves. Some waves in the ocean are big,
and some are small, size is amplitude. Some beaches have
waves that come quickly and some have waves that come
slowly, this is called the frequency that the waves comes.
Researcher figured out how they could change the amplitude or
the frequency of electromagnetic waves in a controlled way,
and this is called amplitude modulation or frequency
modulation. Because all electromagnetic energy beams travel
the same speed 3 x 10¹º cm/sec, an energy beam with a short
wave must have many more of those short waves pass in a
given time such as a day than a long wave. The shorter the
wave the greater the frequency that a wave will arrive. While
our image of an ocean is that it moves up and down in relation
to the surface. In other words, the ocean wave moves (vibrates)
up and down in relation to the surface (a mathematical plane).
Electromagnetic waves vibrate in 3 dimensions (relative to 3
planes), generally they are only drawn as one-dimensional
waves. Our brains operate on waves that are very low
frequency (from one cycle per second) to about 50 cycles per
second. A cycle per second is called a Hertz (Hz). Due to the
wide range of different amplitudes and frequencies it has been
more practical to induce various measuring units. It would be
nice if all the measuring units could be done in feet or meters or
whatever, but the range in size from the very tiny to the very
large means that they use different measuring units. Just like
you use different measuring units to get a quart of milk and 3
gallons of gas. The milk could be called a quarter-gallon but it
isn’t. In measuring frequency they use the following measuring
terms:
1,000,000 cycles per second = Megahertz (MHz)
1,000 cycles per second = Kilohertz (KHz)
1 cycle per second = Hertz (Hz)
In measuring amplitude they measure the length of the waves
with kilometers, meters, and centimeters. The very small waves
are measured in angstroms, microns, and nanometers. What is
an angstrom. A nanometer is one billionth of a meter. That is a
very tiny fraction written as 1/1,000,000,000 of a meter or for
short an nanometer. A micron is one millionth (1/1,000,000) of
a meter. Ten nanometers are said to make up an angstrom. (In
other words an angstrom is 1 ten-billionth of a meter.)
After they measure radio frequencies, the waves of different
lengths are given other names. They could just say ‘waves from
30,000 to 300,000 MHz", but instead they shorten things by
having a special name for these waves EHF (Extremely High
Frequency waves.)
This names are as follows:
Extremely High Frequency EHF
EHF 30,000 to 300,000 MHz
Superhigh Frequency SHF
SHF 3,000 to 30,000 MHz
Ultrahigh Frequency UHF
UHF 300 to 3,000 MHz
High Frequency VHF
VHF 30 to 300 MHz
Medium Frequency MF
MF 300 to 3,000 KI-Iz
Low Frequency LF
LF 30 to 300 KHz
Very Low Frequency VLF
VLF 3 to30KHz
Extremely Low Frequency ELF

ELF Below 3 KHz to 1 Hz or less

Page 157 ...

BRAIN FREQUENCIES (FREKS) RELATE TO STATES OF

ACTIVITY
The lower brain frequencies pertain to sleep and dream states.
The middle brain frequencies pertain to normal wakeful
activity. The higher brain frequencies pertain to aroused, or
concerned or states of anxiety. No brain waves means a person
is "brain dead", even though some body functions may
continue. Naturally occurring phenomena, such as lightning in
a thunderstorms, sunny days that soak a person with extra
positive ions, can all affect the thinking of brain.

CHART GOING UP THE FREQUENCY SCALE

These frequency no.s are in Hertz which is cycles per sec.
(However the first part of the scale are non-linear,
asymmetrical waves, which are mistakingly called Hertzian by
many people.)
1 Approx. beginning of brain waves
6.66 Theta brain waves
7.85 Alpha brain waves
15.7 Beta brain waves
30-30.56 Government VLF stations
32-33 Government VLF stations
34-42 Government VLF stations
50 Approx. Upper limit of brain wave frequencies
60 Produces an audible sound
62-254.1 CTCSS (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch Systems).
These tones CTCSS tones are broadcast continually
interspersed on a frequency, which allows several different
users to broadcast separately on the same frequency and only
pick up the message that has their CTCSS tone. Post Office
Tones are 82.5, 91.5, 97.4. & 100.9. U.S. Customs & border
patrol is 100 Hz. U.S. Secret service is 103.5 Hz. EPA is 114.8.
IRS & BATF is 123.0. Veterans Affairs, GSA, & Dept. of
Energy is 127.3. Fed. Aviation Admin. & U.S. Marshall service
is 136.5. Coast Guard Intell. is 141.3 Hz. Dept. of State &
Border Patrol is 151.4 Hz. Drug Enforcement Agency, Fed.
Aviation Admin., & Nat. Marine Fisheries is 156.7. Justice
Dept., FBI is 167.9.
10² (10 x 10) Ultrasonic
10³ Lower range of true Hertzian waves, waves in cycles per
sec lower than this such as the human heart beat or Brain alpha
waves are not Hertzian.
104 (10,000)
16,000-32,000 Range of Frequencies used in European
implants to signal the implant.
54,900,000 Hz (54.9 MHz) Cellular phones (Also 435 MHz,
750 MHz, & 1080 MHz have been discovered being targeted
on victims of implant mind-control.)
10¹¹ to 10¹² Far infra-red
10¹³ "Raman" I.R.
10¹4 Near Infra-red
10¹4 to 10¹5 Visible light spectrum
Page 158

For picture #15 - click here!

Page 159

Section C. Specific Implants

Cl. Audio implants (a. public. b. secret)
C2. Body manipulation implants
C3. Visual holographic implants
C4. Memex/Brain Link implants

C5. Torture/Nerve & Muscle Stimulation Implants

C6. Tracking & I.D. Implants.

C1. AUDIO IMPLANTS

BACKGROUND INFORMATION
The concepts used in audio implants had been discovered in the
first half of the 20th century, but the refinement of technology
to take advantage of what had been discovered waited until the
second half of the century. The development of audio implants
ran on two tracks, one was the public medical research and the
other was the secret Illuminati/Intelligence Agencies’ research.
Audio implants began to be publicly placed into people in the
1960s. The Illuminati was experimenting on some victims at
this stage, and the military in the Vietnam war used auditory
implant devices to aid communicating to their men who were
sent into tunnels and who were placed into forest situations
where audible noise would compromise their locations to the
enemy. The Illuminati/Intelligence/& Military consortium was
keeping the experimentation secret. It appears from looking at
the worldwide research on audio implants that the Illuminati
realized that the field was so ambiguous, and open to so many
different approaches, that rather than straightjacket the research
community by a specific strategy, they encouraged a wide
variety of approaches in the research. Consequently, research
by one group would overlap or duplicate research by another.
Much to their credit, a few researchers rejected offers to get
involved because they saw the sinister ramifications. By the
1970s, the intelligence agencies were willing to start using
hundreds of people
to experiment operationally with the implants. People in every
state of the U.S. were selected as victims. Many of these
implant victims had programmed multiple personalities already.
The controllers were very heavy handed with the people they
implanted, and they used the full force of the
Illuminati/Intelligence agencies power to keep these people
under their control at all times. These innocent victims have
had their lives totally destroyed. Some tried to fight back,
spending thousands of dollars to get out from underneath the
incessant audio messages that the implants sent, but the system
was too big and too powerful to fight. Police, congressmen,
psychologists and many other people turned their backs on
these victims. Some victims who initially fought back gave up
resisting, some committed suicide, and some continued to fight.
Meanwhile, on the public track during the 1970s & 1980s,
medical researchers kept putting more and more audio implants
into deaf and hard-to-hear persons. Hundreds of people in the
U.S. and many hundreds in other nations such as the U.K.,
Germany, Austria, Israel, Australia, France and other countries
began to receive the cochlear implants. Australia was so proud
of their audio implant research/development they issued a
postage stamp showing an implant device ("bionic ear")
developed in Australia. The question begs asking, if thousands
of people have publicly received audio implants, isn’t obvious
that the secret societies and secret intelligence agencies have
done at least as much if not far more?
BRIEF CHRONOLOGY OF AUDIO IMPLANTS
1790--first known attempt by Volta to electrically stimulate the
ears. He shot approximately 50 volts of electricity into his
auditory system, and experienced the sensation of a blow to the
head followed by a sound like the boiling of viscous liquid.
1850--Electro-otiatrics was begun by otologists
Page 160 ...
who hoped electricity could help ear diseases in various ways.
1925--Sounds were created in people by radio engineers by
placing electrodes near the ear with a modulated alternating
current.
1930--Weaver & Bray discovered the principles used later in
the cochlear microphonic implants.
1937--By passing an alternating electrical current in the audible
frequency range from an electrode to the skin, Steven, Jones,
Lurie and Flottorp found they could have people hear sounds.
For a number of years these men studied this phenomena.
1957--Djourno and Eyries in France woke the world up
concerning the ability to electrical stimulate the auditory nerves
and produce sound with their reports. A patient from France
reportedly gets William F. House, MD interested in developing
an implant device.
1961--William House implants two patients with short-term
audio implants. One patient receives a multiple electrode
implant.
1960s--intense research for audio implants is conducted in
California in places like Sanford, the Univ. of Calif., in L.A.
etc. The military uses audio implants operationally to be able to
talk to soldiers in situations where external noise would
compromise the location of the American soldiers, such as
exploring tunnel system.
1970s--Various researchers around the world begin publicly
implanting audio implants into people. The Illuminati and
intelligence agencies begin to secretly implant people, this is
known because many of the early victims can pin point at time
in the 1970s when they got their audio implants.
1980--The FDA establishes Federal regulations regarding
cochlear audio implants.
1984--By this year, 369 people have publicly received the
House Cochlear Audio Implants, which have been implanted by
36 different clinics. The 3M Cochlear Implant System! House
Design for use in adults, which is already in hundreds of adults,
receives FDA approval in Nov.
1990s--Audio implants along with other implants begin to be
used more aggressively by the mind-control programmers.
Successful intelligence operations are carried out with the aid
of audio implants.
BASICS OF HOW THE IMPLANTS CAN FUNCTION
Thousands have publicly received audio implants, and
thousands have received audio implants without their
permission by the New World Order. The implants (whether
secret or public) basically have to contain A. a receiver(s), B. a
processor, C. a transmitter, D. electrodes or electrical
stimulating device. When sound waves arrive to the human ear,
the sound causes biological reactions all along the auditory
pathway--from the cochlea, the auditory nerve, the brain stem
nuclei and the primary cortical projection areas. Each of these
areas are fair game for machinations of the mind-control
researchers. There are brain stem potentials which originate in
the auditory brain stem nuclei--primarily in the inferior
colliculi. The public auditory implants produce a small
electrical stimulus that bypasses damaged hair cells and directly
stimulates the remaining auditory neural elements. This means
that for the secret implants, the electrical impulse that is
generated to stimulate the person to hear a sound or sentence is
totally unnoticed by everyone but the victim. As mentioned
before, psychologists are being used to shut victims up, by
declaring that they are crazy for claiming to hear voices. How
do these psychologists know that the person isn’t hearing
voices from an implant? Some psychologists are declaring the
implant victims are "crazy", "delusional", & "insane", because
audio implants supposedly don’t exist--therefore it is useless to
give any credence to the complaints of victims. In other words,
psychologists are being used as the establishment’s witch
doctors to cover up the
Page 161 ...
mind-control activities of the New World Order. What’s new?
Establishment shrinks helped cover up the programmed
multiplicity for decades by labelling the programmed-multiple
slaves "paranoid schizophrenics". During experiments, it was
discovered that the skin of a person can pick up auditory
vibrations, so tests were run to see if implants in other parts of
the human body could be used for auditory implants. The
vibrotacticle system of the skin has an upper limit of sensitivity
to 400 to 500 Hz. In contrast the auditory system had a
frequency range between 20 to 20,000 Hz and an optimum
range of 300 to 3,000 Hz. The auditory system had a dynamic
range of 130 dB (decibels) which the vibrotactile had only a
30-35 dB range. In other words, using the skin like on the chest
to send auditory vibrations to the brain was a very limited way
to create sound. For most purposes it isn’t a viable approach,
even though some experimental auditory implants were placed
in places like the chest. The ones that were tested only
reconfirmed the suspicions that the best results are by using the
inner cochlea and the auditory canal area. Dr. Begich’s and
later others showed that a nonlinear function will translate one
frequency to another frequency, but although it does jump, this
method is inadequate for the current mind control signals, and a
linear function is used which operates simply on the energy that
the implants have.
Originally single channel devises were used, but then
multichannel devices were soon found superior. The processing
units of a device, had to have an extraction method to
determine the pitch of the signal and then would present a
square wave at the rate of that frequency. Soon the miniature
computers that made up part of the audio implant were made so
that they were programmable. Some of the publicly implanted
people (for instance some who got a 4 mm. cochlear auditory
implant), who thought they were getting medical help, were
later followed up a decade later by the intelligence agencies for
their own agenda, and instead of just hearing the world, they
got to hear mind-control drivel from some handler
communicating via the implant. As sound waves come into the
public implants, they are fast Fourier transformed into many
channels lying between say 100 and 4000 Hz. Each channel
may be assigned to a specific electrode located on an array of
electrodes. The electrodes are stimulated for instance at 300
pulses per minute. The transmissions go to receiver/stimulators
that then stimulate the subject to hear something. (Fourier
transforms have also been identified being used by human
brains to encode memory.)
In order to keep their signals to their implanted victims secret,
the Network employs a tactic called piggybacking where they
piggyback their own audio transmission onto standard FM
frequencies.
CANAL is the acronym for an system that is used
simultaneously for transmission and reception via the use of a
double-frequency shift keying (DFS). Radio transmitters that
send quick signals are variously called BURST, SQUIRT,
SQUASH, or high-speed transmitters.
USES OF THE IMPLANTS
a. by themselves, b. with other implants, and c. in conjunction
with other mind-control devices.

TYPES OF AUDIO IMPLANTS--

Part A. Publicly admitted audio implants. Part.
B. Secretly implanted audio implants.
Part A. Publicly admitted audio implants. The entire world has
gotten involved in audio implant research. The British Cochlear
Implant Group has been setting up "implanting centres" for the
UK. Not all the publicly known implants will be listed here, for
instance, some of those I chose not to list include some
developed in Spain by Bosch & Colomina, the ones created in
Thailand by upgrading american made implants, and
Page 162 ...
several made in East and West Germany before the wall went
down, and the Swiss implant which was simply the Austrian
audio implant used with their own processor.

3M COCHLEAR IMPLANT SYSTEM/HOUSE

DESIGN--MODEL 7700 (AKA ALPHA)
BANFAI, EMG --Several models developed by Banfai in
Cologne-Dueren, West Germany. It is digital, with a pulsatile
signal and a programmable memory. The implant can be
communicated with using an interface device hooked to a
computer. The patient has a keyboard. It was first implanted in
1977 and has 8/14 and 16 channels. It has been implanted into
hundreds of people.

BRITISH, for instance UCH-- Developed by Douek, Fourcin

and Moore in London and implanted with a single electrode in
1978 and multiple electrodes in 1990. The implant has bioglass,
and promontory grooves for the electrode, and neural network
programming in its computer memory.

CHEN AUDIO IMPLANT--developed in Guangzhoi, mainland

China and first implanted in 1984. It was said by the chinese
that 20 people received this implant.

CZECHOSLOVAKIAN--Implants were created by Volvoda

and Tichy in Prague and implanted in the 1980s into a few
people.

FRASER--Developed in London, and first implanted in 1983. It

was notable because it had a round window in the implant. In
the first few years it was implanted into 56 people. The
encapsulated the implant in a high-grade Silastic rather than an
epoxy, as some other European researchers had done
FRAYASE--Developed in Toulouse, France, this audio implant
was implanted with its receiver in the chest. It was first
implanted in
1981, and 22 people were said to have received it.

GOA--developed in Shanghai, China by Lee and Lin.

INERAID- (fka Symbion) produced by the Richards Company,

USA. In the Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Mar.
1994, vol. 95, pp. 1677-1678, they have an article about a
woman who had an implant in one ear and not the other. She
was asked to compare the pitch signals from natural sources
versus the right ear audio implant. The most apical implanted
electrode was not as accurate as the more basal located
electrodes using an Ineraid implant.

IMPLEX COM 12--Comes with an interfacing computer and a

Syncom patient self-tester

LAURA--Developed at Antwerp, Belgium. These were first

implanted in 1986, and had an internal canal antenna, a
microphone entirely internal in the auditory canal, a pre-amp,
an antenna, and a data control circuit. Only a few subjects got
this implant. It comes with a computer, and an interface unit. It
does have a programmable memory.

MED-EL --Developed in Austria at Vienna and Innsbruck by

Hochmair, and first implanted in 1977. Hundreds of people
were implanted with this audio implant. Some were implanted
externally with it and some internally inside the ear canal. It has
one channel and a multitude of electrodes stimulating the audio
channel. It is analogue, and sends an analogue signal. It does
not have a programmable memory.

MXM- -Developed by Chouard in Paris and first implanted in

1974. It had been implanted by 1990 into 179 people.
NUCLEUS 22, NUCLEUS MINISYSTEM 22,
and other NUCLEUS AUDIO IMPLANTS
Page 163 ...
(aka CLARK’s Implants)--At least two models developed in
Australia at Melbourne. This audio implant was first implanted
in 1978. The implant is programmable from the outside. It has
been implanted into many hundreds of people. It has a
multitude of electrodes that stimulate the audio system. It is
digital, sends a pulsatile signal, and has a programmable
memory. The implant comes with a diagnostic and
programming interface computer. The Australian government
heavily subsidized with millions of dollars research into audio
implants and got the Cochlear Corporation (Nucleus) going.
Nucleus uses what is called MULTIPEAK which provides
high-frequency information from 2000 to 7000 Hz. With this 4
electrodes are stimulated in rapid succession, and special
algorithms are used which change the relationship between the
pulse amplitude and the pulse duration in order to allow 4
pulses to occur within a single frame. The Nucleus Minisystem
22 was approved by the FDA for implantation in both adults
and children.

Storz Instrument Co.’s Implant--developed at Univ. of Calif,

San Francisco.
Part. B. Secretly implanted audio implants. There were several
profiles of people that were used in the World Order’s selection
of secret victims to implant. The following were criteria that
they liked in the selection process, a. vulnerable, such as single
women, b. people who were already programmed with
trauma-based mind-control, c. psychics, who had already told
people they heard or saw things ordinary people don’t, d.
people, not highly regarded by society such as minorities,
criminals, street people, mentally insane, who would not be
able to find a support system to help them fight the
experimentation. They also did the audio implants into some of
their own intelligence agents, apparently to some who were
getting somewhat difficult to their superiors. Because of this
type of profile, and
some other things this author learned, it appears that the initial
two decades were used more for experimentation and
development than they were for actual operations. However,
with more than 2 decades of experience, they are now fully
operational. From watching their interaction (messages) with
victims of audio implants, it is clear that they are not in the
testing stage, but are fully operational, and have a full cadre of
trained operatives (men & women) to staff the secret bases
from which the monitor and broadcast signals to their slaves.
The staff their bases with 3 shifts and the graveyard shift leaves
approx. 6 a.m. In other words, from what we can tell they are
using standard shift times for the audio implant control staffs.

COCHLEAR IMPLANTS--There are Cochlear implants for

auditory control secretly implanted without permission. A
rubber molding skin color covers the outer lining of the ear
canal. There are tiny slits in this lining, which when pushed to
the side would show the presence of coils and a plastic rod/wire
embedded in the area. Sometimes burn marks occur on sides of
face due to intense heat generated by implants, which is
painful.

DENTAL AUDITORY IMPLANTS--At least a dozen victims

have complained that after their teeth were capped they began
hearing voices. Other sources indicate that during the filing
process implants are being put into people. This is the type of
implant placed into J. Z. Knight and left dormant for many
years until they decided to activate her as New Age guru.

RIDGE IMPLANTS-- These implants can produce Theta

waves and even voices. They are designed to suppress a
particular type of thinking. The body may be sent into paralysis
or given various stimulus-response stimuli in order to suppress
certain thought patterns. If the slave begins to have certain
thought patterns that threaten the programming and
programming structures, these implants kick in
Page 164 ...
to divert the person’s mental activity to something else.

C2. BODY MANIPULATING IMPLANTS

The subject of body manipulating implants could have been
placed in chapter 8, however the desire was to keep all the
information on implants together. Mankind has placed objects
into the human body for thousands of years in the hope that it
would produce some type of change. So the history of this type
of implants is volumous. Reader’s Digest had an article about
how to give to paraplegics the use of their arms and legs with
implants. Implants are being placed into the human body to
effect growth changes, to change hormone levels (such as to
stop estrogen), to change DNA growth, to carry out behavior
modification, etc. Several papers have recommended that sex
offenders get implants. The Rambo chips that have been put
into many men have been linked to some big crimes. In recent
times, the following body manipulating implants have been
written about:

CRYSTALLINE CORTICOSTERONE IMPLANTS-- These

implants affect the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA)
activity when there is stress or basal activity. It was placed into
the medial prefrontal cortex (MpFC) to regulate the response to
certain types of stress. Journal of Neuroscience, Sept. 1993,
Vol. 13, pp. 3839-3847.

NORPLANT--a contraceptive implant placed into hispanic and

black teenagers using the Mantel-Haenszel procedure. Written
about in Journal of Adolescent Health, May 1995, Vol. 16(5),
pp 389-395 by Nancy Campbell-Heider, John Glantz, Sandra
Glantz, Eric Schaff, et al.

POLYMERIC BRAIN IMPLANT--These implants are

ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer matrix disks and are used to
release into the brain dopamine for a period of a number of
weeks. The testing of this has been done at Yale Univ. School
of Medicine. Written about in the Annals of Neurology, Apr.
1989, Vol. 25, pp. 35 1-356. Written by Matthew During,
Andrew Freese, and Bernhard Sabel, and Mark Saltzman, et. al.

PROTO-32 IMPLANT--Designed by Dr. McDaniels and a Dr.

Paul Hod. This implant with a 32-bit microchip memory affects
DNA growth within a person. The two doctors who developed
the device are claimed to have died after they created the chip.
The FDA has approved the use of the implant in the brain. It’s
believed that there is a patent on the chip.
SILASTICMELATONIN-FILLED IMPLANT- Used to alter
the speed of resynchronization of the circadian rhythm in birds,
and implanted by the Max-Plank Institute fur
Verhaltensphysiologie, Andechs, Germany. Although this was
for birds, mention of it is done here to point out the type of
research done at the Max-Plank Institute. It was written about
in the Physiology and Behavior magazine, July 1995, Vol. 58,
p. 89-90 by Michaela Hau and Eberhard Gwinner.

TESTOSTERONE IMPLANT--used to release testosterone

into the subject.

C3. VISUAL/HOLOGRAPHIC IMPLANTS

BACKGROUND.
Hollywood has given us movies where visual and holographic
implants are shown, but what about the real world? Yes, it does
happen in more than the movies. Publicly, the establishment
has only experimentally placed visual implants into a few
volunteers. On the real life side of the NWO, there have been a
number of victims who have been subjected to visual implants
without their consent. One victim in Massachusetts labels her
visual
Page 165 ...
implants "visual prosthetics’, but mentions "I use this term
loosely because they are more so attachments than
replacements of my own vision. Every now and then the public
is made aware of where the World Order wants people to think
research is at. In the Jan. 13, 1997 issue of U.S. News & World
Report (p. 52), the unveiling by researchers of the retinal chip
that could potentially give sight to the blind was reported. It
was interesting the article’s choice of words "retinal chip
unveiled" (bold added). After it was realized that sounds could
be artificially made via electromagnetic waves in deaf people,
researchers naturally thought of giving sight to the blind. In the
1960’s and 1970’s researchers struggled to produce implants
that could restore sight to the blind. This research was hijacked
by the NWO types and has been developed into another
component for their mind-control. In the 60’s Giles Brindley
and others at Cambridge Univ. and in the 70’s William Dobelle
and others at the Univ. of Utah, both were able to show that
individual phosphenes could be evoked by electrical currents,
thus showing the feasibility of visual implants. (See GS
Brindley’s paper "The sensations produced by electrical
stimulation of the visual cortex" in J. Physiology, Vol. 196,
1968, pp. 479-493. and W.H. Dobelle’s article in 1974
"Phosphenes produced by electrical stimulation of human
occipital cortex, and their application to the development of a
prosthesis for the blind." in J. Physiol, 243: 553-576.) The
public development went forward with the blind. Since most
blind people still have the neurons (which are like a natural
computer) in the higher visual regions of the brain fully intact,
the implants are designed to take advantage of this unused
potential. The body has sensory pathways, that were discovered
to be maps. In creating a visual image, the brain actually takes
an image through several maps before getting the final image.
There is a map for motion, along with at least 5 others maps
such as one for form. The photoreceptors of the retina react to
the three primary colors and have 3 primary color maps created
by the electrical image made from the photoreceptors of the
retina. (One’s genetics contribute to how each person perceives
a primary color, we don’t all see colors uniformly.) The retina’s
output (called optic nerves or retinal output) map the electrical
image again onto the retinal ganglion cells. Then the optic
nerves project the electrical image to a relay image (the lateral
geniculate nucleus) where the brain begins combining the maps
of the two eyes. Another network of neurons (called the optic
radiations) then transfers the image back to the rear of the brain
to the primary visual cortex. Then the brain takes the image
through several higher level maps to its final finished
product--the viewer’s perceived picture. The microelectrode
array that creates a map for the blind person may be hooked up
to the primary visual cortex, or other points in the process. The
microelectrode arrays that were initially tested were much
cruder than the human eye. They pixelized (turned into pixels,
that is points) what the video camera saw. The implant
compared to the human eye’s natural abilities something like
what the old dot matrix printers created in comparison to a
computer laser printer. The blind person’s perception via the
implants is somewhat cruder than actual sight. Experiments
have found that the brain has a great deal of power in choosing
how it interprets images, so that it is hoped that the plasticity of
the visual system will allow blind people’s brain to adapt to
what they are being shown over a period of time to get the
maximum visual advantage. This also implies that victims of
visual implants--which are of a more sophisticated technology
will also have a natural tendency to rewire their brains to
accommodate the new sensory inputs.
One of several groups of public researchers into Visual
Neuroprosthetics (visual implants) is Richard A. Normann,
with
Page 166 ...
the Dept. of Bioengineering, John Moran Lab for Applied
Vision and Neural Sciences, at the Univ. of Utah. In 1990, he
spoke to people at the IEEE International Conference on
Systems, Man, and Cybernetics about visual implants. At that
conference on cybernetics, there were already well thought out
methods for creating silicon based electrode arrays. The John
Hopkins University in Massachusetts is another research center
into visual implants. MIT and Harvard have also been
researching in the subject of visual implants. Advances in
material available and micro-fabrication techniques has
permitted the semiconductor manufacturer to create electrode
arrays with 3-D architectures, which can then be implanted into
the visual parts of a person.

HOW THEY WORK

In a true visual prosthetic, a video encoder (camera) transforms
the visual world in front of a blind individual into electrical
signals that are used to excite neurons at some point of the
visual pathway. The video camera encoder will be a silicon
retina that replaces some of the functions that the human retina
performs, and then it makes what it sees into signal compatible
with the neurons the encoder must stimulate. The signals from
the encoder excite neurons either via a hard-wired percutaneous
connection, or a telemetry link. "The stimulating electrodes
must be implanted into visual pathway such that each electrode
is able to excite only a small population of neurons in the
vicinity of the electrode." (Normann, Richard. "Visual
Neuroprosthetics Functional Vision for the Blind", in IEEE
Engineering in Medicine and Biology, Jan-Feb. ’95, pg. 77) To
improve the picture sent by the implants to the brain, electrodes
the size of the neurons they intend to stimulate in the eye were
developed. Kensall Wise at the University of Michigan created
small high density electrode arrays out of silicon. In one model,
the electrodes are .08 mm at their base, and taper to a sharpened
tip. An array of hundreds of such electrodes can be implanted
into cortical tissue about 1.5-2.0 mm below the cortical surface.
This is not all of the design considerations involved, but it gives
an idea of the direction that public research has gone in. A
special pneumatic inserter that can shoot the arrays at high
velocities to insert them into the cortical tissue was created by
Patrick Rousche. This method provided limited
cortical-based-map images. To further improve the picture,
implants are being created that create a retinal map, rather than
a cortical map. This can take advantage of the image forming
properties of the human eye, and may give satisfactory images.
At the current pace of public development, visual implants that
restore sight are only a few years away from mass production.
Meanwhile, the Network continues to create and use visual
implants that are more sophisticated than what the public sector
has been allowed to create. Bear in mind that these researchers
use either foundation grant money or government grant money
to operate. The Network is very careful about what technology
is developed. Some excessively ambitious implant researchers
(not visual, but other) have seen their work have a national
security gag order thrown over them, and the research ends up
muzzled from getting out to the public.

TYPES
FIBER OPTICS-- Fiber optics permits the Network to use a
fiber optic that looks like a hair as a television camera. In a
body suit, several fiber optic cameras that look like hairs will
be installed in key places to provide the handlers remote
viewing. Fiber optics can also be mounted in the victim, to
provide a means to receive remote pictures. Fiber optic
implants can be placed by needle into any site on the body. One
victim of electronic mind-control, who has repeatedly pulled
out Fiber Optic hairs, had a tiny fiber optic hair shot
Page 167 ...
into her chest above her tank top while she was in a restaurant.
Some other implants that carry out the same function look like
warts, moles, or blisters.

ARTIFICIAL LENSES -- One victim describes his eye

implants: "They are oblong objects with a square opening in the
middle of them. They appear to be located on my corneas or
rapped around them to be more accurate. They are connected to
rods or wires that are spread out over my facial area and under
the skin like a mask. The implants also appear to be connected
to cochlear implants which are the cause of the repeated voice
transmissions that I hear." Via a camera, she was able to pick
up the presence of a reddish orange smear or stain covering my
eye lens. The color blends with her own eye coloring so it is
extremely difficult to see anything in her eyes. The lenses of
the implants are not lined up evenly with her cornea. The
victim with the visual implants states, "Whenever I close my
eyes, I see the presence of constant red orange haze centered
with a tint of whitish blue. I also see a small area of fluorescent
green color. When I sleep, I am subjected to virtual reality type
pictures like programs being run through a computer with a 3-D
effect. There is a constant whirring and clicking effect that
comes from other implants such as the ears." In review. Visual
implants are at time called visual prosthetus, but are actually
attachments rather than replacements. They are oblong with a
square opening in the middle of them. They are located on the
cornea (rapped around them) and are connected to rods/wires
that are spread out over the facial area and under the skin like a
mask. The coloring of the implant is blended with natural eye
colors to camouflage it. When the victim closes his or her eyes
there is a constant presence of a red-orange haze centered
around a small screen. There are also two orbs with a tint of
whitish blue, and a small area of fluorescent green. Visual
reality pictures are run like programs from a computer, that
have a three-D effect. The left forehead scalp area has a
whirring noise.

BIO-CHIPS that "talk" to nerve cells. Some of the readers will

have already heard of the bio-chips that talk to nerve cells.
Stanford Research Inst. has been working on such bio-chips.
Bear in mind, public research is generally a cover for what has
already been discovered.

HOLOGRAPHIC OR H-INSERT-- There is one type which

has been called a Holographic Insert or H-Implant. A
holographic memory is created by this implant. This may or
may not be the Nanobots which are capable of creating
holographic images in the mind. Let’s discuss the nanobots.

HOLOGRAPHIC IMPLANTS VIA NANOTECHNOLOGY &

NANOBOTS
Nanotechnology is technology pertaining to very tiny robots
and tiny computers that are in the range of nanometer-size (10
to 1,000 billionth of a meter). Nano means "one-billioneth". In
other words, extremely microscopic, we are talking about
robots & machines one-billionth of a meter large. The Scanning
Tunneling Microscope (STM) makes it possible to see
something the size of a single atom. The STM will also pick up
atoms and move them. People who are interested in
nano-technology have regular meetings in the Silicon Valley. A
Johannesburg, South African company Nanoteq (recently taken
over by the Amer. company Microchip Technology) was the
company that created nanotechnology encoders (based on a
non-linear logarithm that mixes transmission lines and changes
codes frequently). Microchip Technology is putting these
encoders into their series of microcontrollers which are
EEPROM-based.

Back to Contents Chapter 6 Cont.

 (Chapter 6 Page 2)

Page 168 ...

The encoders are called Keeloq hopping-code technology. They
are good in protecting micro-wave, ELF, infrared and
radio-wave transmissions. Microchip Corp. is creating a
sub-company group called Secure Data Products to work with
this type of technology. In other words, the ALEX system
reported on in Vol. 2 is being miniaturized. Another
Nanotechnology company is Nanosystems, which is working
with the Jansen Pharmaceutica N.y. unit of
Illuminati-controlled Johnson and Johnson. We know numerous
companies like the two mentioned above, who are working on
Nanotechnology. We also know that they are not going to tell
us their trade secrets and what they have really developed. For
instance, this author had a hearty laugh when he read The New
York Times (11/19/96 pg. Cl) article "Feat of the minuscule:
scientists make abacus with carbon molecules: invention at
Swiss research laboratory may be a step toward building faster
computers", because the article is patently disinformation!
According to the article a Dr. James M. Gimzewski and
colleagues discovered how to make tiny balls of 60
carbon-atoms each. They call these balls "Buckyballs". They
can move these balls via what they call a "scanning tunneling
device". A picture of the teeny-tiny 60-atom balls was shown in
the article. So what did they do with this ability? They built an
abacus (yeah sure! Come on guys!). If the reader understands
computers--a computer at the most basic level is simply a base
2 number system. Anything that can consistently move or
switch can be the basis for a computer. A computer is simply an
enormous amount of on-off switches, where 0 can stand for off
and 1 for on, etc. The article states, "Scientists at Switzerland
have invented an ultraminiature abacus in which spherical
carbon molecules sliding along the microscopic copper groves
act as the counting beads for performing arithmetic
calculations." (So they are using it for arithmetic, yeah sure!)
IBM reported that its scientists used the STM to move
individual atoms so that they spelled "I-B-M" in atoms. If you
believe that the ability to arrange individual atoms and
tailor-build molecules was so that IBM scientists could spell
IBM, then this book isn’t for you. A more recent NY Times
article (2/2/97, p. E6) discusses how Xerox Corporation has
created sensors the thickness of peach fuzz. These are called
MEMS (micro-electomechanical systems). The article states,
"MEMS are all about doing more with less, about being lean,
mean, and next to invisible." The article is lean on facts. It does
give a hint of the incredible power these little gadgets have
when the writer launches into his propaganda tirade at the end
of the article, "Paradoxically the fear that accompanies the
fantasy of nanotechnology is not that the culture will be as
stratified and fragmented as Victorian England, but that the
new culture will be one that is unrecognizable to everyone alive
today." That is true, this nano technology is taking us to the
place that society will not be recognizable. The age of the
future is planned to be the age of robots--humans if they are to
survive are to be robotic slaves for the illuminated elite.
However, this is not paranoid fear as the NY Times writer
implies, but it is the unfortunate reality humanity faces. Some
people apparently are already experiencing it. One victim of
mind-control, whose father is Military Intelligence and whose
family is part of the Illuminati, claims that he has been
subjected to tiny robots called nanobots. These nanobots have
been featured on TV, where they have been billed as an asset
for surgeons. Reportedly, these tiny robots can work off of
10-100 kilohertz of beamed power. They have coil-shaped
antennas, 2 little six-pointed "wings" to attach and move
themselves with. These tiny boron-carbon nanobots have all
kinds of purposes. One use is for multitudes of these Nanobots
to be placed into a single victim’s head, where they are
programmed to migrate to certain programmed positions where
they can suppress
Page 169 ...
the optical signals to the brain and replace these signals with
their own holographic images that can be externally transmitted
to the nanobots or preprogrammed in. They are trying or have
succeeded, depending upon who is talking about nanobots, in
making self-replicating assemblers. In other words, they have
built miniature robots that build other robots. (Sounds like
something the Japanese would do.)
Nanobot researchers talk about how great it will be to have tiny
robots that are smaller than a red blood cell circulating in our
blood removing fat, bacteria, and viruses.
SOME SOURCES. Recent articles on nanotechnolgy include:
Electronic Times (12/7/95), Electronics Weekly (11/29/95),
Electronic Engineering Times (11/27/95), the L.A. Times
(11/11/94, 12/21/94, 2/7/96, 2/20/96), the NY Times (4/30/94,
11/19/96, 2/2/97), the Wall St. Journal (5/12/94, 1/9/96,
2/26/96). Eric Drexler wrote Engines of Creation (Anchor
Press/Doubleday, 1986), a book about nanotechnology.
Books that will provide more information on nanotechnology:
Drexler, K. Eric and Peterson, Chris and Pergamit, Gayle.
Unbounding the Future: The Nanotechnology Revolution.
Morrow, 1991.
Hameroff, Stuart R. Ultimate Computing: Biomolecular
Consciousness and Nanotechnology. Elsevier Science Pub.,
1987.
Whitehouse, D.J. and Kawata, K., eds. Nanotechnology:
Proceedings of the Joint Forum/ERATO Symposium held at
Warwick Univ., 21-22 August 1990. Adam Hilger, 1991.

C4. MEMEX/BRAIN LINK IMPLANTS

The public doesn’t understand that programs showing research
are typically rmation to hide what’s already in use. On
"Cyberlife," 12/17/96, a TV story was done on Dr. Ted Berger,
a biological engineer, at U.S.CA, who is working on a
microchip that will be a substitute for the hippocampus’
memory. The story stated that in two years a brain chip can be
made that mimics the pattern of brain neurons so that it can be
plugged in. The New World Order’s computer-satellite system
allows a. communication devices to be embedded within a
victim, as well as b. memex devices that are linked to the
natural brain to boast the brain’s memory. In the Vol. 2 book,
the ALEX (Amalgamated Logrythmic Encrypted
Transmissions) system was described which allows the NWO
to pulse codes on different frequencies in an erratic fashion that
makes the transmissions hard to even spot. The ALEX system
is one component of their ability to secretly transmit orders and
information to their slaves. When a slave receives a body-suit
of implants, one implant will be a central control implant that
controls the body suit of implants and receives information
from an external transmitting source. Some of the slaves have
had their central controlling implant at the base of their skull.
The concepts that Hollywood portrayed in the sci-fi movie
"Johnny Mnemonic" where an oligarchy (in league with big
business and the crime syndicates) controls the world, and uses
a human who has an implant that stores tremendous amounts of
information is-- sad to say-- not so far removed from what is
already happening in secret.

INTERFACE DEVICES
The biocybernetic researchers for the New World Order have
working on a number of interface devices to interface (link) the
human brain with computers. A number of devices have been
created. There is even a biochip the size of a large organic
molecule that works as a memex implant. The idea of implants
is difficult for some people to accept. I am in the possession
Page 170 ...
of x-rays showing implants, of anechoic chamber readings
showing that victims were receiving constant synthetic
telemetry signals from outside transmitting sites, and a variety
of other items showing evidence that this activity is going on.
For instance, Professor Ingmar Wickbom, M.D. of the
University Hospital, University of Calif. Medical Ctr., San
Diego on 10/6/’83 wrote a letter "To Whom It May Concern"
that skull x-rays of Robert Naslund indicated implants at the
base of the skull that are "possibly some form of brain
transmitters". Some of the victims I personally know have
managed to extract fiber optic fibers from their bodies.

ORGANIC BIOPROCESSORS LINKED TO VIRUSES-- One

direction that the New World Order took was to develop
biochips and bioprocessors, that is three-dimensional organic
circuitry that functions as computers. The conductive velocities
of these miniature organic computers (protein lattices) are at
least one million times faster than nerve cells. The circuit
power of a given size of miniature organic computers is at least
a million times greater than the same size of brain matter.
Molecular computers made of living matter can be grown from
DNA templates of genetically engineered bacteria. Synthetic
proteins have been developed which match what they want to
make into mini-computers. The end product is a bioprocessor
(tiny computer) within a cell. These mini-computers are
specifically linked with viruses which migrate to specific parts
of the body. Viruses are primarily nucleoproteins, some of the
small ones are not even alive, and they don’t even have
metabolism. They do not have a metabolism to kill with an
antibiotic. The Neurotropic viruses migrate to the central
nervous system (nerves), the Dermotropic viruses migrate to
the skin, the Pneumotropic viruses go to the lungs, the
Viscerotropic go to the abdomen, and other viruses go to other
sites in the body. Because many viruses will select what area of
the body they will reside in, the New World Order can tailor (in
tissue-culture) their bio-implants (which consist of a virus plus
a bioprocessor) so they can target where they will end up in the
mind-controlled slave. Such an virus implant is also called a
symbiote, because it lives off of the host, the mind-controlled
slave’s own body. These virus implants have life-expectancies
that are a number of years long. A number of these implants
within the victim serve as spies-in-the-camp, reporting detailed
records of what the host’s body is doing. Research into how to
splice and dice genetic material and then recombine it has been
going on for a number of decades, and is very sophisticated.
There are a number of very technical books on how to do it, but
only a reader familiar with the language of genetic research
could decipher their techniques & abilities with miniature RNA
and DNA pieces. Several genetic books/papers describe how
viruses can get host genetic material or other genetic material,
thus giving us a window on how they transfer the miniature
computers made from DNA templates to the viruses. In the
book Mechanics of DNA Replication & Recombination,
Proceedings of a UCLA Symposium held in Keystone, CO April
3-9, 1983,(edited by Nicholas R. Cozzarelli, of the Dept. of
Molecular Biology Univ. of CA, Berkeley, published in NY by
Alan K. Liss, Inc.) one of the leaders in this field said on page
12, "I remain faithful to the conviction that anything a cell can
do, a biochemist should be able to do." And yes they have been
replicating strands of RNA & DNA, creating whatever they
want. The Illuminati have been using these
computers-in-viruses implants at least since the 1990s. The
implants are easy to insert into the victim’s body, and the
specific virus transport themselves and attach themselves where
they are to go. The Illuminati then build body suits of these
implants. The size of these tiny implants vary from tens of
millicrons to hundreds of millimicrons. Just their tiny size
makes them difficult to destroy. From research
Page 171 ...
on victims, it appears that a central computer is implanted to
control or interact with the body suit of implants.

PSYCHICS-- One of the Illuminati’s research projects was to

discover the psi gene--the genetic gene that would permit them
to breed a master race with psychic abilities. One of the groups
that the Illuminati has controlled which did research in this area
was Nazi Germany. Mengele, in fact, was interested in the
co-relation of blood types to psychic abilities. Blood type B
apparently has more psychics than other blood types. People
who have true psychic abilities have a more complex molecular
lattice structure than those who don’t. They also have energy
fields of 500 cps or higher. This is in contrast with most brain
activity which lies in the 0 cps to 100 cps range. The heart
operates at up to about 250 cps, and the resonant frequency for
a nerve is 360 cps. In other words, the high cps. energy field is
a tip off that the person is psychic. An secret program has been
carried out by the Illuminati to identify every person on the
planet who is capable of being psychic. They are identified and
then assigned to people (a male and female) to monitor the
person. Psychics are often recruited into intelligence agencies
to bring them under the power of the Illuminati’s establishment.
In other cases, they are simply watched and monitored, some
who are threats to them are killed, and others receive
mind-control. They have been identifying people with psychic
abilities and then trying to track and/or control them. They also
will try to recruit or place these people under mind-control or
both.

C5. TORTURE/NERVE & MUSCLE STIMULATION

IMPLANTS
When a body suit is placed into a slave, implants are
strategically placed in their body so that if they do not comply
or if the Network wants to make the person dissociative they
can direct the control implant to trigger these implants to
activate. For instance two implants will be place on opposite
side near the uterus and one in the lower back in order to give
the handlers the ability to cause lots of lower back pain. Prior to
electronically putting someone into an altered & controlled
dissociative state, they will wear a person down with pain to
make them dissociative. For instance, if an implant in the
middle (square in the heel) of the foot goes off, a ball of
electricity like a sparkler is activated causing pain, anxiety and
discomfort. Some describe it as a hot pin prick in the foot. One
victim and her mother both received these torture implants, and
she was able to locate and remove some of them from her
mother. I would like to paraphrase her description of finding
these torture implants, "I discovered fiberoptic type implants on
the lower back and also on the line where the leg and buttock
join. The fiberoptic sites on the lower back was 1" to the left of
the spine, and consisted of two holes where the implants had
been inserted which were one above the other, and at a distance
of 5/8’ from each other. I was able to partially remove both of
these fiber implants, but knots remained under the holes where
tiny parts of the implants tenaciously remained. These two back
implants seemed to connect signal-wise to the implant at the
junction of the buttock and leg. This latter implant could create
pain in the left leg and foot." Sometimes a crackling sound like
crickets accompanies the signal to create pain. A vibrating
electrical field is often used on victims of electronic control.
(Unconfirmed but possible:) One victim described a device that
could have a dial rotated to allow the sender to chose different
types of signals to be sent. This would be pointed at a victim.
As this sounds like a good possibility, it has been included here,
although there is nothing to confirm such a piece of equipment
which is probably if it exists
Page 172 ...

BELLDAME TORTURE IMPLANT--Nothing available to

report.

SUICIDE IMPLANT--Some claim that an implanted chip has

been created that will release a poison upon a signal which will
kill its host. This author has seen absolutely no evidence that
such an implant exists. It’s use is likely disinformation.

C6. TRACKING & I.D. IMPLANTS

This type of implant has gotten most of the public’s attention.
For several years now the public has been aware that animals,
military personnel as well as civilians have been given tracking
implants. Objects also have received tracking implants. DCI of
the CIA Bob Gates is reported to have said, "If you can’t
identify people, you can’t control them." The Wall St. Journal,
3/30/1992 reported that the FDA proposed that tracking devices
onto 35 classes of medical devices such as heart valves and
breast implants. The excuse was that they needed to track
life-sustaining medical devices better. The list of devices to be
tracked includes cardiovascular filters, defibrillators,
pacemaker electrodes, heart valves, tracheal protheses,
breathing monitors, portable oxygen generators, ventilators,
infusion oxygen generators, ventilators, infusion pumps and
various silicone gel-filled devices such as testicular implants
and breast implants, and spinal implants. The Hughs
Identification Device has been placed onto such objects as
breast implants. These tracking implants are reported to have a
life of 250 years. Their tracking I.D. number consists of #,
letter, #, letter, # etc. The U.S. Navy has employed RF/ID
"waterproof bracelets" for tracking individuals underwater. The
U.S. military has required its personnel to take tracking
implants under the pretense of being able to find them if they
get lost, and millions of men and women in the
military have already gotten these tracking implants. A book
published by the U.S. Army War College in 1994 (entitled The
Revolution in Military Affairs and Conflict Short of War) shows
the Army’s interest in tracking implants. Many tracking
implants were placed into military personnel during Desert
Shield/Desert Storm operations. Some tracking implants are
programmable and can record vital data about a person. They
could also be used as a debit card for financial transactions,
which is why they have gotten so much attention as the much
feared Mark of the Beast. Texe Marr’s popular book Project
L.U.C.I.D. exposed the L.U.C.I.D. System which will be a
central clearing house for keeping track of everyone. He
reproduced a diagram from an issue of Narc Officer magazine
showing how the system would connect an individual’s
universal biometrics card with the justice, data
communications, and telecommunications systems of the World
Order. Texe Marrs and others are fascinated at the choice of
words & acronyms that the establishment keeps picking. Dr.
Creusat, a medical doctor with Interpol is the official designer
of L.U.C.I.D. He and his co-designer initially refused to reveal
what the acronym L.U.C.I.D. stands for. Some speculate that it
stands for the obvious: "Lucifer’s I.D." system. It’s also strange
that AT&T called their new company derived from Bell Labs
(which has been involved in mind-control for the Illuminati)
"Lucent Technologies". Again some people speculate that
Lucent means Lucifer’s Enterprises. And what did Lucent come
out with? They came out with a new computer network called
"Inferno" (another name for Hell), written in a language called
"Limbo" (a place in Hell) with computer protocols called
"Styx" (a river in Hell). And then on the other side of the
Atlantic, a world-wide net called Demon Internet is being
offered to people in Europe. (To have Demon Internet installed
for you by
Page 173 ...
Demon Internet, Ltd. at 322 Regents Park Rd., Finchley,
London N3 2QQ costs initially £1,762.50 for the first month
according to recent company literature.) Again the obvious
ques tion, why are these companies using occult--even satanic
terms for their products? Illuminati member and chairman of
IBM Thomas Watson, Jr. set up a cryptology research group at
IBM’s research lab in Yorktown Heights in NY. This group
was led by Horst Feistel, and it developed a cipher code called
"Lucifer". Lucifer was then sold to Lloyd’s of London. Lucifer
was created under the auspices of the NSA. Lucifer worked off
of an algorithm. The NSA had set things up via IBM so that it
has had a back door to anything encrypted with Lucifer. (By the
way NSA’s partner in the U.K. is the brit’s GCHQ.) The paper
trail indicates that L.U.C.I.D. intends to keep track of people by
using biometrics (iris scan, fingerprint, voiceprint, photos, and
other bio identification features) that will be encoded on cards
(or implants.) DNA databanks are already giving computers an
enormous ability to identify millions of americans via their
DNA. Texe Marrs also calls our attention in his book about
L.U.C.I.D. to the important mandatory ISO 9000 program,
which makes it mandatory for all products to have an ISO 9000
I.D. number and their approval and certification. Over 100
countries have adopted the ISO 9000 standards. In 1999, use of
the system, which was voluntary, will become mandatory. The
government is also setting up TPN (Trading Partner Numbers).
While obtaining all these numbers to do business is not directly
mind-control; if a person can’t buy or sell without the approved
numbers, it does tend to place a person or company under the
World Order’s control. The NACCB in England and the ASQC
and the ANSI have been given power to accredit people with
the ISO 9000 numbers. IOS is also in some type of overseeing
role in the accreditation process. Here we go, more acronym
monsters to control our lives! But while attention has been
focused on this, many other implants have been implanted for
mind-control. It all works together. The tracking implants
certainly are an external means of controlling people that will
work along side of the mind-control to lock people into their
Established System. The tracking implants have broader
application than just to keep track of an individual’s location, or
his financial records. Tracking implants can be used to send bio
information on the heart beat, the BEG, EKG and other bio
tracking methods. Researchers who are following the field of
tracking implants will remember the article "An Eight Channel
Micropowered PAM/FM Biomedical Telemetry System" in the
NTC ’71 Record, p. 309. The Air Force Office of Scientific
Research, NASA financed that study which involved an
8-channel micropowered telemetry system designed to sense
and transmit physiological data. The system was actually
successfully used. They will also remember an earlier article in
the IEEE Transactions on Bio-medical Engineering, Vol.
BME-14, Oct. 1967 entitled, "The Design and Use of an
FM/AM Radiotelemetry System for Multichannel Recording of
Biological Data." And then they will remember an even earlier
report from the Biophysics Lab, of the Aerospace Medical Labs
of the Aerospace Medical Div. at Wright Patterson AFB, Ohio
dated 1965 entitled, "Personal telemetry transmitter system."
The point is that tracking implant research has been with us for
several decades, and is being utilized to control slaves who
have body suits of implants. They have been publicly
monitoring animals with bio-telemetry for several decades, it
doesn’t take any stretch of the imagination to comprehend that
they are also doing it with their slaves. While these articles
were from the ’60s, soon afterwards a book appeared Mackay,
R.S.

Biomedical Telemetry, Sensing and Transmitting Biological

Information from Animals and Man. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.:
NY, 1970. Faceprints are a new method which
Page 174 ...
uses a math algorithm that establishes distances between eye
pupils, nasal base, lip center and other facial points. The
algorithm produces a 50-bit number that is person-specific. The
plans are to code this along with other unique I.D. features onto
the magnetic strips of I.D. cards. The American CIA developed
in conjunction with the Thai police a smart identity card for use
in Thailand. The Computerworld Smithsonian Award was
given to the Thai Ministry of Interior for this "innovative
technology" in 1990. In other words, one part of Big Brother
patted another on the back. Was the CIA protecting us, Mr. &
Mrs. Citizens by doing this so-called "intelligence" work, or
was it working on another agenda by developing this high tech
ID card? Later the military adopted the MARC ID card based
on similar ideas.
Bell Communications (in NJ) developed voice activated credit
cards. Reports are that colds can throw one’s voice off so that
it’s rejected by the flat microchip in the voice card. When this
author calls the World Order’s mind-control "total", he means
just that--it is designed to control the body, mind and spirit of a
person. By taking bio information via implants, DNA codes,
blood types, retina scans, hand geometry and face prints,
without our real consent the World Order has effectively stolen
our Fifth Amendment rights. John Adams wrote, "Property
must be secured or liberty cannot exist." (The Works of John
Adams, Vol. 6:9, p. 280.) The purpose of the American
government was to protect property. But they have stolen our
privacy. They have put into law (contrary to the Constitution &
Bill of -Rights) several laws that will force us to provide
information to computer data banks that will be used to
determine if we can buy or sell, if we can get employment or
not, & if we are deemed politically correct or not. And those on
the wrong side of the NWO may be incarcerated and
programmed. While tracking implants are not mind-control per
se, they will work hand in glove with actual mind-control to
make sure no one under mind-control can effectively get away.
Therefore all tracking devices must be seen in the broader
context as being devices to assist in the implementation of total
mind-control. One genius scientist who worked on the bio-chip
and who still works as a civilian for the government personally
told this author that he is excused for his help on the project
because technology is neutral. Technology is neither good nor
bad, so he claims. I disagree, and so did another scientist who
did repent of helping with this infernal project, and apologized
to this author. These bio-chips are going to be used for the
enslavement of mankind, and for total mind-control. There is
no justification, no excuse great enough to allow people to
side-step their responsibility in the creation of such technology
intended for evil. We have a responsibility to know how our
inventions will be used before we create them. It doesn’t take a
rocket scientist to know what these inventions are going to be
used for. Unfortunately, this man who assisted with the
bio-chip is a rocket scientist.

Section D. Direct monitoring & manipulation of the brain/mind

D1. Direct monitoring of thought waves.
For many years, the basic waves have told us basic things about
the mind. Rapid Beta waves come from normal mental activity
like you are doing now, alpha waves indicate relaxation, theta
waves mean meditation & memories, & ultraslow deltas mean
deep sleep. Cognitive demands cause the gamma waves to
synchronize. Alpha (as well as Theta) oscillations both encode
and access cortical codes--what we describe as K-lines in this
Deeper Insights book. The thalamus & the cortex are involved
in memory. People with good memories have higher alpha
freks than persons with poor memories. EEGs are used
Page 175 ...
to watch these waves & their oscillations. PET scans are even
more revealing. Thoughts can be analyzed in terms of the
various parts of the mind that they require to produce them. In
word-reading the mind activates specific posterior visual areas,
and when the mind must identify a noun specific frontal &
temporo-parietal areas are active. (See Posner, "Seeing the
Mind", Science magazine, 10/29/93, p. 673). PET scans &
BEGs are interesting, but evoked potentials tell it all. The
National Security Agency has a monopoly on monitoring the
evoked potentials emitted by people’s brain’s electrical flux
which are electromagnetic emissions in the 30-50 Hz, 5
milliwatt range. When a person thinks, or moves their body, or
sees something, the brain creates an evoked potential or set of
evoked potentials. These emissions can be decoded to see what
the person is thinking or doing. This is called RNM (Remote
Neural Monitoring). It is reported that the Kinnecome group at
the NSA is involved with this type of monitoring
round-the-clock of victims of electronic mind-control using
EMF equipment that is scattered across the nation. A Signals
Intelligence EMF scanning network allows the NSA’s
computers to pinpoint and track any individual in the United
States by watching for their specific bioelectrical field. In many
ways, the tracking implants and the national I.D. cards are
redundant, but the World Order wants to increase their control,
while keeping their best technology secret. The NSA
information is not randomly passed on to any individual, but
they do have their ways to filter down information to
mind-control handlers if they need to. They have exhibited an
amazing ability to track the two co-authors, but that doesn’t
mean that they are all powerful, just because their computers
can remotely detect and keep track of people. This book is
evidence that there is still some elbow room for independent
thought in this world. What’s more frightening is the apathy in
the world to stand up to the control. But the question may arise,
how can they get any good reading on the brain’s evoked
potentials from a distance? The equipment is a combined use of
ELF-modulated masers along with Doppler-shifted
interrogative RMCT masers. This technique allows them to
send syntel directly through walls. A Maser is a microwave
equivalent to a laser.
TESLA WAVES USED TO READ MINDS & IMPLANT
VOICES
According to reports, the Soviets were the first to discover in
the 1960’s that the human brain had 23 BEG band wave
lengths, of which 11 of these were totally independent. By
knowing those 11 band wave lengths, and then sending signals
based upon those wave lengths, the human mind could be
manipulated. The person’s PRIME FREK, that is their
biological frequency needs to be identified, and then it is
possible to remotely implant thoughts and voices into their
minds. In the early 1970’s, the U.S. Documentation Center as
well as the White House’s spokesman had both reported that
electromagnetic waves could be used to communicate with "a
target biosystem." (This was brought out in the U.S. District
Court of the State of Utah where inmates who had been
subjected to mind-control in prison tried unsuccessfully to fight
back in court.) The University of Utah was just one of several
dirty research facilities which re-searched on human guinea
pigs how Tesla waves could be used to manipulate the mind
into hearing voices. They discovered how simple it is to use
these waves to override and implant thoughts into the mind, and
to read the thoughts of the mind. Then they subjected hundreds
of inmates at the Gunnison Facility of the Utah State Prison, the
State Hospital and perhaps other Utah State Prison facilities to
this brand of mind-control in order to test it. It certainly works.
Numerous inmates tried to fight the system, and the obvious
mind-
Page 176 ...
control that so many of them were being subjected to. Hundreds
of the inmates were subjected to heavy drugs and other severe
punishment when they protested. Still they continued to protest.
This was in the 1970’s, now the technology is being used over
the entire United States. The Tesla waves are sent to a victim in
the following sequence of events. Computers programmed with
artificial intelligence handle most electronic controlled slaves.
When the slave does something the computer can’t handle then
human handlers step in to help. Men and women staff consoles
attached to CRAY computers where they monitor the victims
that need special attention. The full fledged electronic
monitoring involves an entire body suit of various implant
devices in the victim’s body. From the body suit, the controllers
are able to track the victim, hear what the victim hears, and see
via tiny fiberoptics some of what is going on around and with
the victim. The staff have pre-recorded sound bites that they
usually like to select, as well as occasion actual live messages.
They transmit these messages, which are picked up by satellite
and relayed to whatever large TV broadcasting antenna or
GWEN tower or other antenna is near the victim. The signal is
then relayed to some object near the victim, which serves as a
relay antenna to pass the signal on to the victim. It’s believed
that some type of implant picks up the signal and broadcasts the
correct Tesla wave pattern to create voices within the victim.
Meanwhile, the tracking implant keeps the staff and the satellite
system informed every few minutes as to exactly where to send
the voice signals. The Master computer and central HQ for
electronic mind control is reported to be Boulder, CO. Several
places have been identified by this author as key points. One
report came in that transponders are being made in Boulder,
CO. The central cellular computer is in the Boulder, CO
National Bureau of Standards building. AT & T is cooperating
with electronic mind-control also. NORAD tracks both space
and earthbound objects. They have a Cheyenne Mtn. Air
Station. Although it is clear from reports from mind-control
victims that NORAD is actively involved in mind-control,
exactly how the different tracking responsibilities are delegated
is not known to this author at this time. It appears that there is
duplication of efforts, and several NWO branches maintain the
same capability.

D2. VOICES / OR THOUGHTS SENT ELECTRONICALLY

DIRECTLY INTO THE MIND
Brain waves are connected to thought. When thought occurs
there is a great deal of brain wave activity. The brain carries out
what some people call "parallel processors"--that is it breaks a
thinking process down into components and works on all
simultaneously. When the World Order’s researchers have
attempted to tamper with the mind they can place thoughts into
the mind by tampering with the processes that create thoughts,
without actually having to replicate the thought they want. In
other words, they are deflecting the natural process into the
synthetic process they want to get their desired result.
For group mind control, or isolated individuals, ELF waves can
be sent that interact with the brain’s natural waves. The human
brain synchronizes with the incoming waves and the end result
can be panic, sleep, or a hypnotic trance. The wrong kinds of
ELF waves can even damage the brain. In 1961, Allen Frey, a
free-lance biophysicist and engineering psychologist reported
that humans can hear microwaves. This had been known by the
military since W.W.II. To form complex words and sentences,
Frey realized he’d have to approach the level of 10 -mW/(cm)²,
but the bottom line is microwave-created movement of cochlear
hair cells can be done. In the late 1950’s, Dr. Patrick Flanagan
developed an electronic telepathy machine
Page 177 ...
which was called the Neurophone. He writes about the
Neurophone and its capabilities to transmit acoustic (sounds,
voices) directly into the brain of an individual using the
electromagnetic fields in his forward to the book Angels Don’t
Play This HAARP by Jeane Manning and Dr. Nick Begich. The
patent office held up his patent on the machine for 12 years. Dr.
Flanagan writes, "Certain types of electromagnetic signals can
induce visual and auditory effects when the field around the
head or body is at the right frequency, intensity and modulation
levels. We are not accusing the developers of HAARP of
amoral intentions for the use of this technology but the
potential for abuse is there." (Angels Don’t Play This HAARP,
p. 6) First, this author highly recommends the book Angels
Don’t Play This HAARP; and second, this author is going to
flat outright say that the developers of HAARP do not deserve
the benefit of the doubt anymore--because some of them have a
clear track record of developing and using mind-control
techniques. HAARP is nothing less than a mind-control project.
One of the persons that people trying to investigate HAARP
kept running into was Col. John Alexander. Col. John
Alexander was involved with the development of -HAARP.
(Angels Don’t Play This HAARP, p. 19) Trauma-based
mind-control victims have identified Col. John Alexander as
being one of the primary mind-control programmers. He has
been a key player in a number of mind-control projects for the
government. Wright-Patterson AFB, Dayton, OH also play-ed a
role in research for HAARP. A number of trauma-based
mind-control victims have identified Wright-Patterson as a
mind-control programming center. Apparently, the Air Force
used some of the brain-stem scarred whiz kids at the base to try
and develop Tesla technology. ARCO (via their ARCO Power
Technologies, Inc. subsidiary) was the Air Force’s prime
contractor on the first phase of HAARP’s development. ARCO
has company doctors who are helping program mind-control
victims. One of ARCO’s board members was Dr. Simon Ramo,
who is a big player with the military and the secret government.
The awarding of ARCO’s subsidiary APTI for the contract
smelled like a rat, because other companies were obviously
better suited than this tiny subsidiary with a staff of 25 in
Washington, D.C. Besides the mind-control aspect of things,
the World Order set things up so that APTI has the patent
(#4,686,605, Method & Apparatus for Altering a Region in the
-Earth’s Atmosphere, Ionosphere, and/or Magnetosphere) for
the HAARP project, so they are a natural shoe-in for the
project. There were other patents involved too, and about dozen
of these patents assigned to APTI have now ended up with the
large Raytheon Corp. (APTI was bought by B-Systems, and
B-Systems was bought by Raytheon. All 3 are working fast and
furiously developing technology for the NWO.) The NWO’s
Stanford Research Institute developed many of HAARP’s
high-fre-quency transmitting programs with money from the
Defense Nuclear Agency. (This was from Angels Don’t Play
This HAARP, p.47, which cites an NTIA memo, "NTIA
Preliminary Assessment of Air Force Ionospheric Research
Instrument", 10/1/1993.) Mitre Corp. was also involved with
HAARP. This author has exposed the Mitre Corp. in the past as
being both Illuminati-run, & a co-partner with the NSA.
When a HAARP researcher pestered the Air Force for info, he
was referred to Kirk-land AFB, NM another site deeply
involved in mind-control and black projects. (Angels Don’t
Play This HAARP, p.63) Los Alamos Nat. Labs also is involved
with both mind-control & I-IAARP. Their Blackbeard Team is
connected to the Alexis Satellite, which may or may not be
connected to the ALEX system which this author has been
warning about. Supposedly this is a gamma ray re-search
satellite, but this author doesn’t know
Page 178 ...
if this is the truth or a cover story. The Air Command & Staff
College’s Airpower Journal lets the "cat out of the bag" so to
speak when they reveal that weapons like HAARP will be used
against civilians. The military wants to use weapons like
HAARP to disorient people’s mental facilities. Newt Gingerich
wrote the forward to an official US Air Force book entitled
Low-Intensity Conflict and Modern Technology which
described how electromagnetic weapons could be used to
subjugate U.S. citizens who opposed their government. Cpt.
Paul Tyler wrote the chapter on electromagnetic and
psychotronic weapons. A paper trail does exist of the intentions
to use HAARP for mind-control by our government. For the
sake of completeness, and to provide the readers with a paper
trail, I’ll quote directly from this official Air Force book from
the part written by Cpt. Tyler, ‘The potential applications of
artificial electromagnetic fields are wide-ranging and can be
used in many military or quasi-military situations... Some of
these potential uses include dealing with terrorist
groups...crowd control,...and anti-personnel techniques in
tactical warfare. In all cases, the electro-magnetic systems
would be used to produce mild to severe physiological
disruption or perceptual distortion or disorientation. In addition,
the ability of individuals to function could be degraded to such
a point that they would be combat ineffective. Another
advantage of electromagnetic systems is that they provide
coverage over large areas with a single system [this is an
obvious reference to HAARP] . . . . Recently, pulsed
electromagnetic fields have been reported to induce cellular
transcription related to reproduction of DNA.... Knowledge of
mechanisms of actions of Radio-Frequency Radiation (RFR)
with living systems and the assessment of pulsed RFR effects,
will demonstrate the vulnerability of humans to complex pulsed
electromagnetic radiation fields... Experiments with
elec-troshock, RFR experiments and the increasing
understanding of the brain as an electrically-mediated-organ,
suggest the serious probability that impressed electromagnetic
fields can be disruptive of purposeful behavior and may be
capable of directing and/or interrogating such behavior."
THERE YOU HAVE IT, a PAPER TRAIL that the
MILITARY WANTS HAARP’S MIND-CONTROL
capabilities. Dr. Abraham Liboff of Oakland Univ. has
demonstrated how low-energy circularly polarized
electromagnetic waves can change the brain’s ability to keep
out certain ions, minerals, and chemicals. HAARP can also be
used with genetic manipulating ionized radiation and chemicals
to specifically control the mind. (See Chapter 8, section 2 for a
complete discussion of this.)
SUMMARY OF ELF WAVE MIND CONTROL
CAPABILITIES
Naval Intelligence and other groups have conducted research
into ELF waves upon the human body and mind. Some of the
many things that can be done to the human body and mind with
ELF waves include:
a. put a person to sleep
b. make a person tired or depressed c. create a feeling of fear in
a person d. create a zombie state
e. create a violent state
f. create a state of being sexually aggressive g. change cellular
chemistry
h. change hormone levels
i. inhibit or enhance M(RNA) synthe-sis/processes
j. control the DNA transaction process
k. control biological spin and proton coupling constants in
DNA, RNA & RNA transferases.
But electronic control of the brain comes in many forms.
Perhaps the controllers only want to carry out mood shifts. ELF
waves which will penetrate walls, and even go through the
earth will create mood shifts according to how many cycles per
minute they are sent at. Studies have proven that the time for
ELF waves to cause a shift in mood is between 6 to 10 seconds
(not a long time).
ELF waves below 6 cycles per second cause subjects to become
emotionally upset and this rate may also disrupt bodily
functions. At 8.2 cycles/sec. the person gets an elevated high
such as would be accomplished by a master of meditation. 11 to
11.3 cycles per second cause the brain to become agitated and
to begin riotous behavior. ELF waves could be
Page 179 ...
directed at a population to help incite riots. Research has been
carried out to determine how the brain’s sensory inputs are
coded. It has been determined that visual input is relayed and
built into a series of changing maps. The olfactory sense has
thousands of specific codes to determine smells, and
combinations of these are triggered by an object. One clue that
gave researchers initially the idea that different individual
human brains have a common internal electronic type coding
for specific thoughts is that drugs will have such common
effects on the human race--even -though one obtains
individuals from widely different genetic pools. The best
research is of course kept secret. We primarily have to report
on what is released. E.R. John in Mecha-nisms of Memory (NY:
Academic Press, 1967, pp. 348-349) announced his discovery
that central neuro-electrical codes are indeed used by the
human brain. Information transfers in the brain have been
shown to be related to neuro-electrical frequency codes, and
that a brain can be manipulated by beaming those codes from
an external sources. For instance, Hippocampal neurons will
have burst-firing frequencies between 100-200 Hz. Here are
some of the resonance
frequencies for manipulating these senses:
Visual centers of mind--25 Hz
Sense of touch center--9 Hz
Auditory (hearing) ctr-- 15 Hz
Motor control-- 10 Hz
Subconscious thougths--20 Hz.
If the World Order wants to cause a person to make a gesture,
they use ELF-modulated microwaves that are "KEYED" to
distinctive brainwave patterns that are called "PREPARATION
SETS." If the controllers want to create an emotion they use
specific "EXCITATION POTENTIALS" by creating the
correct resonance frek which in turn creates a specific
emotional state. Victims of electronic mind-control often
complain of electronic fields placed -around their bodies.
Recently, when an electrical storm blew a major metro power
grid, one victim of electronic mind-control lost the force field
that had been encircling her body. The brain is also attenuated
to the earth magnetic field. By manipulating the magnetic field
around a person, the magnitude of the beamed codes needed to
elicit a change in the brain can be reduced. For example J.I.
Jacobson changed melatonin levels in subjects by manipulating
the magnetic field in conjunction with beamed "signals". See
Jacobson, J.I. "Pineal-hypothalamic tract meditation of pico
Tesla magnetic fields in the treatment of neurological
disorders." FASEB Journal, 1994, 8, p. A656. Sandyk also
successfully used manipulation of the magnetic fields and
reported this in Sandyk, R. Successful treatment of mul-tiple
sclerosis with magnetic fields. International Journal of
Neuroscience, 1992, pp. 237-250. It was discovered that if an
alternating magnetic field at a distance (resonance) frequency is
superimposed upon a steady-state magnetic field, calcium and
other ions within the brain can be moved with little energy.
When this was discovered, researchers began to watch to see if
variations in the -earth’s magnetic field during geomagnetic
storms and in other situations, would affect the thinking of
masses of people. They discovered that there were indeed
changes to the human brain as a result of magnetic fluctuations.
Cognitive thinking and conscious -thought occurs between the
temperatures of 308º - 312º K (or 35º - 39º C) and the
fundamental wave length associated with these thoughts are
approximately 10 micrometers (which is an infrared
wavelength.) Signals that blend with Background Radiation can
be manipulated to control the brain. The temperature of the
brain directly relates to how certain signals will affect it. It is
believed that structures within the thalamus are involved with
modulating the temperature sensitivity of biochemical
oscillators. Heterodyne Principle Used. This
Page 180 ...
principle is that multiple frequencies when applied to a
nonlinear device produce new frequencies which are the sums
and differences of the applied frequencies and their harmonics.
In other words a local oscillator (also called a strong sinusoidal
carrier wave) can multiply a weak signal. A microwave signal
at a frequency A is mixed with a microwave local oscillator at
frequency B in a nonlinear mixer. The mixer output signal
which is A minus B is a faithful amplitude and phase
reproduction of the original microwave signal but at a low,
fixed frequency so that it can be measured simply with low-frek
measuring devices. Heterodyne signals cost more to produce
but cost is no problem for the government. Multiport network
analysers, which use several simple power detectors and a
computer analysis approach provide a less expensive way to
measure both the relative voltage amplitude & the phase. Cell
phone freks used. The controllers use the UHF cellular
telephone frequencies, which are installed everywhere because
the human cranium operates on the same frequencies that
cellular phones operate on. This was not by accident.
PULSED AUDIOGRAMS--Pulsed audiograms use extremely
low average power densities of electromagnetic energy acoustic
amplifier driven by the rf transmitter’s modulator, the peak
power density is a critical factor which is approx. 275 mw/rf for
carrier frequencies 125 mc and 1,310 mc. Acoustic noise is
approx. 80 decibels. Another source, the electrical sine wave
analogs of each word is processed so that each time a sine wave
crosses zero reference in the negative direction, & a brief pulse
of microwave energy is triggered. These voice modulated
microwaves transmit words to the brain. Sounds are generated
when pulsed microwaves are aimed at absorbers made of
carbon-impregnated polyurethane. An Acoustical Energy
Wavefront (AEW) is created by modified transducement of
sound waves, which are in the ultrasound spec-trum (USS). In
other words scalar energy is being employed. When people are
asleep they are the most vulnerable. TV antenna can serve both
as transmitters and well as receivers. It can be made to oscillate
a suitable resonant frequency. By transmitting signals in the
TV/FM range and then modulating them in the ELF/ULF
range, they can send signals. The Nexus magazine of Oct.-Nov.
’96 p. 16 reported on Dr. Ross Adley’s research. Dr. Adley did
some work for the CIA on their Pandora project (an electronic
mind-control project). He recently worked at the Loma Linda
Univ. Med. School, CA. His research showed that the brain will
react to EM radiation. To get a reaction the frequency,
amplitude, and dose of the microwave radiation has to meet
certain criteria. In the 1980’s, his experiments showed that
microwave carrier-waves modulated with ELF waves will
modify brain tissue. Weak EM fields will affect the binding of
calcium ions to neuronal sites. This type of information is the
type of information that pertains to the genetic mind-control
covered in Chapter 8. Dr. Adley was able to prove that a 147
MHz (megahertz) field, which at a tissue level had an intensity
of 0.8 milliwatts per square centimeters, caused an efflux or
release of calcium ions from the irradiated brain tissue. "This
response only occurred when the ELF modulation of the
microwave carrier-wave had an amplitude modulated at 6-20
hertz (Hz). The maximum stimulation of the neurones took
place at 16 Hz, but to either side of this frequency-range
parameter there was no effect." (Nexus, 10-11/’96, p. 16 citing
Adey, Ross W. "Neurophysiologic Effects of Radiofrequency
and Microwave Radiation" Bulletin of the New York Academy
of Medicine, vol. 55, no. 11, Dec., ’79) Also microwaves as
they enter the brain tissue, cause thermal expansion as -things
heat up at the microscopic level, which produces strains in
tissue. The strains produce acoustic
Page 181 ...
stress waves that are conducted through the bone to the
cochle-a, and the cochlea’s stimulation by the wave gives the
brain its perception of hearing a sound just as the cochlea’s
stimulation produces the normal sensation of hearing. For
microwaves to do this they must be at 1310 MHz and 2982
MHz at the average power densities of .4 to 2 mW/cm². The
peak power densities can be 200 to 300 mW/cm2 and the pulse
repetition frequency was from 200 to 400 Hz. This makes an
RF auditory sound. The sound appears to the victim as coming
from within or near the back of the head. 2 criteria needed to
hear microwaves are the ability to hear above 5 kHz, and good
bone conduction.

Section E. Auxiliary uses of electronics & electromagnetic

waves.
El. hypnotic induction
E2. polygraphs
E3. attacks against people & objects
E4. virtual reality
El. ELECTRONICS TO AID HYPNOSIS
In a normal resting state the alpha waves of a person are
between 6 -12 per second, and their breathing rate is about
20-40 breaths per mm. and their heart beat about 70 to 90 per
minute. External stimuli will affect these rates. If a person fixes
their attention on flashes and tones, such as what happens at
some concerts, the body functions will tend to synchronize
around the external tones and pulsing lights. It takes about ten
minutes for the human mind/body to reconfigure itself in line
with the external stimuli, then that rate of the flashing lights
and tones and be lowered with a resulting lowering of the
body’s alpha wave rate, their breathing, and their heart beat.
Electronics can be an aid to hypnotizing people. If vibrations
that vibrate at the rate of six to seven cycles per second are
created in a room of people, the vibrations will induce alpha
waves in the minds of the people. The increased alpha wave
activity makes the listening subjects more susceptible to
suggestion. This is similar to the effect Vibrato has on the
mind. Vibrato is a tremulous pulsating effect produced by a
minute and rapid variation in pitch either by a cappella or
instrumental music. Years ago, public performances of vibrato
music was outlawed in England because so many listeners went
into altered states. A 6- to 7-cycle/sec vibration can be mask
behind other sounds. Hypnosis with headphones repeating
"You do not know this" are used simultaneously along with
sonics as well as electrical patterns that scramble the brain.
E2. POLYGRAPHS FOR MONITORING PROGRAMMING
AND MISSION ACCOMPLISHMENTS
Tyson II Corporate Offices, McLean, VA furnishes polygraph
operators for the intelligence agencies, esp. Office of Security
which is responsible for CIA polygraph examinations.
E3. ATTACKS on INDIVIDUALS and objects.
A victim of electronic mind-control in VA in a letter describing
her torment writes, "I no longer have the stabbing pain in my
back when I go in my back yard, as I did in Richmond;
however, the pain from some type of directed energy weapon(s)
is just as severe here as it was in Richmond. These electrical
rays coming through the airways of my home cause me all
kinds of physical pain and illnesses. They kill my house-plants;
they kill my shrubs; they kill my vegetables and flowers in my
garden; and most of all, they cause me tremendous amount of
discomfort, as well as harassment. "Can you imagine having
electrical rays directed at your bottom day and night, 365 days
of the year. Can you imagine what it must be like to live around
oversexed SCUM?...This technology is based on Scalar
Technology and the Schumann Resonances
Page 182 ...
or Frequencies. It is my understanding that the Schu-mann
Frequencies from 0 to 30 hertz can affect every nerve, every
gland, every muscle and every emotion of a human being. In
other words, a person in my neighborhood can beam these rays
into my home and control my body and I am having to suffer
from their stupid appetites..." (letter in author’s files)
Oscilloscopes have confirmed that some Direct ELF/VLF
attacks have come from only a few feet. Electromagnetic
attacks sometimes hit the victims entire body, like defibrillator
paddles. Masers (microwave equivalents to a laser are used for
electromagnetic attacks that cause burns that look like
"cigarette burns", favorite target areas are genitals, face and
nose. The average power density can be at an rf such as
400_u_w/cm². Let’s quote another victim, whose letter is also
in my files. At first years ago, they began using waves that
were in the infrared spectrum that were barely discernable. The
waves would target her and then latch on. Over the years they
have gotten more sophisticated and more sadistic. She writes,
"From time to time the field broadcast from my own head was
in a ‘field’ about me, but, with the added feature of
‘harrassment’ voices also being broad-cast. These ‘harassment’
voices had taken a downright filthy tone, being blasphemous
words, and venally oriented.... Before I was hit with the
full-blown sadistic torture program I was awakened one night
by a feeling of my head being raped. A light went on in my
brain and I heard voices discussing me and cruelly laughing
saying, "There, got her.".. .The first added torture (accompanied
by filty langauge, the language is all filth, obscenities, threats
and intimidation) was a genital-urinary prod, pulsing about
twice per second, and causing nearly incessant urination..., new
added features ... are body bangs and head bangs.. .The
arrogance with which they announce what torture will be next
is unbelievable... .Other sleep deprivation techniques are loud
noises, and the interposing of visual phenomena. They seem to
have devised a computer imaging which taps the visual
nerves--these are like bad dreams. I have had almost no normal
dreaming since this system was locked onto me. Over the years
she got to understand her harassers better. They have called
themselves "social workers" and referred to her as "the
package." They have enjoyed talking about her in front of her,
and harassing her by talking to each other in public about the
things she thought about the previous night. Finally, one more
account of a victim who is constantly harassed. "I am being
tortured with synthetic telepathy of emotive and voice bytes
played over and over again in my brain to positively or
negatively reinforce and ultimately con-trol my behavior. I get
the sound on my left temporal lobe and in the right and left ear
canals. I also get microwaved when I sleep and have vibratory
pulsating fields on my lower spine, genitals, stomach, brain,
feet or wherever. It is always in combination with the lower
spine and something else. This seems to create an amnesiacal
deep sleep with no feeling of pain. If I wake up suddenly (and
this is the only chance I have of finding out what they are doing
to me) I sometimes feel pain when the vibrations stop."
Other attacks/problems:
• Infra-sound attack
• magnets repelled from the cranium
• They use a "Gun" which sends an electromagnetic field which
stops a car.
The Russians have been noted to have created a "wood-pecker"
signal, the American version of this is the American Buzzsaw.
These signals are designed to interface with the mind. And
systems are designed to be carried in helicopters, or to be
placed on the ground. These signals are broadcast by multiple
Page 183 ...
carriers which hop from frequency to frequency anywhere from
4 MHz to 30 MHz. With the switching of these frequencies,
they are creating what is know as a Levinson Transform, named
after Norman Levinson. VLF (Very low frequency waves) will
cause bizarre behavior in people. (They use 0 to 400 Khz for
mind-control operations. The signals are apparently broken up
into pieces and triangulated upon a target. Morse codes are used
on some slaves to trigger them, which is sent via a number of
methods. Victims often have the myelin sheathing of the brain
disappearing, which is diagnosed as Multiple Sclerosis. MS has
increased 100 fold over the past few years. Pre-conditioning is
done by chemicals to the neuro-receptors in the brain and spine.
When moving in a car or inside a store it is harder for a victim
to be targeted. Also, as readers can imagine, signals being
beamed from some tower or satellite will be blocked by large
thicknesses of concrete, lead and -steel. In other words, there
are some situations that provide limited shelter to the victims of
implant body suits and syntel.
UNWANTED CHANGES
There is a complex symbiosis between mankind and the
attributes of this planet. We are a life-form whose life is attuned
to our environment. The human body at the cellular level has its
physiological rhythms which are very attuned to the earth’s
electric and magnetic fields. When cosmic radiation cycles
undergo unusual modifications, including cycle inversions, the
metabolism in crabs and the oxygen consumption cycles in
carrots, potatoes -shellfish and rats changes. The geomagnetic
field helps protect us from cosmic rays. It has been shown that
solar flares influence human behavior, and psych wards have an
increase in problem behavior during solar flares. The human
body is a complex set of rhythms. Permit me to recall some of
these rhythms for the reader: Alpha rhythms, Blood Hormone
rhythms, Body temperature rhythms (which fluctuate 3º on 24
hour cycle), Cell mitosis rhythms, Cellular DNA & RNA
synthesizing rhythms, Cerebral-spinal fluid rhythms, Circadian
rhythms, Enzyme rhythms, Food utilization rhythms, Menstrual
& Sexual -rhythms, Pulse rates, Seasonal rhythms, and Urine
Electrolyte Disposal rhythms. The 60-pulse-per-second power
grids (of AC) that are spread over the earth, as well as
numerous other man-made activities are disrupting the 7-8
hertz frequency of the earth. There are some side-effects to our
tampering with the magnetic and electrical fields of this planet,
and some of these side effects may be the disruption or change
of the circadian -rhythms (as well as some of the other rhythms
of the human body and mind.) In fact, two researchers have
research that shows how human nerve cells are affected by ELF
fields. (See Becker, Dr. Robert O. Cross-Currents: The Perils
of Electropollution, The Promise of Electromedicene. LA:
Jeremy Tarcher, 1990, p. 233.) It was discovered by CIT
researchers that the human brain has magnetite. Salmon,
homing pigeons, whales, and honeybees also have magnetite, a
type crystalline iron, which allows them to sense the earth’s
magnetic field for finding their way around. The CIT
researchers published their finding about mag-netite in human
brains in the journal Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences.
LIQUID CRYSTALS
For about 6 years this author has heard about liquid crystal
implants. One military magazine should its use, and one person
who was in military intelligence claims liquid crys-tals are
used. Others claim that liquid crystals were tried and failed. It
has also been reported that radio transmitting crystals, that
fasten themselves to the brain have been the object of research.
Page 184 ...

Some ODDS & ENDS

• SERPENTINE SKIN
Another topic that for sure was tried by the NWO was
serpentine skin. This is a type of specialized fungus that coats
the skin and is used for some of its specialized features.
Whether this concept actually flies outside of the lab, this
author doesn’t know.
• "ALIEN" implants
This author’s take on the alien phenomena is that it is the
Illuminati’s Grand Deception for introducing the AntiChrist.
The aliens are materialized demons, and manufactured "soul
less" bodies. It’s not the purpose here to put forth evidence
concerning this Grand Deception, that would take another
book, if not several books. (In fact, this author started to write it
in 1993, but never got finished.) But no book discussing
implants & mind-control could be complete without -touching
on alien implants. There is a great overlap between "alien
abductions" and mind-control. Whitley Strieber (UFO abductee
and famous author) gave two workshops at the UFO Expo West
LA. He was very interested in finding out about the implants
that Dr. Lear and Derrell Sims had extracted and turned over to
traditional medical institutions for study. While Whitley was
talking about implants and our government’s connection to
them, his own implant in his ear turned on and the side of his
face turned red like a bad sunburn. Other UFO buffs in
attendance also had their implants burn them at this point,
causing great excitement at the Wyndham Hotel that day. (This
information came from the internet
[email protected])
There are an increasing number of "alien abductees" who are
remembering seeing U.S. military personnel during their
so-called alien abductions. The abductees are being taken to
U.S. Military bases. (An unusual place for aliens to work, but
within the realm of possibility.) The reason that the number of
people who are connecting the government with the aliens is
increasing is a. more people are receiving mind-control
programming, therefore there are more people for which the
cover stories and electroshock fail to totally hide what has
happened, b. better therapeutic methods are helping
mind-control victims recover their memories better, c. there
have been a rising number of people like this author exposing
it. Karla Turner, who was a victim of mind-control and
abductions, began catching on that the abductions were being
done by our government. Vol. 2 quoted her on page 184. When
she began to publicly expose what the government was doing,
the government murdered her. (She joins a growing num-ber of
people this author has seen die pre-maturely because they were
publicly exposing the truth.) Alien abduction victims have been
reporting human black-or dark helicopter activity and black-or
dark helicopter harassment since the 1970’s. (Perhaps as the
Vietnam War wound down & ended, the U.S. government had
a surplus of helicopters and delegated some to task forces that
picked up mind-control victims in remote sites.) An example
from this time period of an alien abduction also involving
helicopters is the Betty Andreasson/Luca abduction. A number
of victims have remembered the helicopters coming -around the
time of their abduction. When bright lights are shined into their
houses or into their cars these victims of trauma-based
mind-control are programmed to see the helicopter’s spotlight
as a UFO. (Helicopters also carry spoofer transmitters.) Beth
Collins of Oregon reports in her book Connections - Solving
our Alien Abduction Mystery. Newberg, OR: Wild Flower
Press, 1966, about how helicopters were involved with her
abduction experiences. She lives in an area that is a hot-bed for
covert CIA activities. In her book, she provides a transcript of
memories of military personnel being the guilty party in an
abduction. Some victims of these abduction experiences are
implanted during their
Page 185 ...
abduction. Researcher Helmut Lammer reports that "alien"
abductees Debby Jordan and Leah Haley had implants removed
from their ears. What is significant about this, is that the
bio-chip implant designed for humans which is credited to Dr.
Man, best works behind the ears. (Sources: The Kansas City
Star, 7/19/87 carried an article about how Dr. Man’s implants
work best behind the ear. On Oct., ’87, an article by Kathy Hart
was run in several papers promoting Dr. Man’s implants for
protecting children. H. Lammer reported on implants &
military involvement in abductions in his article "Preliminary
Findings of Project MILAB: Evidence for military kidnappings
of alleged UFO abductees." The Unopened Files, No. 2, ’97, pp
64-67.) From this author’s interviews with "alien abductees" it
was clear that 100% of them were victims of U.S. government
trauma-based mind-control and that many of them had been
taken to underground pro-gramming facilities and made to
believe they were at another planet. This is happening in
foreign countries too. However, this doesn’t mean that flying
saucers craft do not exist, they do. And according to
eye-witnesses some of the underground facilities in NM, AZ,
and CO have personnel from all over the -world, Germans,
Russians, British & Americans as well as aliens working side
by side. (The American government denies this. Supposedly
NORAD only has Canadians.) Some of these witnesses come
across as credible. If their reports are true, then some implants
may also have a true alien connection. Alien abductees are
actually extracting implants from their noses and their feet. It is
strange that -"alien" implants have gotten more technologically
sophisticated over the years.
BED COILS STANDARDIZED FOR MIND-CONTROL
POTENTIAL
Metal coil springs were standardized in size, are made of steel
and are placed in a grid pattern in a common mattress.
Standards were introduced that specify how many coils, and
what tension were to be used in their manufacture. Their shape
is an open ended hyperbolic which is the best suited to create a
similar induced magnetic field. When one lays down the
springs are compressed and have between 5 to 7 coils
compressed. This makes a field of influence around the human
body which is enfolded within the field of coils, which are
natural antennas to incoming electromagnetic waves. Evidence
suggests that the standardation of bed springs was a carefully
planned event designed to assist electronic mind-control.

E4. VIRTUAL REALITY.

Since 1989, Virtual Reality conferences-exhibitions have been
held. On May 11-13, 1994, the largest conference-exhibition to
date on virtual reality was held at the San Jose Civic Center and
the Fairmont Hotel, San Jose, CA. Note some of the
mind-control aspects of the different sessions:
Session C7--"Tactile Feedback" given by Paul Cutt. Xtensory
Session C8--"The Immersion Probe" given by Louis
Rosenberg, Pres. of Immersion Corporation.
Session D2--"Biomedical Technology and Biomedical
Education" given by John Flynn
Session D9--"Biocybernetics and VR" given by Dave Warner,
Medical Scientist at Loma Linda Univ. Med. Center During
lunch Kenny Meyer discussed how simulated being in a virtual
world are called various names incl. synthetic actors, situated
agents, creatures and denizens. At another meal break Lt. Col.
Martin Stytz, USAF, spoke on how the military was developing
Virtual Reality to train men.
Session C17--AFIT Projects, that is Alr Force Institute of
Technology at Wright Patterson AFB given by Elizabeth Block.
(Wright Patterson happens to be a major hub for the
mind-control and criminal activities of the secret government.)
Session C19--"ARPA/ASTO" given by Lt. Col. David
Neyland.
Page 186 ...
The military is not the only group interested in virtual reality. A
plethora of virtual reality companies has -sprung up, for
instance Sense8 (which selling ready-to-use virtual reality
systems), the Vivid Group which creates Mandala (which are
virtual reality authoring systems), and Xtensory Inc., which
creates virtual reality tactile feedback systems. The government
also works through labs located on American universities
working with government grant money, such as the state of the
art Virtual Reality lab at the Univer. of Illinois Circle campus,
which calls its virtual reality machine "the Cave." Virtual touch
has been created. This means that with a special machine for
the person’s hand (for shape perception) & special glove (for
texture sensing) the computer users can feel the shape and
texture of an object on the screen.
Hollywood has given us movies showing the mind-control
potential of virtual reality in Lawnmower man & Brainstorm.
For more information on virtual reality the reader might try
consulting:
• Aukastakalnis, Steve and Blatner, David. Silicon Mirage: The
Art and Science of Virtual Reality. Peachpit Press, 1992.
• Laurel, Brenda. The Art of Human-Computer Interface
Design. Addison-Wesley, 1990.
This author has a catalog advertizing the EMCS-X-3000-Plus
Electronic Mind Con-trol System, which was invented by
Cabalistic Hermetic magician Karl Welz. The ad states, "If
your intentions are to take control of others and to increase your
own mental powers of direct action, then the
EMCS-X-3000-Plus is your system of choice!" The article has
an endorsement for the BMCS system on page 19 by a
charismatic minister, "...I am a preacher of a charismatic
church. for reasons you may understand, I was extremely
skeptical initially [of the EMCS system]. However, I gave the
new tech-nology a chance to help me serve the Lord better, and
I do not regret that decision! The membership of my church has
more than doubled within one year ... Thank you very much."
---We live in some perilous times! Maranatha!

• List of other Books on this chpt’s Subject

Bamford’s The Puzzle Palace
Becker’s The Body Electric
Becker’s Cross Currents
Brodeur’s Currents of Death
Brodeur’s The Zapping of America
Burdock, Dorothy’s Such Things Are Known (victim)
Calder’s The Mind of Man
Chokroverty’s Magnetic Stimulation in Clinical
Neurophysiology
Clark’s July 20, 2019
Dawes’ Advances in...Quantum Neurodynamics
Eccles, Sir John C.’s Evolution of the Complexity of the Brain
with Emergence of Consciousness
Galton’s MedTech
Green’s Beyond Biofeedback
Halacy’s Cyborg
Halperin’s Crimes of the Intell. Community
Heller’s Of Mice, Men & Molecules
Hooper’s The Three-Pound Universe
Hougan’s Secret Agenda
Hutchison’s Megabrain
Johnsons’s In the Palaces of Memory
McKinnell’s Cloning: A Biologist Reports
Mark’s The Search for the Manchurian Candidate
McRae’s Mind Wars
Pine’s The Brain Changers
Stanford Research Inst., Journal of Scientific Exploration, vol.
10, no. 1, PP. 1-111
Regan’s Evoked Potentials
Rein, Glen’s Modulation of Neurotransmitter Function by
Quantum Fields
Restak’s The Mind
Rucker’s Mind Tools
Valenstein’s Brain Control
Weinstein’s Psychiatry & the CIA: Victims of Mind Cntl The
American military establishment lumped syntel and a number
of other outrageous "weapons of torture and control" under the
official heading of "non-lethal". Then the establishment media
(TV & newspapers) such as the Wall St. Journal, Aug. 2, ‘94,
had an article about non-lethal weapons where they wrote about
the sticky-goo gun", which uses goo to stop people. Do you see
how they create a cover? When the public hears of non-lethal
weapons they think sticky-goo guns, not implants that are
torturing and controlling people.
Herman Kahn of the Hudson Institute stated that total
mind-control would be in place by 2000 and could be "imposed
under the rubic of mental hygiene."
Back to Contents Chapter 7
page 187

CHAPTER 7.
THE SCIENCE OF STRUCTURING

The programmers are experts in knowing how to mold the

"clay" of blank dissociated parts of the mind into whatever
piece they need. The following is a true account. The chinese
arrested a foreignor skilled in martial arts. They abused the
man, but instead of becoming apathetic, he kept himself
mentally & physically fit in spite of the horrible conditions of
his solitary cell. The superstitious guards believed he was a
magician. When the identity of the man was discovered, and
the chinese realized that he was one of the world’s greatest
martial arts experts, they decided to try everything possible to
destroy him. He was tortured, starved, and humiliated. The man
simply went into dissociative states of trance and endured the
tortures without sign of pain or emotion. The hardened guards
were awed. The chinese decided to kill the man. They figured
that they could place him in a cage with a starved tiger, he’d go
into trance and the starved tiger would eat him, and then they
could claim that the man had been a coward. They not only
wanted the man’s life but his reputation. When they threw the
much-tortured prisoner into the hungry tiger’s cage, the martial
arts expert took on the appearance of a demonized man. With a
demonic roar, he attacked the tiger, and instantly kicked the
tiger’s nose. The animal was stunned and disoriented. The man
leaped upon the animal from behind, let out a terrifying scream
and strangled the animal. In 20 seconds the whole affair was
over. The man looked like an incarnation of a tiger himself. In
fact, the tiger had instantly feared the man the split second the
master had landed in the cage. When the programmers ARE
SUCCESSFUL with their STRUCTURING--they are able to
create alters that match what you have just read about. Our
Chinese prison story illustrates the type of end results the
Illuminati want from hours of torture & training given to slaves,
but HOW do they achieve such fantastic results? That is what
this chapter is about. Some of the programmed skills of the
ninjitsu people (the ninja) are now being structured into
Illuminati mind-controlled slaves. A disciple of the above
prisoner in China wrote, [the Ninja]..."were the original
practitioners of the ‘art of [mind-control] programming’. They
were taught from the cradle that nothing was impossible. Not
knowing that a thing could not be done, they proceeded to do
it." (The Karate Dojo, p. 101)
A. STRUCTURING OF MPD WORLDS
The purpose of the mind-control is to build a System within the
mind that is a human robot. It would do no good to torture the
slave and get thousands of pieces (fragments of the mind, alter
personalities) if these were not structured. Very few Multiples
have ever really gotten to see the deeper parts of their Systems.
WORKING WITH PARTS OF THE MIND
For many people who are unfamiliar with MPD, it can be
expected that they would find it strange to watch how the
programmers or the therapists work with parts of the mind.
Most people mis-perceive the mind as a monolithic entity. In
reality the normal mind is made up of hundreds of independent
parts working in cooperation and competition with each other.
The top brain researchers (at least many of them) have come to
realize that the brain is composed of many independent parts
that at times work against each other. For the normal person,
some of these parts can be called ego states and some small
processes are called by Minsky "agents" of the mind. For the
Page 188 ...
multiple personality they are called alters, splits, and purpose
fragments. A normal person has a society of agents and ego
states which are entities or parts of the mind which combine to
make the whole thinking mind. A multiple personality does not
have a society, but rather a system of parts. Whether a person
has a society of agents or a system of alters, everyone
experiences his or her mind as a combination of processes,
conflicting motives, and internal tensions. In order to bring
some cohesion and unity to one’s actions, so that a person
didn’t spend their life going in fifty different directions at once,
the mind creates the illusion of self, the self image. The
self-image by necessity must not change rapidly. One of the
main reasons the mind creates a self-image is so it can have a
single purpose to its actions. One of the functions of a
self-image (of anyone) IS TO PREVENT RAPID CHANGES.
Long range plans could not be pulled off if my personality were
like Jane today and Tarzan tomorrow and Cheetah the next day.
The mind refuses to change its self-image, even in the face of
conflicting data, because self-preservation of a directed life
demands continuity from day to day in our personality. Our
self-image is a mental construct that stabilizes the mind’s
numerous processes. It is a global attitude registered in the
mind that globally affects thinking in many of the mind’s
spheres. This is just one reason why the self-images constructed
by the programmer for alters are so tenacious, and so difficult
to change. Self-images do not want change, they are the
restraints (the ball and chain) we subconsciously create so that
we can’t wreck all of our plans by skipping from one idealistic
goal to another without continuity. (How convenient it is to be
able to construct a single brain with many different alter
personalities each having its own unchanging self-image!) Pain
and Pleasure are two agents which cause the mind to simplify
its focus upon either the pleasure or the pain. The brain does
not want to focus on anything that is not an immediate issue.
This focus on the immediate pain or pleasure by the victim of
mind-control diminishes the victim from focusing on more
complex mental issues. An example of one of world’s top
experts who realizes how the mind is naturally made up of parts
is Marvin Minsky, co-founder of the Artificial Intelligence Lab
at MIT, author of The Society of Mind, and who has been an
advisor to NASA & the L-5 Society. Minsky’s research was
financed by the government (the Office of the Advanced
Research Projects Agency). And he and other researchers in his
field got their contracts by the Office of Naval Research. (See
Society of the Mind, p. 324.) His incredible book The Society of
Mind has an interesting format where the numerous parts
(agents) of the mind are each given their own page in the book.
Minsky shows in the book that the mind is a "society" that
arises out of ever-smaller agents that are themselves mindless.
He does an incredibly good job of explaining how the mind
works. Minsky states, "In general, we’re least aware of what
our minds do best." The Illuminati structuring of the MPD’s
fragmented mind is to create flawlessly working systems that
can function without the conscious mind getting involved. In
fact, Minsky describes how our conscious minds only get
involved in simple mental processes that don’t work well, the
complex ones that work well usually work without the
conscious mind being aware of them. "Some readers may be
horrified at picturing a baby’s mind as made up of nearly
separate agencies. But we’ll never understand how human
natures grow without some theories of how they start. One
evidence for separateness is how suddenly infants switch from
smiles of contentment to shrieks of hunger-rage. In contrast to
the complex mixtures of expressions that adults show, young
children seem usually to be in one or another
Page 189 ...
well-defined state of activity..." (Society of the Mind, p. 171)
The Illuminati has long realized that they need to split the mind
of the child before its various agencies connect and the
ego-states form and develop their sense of self-hood and
personal identity. Although adults can be programmed, the real
Illuminati multiple systems are developed from the womb up.
How does the mind make decisions? The various parts of the
mind compete with each other. All the parts are in a sense
equal, none sits at the top of some hierarchy. The mind does not
allow any natural part, such as ANGER, or SLOTH to be
permanently enthroned and to direct the other parts. Too many
chiefs and no indians wouldn’t work out. Natural parts can not
order another part around. They must influence that part
indirectly. That is why the following examples happen. A
young married man decides that he and his wife can not
successfully work out their problems, because she is a
programmed multiple in denial, who wants to manipulate his
life and destroy it, while he on the other hand wants to be
successful in life. One part of him is the LOYAL TO VOWS
part, which refuses to quit the marriage because of the marriage
vows. Another part is the GOAL SETTING part, which sees
the marriage as an abusive dead end. How does the GOAL
SETTING part convince the LOYAL TO VOWS part to give
up (throw in the towel) and move on with life? It must
indirectly trick LOYAL TO VOWS into feeling that its job has
been done as well as possible, and that further concern over the
vows are excused. Another young man, a student, has his
STUDY part of the mind really wanting to focus on some
problems, but the BORED and SLEEPY part of him want to go
to sleep. His STUDY part of the mind tricks his BORED part
into allowing STUDY to go to work. He mentally creates a
fictitious scare that another student will do better than he, and
BORED and SLEEPY are tricked into thinking the problem is
much more weighty than it really is. A young woman bribes her
eating processes of her mind, that if she follows through with
her diet, she’ll reward herself with a nice meal, and that other
parts of her will be rewarded with other benefits. Rather than
simply diet, she must bribe different parts of herself. Of course
if parts of us, lie to other parts when they try to bribe ourselves
into doing something, if we are not honest with ourselves in
giving the reward, then it is harder next time to bribe the part
that was lied to. In order for the non-multiple’s parts to trust
each other, they subscribe to a single agreed upon character-an
imaginary ideal self-image. Other wise we couldn’t trust
ourselves to carry out plans. If an ordinary person has amnesia,
they could create a different self-image, which again would be
an enduring character. By introducing MPD, the programmers
create a hidden element of distrust within a person’s mind.
They no longer can trust themselves, now they must depend
upon the stability of the programmer or owner. Now imagine
that each of the "agents" or parts has been manipulated to think
that it is a person with a personality and a history in its own
little world. Because the mind is such a tremendous computer it
can easily handle such mental processes. The programmer and
the de-programmer/therapist must work at "tricking" these parts
into allowing the mind to do constructive things. I use the word
tricking, because what is actually happening is that the therapist
or programmer is using language that relates to the language of
that part, but it is not language that has much external reality
beyond that part. Structuring is the art of using special
"languages" combined with other programming sciences to
manipulate these internal worlds of the various parts. Our
minds are instruments to solve practical problems. If an alter
sees no practical use for a particular knowledge they will not
want to learn it. This natural selecting process by the mind,
helps isolate an MPD’s system of
Page 190 ...
alters, because many alters do not see a need to learn anything
outside of their programming.
CONTROL ALTERS called PROCESSORS Within the system
of alters, certain alters are selected to be PROCESSORS. As a
system is used certain alters are destroyed, disconnected, or
regulated. Certain codes are used or changed. A SYSTEM
PARAGUARD is what is used to decipher codes and to
distinguish what is currently happening in a system.
BASIC DESIGNS of an ALTER SYSTEM
Most Illuminati systems are configured with a Universe or Star
base system. In other words, the model for all that is put in uses
clusters of stars, galaxies, etc. This is used in conjunction with
grids that are shaped in various configurations. The ultimate
master of the slave, some Illuminati kingpin who is a
programmer or working closely with programmers, will design
the system so that the entire structure of the system points to
himself and Satan. The alters will be geographically set up in
their internal world to worship the master to whom they must
give their body, soul and spirit. A cube or double-cube system
is a closed system. The programmers who use cubes love to
build boxes within boxes. The smallest middle box of the
system may contain the Life force of the system. Those who
love paper trails, will see the occult basis for the standard
Illuminati cube shape of a system portrayed on page 83 of
Clausen Commentaries on Morals & Dogma, which was put
out by the Supreme Council of the World of 33º of
Freemasonry in 1974. This masonic book explains that the cube
represent man and the pyramid is divinity. Divinity within a
man would be constructed by placing a pyramid within a cube,
which is shown in a picture on page 83. You will also notice in
this masonic book that the 2 Grand Masters on page 83 are
wearing crowns that have 13 jewells. The crowns serve the
same purpose that rings patterned on a similar pattern represent.
Crowns and rings represent authority, and it is common within
the mystery religions to place 12 or 13 gems within crowns and
rings. The reason that this is important, is that some important
masonic/illuminati secrets are here, and these secrets also
pertain to how the Mystery Religions (the Illum. &
Freemasonry) construct an alter system.
RINGS
Within the Illuminati (which is the continuation of the mystery
religions of Babylon) the ring has for many centuries
represented divinity. The mystery religions’ higher
understanding was that God had a ring with his name on it that
showed His authority and exercised power over the earth, and
that Satan imitated this many-fold in all the mystery religions
that he created. For thousands of years, within the various
mystery religions, hierophants have been wearing rings with
particular secret symbols. The zodiac signs were assigned
different stones, gems. For instance, the 12 gems of Rev.
21:18-20, which are the usual gems placed within an Illuminati
alter system would correspond to the astrological signs as
follows:
Jasper «»Pisces
Sapphire «»Aquarius Chalcedony «» Cancer Emerald «»
Taurus
Sardonyx «» Scorpio
Chrysolyte Saggittarius Beryl «» Leo
Topaz «» Gemini
Chrysoprasus «» Capricorn Jacinth «»
Amethyst «» Aries
The creation of a Monarch system’s gems is in imitation of the
rings of Lucifer and God (as the Illuminati understand it). This
ring of gems is able to control the fruit of the trees (programs)
and change the internal weather. It is based upon the story that
is told the alter system that is being made about how
Page 191 ...
God had a ring. Until His hand swept the heaven of air (1st
heaven) fruit could not fall and die, because nothing could die.
Satan and his followers like rings because they want to be
godlike. (That doesn’t mean all Satanists understand their own
history.) When an alter is concerned about "Don’t lose the
ring", the alter may be referring to the ring of the gems that
surrounds the pyramid at the base of the mind. This ring of gem
alters may be referred to as the ETERNAL RING, and the
RING OF FIRE. The achievement of divinity by a human was
what constituted the hermetic marriage of the mysteries. This
was the ultimate achievement by mankind. This was
symbolized by a gold ring. Within the Illuminati (which is a
continuation of the Mystery Religions) rings are used for
bonding (marriage committments) and a sign of majesty or rank
(such as your masonic rings, and the ring Pharaoh gave Joseph,
& King Saul’s ring, & special papal rings allowed cardinals &
abbots.) The Pope has 3 significant rings, one of which is for
ceremonies, and another the important Fisherman’s Ring,
which is still used as the Pope’s seal. Within the Illuminati alter
systems the 7 seals of Babylon are placed into a system. The
cube with a pyramid was portrayed at the 14th Masonic Degree
(the Perfect Elu degree). The 4 horsemen & the seals of
Babylon are talked about at the 17th masonic degree (Knight of
the East & West). Also deep within a system may be the Ring
of Fire. Within the pyramid, which is within the ring of those
12 gems mentioned in Rev. 21, is the ETERNAL LIFE
FORCE, a green light coming from Lucifer. In other words, the
secret heart of the system is based upon the original lie, that
man could become an eternal god. The Illuminati alter structure
has at its heart the original lie. An example of how rings and
demonology and authority intersect, can be seen in the
Grimoire of the Testament of Solomon where a ring is said to
have been given to Solomon which enabled him to learn the
names of demons. Rings and chains around the neck are also
worn for the extremely secret reason that the wearer is
identifying himself with Lucifer who was bound by God by a
ring of fire and was chained in the abyss. This is what is really
behind high ranking Illuminati Freemason & clergyman Robert
Schuler’s chain around his neck. The highest levels of the
Illuminati have the understanding that Lucifer lost his power
when Christ bound him, and that in identification with him,
they wear gold chains around their neck, etc. Don’t expect to
read this in the material that occult world is permitted to read,
these are high level secrets. Remember, there are many
different levels of occultism, and Satanism. (In the early middle
ages, Christians borrowed the idea of having marriage rings
from the pagan Germans & Romans. The determination of what
finger to wear it on (what has become known as the ring
finger), was chosen by the ancient witches because that was
considered the only healing finger. Christians of course, by and
large, know nothing of the pagan origins and symbology of the
rings they wear.) This author has noted that many of the
handlers, programmers, & Illuminati adepts wear rings. Some
of the rings are quite big. The Ferris-wheel subsystem. A
ferris-wheel configuration which creates compartments shaped
like a piece of pie is often a small part of a larger system, and is
used to house alters, or it may have some other internal purpose
with its rotation. As was brought out in Vol. 2, the Illuminati
like to use configurations that appear endless such as circles
within circles, boxes within boxes, triangles within triangles.
Star configurations are popular Illuminati power sources within
their alter systems. The position of a star, the number of points
it has, and the relationship it has to other objects in the sky such
as a rainbow will be significant. Some stars are placed into the
system to represent a point in time when the system is
programmed to do something.

Page 192 ...

When a slave is programmed with multiple functioning
sub-systems (aka "systems"), the Illuminati call it
MULTIPLEX. In such as case, types and names of alters may
be duplicated in systems that are mirror images of each other or
of a similar design. Traver reports that one MULTIPLEX
system had 55 Daves per sub-system with 7 subsystems,
making a total of 385 Dave alters for the 7 subsystems in just
one particular slave. (see Traver, Dan. Dissociative Disorders
& Mind Control, p. 84) The construction of an Illuminati
system can not be divorced from the demonology and rituals
that are performed throughout the life of the system. The
Illuminati use mystical terms when programming, which
reframes psychological processes in the language of magic.
Programming and hypnosis are referred during programming as
"SPELLS". The programmers will use fictional magical names
for items, for instance, the subconscious mind may be referred
to as the "HYPNOGOURD, A VINE THAT GROWS
GOURDS." Creativity and imagination will be termed
"MAGIC", and the programmer "A MAGICIAN". The
programmer would instruct his assistant in language like this,
"WOULD YOU PUT THIS GAP FORGET SPELL IN?" The
Generational Spirit (or Spirits from each occult bloodline) is
laid into the child in the womb. It stays hidden deeply in the
system, and plays a fundamental role in the system’s creation
empowering other demonic forces. In order to construct the
trees that provide the structure for the internal
worlds-programming, the Illuminati programmer will tell the
victim the following hypnotic ritual:
"AS YOU BREATHE, REMEMBER TO SIT ERECT, AND
AS YOUR SPINE STRAIGHTENS, FEEL THE ENERGY
RISING [PAUSE] NOW IMAGINE YOUR SPINE IS THE
TRUNK OF A TREE, AND FROM ITS BASE ROOTS
REACH DOWN DEEP INTO THE EARTH. [PAUSE] INTO
THE CENTER OF THE EARTH HERSELF [PAUSE] AND
YOU CAN DRAW UP
POWER FROM THE EARTH, WITH EACH BREATH
[SHORT PAUSE] FEEL THE ENERGY RISING, LIKE SAP
RISING THROUGH A TREE TRUNK, AND FEEL THE
POWER RISE UP YOUR SPINE, FEEL YOURSELF
BECOMING MORE ALIVE, WITH EACH BREATH, AND
FROM THE CROWN OF YOUR HEAD, YOU HAVE
BRANCHES, THAT SWEEP UP AND BACK DOWN TO
TOUCH THE EARTH [PAUSE] AND FEEL THE POWER
BURST FROM THE CROWN OF YOUR HEAD, AND FEEL
IT SWEEP THROUGH THE BRANCHES UNTIL IT
TOUCHES THE EARTH AGAIN, MAKING A CIRCLE,
MAKING A CIRCUIT, RETURNING TO ITS SOURCE."
The part of the system that will function within the Illuminati
hierarchy will all be intimately part of either the SPIRIT TREE
(that is the Caballistic Tree of Life) or the TREE OF EVIL
(which is the evil mirror
image of the Tree of Life). Both trees were discussed in the
Vol. 2 Formula book. These trees are both totally connected to
the Spirit of the AntiChrist and rooted in Lilith and Tubal-cain.
The Moon child ritual is not only performed when the child is
still a fetus, but also at age 3, 4, 5, 6, and 16. When the
Illuminati child is in their teens they do the Caballistic Tree of
Life pathworking. The pathworking rituals are severe, and
many splits of the mind will occur due to these rituals. All the
alters created during this work will be arranged at the
GATEWAYS that pertain to that particular ritual. Therapists
who do not realize how the pathworking of the 22 paths
develops entire sections of deeper alters, may incorrectly think
they can simply toss out the caballistic Tree of Life from the
victim. Countless deeper alters are part of this tree. It has been
said in the Illuminati that in general an Illuminati system
consists of "the father (core), the son (the programming), the
holy spirit (the spirit Tree
Page 193 ...
also called the Tree of Life)."
DATA ENTRY POINTS
The programmers have designed their systems so that one can
only get into the Systems via a SEQUENCE. However,
sometimes they themselves want to quickly down load
information into the computer-like mind of their slaves, and
they don’t want to have to go through a sequencing procedure.
For quick and sloppy downloading of information to their slave
or quick deletions to the programming (there is only limited
access to quick deletions), programmers put DATA ENTRY
POINTS into most systems. This allows for an emergency entry
and/or downloading. General codes most often open these
points, rather than long specific codes. The trick is being able to
know where those DATA ENTRY POINTS are on the person’s
alter grid or as the programmers say the slave’s SCREEN.
(With the advent of lap-top computers, what the master of the
slave sees if he has to refer to his own reference notes is just
that a screen with the system’s layout. (Vol.2 pg. 88 gave a
sample of how a page on the lap top computer or in a master’s
black or grey 3-ring binder would look like.) An example of a
data-entry point would be a gatekeeper which has learned the
entire system via trained LSD trips and then has been
programmed to keep this understanding on a subconscious
level.
TESTING ALTERS TO SEE IF THEY CAN BE USED.
When a trauma is carried out upon a child, the child is then
debriefed and all the splits from the trauma identified.
Generally only the first 10 splits will be used to create alters,
and the rest of the splits will become special purpose fragments.
The programmers begin with the first split and identify how
strong the split is. The programmers test for four things:
a. how well can this split take a hypnotic suggestion?
b. how creative is this split?
c. Can this split hold memory?
d. Can this split hold the structuring that will given it?
If the split passes positive on these four criteria, then it will be
used to make a full blown alter. The programmers move down
the line, testing the splits in the sequence that they were
created. If no. 4 split is unable to pass the 4 criteria, then they
know that the rest of the top splits will also have to be "thrown
away" and used as special purpose fragments. If they need 12
splits from an alter, and they only get 5 usable splits from the
first torture, they will retorture the alter to get more first splits.
They will continue the process until they get the splits they
need. Usually they can use the first 10 splits. Seldom do they
use anything beyond the first 10 splits for alters, they are just to
weak mentally. If an alter shows extra promise the programmer
may say, "This part was going to be a bit part, but we’ll make
her into a real character." If a special purpose fragment leans in
a needed direction mentally, they may take what was to be a
minor part, and develop it into an interesting alter. Alters that
are waiting to be used are stored as gems that the dwarfs mine,
and then the programmers program them. An Illuminati system
has thousands of these clean slates. Diamonds are
preprogrammed alters that are stored to be used in the
end-times during the reign of the Anti-Christ.
THE SCRIPTS.
Each master programmer is responsible for the scripts that he
uses. He will invoke the leading geographic spirits, and even
Lucifer to gain up-to-date wisdom on what is best for that time
at that location. A master programmer will get assistance from
his Mother of Darkness or Grande Dame. The master
programmer may use a written script of his own such as
Michael Aquino uses his own version of Star Wars, or he may
borrow from established sources, for instance, Dr. Star of
Corpus Christi, TX, who uses the The Goetia The Lesser Key of
Solomon the King (Clavicula Salomonis Regis). Dr. Star
especially uses the Shemhamphorash, which is the first part of
Page 194 ...
that ancient magical book. Recently Avon books (which has
been owned by Hearst Illuminati family, and which has
published over 30 editions of the Satanic Bible) published a
book by Piers Anthony entitled Visual Guide to Xanth. This
amazing book Visual Guide to Xanth is based on Anthony’s
Xanth series. It contains so many programming scripts, that it is
hard to imagine that Anthony is not a programmer. The scripts
are too intact for it to be coincidence. The title page has a
hoofed tailed Satan on his throne. It is popular among satanists
to use X words, like Michael Aquino signs off his personal
letters "Xeper", rather than "sincerely". Anthony was born in
Britian but now lives in Florida. He has had over 60 fiction
books published, many of the early ones were very well
promoted by the Illuminati, and became top best sellers. The
back cover advertizes this Visual Guide to Xanth this way,
"Learn about the astonishing hierarchy--and lowerarchy--of
sorcerers and shape-changers, of goblins, harpies and
half-humans who inhabit this extraodinary universe! [internal
worlds] Explore the perilous Ogre-fen-ogre-Fen and the inner
chambers of the mysterious Castle Roogna! Revel in the history
and culture of the most remarkable civilization this side of
Ozz!"
The co-authors would have to agree that Piers Anthony’s story
telling ability rivals, if not surpasses Baum’s Oz series. In fact
Anthony has put out numerous series of books, not just one
series like Baum. The Xanth series is the one that contains
more of the programming scripts. For instance, a script would
be used to get suicide alters to want to take drugs & champagne
on an empty stomach, or to get into a bathtub of water & throw
in an electric blow drier which is on.
Assassination Models (Delta Models).
A great deal was explained in the Vol. 2 book about Delta
alters, Delta models, Delta teams, and Delta Forces. All of
these are involved with killing humans. It is not the purpose of
this section to cover what has already been written in the Vol. 2
Formula book on these various Deltas. Mind-controlled
Amphibious men, (genetically altered Navy Seals--see Vol. 2 p.
26 1-262, the latter no. is a significant no. for these
programmed men) are the Navy’s attempt to get something
similar to what is depicted on the film Universal Solders. These
Navy Seals are not allowed to be touched by other sailors when
they are on a ship. There is still a number of deeper insights
that can be provided to understand how assassin personalities
are conditioned to be able to kill. Researchers in how the brain
functions have found that our forebrains (the thinking part that
makes us humans) shut down when we are angry or frightened
and the midbrain (which resembles the brain of animals) takes
over. The only programming that works for the midbrain is the
same type of training that works for dogs, which is classical
and operant conditioning. This type of conditioning is simply
stimulus-response, such as IF fire bell--THEN walk the fire
escape exit plan. When it comes to killing, the forebrain will
listen to many suggestions such as orders from a gang leaders,
an officer, or the pressures of life when they demand that a
person kill, but the midbrain has the instinct that is born into
98% of the population NOT to kill another human. This innate
human resistance to killing is far stronger than has popularly
been realized, and has historically stopped most people from
killing. This may surprise most readers, because Hollywood
movies would lead us to think otherwise. A number of top
researchers, including Lt. Col. Dave Grossman, author of the
excellent book On Killing, have uncovered irrefutable (albeit
still controversial) proof that historically most soldiers have
secretly refused to kill in battle. Grossman was a Military
Psychology professor at West Point, as well as
Page 195 ...
having a long list of other military credentials. His suberb book
On Killing gives numerous reasons (proofs and evidences) that
numerous soldiers have typically only pretended to try to kill
the enemy. Many fired over the heads or only pretended to fire
their weapons, if even that. During W.W. II, Brig. Gen. S.L.A.
Marshall discovered that only 15 to 20 % of men on the front
line would actually use their weapons against the Germans even
during action over several days. 75% of the American soldiers
would not even fire at the enemy to save their own lives. He
made some suggestions on how to improve this dismal firing
rate. By operant conditioning the U.S. military took those
dismal firing rates to 55% in the Korean War and to a 95%
firing rate in the Vietnam War. What are behavior modification
techniques that turn teenagers into reliable killing machines?
These conditioning and psychological tricks are the same
methods that are used on the Delta alters and the Delta systems
of Total Mind-controlled slaves, and we will discuss those next.
The factors that are weighed as an equation in the human mind
to determine whether a human will kill another human are as
follows:
· What is the benefit of the kill?
· How do recent experiences relate to the victim?
· How much physical, cultural, moral, social and mechanical
DISTANCE is between the killer and the target.? The more
distance the easier it gets.
· How intense is the demand from some authority to kill, and
legitimate is this authority? If the killer respects the authority
that is asking for him to kill, and is in close proximity of that
authority he will likely obey that authority.
· Are there a group dynamic working, and if so what is the
power and legitimacy of this
group to absolve the killer from guilt?
· Are there any stumbling blocks from unresolved guilt from
previous killings?
· What is the temperament of the potential killer?
AUTHORITY FACTORS ARE MAXIMIZED
In the programming, the programmer can set himself up as
God, or a god. The programmer may also be a satanic cult
leader which further increases the victim’s regard for his power
and authority. The programmers of total mind-controlled slaves
have tremendous potential to cause their assassin alters to
overcome any resistance to kill.
ACCOUNTABILITY & ANONYMITY
A Delta Model with many multiple alters incorporates a built in
ability to remove personal accountability. If need be, the person
can split off a new personality to perform a particularly odious
job. The alters form a peer group which works just like a
military unit to inhibit the natural reluctance to kill. This is
because the closer a group of persons is, and the closer bonded,
the more powerful the enabling. When military units lose 50%
or more, the men often lose the will to continue killing, because
the group dynamic fizzles out. The programmers who program
in the programming, and then later the programmers who
program in specific killing missions, have worked long hours
insuring that the assassin alters feel morally distant (superior),
and socially distant. The victim is made out to be an inferior
being who deserves to be punished and killed. The killer will be
doing a great service to his fellow man and country to kill the
"target". It may be refrained as if it is a holy mission, almost a
crusade. Often times the "target" is not even spoken about in
human terms. Perhaps the target is hypnotically portrayed as an
ant, a bug, or some wild beast, or simply a target. Hitler helped
his military to kill by labelling non-Germans as Untermensch
(subhumans). The Americans called the communist Vietnamese
"gooks", and they in turn called Americans "monkeys".
Because the mind-controlled assassin will not see the face
Page 196 ...
of their victim due to hypnotic programming, they are also
limited in seeing the humanness of their victims. Most of the
missions for Delta slaves allow them to kill without the threat
of being killed. But the Programmer may put the fear of being
killed into the slave. They may hypnotically see some object of
victim as a threat. One killer (due to programming) saw the
men she killed as having a big penis that would hurt her, so her
instinct to survive would kick in to help her assassinate these
men. Practice in given to assassins with situations similar to
actual hand-to-hand killings to desensitize them to close range
killing. With mind-controlled slaves usually actual live victims
are used to get the slaves totally desensitized to killing. Because
assassin parts are stripped of conscious thinking and empathy
they are handicapped to really think about what they are doing
to another human when they kill. Still the intelligence agencies
and the Illuminati know that somehow the brain still can latch
onto guilt--somehow the brain still can perceive in some dim
way that it is guilty of killing another human, so they cover
their tracks by warrior cleansing rituals. Warriors and soldiers
have traditionally done cleansing rituals when they finish a war.
An example of a cleansing ritual would be a parade at the end
of the war, where the country turns out to tell the soldiers what
a great job they did. A programmed assassin in many cases can
not receive a parade, but he can be given lots of praise for
having done a great job for humanity, or his country, or
whatever ideal the Programmer uses as a rationale.
Clock-Time Programming. The victim may see their head as a
clock and may be tortured in such a fashion. Twelve o’clock is
straight up between the eyes. Six o’clock is straight below the
chin.
Monkey Alters.
The creation of animal alters has been covered in previous
locations in this book and Vol. 2. However, I felt Lynne
Moss-Sharmon’s description of Monkey programming was
worth including here. Lynne is a victim of mind control living
at Halifax, Nova Scotia. In her description of the memory that
goes to her drawing no. 29 she quotes what was said during the
cages, "You stupid monkey. Into your cage. Hit her and put her
back in her cage. Lights on. Monkey time. Monkey business."
Plant alters.
In the older models, they used plants and fruit, but in some of
the newer models it appears that they are using samphires
(combination beast-plant creatures) and hamadryads (man-plant
creatures). Magic from underground springs is the cover story
for how these plant-animal hybreds are made.
Presidential Models.
Include both children and adults. They carry NWO messages to
world leaders. They often have passports with accordion
additions stapled in, because they do so much travelling
overseas. Presidential models are kept in numerous locations. If
high level individuals need to slip away for nefarious use of
slaves, they employ look-alikes to stand in for them, while they
do their dirty activities. This is why Presidents such as Clinton
and Bush got away with sexually using far more slaves than
their schedule seems to indicate. Bush was a pedophile, while
his double (who has recently lived in France) was a womanizer.
Prostitute Models.
Slaves designed to function as prostitutes must receive training
to protect themselves. One possible problem might be a female
prostitute who is accosted by an aggressive male, when she is
not to allow herself to be used by him. She can be trained to
jump up slap the man on the face, warn him that she kick his
testicles next time, and then
Page 197 ...
kiss the man in a submissive makeup fashion to smooth his
bruised ego. A prostitute slave will also receive code words to
let people, say people in a casino, know who she is. Deeper
prostitute parts which need to perform sex for long periods of
time accomplish this for their masters by switching alters and
by ingesting speed. The mechanical nature that sexual alters
have is illustrated by the "I CAN WALK, I CAN TALK"
phrases of alters with doll programming.
Psychic models.
Both men and women slaves were created to carry out various
psychic functions. For instance, the AntiChrist needs to be able
to look at people and totally understand them psychologically
and their systems of mind-control (alter systems, programming
etc.). The abilities to successfully perform psychic functions
have been tested for years before they were created within the
AntiChrist.
Reporting Alters.
The construction of reporting alters is very straightforward
behavior modification. For programming reporting alters, they
use purpose fragment splits. In other words, these reporting
alters are not given the full range and exposure to life, but they
experience life from the vantage of their single purpose. Some
therapists are reporting that they are converting reporting alters
over by giving them ice cream. They are most likely only
dealing with fronts. Since most therapists only deal with front
alters, and front systems, these front reporting alters may even
be set up so that these therapists think they have converted the
reporting alters. The truth is that most of these reporting alters
are fragments that don’t know what hunger is. All the ice cream
in the world is going to mean anything to them. (Cisco will deal
with these issues in her part of this book.) The point is simply,
these are special purpose fragments who only see life from the
vantage point of their little job. Now we will explain what first
and second stage reporting alters are, and then how they are
created. Some of the first stage reporting alters are trained to
respond to 3-taps, some to telephone calls, lights, and some to
codes. The first stage alters are children from 6 to 10. In an
Illuminati system there will be families of reporting alters.
Every level ("section") will have at least one group (family) of
reporting alters. The second stage reporting alters are also
children from 6 to 10, and they are taught to want Daddy’s or
Mommy’s love. Girl systems seek "Daddy" (the Master) and
boy systems often seek "Mommy" (the Master). They are
taught to talk about therapy issues, programming issues, and
movements by the system. They are linked to the computers,
and the eye of the computer. Just to hear "Daddy’s voice" is
gratification to them. At stage 1 of the creation of reporting
alters, they are the result of the sensory deprivation tank, and
are taken from the dissociated part of the mind that feels like it
doesn’t have a body, or that it is nothing. Stage 1
Reporting-special-purpose fragments of the mind are painfully
shocked in some sensory deprivation environment when the
hear 3 taps. The pain ceases when they open the door. They
continue to be locked in place in the mind and painfully
shocked until they learn the lesson, which is that the pain stops
when the door is opened. Over and over they are taught, THE
PAIN STOPS WHEN THE DOOR IS OPENED. When they
hear tapping they want the pain to stop (probably they abreact
their previous tortures) and they open the door to stop the pain.
They have only one job, stop the pain by opening the door
when three taps (or whatever other trigger/code/signal they are
programmed for.) Stage 2 Reporting-special-purpose alters are
given a fuller view of life. They are the watchers in the system.
They were created under such horrible torture that they left the
body and hover over the body. These are Out-
Page 198 ...
of-Body alters. They are also placed in a fogged room, where
they are taught to become one with the fog. They are also told
ghost stories like Casper the Ghost. Through the combination
of all these programming tactics and techniques, they learn to
be invisible. They hover over their assigned position in the
system, invisible to all the other alters of that section. These
alters have excellent rapid recall. They have none of the Straw
Man programming that Gatekeeper receive to make them think
they are stupid. To reinforce the programming, the reporting
alters are always treated kindly when they obey. (If you get one
that hasn’t been, suspect a plant, a setup.) Internal protector
alters are given the job to insure that reporting alters never miss
a call, or never miss responding to a cue. They will go to work
and punish lax Stage 1 alters. Again, several therapists claim to
have gotten reporting alters to defect from their jobs, but
haven’t dealt with their protector alters who are taskmasters. If
the taskmasters haven’t been dealt with, then suspect a ruse to
get the therapist to think all is well. The reason this subject is
dealt with here, is that some of the top well known therapists
have spread information contrary to what is actually happening.
That doesn’t mean that there may not be an exception to the
rule, but the Illuminati is not so stupid as to make reporting
alters that defect because someone offered them an ice-cream
cone.
Reporting alters are very hard to convert, because during their
lifetime they are treated nicely. They experience a nice life if
they behave (its the other alters that suffer.) The Stage 1
reporting alter merely says
HELLO and waits for the response HELLO PRINCESS. This is
a standard format. If the HELLO PRINCESS occurs, the mind
automatically in a flash switches to the Stage 2 reporting alter.
To reinforce the original programming, which would lose its
effect over time, the programmer hypnotically command the
reporting alters to think of their programming when they see
certain objects, for instance, certain types of men’s clothing,
animals, certain cigarettes or lighters, certain trees etc.
Everyday life is used then to reinforce their programming. The
Stage 1 alters are also trained to have back-up amnesia, where
they forget what they have done after they have responded to
the cue. Once the job is done, the job is forgotten. Like the Vol.
2 book reported, reporting alters can perceive themselves in
various shapes and figures, and they can be locked up in eggs
or other containers also. The Stage 2 alters look forward to
Daddy or Mommy coming. Cisco’s system, which helped at the
programming level, verifies that during the 50’s, 60’s, 70’s and
80’s none of the slaves got free. The Illuminati was not the least
bit concerned about losing a slave. They had not lost a
mind-controlled slave in centuries, so the recent victories in a
few slaves getting their freedom in recent years are a historical
first. Many therapist who make great therapeutic claims are not
freeing their slaves at all, but these slaves continue to be used
by their masters. The masters just laugh at the deceptions they
have pulled over legitimate but naive therapists. Their reporting
alters are a key to their control and they have numerous
reporting alters in families spread throughout a standard
reporting system. If one realizes that the same mentality that
created Stalin’s USSR, or that created Big Brother is at work
here, you will realize that they need a spy-in-the-camp on every
block so to speak. Everybody watches everyone. They make
many spies within a system of alters. The reporting alters are
given some script such as "You can diffuse from supersolidity
to insubstance, you can grow big or small, and can change
shape to any for you wish." This makes it easier for them to go
through the internal system.
Repunzel alter.
Page 199 ...
In the internal Mother’s of Darkness castle there is often a
Repunzel alter created by the Repunzel story, who has magical
hair and can change her size at will. She is not an Illuminati
alter, even though she resides at their castle.
Transformation alters.
In Chapter 5, in the section on how Fantasia was used as a
programming script, the fairy alters (creative parts of the
child’s mind) were discussed. The Illuminati also create
magical alters that can transform other alters into objects. The
script for this is Alice In Wonderland, although some newer
scripts are also being used (like Xanth’s sorceress Vadne).
When an alter is changed into an object, it does so without
losing its character. This is where cartoons have been helpful to
lay the foundation for visualizing this. When one enters
particular internal rooms one needs to pick up certain objects in
the room to get through portals to the next world. What makes
the internal world difficult is that it is set up to change its
appearance. An alter may think they see one thing internally
and then the scene totally shifts. An alter may look into a mirror
and turn into a leaf.
Internal Wall alters.
Some alters will be made into walls. This is why is can be
difficult to go around internal walls. These alters shift so that
no one can get around them.
Structuring Internal Programmer Alters.
The procedure for the creation of Internal Programmer Alters is
several steps. After the child victim has been traumatized they
are sorely in need of love. Using a drug that gives a sense of
peace and ectasy, along with hypnosis, certain parts of the
system are bonded to the programmer. The child alters are told
to forget the trauma and merge with the programmer. It’s
instinct to want to be loved, touched and comforted. This is
repeated so that they feel the "peace of God" with their three
primary abusers. Scriptures about the peace of God are used to
reinforce this programming. These alters who feel one with the
master programmer will form a cover group which will pacify
any front alters who think negatively about the external
programmer. These alters are in turn used to build the actual
programmers. The actual programmers will be programmed to
take on the characteristics of the master programmers and the
Grand Dame working with them. These alters will be formed
via split brain programming so they have only logic, no
emotion. They can interact for years with the rest of the system
and will feel no emotion for the hell and abuse that the put
hundreds of other alters through. These controllers will stand
behind the Grand Druid Council to insure that they carry out
their function correctly.
STRUCTURING WITH THE GRAND DRUID COUNCIL.
In Illuminati mind-controlled slaves it is typical to place at the
bottom of the system a pyramid shaped table with a crystal
prism life force within the pyramid’s center. Around this
pyramid table are the Grand Druid Council and Satan hovers
over the entire thing. Mirrors on both sides surround the
pyramid. The Grand Druid Council can astrally project and
attend rituals. There are cover Councils to throw the
unapproved seeker off. In fact, every section within the slave
may have a Grand Druid Council. These are not the computers,
but function closely with the computers. When the life force
dies it becomes black. The slave will told that the life force of
the system is within the pyramid which is inside the Grand
Druid Council’s table. The pyramid will spin constantly from
the energy of Lucifer, and the Grand Druid Council may well
spin on their table in the opposite direction. Each position on
the Grand Druid Council (GDC) is significant, because if
determines what that Council person is allowed to do. (This is a
mirror of real life.)
Page 200 ...
The type of programming and commands that a particular
council person can carry out are determined by their position
around the table. The no. 3 position has access to the center
pyramid. Within the spinning pyramid are 3 programmer
positions, one for each corner of the triangle. If only one
programmer occupies all three positions you are dealing with a
master programmer. Very often a system is programmed by
lesser programmers, and the inner pyramid has more than one
programmer inside the pyramid. If a group/ series of cult
programmers is used, one may see them represented
somewhere in the system by their cult names. Growing through
the Grand Druid Council’s table will be the generational
demonic roots of a tree. Tied up at the base of the tree entwined
in the roots is the life force of a fetus that has been sacrificed to
empower the slave’s mind-control system, as well as connect
the slave to people that he or she is teamed with. During occult
ritual the fetus is eaten as a seed. The dead child is connected to
the roots. Another child, the child who is connected to the
memory of these rituals will also be connected to the root of the
tree. This child alter will not be able to talk or scream because
it is locked in the horrible memories of some humiliating ritual.
This child alter may have things in its penis or rectum, it may
be covered with filth, it’s skin is bruised and tender. This may
be the "core"--the birth child. In male slaves, sometimes the
birth child or a first core split called "the core" is placed in the
tree roots rather than the carousel. Egg shaped demonic power
bases will also be set in at the root of the tree. The core of some
slaves will be removed to the astral plane. The Grand Druid
Council will astral project to different spheres and different
ceremonies. This gets into black magic such as the 777 book of
Aleister Crowley touches on, where there are colors for each
planet for astral projection. While we are discussing the deeper
parts to a system, let’s discuss the compass. Each system has a
compass built into it, that is incredibly important. The
4-demons (goddesses) which control the 4 directions are called
Quarter-Regents. The Eastern one controls Wind & Air. The
Northern one controls the elemental Earth. The Western one
controls water realms. And the Southern one controls fire.
STRUCTURING THE SHADOW ALTERS
Alters which are created in the sensory deprivation tanks which
have no sense of being attached to a body are used in clusters
on each level (section or world) of an Illuminati system of
alters. These alters are the ones who no one else can see
because they have no body, and yet they are the shadows that
know what’s going on in the outside world. Every level has
access to what is going on in the outside world through the eyes
of these shadow alters, but many alters do not care. Nor will the
shadow alters tell everyone on the level. These clusters of
shadows are also chained together, so that a link exists between
them. They have no sense of self. They sometimes serve as
directors to guide the child slave. They may protect the child by
telling it to get home, to call home, or to not be frightened it
will be
OK. They are also willing to mislead therapists.
STRUCTURING IN THE MIRRORS
One of the movies which was developed to help program in the
internal mirrors was the movie "The Hungry Glass" made in the
early ’50s. Let’s review The Hungry Glass movie so that those
who aren’t familiar with it, can see the programming elements
of the movie. The movie is about a fictitious haunted mansion
that was built near the sea by a rich man named Bellman. The
mansion lays dormant for decades until a couple buy the
mansion. The mansion and its window is described as "a jewel
box to pull the silver off the sea." When they move in they
experience many strange things connected with mirrors
Page 201 ...
and glass. In the Monarch programming, glass and mirrors are
similar. Many of the mirrors in a system are really one-way
windows. The following are some quotes from the movie:
· "mirrors bring a house to life"
· "I’m great at turning nightmares into daydreams."
· "don’t know if I saw it.. .it’s imagination playing tricks...never
get it out of your system."
· "we’re both suggestible to suggestion...
· "...saw something and imagined the rest.. .just plain fear. ..did
I see something supernatural?"
· "If you want anything just scream."
· "Miracles can be done with concentration."
· I got the house in order with "spell, book and candle" which is
a phrase referring to witchcraft.
· you "never grow old in the mirrors". When alters of a slave
look in a mirror it happens just like in the movie, they see
themselves as young, which is a strong hypnotic image they
have been programmed to see.
What the movie shows is that it is lethal to break mirrors. And
if you go through mirrors you fall to your death. The one
woman as well as a little girl are curious about the mirrors and
they are pulled into the mirrors and die. In other words, the
programming message is don’t be curious about the mirrors nor
go into the mirrors. There are demons in the mirrors. In the
movie they use the word "bogeyman". The room of mirrors is
locked, and the message of the movie is, don’t open locked
doors in your internal system. In the movie, when Gil looks in
the mirror, he sees a protector of the mirrors. This in the
programming is called the KEEPER OF THE MIRROR, and is
a demonic entity or demons placed to protect the mirror. Things
are layered and hidden in a system behind mirrors. It also gives
the idea that if you look into a mirror, even if you are
physically old, the mirror can lie and give you a youthful
appearance. Young actor William Shatner, of later Star Trek
fame plays the leading role in the movie. He tries to rationally
explain things but gives up, when explanations fail. This is
encouraging the small slave who would see the movie to think,
if an adult can’t figure these things out rationally, then the
explanations for what I am seeing during programming are
supernatural. William Shatner was raised in Catholic Montreal,
Quebec and went to McGill Univ. when Dr. White (Ewen
Cameroon) was carrying out programming there. He graduated
in 1952 and married Gloria Rand. He has acted in a number of
strange movies designed for programming, and it appears they
have used him repeatedly over the years as a tie in to
familiarize the slave to him. He also acted in The World of
Suzie Wong (1958), The Brothers Karamazov (1958), The
Devil’s Rain (1978), Teklords (1991). The Hungry Glass was
produced by William Freye, who also did some other movies
for the Network. In some areas of a system, the script is that
only the "dead"--alters who are so disconnected to their bodies
they see themselves as spirits are allowed to cross between
different internal worlds by using passwords such as
"ELIADE". At other times, alters are given words to return to
their "own time period" such as NICRO NECTRUM NECTO.
STRUCTURING THE TAPESTRY
A script is given for all standard Illuminati systems for an
internal Sorceress to be assigned the making of tapestries. The
tapestries enable alters to go into other worlds, in other words
they are mirror gateways. For instance the sorceress may weave
a door into the tapestry. Going into the mirror, going over the
rainbow, going through walls or picture tapestries are ways that
alters go from one world into another state.
STRUCTURING THE ALTER FAMILIES BY SPINNING
Spinning is used in a variety of programming purposes. We will
review these together, so that a comparison can be made of
Page 202
the different purposes. Spinning tortures (which the victim
endures while in drugged hypnotic states) are used extensively
by the programmers as they construct alter systems.
Programmed multiples will frequently complain of "spinning".
All at once, whole sections of alters will begin spinning and
getting dizzy. During such an abreaction, you will notice that
the eyes change, the victim will appear disoriented and stare, or
even grimace as if being rotated at a high speed. The head
and/or body will rotate slightly during the abreaction. During
the programming of such a spin program, the programmer will
lay in the experience for an entire section of alters, and attach
the visual image of falling into an abyss, a cyclone, a tornado, a
vortex, or a whirlwind to the memory of being spun. When a
system goes into spinning the power of numerous memories,
and the power of the dizzy spinning makes it difficult for much
of anything. Certain alters trigger the spinning and certain alters
maintain the spinning. In fact some spinning alters take pride in
their spinning abilities. Obviously, their programmers
commended them when they did their job correctly. Another
use of spin tortures is to create spin families. The spin torture
creates spin alters which have been spun off a "parent" alter.
The parent alter may later be age progressed hypnotically and
given care over her children alters who she or he spun off
during the torture. Spinning is a way of creating dissociation,
and the spin memory dissociates the spin children alters from
their original source alter. This creates alters which are close
together internally, but dissociated. The spin training and
memories are then used to teach these alters to spin away the
pain. Spin alters are used for some of the worst abuse and the
spinning sensation is used internally by these alters to
dissociate the severe abuse they receive. The actual
mechanisms to do the spinning torture vary. Some are rotating
tables, some are more upright like a Wheel of Fortune type
wheel, or "Space trainer" type machine where the victim is
inside the rotating mechanism. Flashing lights are used along
with the spinning, so that flashing lights can be used in the
future to cause the alter(s) to abreact the spinning sensation.
Verbal triggers are also placed in. The spin kittens will actually
physically go around when commanded. Certain alters will be
trained to re-create mentally the sensations of spinning via
enhance imagery and memory training. This is so that the
system will be self-governing and self-propelled. The spin
traumas may be used to help create the ring within ring, circle
within a circle effect that is structured into so many systems.
Programs that are put in via Spin-based traumas or attached to
spin-based traumas often affect wide areas of a system, rather
than individual alters. For instance, if an area of the system is
mis-behaving, a tornado program, or a tumbleweed program
may be set off by the internal governing mechanisms and an
entire world of alters will feel the program. Victims of
mind-control often speak about walls full of different faces.
The walls of faces are people who are in need of help. They are
shown repeatedly to the victim, to solicit the emotion of
wanting to run & rescue. This then is used as the cover program
for alters for them to want to run back to the cult to "rescue"
their "friends". Generally, all that will be experienced is the
memory of walls of faces and the urge to run. Another element
of programming, often seen in military programming, is where
the victim is left in a totally dark room, and then for men, a
hypnotic motherly voice is played repeatedly to them in the
dark. For women, they may get their primary handler’s
hypnotic voice.
More structures used to build a system

Back to Contents Chapter 8

Page 203 ...

CHAPTER 8.
THE SCIENCE OF BODY MANIPULATION &
PROGRAMMING

CONTENTS:
A. CRANIAL MANIPULATION
B. GENETIC MANIPULATION
Implants that manipulate the body and its functions have been
discussed in Chapter 6. The body manipulating implants were
placed there to keep all of the implant information intact in one
chapter, even though some body manipulating implants are not
electrically activated. When our previous book The Illuminati
Formula Used to Create an Undetectable Total Mind
Controlled Slave (1996) covered the 12 Sciences of
mind-control, its chapter 8 on the manipulation of the human
body did not cover the ancient secrets of cranial manipulation,
nor the modern secrets of genetic mind manipulation via
applications of radiation with chemicals.
B. CRANIAL MANIPULATION--Important Top Secrets of
Illuminati Mind-control disguised as Muggings & other events.
INTRODUCTION
The information in this section exposes a previously unknown
type of mind-control.
· The woman ran tripping through the woods, slipping on the
wet leaves attacked by an unknown assailant for an unknown
reason. The report of her mugging the next day never gets
beyond the policeman who hears her story.
· A wife cries softly to herself as her husband beats her. The
crime goes unnoticed in a busy world.
What do these acts of violence have in common with
orthodontics, orthopedics, rolfing and other structural
treatments? The shocking fact is that some of these kind of
events happen for purposes of mind control. Any trauma to the
head, be it an accidental fall, a fight, a bullet wound, or a
motorcycle or car accident can cause permanent structural brain
injury. But what passes for accidents are at times carefully
designed & brilliantly executed cranial manipulations designed
by the Illuminati to create specific mental and personality
changes. In order to get closer to the bottom of this type of
mind-control, the author, Fritz, obtained the same books that
cranial osteopaths study, and the same books that disclose the
modern scientific studies of head shape/facial features in
relation to personality, and then studied them. This author has
tried to get as close as an outsider can get to understanding
what a cranial-manipulating programmer has going on in his
head. Until this chapter was published, the Illuminati’s ability
to perpetrate this mind control has been a complete secret. This
is the first time that this secret has ever reached the public light
of day. It is a secret known only to a handful of people in the
world. It is a secret that various parts of Satan’s realm have
carefully guarded for centuries. How I got this secret is a long
story. It is the confluence of many streams of research coming
together. The people, who carry out this type of programming
hate the God of the Holy Bible. This art’s academy’s own
literature speaks about "the Force". "The Mysterious Vital
Force is a Universal Power of Intelligence present in all
things." (Direct quote from the Cranial Academy’s official
newsletter). This is a Force similar to Jung’s "Collective
unconsciousness" and Star War’s The Force. The God of the
Universe, who loves each and every person in spite of their
hatefulness & rejection, has also warned that all things will be
revealed. If I didn’t write this, God would simply seek some
Page 204 ...
other avenue to expose these hideous secrets. Who would have
imagined that the Illuminati and a particular aspect of their
mind control would end up to be connected to Transcendental
Meditation, Kung Fu, modern Osteopathy, Theosophy and the
Rosicrucians? None of us who research these groups are
surprised that they are all tied together in the occult via the
SPIN principle. However, you may be surprised by how they
are also all affiliated to this form of mind control, which can be
disguised as a typical mugging! Even the Mafia are able to
produce heartless criminal alters using cranial manipulation,
and they don’t have the best skills at doing it either. How do
victims of cranial mind-control respond? Most victims follow
the subtle guidance of their mind, completely ignorant of why
their mind wants to go a particular direction. Some even
attribute their mental drives to the metaphysical world. This
author’s hope is that the truth of this chapter will help restore
free will to numerous victims of this secret mind-control
technique. In spite of the extreme lack of information on this
type of mind-control, it appears to have been more widely used
than one might have guessed. The benefit of this type of
mind-control to the programmers is that a change in the body
and head structure of a victim is permanent and undetectable, in
contrast to hypnotic or drug induced states. A further benefit, is
that a skilled person could be tampered with without their
realization. Some of the procedures reduce the alertness of the
subject, separate him from his memories and make the person
more receptive to other forms of mind-control even if the
subject has had no prior programming. One example of a
technique that causes a rapid adaption of the cranial bones with
an accompanying neurological effect would be to flick the
occiput posteriorly and inferiorly on exhalation (extension),
then lift the vault (parietal) bones up from the temporal area on
inhalation (flexion), then rapidly draw the vault posteriorly and
inferiorly, then dislocate the sphenoid into a vertical or lateral
strain position. These procedures will also speed up the
appearance of aging. This is just one example of a quick
procedure to control the mind of another. And as Cisco’s
section will bring out, power (including power over other
humans) is the goal of the occult underworld. A lot of research
has gone into producing this finished report. At first glance, the
polished nature of this chapter’s report, which is replete with so
many sources, may tend to mislead some people into thinking
that this type of mind-control hasn’t been secret. Quite to the
contrary, the pieces of the puzzle were well hidden. This type
of mind-control has been very secret and it is only the result of
long hard research that the many divergent pieces of the puzzle
have been assembled and placed into a coherent picture for the
reader. Although the possibility exists that some may misapply
the intent of this chapter and use this for evil, like so much of
this book’s material the really bad guys already have it. On the
flip side, the potential for good, if medical science will use this
secret knowledge for good is tremendous. For instance,
compare the improved appearance of Ivana Trump after her
cranial work was done. This chapter has the potential positive
by-product that others will be inspired to explore how cranial
manipulation can be used to benefit humankind. God is in the
business of turning evil into good. But perhaps in our fallen
corrupted world, this secret knowledge which is being exposed
in this chapter will no longer find good men worthy of this
information who are also capable enough to put it to good
practice. If so, then so be it. At the very least, some people will
gain strength of heart to realize once again that when one
know’s how God’s creation operates--it is easy to see how a
paradise without problems could be created. Man’s worst
enemy is man. The Illuminati are sitting on technology and
knowledge that could bring about almost a virtual paradise, but
they are hoarding this
Page 205 ...
technology and knowledge, and suppressing it. Further, rather
than helping mankind, they are using this cranial knowledge to
reward those who are friendly to their luciferian hierarchy, and
to abuse those who dare to seriously impede their agenda. After
you read this chapter and are aware that the secrets of cranial
manipulation could rescue children with cerebral palsy, and
some of the children with Down syndrome, you too will cry
with this author at the needless suffering that the Illuminati
have perpetrated upon mankind in their quest for total
domination of this globe.
CRANIAL BLOOD PRESSURE has been kept a SECRET
Recently, a Dr. Yoshiaki Omura in New York, discovered that
the blood pressure in the brain is vastly different than the rest of
the body. The blood pressure in the brain has major
consequences on one’s thinking (such as irritability, &
insomnia) and also affects other things in the body, such as
muscle tightness in the neck. High brain blood pressure is
called cephalic hypotension syndrome. Yet, when this doctor
went to see what the medical books/research institutions said
about brain blood pressure, he found nothing. He has been
making his discoveries known in speaking engagements. He
recently addressed a large audience of chinese doctors. When
this author met Yoshiaki Omura, I unsuccessfully attempted to
tell Yoshiaki the reason that this knowledge was suppressed
was in the interest of mind-control; Dr. Omura has been
treating various illnesses by working with patients’ brain
blood-pressure. The diagnosis of other problems, such as the
early stages of cancer, has been done earlier by Omura by
monitoring brain blood pressure levels than MRI tests results.
CEREBRAL SPINAL FLUID kept SECRET
Another important fluid in the brain, discovered by others is
Cerebral spinal fluid. There are many technical details about
this CS fluid that are extremely important to the way the
mind-body functions. In this chapter, we will discuss a number
of areas of medical science, acupuncture, personology etc.
concerning the brain, which when known and used by skilled
practitioners can give the practitioner control over another
person. The Mystery Schools and particular bloodlines have
kept much of this knowledge to themselves and continue to
keep the best secrets. Daniel Whiteside, a pioneer in behavior
genetics and understanding the relationship of the shape of the
sknll to personality, provides some important confirmations of
how the Mystery Schools transmitted this secret cranial
knowledge. In his important work "The Background of
Structure/Function" (pp.2-3) he outlines that Structure/Function
was studied and taught by the Greek Mystery Schools, and was
the basis of the Roman Empire’s psychology. The Catholic
church suppressed this knowledge. This knowledge was kept
alive by the Cabalistic philosophers and the Arabs, until the
Knights Templars brought it back. If we build upon the
information that Daniel has provided we discover that from the
Knights Templars, this knowledge went to the leadership of the
Prieure de Sion, who in turn disseminated low forms of it to the
occult groups that they controlled. For instance, the Rosicrucian
Order for North & South America in their Vol. 8 of their
Rosicrucian Manual (San Jose, CA: Supreme Grand Lodge
AMORC) pp. 91-108 deals with the spinal column, nerves, &
the influence of color & music on the nervous system, etc.
Grand Master Lewis writes on pg. 103, "The Rosicrucians were
the first to have a complete outline of this system [nervous
system] and to know exactly what part of the human body was
connected with every other part." One witness reported to this
author that he watched an acupuncture specialist repeatedly
work on clients’ brains by inserting
Page 206 ...
3 long skinny needles through the skull. The acupuncture
specialist bragged to this man that he could completely control
a human via his skill with the needles. He showed this witness
how he could kill pain, and how he could kill self-will by
touching minute areas within the brain. He was also skilled in
manipulating the mind of the client in other ways too with the
needles. There has been a great deal of research into
determining what the different purposes of the different areas of
the brain are. Several researchers have independently identified
that the ability to make choices, that is what we call "free will",
is located near the Broadman Area 24 in the Anterior Cingulate
Sulcus. Tampering with this area can disturb a person’s ability
to have free will. (For more information on this one could begin
with Crick, Francis. The Astonishing Hypothesis The Scientific
Search for the Soul.) Acupuncture was virtually unknown to
mainstream Americans until a NY Times journalist in China
reported that he was successfully treated with acupuncture in
1971. Pressure points can also be manipulated by Acupressure,
which is similar to acupuncture except fingers rather than
needles are used. This is just one example of a related
technique which went unnoticed for decades (actually centuries
by the Western World.) The mugging-mind control information
in this article has gone unnoticed by mainstream America too.
Time Magazine, Nov. 4, 1991, reported that there are four types
of alternative medicine, which they classified as Life-Style
(such as Macrobiotics, Ayurvedic medicine, and holistic
medicine), Botanical (such as Homeopathy, Herbalism, and
Aromatherapy), Mental healings (such as with Crystals, Guided
imagery, biofeedback and Hypnotherapy) and
Manipulative/Hands-on (such as Reflexology, Rolfing, Shiatsu,
Alexander tech., Chiropractic, and Acupressure &
Acupuncture). Reflexology dates back to at least 2330 B.C. in
Egypt. Shiatsu is a japanese finger pressure deep massage of
pressure points is over 1,000 years old. The skull & head bone
manipulations that are being exposed for the first time in this
report, were used in ancient Egypt and other parts of the ancient
world. That Nov., 91 Time Magazine article did not mention
that acupressure/acupuncture has been knowledge that the
secret societies in China studied and often kept hidden for
centuries, as a part of Wushu (martial arts) in China. For
instance, in a recent Chinese book 72 Consummate Arts Secrets
of the Shaolin Temple, (pub. by Fujian Science & Technology
Pub. Co. Ltd., Fujian, China, 1990) by Wu Jiaming and
translated by Rou Gang, diagrams and explanations are given
of the important head/body points (for acupressure/
acupuncture/& kung fu.) What is important for our discussion
on mind control are the Kung Fu (Wushu) points in the head.
This book gives 4 points on the front of the head, seven on the
side of the head, and four on the back side of the head. The
Shaolin Buddhist monks have kept their martial arts (which is
called "Kung-fu"in the U.S. and "Wushu" in China) a secret
hidden within their temple on Song Mountain, Henan Province.
This buddhist monastery has a long history of teaching kung-fu
and is exerting a big influence in the world as its type of kung
fu spreads. The japanese took kung-fu from the Chinese many
years ago and then developed from it specialized forms of
kung-fu, such as Karate, Judo, etc.
THE CHINESE SECRET OCCULT SOCIETY
CONNECTION
The important item that this paragraph will emphasize is that
the Chinese secret societies studied the pressure points on the
skull completely. They learned how the skull could be
manipulated and what it would do to a person. Of course this
information was only revealed to the best chinese kung-fu
experts. It is sometimes referred to as the skill of bone setting.
In China, bone-setters are a type of
Page 207 ...
chinese doctor which are popular to some Chinese. These
bone-setters have kept their secrets within many generations of
families who specialize in bone-setting and also within the
secret Triad societies. The Communist government admitted
that it has failed to pry family bone-setting secrets from the
families that have passed these secrets down generationally.
This is due in part to the strong chinese belief in ancestor
worship and strong families. A family’s secrets are considered
one source of its strength. One communist chinese tactic to pry
the secrets loose was their "folkart barefoot doctor" system
which they hoped the bone-setters would join. Junxie Li wrote
in 1990 that a chinese Kung Fu document shows that bone
manipulation was practiced as early as 2700 B.C. The secrets
have been passed down for many years. An American writer
stated in 1983, "Traditional Chinese medicine and chiropractic
are remarkably alike in their underlying theories...Through
deep massage at the occiput [head bone], for example,
(contemporary) Chinese practitioners find that they can bring
down high blood pressure, a practice analogous to that of
chiropractors." A Buddhist monk Bodhidharma is credited to
having brought the martial arts and healing arts associated with
martial arts to China. He must have been a very strong
individual to have made the 2,500 miles journey which back
before there were paths or maps must have been more like an
8,000 miles of perilous journey on foot from India over the
Himalayas to the Chinese interior. Bodhidharma had studied
big cats, dogs, bears, insects and other animals to learn how
they defend and attack. His physical, mental and spiritual
teachings became known later as Zen Buddhism. His monastery
became the famous Shaolin Monastery. A master of the Shaolin
Monastery would have two dragons deeply branded into his
flesh. It is said that the Red Dragon represented knowledge in
ancient China. In the Tang Dynasty (6 18-907 A.D.) some of
the Kung Fu experts at that time were Li Bai and Twelfth Sister
Li of the Li family. Madame Gong Sun and Twelfth Sister Li
composed a famous Xihe Sword Dance combining martial arts
and choreographic arts. The Li family kept some of their secret
martial arts skills (including bone setting) secret for hundreds
of years, and as a top Illuminati family are secretly proud of
their occult knowledge and history.
To illustrate how the head has been studied are some quotes
from 72 Consummate Arts Secrets of the Shaolin Temple,
"TAJYANG ACUPOINT (Sun Acupoint)
Located on both sides of the forehead, the left being Tai Yang
and the right Tai Yin. Nowadays it is generally called Taiyang
Acupoint being a vital part of the head. It is ‘Dead Acupoint’
among the twenty-four Acupoints. One will be faint or even die
if it is slightly seized.
TAINRONG ACUPOINT
Located on the back of ears and is in parallel with the ear. It lies
on the outer-side of Fen Yi Acupoint, and is above the Tian
Chuang acupoint. It is a vital acupoint of the back of one’s
head. It is also a ‘Dead Acupoint’ among the twenty-four
acupoints.
FENGFU ACUPOINT
Located in the centre of the low part of one’s back head and is
below the Naohu Acupoint but above the Yamen Acupoint. It’s
in parallel with the left and right FenYi Acupoint. It is a single
Acupoint. It is a vital part of one’s back brain. It is a ‘Dead
Acupoint’, too. If this acupoint is seized, one may faint or die
immediately."
Washu (Chinese Martial Arts) went underground into the
chinese occult secret societies, because the rulers feared that it
would make the common people too powerful,
Page 208 ...
so they frequently banned the teaching of martial arts. The
teachers of Kung fu teach their pupils that Kung-Fu has both an
external work with the hands, feet and body and an internal
work which refers to the occult spiritual work that provides the
energy and spirit to do the martial arts that Kung fu masters do.
The Shaolin Temple masters have studied the human skeleton
very closely for centuries. The books Shaolin Long Fist
Kung-Fu by Yang Jwing-Ming & Jeff Bolt and The Way of the
Sun Dragon Chinese Martial Art of Tai-Yang Lung Tao are
other examples of books in English which also show points to
hit on the head. The art of manipulating the skull and other
bones has travelled from the secret societies to about 20% of
China’s doctors. As mentioned, this skill is called "bone
setting." Some Kung Fu experts and Chinese doctors learn bone
setting, including how to work with the skull bones. In 1974,
the U.S. Dept. of Health, Education and Welfare (which has
been full of New Agers) along with the Fogarty International
Center of the National Institutes of Health which works with
WHO of the U.N. set up a conference in Seattle, WA which
focused on Health Care in China. The U.S. Government
Printing Office then printed up in 1975 edited versions of the
papers presented at the conference. The resulting book on
Medicine in Chinese Cultures has some very pertinent
information to the ancient secret Chinese art of manipulating
skull bones. After W.W. II, Chinese bone setters began to use
X-rays. (p. 261)
· The Chinese bone setters had their own professional
associations. (p. 261-262)
· Bone-setters’ societies have been interwoven with secret
societies, the link being Chinese kung-fu (martial arts) which
the secret societies control. "Bone-setters get their knowledge
of anatomy from practicing kung-fu, for part of the instruction
is in how the bones and muscles work." (p. 262.)
· Bone-setters, in order to practice in Hong Kong, generally find
it advantageous to get (buy) protection from the Triads
(Chinese Secret Societies controlled by the Li Illuminati family,
as well as other powerful Chinese families.) Doctors are
licensed in Hong Kong according to British standards and
bone-setters have not received much recognition from the
British government. But someone connected with the CIA
verbally let out that they have been very interested in studying
chinese bone setting.
T’ai Chi, is the philosophy associated in China with the
yin-yang. It is incorporated into the name T’ai Chi Chuan
(Great Origin Fist) which are the calisthenics which many
chinese practice on a daily basis. The advanced student learns
128 movements. Practitioners of the exercises can be seen
exercising at dusk, especially in Kuala Lumpur. "Instruction in
Chinese medicine is considered a normal part of the training to
become a T’ai Chi instructor, and many instructors are said to
be skilled in bone setting and the treatment of sprains and
strains. One of the most famous T’ai Chi instructors in Kuala
Lumpur, an elderly man who received his training in China
many years ago, is indeed famous locally as a bone-setter. It is
clear that it is difficult to draw a line between T’ai Chi Chuan
and preventive or even curative medicine." (Medicine In
Chinese Cultures..., p.310 Bruce Lee, who came from a very
wealthy branch of the Li family, was half chinese and half
American by blood. He grew up in Hong Kong, and was taught
Chinese martial arts beginning at the age of 14. Bruce Lee
came to America, and was very American in his thinking. Due
to his American thinking, he thought radically different from
the traditional chinese martial arts mentality, and there is strong
evidence to suggest it cost him his life. He not only exposed to
the western world secrets of Chinese martial arts, but he mixed
various types of moves from the various oriental schools of
martial arts. For doing this, he made many of the Zen martial
arts masters
Page 209 ...
furious. When Bruce Lee died at 32 in 1972, his body was like
a teenager’s and it was in great shape. Bruce Lee had no equal
in the martial arts. The Chinese/Hong Kong press felt that he
was killed by the Zen martial arts masters of China. In fact, his
student Abdul described Bruce Lee as a "renegade Taoist
Priest." Whether or not Bruce and his son Brandon were killed
by the Triads and/or the Secret Martial Arts Societies of China,
doesn’t change the fact that Bruce Lee angered them for
exposing their martial arts to the western world. From research
in this area, it is clear that there are still secrets kept by Chinese
martial arts which only a few carefully chosen members of
secret societies know. Bruce Lee did not make it to this inner
circle. The inner groups of the secret societies trade favors.
This is a standard method of payoff. Well trained martial arts
cults that know some of the secrets of cranial manipulation can
be asked to assault a human target. What happens if the head
injury is not fine-tuned? Laurence Miller Ph.d. in the article
"Unusual Head Injury Syndromes...,, (The Journal of Cognitive
Rehabilitation 11-12/’94, p. 13) states, "Memory disorders are
virtually universal in head injury and typically top the list of
symptoms reported by patients. The ‘standard’ pattern of
posttraumatic memory disorder - and indeed, for organic
memory disorders generally - consists of well-preserved old
memories, patchy or impaired memory for events immediately
preceding the injury (retrograde amnesia) and following the
injury (anterograde amnesia), and subsequent difficulty
learning and retaining new information." This is exactly
opposite of what the handlers want. They want the victim to
forget the past abuse, but be able to remember a series of new
commands for a new operation precisely. This underscores the
reason WHY the person doing the assault needs to be skilled.
There is no doubt that Chinese martial arts are being used to
mug people in order to alter their thinking. The secret potential
of Chinese Martial Arts to alter a person’s skull bones and
thinking has been one secret worth killing to preserve. Miller
also points out that frontal lobe injuries can weaken the
subject’s hold over reality. Although Miller writes about
accidental injuries, his article is extremely well researched
about the wide variety of mental problems that develop from
different injuries. The medical world have named many of
these specific problems such as the Ganser Syndrome, the
Capgras Syndrome, & Cotard’s Syndrome. While this kind of
research is helpful to establish that different specific injuries to
the head can create specific symptoms, the written material is
not specific about how to intentionally create a symptom.
The ancient EGYPTIAN CONNECTION
Skull manipulation was used by the ancient Egyptian
priesthood, as well as trauma-based mind-control, astral
projection, and hypnosis. At least some of these secrets got
passed on to later secret societies.
THE TIBETAN CONNECTION
One religious black magic group are the Tibetan monks. Their
man-god Dalai Lama, is coveted as a guest of many of the top
Illuminati, Mishpucka, and other occult figures around the
world. In 1966, the Dalai Lama wrote the book Opening of the
Wisdom-Eye, which is typically referred to as the third-eye area
which is slated by the NWO to be the initiation site for the
mark of the Beast. Many leading European occultists have gone
to Tibet to learn from the black magicians of Tibet. Hitler
imported hundreds of Tibetan monks for his Third Reich. Nazi
expeditions were sent to Tibet; and in 1942, Hitler, because of
his occult ideas about Asia & Tibet, was excited to plant a Nazi
flag on the highest peak of the Caucasian mountains, Mt.
Elbrus, at the specific time of 11 a.m. For those who didn’t
realize how dark were the secrets of the Tibetan monks, just a
small sampling of books on their black magic
Page 210 ...
secrets include: David-Neels’ Magic & Mystery in Tibet (1958),
Bromage’s Tibetan Yoga, Beyer’s The Cult of Tara- -Magic &
Ritual in Tibet (1978), the Tibetan Book of the Dead (and
commentaries about it), Suzuki’s The Zen Doctrine of No Mind
(1973), and Thomas’ Out of This World to Forbidden Tibet
(1954). Qigong is the chinese word for the healing arts taught
within the secret schools of Martial Arts. Tibetans go to the
S.W. National University in China to learn Qigong. Dapang
Qigong is a derivative of Qigong where both martial arts and
healing are taught together. One of the secrets of the Tibetan
monks, is the physical manipulation of the third eye. T.
Lobsang Rampa, a Tibetan from one of the 10 elite families of
Tibet, at the age of seven entered the Chakpori Lamasery, the
Temple of Tibetan Medicine, where the Tibetan masters taught
healing arts including astral projection, clairvoyance and
levitation. Their mystic arts are similar to what the Illuminati
believe in and practice. For instance, they learn about the silver
cord that connects people. Upper-class boys such as Lobsang
received extremely severe treatment from the time they were
born to insure that they were tough enough to survive the harsh
Tibetan life. Lobsang described the traumas of early boyhood
as "brutal", but then adds on page 18 of his book The Third
Eye, "Under this system weaklings did not survive, but those
who did could survive almost anything." Children were kept
awake eighteen hours a day, and worked hard during that time.
Even very small babies are kept awake, so that according to
Tibetan belief "they shall not become demon invested." On
Lobsang’s eighteenth birthday, the Lama of his monastery
opened his third eye. Lobsang records the brutal ceremony in
his book The Third Eye (Ballantine Books, 1956). Ballantine
Books advertises on the cover of this book, "Learn the secrets
of the most controversial power of the new age...The Third
Eye"." Before this author relates what Lobsang "reveals" about
this great secret of new age power, let me interject an informed
opinion--this story may be a cover memory to hide what this
author has found out is the REAL THIRD EYE manipulation.
But first, let’s see what Lobsang describes, and then we’ll
discuss it. On the evening of his 18th birthday, Lobsang went to
a little room in the monastery. Three lamas of high degrees
came and bound his head tightly with an herbal compress to
produce some kind of drug effect upon him. They came back
and removed the herbal compress, and wiped his forehead
clean. Then Lobsang describes, ‘A strong-looking lama sat
behind me and took my head between his knees. The second
lama opened a box and removed an instrument made of shining
steel. It resembled a bradawi except that instead of having a
round shaft this one was U-shaped, and in place of a point there
were little teeth around the edge of the "U." For some moments
the lama looked at the instrument, and then passed it through
the flame of the lamp to sterilize it. The Lama...took my hands
and said, ‘This is quite painful, Lobsang, and it can only be
done while you are fully conscious. It will not take very long,
so try to keep as still as you can." I could see various
instruments laid out, and a collection of herbal lotions, and I
thought to myself: "Well, Lobsang, my boy, they will finish
you one way or the other and there is nothing you can do about
it--except keep quiet!" The lama with the instrument looked
around to the others, and said, "All ready? Let us start now, the
sun has just set." He pressed the instrument to the centre of my
forehead and rotated the handle. For a moment there was a
sensation as if someone was pricking me with thorns. To me it
seemed that time stood still. There was no particular pain as it
penetrated the skin and flesh, but there was a little jolt as the
end hit the bone. The pain was not sharp at all, just a pressure
and a dull ache. I did not move with the Lama Mingyar Dondup
looking on; I would rather have died than make a move or
outcry. He had faith in me, as I in him, and I knew that what he
did or said was right. He was watching most closely, with a
little pucker of muscles in tension at the corners of his mouth.
Suddenly there was a little scrunch and the instrument
penetrated the bone. Instantly its motion was arrested by the
very alert operator. He held the handle of the instrument firmly
while the Lama ...passed him a very hard, very clean sliver of
wood which had been
Page 211 ...
treated by tire and herbs to make it as hard as steel. This sliver
was inserted in the "U’ of the instrument and slid down so that
it just entered the hole in my head. The lama operating moved
slightly to one side so that the Lama Mingyar Dondup could
also stand in front of me. Then, at a nod from the latter, the
operator, with infinite caution, slid the sliver farther and farther.
Suddenly I felt a stinging, tickling sensation apparently in the
bridge of my nose. It subsided, and I became apparently aware
of subtle scents which I could not identify. That, too, passed
away and was replaced by a feeling as if I was pushing, or
being pushed, against a resilient veil. Suddenly there was a
blinding flash, and at that instant the Lama Mingyar Dondup
said "Stop!". For a moment the pain was intense, like a searing
white flame. It diminished, died and was replaced by spirals of
colour, and globules of incandescent smoke. The metal
instrument was carefully removed. The sliver of wood
remained, it would stay in place for two or three weeks and
until it was removed I would have to stay in this little room
almost in darkness. No one would see me except these three
lamas, who would continue my instruction day by day. Until
the sliver was removed I would have only the barest necessities
to eat and drink." As the projecting sliver was being bound in
place so that it could not move, the Lama Mingyar Dondup
turned to me and said, "You are now one of us, Lobsang. For
the rest of your life you will see people as they are and not as
they pretend to be."
ANOTHER EXAMPLE
Bill Schnoebelen, who has publicly been exposing satanism,
writes about his experiences as a vampire and satanist in
several books. In his book, Lucifer Dethroned, he describes a
third eye experience that he had during an "astral projection."
"It seemed my eyeballs were turning to molten steel. My
forehead was about to explode. I felt a claw tear into my brow,
right between but slightly above my eyebrows and insert itself
into my brain like a white-hot poker. I tried to scream, but
could not. My entire body felt like it was going to burst from
being filled with roaring, flaming hot light....I felt like a fish on
the end of a hook being hauled out of the water by my very
brain. I screamed in pain, but it came out: ‘Glory and Love for
Lucifer! Hatred! Hatred! Hatred! to God be accursed!...’ In
order to interpret his third eye experience, it needs to be asked
where is Bill Schnoebolen coming from? This author’s best
evidence to answer that comes from personal testimony. People
familiar with this author (Fritz) have contacted Schnoebolen
about Fritz for years. Why has Bill Schnoebelen taken a very
cold attitude to this chapter’s author (Fritz) and his work? Why
has he opposed and slandered this author, and this author’s
work like the Vol. 2 book, and other information that this author
has been putting out to expose Illuminati mind-control since
1991. One would expect a genuine ex-Satanist to be supportive
of someone who risks his life to rescue Satanists from bondage.
The reason I introduce personal testimony is that I know what
side of things I am on, which is God’s side, and when people
like Bill Schnoebolen oppose me from the get-go, without even
meeting me, it is solid evidence to me where they are coming
from. From what Schnoebolen writes about his third eye
experience, and from what this author has learned of third eye
cranial manipulation, it appears that Bill is still under some cult
deception and is very likely still under the mind-control that
placed his cover memory of his third-eye experience into him.
It is very likely that both Lobsang and Bill were in a trance
state induced by drugs, hypnosis and dissociation from pain,
and that a screen memory was laid in on top of their sensory
experience to hide the manipulation of certain midline bones
such as the ethmoid, vomer, sphenoid, etc. The sensation
produced by the "third eye" cranial manipulation is
unforgettable, it feels like something is moving straight into
your skull through the frontal bone of the forehead, and then
penetrating deeply into the center of the head. In order to
preserve their cranial secrets, the occult world has cleverly
fabricated these kind of dramatic cover stories. What they are
doing is improving the alignment of the ethmoid bone, which
makes a person more sensitive to the environment, which will
be perceived by some as improving one’s psychic abilities. (As
a final note, when this author met with Bill, Bill’s view towards
helping MPD was that it was demons that needed to be
delivered. One of his supposed deliverance success stories, an
Illuminati victim of mind-control, is still a multiple and still a
double agent, and also actively working against this author’s
work. Bill personally told this author, that while he was a
satanist & vampire he was offered to have a mind-controlled
slave, but that he turned the opportunity down. Bill is not the
only person publicly exposing the occult/NWO who has over
the years tried to prevent this author’s information from getting
to you.) The third eye area, called the ethmoid, is physically
manipulated by the monks for mind-control purposes. In the
occult world, the third eye area actually extends to include the
entire midline area, not just the ethmoid, but also the midline
bones, and the related brain structures, especially the pineal
gland. Midline bones are interesting to occultists, because the
main endocrine and neurologic structures in the brain are
placed around the central 3rd and 4th ventricular areas. (The
first
Page 212 ...
two ventricles, known as the lateral ventricles, repose on either
side of the third.) The bones are one way to access these
midline structures. the ethmoid is the front-most midline bone
(behind the frontal, which is considered to be two bones; since
in many people the metopic suture does not close). The ethmoid
interfaces with other midline bones. In the course of this book,
the reader is introduced to the concept that the human brain is
actually 7 brains. The 4th or mid brain that lies between the
upper 3 brains and the lower three and functions as a
crossroads, joins with the optic thalamus, which forms the floor
of the 3rd ventricle. The ceiling of the 4th brain is the floor of
the 3rd ventricle. The 3rd ventricle and the Cave of Brahma
make up the 5th brain. The 5th brain is connected to the
cerebral hemispheres of the Cerebrum and is critical to creating
concepts and storing abstract concepts. It feeds on ideas, and
reflects. (Marijuana activates this brain, and it is common
knowledge among mind-control handlers that marijuana is
forbidden to slaves.) The roof the 5th brain is formed by the
choroid plexus. At the front is the pituitary and at the rear the
pineal gland, both exceptionally important to perception. The
peptides (called enkephalins) that trigger intuitive awareness of
what the 6th brain is perceiving, come from the pituitary into
the Cave of Brahma. Can the reader now see why cranial
manipulation that influences this area will affect our intuitive
awareness? Cranial Osteopath Ronald R. McCatty’s book
Craniosacral Osteopathy discusses the pineal body and
pituitary gland from pp. 78 to 86. A discussion of the
techniques to influence these bodies is beyond the scope of this
chapter, but there are procedures. McCatty is very skilled, but
he still has a ways to go to match the skills of the inner group
that does mind-control. His page 25 also discusses a direct
adjustment on the Pineal body via arm rotations and breathing.
The occult world’s physical manipulation of this third eye area
can enhance a person’s sensitivity. (It works off of
straightforward body/brain mechanics, not the spirit world). It
makes the subject feel that he is more telepathic. This is one of
their big secrets. This secret was passed on the Gurdjieff, who
went to Tibet to learn their secrets. Gurdjieffs communities,
which this author has been investigating have a very good
appearance to them, but there are lots of dark secrets within
these communities, which indicate that drug use and
mind-control are going on amongst them. One of the
mind-control techniques used is physical manipulation of the
third-eye area of the skull. In fact, a number of cranial
osteopaths (such as Cranial Osteopath and Rosicrucian Robert
Fulford) have thanked Gurdjieff for enlightening them about
how to do cranial manipulation. Some of what the occult says
about the third eye is simply cover stories to hide some of the
bigger secrets. It is not known to this author if Fulford can do a
third eye manipulation. (In this exposure of cranial
manipulation, R.C. Fulford is of interest to us due to his impact
upon the course Cranial Osteopathy took, rather than his skill.
W.G. Sutherland, the leader in Cranial Osteopathy had several
Rosicrucians and other occultists as early students. After his
death, three of these took Cranial Osteopathy in a more occult
direction than Sutherland was going. Anne Wales, as
Sutherland’s editor & compiler, the person who took over his
papers, also reviewed the papers of other cranial doctors,
making sure she gave them all as much of a mystical twist as
she could add to them. Olive Stretch was the second of the
three and she and her husband ran the Cranial Academy from
their living room. Upon Olive’s death, her husband married
Fulford’s secretary of sixteen years, who in turn continued to
run things when he died. Fulford, who is now in his ’90s, did
occult philosophizing, and some believe programming, but
didn’t develop the skill needed for entrance into the inner core
of high level cranial knowledge.)
Page 213 ...
Rosicrucian Cranial Osteopath Robert Fulford also met
Tibetans to learn what he could from the Tibetans. He became
the President of the Osteopathy Cranial Association. He gives
interesting talks, and writes about the Odic Force and the Vril
(the light that the Nazis believed in), but it is not clear that
Fulford, who is retired in Ohio, learned any deep secrets of
manipulation. However, Gurdjieff is not the oniy one who
learned from the Orient. Cranial Osteopath Ronald Kurylowicz,
of 754 Washington Blvd, Marina Del Rey, CA who is single
and lives with his mother who serves as his secretary, made a
special effort to learn what he could from the Chinese over a
period of years, with what appears as a clear intent to use it for
mind-control and malevolent purposes. The cranial group has
long had an international effort to teach and proselytize
worldwide. Much of this seems to be a sincere effort to spread
the benefits of cranial knowledge allowed to the public. (This
knowledge is often released only for substantial fees.) When
the inner core of cranial manipulation has travelled to learn
from other cultures, China has been the primary focus. While in
China, the inner core of cranial manipulation, who use it for
mind-control, have met with their chinese counterparts to
negotiate occult relationships. Top level Theosophists have
accompanied the inner core on their trips to China. In 1950,
Gurdjieff came out with Beelzebub’s Tales to His Grandson
Vol. 1-3. IDHHB Inc. published in 1978 some of the secret
talks that Gurdjieff had with a special group of disciples. The
point is simply that Gurdjieff was willing to go to the occult
world of black magicians to get some of his enlightenment, and
one of the techniques he learned was the manipulation of the
mind via physical manipulation of the "third eye area". One of
Gurdjieff’s big disciples in New England passed on to the
cranial osteopaths manipulation secrets that Gurdjieff learned in
Tibet. Gurdjieff is even more mysterious, when one realizes
that he an asset of Russian and British intelligence. This raises
the obvious question, what were the Nazi’s able to learn about
skull manipulation from the Tibetans, the Japanese secret
societies, and European occultism? It is known that the Nazi’s
carried out experimentation on skull manipulation. (Some of
the records pertaining to Nazi human experiments are stored in
the U.S. National Archives, incl. National Archives Record
Group 238, the Collection of W.W.II War Crimes Records, the
OSS’s reports in Record Group 226, the Dept. of State records
in National Archives Record Group 59, and Group 242. But it
must be borne in mind that much of the records of Nazi
experiments were confiscated and remained secret so that our
government could continue the research. We see only glimpses
of this research in such things as the SS skeleton collection,
written about in SS letters used as Nuernberg Trial Doc. No.s
87, 88, 91. Prof. Hirt at the Strassburg Anatomical Institute
received 150 jewish skeletons for research according to a secret
SS document, marked Exhibit no. 086. One thing is clear, there
was no limitation for Nazi researchers as to what they could
experiment on with human beings. Could the idea/chance to
research in skull manipulation for purposes of mind-control
have escaped those Nazi researchers who were steeped in
phrenology and horse breeding?) What did the Nazi’s learn,
and what did their mind-control experts such as Joseph
Mengele pass on to American mind-control programmers, or is
it possible the subtleties of cranial bone manipulation somehow
escaped them? The practice of bone-setting in Germany had
been known as Knochenartz, Knocheneinrichter, and Wundart.
In recent history, Germany has a large number of cranial
osteopaths who purchase lots of American books on the cranial
osteopathy. It’s this author’s opinion, that the total
mind-control of NWO slaves being implemented in the Black
Forest castles, Strasburg, Frankfurt,
Page 214 ....
Berlin, and hundreds of other German sites includes cranial
manipulation. However, in terms of Germany, this remains to
be proven. In America, there is no doubt, for we have the
victims (and photographic proof) to prove it. Osteopathy is not
"politically correct" within Germany’s medical establishment.
Most Germans, who purchase cranial books, are occultists
(usually variations on Theosophy) and not people with medical
or manipulative training. Europeans tend to be much more
specialists in their professions than Americans. They don’t tend
to have as many people/per population practice a particular skill
as America, but the ones who do are often very skilled. (This is
an observation this author has heard frequently during his
world-wide travels, and has also observed for himself.) For
instance, in visiting Switzerland, this author learned that if a
person wants to build a house he will have no option but to
bring in specialists for the different tasks, while in America, it’s
not unusual for people to attempt building their own. This
European approach of encouraging only very skilled specialists
would also apply to cranial manipulation. We would expect a
few very highly technical, skilled skull manipulators, and many
curious entry-level folks.
THE JAPANESE CONNECTION
The ninjitsu people (popularly known as "the ninja" in
America) were historically black magicians who hired out as
assassins, and were feared and hated by all the Japanese people.
They are now being held out as role models for our American
children. The ninja learned how to dissociate pain. They
learned martial arts and the art of stealth. According to the book
The Karate Dojo by Peter Urban, "They were the original
practitioners of the ‘art of [mind-control] programming.’ They
were taught from the cradle that nothing was impossible. Not
knowing that a thing could not be done, they proceeded to do
it." It is possible that the Green Dragon Society of Japan passed
on some of this mind-control training techniques to the German
secret societies that were in cooperation with them prior to and
during W.W. II. In other words, Dr. Mengele, the Nazi Angel
of Death who carried out mind-control experiments for the
Nazi’s (& the Illuminati) during W.W. II may have attempted
to incorporate Chinese, Tibetan, Japanese, Ancient Egyptian
and Hindu mind-control techniques into their mind-control
programming/research.
THE EARLY EUROPEAN OCCULT CONNECTION
Information pertaining to this has been floating around Europe
in certain circles for years. We will touch on some of the
various times and places that we know parts of cranial
manipulation to alter the mind was being done. Over the
centuries skilled horsemen learned that they could tell the
temperament of a horse from the shape of its head. The best
books on horse training would have sections on determining
what your horse’s temperament was based on skull shape. The
celts were big on bone-setting. Wales has continued to preserve
some of this celtic enthusiasm. A rare book The Art of The
Bone-Setter by George Matthews Bennett (London, Tho Murby
publ., 1884) gives an excellent history of bone-setters in
England, Wales and Scotland. It is likely that some of these
men understood some things about how personality could be
affected via bone manipulation in the skull. George Matthews
Bennett was a Freemason and a Druid. He was also a leading
bone-setter in London, Stratford and other places. He was a
descendent of the famous occult Matthews family, which had
practiced bone-setting for two hundred years. His son, who also
did bone-setting, was the last of that line to practice
bone-setting. The skill (professional art) of bone-setting passed
down in families for generations was not the equivalent of
modern osteopathy.
Page 215 ...
Osteopathy had many different ideas and approaches, even
though the two are similar. One of the early english books on
bone-setting was The Compleat Bone-setter by Friar Moulton.
In 1665, the book was enlarged by Robert Turner (an
occultist/astrologer) and printed in England. In 1871, Dr.
Wharton Hood wrote another publication on bone-setting in
England entitled A Treatise on Bone Setting. But most of the
skill of bone-setting in England was passed down as family
secrets within a few bloodlines that practiced it for generations,
such as the Thomases, the Taylors of Lancashire, the Maltby’s
of Nottingham, the Masons of Lincolnshire, the Huttons of
Westmorland (& later of London), the Crowthers of Yorkshire,
and the Matthews of the Midlands. (This list occurs in the book
Medical Fringe & Medical Orthodoxy 1750-1850 edited by
Bynum and Porter, pub. London: Croom Helm Ltd., 1987, p.
170, note 10.) Much about bone-setting in Europe, will remain
secret, because so much was taught orally and shrouded in
mystery. About a dozen British bloodlines passed their trade
secrets down, a number of them were Welch. However, there
were also many itinerant quacks who travelled around billing
themselves as bone-setters.
NINETEENTH CENTURY OCCULT CONNECTION
Bone-setter Richard Hutton gained notoriety in London in the
1800’s when he relieved the long-standing suffering of the
Hon. Spencer Ponsonby. Hugh Owen Thomas, (1848-?) who
was a qualified doctor, used what he knew from coming from a
long traditional line of bone-setters to create modern fracture
theory. His nephew, Sir Robert Jones (1857-1933) who was his
apprentice, was the major ambassador for modern orthopaedic
medical practices. In other words, some of the knowledge of
the bone-setters contributed to modern established medical
knowledge. Charles Waterton, an english naturalist in old
england, wrote in his Wanderings and Essays on Natural
History that every nation in Europe had bone-setters, who were
independent of the surgeons. Throughout Europe, the men and
women who practiced bone-setting learned the skill from others
and as a result of experience. The skill was not a
text-book-learned skill, but an art that was taught via hands-on
training. Many of the bone-setters never formally studied
anatomy, pathology, or surgery. (See The Art of the
Bone-Setter, p. 96.) Hand-in-hand with bone setting came ideas
on the importance of the shape of the skull. In 1695, Balthazar
Bekkar of London wrote, "Physiognomy, that is...the
Observation of a Man’s Shape, must be comprehended under
this sort [occult arts], for this Art foretells things by the Looks,
the Features and Lineaments of the Face, by which the Genius
and Humour of Men are to be discovered." (This comes from
book one of a four book series The World Bewitched; An
Examination of the Common Opinions Concerning Spirits.
London: R. Baldwin, 1695, vol. 1, p.30.)
THE WITCHCRAFT CONNECTION
Throughout the world, people have practiced bone
manipulation. The names for folk bone-setting throughout the
world of course vary from language to language. In Tahiti it
was called "romy" or "rumi". In South America, it was called
"abrazo del ranchero". In Bohemia it was called "napravit." In
Mexico, it’s been called "arreglador de huesos", and in France
"reboutage." The Amish call it "Brauche", and some of their
bone-setters practice folk witchcraft. (This is known from the
author’s own experience as an Amishman.) Bone-setting has
often been associated with folk healing and the occult. Contrary
to what is politically correct today, witchcraft was not a group
of poor innocent women chased by a malicious Christian
society, but was a well-organized body which was a repository
for the occult knowledge of Babylon, Egypt and Rome. Ex-
Page 216 ...
Illuminati members have described (to this author) the ancient
manuscripts of knowledge preserved in secrecy by the
Illuminati down through the ages. The permission of the Grand
Druid Council is needed for some Illuminati books. Illuminati
members are only allowed to see certain manuscripts, if they
are achieving a mastery in that field of secret knowledge. In the
middle ages, knowledge was dispensed through secret trade
guilds, fraternities and bloodlines. The ancient healing/and
harming secrets of the human body were secrets of the fraternal
secret societies, i.e. what is known today as the Illuminati.
Witches could accomplish either a healing or a harmful
manipulation of the body without anyone knowing what had
happened, because their arts were secret techniques that
outsiders couldn’t recognize. Secret medical and psychological
knowledge was hidden by lots of cover mystical claptrap,
which made the real secrets elusive to outsiders. Witches were
accused of witchcraft when the harmful results of what they did
were noticed, but the people had little idea of the mechanics of
what hit them. Some of the trials of witches during the late
middle ages were legitimate grievances, even though the
ancient trial records (by today’s standards) contain no
legitimate evidence of modus operandi. We are not in a position
to judge their trials by our standards of evidence. Throughout
most history, the doctor-priest or the medicine man-shaman
kept his health secrets to himself as occult/arcane /esoteric
knowledge to pass to his chosen successors. Even today, our
modern day equivalents for the medicine man & shamen --our
doctors & priests are still popular careers for transgenerational
pagans. And as this chapter is pointing out, there are still
secrets. The Mystery Religions of Europe studied the human
head and body. One of Jacob Boehme’s disciples portrayed the
hindu chakra points back in 1736 in his Theosophia Practica.
The results of tortures during ancient and medieval times upon
the bodies & skulls of people was also known to a few. A
relationship appears to exist between bone-setting and
witchcraft, in that wherever witchcraft was strongest in
England, one also discovers an abundance of bonesetters. An
advance knowledge of anatomy was needed to devise the
tortures used in Europe by those who were in power. It was not
uncommon historically for doctors & bonesetters to provide
advice for torture devices. For instance, Dr. Guillotin, a french
doctor & Freemason, invented the guillotin. There are plenty of
evidences of occult involvement in the torture of people over
the centuries, (even though it is politically correct to blame it
on Christians). At this point it is safe to say that there was some
overlap between bone-setting, witchcraft, and those who made
an occupation as torturers for the state, but the complete details
are not available. Some families have traditionally been
involved in torture, perhaps at some point those family secrets
will surface. Hands of Glory of hanged men were used as
health charms. Corpses & moss from skulls, were also thought
to have healing powers. Freemason/Druid/ Bone-setter George
Matthews Bennett writes, "In the North of England, the origin
of nearly all the men who are fairly good at Bone-setting can be
traced to the Whitworth surgery, and while, so far as I know,
the Taylors, in their various settlements at Whitworth,
Todmorden, Stockwood, and Oldfield-lane, were the only
qualified surgeons who practiced Bone-setting; amongst the
hills and dales of Lancashire, Yorkshire, and the Lake district,
there were many who did so without being qualified." (The Art
of the Bone-setter, p. 106) Whether these Taylors were any
relation to those Taylors today within the Illuminati, is not
known. Phrenology was very respected during the 19th century.
Queen Victoria consulted the top phrenologist. Interest in
Phrenology led Europeans to research what the functions of the
brain are, & how the brain functions. Phrenologists Johann
Gaspar Spurzheim and scotsman George Combe "realized the
Page 217 ...
potentiality to manipulate and control human behavior" via
their knowledge of the skull and brain. (Cooter, Cultural
Meaning of Popular Science, p. 6) The writings of these men
resulted in phrenological societies and publications springing
up all over the U.S. and Great Britain. Franz Joseph Gall, was
an expert on the anatomy of the brain, having spent his life
studying it. Encyclopedia Britannica says F.J. Gall was a "brain
anatomist of considerable ability". (Ency. Brit., 15th ed., vol.26,
p. 327) In 1800, Franz Joseph Gall, advocated to medical
science that the shape of the skull was a guide to an
individual’s mental faculties and character traits. Based upon
this, other researchers such as Pierre Flourens undertook
experiments on animals to determine more exactly the
functions of the various parts of the brain. Various men
contributed ideas. Leopold Auenbrugger discovered percussion
to determine a fluid level. He applied his discovery of tapping
his father’s casks to gauge the level of fluid content to the body.
Fire In The Minds of Men, by James H. Billington a leading
historian, is an excellent survey of how the French Revolution
and subsequent revolutions were created by a small group of
leading occultists. Utopian socialists, who embraced the occult
ideal of a "revolving back to the Golden Age" helped promote
the idea of phrenology at the important Paris Athenee, where
debates were organized concerning the psychology of
personality, physiognomy, and phrenology. (For those readers
who haven’t kept up with other written works of this author, the
Illuminati when America was discovered believed that they
historically had came from Atlantis, and that a new Atlantis
could be constructed in the new world. The revolution of the
United States was the first war in history called a "revolution",
and it was called a revolution because it and subsequent
revolutions were to revolve us back to the Golden Age of
Atlantis. They named the ocean to reach their new Atlantis, the
Atlantic Ocean.) Charleston, S.C. was a major hub for the
Scottish Rite and for Reformed Judaism, both which were
interlocked and used the Cabala. The main goal of the Cabala is
to create a mind-controlled slave called a golem. The main
principle behind Freemasonry according to Albert Pike, who
was the Supreme Commander of Freemasonry in Charleston,
S.C. has been the cabala. This makes it easier to understand
why Freemasonry has been involved in the creation of
mind-controlled slaves. It also makes it more understandable
why hypnotism (called mesmerism) along with phrenology was
introduced into Charleston, SC about 1830. After the occult
world introduced phrenology coupled with hypnotism to
Charleston, it was also introduced by the Frenchman Charles
Poyen to Rhode Is. Brown University. The entire faculty was so
astonished at the power of hypnotism, that they concluded that
mesmerism was a more important science than phrenology.
Initially, the elite in Charleston were interested in hypnotism
(called mesmerism) combined with phrenology. The craze
spread to the common people, and hypnotism was the subject of
a famous intellectual debate in Charleston in 1843. Phrenology,
which was a science tied to Rosicrucianism, lost favor in the
south, due to the large participation of phrenologists
(Rosicrucians) in the abolition movement. The Abolitionist
movement was created in the U.S. by the Illuminati via the
Rosicrucian groups, as well as Unitarians and Socialists who
were also tied to them. For instance, Rosicrucian/ Phrenologist
William Lloyd Garrison started the Anti-slavery Society in
1832. Three other notable rosicrucian abolitionists are John
Brown, George Lippard, and Abraham Lincoln. John Brown,
besides being a Rosicrucian, revolutionist and abolitionist, was
a practicing phrenologist. He had been trained by Fowler and
Wells, who promoted the Vegetarian City that A. Still visited.
Page 218 ...
Many of the Illuminati and leading European occultists, incl.
men such as Charles Taze Russell (founder of the WT Society)
and Joseph Smith, Jr. (founder of the LDS Mormon church)
were students of phrenology. Interestingly, Joseph Smith, Jr. on
Jan. 5, 1841 had a revelation that phrenology was an occult
science from "the Devil". (Smith’s words are recorded in The
Words of Joseph Smith: The Contemporary Accounts of the
Nauvoo discourses of the Prophet Joseph. Provo, UT: Brigham
Young Univ. Religious Studies Center, 1980, p. 61.) And yet he
continued studying phrenology, and endorsing phrenology to
the "Latter-day Saints" (Mormons). Quite a number of the
Mormon prophets (the top leader) such as Brigham Young,
Wilford Woodruff, and George A. Smith got phrenological
readings done of their skulls. The Mormon church sold
phrenology books and even printed a phrenology magazine in
Salt Lake City for a while, which was entitled The Character
Builder from the 1870’s until into the 1940’s. George
Reynolds, First Presidency secretary and later President of the
LDS Seventies (a group of men like the catholic cardinals)
considered phrenological readings as valid as the patriarchal
blessings that the LDS church gives to its members. Since the
Mormon church is one of the Illuminati fronts carrying out
mind-control, it should come as no surprise that attempts to
control the human mind by manipulation of the shape of the
skull have been attempted. Interestingly, official church interest
in phrenology by the Mormon hierarchy died out during the
time period (1940’s) that mind-control began to be
scientifically carried out by the Illuminati in cooperation with
different government front. Could it be that there was a grain of
powefful truth in phrenology that these people wanted quietly
buried? Swendenborg, the founder of a mystical Masonic Rite,
spent a great deal of time and some of his writing discussing
the skull bones. This author has encountered victims of
trauma-based total mind-control within the modern
Swendenborg Church of New Jerusalem. Occult students of
Swendenborg, including some of the Illuminati, such as some
in the DuPont family, studied his ideas with fervor. (The
DuPonts appear to be connected to at least one cranial
osteopath.) (Because the Church of New Jerusalem does not tell
the public nor its members about Swedenborg being a
Freemason, etc. it would be advantageous to briefly identify to
the reader who he was. Swedenborg wrote, "I live, besides, on
terms of familiarity and friendship with all the bishops of my
country, who are ten in number; as also with the sixteen
senators, and the rest of nobility. The king and queen also, and
the three princes, their sons, show me much favor."
Swedenborg, born to a well-connected elite swedish family,
was a genius who wrote an incredible amount of spiritual
writings that he believed came from alien encounters. His
"alien" material in his Earths in the Universe is blatantly
baloney, but at that time, people had no concept of what they’d
find in outer space. The "aliens" even gave him the wrong
number of planets in our solar system, 9. Swedenborg wrote
that Saturn is "the farthest [planet] from the sun". He was
certain of this and other ideas because of what the aliens had
told him. He also communicated with spirits. Masonic
encyclopedias state that many of his ideas were masonic. In
Masonry Defined (publ. by National Masonic Press, a book
based on 33º Freemason / masonic historian Mackey’s notes),
their article on Emanuel Swedenborg states, "enlightened
Masons will find many masonic ideas in Swedenborg’s
writings." In the Be Wise As Serpents book, this author
documents the interlocking directorates that control the top
level secret societies. The Masonic Rite of Swedenborg with its
8 degrees and two "temples"-which means "sub-rites"- has had
some of the worst satanists as its leadership.) In spite of the
ridicule of the various ideas about determining personality from
the
Page 219 ...
shape of the body and head, Ency. Brit. 15th ed. Vol. 25, p. 497
admits, "Nevertheless, structural differences in the body do
seem to have some significance in pointing to such aspects of
personality as intelligence and emotion." The 18th and 19th
century researchers were onto something, they didn’t manage to
finish the job. The Nazi government, and other governments
have secretly tried to finish that job. Unfortunately, it may be a
long time before we learn exactly how they finished this line of
research. So far, the only recipients of the 20th century research
findings have been a few select people within the occult world.
An interesting story involving personality change due to
changes in the skull and brain was the landmark patient Phineas
Gage, who died in 1861, after an accident caused him to
damage the brain’s ability to make rational decisions and to
process emotions. Recently, new research was performed on
Phineas Gage’s skull to understand better how his brain had
been affected by an accident. (See Science, May 20, 1994, p.
1102) Another example of how the shape of the skull and the
movement of skull bones determines how the brain functions
are the craniectomies that are now being carried out to relieve
infants from mental imbecility due to premature skull sutural
closure and microcephalus. (See The Journal of the American
Medical Association JAMA, Jan. 8, 1992, p. 226.) Further,
researchers into how the brain creates thoughts, who desire to
remain confidential, have come to believe that the ionic
crystalline structure within the cranium’s 5 cranial bone plates:
the occipital bone, the two Parietal bones and the two frontal
skull bones which connect at fontanellas (fissures) called
sutures play an important role in the creation of thoughts. They
believe that the ionic crystalline structures of the skull bones
interact with incoming theta waves from the brain, and a
resonance is created that causes electrons to be generated,
which are then translated via a Fourier-type translation into a
thought. You are probably aware that it is the grey matter that
lies next to the skull that carries out the higher level thinking
that distinguishes humans from animals. These researchers
have stated that they believe that the fontanellas (connections
between the skull plates) allow subtle lateral motions and
non-linear complex vibrations to occur. These vibrations are
part of the higher thinking process. If this is true, it could have
far ranging ramifications. These researchers believe the natural
resonant vibrational frequency of the skull bones (the cranium)
ranges from 840 to 890 MHz in non-herzian waves. This range
was reserved for VHF television, but has now been reserved for
the national cellular telephone network. When the 840 to 890
range was used for television, various neurologists noted that
certain signals related to particular pitches and sounds would
trigger reactions in people. For instance, the NY Times 7/11/91
reported that according to a neurologist an epileptic seizure was
triggered via certain television signals. Cellular phones are now
being used to transmit faxes, computer information such as
modems transmit, and other signals. Illuminati connected
companies of IBM, Motorola, and GE are some of the
companies working with cellular phone technology. The
creation of vibrations via cellular phone signals in the 840 to
890 MHz non-herzian wave range could conceivably implant
thoughts into a victim near the cellular phone. This raises two
questions. First, IS the establishment’s big push to popularize
cellular phone use, even to the point of giving out free cellular
phones, part of Big Brother’s mind-control? Second, since it
appears the brains ability to creatively think is related to the
vibrations that are subtly made in the skull, the question
naturally poses itself--can cranial osteopathy disrupt or alter the
natural abilities of the cranium’s plates to vibrate?
Page 220 ...
THE MODERN AMERICAN OCCULT CONNECTION
In the United States, as in England, there were certain families
who passed their bone-setting skills down as family trade
secrets. The most famous bone-setting families were the Reece
family (in west. Penn., and east. Ohio), the Sweet family (in
Rhode Is., Mass., Conn., & NY), and the Tieszen and Orton
families in South Dakota. The Sweets became orthopedists, the
Tieszen and Orton families went into Chiropractic. The Irish
Quain family were famous anatomists, surgeons, and
physicians. Osteopathy and chiropractic stemmed from the
same occult philosophical roots, but went in different
directions. Both shared the idea that the body has the ability to
maintain good health if allowed to do so, and both emphasized
the manipulation of bones and joints. Both were started about
the same time period in America in about the same geographic
area, by men who had scottish ancestry. A.T. Still (the founder
of osteopathy) and D.D. Palmer both studied magic and
metaphysics. Both attended many of the same spiritist
meetings, for instance both attended the spiritualist meetings at
Clinton, Iowa on a number of occasions. (Gibbons, 1980, p. 13)
The osteopath’s goal was to move bones to improve circulation.
The chiropractor’s primary goal was to move bones to reduce
pressure or the irritation of nerves, with the further goal of
positively helping organs and tissue. A.T. Still & other
osteopaths claimed Daniel D. Palmer visited Still at his house,
but Palmer’s descendants say it’s not true. Early on Still’s two
best assistants were two doctors from Scotland, William Smith
& James Littlejohn. Daniel David Palmer (1845-1913), founder
of chiropractic, was a Freemason & an occultist. His original
practice was to heal people with what he called "magnetic
healing" which was a combination of laying on of hands,
hypnotism and white magic. Of course it was not called white
magic, it was called "magnetic healing" by Palmer. Part of the
magnetism was his own magnetic (hypnotic) personality.
Palmer also knew phrenology and had a keen sense of touch
concerning a person’s head. D.D. Palmer taught phrenology.
D.D. Palmer was a mixture of good and bad traits. He was an
excellent scholar and had good organizational skills for what he
learned. One of his difficult traits was his megalomania. In
1905, at a coroner’s inquiry, Palmer refused to take an oath to
swear the truth "so help me God", because he said that "I don’t
want any help from God." It must have been hard on his pride,
when his own son B.J. Palmer, who had been cruelly raised by
cruel step-mothers, turned Judas and stole from his father both
the honor & money that was due his father. His son Bartlett
Joshua Palmer (1882-1961) worked in a circus as an assistant to
professional circus hypnotists known as Professor Hunt, and
later Professor Herbert L. Flint. Later, with mysterious
connections to the right people, B.J. Palmer, got the money and
the political clout to get started in building a school for
chiropractic. His powerful Davenport radio station, WOC, said
to be the second largest in the U.S., had Ronald Reagan (our
future president) as one of its sports announcers. B.J. Palmer
was connected to the occult world. He liked to encourage the
idea that he was a Christ figure. New Ager Napoleon Hill,
author of Think and Grow Rich (1937) considered Palmer his
mentor. B.J. had prominent Masons and other elite as his
personal guests. Elbert Hubbard, a friend of B.J.’s, was the
person who persuaded John D. Rockefeller’s personal
physician, to get Rockefeller to use chiropractic care. Later in
1963, Nelson Rockefeller would be the important person to get
chiropractic accepted as legal in NY, and then appointed
chiropractor Albert Cera to his Medical Advisory Committee.
Illuminati kingpin California Gov. Edmund Brown appointed
12 chiropractors to regional committees
Page 221 ...
associated with the California Board of Medical Assurance.
Hollywood got into the promotion of chiropractic, with the
1990 film Jacob’s Ladder which was a film exposing the U.S.
military’s use of BZ (a derivative of LSD) in Vietnam to
experimentally try to create aggression via drugs in American
soldiers. It appears that chiropractic occult ties have been
beneficial in its fight for acceptance. The occult world has
worked hard to keep chiropractic within its domain. This is why
you will find Christians exposing the occult connections to
chiropractic such as T.M. Clement’s book A Warning to
Christians About the Origins of Chiropractic. (Moses
Lake:WA, date of printing not known). As the reader will
discover other sciences involving the relationship of the mind,
brain, the body and personality have also been kept in the
domain of the secret societies. Like Palmer, Dr. Andrew Taylor
Still, who founded osteopathy, was interested in phrenology,
hypnotism, spiritism, magic. The reference book 10,000
Famous Freemasons (Vol. 4) outlines his masonic career in
Freemasonry. His writings include such masonic phrases as
"Great architect of the Universe." His grandfather had been
Scotch-Irish. His father was a Methodist Episcopal minister,
who was an abolitionist who fought with John Brown and the
free-state forces in Kansas. Andrew Taylor Still ran for the
legislature of Kansas Territory as a free-state candidate and
won in the Oct. 1857 elections. Later, he married Mary Elvira
Turner, who was from the "burned-over" district in New York.
She had been exposed to abolitionist ideas, phrenology, and
hypnotism (called mesmerism) which were all popular in the
area she grew. Her area of NY was where Spiritism began in
1848. Horace Greeley of the NY Tribune then made these
seances with spirits famous. In 1867, after his children died,
Andrew Taylor Still embraced spiritistism. Still’s beliefs in
spiritism included ideas from Freemason Swendenborg’s
writings. (For details of Andrew Taylor Still’s life refer to the
book Trowbridge, Carol. Andrew Taylor Still. Kirksville, MO:
The Thomas Jefferson Press, 1990.) A.T. Still built osteopathy
on the foundation of teachings of men such as
phrenologist/hypnotists such as Joseph Rodes Buchanan.
Buchanan used hypnosis and manipulation of the head to
radiate the cerebral fluid from the brain to the body, which was
coming close to the basics of cranial osteopathy. How did A.T.
Still come up with these new ideas? A.T. Still was able to study
and conduct experiments on bodies by raiding indian graves for
bodies, which he says in his "Circumstances and Personal
Experiences" he did thousands of experiments on. Certainiy, he
was unusual in having had a boyhood interest in digging up
skeletons. He also read every book on anatomy he could find.
In spite of his preoccupation with digging up skulls of people,
Still seems to have been a decent person. Today, the occult
world dislikes him. Why? In view of the historical facts, and
the historical occult campaign to denigrate who Still was, it
appears Still revealed secrets. Still was interested in scientific
investigation. He proved things as he went along. He was a true
researcher, and contrary to many researchers he was willing to
openly share his knowledge with mankind. Andrew’s two
brothers, Ed and James, were M.D.s. They may well have been
loyal to the occult world, and it is speculated that this may
account for part of their attempts to destroy the work of
Andrew Still. It appears that in spite of Andrew’s own occult
connections, Andrew Still wanted to give the world cranial
osteopathic knowledge that the occult world deemed to be
secrets. Andrew Still joined Freemasonry in Baldwin, KS’s
Palmyra Lodge No. 23. (10,000 Famous Freemasons, Vol. 4, p.
194). He came from a transgeneration occult background. He
did speak and write with the type of terminology that the occult
world uses, although today some of his "occult" writings
Page 222 ...
only appear so because they are taken out of context. Recently,
the Internet has a website with the "Sage Sayings of Still" with
excerpts from a "spiritual diary" he kept. On the other side of
the coin, the supposed sage occult sayings of Still were
renounced by Still himself after he wrote them. He not only
exposed occult secrets that the bonesetters had kept in the
occult families for centuries, he made a point of tossing
occultists out of his school. I believe Andrew Still was one of
those people that the generational occultists could say, "He
grew up and dwellt among us, but he wasn’t one of us." No
wonder the occult world has had a campaign against him after
he died. After Andrew died, his son Charles an excellent
compassionate skillful doctor was to have taken over A.T.
Still’s Kirksville Osteopathic College. Instead, a rich financial
backer, Warren Hamilton, who owned pivotal shares of stock
placed James Still’s grandson into the Osteopathic College’s
president’s chair. The knowledge that Still tried to get to the
world was now stifled. As an example of where things have
progressed the Cranial Academy (the American Academy of
Osteopathy) is now situated in three buildings in Indianapolis
that are identical copies of the Great Pyramid, & use pyramids
for their logo. (By the way one of Dr. A.T. Still’s
great-grandnephews is William Still who wrote the book New
World Order. William Still is descended from the doctor’s
brother Thomas, who was an M.D. William’s father was a U.S.
general who was part of World Order, and although William’s
book was great, when one considers how the NWO order
creates their own opposition and how double-agents are
created, this author has some personal reservations on what is
happening with William. For those who haven’t obtained a
copy of the book, this author recommends it.) Back to
discussing Still’s ideas. Eventually, A.T. Still developed his
own ideas for healing the body without using drugs, or the
dangerous medical practices of his day. In 1874, Dr. Andrew
Taylor Still, devised osteopathy, a medical practice that seeks
to help the body via manipulated of the bones. 16 Osteopathic
Schools have successfully sprung up in the U.S. over the years
to serve the need for osteopath doctors. A few others failed. A
small specialty within the Osteopathic medicine is Cranial
Osteopathy which has the Cranial Academy (formed in 1946),
which is a component of the American Academy of
Osteopathy. The Cranial Academy is headquartered at 1020
Market Tower, Ten West Market St., Indianapolis, IN 46204 in
a building that looks like 3 egyptian pyramids. Osteopathic
students who have taken a Basic Cranial Course approved by
the Academy are eligible to apply to the Cranial Academy to
learn about osteopathy as it applies to the skull. Just recently, in
June 20-23, 1996, they had their annual conference at Walt
Disney World Village, Lake Buena Vista, FL. Walt Disney
World happens to be a major mind-control programming center
and the significance of this was brought out in Chapter 5. The
Cranial Academy, founded by occultist Sutherland in 1946, is
affiliated with the Applied Academy of Osteopathy (this AAO
is a group that is concerned with manipulative work, & also
based in IN). WG Sutherland developed Cranial Osteopathic
concepts. It appears that the occult world were upset enough
with Andrew Still’s revelations, that they planted WG
Sutherland into the new science to bring the science back into
the realm of the occult world. Sutherland (and those that
followed him) was not above spewing out disinformation.
Another leader following Sutherland in the field was another
occultist Fulford, who helped insure that the Theosophists and
Rosicrucians took over the science that A.T. Still had tried to
give the world in a scientific form. Fulford, almost a god to
some of the doctors interested in cranial osteopathy, functions
as a bulwark to prevent most doctors from learning the deeper
arts of manipulation. Only a small inner group
Page 223 ...
are taught the most advanced manipulative methods and
anatomical details. The crucial cranial research work is being
done privately by doctors affiliated with the Rosicrucians and
this research is reported only in their literature for Rosicrucians
only. The American Osteopathy Association helps to keep
things low key by making no reference to the Cranial Academy
in their materials, and only referring to the AAO once. In 1953,
one of the leading Cranial Osteopaths, William G. Sutherland,
an American of scottish descent, formed a foundation called the
Sutherland Cranial Teaching Foundation in Denver, CO to
promote the teaching of Cranial (head or skull) Osteopathy as
developed by Sutherland. The cranial osteopathic work is
taught by the Cranial Academy, but the inner knowledge, the
inner secrets that are needed to successfully use cranial
manipulation for mind-control are not taught by the Cranial
Academy. This is taught privately by doctors who keep their
relationships to each other secret. The inner core leaders (the
top 3) of this small highly proficient group were all based in the
south, and have all died since 1990. They have been replaced
by carefully recruited handpicked successors. There are
occasion groups in other places that do cranial work. Some
research on bioenergy and bone motion was done at the Univ.
of Michigan School of Osteopathy and the Upledger Institute
based in Florida has taught a very mechanical and rudimentary
version of cranial work. These are just side activities. The U.S.
Air Force and Navy provide scholarships which cover full
tuition, books and living expenses for certain applicants to go to
osteopathic college for four years. This has been carried out via
the Director, Washington Office, American Osteopathic
Association, Cafritz Building Suite 1009, 1625 Eye Street,
N.W., Washington, DC 20006. One of the military Cranial
Osteopaths is a Maj. Beverly I. Maliner, and another is David
R. Lemme at the Naples, It. Naval Hospital. There are reports
that this hospital along with other American military sites in
Europe are being used for mind-control. However, that does not
necessarily connect Lemme or Maj. Maliner with government
mind-control. This author knows of no evidence that would
connect them. The military has used civilians to carry out some
of the mind-control on their bases for decades, so they wouldn’t
have to use their own people if they didn’t want to. The military
has conducted secret research into the effects of skull bone
movement, and traumatic skull injuries which are still
classified. One example of many of the type of modern research
done is Susan Ann Bloomfield’s Ph.d. dissertation
"Site-specific changes in bone mass and Alterations in
Calciotrophic Hormones with Electrical Stimulation Exercise in
Individuals with Chronic Spinal Cord Injury." Her research
showed that electrical stimulation of the muscles around spinal
injuries helped the bones grow. The casual researcher will soon
find out that Cranial Osteopathy is a hidden subject. One of the
better books discussing the potential of Cranial Osteopathy and
how it works is a hard-to-get out-of-print book Craniosacral
Osteopathy by Ronald R. McCatty. As this subject is so
important to mind-control, this author availed himself to find a
copy of the book and to study it. Some of the techniques
described in the book will be hard for regular doctors to verify.
If the curious were to use standard medical tests such as X-rays
or MRI (which are too big), they will not get anywhere in
discovering the details of how to manipulate the skull. The
science is much more minute than these tests. An M.D. who
asked the Cranial Academy about cranial literature was told
that their literature is copyrighted to the writers and not
available to other professions. This is an example of how
protective the Cranial
Page 224 ...
Academy is of their knowledge and they aren’t even teaching
the hard core inner secrets! The secret cults continue their iron
grip over the deep secrets of cranial manipulation. They
continue their monopoly over who gets benefitted by cranial
work, as well as who is destroyed by cranial work. In review, a
number of sincere men have tried to develop Cranial
Osteopathy including Dr. Andrew Still in 1874. Interestingly,
as soon as each one of these men began discovering new
techniques informed members of the occult world would take
over their work, and insure that the work was kept within the
confines of the occult world. For instance, Dr. Sutherland’s
experiments revealed to him that Cranial Osteopathy could
influence the way a person thought and their personality. In the
book, With Thinking Fingers The Story of William Gamer
Sutherland by his wife Adah Strand Sutherland, she writes, "It
was Dr. Sutherland’s cherished dream that a day would come
when the benefits to the mentally ill through the cranial
component in osteopathy would be investigated to the
satisfaction of scientific insistence; that it would be approved
and made available institutionally, in the curriculums of
osteopathic colleges as well as in the majority of private
practices." (Sutherland, Adah S. With Thinking Fingers. The
Cranial Academy: Indianapolis, IN., p. 62). However, clever
people in the occult world saw that Cranial Osteopathy could
not only be used to help the mentally ill, but to control the
minds of people. They realized that this valuable information
could not be shared with the world but should confined to the
occult world where its full evil potential could be exploited.
Part of why it was so easy to hi-jack Sutherland’s research is
that he wrote very little. He wrote only two short articles. He
didn’t like to write, he liked to do research and work with
people. Strangely, his wife divorced him, and a Rosicrucian
lady married him. The details of it all have the feel of the occult
world moving in and micromanaging Sutherland’s life in order
to control his research. Two years after Sutherland died in ‘54,
his Osteopathy Cranial Association was already starting to
praise a new age type of "Christ" in its literature. Anne L.
Wales, a Rosicrucian, archived his work, and it is through her
that we have received some of his work. She makes sure that
when Sutherland’s ideas see the light of day, they are steeped in
occult Rosicrucian ideas. This helps insure that sincere
non-occult scientists disregard what appears to be
Rosicrucianism, rather than the research of a doctor. Anne L.
Wales has been more than a Rosicrucian. She was a member of
the Church of Scientology, which is practicing trauma-based
mind-control and which is a recruiting organization for the
OTO and the Process Church which are also both practicing
total mind-control in coordination with the Illuminati. This
author is aware of two separate victims of trauma-based total
mind-control who came out of different Rosicrucian groups. As
their are several groups claiming Rosicrucian philosophy, this
author hasn’t sorted out if there are any Rosicrucian groups
which AREN’T being used as repositories for mind-controlled
slaves. In other words, it appears that all Rosicrucian groups
contain mind-controlled slaves. Rosicrucianism (its various
forms) has long attracted membership from the medical
community, and there is evidence that it even recruits in the
medical, chiropractic and osteopathic schools. The
Rosicrucians, who like to track their history back to the
alchemists, brag about their large numbers of medical
members. AMORC indicates that at least 11% of its members
are doctors. The Rosicrucians also hint about their secret
medical experiments and secret medical knowledge. One
Rosicrucian claim to fame is their mystical theories about the
connections between the mind and the body (particularly the
skull & nervous system). The luxurious Clymer Health Clinic
Page 225 ...
near Philadelphia offers cranial treatments at very modest
prices by their staff of Rosicrucian chiropractors. Rosicrucian
(& high ranking Mason) Swinbourne Clymer, MD, donated the
land and funds for that clinic early this century. Clymer was a
millionaire with eccentric health ideas. He financed the entire
Rosicrucian Philadelphia-based group, too. His writings have
tidbits that show he was an insider. Their headquarters has
pyramids with capstones. Their books mention the Illuminati
with great frequency. It is beyond the scope of this chapter, but
there are connections between theosophy and Rosicrucianism
and the Illuminati. Theosophical groups tie in to the Nazi’s
religious beliefs, and today theosophical-minded young people
are showing an interest in cranial manipulation. In other words,
the interconnections between the occult world begin popping
up when one investigates cranial work. One outspoken Doctor
of Cranial Osteopathy (DO) Donald E. Woods, recently spoke
out in the journal of Cranial Osteopathy entitled The Cranial
Letter against the occultism that clearly controlled his specialty.
He wrote in protest, "Yet, in the past we [cranial osteopaths]
have bordered both on being a cult and on being occult. We
must be neither to be effectively acceptable in health care, and
it can be done since osteopathy, including Cranial Osteopathy,
is based on valid human physiological and anatomical truths.
Where do cult and occult fit in?"....Occultism says you do not
have to pay attention to any of the old rules. Everything goes.
Kick the walls out. Be tolerant of everyone’s behavior....Both
the cult and the occult have the tendency to think that things
outside their sphere of influence are unreasonable. They might
say, "It is necessary that you belong to our group." (The
Cranial Letter, Aug., ‘94, Vol. 47, No. 3, p.9) While this letter
printed in The Cranial Letter helps establish to the reader the
occult world’s influence in cranial osteopathy, the Cranial
Academy may have printed this because the doctor in question
is a multiple and they are possibly helping him separate himself
publicly from the occult. And while the secrecy of cranial
manipulation has been well kept, the Cranial Academy is
considering disbanding itself, and letting the 16 osteopathic
schools teach a more basic form or cranial work, which would
further isolate the secrets for occult’s elect. Osteopathy itself
has been accepted into mainstream medicine and one medical
reference book states, "It is important to note that the
osteopathic system of diagnosis and therapy is used in
conjunction with the standard medical procedures of drug and
surgical therapy." The curriculum at an osteopathic college or
school is almost identical with that offered at the standard
schools. The most popular school is the Chicago College of
Osteopathic Medicine. There are approx. 150 osteopathic
hospitals in the U.S. Most osteopaths are general practitioners
and only 20% of the osteopaths specialize. Of these only a tiny
percentage do Cranial Osteopathy full time. Of the small clique
of DOs (Dr.s of Osteopathy) who do Cranial Osteopathy full
time (Note: there are about 150 DOs nationwide that spend
approx. 100% of their time doing Cranial Osteopathy--which
no. was determined by this author using info provided in the
Member Information Dire ctory of the Cranial Academy.), and
then based upon observations at programming sites and other
criteria there is an inner circle of about 9 doctors who
understand Cranial Osteopathy well enough to use their skills
for the Illuminati in mind control. Recently, there have been a
number of magazine articles, for instance, American Medical
News, June 26, 1995, p. 3 which discusses how osteopathic
medical techniques of manipulation are becoming more
acceptable to mainstream physicians and to the public. The
article mentions that the American Osteopathic Assn. is getting
$6 million for research. Obviously, the American Osteopathic
Page 226 ...
Assn. is politically correct and moving with the stream of
today’s general trend toward new age ideas, and a global
government. Many osteopath doctors specialize. A canadian
government survey of chiropractors, osteopaths, and
naturopaths in Canada revealed that 66% of the Canadian
osteopaths specialized (See Royal Commission on Health
Services Study of Chiropractors, Osteopaths and Naturopaths
in Canada. Ottawa, Can: The Queen’s Printer, 1966, p. 166), a
figure much higher than revealed in a study of American
Osteopaths in A Statistical Study of the Osteopathic Profession,
Dec. 31, 1960, Dept. of Information and Statistics, American
Osteopathic Association, May 1961, p. 2 Table 7. In the
Canadian study, osteopaths reported specializing in headaches,
neurology, cranial work and cranial osteopathy. Their
naturopaths reported specializing in fields including
psycho-therapy, radio wave, electrotherapy, and cranial
correction in mongoloids, spastics and body reconstruction. In
exploring mind-control, it must be born in mind, that the
American CIA was quick to recruit Canadians to help. Some of
the cranial osteopaths themselves appear to be in controlled
trance states, so they may well be under total mind-control
themselves. These people are obviously of celtic (probably
Illuminati) bloodlines.
BONE & SKULL STRUCTURE
Bones are alive and changing. It might be helpful to review
what bones are made of, and how they change and grow, just in
case the reader had some misconceptions such as that bones are
fixed solids that don’t change. Bones within the human body,
esp. the skull give support and protection. Bone is comprised of
"an organic matrix synthesized and deposited by osteoblastic
activity, calcium-phosphate precipitates, and a mineralized
phase of hydroxyapatite, which is primarily composed of
calcium and inorganic phosphate (Robey, 1989). The primary
ingredient of the organic matrix is a collagen in the form of
fibers that are extensively cross-linked. applies to 90% of the
matrix. There several types of collagen, Type 1 predominant.
This are is Numerous noncollagenous proteins have also been
discovered in bone, including some which have been identified
as growth factors. Bone development and turnover is regulated
by various bone cells (see Teltelbaum, 1990). The exact method
the body uses to recreate new bone is too complex to describe
here, but let it suffice that researchers are studying all the
minute complexities of the abilities of the body to produce
bone. Old bone is constantly being absorbed and reproduced
new. BMUs are important to development of new bone. (see
studies like Frost, 1965, & Parfit, 1987). According to the Wall
Street Journal, Feb. 23, 1996, p. Al (in both Eastern & Western
editions) some physicians are remolding lopsided skulls of
infants with unnecessary surgery when the only problem is the
child’s sleep position, and the lopsided skull can be corrected
with a head band rather than surgery. In terms of head shapes,
which can be created by skilled manipulation of the skull
bones, a Vertical Strain Superior is associated with passiveness
and dissociation. This is why some of the cults are either
manipulating people’s heads or recruiting people that have long
faces in their cults. The vertical Strain Inferior is said to be
connected to criminals. The programmers for the NWO have
been intentionally manipulating people’s skull to get
passiveness and dissociativeness. Daniel Whiteside and John
Wesley Grossman did extremely valuable work in statistically
validating the clear connections between 60 behavior traits and
physical structures. The physical shape of the brain is related to
how the brain’s cells are proportioned. This science is called
Structure/ Function. Daniel’s father Robert L. Whiteside was
one of the founders of 3-In-One. Robert wrote
Back to Contents Chapter 8 cont.
 (Chapter 8 Page 2)

Page 227 ...

an amazing book Face Language. The Air Force academy used
it in three of their courses. Prior to encountering Robert’s book,
this author has noticed that the Japanese and Chinese have done
a great deal of research and writing in this area. Our own
language has come to reflect some of our intuitive ideas about
Structure/ Function such as: "He is level-headed." "She is
nosey." "He’s a real high-brow." and "He leads with his chin."
(cf. Face Language, p. xi-xii) Whiteside takes 40 pages to
identify traits that are shown by the eyes. Then he explains
traits that are shown by the mouth area. Then he deals with
overall facial traits and finally profile traits. For instance, a
large difference between one side of the face and the other
indicates how much the individual changes with their mood
change. If the head steadily gets wider as it runs from the
mouth to the ears, then the person has the trait of
acquisitiveness. A person who loves to be precise with words
will develop little lines that fan out from the inner corner of the
eye toward the cheekbone. The 3-In-1 college doesn’t teach
that the face reveals all behavior, but they teach their students
what to expect from people, so that they can communicate
better. Another 3-In-1 publication Advanced ONE BRAIN by
Gordon Stokes and Daniel Whiteside reveals eye modes. NLP
has also been teaching some of these eye modes to detect what
a person is thinking. Another publication provides charts
(designed by William Mariboe) which explain different traits
and how they exhibit themselves physically. For instance if the
eyes are extremely wide apart, the person will either see an
open viewpoint as valuable or feel inadequate. The chart then
charts out how the trait (of emotional tolerance) will exhibit
itself under different circumstances. For instance, in doing a job
they tend to loose track of time. Perhaps the value of all this in
not clear in the reader’s mind. In terms of mind-control, if you
know what physical structures will give you a particular trait,
you can enhance what you want by skillful manipulation of the
skull bones. The key to manipulating the skull lies in the fact
that the skull bones actually float on the Cerebrospinal fluid,
while the brain floats in the fluid. In the booklet The Cranial
Bowl by William G. Sutherland (1984), he writes about what he
calls "the moulding technic". The moulding technic is the
reshaping of the skull. He writes on page 28, "The moulding
technic is especially adaptable to children, and even to the adult
well along in the later period of life." In the booklet, he goes
into details about the cerebrospinal fluid.
CEREBROSPINAL FLUID
The Cerebrum (brain) and the spine float in a fluid that
surrounds them. This fluid is called cerebrospinal fluid and is
referred to on page 1050 of the massive anatomical reference
book Gray’s Anatomy 36th Brit. ed. (edited by Williams &
Warwick, printed by W.B. Saunder Co., for Churchill
Livingstone). In 1920 and 1938, Weed published research on
the circulation of the cerebrospinal fluid. As just one example
of many of the roles that the CS Fluid plays within the brain,
that has been discovered is that the carotid artery has a branch
that passes upward through a water bed of cerebro-spinal fluid.
The CS Fluid follows that internal carotid artery to the choroid
plexus, so that it can perform the function of interchange with
the arterial blood. The CS Fluid is "in command" of this
exchange. (I mention this because see how this ties in with the
5th brain?) In fact, a Fourth Ventricle Compression is the most
valuable and powerful CSF technique for helping people. (It is
mentioned simply to show people the effect that CSF has
Page 228 ...
on some very important brain areas.) Because the brain and
spinal cord float in a fluid, a brain weighing 1,500 grams in the
air, only weighs 50 gr. in cerebrospinal fluid which distributes
the brain weight more evenly. The fluid itself is clear, slightly
alkaline with a specific gravity of 1007. About l00 mls of CS
Fluid will exist to float the brain and spinal cord. The spine
rests in this cerebrospinal fluid, which has waves that
approximate the breathing rhythm of the body. 50% of the
cerebrospinal fluid is manufactured in one part of the head
(choroid plexuses), and spends its time fluxuating. It is
absorbed and replenished, as other body elements are. The
plexuses which are located in the lateral recesses of the fourth
ventricle also put cerebrospinal fluid into the subarachnoid
space, and this supplies the cerebello-medullary cistern and the
pontine cistern with fluid. The cerebrospinal fluid makes up a
single fluxuating system of fluid within which the central
nervous system/brain operate. As the brain coils and uncoils,
waves of motion (energy) fluctuate in a spiral pattern through
the cerebrospinal fluid in the skull, down the spinal column and
up again, so that there is motion from front to back in the head
and also laterally. A the human brain develops the CSF seems
to appear at the earliest stages. The brain goes through stages of
development as the brain-spinal cord divide. The forebrain
develops into several items, the midbrain into two parts, and the
hindbrain into the first three brains. The cerebrospinal fluid is
manufactured by the body, fluctuates in a single Head-spinal
cord system and then is absorbed and replenished by the body.
The fluid does not circulate like blood. The fluid and the skull
bones continue to fluctuate even if a person holds his breath. As
long as the CSF oscillates like it should, things are fine, but if
something occurs to pervert the rhythms, the health of the
person goes down. Loss of sleep can influence the rhythms
adversely. If the occipital motion is restricted schizophrenia can
result. When severe spheno-basilar symphysis locking occurs,
there is frequently manic-depression. Most people are totally
unaware that these mental problems may be resulting from a
CSF problem. Very little information is let out about the
cerebrospinal fluid. Very little is released to the public about
how over a period of time Cranial Osteopaths can develop the
manipulative skill to control and change the fluctuations of
these fluids. Oniy a few top people are allowed in on the
secrets, and those people are handpicked members of the occult
world. Some of the top Cranial Doctors are under
Monarch-type mind control themselves. The osteopathic
libraries are staffed with people loyal to keeping cranial
osteopathic secrets within the occult world. Could other doctors
teach themselves? The ability to manipulate the cerebral-spinal
fluid is an art that has taken years to develop, and for
practitioners to learn. As stated, the tests that doctors rely on
such as x-rays and MRIs are to big and clumsy to be of any
value in this area. The doctors would have to ‘‘reinvent the
wheel and then the automobile’’ if they wanted to self-teach
themselves. It often takes two to three years of study in this
area, before a doctor is able to feel the movement of the fluid.
The cranial bones have sutures between them, that allow a
skilled person to move them. The sutures have been proven to
move as much as 1/20 of an inch. The trained finger can
perceive the natural motion of these sutures even if the natural
motions are only 1/40 of an inch. In McCatty’s excellent book
Essentials of Cranio-Sacral Osteopathy, (Bath, Eng.: Ashgrove
Press) p. 3 he states, "Contrary to some schools of thought, all
circumstances being normal, the cranial sutures (or joints of the
head) do not fuse--regardless of age, race, sex, or geographic
location. They are perpetually motile, influencing the dynamics
of fluid exchange and mebraneous tension within the
cramo-sacral mechanism."
Page 229 ...
When early cranial osteopaths like Sutherland looked at the
skull and its membranes and cartilage they realized that the 18
human bones that make up the head were actually designed to
articulate (move slightly). In fact, researchers have discovered
the cranium has 3 distinct oscillations. (Magoun, Harold Ives,
D.O. Osteopathy in the Cranial Field, p.322). Maud Nerman,
D.O. presented the outline of an interesting lecture and lab class
that she gave in 1992, entitled "Visualizing the brain under our
hands" in which she taught the techniques for feeling the bones
of the brain move with CS Fluid fluxuations, as well as sensing
what it was doing internally. Coordinating the movement of the
skull bones with the movement of the CS Fluid was called
"directing the tide" by W.G. Sutherland. His Journal of the
Osteopathic Cranial Assoc. reported successes doing this.
Ronald McCatty teaches that "some heads are less pliant than
other". The practitioner will rest his trained hands on the head,
wait, and allow the cranial motion to teach the cranial osteopath
what is happening or needs to happen. The client will usually
be laying down, and the doctor will be relaxed and focused.
The motion of the CS Fluid is called the Cranial Rhythmic
Impulse (CR1). It will pulse about 10-14 times/mm. in normal
adults and 12-16 times/mm. in children. When a person is
frightened the CR1 can stop for up to 20 seconds. (The mind is
literally frozen.) Tranquilizers will slow the CR1 rate down, as
well as poor health. For someone who has been traumatized,
such as with electroshock, the very mention of the traumatic
event, will cause the CR1 to temporarily stop. The cranial
osteopath does not really force any bones, but rather gently
encourages a skull bone in the direction it should go. Lightness
of touch is a necessity. An example of the health benefits of the
trained osteopath is given by McCatty, "That kink in the
straight sinus can be, and often is, one of the primary causes of
epilepsy and internal hydrocephalus..." By treating the kink the
osteopath takes care of the problem, where the standard method
is often to give the subject strong drugs. To give an example of
how the CS Fluid (CSF) can relate to our state of mind,
consider the following by McCatty, "And again, change of
direction of C.S.F. from anterior-posterior to lateral is of
paramount importance in the sleep-wake phenomenon. When
you are standing there is parallel action of C.S.F. flow. When
you lie down with your head on a pillow this alters, you
impinge on one or other temporal bone, you decelerate C.S.F.
activity. You, as it were, slow down the pendulum. You inhibit
parallel action. By inhibiting this pendulum you automatically
produce an anteroposterior swing which is parasympathetic;
that is to say, the parts of the automatic nervous system that
slow down the action of the heart when the body is not under
stress, in order to conserve bodily energy." This author thought
it was exciting to understand better how the mind/body relaxes
and slows down when we lay our heads down.
TRANSCENDENTAL MEDITATION (TM) & the HINDU
CONNECTION
Years ago, back in 1974, this author was a West Point cadet
who was watching the U.S. Army introduce TM into the
academy. It was presented as a scientific technique, and many
officers, some friends and other cadets availed themselves of
the chance to train themselves in TM’s mystical method of
training. A fellow cadet who was already trained in martial arts
quickly learned the techniques. After initially maintaining a
safe distance, this author decided to investigate TM after I got
out of the military. The U.S. government gave substantial
grants to get TM introduced into this country. Fortunately,
Christians didn’t sleep long, and exposed that TM is Hinduism.
Everyone that is taught TM is initiated into it by the TM
instructor singing a puja (worship) song in Sanskrit which is a
hindu devotional song
Page 230 ...
while incense and candles burn. Until the Christians exposed
this, our national government went blithely along in promoting
Hinduism into our public schools. For instance, the Dept. of
Health, Education, & Welfare gave a $21,540 grant for 150
high school teachers to learn TM. TM has grown to be a
powerful organization, with many organizations set up attached
to it. It has its international headquarters at Hotel Sonnenberg in
the Swiss village of Seelisberg. When I investigated TM back
in 1975, this TM instructor who was friends of mine, talked
about her experience at Seelisberg. From the conversation with
her it was obvious that people had had to surrender their will to
the organization to go to Seelisberg, and some mind altering
experiences had taken place there. She participated in the
Siddhi program to be able to dematerialize, walk through walls
and levitate. But the program clearly had emotionally disturbed
her and others who had been in it. Once a person is involved in
the higher levels of TM, you don’t just walk away from this
cult. From my personal observations, I discovered that TM is
involved in some types of mind-manipulation, and that the
organization is not above using deceit on unsuspecting people.
What then becomes doubly interesting is that after observing
these things, I learned that TM have a large interest in the
cranial osteopathic techniques which can alter the mind and
personality of a person. For instance, this author has obtained a
list of TM instructors in Santa Monica, CA area who are also
Doctors of Cranial Osteopathy. (But bear in mind, this whole
thing is bigger than labels, when people are interested in the
occult they study eclectically.) These TM Cranial Osteopaths
are concentrated where TM has a secret MUM Mountain, CA
training site. There are cranial doctors in the nearby towns of
Aptos, Capitola, Cupertino, Hollister, Los Gatos, Salinas, Santa
Cruz, Saratoga and Watsonville. It’s boggles the mind that 12
cranial doctors are needed for the rural area near MUM
Mountain, while L.A. only has 10. Concentrations of cranial
doctors occur in close proximity to TM centers, particularly
around the Maharishi University in Fairfield, 10 as well as the
secret MUM Mountain training center. Other cranial DOs who
are part of TM are scattered about the United States.
Another observation which I made, was that some of the people
that got really big into TM are still searching for something to
fill the voids and needs of their life. TM didn’t turn out to be as
big of an answer as they expected. TM is not the final answer.
However, the Maharishi who brought TM to America has a
college in Fairfield, Iowa (the Maharishi International
University) and 20 North American "heavenly communities"
operating in the quest to create a heaven on earth. The
Maharishi International University has been used for medical
experimentation on people. The close connections between the
leadership of TM and the Illuminati leadership suggests that
TM is being used as another haven for the NWO’s
mind-control to be perpetrated on unsuspecting victims. There
are bone-setters in India also. Perhaps the Maharishi got his
original interest in the potential for mind-control via skull
manipulation in India. Wherever the interest came from, it is
evident that TM in America is involved in skull manipulation
for its mind-control results.
The 3-in-One school Connection.
If one wants to surrender oneself to a cult, and allow one’s
mind to be control, in order to learn, the 3-in-1 school will be
happy to teach you about what others would call phrenology
and manipulation of the skull to control thinking. The school
has a number of courses. They do not call their principles
phrenology. Nor do they call their instruction mind-control.
They identify to the student areas of the head and what type of
thinking
Page 231 ...
that area of the head is involved with. They also provide
information so that their students can evaluate how people will
act based on the shape of their heads and how that shape will
interact with other shapes. The school is located at 2001 West
Magnolia Blvd., Burbank, CA 91506, ph. no. 818-841-4786.
They teach Ericksonian Hypnosis (good for programmers to
know), Bodywork (incl. cranial osteopathy, which is good for
programmers to know), and they teach NLP, Mind-controlled
relationships (along with scripts), Mind-controlled adolescent
problems, and a pantheistic religious philosophy/religion.
When the 3-in-1 school got started they were teaching
muscle-testing and other important skills to their students (who
can become "facilitators" in teaching others). The
muscle-manipulation they have taught is extremely gentle and
way beyond what the chiropractors knew. The school in
California began about 10 years ago and then a few years later
they began to tighten their hold on all their graduates and their
students. The school has been drawing students from Europe,
Japan, China, Russia, and South America (incl. Brazil). They
have moved more and more toward being an occult cult or
perhaps an Illuminati front. When given information that their
muscle techniques could be used to help multiples, they have
made it clear (according to one school administrator) that they
are not interested in helping multiple personalities. One school
administrator named Gordon Stokes said, "We’re off in another
direction." In fact, Gordon Stokes is the founder of 3-In-1.
(Technically, a co-founder, Daniel Whiteside and Candace
Callaway helped. Some speculate that the Three-in-One name
refers to this triumvirate, and perhaps to their relationship
together.) Gordon Stokes has been reported to be a member of
the BOTA which is an international Mystery School of the
Hierarchy. BOTA stands for Builders of the Adytum. It is a
Qabalistic-Hermetic Order of adepts founded in the 1920s by
Dr. Paul Foster Case reportedly on direction by the hierarchy.
The BOTA teaches higher states of consciousness to its adepts.
It is located at 5105 No. Figueroa St., Los Angeles, CA 90042.
Daniel Whiteside’s parents are deeply involved in personology.
And Candace Calloway’s mother, their book keeper, has also
been a major figure at the 3-in-1 school. This 3-in-1 school in
Burbank seems to be a finishing school for Illuminati
programmers. The school ridicules people who want to
examine their life or have a conscience. Christianity is
considered to be an obnoxious tyrannical religion by the school.
The information that they teach would be very helpful for
mind-control programmers, and their occult philosophy would
scare off moral people from participating. The 3-In-1 research
has been geared into how the brain works. Their research shows
that if a person has more brain cells in a particular region of the
brain, they are more developed in that intellectual area. For
instance, if the Action-based-on-feeling area (the parietal lobe)
has lots of cells, the person will be more active than thoughtful.
If the person has more cells in the brain’s
Conscious-associational thinking area (frontal lobes) they will
think more than act. They call their system based upon this
research comparative cell proportion. There were many ancient
works that noticed personality traits in relationship to head
shapes. Three-In-One article "The Background of
Structure/Function" states, "You can read about the basis of
Structure/Function in the Hebrew CABALA’S book of
ZOHAR (which is literally Aristotle’s PHYSIOGNOMONICA)
as well as in the writings of Maimonides and those of almost
every famous Arabian philosopher during Medieval times."
(Stokes, Daniel. The Background of Structure/Function, 1991,
p. 2) The Cranial Academy’s The Cranial Letter also picked up
on the connection between the Cabala and cranial manipulation.
Page 232 ...
A class on the "Cabala and Osteopathy" is advertized in the
May ’95 issue, p. 9. Until Freud captured the interest of
students of the mind, phrenology was psychology. Phrenology
studied what could be measured, Freud got people looking for
the hidden. In 1938, Dr. Edward Vincent Jones improved upon
Phrenology and classic Physiognomy and developed
Personology. His system was an instant hit and he was given
the go ahead and conduct research on inmates at San Quentin
Prison, and what is now LA’s giant USC County Hospital.
Interestingly, it was not long after Jones’ research there, that
Cisco Wheeler’s father (trained as a programmer) was assigned
by the Illuminati to organize covens in the San Quentin Prison.
The Whitesides became disciples of Jones research and went on
to statistically validate his system. One of their best students
then was Gordon Stokes of Sacramento, who then moved to
San Francisco to be better trained by the Whitesides. As
mentioned, sixty traits have been validated statistically. By
looking at the skull and head, the skin, the body tone, the eyes,
and other areas, the practitioners of Structure/Function can
accurately tell a person’s personality. Because this type of
information has been in the possession of caballists, it is not
surprising that the average person is ignorant of all this.
However, the potential for good or evil with this knowledge is
tremendous. They also used Applied Kinesiology to defuse
emotional stress. For this work they divide the brain into the
dominant side (the left), and the alternate side (the right). Then
each of these hemispheres is again divided between the fore
and back brains for defusion. Applied Kinesiology is used to
gain information about a trauma, and the defusion is used to
release any negative emotional stress around an incident. (This
also possibly could be used to dilute the emotional impact of
some assignment done by a slave.) In the first 3-In-1 newsletter
of 1995, pg. 1, they write, "Self-image is the key to good
learning performance. What ‘magic’ do we use to help slow
learners and people labeled as ‘learning disabled’ change for
the better so dramatically." This is just one minor example, of
how these groups like to reframe what they do in occult terms.
The mind-control programmers need only have someone skilled
in the manipulation of the cranial bones and the skull bones and
they can with repeated delicate precision reshape a person’s
skull and also his brain’s shape, thus manipulating the
personality & looks. Photos of Marilyn Monroe (Erma Jean)
during her life strongly suggest that type of cranial
manipulation was done to her for mind-control purposes. The
occult world has maintained a dogged resolve to keep the
deeper cranial knowledge and skills secret. Dr. Sutherland’s
wife wrote his story With Thinking Fingers. She states on pg.
62, "It was Dr. Sutherland’s cherished dream that a day would
come when the benefits to the mentally ill through the cranial
component in osteopathy would be investigated..." If that was
his dream, it is being hijacked today by those who see it as a
tool for power over their fellow men.
2. GENETIC ENGINEERING
A great deal of secret experimentation has gone on in
underground installations with genetics. This author has had the
privilege of debriefing someone who worked at the Area 51
underground installation. He was murdered after having had
several long interviews with this author. Truth is stranger than
fiction. It goes without saying that the Illuminati has gathered
up every hair-brained idea for controlling and manipulating the
human race. That doesn’t mean everyone of them has been
attempted, but they have the means to carry out very bizarre
experiments in their underground facilities, such as the ones at
Area 51. There is no question that they have tried to augment
Page 233 ...
natural human features and replace natural human parts. Who
knows what weird transgenetic or cybernetic beings have been
created? This author knows that they have been successful in
some of their work at reshaping humans. This author has
accumulated a great deal of information on the underground
installations from eyewitnesses, but there is no way of knowing
what is accurate and what is disinformation. However, a few
details are definite. These underground installations are
massive and they involve genetic manipulation to create new
species or breed special types of people. In the Vol. 2 book, we
discussed the Aquaman subspecies that the NWO has created
with gills and special skin. These people look like normal
people unless observed closely. They had extra genetic material
inserted in the genetic material that created them. They are
called Transgenic humans because they still closely resemble
other people. In order for transgenetic humans to pass their new
added features to the next generation they need to mate with
other similar transgenetic humans. However, the NWO has
been secretly creating Chimeras. Chimeras is the widely used
name for beast-men. This research is generally not for the
public to see but is done in some of the underground facilities
listed in Appendix 2. An example would be a creature that was
half human and half some other beast. On a BBC TV show on
Oct. and Nov. 1988, the british showed the result of a gorilla
being artificially inseminated with a human sperm. The
experiment was done by british researchers working for the
government and the result ended in a child looking remarkably
like a normal person. However, the common people who
viewed it were outraged. Most people are not really excited
about scientists playing God and destroying the human race by
genetic tampering. Of course the scientists who do these
genetic games have lots of excuses and rationales, many of
which have been put into print, to justify their research. People
are being bred for specific purposes by the Illuminati, just like
this author bred dairy cows. Parents with certain desired
features are obtained. (In fact, the Nazi’s secret superdog
Lowenhertz Dogo Argentino - which looks like a race of
weight-lifting dogs, and the secret 100 yr. old Paraguayan
Nueva Germania colony of special bred Aryans are still in
existence.) The NY Times had an article on 9/17/92 where a
Washington psychiatrist Dr. Peter Breggin accused the federal
government of a genetic "violence initiative" in which the
government was involved with genetic research as it relates to
crime and violence. Dr. Susan Solomon, is one of the
government’s leaders involved in researching violence.
However, from what this author can gather, the government’s
research is far more reaching that the NY Times’ article even
begins to imply. By genetic breeding and manipulation, the
Illuminati are trying to strengthen certain mental features.
Considering that this has already been done for centuries by
mankind to other species, for instance, when mankind
domesticated the horse, the dog, the cat, the lama, the chicken,
then it is no secret that a docile servile slave class of humans
can be created. The primary goal of this Illuminati breeding is
to create a class of people who can work together with others
(herd instinct), and who will take orders willingly. Independent
thinking and intelligence are not wanted. Educational goals and
a world-wide educational system that can accommodate these
types of workers is being created world-wide to deal with the
eventual working-class- drones that the Illuminati want to
create. The creation of this educational system at this present
time has four goals, 1. to develop a group mindset, 2. to have
education carried out by the multinational corporations, 3. to
have students educated on the premise that truth is relative, 4.
to teach compliance. Already the public schools in America are
Page 234 ...
gearing up for the government to dictate what occupations
young students can study for. In other words, our educational
system is being set up for mind-control, and this is to
eventually work hand-in-hand with worker slaves that have the
genetics needed to be good compliant stupid slaves. There have
also been studies of intelligence such as the five volume
Genetic Studies of Genius started by L.M. Terman in 1925,
(pub. by Univ. of Stanford Press). The World Order has
specific and successful methods to create a class of technical
people. At this point, people whose thinking abilities have been
created by the monitoring/ manipulating of their genetics is a
small but increasing number. Genetic control of breeding is
unfortunately where the programmers are headed. This is not
happening for the genetic betterment of the human species, this
is for the perverted lusts of these demon-possessed
megalomaniacs who think they deserve to rule with a sadistic
iron fist. Those who mistakingly think the mind- control
programmers are trying to improve the human race, need to get
to know the programmers better. (See Appendix A for
biographical information on some of the programmers.) Those
poor gullible naive people who think that when the global
masters visibly introduce the New World Order that the NWO
will be tolerable if they can simply keep their noses clean, not
fight back, and do their jobs, are sadly mistaken. They do not
know the dark - sinister side to these global masters. As one
man very close to the center of power said to a common man
about the men who rule the world, "If you stepped on an ant,
you would have more conscience than the global elite have in
manufacturing wars and killing millions of people. They want
power and they intend to amass total power no matter what the
cost."
• Another area of ILLUMINATI DECEPTION & CONTROL--
Ionizing radiation used in conjunction with chemicals to
manipulate the genetics of the mind; or say this another way:
USING RADIATION & CHEMICALS TO CHANGE
GENETICS associated WITH THINKING.
When a retired high-ranking military man first told this author
that radiation research had to do with mind-control, my reaction
was probably like most people’s, puzzlement. I thought that
radiation was quite lethal and that genetic research with
radiation was to protect us from some kind of atomic attack.
Wrong. That is a nice cover story.
Since that retired colonel (who may not have long to live)
talked to me, others have said similar things. Like many things
that the World Order does, if we don’t have a frame of
reference of what is going on, we can live around what they are
doing day in and day out and never see all the clues as to what
is going on under our noses.
One trauma-based mind-controlled slave (Chris DeNicola)
spied on the files of the doctor who did radiation experiments
on her. She saw the following radiation file headings, & their
codes: Canker Sore (D-7040), Laser Documentation (D-7000),
Nautical Science (D-1015), Pediatric Radionthology (L-6542)
[One idea is that this file might pertain to child alters.],
Penetrating Wave Activity, Radiation Experimentation
(L-6540), Radioactive Distortions, Radioactive Material
Contamination, Radioactive verification, Radioactive Waves,
Radionthology, Electrolite Prodigies Experiments (654-011),
Laser Light Distortions experiments (654-012), & Laserlight
Technology experiments (101-015). One reason, that this
author is providing the code numbers of these files, is that
memories of slaves who are involved in these experiments or
projects often are internally coded with these file codes. The
date the experiment was done will also be added as part of the
code.
When this author researched their genetic research, I was
utterly amazed at how many institutions world-wide are
carrying out deep research into genetics--much of which will
contribute to the enslavement and mind-control of the human
race. Just a sampling of
Page 235 ...
countless labs working hard on this mind- control related
genetic research include Brookhaven National Labs. Upton,
NY; John Hopkins Univ., Baltimore, MD; Institut fur Genetik,
the Free University of Berlin, Germany; Institute of Hygiene &
Epidemiology, Czech.; Radiation Genetic Lab & Chemical
Mutagenesis, State Univ. Of Leiden, Sylvius Labs, Leiden, The
Netherlands; MIT, Cambridge, MA; Gesellschaft für Strahlen
und Umweltforschung, Munich, Germany; National Inst. of
Environmental Health Sciences Research Triangle Park, NC;
Sandoz Labs in Basle, Switzerland; Biology Division, Oak
Ridge National Lab, Oak Ridge, TN; Roswell Underground
Labs, NM; Stanford Research Institute, Menlo Park, CA; Shell
Labs, Kent, England; University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI;
the Zentrallabor für Mutagenitätsprüfung der Deutschen
Forschungsgemeinshaft, Freiburg, Germany. This is just a tiny
sampling of the enormous world wide research devoted to
genetics that pertain to mind-control. While there are numerous
surnames among the genetic researchers, because this author
knows as a fact that some of these researchers are Illuminati, it
doesn’t quiet one’s curiosity to see the better known Illuminati
surnames such as Dupont, Hersey, Fox, Frey, Jung, Li,
Paterson, Stuart, Sinclair, Sutherland, and Russell appearing
among the genetic researchers doing research that pertains to
mind-control. Obviously, this author can’t give all the ways
they have -figured out to use radiation, along with chemicals
and genetics to control the human race. I will try to give you a
peek in the window. The real deep & dangerous information is
of course highly classified material and protected by their
mind-control of those scientists who work for them. When I say
mind-control, that includes such methods as blackmail and
threats of assassination. There is a type of radiation called
ionizing radiation-that means it is radiation that gives off
electrons (thus producing ions). There are many different types
of ionizing radiation. Some go right through the body, some
damage the cells, but the body repairs itself, some causes
genetic changes, and some simply hits your cells like a sledge
hammer & kills them. The ionizing radiation that changes
genetics has been the focus of an incredibly enormous amount
of (mostly secret) research. Genes are instructions that tell
non-life material how to organize itself into something living.
A gene consists of genetic material called DNA and RNA.
Genes also provide instructions for how something is to
develop. As a person or animal develops, the genes interact
with the environment to create what the person or animal is
like. For instance, different breeds of dogs when born are more
similar, than after they grow up. Different breeds of dogs have
been bred for different genetic traits, and as different breeds
grow up, their genes continually interact with the environment
to create the adult dog. So full genetic expression can take a
life-time. The link between genetics and behavior can be seen
in this quote from the Quarterly Review of Biology (art. by T.C.
Schneirla, 1966, p. 283), "Behavioral ontogenesis is the
backbone of comparative psychology. Shortcomings in its
study inevitably handicap other lines of investigation from
behavioral evolution and psychogenetics to the study of
individual and group behavior." Genetic psychology has
revealed that the genes program in methods for an organism to
adjust to their environment. So genetic instruction is, for
instance, more than just the instruction "be smart, be
aggressive, be tall" but it is tailoring the way a person’s
develops to deal with its environment. In other words,
behaviors are programmed into a person via their genes
(genetic instructions) to provide mechanisms for quick,
dynamic adaptions to changing circumstances. These
mechanisms (created by genetic codes) may even have the
person (or animal) reverse their behavior for purposes of
survival.

Page 236 ...

Click here for picture

Within the human brain (also all mammal brains) all the
neurons are believed to be generated before birth with the
exception of the following cells: granule cells of the olfactory
bulb, fascia dentala granule cells in the hippocampus, the
granule cells of the cerebellar cortex, and the granule cells of
rhombic lip in the brainstem. Its the brainstem cells that the
Illuminati manipulate through brain stem scarring to produce
photographic memories for their scientists and computer
programmers. The germinal cells create neurons in the germinal
zone. Brain cells with a common function develop from a
common lineage although from different sites. After a new
neuron develops in the germinal zone, they migrate to whatever
location they are to live in. The complicated process of how a
neuron discovers where to go (migrate to in the brain) has been
not been discovered according to what this author has read.
When neurons establish themselves they deal with certain
neurotransmitters, that establish communication between them
and other neurons. Researchers have discovered that neurons
can change their own make up to take different
neurotransmitters if they decide their "environment" in the
brain needs it. They also grow their dentrite connections
depending on what type of connections are needed for that
particular brain to function. For instance, a piano player will
develop dentrite connections to be able to play well. These
discoveries show once again that even on the cellular level,
genetic instructions are complex and designed to give
flexibility and adaptability of the cell to the situation for the
cell. Genetic programming begins at the cellular level. There is
a cellular consciousness besides the consciousness that we
think about. DNA structures which are inherited affect the
cellular consciousness. Body memories are contained within
the physiological structure. The first brain and the body work
off a stimulus-response recording mechanism. Body memory
and programming are stored at this level. This is an area of the
brain that is always on. However, its view or perception of
events is not an exact copy of what other higher brains are
thinking. Your conscious mind doesn’t remember how the
stairs and the room are arranged, but in the dark, you primal
part of your mind helps guide your steps. Various drugs and
chemicals have been identified that influence particular
learning sequences in the mind, such as imprinting. For
instance, hexamethonium chloride antagomzes the nicotinic
actions of acetylcholine on the ganglia, or in other words,
acetylcholine will depolarize the ganglia but is prevented by the
hexamethonium. The overall result is that impulses that the
sympathetic ganglia would transmit are blocked. This is just
one example of countless examples of how a specific chemical
can affect a specific brain action. There is a branch of genetic
research called "developmental social behavior genetics" which
deals with how genetics program in social behaviors of animals
and people. For instance, these geneticists study how genes
create aggression, courtship, territorial behaviors, behaviors
involving mothers and
Page 237 ...
fathers, dominance (peeking order) behaviors, sexual behaviors,
attraction behaviors, recognition behaviors, etc. Men are very
much controlled by the sexual lusts, power lusts, and aggressive
behaviors. Can the reader see how genetic manipulation of
these genetic based behaviors could radically change the
potential behavior of a person. A fox’s genes cause him to react
differently than a rabbit’s genes. Having a rabbit grow up in a
fox home is not going to change the genetic instructions. (The
Bible even says, Can a leopard change it’s spots?) But the
World Order has figured out how to change those instructions.
Genetic researchers had to begin sorting out behaviors, and
sorting out genes that affected them. For instance, genes create
a person’s (or animal) reproductive "instincts". These
instructions include instructions on fighting, nest building,
mating, and care of their offspring. These genetic instructions
are different for different people and different animals.
Researchers into imprinting have discovered that IF a set of
animals (or people) is prevented from learning a particular
imprint, and IF that set of animals breed, THEN they pass on a
lack of ability to receive that imprint. In other words,
genetically we learn from generation to generation. Let’s say
that we prevent men from naturally imprinting a sexual desire
for women as they grow up. If we mate those men to women,
the offspring will show a reduced ability to be heterosexual.
Males seem to develop their sexuality, but females seem to
react more on the basis of genetically present "releasers".
Genetic researchers have gone in and identified what people’s
behavioral instructions specifically are, and how to change
them. The instructions are written in DNA, and manipulation of
DNA can change those instructions. When I researched their
genetic research, I found that they have developed maps for
how to change genetic material to change those instructions
concerning behavior. The maps for changing human genes
related to behavior are classified, but an example of one that
isn’t is found in the book The Genetics of Behavior (ed.
Ehrman & Parsons. Sinauer Assoc., Inc. publ.: Sunderland,
Mass, 1976, chapter 8 figure 4.). This map shows 3 sites in a
HK gene that are intentionally mutated by the scientists in order
to change the way a particular fly sings its mating call. The
specific changes in how the fly sings its new mating call (after
the genetic code is changed by geneticists) are even graphed
out in a recording graph in another book Developmental
Behavior Genetics: Neural, Biometrical, and Evolutionary
Approaches (ed. by Hahn et. al., Oxford, Eng.: Oxford Univ.
Press, 1990, Fig. 6-1.) Again bear in mind that we only get the
crumbs of what they know. We get a map of how they can
change the way a fly sings a song--while they secretly keep the
genetic maps to change human behavior! An easy example of
how genetics play a role in human behavior can be seen in how
infants behave toward their mothers and toward strangers. By
using twins and adopted children, etc. it could be clearly
demonstrated that the behavior of a child in how it touches its
mother was genetically inherited. But remember that the
genetic instructions as a child grow older are designed to give it
flexibility in relationship to its environment, so the environment
is going to interact with the genetics to form the final
behaviors. The study of these reactions of genes to the
environment is called the study of epigenesis. Another easy
example of the genetic role in human behavior is that
intelligence has been linked to brain to body size. Genes
ultimately determine that ratio of brain to body size. The factors
involved are largely prenatal maternal influences. A great deal
has been learned in this area. Brain size relates less to body size
than it is a function of body metabolism. (See Research by
Lande & Martin) To give a tiny sample of the types of genetic
studies done in this area:
• Hahn, M.E., & Haber, S.B. "Dominance for large brains in
laboratory mice..." Behavior Genetics, 1979, 9, pp. 243-244.
Page 238 ...

• Fuller, J.L. & Geils, H. "Brain growth in mice selected for

high and low brain weight." Developmental Psychobiology,
1972, 5, pp. 307-318.
• Riska, B., & Atchley, W.R. "Genetics of growth predict
patterns of brain-size evolution." Science, 1985, 229, pp.
668-671.
Research into how to control humans genetically proceeded in
several directions. First, scientists realized that radiation was
the key to changing genetics. Radiation causes breaks and
changes in the DNA instructions. If only one little bit of genetic
DNA instruction is changed in 1 million bits of information,
that change could radically change the life of the person or
animal. We see that everyday cleft lips... But how does
radiation affect genetics? DNA has been studied from every
angle. DNA has been looked at, probed, tested with all kinds of
chemicals and countless other manipulations. The scientists
figured exactly how the different DNA is constructed, what
makes it tick, how it joins, holds together, reproduces, etc. They
can disassemble and rebuild DNA however they want. DNA is
the genetic instructions. Since radiation will affect DNA they
tested a long list of ionizing radiation substances on DNA.
Different radiations will break the DNA in different ways.
Chemicals will join to DNA in certain ways. Long story short,
there are millions of ways to manipulate genetic material, and
the World Order set out to discover how to precisely
manipulate certain kinds of genetic material in certain ways. An
example of how skilled they are in understanding most
everything about to construct and take apart the molecules of
genetic material, at Cold Spring Harbor Labs one of the 1997
courses offered students is Molecular Cloning of Neural Genes.
They understand what makes a nerve cell and how to create
one. This science is called molecular neurobiology. (This
course at Cold Springs H.L. happens to be taught by instructors
from Rockefeller Univ., Harvard, John Hopkins, and UC of
Berkeley.) One area of intense study for many years was a
long-term scramble to find chemicals that would cause different
types of mutations in DNA. This research was called
Comparative Chemical Mutagenesis. In fact one of the books
this author studied was entitled just that Comparative Chemical
Mutagenesis (ed. by DeSerres & Shelby). This book’s Chapters
16-18, 22-25 are about chemical-genetic research concerning
how to create genetic changes in mammals using chemicals!
When it comes to genetics, much of what is learned from
studying one mammal will apply to humans. The chemical
principles are the same, the DNA is written in the same code,
only the genetic instructions written in that code is different. To
make an analogy, this book is written in english. Once someone
understands how english works, they can take apart a sentence
and rewrite it. Top level Genetic scientists know how to take
apart genetic instructions and rewrite them. Radiation used in
conjunction with chemicals presents them a tool for the mass
editing of human genetic instructions. No wonder the
Chernobyl nuclear accident happened. (Insiders in the know say
that it was caused on purpose.) What a great way to carry out
more mind-control research. According to public research,
genetic mutations were created by scientists in mammal cells
first in 1968. It is likely that this had already been
accomplished in secrecy before this. Labs all over the world
went about testing genetic material with specialized chemicals
to see what would happen to various genetic material when it
came in contact with specific chemicals. Some of the
commonly- tested mutagent chemicals that were widely tested
to discover their "mutagenicity" (mutagenicity is the word
geneticists use to describe the power of a chemical to cause a
mutation) include:
Aflatoxin B1 (AFT)(This is a mold metabolite and is not
always effective without another agent.)
Cadmium chloride
Page 239 ...
Cadmium salts
Cyclophosphamide (CP)
Dimethylnitrosamine (DMN)
Epichlorohydrin
Ethylenimine
Ethyl Methanesulfonate (EMS)
Methyl methanesulfonate (MMS)
Mitomycin C (a strong mutagenic at low doses)
Myleran (aka Busulfan)
N.Methyl-N,-Nitro - N - Nitrosoguanidine (MNNG)
Natulan (aka procarbazine, this chemical was strongly
mutagenic in the lab with the presence of S-9, but weak without
the presence of S-9)
Tepa
Theo-Tepa
Trenimon
Triethylenemelamine
Vinyl chloride
When these chemicals (and others) were tested on genetic
material, the mutations they caused in the genetic material were
observed, and then the specific type of mutation each caused
was charted. Some caused chromosome-type changes, others
caused chromatid-type changes, and some caused sub- or half-
chromatid changes (these sub-changes usually were in the
mitotic portion of the cell cycle.) When the chemicals broke
chromosomes they were called clastogens. Others cause
chromosomes to lose genetic material by damaging the mitotic
apparatus. Many of the chemicals that were first tested only
produced chemical changes in the chromatid-type of change.
They discovered that the protective mechanisms of animals,
plants and humans were protecting against many of their
induced mutations, but they also learned what mutations they
could create that the body would not fix or recover from. Along
with finding out what certain chemicals would do, the World
Order wanted to find out what would happen at the molecular
level of DNA when subjected to different types of radiation.
The key to using radiative material is that there are many
different types of radiative substances, not just uranium. For
instance, cadmium is radioactive and can be used in genetic
manipulation. In researching radiation, the first stage is when
free radicals are created. This takes only a very small fraction
of a second. The next is the chemical transformation of those
radicals into stable radiation substances, and finally the last
stage are the effects of these substances when the body
incorporates them. The effects of the radiation substances on a
person may last several years. The effects of radiation take
place on the molecular level of DNA. When you and I went to
school we were taught that DNA occurs as a double-helix
around an invisible common axis. The core of the helix is a
series of purine and pyrimidine bases stacked in a parallel array
and are arranged almost perpendicular to the invisible axis of
the helix. However, the reality is that DNA can also exist in
three (triple) double-stranded helix structures which are called
the A-DNA, the B-DNA, and the C-DNA. At high humidities
the A-DNA will transform into a B- DNA if excess salt is in the
area. In A-DNA the normal of the base pairs is tilted by 200 to
the helix axis. In contrast, in the B-DNA the base pairs are
perpendicular. In some viruses and bacteria single stranded
DNA is found. DNA also comes in supercoiled in some
situations. The point is simply that DNA occurs in ways other
than we learned in school. They discovered that the energy of
the sugar-phosphate backbone of the DNA allows for the DNA
bases to be stacked, and is the key to the stability of the DNA.
The verticle stacking of the bases gives stability of the DNA
helix. They discovered that the helical structure of DNA is
strongly influenced by its base composition and molecular
weight. I mention these only to point out, that they know all
about what DNA is and how it is built and holds itself together.
The genetic-radiation researchers had to learn how the bases of
the DNA held together electronically. They needed to learn
how well these molecules of these different bases would accept
electrons or donate electrons, because ionized radiation is
substances that give off electrons or other
Page 240 ...
ionizing particles. Directly ionizing particles are atomic
particles that are charged such as electrons, protons, alpha (a)
particles, "heavy" ions, etc.). An example of something the
researchers found is that the cytosine base was the best acceptor
of all the DNA bases. They began the process of testing
different radioactive substances on DNA to see how they would
cause mutations. To study this type of research, this author read
several books such as Effects of Ionizing Radiation on DNA
(Springer-Verlag Publ.: Berlin, Germany, 1978). An example
of a chapter in this book is "Radiation-Induced Degradation of
the Base Component in DNA and Related Substances". This
chapter shows charts of what happens to DNA components
(such as thymine, cytosine, & uracil) when they are exposed to
radiation. This author wants to cover some details of the type of
discoveries these researchers made to make a point that specific
chemicals and specific types of ionizing radiation will produce
different effects upon DNA. Although these are very specific
minute details, the reason they are mentioned here, is that the
bottom line is that SOME CHEMICALS WORK WITH SOME
TYPES OF RADIATION TO PRODUCE SPECIFIC
MUTATIONS. They discovered that if a mutagenic such as
aminoacridine dye is absorbed by cells, this dye which binds to
the nucleic acids, absorbs light to such a degree that the cells
are destroyed. Different variations of dyes bind to the DNA in
different strong and weak binding processes. Lambda radiation
was tested on DNA. They observed that positive and negative
ions were randomly produced throughout the DNA and that
these are chemically unstable and undergo free radical reactions
to form stable radiation products. They discovered that there
was a consistent "oxygen effect" which was made into a
radiobiological law which described how the presence of
oxygen enhances radiation damage in all forms of cell life.
Another interesting discovery was that 5-bromouracil (BU)
enhanced the rate of radiation-induced free radicals forming
within gamma-irradiated DNA. Researchers discovered that an
naturally occurring substance in cells, the sulthydryls, would
bind with iodoacetic acid and N-ethylmaleimide, which made
them radiosensitive, and would result in certain mutations. Still
one more example of a compound that works with radiation to
cause changes in the DNA is triacetoneamine-N-oxyl (or TAN
for short). This is a stable free radical that combines with DNA.
TAN comes from a group of nitroxide free radicals which all
have the same influence on DNA. Metronidazole (aka Flagyl)
was also found to be another of the nitroimidazoles and
nitrofuranes that are oxygen mimics that worked in the lab as
radiosensitizers of DNA. Chemical-Biological Weapons are
referred to as CB Weapons. In a transcript attached to the Dept.
of Defense appropriations for 1970 (part 6) that I have of CB
Weapons researchers talking, they indicate that the United
States has BZ which "brings about complete mental
disorientation as well as sedation which induces sleep. First of
all the individual is completely confused as to what he is doing
or what he is supposed to do and in addition he has
hallucinations. He cannot carry out his assigned duties nor can
he remember what his assigned duties were." The affect of BZ
lasts for about 3 days and then the person will begin to recover.
It can be given via the air or the water. If it is drank or inhaled
it will work. It takes affect about 1 to 1 ½ hours after it is
ingested. There are a number of corporations that can produce
BZ in the U.S. At the time of the transcript, it was stated that
BZ is $20/lb. and a lead time of six months for production.
Chemical incapacitants have been developed that affect the
mental functions of the mind in various ways. Today, research
and deployment continues of chemical and
Page 241 ...
radioactive substances that can control people. One of the
methods that chemical and radioactive materials work is to
change genetic structures. Some of the genetic changes that can
be created chemically, are chemical changes that affect the way
the mind thinks. In a nutshell, we are looking at a situation
where the thinking of an entire race could be altered via
chemicals dropped into their air and water. How long would
these genetic changes last? It is conceivable that some of the
changes might have long range consequences. Again, the
bottom line is that the World Order has at its disposal
radioactive substances that can distributed in conjunction with
chemicals to mind-control large geographic regions by genetic
manipulation. These radioactive substances and chemicals can
be distributed over vast areas by the air and water of a
geographic region. It is conceivable that within a short time, the
United States will experience chemicals administered via the
air, or the drinking water used in conjunction with specific
external stimuli to reinforce certain types of mind-control
programming on a mass of people. A chemical that makes
people susceptible to suggestion could be used over a
geographic area while hypnotic television messages and ELF
waves, etc. contribute to the mind-control operation. Therapists
are going to begin encountering victims of mind-control born in
the 1960’s or later that have been subjected to
chemical-radiation changes to the genetics that control human
behavior. There are already dozens of very vocal victims of
both radiation experiments & mind-control that are speaking
up. Unfortunately, the ones that this author knows do not have a
long life-expectancy, and speaking up usually has the effect of
shortening a whistle-blower’s life. In this Deeper Insights book,
the movie Jacob’s Ladder was mentioned. This movie shows a
unit in Vietnam which was given a drug to make them
aggressive, but the drug backfired because they killed each
other. However, the reason the movie was allowed to be
produced is that it was a good cover for the fact that the
military did not give up, but that they actually succeeded in
producing their "magic chemical potion" to turn soldiers into
killing machines. The biology of aggression has been figured
out. Military studies on the relationship between drugs and the
ability to kill have been numerous, one example is Gabriel,
R.A. Military Psychiatry: A Comparative Perspective. NY:
Greenport Press, 1986. The World Order has the ability to
create the warrior spirit, actually its worse than that, they have
the ability to turn men into killing machines.

WHAT WE’VE COVERED

As horrible as the physical manipulation of the brain and its
fluids is, and as monstrous as the genetic manipulation of the
growth of the brain as outlined in this chapter are, they are only
a few methods of mind-control of many that the Illuminati have
at their disposal. These techniques seriously raise the question
how much longer will humanity as we know it survive? The
next generation of children will have to face mind-control in
the form of genetic tampering and the use of chemicals already
stockpiled by the NWO.

Page 242 ...

Click here for picture

Back to Contents Chapter 9

 Click here for picture

Page 243

CHAPTER 9
THE SCIENCE OF MIND MANIPULATION
BY PSYCHOLOGICAL PROGRAMMING
METHODS:
BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION,
PSYCHOLOGICAL MOTIVATION & NLP

A person’s "selfhood" is hard to define, but one could view it as

the central important center of consciousness to which the
person has placed both trust and purpose. A professor of
Pastoral Counseling defined the self as "the purposive core I
have learned to trust in myself and others." Although this
author prefers his own wording as written above, the definition
of "selfhood" by this professor of pastors is in agreement with
this author’s. A mature person is a person who has developed a
"selfhood", a sense of self, that is able to make creative choices
in line with values and plans for his or her life. By the
destruction of the "selfhood" of many of the alters, the
programmers derail the ability of the slave to make creative
choices in line with values and plans. Not only do they destroy
the sense of identity but they also destroy the development of
values. When a normal person grows up, the values, that an
individual adopts, will enable that person to integrate his or her
many actions into a cohesive unified agenda for living their life.
What happens when a person is not able to adopt their own
values, but is force fed values? What happens when the person
does not even adopt any values, except to acquiesce to the
brutal demands of a mind-control handler? The natural process
for developing a unified agenda for life is cut short. The
thinking of mankind is predicated on socialization with other
humans. It is natural for people to want to work and be around
other humans. The family, neighborhood, city and nation all
give an individual nurturing that fosters a sense of identity and
values. What happens if an individual is cut off from society
and most of humanity, in fact is even cut off from most of their
own mind and will? What typically happens in this situation is
that the individual becomes demoralized, feels dehumanized,
and as a person is enfeebled to deal with life. What happens
when a person is not allowed to chose values freely, and
allowed to give consideration to various alternatives and the
consequences for these choices? It means that the person is not
going to be happy with the choices they make, but will go
through the motions of life in a rather dissociated manner. What
happens when a person feels powerless? Feelings of
powerlessness, can lead to feelings of meaningless. And
meaningless makes an individual feel trapped by life. The
meaninglessness imprisons a person. The person no longer has
the freedom to make choices, and without choices has no real
values, and without values life becomes meaningless. The
above situations are standard results of the total mind-control
programming agenda. The person’s natural built-in abilities to
plan their life is short circuited. The person is demoralized and
feels incomplete as a human because of his or her’s lack of
connectedness to their fellow humans, and as a result allows his
or herself to be dependent upon the master. Because they are
forced to do actions without any values, they dissociate their
actions from feelings. Finally, they feel trapped because they
have no values to give life meaning. A sexual slave will be
forced to have sex. They are not allowed to have a value
Page 244 ...
system, or else they would pick and choose who they wanted to
have sex with. The result is that they feel dehumanized and
they dissociate feelings from their actions. Without values, life
feels like one big trap, with no purpose and no goals. The only
purpose the slave has is to survive the brutality of its master,
that is to stay alive. Some slaves give up along the way, and are
discarded as unsuccessful attempts by the Illuminati. The
programming agenda prevents the natural God-given gift for
mankind to make their own choices. As explained above, this in
itself reinforces several items that the programmers have been
intentionally creating such as dehumanization, isolation,
dependence, and dissociation. It is built into human thinking to
enjoy a sense of accomplishment. This happens when a person
perceives his or her life as meaningful. The perception that his
or her life is meaningful results in the person feeling power.
Powerlessness and meaninglessness are two items that are
related to each other when we understand human thinking. A
normal child in a normal environment will naturally learn when
to trust itself and when to trust others. This is important to the
development of values. This is important for a person to
become mature. The programmers short circuit this natural
learning process. The front alters continue learning who to trust
and who not to trust, and when to trust oneself, because they
hold the body from day to day. However, a special purpose
child alter doesn’t experience this. Without learning how to
trust, it becomes hard to make decisions by one’s self, and so
the victim of mind-control transfers the right to make his or her
choices to the programmer. By arresting the natural process of
learning trust, the programmers detour the mind, so that it
travels right where they want the mind to be. Normally, a child
would grow up, and as it grew up would realize that not
everyone can be trusted. He would also come to realize that
even his own self at times can not be trusted. Yet, the child
would also learn that there are times that people can be trusted.
This maturation of awareness moves a person from being
dependent toward being independent. The programmed slave is
afraid of seeking true love, and to find authentic relationships
with people. Without these things, they remain incomplete and
more pliable to the control of the master, who then attempts to
provide in some substitute manner some of the things the slave
should have developed for himself. Many of the slave’s deeper
alters do not have the capacity to creatively look forward to the
future, with the understanding that they can create their own
life, their own future. The process of maturation that would
have given that ability to them has been prevented from taking
place. If these deeper alters do not experience life outside of
their programmed trance states, they will have no chance to
mature and to realize that they are capable to design and create
their own future. Rather, the slave endures life with anxiety and
dissociation, and limits his mental horizons to the present. The
big reference point the slave has is to their master and his
commands. Many of the slave’s alters are limited in their
freedom to really have consciousness. Their thinking is below
the definitions of conscious behavior--it is simply programmed
behavior. Our consciousness has a big role in how we perceive
the world. How we perceive the world in turn determines our
values. The programmers can disrupt the process of a slave
obtaining values in life, by disrupting the consciousness.
Values in life are important in determining how we build our
world-view, our frames of reference. The programmer
constructs various worlds for most of the alters (except for the
front alters). These alters are never given the chance for what
psychologists would label "conscious behavior". Reality is not
part of the package. Choice is not part of the package. In
normal life, conscious behavior is developed by interaction
between a person and his environment and the freedom to make
real
Page 245 ...
choices. The bare necessities are grudgingly provided in a
haphazard way to the alters of a total mind-controlled slave, so
that IF they are aware of their needs, it is at a very basic level,
such as survival, and security and warmth. A fully conscious
individual has gone way beyond that to realizing his or her’s
needs for creativity, intimacy, community, justice, integrity,
and spiritual fulfillment. The challenge for the slave master will
be to balance the freedom of activity and maturity of the front
part of the slave’s alters, with the control that the slave master
needs to accomplish his nefarious goals. It is safer to bring a
slave up to have a world view dependent on others that lends
itself to the owner’s agenda such as witchcraft values & a
witchcraft world-view, or a Mormon/ or Jehovah’s Witness/or
Catholic world-view of obedience to the church, THAN to have
the slave’s front alters becoming independent self-directed
mature thinkers. It doesn’t matter whether the person’s front
alters are Jehovah’s Witnesses, Mormon or Catholic, they have
surrendered their personal sense of power and control to
institutional control. The victim ceases to do things because of
personal choice, but accepts institutional values as a cog in a
machine; and the person, whether they realize it or not, loses
meaning in their life. Personal choice, value and meaning in life
are all related. Because man is made in the image of God, he
has an inherent desire to have meaning to his life. Mankind also
has a desire to be in unity with his environment. This is also a
God-given desire. To make himself feel at home in this world,
man spends much of his activity taming and domesticating the
wild world to conform to what feels comfortable. What
happens when this is stripped from a person? In order to
provide substitute answers to these desires of the slave, the
Illuminati’s covens provide rituals. Rituals make the slave feel
that some order is being brought out of the chaos and nonsense
of life. But true meaning in life can only come from realizing
the goals of our actual Creator, Almighty God. Substitutes for
this, leave people unfulfilled and weak. Of course, the
unfulfilled weak sense of meaning in life of the Illuminati
members, can weaken some in their ability to realize their true
spiritual potential. It becomes a vicious cycle of low base evil
goals. Who will provide the safety for the deeper alters to move
out independently in life? and then further, who will teach the
deeper alters the social skills, and the other skills to step out
and grow? Even if the complex programming should break its
death-grip on an alter, (which seldom happens) an alter can not
find freedom without some outside support system providing
safety and instruction. The bondage that most deeper alters
remain fixed in, is a very complex bondage of body, mind, and
spirit. This complex bondage calls for group package answers,
that address the type of issues that have been raised on these
last two pages. The lack of this type of answer insures that few
slaves will find full freedom. Partial freedom is still slavery.
On the flip side, because deeper alters have not had a chance to
develop their own values, make their own choices, and
experience reality, the power of the programs will be diluted
simply by real life. This occurs even in the absence of intense
deprogramming. One of the weaknesses of the programming is
that the handlers often fail to allow alters to ever establish real
personal values. Hand-me-down values that are accepted under
duress or torture, are quickly discarded if the alters ever do get
free. Illuminati slaves who accept the values of the Illuminati,
and progress to positions of power can be resistent to freedom,
because they have internalized for themselves a value system,
have some feelings of self-worth and self-competence. The
Illuminati have long understood the value in having their
members progress through the levels of initiation, and to pass
through tests that bestow a sense of
Page 246 ...

achievement upon the slave. When the Illuminati in Bavaria

had their safe houses raided, their paperwork showed extensive
disciple and training programs. At first glance, raising an
initiate through an initiate degree system of training may not
smack of mind-control, but it is like an anchor that ties in the
mind-control. It is important for the Illuminati to attach an
occult value system to the mind-control so that the slave is
more resistent to wanting freedom, because their self-worth and
identity are tied up with the Illuminati.
"STRIPPED" OF FEELINGS
Another side-effect of the total mind-control is that the deeper
alters of a victim, and indeed often even the front alters are
unsuccessful in morally meaningful relationships such as love
and friendship. The reader may be wondering, what does Fritz
mean by "morally meaningful"? Allow me to take several
paragraphs to explain ... Has the reader ever tried to recall a
name which you knew, but your mind seems blocked? And yet,
when someone offers this name or that name, you realize that it
doesn’t have the correct feel, the correct rhythm, the correct
beginning. Your mind can recognize what it is looking for on a
subconscious level, but you are not pulling the name up to the
conscious. Your mind can look for things on a subconscious
level and identify what it is looking for, without consciously
telling you.
Has the reader ever loved someone for many years? If you
have, you know that you didn’t consciously think of them and
your love for them every second of the day. Grief or love or
another strong emotion can lay in our subconscious mind and
yet still influence our thinking. It is not a matter of us turning
this love on. It simply is there quietly in the background
exerting its influence on our mind. Grief, love, anger, and other
strong emotions are similar to when our mind is seeking for a
name subconsciously. These emotions seek out the appropriate
scenes, and items in the surrounding area, and colors and
sounds that go with the emotion that the subconscious mind
feels. A blue person will notice "blue, sad" type things around
them. Other things just don’t fit the subconscious fill in the
blank. In other words, our emotions determine our perspective
on what we see in life. Our emotional perspective guides what
items our mind focuses on. This is why it is absolutely
imperative for balanced human growth that a person feel
compassion, love and sympathy directed toward oneself.
Feeling loved in turn opens the mind to focus its
emotional-perception-guidance system on compassion, love
and sympathy. In contrast with most people, many parts of total
mind-controlled slaves are never meant to have feelings, or if
the parts do, they repressed, suppress, and dissociate their
feelings. Our emotions play a fundamental role in a person’s
moral life. They transform values into actions. This is what is
called strength of will, courage of convictions, etc. Emotions
play a critical role in strength of will and courage of
convictions. To be stripped of feeling emotions, strips the
victim of one of the ingredients to make and carry out moral
choices. This helps explain why emotions are harnessed so
completely by the programmers. When researchers have
studied unemotional people, they find that their dealings with
others are shallow, lifeless, and mechanical. The programmers
want their programmed assassins, espionage agents, prostitutes,
etc. to be mechanical. People rarely want to form friendships
with unemotional persons. Of course, the parts that are created
to interface with the public are programmed to be effacious,
gracious, and to sparkle. But the deeper parts which influence
the victim’s own internal thoughts, which the victim wisely
keeps to himself, fail to connect with the outside world
emotionally. Having been stripped of emotions, the slave is
consequently stripped of one of the most
Page 247 ...
important ingredients involved in morality. An unemotional or
emotionally deficient person or alter may suffer from a
particular kind of a "morally-weak will". This is because failure
to do what a person believes is good and failure to restrain from
doing what one believes is bad is a natural consequence of
lacking emotions such as care, concern, compassion, courage,
love and sympathy. Certain emotions are critical for doing and
being moved to do what is right and in not doing what one
knows is bad. Friendships are one of the most valuable
commodities a person can have. The victim is stripped of
external friendships. They may substitute interactions within
their own internal world as a way to substitute for this loss. In
normal human activity, two people in love entertwine the
activities of their lives into the complex whole of their love
relationship. A walk together is not seen as a walk, but as a
joint expression of their relationship. Humans emotionally
value what is good for their friends and lovers. Without
emotional attachments, the relationship is only a facade. The
victims of mind-control are taught how to create great facades.
Unfortunately, they fool many of their therapists, and therefore
don’t step out of the make-believe roles they play out. Human
love and friendship is one of the most vital, powerful,
fundamentally good items of human behavior. They provide the
foundation for many other things. Without love and friendship,
the victim’s alters live in isolation, alienation, abandonement,
discontinuity, and purposelessness. Cisco’s half of the book
will discuss some specific programming tactcs that are used to
hide the "shadow" alters that are used to take any emotions that
the principally used alters might develop. What we have been
covering is that one of the side effects of "stripping" the victims
from feeling emotions is to cripple them from taking moral
stands, from seeing love & concern in the world around them,
and from reaching out & forming ties to the outside world.
PROGRAMMING TO HIDE REVEALING DREAMS
The programmers realize that the mind is able to reveal secrets
via dreams. During the programming a Mother-of-darkness will
be assigned to a child and she will have to wake that child up
when it is in its deepest sleep to ask the child what’s happening
and if the child is dreaming. If dreams are surfacing, the
programmers know their programming is not holding. When
the child’s mind which is being programmed no longer releases
revealing dreams, the programmers know that their
programming is holding. The front alters receive repeated
programming (hypnotic commands, etc.) not to dream or to
know their dreams. When the programming begins to collapse,
the deeper alters will begin to dream and flood with memories.
The slave must have their dream sealing programs reinstated
approx. every three years. If this is not done, dreams (which are
actually memories) will begin to surface. A therapist can also
help the victim train their mind to remember their dreams
(dream state of mind).
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
A skillful programmer can use language to communicate at
several levels. The programmer can use derogatory tones, big
words that the child doesn’t understand and obscure language
that confuses the child in order to humiliate, dominate and
confuse the child. He can also pronounce the words with a twist
in order to protect the programming. Have you ever met
someone in the occult world who pronounces many of his
words strange? The programmers are also big on play on words
which are done intentionally to protect the programming. The
victims of the occult programming must deal with symbology.
Those who attempt to understand programming must also deal
with the world of symbology.
Page 248 ...
The programmer must learn to think like a child and to step into
the child’s world. Likewise, the deprogrammer must learn to
step into the victim’s world. Certainly, the deprogrammer
wants to stay grounded in reality, but he also wants to be able
to understand the world that the victim must live in. The deeper
parts of the victim lives in a magical world, full of demons and
powers from other dimensions. When the Illuminati carry out
programming, they often frame what they are doing in magical
and satanic terms. Most therapists do not want to step into the
victim’s world to communicate with them. Just as the
psychologists want this author to step into the psychologists’
world to communicate with them, the psychologist should
realize that the victim would like the same. It is irrelevant
whether the therapist believes that objects can be demonized or
not. The deeper alters have spent their life-time learning how
demons attach themselves to objects, and how to gain power to
cause demons to attach themselves to objects. A deeper alter
may have the occult wisdom to place demons into a fluid so
that that fluid can be drank by a child. From their understanding
of demonology, these demons are so powerful that the only
non-lethal entry for them into the child is by the child drinking
a particular fluid. These images are the images that deeper
alters experience during the programming rituals. The language
& images of the programming will be very magical, mystical
and satanic.
EFFECTS OF PROGRAMMING
The mind is a holographic type of memory. The psyche of the
multiple personality is a multiple image hologram. The body is
set up to match the mind. When one alter switches to another,
another hologram seems to take control over the mind. This is
like the instructions for the body are written on a card, and
when the switch occurs, the holographic cards are shuffled like
a deck of cards. In fact, the programming have used this
analogy as part of their programming codes.
FALSE IMPLANTED MEMORIES
Once the truth about trauma-based mind-control began coming
out, a massive counterattack by the controlled establishment
occured. This counter attack was that you can not trust the
memories of the victims. Numerous establishment articles call
attention to memory research, especially memory research into
how to implant an illusary memory. Two examples of this
massive counterattack are Bruce Bower’s article in Science
News, 8/24/96, pp. 126-127 entitled "Remembrance of Things
False Scientists incite illusary memories and explore their
implications".& Harvard psychologist Daniel L. Schacter’s
book Searching for Memory (1996). First, these countless
articles prove that the controlled psychiatric research
community is working hard at developing techniques to implant
false memories. This is indeed a big part of the mind-control,
producing cover memories and false identities and false
histories for alters. However, these articles always ignore the
enormous evidence of severe abuse and government/cult
involvement in the lives of countless victims of mind-control.
This author has seen first hand the Illuminati-satanic cult-CIA
involvement in the lives of a number of these people. The
events of these people’s lives, which this author has often
witnessed, can’t be explained away by poor memory. Further,
traumas that are so severe as to cause amnesia walls, are locked
up by the mind and preserved. They are like a mummy in a
tomb in Egypt, that is still locked up in its preserved state.
Memories that aren’t locked up can deteriate and be
contaminated, just like a dead body that is left to rot, but
programming traumas are not in that category of memory.
Remember, the mind protect itself. Research shows that the
mind does not want to latch onto false memories that hurt it.
For instance, when researchers try to get subjects to remember
a kind parent hurting them, the mind will resist the false
memory.
Page 249 ...
PERCEPTION CLOUDS MEMORY
The brain in order to be effecient uses its framework of
knowledge--its world view--in which to hang new incoming
knowledge. This author’s Be Wise As Serpents book considered
this to be the biggest barrier to people coming to the truth.
Because education, television and society in general control
how people’s framework of knowledge is built, and these
frameworks are built skillfully to exclude major truths that
would expose how the World Order is controlling mankind, it is
really difficult to speak to people about mind-control, and the
control of the world in general. The victim of mind-control has
frameworks built into his subconscious that make it difficult to
drive the truth into their thinking. Memories are stored as they
relate to these frameworks. An efficient way around that is to
speak and teach in way that the subconscious mind is spoken
to, and the conscious barriers are by-passed. The mind puts up a
grid to prevent non-approved information from coming in that
doesn’t fit it’s accepted concept of truth. Much of this grid is
fear based. The problem for the victim is that once their mind is
bent a certain way by the programmers, it will naturally create a
grid to protect the programmed world-view.
This is why the external philosophies-news
broadcasts-disinformation from establishment magazines, etc.
that are layered in on top of programming, (see Chapter 12) are
like a protective coat sprayed on to make sure the foundation
doesn’t weather over time. For instance, the front alters of some
of the most severely tortured victims have latched onto the idea
that Satanic Ritual Abuse doesn’t exist, and are actually some
of the greatest public crusaders against people believing that
SRA exists. The external politically-correct view is in this case
protecting the deeper programming.
FALSE FEELINGS. Using drugs & hypnosis, and the creation
story about God breathing things into existence, the "love" &
"kindness" of the programmer is placed into Moriah the Wind.
When this is done, should a gatekeeper alter hear something
negative about their master, they instantly go into the melting
(drug memory) where drugs made them feel one with their
programmer. This is refrained during programming as "the
peace of God."
ELDETIC IMAGERY. There is a type of visual imagery called
eidetic imagery. 5 to 10 % of children have it, but it is very rare
in adults. Eidetic imagery is similar to a photographic memory.
People with eidetic imagery can look at any object or page of
numbers and when they look away the image of what they have
seen is as clear as a photograph. They can focus on any detail
of the image, enlarge it, make out more details than what they
had originally seen, and then they can carry this image with
them for several days, just like the rest of us carry a
photograph. This author has not seen much info on this, &
believes that further research into this topic might reveal some
more methods that the mind-control programmers are utilizing.
Child-hood impressions & memories can have a far greater
impact and retention than adult memories. This paragraph has
only introduced this subject of eidetic imagery & childhood vs
adult memory ability.
FINAL SUMMATION. The programming regimen destroys
the victims sense of self, so that the person has only an identity
within the cult. The victim can not express rage over their own
victimization, but is encouraged by the Illuminati’s satanic
beliefs to express violence & rage toward others, thereby
creating a mechanism to help perpetuate the mind-control. The
rage also seeps out as self-punishment. A deep loneliness sets
into victims, & they despair of hope. They see no place to turn
to except to whatever cult is controlling them. This chapter has
focused on the type of skills & knowledge psychologists study,
& how this knowledge can be applied to insuring compliance
by the slave.

Click here for picture

Back to Contents Chapter 10
Page 251 ...

CHAPTER 10
THE 10th SCIENCE — USING SPIRITUAL
THINGS
TO CONTROL A PERSON.

What makes a programmed multiple tick? This chapter will

provide some of the most important answers to that question. In
this chapter, you will be provided with important brand-new
information.

CONTENTS
PART A. Intro on the importance of spiritual programming
tactics.
PART B. The history of Programmed Golem
PART C. The 3 foundations: Loss of identity, Fear, and
Demons
PART D. A complete Chronology of how the victim
experiences the early spiritual programming. Steps a through o.
(by Cisco)
PART E. Specific spiritual programming maneuvers

PART A. INTRO on the IMPORTANCE of SPIRITUAL

PROGRAMMING TACTICS
It is important for therapists and ministers to understand the
spiritual ramifications of what has been done. The witchcraft,
spells, and demonology is a way of life for the deeper alters.
The programming and the hypnotic trances are deeply
embedded into the ritual life of the deeper alters of a
mind-controlled slave. An enormous amount of suffering has
transpired because therapists have dealt with obvious spiritual
problems with psychological techniques that aren’t even
remotely related to the real problem. Secular therapists can be
quick to offer glib criticism of the subject of demonology, a
subject they often know nothing about. (While Christians
generally acknowledge that mankind is in a spiritual war (cf. 2
COR 10:3-5), they too are generally ignorant of Satan’s
devices, and are not skilled in dealing with spiritual attacks
from the world, flesh and the demons.) An analogy for
demonology is microbiology. Many people never see a virus,
and many people never see demons. Some people still debate
whether the germ theory of disease is correct. There will
certainly be differences of opinion about
demonology--anything said about it is bound to find someone
who disagrees. But just like it has been useful for many sick
people’s health to deal with viruses, victims of Illuminati
mind-control have found it helpful to deal with demons.
Demonology can be a useful subject for understanding
programming from both a programmer’s point of view and a
deprogrammer’s point of view. If this information is useful,
then it will have served a purpose. Men of God, who have
found themselves in remote places (where trauma-based
mind-control is not practiced), have found themselves
confronted by obvious cases of demon possession that have
been successfully handled by deliverance prayer. This author
has personally witnessed many people who have had wonderful
healings due to deliverances. I rejoice in their freedom. I pray
that others who portray themselves as therapists would come to
the same place that they could appreciate healings even though
they do not recognize the spiritual dimension of human life, or
even better yet, that they would recognize the spiritual side of
humankind. In Asia, it was common for this author to see flies
swarm over people and food. Demons swarm around people in
that type of abundance. This is why the title Lord of the Flies
(Beelzebub) is the name of a chief demon, and is sometimes
used as another name for Satan himself.
Page 252 ...

Part B. The History of the Programmed Golem

KABBALISTIC BLACK MAGIC
A number of the Illuminati bloodlines (and sects) that are
involved in trauma-based total mind-control are Askenazi
hasidic bloodlines. Legends abound from the 15th century
onward about how the Askenazi hasidic leaders created golem
to serve them. These golem have been called "benevolent
robots". For those readers who are unaware of where the word
golem came from, it is used once in the Word of God in Ps
139:16, "Your eyes [God’s eyes] saw my substance, being yet
unformed. And in Your book they were written, the days
fashioned for me." This is believed by the Kabballists to refer
to Adam when he was only a body without a soul. Golem are
believed to be soulless bodies. One can almost hear the
rationalization in medieval times when torture, and black magic
or a trance state ended up creating an alter personality that this
magical part was viewed as soulless, because it was only
created via magic. This personality (alter) didn’t exist like real
people, it was merely a golem in the magicians’ eyes--therefore
it could be abused or used as a robot, because it was soulless.
The use of Cabalistic black magic in mainline Illuminati
programming in the deeper aspects has led this author to
believe that during the torture of jews in the concentration
camps--Dr. Mengele was assisted by some Askenazi hasidic
black magic adepts who gave him some of the secret names of
God. The Cabalistic magic viewpoint is that there are creative
powers intrinsic in God’s names. God’s names are used by the
Illuminati for such alters as the gems (jewels) from which other
alters are created. For instance the gems will be tortured while
Cabalistic black magic is employed to create more parts. In
such deeper aspects of programming, what occurs? Have the
Illuminati programmers created new parts via psychologic
torture techniques, have they created them with black magic or
both? One thing is sure, if the "golem’s mind"--that is that if
parts of the victim subjected to trauma-based mind-control
remember what occurred, then it will be associated with a
Cabalistic black magic ritual. There are several other features
of Cabalistic black magic that are important features of
Illuminati programming. Many things pertaining to the
mind-control have slipped out into public view at one time or
another but are not recognized as having anything to do with
programming. The European Jew Joseph Achron wrote the
musical Golem Suite (1932) for an orchestra. The first piece of
music introduces the golem and the last piece of music is the
exact reverse mirror image of the first piece and it represents
the disintegration of the golem. In programming, the deeper
alters may have a musical cord to call them up, and the reverse
of that cord will "disintegrate" them back into the mind. The
following excerpts are taken from Gershom Scholem’s book
Kabbalah. (NY: Keter Pub. House Jerusalem, 1974.) "General
summaries of Kabbalistic doctrine rarely referred to its
‘practical’ side [which Scholem go on to explain is black magic
dealing with demons and blood]..." Of course not, the practical
side of the Kabbala is occult--secret knowledge. It is the secrets
of black magic. "Various ideas and practices connected with the
concept of the golem [mind-controlled slave] also took their
place in practical Kabbalah through a combination of features
drawn from the Sefer Yezirah and a number of magical
traditions." (Kabbala, p. 183) The practical side of the Kabbala
which was concerned with creating golem employed trances,
magic and visualization. Scholem writes, "In this circle the
Sefer Yezirah was nearly always interpreted in the manner of
Saadiah and Shabbetai Donnolo [who was into what is known
as Satanism], with an added tendency to see the book as a guide
for both mystics and adepts of magic. The study of the
Page 253 ...
book was considered successful when the mystic attained the
vision of the golem, which was connected with a specific ritual
of a remarkable ecstatic [altered state] character." (ibid., p.40)
Two other points should be made showing the connection
between medieval ashkenzim black magic practices and the
programming going on today. The medieval jewish magicians
would use the secret Kabbalistic names of God in accordance
with detailed sets of instructions to try and create a golem. The
golem in turn would say the combination of hebrew letters in
reverse order. This has been done in modern programming.
Further, the "Seal of the Holy One" in medieval times was
written on the forehead of the golem. This is the word "emet".
At some point the word’s first letter (an aleph) is erased and
this leaves the word "met" which in Hebrew means "dead".
Such types of sealings have also been done in modern times
with deeper parts of slaves.

PART C. The 3 foundations: Loss of identity, Fear, and

Demons
The programming has three basic foundations, fear, rejection of
God (which entails the rejection of who they are), and the
entrapment by demonic possession. If the person is paralyzed in
fear, unable to seek God’s help, unable to know who they are in
Christ & to see God’s plan for their life, and lives in bondage to
demons, then the Illuminati programming will hold. The Word
of God states that each person is intricately designed by God
and developed according to His plan (Ps. 139:14-16). A
person’s self-image of who they are profoundly affects
everything else about them. The Illuminati want to insure that
the potential for good that the person is born with is destroyed
or controlled. They want the victim to feel rejected and cheated
by God. This is what Colossians 2:8 warns about, & then the
next Bible verse states, "...for in Him dwelleth all the fullness
of the Godhead bodily. And you are complete in Him..." If the
slave could ever be complete through their devotion to God,
they would have no use for their Illuminati masters. The
Scriptures in several Psalms teach that God made us in
accordance with His plans for our lives. Even today He is not
finished with us. "We are (present continuous action verb) His
workmanship..." Eph. 2:10 A 124 pg. secret CIA book Manual
on Human Resources, 1983, (recently declassified via the
Freedom of Information Act) states, "When a threat is used, it
should always be implied that the subject himself is to blame by
using words such as, "You leave me no other choice but to..."
He should never be told to comply "or else!"... The threat of
coercion usually weakens or destroys resistance more
effectively than coercion itself. For example, the threat to inflict
pain can trigger fears more damaging than the immediate
sensation of pain."
UNDERSTANDING THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN
FEAR & DEMONS
Dr. W. Grey Walter, of the British Burden Neurological
Institute at Bristol, England did a lot of research involving
drugs, electroshock and demonology. Walter would drill from
50 to 100 holes in his patients heads and then insert electrodes
into their heads. The patients would walk around with a
beret-like covering over their electrode implanted heads. The
suborbital area of the brain was determined by Walter as being
the seat of demonic fears. Walter would cause a small lesion in
the paracingulate region to calm patients who saw demons.
This in effect is like a miniature lobotomy. The electricity
causes a selective lesion. What his work showed was that there
is a connection between the area of the brain that creates fear,
and images of demons that people see.
The Word of God in 2 TIM 1:7 states categorically that "God
hath not given us the spirit of fear; but of power, and of love,
and of
Page 254 ...
a sound mind." This means that the Spirit of fear comes from
the Satan and his world system. The Spirit of fear is demonic,
and it has the power to paralyze its victim. This Spirit of Fear is
nothing less than a demonic anointing. That demonic anointing
drives away positive angelic spirits. Christ asked, "Why are ye
so fearful? How is it that ye have no faith?" The demonic
anointing of fear meant that faith was lacking. If we listen to
the Word of God, we get faith. (ROM 10:17). This is why it is
important to the programmers that their deeper alters are
programmed not to be able to read or hear the Word of God
(Holy Bible). If the victim could hear the Word of God, they
would receive faith, which would tamper with the demonic
anointing of fear. On a spiritual level, our fears are open doors
for Satan to carry out an act. It is a vicious bondage loop,
because then the victim says, "I knew it was going to happen, I
knew from the beginning." Little does the victim realize that
the Spirit of Fear within them, opened the door for Satan to
carry out his will in that area. In fact, it is standard procedure
within the secret societies and intelligence agencies to identify
what fears their opposition have, and then build upon those
fears. It does no good to spread disinformation about things that
the enemy is not fearful of. But if a fear is identified, they will
play upon that as much as possible. In Howard, Michael,
Strategic Deception in the Second World War. Vol. 5 of British
Intelligence in the Second World War. W.W. Norton & Co.:
NY, 1995, p.33-34, "One of the first rules of deception is to
play on the real fears,..." Onpage 4 1-42 Howard quotes a
British intelligence directive, "It may be taken as a principle of
strategic deception that it is neither economical in time nor
productive in results to attempt to produce in the enemy anxiety
over an area concerned with which the enemy himself has had
no previous fear...Knowledge of the trend of enemy anxiety
was therefore of very great value...On the foundation of fear,
and having regard both to inherent plausibility and to contact
identifications which the enemy was likely to have made, it was
possible to build up a fictitious and misleading structure and to
represent Allied capabilities and intentions as very different
from what they really were." In this author’s previous writings,
the connection between demonology and military tactics in
general and specifically British intelligence have been closely
documented. Military structures are based upon demon
structures. It is no surprise then, that demons and intelligence
groups study to determine what a person’s fears are. And it is
no wonder that they attempt to instill as many fears as possible
into the victim.
DEMON POSSESSION & SPIRIT GUARDS
Christians are called upon to guard what was spiritually
entrusted to them by the using the Holy Spirit (2 TIM 1:14).
The Illuminati do a mirror image of this, by layering in spirits
(evil ones) to guard things in the system. For instance, in the
VoL 2 book, the programming parallels to the movie Labyrinth
were discussed in chapter 5. It was mentioned how the dogs
portrayed guardians. Demons named Toto are layered in to
protect the spinner kittens. If one were to try to activate the
spinner kittens without going through the proper chain of
command & codes, the guardian demons known as Totos, or
after Dorothy’s Toto will be activated. The spinner’s in fact are
often called "Dorothys". Some other examples of guardians
spirits that are placed into a system are Bes, the spirit that rules
the dwarfs; Geb, the voice behind the earth God in a system;
Pan, who has various roles, including being a protector of the
green wood; and Shu, which is the voice "behind the wind"
which controls the internal weather within a alter system’s
world. The foundations of a system are the demons layered in
at the beginning. Spirits of Confusion, Despair, Torment are
called down by the programmers and laid in. Lying and
Perverse Spirits are brought in too. At first this may seem like
very subjective sci-fi to the
Page 254 ...
reader. Hopefully, after the programming rituals are described
in detail, and a basic foundation concerning what demons are is
laid, the reader will have received a more systematic
understanding of the topic. The goal is teach the reader
programming as a programmer would understand it. The victim
should not be made ashamed of demonic attachments. That
serves no spiritual benefit for the victim, and only contributes
more guilt and shame, and adds to the problem of giving them
hope. The victim has been a helpless victim. "Mystery" demons
(which is not their actual name) are placed into the child when
they are innocent babies. Part of the power of the mystery
demons, is that they are able to remain anonymous within their
host’s body. They remain in the host secretly generally for the
person’s lifetime. These mystery demons have to answer to
their chain of command. Within a victim’s alter parts, are
demons which have their own ranks and commanders.
Christians who carry out deliverances will deal those
commanders. The Catholic Church, which has been so active in
trauma-based mind-control and in placing in the Spirits of
Legion into a victim, had one of their clergy write, "Evil is
Someone, Someone who is multiple and who name is legion..."
(Mauriac, Francois. Life of St. Margaret of Cortona.) The
Catholic Church’s official public stance is that Demon
possession is rare. On Aug. 15, 1972, Pope Paul VI put out a
motu proprio which abolished the order of exorcist. This office
had already become rather rare, and besides included men who
were mind-control programmers. Cases of "demonic
possession" of catholics are occasionally taken to places like
Georgetown Hospital in Wash. D.C. which is run by Jesuits
working in tandem with the CIA. Accounts of exorcisms of
Catholics are filled with clues that the victims of "demonic
possession" are victims also of trauma-based occult-based
mindcontrol.
This writer, trying to explain a difficult subject (demonology),
feels fortunate to be able to recommend a book which does a
good job of explaining it, this is Howard 0. Pittman’s book
Demons. (Foxworth, MS: Philadelphian Pub. House, c. 1988). I
originally read the book in 1992, and have had it recommended
by those who work in the area of demonology. The book is
written by a devout Christian who worked 28 years in the field
of law enforcement during his life. The book explains such
things as: how man is made in the image of God (and as such is
a clone’ so to speak of God;) How demon possession has come
about due to man’s sovereign will allowing it; & How demons
can interact with the physical world. He explains how Satan
despatches orders from his throne which go through a chain of
command, and how special emphasis is placed on Christians.
He explains the forms of demons, their expertise, how they can
read minds, and how they have no love for their master, and no
love for themselves. Nor does their master have any love for
them. (I, Fritz Springmeier, your author have discovered in
talking to people for years, that it is essential for people to
grasp that the mind of Satan is devoid of love, and that where
love doesn’t seek its own, Satan’s mind always has his own
interest in both mind & action. Everything in his world system
is functioning for a goal of his, they are not random events,
because he is a control-freak.) Pittman describes warring
demons--which look like giant humans and are the cream of
Satan’s crop.’ These warring demons are assigned to formulate
wars upon the earth. While Pittman is a spirit-led Christian, it is
interesting that a non-Christian historian/author William
Bramley, (of the Gods of Eden), who believes that the "aliens"
were viewed as angels, has found traces of proof that the aliens
(angels) were involved in the creation of wars down through
the history of mankind. "Now the Spirit speaketh expressly,
that in the latter times some shall depart from the
Page 256 ...
faith, giving heed to seducing spirits and doctrines of devils;
Speaking lies in hypocrisy; having their conscience seared with
a hot iron;" 1 TIM 4:1-2. Pittman writes about 1 TIM 4:1-2, "In
this passage of scripture, we are told that in the last days the
devils would have their own doctrine. We know that if the
Bible tells us that devils would have their own doctrines, then,
most assuredly the Bible would tell us what these doctrines
would be. Evidence of what the devils will be teaching is found
in the following passage of scripture: ‘But he knowing their
thoughts, said unto them, Every kingdom divided against itself
is brought to desolation; and a house divided against a house
falleth. If Satan also be divided against himself, how shall his
kingdom stand? Because ye say that I cast out devils through
Beelzebub.’ (Luke 11:17-18) From this very scripture, it is
clear what the devils will be teaching as doctrine. They will be
teaching that THERE ARE NO SUCH BEINGS AS
DEMONS! Where are these demons teaching their doctrine?
They are teaching it in the churches to the Christians! They are
teaching their doctrine to the very ones who have the potential
to believe that these demons are real and can expose these
beings. If Satan did try to reveal himself and his helpers, then
his house would be divided." Pittman warns, "From
congregation to congregation, from one church to another
church throughout all this land, we find preacher after preacher
playing down the existence of demons and even the existence
of Satan! Then, there are others who, when they admit that
Satan and his demons are real, deemphasize their importance
and capability. Not only are local ministers doing this, but
many Christian authors are doing this through their books...The
false doctrines of devils are intended to enhance the anonymity
of Satan and his angels. Much of this misteaching is spread
through good Christians who have been sold a lie and really
believe what they say.’’ The Word of God is clear that not one
sin entered into this world without Satan. Every sin committed
by mankind is (according to the Word of God) the result and
influence of Satan. However, because Satan and his demons are
masters at deception and at staying behind the scenes, and
remaining anonymous they are not discovered. They are better
at such deception than the intelligence agencies that are
Illuminati fronts, and to give credit where due, the NSA, CIA,
and MI-6 are good at what they do.
The programmer will be looking for methods to open up a
person to demons, and he will be setting up scenarios so that
the victim will reject the Spirit of God in their life. 1 JN 5:18
teaches that a person’s identity in Christ protects against the
wicked one, so the victim’s identity in Christ will be stolen
very soon by the programmers. According to the Word of God,
submission and humility before God are also said to be
protections against evil spirits.(cf. JS 4:7, & 1 PTR 5:6,8,9).
Resistance to catching demons, involves a person "not giving
place" to the demons, (Eph. 4:27) and to be strengthened by
Christ (Phil. 4:13). How does this happen? The Word of God
teaches us that the Spirit of God in our life repels demons
naturally. A close walk of fellowship with the Spirit of God is
one spiritually natural immune-builder. We need to get Christ
deeper and deeper into our lives. However, the programmer
will deflect this, and say that submission and humility before
God means to submit to some church authority, and of course
this church authority will be part of the mind-control abuse
system.
The Use of Giving Demonic Assistance to entrap.
One of the principles (giving tactics) of the spirit world is that
if you go to get help from demons, they have a spiritual
opportunity to enter into your life in other ways. This involves
spiritual laws. People, who have been healed by occult healers,
have discovered that
Page 257 ...
it set them up for demonic activity in their life. Of course, it is
easy to write this, but often only the victims of occult help, who
have already learned the lesson the hard way, believe it. The
ultimate that Lucifer can pretend to give is divinity. Divinity is
sometimes symbolized by the Illuminati as an 8 on its side or
the infinity symbol. The divine within a hierarchy member is
called the High Self. It also goes by the name Dian Y Glas or
Blue God in the hierarchy’s parlance. The given names of Joan,
Janicot, Jean, and Jonet are popular in generational witchcraft
families because they mean the High Self. The cabalistic name
for the High Self (internal divinity) is NESHAMAH. According
to Illuminati hierarchy beliefs, the High Self can only be
communicated to via symbols, music and myth that go through
the unconscious mind. In other words, don’t talk to it, show it.
This is part of the reason Illuminati witch covens make noise in
ceremonies, dance and use objects, they believe these are
essential to communicate to their High Self.
The Use of Occult Focal Points.
Another principle (giving tactic) of the spirit world is that focal
points (occult objects) are used to bring demonic entities into a
person’s life. I can not write a technical manual on the
mechanics of how or why the presence of evil spirits is aided
by amulets, rings, occult jewelry, rock & roll albums, etc., but
the fact is, that demonic entities ARE AIDED. It is common for
mind-controlled Illuminati slaves to keep demonized
nick-nacks given by their programmers, handlers or other
contact people. Generally, the mind-controlled slave’s front
system is unaware of the spiritual ramifications of the occult
objects.
The ancient grimoires are used in rituals & programming. Even
if it is seldom that therapists work that deep in a system, it still
might be useful to provide a list (for reference sake) of the
ancient grimoires which are used to invoke demons:
Almadel, the
Arbatel of Magic, the
Black Pullet, the
Book of Albertus Magnus, the
Enchiridion of Pope Leo
Fourth Book of Cornelius Agrippa
Grand Grimoire, the
Grimoire of Pope Honorius
Grimorium Verum, the
Heptameron, the
Lesser Key of Solomon (aka Goetia)
Key of Solomon (aka Legemeton)
Pauline Art, the
Sword of Moses, the
Theosophia Pneumatica
The Use of giving occult power for SOMETHING IN
RETURN. One of the tactics of controlling a person is to give
them occult power. Generally, people who have psychic
abilities and other occult powers, are reluctant to seek a true
Christian faith. Because they enjoy the power they have, they
will not trade leaving the occult world and their power behind
for freedom.
In the case of many mind-controlled slaves, the programmer
will create a legitimate spirit-filled Christian front. He knows
that the spiritual principle, "A double-minded man is unstable
in all his ways" will work in his favor. Even though he creates a
religious front that is opposed to what the programmer wants, a
thousand-minded person has no choice but to rely on the
programmer. The programmer is the only one who can bring
order out of chaos. The victim is so unstable with all his or her
programmed and hurting parts, that these parts need their
programmer to function. Evil spirits are like unwelcome
visitors to our home. They can even be compared to an
unwelcome mouse running and hiding in our house. That a
visitor or mouse troubles us does not mean that he possesses us.
Christians have problems with unwelcome mice as well as
unwelcome demons. Mice corrupt our homes, likewise demons
come to corrupt the House of
Page 258 ...
God. The programmer knows what encourages demonic
activity. This is why certain occultic structures are built into the
mind, and why the systems are set up to carry Out occult rituals
regularly. Some victims of mind-control are unfortunately
going to witches for their therapy. A therapist who is a pagan
witch, and who encourages further occult activity, is preventing
the victim from gaining freedom. This is because there is a
spiritual foundation to much of the control. (Readers would be
surprised at how many psychologists are part of the occult
world.) How much of our life has been turned over to Christ?
Many Christians have what could be termed "hidden rooms"
and hidden compartments in their life & their thinking which
they have not given to Christ. In fact, many Christians
compartmentalize their life into their secular job and their
Sunday of Christianity. In this sense, their lives are like a house
with many rooms, many of which are not given to Christ, but
are available for other spirits. Even the non-multiple Christian
will have problems with compartmentalization in life opening a
door to demons. But Christ asked his disciples to go farther
than just stay in fellowship, he commanded them to heal and
cast out demons. MT 10:7,8. He also commanded his disciples
to evangelize. The strongest deliverance have been seen on the
cutting edge of evangelism, as a testimony to God’s power.
DOES IT GLORIFY DEMONS TO CAST THEM OUT?
The threat of deliverance has the Satanic leaders of the
Illuminati scared enough that they have actively disseminated a
doctrine among the Christian churches that it gives power to
Satan to believe in demons. There is a kernel of truth here, but
it doesn’t give glory to Satan to defeat demons and to expel
them. If you were fired from your job, would that glorify you?
No. Defeating demons is actually showing how weak they are,
not glorifying them. Healing and deliverance are part of the
ministry of freedom that Christ demonstrated to his disciples,
and they are to accompany the preaching of freedom
(evangelism).
PART D. A complete Chronology of how the victim
experiences the early spiritual programming. (by Cisco)
Steps of Programming:
a. The mother-fetus trauma
b. The Apple-Woodsman ritual
c. The 1st Ritual Theft of Birthright
d. The 2nd Ritual Theft of Birthright
e. The Satanic Wedding Prog. Ritual
f. The Lockup of the Guardian Angel
g. The Revelation of Demons
h. Providing Satanic Toys
i. The Participation Ritual
j. The layering in of witches/monsters
k. The prog. base-Fairy Tales told
1. The Ritual to Test Loyalty to Oaths
m. Prog. building blocks- Nursery Rhymes
n. The Hell Fire Ceremony
o. The Cutting the Penis Ritual
p. The Traitors Death Ritual
It is important to understand the nature and the sequence of
these standard programming rituals. I, Cisco, have decided to
reveal them so that the therapists will comprehend better what
the programming is really all about. We have touched on a few
of these rituals in our two previous books, but we haven’t
spelled them out. These programming rituals in real life are
extremely traumatizing, even to the hardened cult parents who
often must offer their children up to abuse that even they don’t
want to happen to their children. When these programming
rituals happen to a child, they are so severe that they split the
child’s mind. We don’t want therapists and readers falling apart
by reading about these programming rituals, so you will find
the descriptions of these rituals are clinical, and
Page 259 ...
are written without a great deal of emotional content.
a. The mother-fetus trauma
We have written about the traumas given to the mother and
fetus in chapter 1 of this book and chapter 1 of the Vol. 2 book.
Between these two books, there are approximately 9 pages
concerning the traumas at this pre-birth stage. It could also be
explained that the intensity and nature of the pre-birth traumas
relate to whether the mother is Illuminati or not. During the
1940’s-’50s the Illuminati made it a high priority to marry
members of the Illuminati to Christians for the purposes of
infiltrating the churches. After a 20 year period of intense
infiltration to such groups as the Southern Baptists, the
Mennonites, the Pentecostal Holiness, the Four-Square, and the
Assemblies of God, then they could rely upon their members
within those groups to generationally continue their presence
within these groups. Initially, they wanted the infiltration to be
covered by marriage into these denominations. If a mother were
not of the Illuminati, she was typically prepared for an
overwhelming trauma to be administered during her pregnancy.
If she drank coffee or tea, she could be given potent herbs daily
to set the stage for later drugs administered during the torture.
The herbs set the stage for drugs which would make the mind
more pliable to hypnosis, because many Christians are resistent
to hypnosis. When the Illuminati would finally by force grab
and traumatize the mother, their goal would be to see if they
could get the mother to renounce (blaspheme) Christ. They
hoped to use this to blackmail the person into future submission
and shame. They also were gaining experience into what kind
of resistance they would face in the final takeover. An hypnotic
trigger would be attached to this torture memory, and then the
mother would be hypnotically made to forget the
b. The Apple-Woodsman ritual.
The powerful Tin Man Ritual is described on page 103 of the
Vol. 2 Formula book. It is where the parent(s) presents the child
to Lucifer, "the god of light". The Tin Man appeared in the first
picture (page 4) of our illustrated Guide to Monarch
Programming. It was positioned there because it is often the
first ritual memory. The child eats an apple that is poisoned and
dies, and then is brought back to life because the coven has the
antidote on hand. Next, the parent dedicates the child to
Lucifer; if not, then the child will have its head severed by the
Tin Man’s ax. This dedication mocks the Pentecostal
dedication. Bear in mind, that some parents and programmers
can only justify what they do, because they feel they are
following "Lucifer’s orders." They will say, "We do it to please
Lucifer." They feel Lucifer wants the child in its purest state, so
they will do the moon child ceremony in the womb to allow
Lucifer to plant his spirits in the fetus (which is a mockery of
God’s spirit in the Christ-Child.)
c. The 1st Ritual Theft of Birthright
When the child victim is four, this ritual typically is done to
them during the 10 days to 2 weeks of rituals done around
Easter. The ritual is not always done at this time. If both parents
are Illuminati, then their primary job is to see their children get
programmed; but if only one parent is Illuminati, then the group
may have to work with the child whenever they can manipulate
some time to do so. Also the Illuminati have so many children
to put through programming, that many simply do not start this
ritual at Easter. But if they are not done at Easter, they may be
told when it is done that it is the time around Easter. The
programmers have certain windows of time for certain
programs and schedules to follow for each child. They can be
untrue to the real calendar date, and still set the internal
clock/calendars of the slave correctly later.
Page 260 ...
This first ritual is to make sure the child victim experiences a
staged rejection of God where they are found unworthy to be in
"His’ Book of Life. This ritual like all the others that we will
describe in this series are sealed with rape and the implantation
of demons.
d. The 2nd Ritual Theft of Birthright
This second ritual is done shortly after the first ritual, generally
a few days after. It consists of a death, burial and resurrection
ritual. To die means death towards God, burial means to bury
all that makes up a person’s worth, and resurrection means to
be resurrected with a new name and birthed to Satan. This and
the 1st theft ritual are designed to remove any bonds the deeper
alters might ever conceive of having with Almighty God.
e. The Satanic Wedding Prog. Ritual
Within days of the 2nd theft ritual, the Illuminati will follow
with a mock satanic wedding. Usually the father will marry his
daughter, but there is a chain of responsibility and if the father
can’t sexually abuse his child, then the grandfather is next in
line, and then the uncle, and then the programmer. They will
serve as the satanic covering for the child. At this point the
rejection by God is still fresh on the child’s mind, and they
want the child to at least remember the rejection, whether they
remember the incident or not depends. The child may already
have dissociated the previous week or two, so the programmer
may simply tell it "REMEMBER THE FEAR WHEN GOD
DIDN’T LOVE YOU."
The child may really be looking forward to this wedding. They
may have been dressed up nicely, and may be excited about
marrying their father, even though he looks like a giant to the
little infant. When their dress is pulled up and they are abused,
then the fun stops.
f. The Lockup of the Guardian Angel.
The Internal Self Helper, also called the Guardian Angel of the
mind, is magically locked up by the demonic power of the
programmers, and a shrewd lying demon substituted in its
place. The evil spirits that will be laid in will be the totems of
the victim’s bloodline--the spirits of the person’s bloodlines
who are to help guide the person. Many people in the New Age
movement who are under total mind-control speak about their
guardian angel or their totem guiding them. An example of a
total mind-controlled slave doing this are the indian spirit
guides that help Loretta Lynn. Hillary Clinton consults the
spirit Eleanor Roosevelt. In order to familiarize the child with
the proper demons they will be dressed up in a costume that
resembles the bloodline spirit they are to become acquainted
with. They will participate in a ritual in this costume.
g. The Revelation of Demons.
At this point, both the front (the light side) and the deeper
occult dark side alters will be allowed to see the demons that
are layered in. The front side sees them in their Luciferian
form, and are scared out of their wits. They may respond to this
by having an ongoing fear of monsters under their bed. The
front’s fear will keep the front away from trying to go deeper
into the system. Later on in adult life, the Illuminati may want
the front part of the system to go through a "deliverance", so
they will think they have dealt with everything, and they don’t
need to look further. (For instance, this trick was done to a
programmed multiple this author has worked with, the result
being, the victim gave up any type of therapy or helpful work,
because they were sure they’d received the answer to their
problems, which would be nice if it were true, but isn’t.) On the
flip side, even though the dark side alters are also scared of the
demons, who are quite terrorizing when seen by humans, the
inherent need of humans to look for supernatural help pulls
them toward the demonic. It is an inborn survival trait in most
humans to look to supernatural help. By seeing
Page 261 ...
the spiritual (even though these are dark spiritual forces), it
becomes a normal function for the deeper alters to commune
with the dark spiritual realm.
h. Providing Satanic Toys
The deeper alters will be given candles, knives and other ritual
paraphernalia to play with. The establishment department stores
with all their demonic toys are helpful, for the parent only
needs to go to the local department store to buy his children
occult toys.
i. The Participation Ritual
Soon after the wedding ceremony, another ceremony takes
place where the child dresses up in the cult’s red and black
ceremonial robes. This is meant to integrate them into the cult
family. It is an opportunity for the child to feel like it is part of
the group and its rituals.
j. The layering in of witches/monster scripts
The normal American fairy tales, which are filled with stories
of monsters and witches, are read to the child. The goblins,
warlocks, vampires, and witches they hear about will help lay a
mental foundation for what will happen later.
k. Cult Fairy Tales are told.
Next, the people in the child’s life who are guiding the
programming will tell the child programming stories, such as
the Wizard of Oz stories and Alice In Wonderland. In the SO’s
and 60’s, the Tall Book of Make Believe was popular. For
instance the character Mr. Moon became a foundational part of
the programming. Over the years the Wizard of Oz, Alice In
Wonderland, and Mother Goose seem to have been overall
favorites. The child will most often be in a trance state when
these story lines are told. The children will have the stories
repeated and they are expected to memorize these scripts.
Because the programmers will build upon the child’s awareness
of these stories, the stories are modified to better fit the future
programming. For instance, if a programming team is going to
use the Goldilocks and the 3 Bears story, they might modify the
story like this: The 3 bears and Goldilocks went for a walk.
Goldilocks was somewhere she shouldn’t have been, so she
was eaten up by the bears. Bears will eat you up. Policemen are
like bears. A Policeman found her? Do you know what
happened to her? Goldilocks got locked up and put in a cage.
Or maybe they might say, Goldilocks was sitting where she
wasn’t supposed to.-- At that moment the chair is pulled out
from underneath the child and the child is probed with a stun
gun. In the last 20 years, tens of thousands of children are
getting "Pleiadian" programming, and it is not known what
base fairy-tales are being used for this type of programming, or
if they are using sci-fi stories as the base. There are tens of
thousands of children with programming that can be activated
to make them think they were raised on Alcyone in the
Pleiades. This is to part of the Grand Deception of the End
Times.
l. The Ritual to Test Loyalty to Oaths
The next step is to test the loyalty of the child slave to the oaths
that were extracted from it. To prove the child’s loyalty, the
coven demands that the child sacrifice another child. From
what we witnessed, even after all the abuse and hypnotic
tampering of the child up to this point, not one single child was
"loyal" to the oath. The inborn aversion to taking a human’s life
is strong, and the child will still refuse to do it. Therefore, the
cult will have a member guide the child by taking the child’s
hand and forcing it to sacrifice the innocent little life before
them. In spite of their reluctance, the forced act begins to rip
the fabric of the child slave’s mind and to sear its conscience.
The cult will be sure to insure that the child is made to feel
responsible, and that they are given guilt and shame for the
deed.
Page 262 ...
Once the innocent victim is sacrificed, the child slave is
required to cut the bloody heart out and eat it. The child has
already been groomed for this, because the cult has been
feeding blood in their milk as a pablum. The child has been
allowed to get very hungry and then given blood so that in the
end hunger is associated with death, and blood is associated
with satisfying that hunger.
m. Prog. building blocks- Nursery Rhymes
The Nursery rhymes are now layered in. There is something
mentally powerful about rhymes. Mother Goose nursery
rhymes have been popular for over a half century for
programming little children. The child’s mind will refuse some
things (such as it distaste for killing an innocent child in the
previous ritual), but the child’s mind doesn’t realize anything
devious about the adorable nursery rhymes. The child’s mind
will not put up any barriers to learning them. The child has no
idea that by hearing these rhymes they are helping lay the
foundation for their own mind-control.
n. The Hell Fire Ceremony.
This ceremony is basically the burning up of a child to instill in
the child victim fear of disobedience and to show them what
hell is all about. The reason this is done will be explained soon.
This ceremony is done with one of four possibilities, a. a real
baby, b. a dead miscarriage, c. a stage pretend child, d. movies.
For sure, the Illuminati will have a real bonfire, and there will
be the stench of death. They will play tapes of screaming,
terrified children to amplify how bad it will be in hell. Why do
the Illuminati want the children to fear hell? First, if they ever
do learn about the Bible, they will "know for sure" that this is
the punishment that the God who rejected them wants for them.
Next, the Illuminati tell the children that IF they are bad, they
will suffer in hell, but if they are good in the cult, Satan their
father will protect them and let them rule with him in hell. They
want the child to be terrified of Hellfire and Brimstone. This
ceremony is often done where there is a crematorium. The
Presideo in CA was popular because a underground
crematorium was there. Bear in mind, that the child by this time
has lost its true self, and is simply in terror at watching a child
like themselves turned to ashes. In certain types of hot fires, the
child is turned to ashes so quick that the child’s figure becomes
a silhouette of ashes. The Illuminati will then begin teaching
the child an important item, they will teach it to take on the
spirit of the child through guilt manipulation. They’ll say,
"Don’t you feel really bad that this happened to her, but you
can fix it by internalizing her to yourself. Take the spirit of the
child into you."
o. The Cutting the Penis Ritual. This ritual is just as it sounds.
The child is forced to emasculate another male. This ritual is
intended to be severe. It again forces the child to choose
between following their oaths or following what their heart tells
them is a right. Because they will again refuse to carry out their
oath of obedience, and will again be helped to obey, they will
be an easy preplanned target of lots of shaming and guilt. This
is one of the primary foundations for the shame and guilt that is
built into the dark side alters. The child will be hit with sticks
by the cult, while the Illuminati coven snarl, "Shame on you,
you didn’t obey as you promised." It is at this ritual, that the
Illuminati coven will first begin to double-bind the victim by
threatening them, "It’s you or them [the person the child slave
is to hurt], you choose." The little child sees two kinds of
people in life, victimizers and victims. He or she will generally
choose to be a victimizer. There will other times when the slave
will not be given a choice and will have to suffer pain during
the rituals.
p. The Traitor’s Death Ritual.
The child victim will be left relatively drug free so they can
Page 263 ...
have full awareness of the Traitor’s Death which they witness.
A person will receive the horrible traitors death during a ritual.
The strong satanic alters will be built off the dissociated pieces
caused by this ritual. And as is standard practice the ritual is
sealed by a rape of the child to layer in more demons.
**This ends Cisco’s very informative chronology. Let’s sort
out some of the specific programming maneuvers.

Part E. Specific Programming maneuvers. The

MANIPULATION OF NEAR-DEATH-EXPERIENCES
(NDEs)
People, who undergo Illuminati programming, will be
candidates for near-death experiences. In several of the
programming scripts, the victim is brought to the point of
clinical death and then revived. In hospital settings,
resuscitation of heart failure and other deathly events like
surgery has produced tens of thousands of cases of Near-death
experiences (NDE’s). According to Raymond Moody, who
worked with or experienced people experiencing NDEs, the
typical NDE involves the person hearing himself announced
dead. Then a loud ringing or buzzing noise occurs and a long,
dark tunnel appears with a light at the end. The person will
meet others and a being of light, and this light-being will play
back events in the person’s life, and evaluate his life, and then
the person reaches a point where he must go back. People, who
experience a NDE are profoundly changed. Any profound
change that follows patterns can be manipulated and the
Illuminati have discovered this is simply just another way to
manipulate people. The NDE experiences follow patterns. We
will not go into the details of why most of the NDE
explanations can’t be the actual explanations, but the bottom
like is that most explanations fall short and do not explain the
phenomena. The frequency and consistency of a tunnel being
seen with a light at the end rules out hallucinations in terms of
symbology. The mind could just as well see a gate, or keyhole,
or a door as an entrance to a new world but doesn’t. Some
researchers believe that the answer lies in the structure of the
visual cortex, and that the dying person’s center of the visual
field receives an ever increasing electrical noise while dying
which produces an ever increasing circle of light being seen.
On the flip side, for those who have a biblical perspective, there
are explanations that also seem to explain the phenomena. At
any rate, it’s been known after Heinrich Kiuver published his
research in the 1930’s that the brain has four constants in its
Near-Death hallucinations: the cobweb, the grating (or lattice),
the spiral and the tunnel. Drugs have been found to produce an
experience similar to NDE at times too. Whatever spiritually
and physically happens to cause a NDE--and there is lots of
debate as to the mechanics of the cause--the common
experiences that people have during NDE’s provides a pattern
for the programmers to manipulate. Various people, the
Illuminati, some Christians, and others believe that Eccl.
12:6-7, --which is talking about when a man dies ("dust return
to the earth as it was") and his spirit returning to God who gave
it,--these various people believe that the silver cord spoken
about in verse 6 is a cord that links a person to his god. This
verse makes a good verse for the Illuminati who do program in
wheels and silver cords into their slaves linking them to their
pretending-to-be-god masters.
FINE-TUNED
One of the side "benefits" of the brain-stem scarring, the
repeated tortures, the attention that is expected if the slave is to
survive, etc. is that they may develop extremely sensitive
perception. This extremely sensitive perception may come
across as ESP, but it is really subconscious understanding of
things such as body language.
HIDING THE INTERNAL SELF-HELPER
Page 264 ...
Psychologists have discovered that deep in the mind is an area
of thinking they refer to as the Internal Self-helper.
Psychologists who attempt to help programmed multiples have
been told to find the ISH (internal self-helper) of the victim.
Sometimes the "ISH" have surfaced as ‘‘angels’’ and ‘‘spirit
guides’’ in a system. They may regulate which alters come out
and hold the body. The therapist may point out to a person that
angels and spirit guides are never internal, unless they are
demonic. The Christian is permitted scripturally to only be led
by one internal spirit guide, and that’s is the Holy Spirit. In
some systems, the slave’s "Holy Spirit" may turn out to be a
cult ISH. The programmers were many steps ahead of the
psychologists. Even years before the psychologists began
looking for the ISH to help them, the programmers had
foreseen this and had their bases covered. In everyday life, for
normal people, the internal self-helper serves as a type of
guardian angel over each person. The programmers during the
early LSD trips watch for the ISH. When it surfaces, they lock
it up in the person’s mind, and replace it with a demonic
generational spirit, which is commanded to report any work
done in the system to the master. When psychologists find the
ISH and ask for its help, the ISH does cooperate with them, but
this demonic ISH is also one of the principal reporting agents
that reports back to the master in photographic detail everything
that the therapist does. This is one big reason the programmers
have always been several steps ahead of the therapeutic
community.
INTERJECT DISKS
Splintered souls captured on Interject disks is a subject that is
beyond verification but is mentioned here because therapists
and "UFO abductees", and SRA victims of mind-control may
run into it. Readers must draw their own conclusions as to what
soul interjects are--whether merely a deception, a new
technology, or magical demonic manifestation. Hermetic magic
is a nasty form of magic from ancient Egypt. There are a few of
the top Illuminati Grand Masters who believe they are capable
of carrying out rituals to raise the dead and create interjects
onto interject disks. Specialized magic is performed on the dead
to raise zombies in order to splinter the zombie’s soul. The
Grand Master then believes he can place the splinters of the
soul on interject disks, and place these interjects into live
slaves. Interestingly, humans claiming contact with "aliens"
have claimed that the aliens can separate a human soul from its
body, keep it captured, recondition that soul, and finally
implant the soul into another body. Some researchers are
claiming that they have evidence of a holographic energy
template that is associated with a physical body. Is this the
soul? They believe that this template works with cellular
genetic mechanisms. There is certainly more to learn about
what humans are, perhaps some day these claims about zombie
souls will have some scientific merit, but for now they lay in
the realm of Illuminati Grand Master high magic.
I have reported upon Illuminati beliefs and practices. Likewise,
an anthropologist will report on the practices & customs of a
people, whether or not the anthropologist personally practices
or believes like the people he observes. Of course, these
luciferian (or should one say satanic practices) are abhorrent
and the author has never practiced them, so the author can’t
speak from the viewpoint of a witness, but he can describe as a
reporter the views of Illuminati witnesses. One Illuminati belief
is that they have managed to design equipment that can catch
the soul of a dying person. This capability will play a role in the
reign of the anti-Christ. When the Anti-Christ dies, his soul will
be captured and he will be resurrected with demons animating
the body. When a very high ranking Illuminati adept goes
berserk, the Illuminati will insure that they preserve the soul of
the man by killing him with equipment that is portrayed in
Page 265 ...
the recent movie Lord of Illusion. This is a mask-brace that fits
over the portals of the head and then is screwed into the head to
capture the soul as it tries to escape the dying body. Then
demons are called in to live off the soul matter. Normally,
according to Illuminati occult knowledge, the demons can only
live a short time within a body, but by the mask-brace capture
of a body’s soul, the demons can inhabit a body for a longer
length of time and create the walking dead. This is that "line
between heaven and hell" that the movie refers to. The
Illuminati believe that the highest gift they can give Lucifer are
captured souls. They will place souls into jars. This is the
highest most secret magic of the Illuminati. Notice, that during
the Lord of Illusion movie, jars are smashed during the ritual
where a soul is captured. Interviews with alien abductees
reveals that some of them believe that the aliens are stealing the
souls of mankind. The similarity of the Illuminati beliefs about
demons, and the perceived actions of the aliens by abductees
are remarkably similar. Also the Illuminati have secretly used
special tubing during millions of abortions performed by their
abortion clinics to capture the souls of the aborted children.
(This is author is not making any claims that they do or don’t
succeed, but they believe they are succeeding.) The movie Lord
of Illusion is full of Illuminati/high level Masonic symbology.
The movie begins with programming concepts, first the
galaxies & stars, then the yellow brick road, then a dust storm...
An Illuminati phrase "Flesh is a trap, magic sets you free" is
mentioned in the movie. In contrast with the movie, these
things are not written to entertain the reader, but with the
good-natured intent that therapists and victims may gain
something by knowing better what is going on to these
Illuminati mind-control victims. The Illuminati believe that
they can suck the life spirit out of a person through intercourse
with what they call the Eye of Horus (the anus). This is why the
leaders of this World Order (such as George Bush, Bill Clinton,
and tens of thousands of others) are into sodomy, they are
trying to vampirize all the years of life out of the victim to gain
a longer life. Some of the sad child victims, who have been
kept exclusively for this purpose do look like the life force has
been sucked out of them. Sodomy has its own secret chamber
on the cabalistic tree of life. A metaphysical UFO type
magazine entitled WE Walk-Ins for Evolution puts out articles
on how souls walk-into a body and how souls braid themselves
to other souls. For instance, there was an article "Soul
Braiding" in the April-June, ‘96 issue of WE. This appears to be
a refraining of various practices that the Illuminati carry out to
demonize and control the minds of their people. Rather than
speak of a demonization or an interject, front alters of slaves
who are not Christians can use metaphysical terms like "soul
braiding". The words soul and spirit, and concepts attached to
those words are important in programming. Programmed
Mormon children will think they have the "Spirit of Elijah" in
them, and will robotically sing their programming, "Follow the
Prophet, follow the prophet."
WHITE GOLD, other information
Since writing about powdered white gold’s ability to make a
person clairvoyant, in Vol. 2, it’s come to my attention that
Nexus magazine has had a recent article on this. For those who
are interested in crystal travel, crystal travel is an OBE also
known as astral projection and is covered in the Vol. 2 book as
astral projection. Besides the silver cord, some victims have
mentioned a supernatural dark red violet umbilical that
connects them to the AntiChrist.

Page 266
Click here for picture 1

Click here for picture 2

Back to Contents Chapter 11
 Click here for picture

Page 267 ...

CHAPTER 11
SCIENCE No. 11- INTERNAL CONTROLS

A. TEACHING OCCULT PHILOSOPHIES

This is an important ongoing aspect of the mind-control. Vol. 2,
introduced this subject: "Learning plays an important part in
perception. The Programmers try to get their victims to
subscribe to philosophies and ideas that will make it hard for
them to rebel against their controllers. This is what is termed
indoctrination. The same methods of teaching that others [any
other educator would] find useful are employed. Ways of
thinking are incorporated by the slave via handlers,
programmers, and the cult they belong to. "Everyone tries in
their own way to make sense of life. This is a natural brain
function, so that the human mind can understand how to deal
with the future. The mind takes raw data, and then applies some
type of logic, and comes to conclusions. Once accepted these
conclusions can be as hard as nails, and they will defy any
attempt to change them, even in the light of new evidence. If
the Programmer is smart enough, he can get an alter to logically
believe anything. Once the belief is embedded, it will remain
there tenaciously." In the previously book, it was discussed
how indoctrination is done. I will provide more of the details on
how indoctrination is accomplished, because it is not being
done via rational logical thinking. Rather, the programmer or
cult leaders want to access a person’s non-logical imaginative
right brain. In order to do that he must distract the left brain.
Bill Clinton, an Illuminati handler of slaves, and a good liar,
has his speeches prepared in such a way that they take
advantage of the brain’s natural functioning to manipulate it.
Bill Clinton, when he gives a speech will initiate it by pushing
everybody’s green buttons. He will say a number of things that
everyone wants to hear and will agree with. This is called
"generating a YES SET’. There will be a number of these, the
number of these often desired is 3. Then the second stage is to
bring in TRUISMS that are facts that after the audience has
already been mentally saying yes, the audience will probably
accept these facts without any disagreement. Finally, after the
approx. three YES SETs, the approx. three TRUISMS, Bill will
plant the suggestion, such as "support me in such and such." On
important points, Bill will move his left hand, to help imbed
certain commands to his viewers. He will also use some subtle
hand signals/codes to trigger mind-controlled slaves too. He
will ask during his talks for people to imagine or visualize what
he wants for them. Again this is manipulation directed at the
right brain. One of the most crucial things that protects the
mind-control of the Illuminati is the frame-of-reference and
world-view they build into people from the cradle to the grave.
Our previous experience and the information we have available
directly influences how we assign meaning to information we
receive. The Illuminati’s control over so much of society allows
them to create people’s frames-of-references. Fragments of
information that people receive which do not relate to the
person’s frame-of-reference will be discarded. A person needs a
place in his frame-of-reference to hang information on. The
person may puzzle over the tidbits of incongruent fragments,
but being unable to relate them to his world view, he finds
himself unable to file the fragments away in a meaningful
manner. Some of the front alters of very well controlled slaves
have had world views (frames-of-references) that believe, a.
there is no such thing as Satanic Ritual Abuse, b. there is no
such thing as a conspiracy, c. there is no such thing as absolute
truth, d. there is no such
Page 268 ...
thing as sin. e. There is no connection between God, living a
moral life, and finding Truth. f. there is no such thing as
Multiple Personality Disorder. g. My religious organization can
do no wrong. Making a fundamental change in our frame of
reference is a frightening task. This is why victims of total
mind-control who have been A. programmed not to believe that
a New World Order conspiracy exists, and not to believe
Satanism and SRA exist, and then they are B. placed in a
culture that reinforces this programming, end up being
extremely hard to break free of their mind-control. Conferences
where mind-control victims can begin to see the significance of
all the fragments of clues that they discarded are very valuable.
This author has met a number of mind-controlled victims who
didn’t know what their problem was, but had countless clues in
their life. But these clues were useless fragments of information
until they were given a framework to use them. For instance,
one victim of Illuminati total mind-control knew nothing about
the significance of the Illuminati bloodlines, nor who the
bloodlines were. She stated that her relatives were so and so,
and it was then pointed out to her that she was from Illuminati
bloodlines on both sides, and the significance of the bloodlines
was gone over. Now a meaningless piece of information (her
genealogy) had been given a framework of meaning. But this
was just one area of many which the establishment has
carefully controlled us to have misunderstandings about.
Understanding her heritage, allowed her to understand why she
was selected for mind-control, when it seemed to her that others
might have been better candidates. Occult philosophies by their
very nature create frames of references that make it hard to see
reality and to see the Truth in Jesus Christ of Nazareth. The
New Age, Witchcraft, and Hindu idea that all paths lead to
God, is utter nonsense. The idea that Christians are narrow
minded is nonsense, but is a common idea taught by many
people. It is narrow minded to insist that Christians must go to
the same place Hindu’s end up, if Christians seek truth. The
New Agers see only one track for truth seekers, since they hold
all paths lead to God. The concept is even illustrated by the
wheel in India’s flag. All spokes on the wheel lead to the same
center point of the circle. The Biblical Christians see two tracks
for truth seekers--some don’t find God and Truth, but rather
find an imitation of the truth and end up eternally lost, while
some do find God and Truth. Perhaps at this point the reader is
getting slightly upset because he or she is thinking, "Fritz is
preaching what he believes," and is also thinking "there is no
absolute truth." That is exactly my point. By accepting the
lie--the programming lie--the frame of reference--the paradigm
that there is no absolute truth, then every time a fragment of
absolute truth comes to you, you will reject it. When I showed
evidence to two followers of J.Z. Knight (J.Z. Knight was/is a
mind-controlled slave, who has set up an Illuminati front
religion in Washington State where converts are subjected to
mind-control techniques) that children were being sacrificed by
Satanic covens and that this was evidence of Satanic ritual
abuse, their world view could not accept the concept of
absolute wrongs and sin. They responded, "These satanists may
well be killing their babies, but that is not abuse, that is only
your idea. It’s just your idea that it is abuse. It’s not abuse to
these people." In review, one of the hardest shells protecting the
programming of a total mind-controlled slave is when the front
part of their system, which holds the body regularly, has been
indoctrinated into a frame-of-reference that will not allow them
to see the reality of what is being done to make and keep them
in slavery. A final example of this, are the zealots of the False
Memory Syndrome Foundation who are mind-controlled
zealots. These zealots, who are launching a counterattack
Page 269 ...
against books like this, have had their world-views carefully
constructed by a combination of several techniques of
persuasion, a. mass indoctrination, b. subliminal messages via
the T.V. and other places in their lives, c. controlled education,
and Neuro-Linguistic Programming, in addition to all their
regular trauma-based programming. It’s like their world-view is
the hard varnish that is first seen & heard, protecting people
(even themselves) from realizing that the underlying motivation
of these zealots is not their world-view, but Total Mind Control
Programming. Within witchcraft, the cosmology that is taught
is that a person was originally swirls or vortexes of energy.
This coupled with a belief in reincarnation, allows the
mind-controlled victim’s witchcraft alters to believe that they
began with some molecules of energy forming, and that death is
nothing, because everything continues on a vast wheel of
reincarnation. The beliefs that are inserted into people via
witchcraft are conducive to locking the person into their
servitude. European culture, which has been based on
Christianity, has had a respect and value on life way beyond the
oriental view. For centuries europeans have marvelled about
how little value human life has in the oriental view. This is
because these Oriental views are identical with what is now
called New Age beliefs, which are also about the same thing as
witchcraft. Gnostism/ witchcraft philosophy justifies seeking
and having power. Persons, who are power hungry, gravitate to
this philosophy. Persons who are inculcated with the desire for
power rationalize their behavior with the witchcraft philosophy
which they are raised in, or programmed to believe, or
"discover" to set their minds at ease.

B. INTERNAL COMPUTERS
Internal computers are elaborate arrangements of dissociated
parts and memories built into the slave’s mind to cause the
victim’s mind to have mechanical computer-like responses.
For years, the internal computers escaped the detection of the
therapeutic community. The illustrated Guidebook introduced
the subject to readers and the Vol. 2 gave the first major & so
far to date the only comprehensive expose of these computers.
This Deeper Insights book will provide a number of pages to
deepen the readers understanding of this important subject. This
is all fresh (never been exposed) material so don’t write and ask
what book it came from. You may have to refer back to our
previous books for a complete understanding.
Installation of the Standard Programming.
The Illuminati take a screen about 6’ by 6’. On the screen is a
grid with a Greek or English letter. In front of the screen are
colored flashing lights. The flashing colored lights prevent the
conscious mind from seeing the screen, but the subconscious
mind sees the grid. An Alpha symbol or capital A with tails at
the base will be shown on the grid screen for Alpha
programming. A Beta or B will be shown for the Beta
Programming screen. The programming that is placed in using
the different programming associated with various Greek and
English alphabets can be read about in Chapter 4 of the Volume
2 Formula book and Chapter 4 in this book. The victim is
strapped into a chair with their head locked in place and their
eyes forced open. They must endure the flashing lights and the
subliminal grid and letter on the screen.
There is a paper trail that they are using flashing lights for
hypnotic control of a subject in order to place in messages at
the subconscious. One of the pieces of the paper trail was an
article "New Device To Induce Hypnosis Developed" in the
Chicago Tribune (June 7, 1959). The article was about a Dr.
William Kroger, who had tested the use of flashing lights on
200 obstetric patients at the Edgewater hospital in Chicago.
Interestingly, this Dr. Kroger lived in Beverly Hills, CA and
worked with a Sidney Schneider of Skokie, IL.
Page 270 ...
Schneider was skilled in electronics and Kroger was an
obstetrician. The article said, "The pulsing pattern in reality an
electronic brain wave ‘achieves control’ of the brain’s alpha
rhythm, thus inducing a drowsy state, according to Dr. Kroger."
"The apparatus...operates on the principal of subliminal and
photic stimulation of brain waves...about 30 per cent of the
subjects who had received no explanation or had no knowledge
of what the brain wave synchronizer would do were hypnotized
to various degrees." Now these type of machines are available
to any bozo who knows where they are sold.
Another piece of the paper trail is a government study by the
Defense Intelligence Agency of July 1972, entitled Biological
Effects of Electromagnetic Radiation (Radiowaves and
Microwaves) --Eurasian and Communist Countries,
ST-CS-01-169-72. DIA,, July, 1972, pp. 77-86. This study, of
which this author has a copy, in part VI is written about "Light
and Color as a Means of Altering Human Behavior." Although
the report claims the communists are the ones who are using
flashing light and color to alter human behavior, the real
inventors were the Illuminati, and both the Americans and
Russians are using flashing colored lights for programming.
This DIA study also reports on an American symposium held in
the at Tulane Univ., Covington, LA in 1957 concerning the
effects of flickering light on the brain. The participants of the
1957 American symposium drew up a paper with 11
conclusions, which included a. flickering light interferes with
the human nervous system, b. flickering light can put a person
to sleep or into a trance, c. flickering light can interfere with the
brains s alpha waves, and d. "photo driving of the EEG by
periodic flicker is a well known phenomenon although many
subjects do not show the effect..." During the ’50’s through at
least the ’70’s, the Illuminati used flickering lights to place into
the subconscious the grids used for the various computers. Each
block on the grid would have codes, programs, memory and
alters attached to it. In other words, dissociated parts of the
mind become parts which are built into computers. The mind of
victim is hijacked by the programmer.
To fully understand what the computers are, we must
understand the mind-set of the programmers. The programmers
are looking to Lucifer for their inspiration. An imitation of
God’s Book of Life for people, is for Lucifer to construct an
internal computer that will contain all the history of all the
alters. It might be helpful if some items that were in the
illustrated Guidebook and in the Vol. 2 book were briefly
touched upon again, as we discuss how the internal computers
are made. Remember, that a computer is placed one per layer
(section) and that they also build in back up computers, and that
the computers have coded memories stored in them, as well as
coded programs. The deepest computer is called the Beast
computer, and it has an eye (the all-seeing-eye) that opens and
shuts like a camera lens. It can go behind the veil, and this is in
mockery of the rent veil of the Holy of Holies. When the
internal computers are built, the Illuminati use a doll house with
different colored rooms for the child to visualize what is being
done. Each room in the dollhouse has a different color. Each
family of alters (a group of alters that are on the grid together)
has the exact same color code. In the Vol. 2 book, we showed
the color coding differently--we showed the color coding
running diagonally across the grid, it can be done in any
fashion, but generally the color code for a single family (alters
a-through-in on the chart) is the same, and the cover program to
hide it is that the colors run diagonally. What that means is that
an entire family of alters, say alters Mary 1 through Mary 13
will all be connected by a color
Page 271 ...
ribbon alter (who works just for them) back to that same color
of computer room. All the family get the same programming,
although they hold separate memories. This will help therapists
understand the behavior & programming patterns of various
alters. The Beta and Delta alters, who as the readers realizes
live in entirely a deep trance imaginary life, have entirely
negative programming in their computer section. The Betas and
Deltas have two ribbons per alter, which is an exception to the
rule. This is so they can function together--espionage,
seduction, and assassination all go together. Another type of
alter who gets two ribbons are the 13th alters which connect
two levels. These poor alters have so much programming going
off, and mixed signals, that they are real basket cases. When a
system is seen in its entirety, the more powerful system
hierarchy and illuminati hierarchy alters will be coded with
Platinum, Gold, White, Purple, Bronze & Silver. Front alters
who will be helpful will be coded pink and yellow. Orange
alters will be perceived as helping alters, but they are actually
guards, protectors, and they protect sections of the system
below them, which they usually can’t see, and often don’t know
that they guard. Alters coded brown, tan, grey, or clear will
give the therapist & support team fits, because they are full of
deceptions & cover programs, and illusions. Host alters or key
front alters may have a clear or white diamond as their
gemstone. Alters who cover things up may have obsidian as
their gemstone. Other alters who play along with the
programming may have such gemstones as Fire Opal, Topaz,
and Turquoise. (Also see Vol. 2 , p. 328-29.)
Front Programs of Front Computer.
The front computer that is linked to the front section will be
different than the deeper computers. It’s big difference is that
its programs (which are linked to all the front alters) are logical.
The logical programs of this level provide the alters with
logical reasons and excuses to believe the lies, and to reason
their life out. Of course they draw false conclusions from good
logic using faulty information.
Misinformation Computers.
Misinformation computers are laid in on the 3, 6, 9 and 12
levels. Thousands of demons are placed into the
Misinformation computers to not only run them, but to dispense
misinformation. Since the demons are not under drugs or
hypnosis, they are under full awareness and are very crafty in
their deceptions. When memories are too clean and too
complete, the therapist should suspect that they are getting a
demonic false memory. Bear in mind the child is in a drugged
state during much of the programming and has blurry eyes and
may have their eyes rolling in the back of their head. They have
their short term memories splintered by electro-shock, and are
fed lies about their memories via hypnosis. Real memories are
in bad shape when retrieved. (This is why some persons apply
"hypnotic correction programs" to restore the memories back
closer to the original event, such as reversing the hypnotic
air-brushing/blurring of faces that was programmed into deeper
alters. The mind put in the distortion program and seems in
some cases to be able to reverse the distortion program.)
Beast Computer.
End time names such as Gog, etc. are believed to be given to
some of the computers within recent years, to represent the
names of the 10 countries that will make up the global
government of the New World Order. For years the computers
have been called "Beast" computers with the big important
Beast computer laid in at the bottom of the mind in the hell pit.
Remember that the core is at the bottom of the mind below the
hell pit--but she is almost always never connected to the Beast
computer. This is because the core receives very little
programming. The core is told she is
Page 272 ...
sleeping beauty and that her father Lucifer, who she is married
to, will someday return for her and wake her up. Lucifer wanted
the purest virgin bride he could get, so he marries as his top
bride within the system the innocent core. The core is told she
belongs to Lucifer. The core is protected by the false trinity in
the pyramid and the Grand Druid Council. The core is linked to
the Grand Druid Council, but not the carousel. In the VoL 2
book, we reported the cover program, which is that the core is
in the carousel. If therapists want to take out computers they
need to take them out from the first computer that was laid in,
the Beast computer (at the bottom of the mind), and take them
out in the sequence they were put in.
Programmer Access to the Computer Areas.
When the external programmer wants to put information into
the computer he opens up the various "rooms" (areas or
programs so to speak) and then the internal programmers take
over. The story line used to build in access to the computer is
the King’s Chamber story in Alice In Wonderland. The king
comes to the chamber and he has the right to make 3 wishes
(the 3-part access code). If he doesn’t make 3 wishes,
everything disappears like in the Alice In Wonderland story.
3-part access codes are usually DATE, COLOR,
ALPHA-NUMERIC CODE. But they could be three objects
within the room, or they could be a sound, a touch, and a
third-sight signal. Generally, the Illuminati have used the actual
date that an alter (a part) or a family of alters was created as the
actual code for that chamber of the computer. That chamber
will then be linked to all the alters of that family. So lets say a
family of alters was created on 4-30-64. This would normally
be written on the charts as 43064 or because the Illuminati
often work with things backward, some programmers will write
it 46034. Which ever method, forward or backwards, will then
be used consistently as the first part of the access to that
family’s computer chamber.
There are 26 rooms in the dollhouse, or in other words, 13
families of alters on a grid with 13 mirror images to mirror
those 13. This was very standard for years. When the
programmer places the information in it is put on a mental
imaginary "computer disk" or in the older models "spools". The
reader needs to remember back to the hypnotic surgery that we
discussed in the Illustrated Guidebook and the Vol. 2 book, to
remember that the victim has their insides hypnotically
removed and the spools or computer disks placed inside of
them. Let’s say a therapist touches one of the misinformation
computers, which are the most assessable. These computers
will then activate mirror images and lots of demonic activity.
The therapist may end up integrating demons, and working
with constructs and mirror images, and the proper excitement
by the real alters is even programmed in. These are what may
be termed "FALSE HOPE PROGRAMS". The system will rest
and relax and the therapist will declare everything finished.
(For years, the two authors have tried to explain this, but it
seems to be a hard subject for therapists to understand.) Finally,
a very important warning, tampering with the computers is
serious business, from the co-authors experience in working
with therapists, we strongly advise them not to tamper with the
computers, because the self-destruct programs are so strong.
The self-destruct programs will turn the person into a
vegetable, or into pure insanity if the victim survives the
suicide programs. The skill level among the therapeutic
community is not yet at the level needed to tamper with the
computers, but we hope with the publication of this book and
with more experience that that will someday become a reality.
This author, Fritz, is aware of therapists that have tried to
tamper with the computers, but the programming has beaten
both them and this author. For instance, it took lots of work to
discover that this author’s week of work with a front computer
actually was only
Page 273 ...
playing with a misinformation computer and its
FALSE HOPE PROGRAMS.

C. INTERNAL HIERARCHIES
OVERVIEW.The internal structuring of alter systems are built
with alters being arranged in hierarchies. Often the hierarchal
arrangement is a mirror of the group carrying out the
programming. The CIA and other intelligence groups use
SECTIONS. You will find the grids of alters arranged in
SECTIONS. The Illuminati have a Grand Druid Council and
other councils, which will be mirrored within the system. Alter
families will be set up as mini-covens within the system, often
with 13 to an alter families. HUBS will be created in reflection
of how Satanic groups are organized into hubs.
THE INTERNAL HIERARCHIES form RATIONALES
Some of the structures within the programmed alters reflect the
philosophies of the ancient occult world. The structures are
buttressed by the occult beliefs that are connected to them.
Cisco, who has helped me co-author two books on
mind-control, pointed out how the ancient world had a god
which could only be adored by one family. Each city had its
own gods, and religion was tied to the family and the city units.
This was the Religion of the Hearth, as some have called it. The
Roman Gens was an extension of this, the Gens were political
associations of several families who collected into a religious
union, as the Illuminati families have done. When we see how
the ancient religious customs were, we see how the internal
Illuminati structuring parallels this thinking. Each internal city
or world is assigned a god (demon) during the programming.
The Illuminati families have collected themselves into a Gen.
This is an example of how the internal structuring is buttressed
by some occult philosophy which will in turn buttress itself by
its claim to antiquity, as if length of practice makes a mistaken
superstition valid. The myths of the occult world and their
symbology are very extensive. The programmers have many
items to choose from as they construct the deeper internal
worlds of an Illuminati slave. There is a twisted logic to many
of the names they give. The Magna Mater is the sybil, the
symbol of truth, a goddess who can take the form of a city in
the occult world. To apply the name MAGNA MATER to a
part of the mind then creates a triple or quadruple pun--we have
something that can be truth, a city, a goddess, and a sybil. The
programmers thrive on puns. The personification of the stages
of spiritual life which are called fairies are named White
Ladies, Green Ladies, and Black Ladies. Dissociated parts of
the mind can be given the name Green Ladies, and then the
secret meaning attached that they are fairies that connect to the
system’s spiritual development. The possibilities seem endless.
Since cabalism is behind much of the Illuminati programming,
and double images are so important--some systems may
incorporate the dual being known as Metatron on top, and
Samael on the bottom. This is the occult concept that all
phenomena has an essential ambivalence. This is the Gemini
concept. Another Cabalistic concept that appears in
programming is the silver palace also known as the silver
thread that connects man to his origin and to his end. The
palace in the occult world was to have secret chambers
(dissociated areas in the subconscious) which hold treasure
(programming truths). In the occult world’s beliefs, it has been
said that the palace of glass represents the magically appearing
ancestral memories of mankind from the Golden Age. In
Druidism, the horse was linked to the solar wheel, which had
more wheels within itself.
During programming: Concepts are linked in series, Concepts
are mirrored, and Concepts are related to the whole. The
function of occult symbols lends itself to such applications.
Click here for picture
Back to Contents Chapter 12
 Click here for picture

Page 275 ...

CHAPTER 12
SCIENCE No. 12-
EXTERNAL CONTROLS

Advertizing & Trauma-based programming.

The Oregonian newspaper, Sat. Mar. 9, 1996, (p. E1) ran a

story about women entitled, "She sells, She purrs, she
percolates, she’s a power player: Ads reflect society’s view of
women." At the top right is a ad with a Marilyn Monroe type of
model with puckered lips selling cigarettes. Below her is a
picture of a girl with the caption, "You were born a daughter.
You looked up to your mother. You looked up to your father.
You looked up to everyone. You wanted to be a princess. You
thought you were a princess." The themes in this article match
the thinking within Monarch type programming scripts. Is this
coincidence, or just a sign of the times, that so much in our
lives echoes programming scripts? Some of the ads in today’s
magazines are obvious manipulations of the Monarch
trauma-based mind-control. For instance, Royal & Sun Alliance
Insurance Group controlled by the Rothschilds had an add in a
recent popular magazine which has nothing but an entire page
of violet-blue haze with an eye [an allusion to the All-seeing
eye] staring out of the haze along with the big caption "YOU
HAVE OUR ATTENTION." This would reinforce many of the
mind-control programs. Ostensibly, the ad was for insurance.
Another ad that is an obvious manipulation of mind-control
programming is an Aveda ad placed in Vogue & Vanity Fair
magazines, where a woman’s face is broken up into 4 pieces
and put into a glass bottle along with a white daisy type flower
& a yellow flower. The caption reads ‘You, bottled." the
subcaption reads "what would you be if you came back as a
pure-fume?" Notice the play on words that the programmers
love. Another more subtle example is a Virginia Slims ad
which is designed to hit the subconscious of the Monarch slave.
This ad has three thrones across the top of the page. In front of
the three thrones is the Virginia Slims lady. The first two
thrones have a chubby queen sitting on them & the third on the
far right is vacant. The 3 queens are an allusion to the 3
hierarchy queens and the maiden-mother-hidden crone
sequence in programming. The queen holds a scepter which
adds some more power to this as a subconscious trigger. The
caption reads, "Virginia Slims remembers the shortest reign of
a female monarch. Queen Katrina of Valenski was crowned at
10 past the hour, lit a cigarette at 12 past the hour and was
dethroned at 13 past the hour." The hidden meaning behind this
is that the front woman, remembers on a subconscious level the
threat that if you don’t remember the authority & power
(thrones), and the power structure (the triad), then you shall
remember the programming threat. This ad subtly reinforces the
programming threats to slaves. Other ads that manipulate
programming. use Wizard of Oz, Alice In Wonderland and Star
Wars themes. They use allusions to the programming scripts
and show subtle occult symbols. The hypnotic eye is very
popular in ads. Some ads simply seem to be a reflection of how
our culture has become part of the programming, for instance a
Sportsman device that is sold by an add with a big caption
"Split personality", or a Merit cigarette ad that sells its product
with the caption "Split personality." A watch ad for Bulova has
an empty chair with a banner over it "Personality of the year’
and the caption "Is your watch making you a missing person?"
During the programming, shifts in time certainly do make
certain alters disappear, so although this ad is may not be a
direct attempt to manipulate programming, it certainly is a
product of today’s mind-controlled society. >>>On the next pg.
is an ad appealing directly to the thinking of a programmed
multiple.>>

Page 276/277

Click here for pictures

Page 278 ...

ASSET CONTROL
SURVEILLANCE.
Over the years of watching the Illuminati manage their slaves,
it is clear that they like to have their slaves under constant
surveillance. Often times they use friends of the slave to keep
tabs. For instance, the teams that they put together are great for
using to monitor other team members. If they find that the
acquaintances and friends of the slave are not contributing
enough, they will send out people to keep tabs on the slave.
Surveillance of a slave is done either to let the slave know that
he or she is being watched (obviously as an intimidation
device), or is done in line with common intelligence/police type
tactics. Many times the Illuminati surveillance is so obvious,
that this author has to conclude that it is intentionally so. For
understanding undetectable surveillance, Hollywood movies
are not teaching manuals. To watch someone’s house the
people working for the Illuminati will often try to maintain
about 2 blocks distance. If they have to they can use battery
operated bugs or bugs installed using the wiring in the house. If
they want to get high-tech they can use fiber optics or even go
to satellite-ground antenna monitoring of what a person is
doing. If you are looking for a bug, get a counter that will go up
into the higher ranges, & expect them to stick bugs away from
equipment like refrigerators and air conditioners which make a
lot of noise. They also have directional microphones called
bionic ears which can be used to pick up outside sounds from a
distance. Sophisticated filters can be placed on their listening
devices to screen out background noise. Lasers beamed onto
windows can be used to listen to conversations within a
building, but these have the drawbacks of picking up building
noises, & noises from the street. Laser listening devices are
going to function better at night. Telephone taps are commonly
done by the Network to control and monitor their slaves. There
are low-tech and high-tech ways to do this. The bottom line is
that all telephone conversations in this nation (U.S.), all
CB-radio traffic, all radio traffic has been totally monitored
since before the 1970’s. It is a given that anything you say on
the telephone will be fed into a large computer which has words
to watch for. Unless you believe you are a high-profile person,
who is monitored 24-hours a day, it is best to stay away from
mentioning trigger words in your conversation. Often times, the
people monitoring slaves team trail the slave. Teams of people
can track a person on foot or in a car. Using a team is the best
method in many situations. Often they tag team follow a
person. They also have team formations that are used to keep
track of a person, such as one person on the opposite side of the
street, and one immediately behind and one far behind. Having
a distant tracker allows the close one to avoid being caught if
the slave tries to take evasive action or to ambush the stalker.
If the person watching the slave gets really concerned they may
end up using special headlights called "blackout lights" to
shadow the slave at night, which are shielded to keep the beams
of light from showing in front or to the side of the car. These
special lights light up the road in front of the car only, so the
car remains unseen by the stalked mind-controlled victim.
There are a number of secret devices to aid the abusers in their
control over environment that the slave must live in. The
intelligence groups often use a radio device called AGENT
ALERT which looks like a ballpoint pen which sends out a
continual beeping when it is activated. Besides their Global
Positioning Satellites, intelligence has Pegasus, a ship that can
monitor & record electronic transmissions while sailing
offshore. After reading the mind-control significance of Pegasi,
it clearer the Navy picked an appropriate horse to record
electronic transmissions. Even though all slaves have Reporting
Alters, & are tracked in other ways, the Illuminati often has
redundant safety features to monitor their "human assets".
Because the slave is monitored from so many different unseen
methods, it does begin to seem hopeless to some to ever be free
of Big Brother. If you add to all this, that the slave has been
programmed repeatedly that there is no escaping their
All-seeing eyes, then it is easy to see why so many slaves
acquiesce & just comply. A Vol. 2 reader, who caught onto to
what the book is about, pointed out how the new film The Juror
reflects their approach to control. The movie shows a controller
who is obsessed with who he is controlling. This holds true in
real life for the programmers too. Even though Dr. Mengele
programmed thousands of people in his lifetime, he had his
"pets" (Lieblings), pet slaves that he was obsessed with. In the
movie, the controller says, "Do what I say." and "If I can keep
you scared, I can save your life." These could have come
straight out of a programmer’s mouth. He picks out a juror who
is creative & intelligent to control, which are the criteria for
selecting victims in real life. The movie illustrates some of the
concepts which actually happen that this chapter 12 is trying to
describe.
HARASSMENT
One of the things that the Network does to any slave that tries
to break free, and the Illuminati does to any of their hierarchy
slaves (like this book’s co-author Cisco) who tries to get free is
to harass them constantly. Stephen Knight who researched the
Freemasons wrote a chapter in his book The Brotherhood, The
Secret World of the Freemasons about how they harass any
opposition. (See chapter 16, pp. 140-149). When Knight
interviewed
Page 279 ...
ex-Masons they were in abject fear of the Masonic system.
They didn’t even want to talk about how much power the
Freemasons have to ruin careers, spy, and harass people. Since
Knight’s book is available for the reader, and since there are a
number of books (like those from Loompanics) that are very
detailed on harassment techniques, this book will only briefly
touch on the subject. However, just because it is only briefly
mentioned please don’t mistakingly think this is a minor topic.
The Illuminati and their co-workers the Freemasons, the
Mishpucka, and CIA put outrageously great amounts of efforts
into harassment. It is not unusual for a recovering victim of
mind-control to find their favorite pet killed, or human faeces in
their oven, and other bizarre harassments that show the warped
character of the controllers. The CIA, the Masonic leaders, and
the Mishpucka keep extensive files on everyone for purposes of
blackmail, and coercion. The masonic leadership of
Freemasonry in a given area will have thousands of "blackmail"
files on essentially everyone of importance in their area. Upper
echelon people such as judges, lawyers, and politicians are
generally controlled via IRS infringements, and many of the
lower echelon people are controlled through weird sexual
items. This is where the Delta and Beta Monarch slaves are so
helpful to the Illuminati. The Freemasons can have a sexual
alter seduce a man, contrive a scene, and then an alter that is in
a death trance takes the body so that the target of blackmail
thinks he has killed the woman. It works great for blackmail.
(This information comes from several witnesses who are
informed about the blackmail files & the their methods for
blackmailing.)
CAR COLORS
The Vol. 2 book apparently neglected to relate how the colors
of cars are used to access victims. Some victims around the
U.S. are programmed to red & white cars. Autos with both
colors will arrive. Red & White are the great mystical colors
assoc. with the 2 headed eagle & Janus. White cars are for high
ranking slaves. Very specific sexual slaves are picked up in red
and black cars. In N.Y. brown volkswagons were frequently
used for accessing slaves. Two tone cars will be used to trigger
particular alters to come out. Another common practice that is
occurring across the U.S. is for the draconian enforcers to
borrow cars from dealerships so that they can’t be traced. The
license plates of cars are also used as access triggers for some
slaves.
TELEVISION
The all pervasive television, which has been so common place
in the lives of Americans, is used a great deal to manipulate
trauma-based mind-controlled slaves. Tests by researcher
Herbert Krugman have shown that TV watchers used their right
brain twice as much as their left brain and released
Beta-endorphin into their brains. In other words, TV watching
trains the mind to go into an altered state. If a blank black
frame is interjected every 32 frames on a show, a 45
beat/minute pulsation is created that puts a person into a
hypnotic trance. In Vol. 2, it was brought out how the
Lawnmower Man movie, displayed the symbols used to
program many of the slaves. The movie was advertized with the
slogan "God made him simple...Science made him a god." This
is a slogan fitting for an Illuminati member who has been
programmed to think he is a god, and yet he must serve his
superiors.
BUILDING FAMILIES AND COMMUNITIES THAT HAVE
INTERWOVEN PROGRAMMING
The Illuminati has increasingly wanted to keep their, members
within Illuminati family settings. They have had more problems
with placing their members into families which are not part of
their mind-control than they have had with children which are
raised within Illum. or cult type settings. If one or both of the
parents have programming, the Illuminati often weaves the
programming together so that the entire family becomes one
programmed dissociative mechanism. For instance, on a ritual
night the child as it is being tucked in bed will say to the
mother, "MAY I HAVE A DRINK OF WATER." This is the
code trigger for the mother to give a drug in a drink. The child
is say another trigger to the parent when they get the drink, then
is programmed to drink the drug. The second trigger causes the
parent to switch to a personality that feels compelled to get the
family into the car and drive. The family all mechanically click
into a series of alter switches and end up at a ritual. They
mechanically trigger and reinforce each others programming as
they return from the ritual, and end up at home with everyone’s
front alters not knowing what the family has been involved
with. Here we have an entire family whose testimony could
reinforce each other that they did nothing but sleep at home that
night! There are some locations, for instance, two entire towns
in southern Utah that are a strict offbeat shoot of Mormonism,
which are entirely programmed multiples. There have been
some television shows about entire towns being caught up in
secret satanic rituals. It is true, but they also have occult
mind-control programming along with those rituals. Here we
see how an entire city can trigger each other’s programming
and all be involved in the insanity of all this without full
awareness. This is in fact, where the entire world is headed very
rapidly.
ISOLATION
While control mechanisms are put into place world-wide, the
Illuminati still must keep their children isolated from the world.
To successfully raise a child
Page 280 ...
slave, the mind-control’s success depends upon isolation.
Children involved in cult rituals do not talk to other children. If
they are caught talking, the standard punishment is to tie the
child to a dead child. They want their children to shut down,
and only do what they are told. They want the child to respond
only to the Programmer and its Mother of Darkness. They heap
lots of guilt upon any child that breaks the rules of no
communication. Children still manage to learn to speak with
their eyes and fingers. They become skilled at this even though
they know the punishment will be severe if caught.
BOARDING SCHOOLS & BODY PROGRAMMING.
Most people would naturally think that this topic would belong
to this chapter. Actually, this topic DOES NOT belong here.
But it was placed here on purpose, because its placement here
will emphasize its point, while not detracting from the Cranial
Manipulation and Genetic Manipulations sections of Chpt. 8.
Boarding schools not only give the elite a chance to isolate,
educate, and indoctrinate their children, but it is also a great
way to layer in body memories that instill a subconscious ethic
of elitism. It is an attitude of elitism that allowed the Pharisees
to crucify Christ, the Nazis to kill Jews, and Moslems to kill
Hindus, etc. How does this layering of body memories happen?
The memories of our bodies are buried within the cells of our
bodies. Therapists have known about body memories for some
time now. Cellular level body memories are way beyond the
grasp of the consciousness. Buried into a deep unconscious
repression are the body memories of the social values (elitism)
that are contained in how the social elite walk, hold a spoon and
knife, how a person must stand up straight with good posture,
and how the person holds and uses their facial muscles. The
boarding schools teach an entire world of elite mannerisms
such as "keep a stiff upper lip" to "don’t hold your knife in your
left hand." West Point performs the same programming of body
memories, to insure that their West Pointers develop an elitist
attitude. The effect of these body memories is to
subconsciously encourage the mind into thinking that it is elite.
The erect posture and military gait that this author was taught
carry with them the implication of superiority. While the
conscious awareness of this elitist indoctrination can be gotten
in touch with and defused, there are none-the-less buried
elements of body memory that resist tampering. This author
would ask his fellow West Pointers, how do they feel if they
walk like a general around civilians? This type of body
programming contributes to an ethic of elitism. How it is
created and how it works has not escaped the detection of the
elite bloodlines. This is why the British boarding schools are so
strict about "good manners." Through a plebe year of bracing,
the mind develops body memories of how to stand in a military
brace. Some cadets are so traumatized by their first year, they
never return to a normal posture. A military brace has been
proven to not be the healthiest posture. It’s this author’s
contention that the military brace is insisted upon for
mind-control, and not for health reasons. Victims of
mind-control have been placed in many humiliating body
positions, as well as many painful body positions. It takes years
of slow subconscious work as well as deep massage to pull
these up and work with these body memories. For instance,
during the tortures to create cat/kitten alters, the children often
crouch like cats. Kitten alters will retain their body memories of
crouching (hunching the shoulders) like a cat. Sometimes when
their masters begin to beat on kitten alters, they will reflexively
crouch like a scared kitten. And what’s with the woman called
Queen Sheri who has been managing the two professional
wrestlers Macho King and Randy Savage? Both of these
professional wrestlers are part of a "family" called the New
World Order. Queen Sheri walks around in a cat costume and
facial makeup that makes her look like a real wild cat. Is this
wildcat a Monarch wildcat?

When controls fail, THE FINAL SOLUTION.

The World Order can send out teams of professional killers.
(What’s new?) These killers often emotionally distance
themselves from their victims by thinking of their "targets" as
inferior forms of life that they are "liquidating", "terminating",
"cleansing from this planet", etc. In 1996, a 4-member hit team
took out the entire Bill Mueller family (Bill, Nancy, and 8 yr.
old Sarah). Bill was a member of the Special Ops Group SOG
of the Navy Seals. He had become a Patriot and a big gun
dealer living in Arkansas. Someone decided he was too much
of a threat and sent a team in to take not just him but his entire
family out. Booz-Allen & Hamilton, Inc has been hired by the
NWO to infiltrate the militias. This author has known in this
area several disobedient slaves, and one therapist who lost their
lives to assassins, as well as another one who committed
suicide according to programming. But anymore what isn’t
dangerous? Crossing the street and eating at a restaurant can
kill you too. The reader knows this. This author also knows of
several who were going to be killed but escaped. One
troublemaker was to have been sacrfficed but broke free and
hid, another was ritually tortured, buried alive, and left for
dead, but managed to survive.
Back to Contents Appendix 1
 The Programmers
Click here for picture

Page 281 ...

APPENDIX 1 - PROGRAMMERS/RESEARCHERS
The Illuminati set up the Josiah Macy, Jr. Foundation to direct
some of the mind-control its research, and its financial affairs.
Harold Abramson became one of its leaders. One of the Macy
Foundation’s directors has been military intelligence chief and
relative to Winston Churchill, Gen. Marlborough Churchill.
Both Winston and Marlborough are of the corrupt Illuminati
Marlborough family.

DIRTY PSYCHIATRISTS involved with MIND CONTROL

Dr. Van O. Austin, Utah
Dr. George Brock Chisholm, Tavistock
Dr. Lawrence D. Ginsberg
Dr. Robert G. Heath
Dr. Paul Hoch, Scot. Rite Mason
Dr. Robert Howell, Utah
Dr. Nathan Kline, Columbia Univ.
Dr. Nolan D.C. Lewis, dir NY State Psyc Inst. & Scottish Rite
Mason
Dr. Amedeo S. Marrazzi, Missouri Inst. of Psychology
Dr. Sudha Tayi

DIRTY RESEARCHERS
Dr. Ross Adley, formerly of the Brain Research Center at Univ.
of So. CA, now at Loma Linda Univ. Med. School, CIA,
worked on ELF waves and the brain, and EM radiation.
Dr. Emmanuel Donchin, head of Psyc. Dept. at
Urbana-Champaign’s Univ. of IL, worked on
thought-controlled machines.
Dr. Wayne O. Evans--U.S. Mil. Stress Lab, Natick, Mass
Dr. Dave Morgan, Lockhead-Sanders, worked on the syntel
Dr. Arthur Upton, head National Cancer Inst.

DIRTY TAVISTOCK CONTROLLERS

W. R. Byon
Richard Crossman
H. V. Dicks
Ronald Lippert
Brig. Gen. Dr. John Rawlings Rees

SOME OF FREEMASONRY’S MIND-CONTROL PEOPLE

Dr. Robert Hanna Felix--33°, dir of psyc. research for Scott.
Rite, oversaw the Lexington KT programming facility
Dr. Franz J. Kailman-jewish Nazi who did research at NY State
Psyc. Inst. while at Columbia Univ.
Seymour Solomon Kety- exec. of Scot. Rites psychiatry
experiments, & nat. dir. of American Eugenics Soc.
Winfred Overholser- overall leader of Masonic research into
mind-control, sup. of St. ‘Elizabeth’s Hosp. a mental hospital in
Wash. D.C.

REMOTE VIEWING MIND-RESEARCH

Private organizations doing research into RV in the U.S. are run
by ,,retired" intelligence people.
Joe McMoneagle -- "retired Intelligence officer" left govt.’s
Stargate to set up "private" RV research.

ODDS & ENDS

· Hillary Clinton, who is a Grand Dame in the Illuminati,
started in the early 1960s a group of
Page 282 ...
mind-controlled slaves which is called Royal Project. She
reportedly exercises power in the White House via 16 staffers
who have been given authority over the different departments
of government. One mind-control victim claims that one of
Clinton’s talks gave triggers for him to kill. One of Clinton’s
never mentioned cronies, who works closely with him, and
travels to meet him at various locations is Charles Whitmore of
Arkansas.
· One of the big areas where a great number of mind-controlled
slaves congregate are MUFON meetings. An example of a
slave handler, who is also a programmed slave is Dea Martin,
who tells people she has worked for the government and who
does aura readings. She controls her sidekick Jim Courant, a
commercial airline pilot. An example of a programmed
multiple with "alien" programming was serial murderer Robert
Moody. Film taken of Moody in jail shows his MPD (DID).
· Kleinknecht was National Director of NASA during the Moon
Flights when lots of mind-control programming was being done
by both the Masonic lodges and NASA. C. Fred Kleinknecht
was not only director of NASA but the Sec. General of the
Scottish Rite 33°.

· The Doors Singer Jim Morrison used the occult code name
Lizard King and The Exterminating Angel. He was involved
with mind control.
· Col. John Alexander, (also called Doctor) who has been living
in Arizona, and who has been in charge of making psychic
warriors for the U.S. Army, has the inside reputation of being
the Illuminati’s top mind-control programmer.

· James Monroe. It turns out that there have been two James
Monroes involved in programming. The first one was bn.
perhaps in the 1920’s, was 6’ tall, and he was the CIA man who
set up the Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology, a
CIA front for mind-control, He had a very polite front in spite
of being a sadistic programmer. The second one was James
Monroe Martinez, bn in 1938, 6’ tall, who was busy setting up
underground bases such as the one at Los Alamos under the
cover of working for GE. One report said he died in 1965. His
mother owned a Catholic half-way house in Albuquerque, NM.
· There are all kinds of events happening around us that show
evidence of mind-control. One example, is the case of a
Catholic mm quitting the monastery and becoming a NASA
physicist.
· Part of the success of the mind-control lays within their child
procurement abilities. The’ corrupt Finders group, which
consisted of FBI/CIA men who helped procure children, were
led by Marion Pettie, who was called "the Stroller" and "the
Game Caller" by Finder members.

* The establishment allowed CIA programmer Dr. Louis Joyon

"Jolly" West to examine Jack Ruby in his jail cell. When Ruby
refused to admit to insanity, West labelled him "paranoid and
mentally ill" and Ruby was placed on pills, which were called
"happy pills". Ruby believed he was being poisoned by the
establishment.
· Part of the success of the mind-control lays in the fact that
there is such a widespread network of pedophiles. On Channel
5, May 6, 1996, during a show "Priestly Sins," it was stated that
"at least 3000 [catholic]priests are sexual abusers of children."
The program stated that 600 priests have been reported to law
enforcement within the last few years for complaints of sexual
abuse of children. The show stated that catholics are silenced
and punished if they speak up. Priests who speak out are
penalized. For instance in 1985, a
Page 283 ...
senior official at the Vatican’s embassy in Wash. D.C.
discovered rampant sexual abuse and wrote a report on how it
should be dealt with responsibly. The church promptly buried
the report.
LIST of PROGRAMMERS (continuation from the list given in
Vol. 2)
Stephen Aldrich
Morse Allen
Dr. Charles L. Brown
Col. Campbell
Dr. Cleghon
Hillary Clinton
Jack F. (Uncle Jack) & Jill Coogan
Sen. Alan Cranston
"Gen." Earman
Don Ebner
Dr. Charles Evans
Dr. Tom Fox
Floyd & Mildred Frost & dau. Carol Frost Buls
Dr. George S. Glass
Dr. Goldshe
L. Wilson Greene
Dr. James Hamilton
Dr. Robert G. Heath
Richard Helms
Dr. Paul Hoch
Dr. Hyde
Dr. Korim (sp. not known)
Dr. Lowenstein
Mateland
Dr. Gary E. Miller
Dr. Moore
Dr. Martin Orne
Dr. Rosenberg
Dr. Woolsworth Russell
Cpt. George White (nickname/cover name Stormy)
Dr. Robert E. White
A FEW random CIA/INTELLIGENCE MEN involved WITH
MIND-CONTROL
John Bacon
Tennant (Pete) Bagley
Col. Matt Baird
Bill Brown
Richard L. Conolly, Jr.
Burt Courage
Cong. Bud Cramer
Jerry Droller
Robert Feldman
Jim Ferguson
J. Peter Grace
Cynthia Hausman
Richard Helms
William J. Hood
Jack Kindschi
John McCone
Charles McKay
Cord Meyer
Comm. John R. Miller
Herbert Quinde
Wade Thomas
Anton LaVey--Profile of a trauma-based mind-control
programmer
When someone coined the phrase "dynamite comes in small
packages" the phrase was an apt description of Anton LaVey.
(Released photographs of LaVey prevent people from realizing
how short his is.) In a personal letter which Anton LaVey
wrote, "With my swastika, I’m strong. My Satanic amulets give
me power. I’m not a misfit anymore, with pimples and a heart
murmur and flat feet." Anton LaVey is famous for having
started the Church of Satan. He chose Walpurgisnacht, April
30, 1966 to start the Church of Satan in San Francisco.
Previously he had began holding midnight magic seminars in
1960. He and his occult friends held Magic Circle meetings
until he founded the Church. His Church of Satan is officially
recognized by the U.S. government and the military. He turned
an old Victorian House, at 6114 California St., San Francisco
into what has been called "the Black Castle". It was for years
indeed black on the outside, and LaVey would drive a hearse.
Anton LaVey kept a full grown 400 lb. nubian lion named
Togare from Ethiopia at his house (which was allowed both
inside & outside) that scared the neighbors when it roared. He
also has kept a black leopard. LaVey loves to play his
Hammond organ music in his black castle as if his house were a
stereotypical horror house. Inside the house are rooms used for
rituals, occult books including books on cannibalism, coffins, a
maze of secret passageways, and LaVey’s private saloon called
the Den of Iniquity. He called his satanic covens "Grottos."
This author is aware that the Church of Satan got Grottos going
in the following cities: Amsterdam (Magistralis Grotto, Neth.),
Boston, Chicago, Dayton, Denver, Detroit, Edmonton (Can),
Indianapolis, Kansas City, Las Vegas, London (Eng.), Los
Angeles, Louisville, New York, Paris (Fr.), Phoenix, Portland
(OR), St. Petersburg, Seattle,
Page 284 ...
Silverton (OR), and Vancouver (Can). Undoubtedly, there are
other groups, as well as a scattered following of individuals.
The Church of Satan has had many Ph.D.’s. The church has had
a high percentage of professionals such as: doctors, lawyers,
teachers, former FBI agents, IBM executives. Cult underground
film maker Kenneth Anger was a member of the Church of
Satan. An ex-high priest of the Church of Satan told this author
how he was recruited for the position of high priest. He was
promised anything he wanted in life, any woman, any money
etc.--and they made good on much of that promise. As high
priest, he micromanaged everyone’s lives in his grotto. His
people came to him for permission and advice and orders for
everything. It wasn’t just mind-control, it was total control of
their lives. But giving orders and micromanaging the lives of
many people became a drag. One of Cathy O’Brien’s abusers
was LaVey’s High Priest Merle Kilgore, father of Steve
Kilgore. LaVey (bn. April 11, 1930) comes from a Rumanian
bloodline from Translyvania. As he grew up he love the story
of Frankenstein. As a teenager he loved the occult. He dropped
out of high school to be part of the Clyde Beatty circus. LaVey
likes to work from dusk to dawn. Like his ex-right hand man
Michael Aquino, another mind-control programmer, both
LaVey and Aquino are fascinated with the Nazis. (Michael
Aquino’s wife Lillith Sinclair was formerly the head of the
Church of Satan’s NY Lillith Grotto.) LaVey sports a Van
Dyke beard, and a head shaved in the same fashion of
executioners during the middle ages. Most of his followers
never see him. Although LaVey has gotten wide press
coverage, thanks to William Randolph Hearst’s newspapers and
his publishing companies like Avon, LaVey is a very secretive
person and very rarely shows himself to even his high priests,
or even talks to them. His Church is a collection of
self-sustaining dictators. He exaggerates the numbers of his
church, apparently by claiming people who come in contact
with his church. Before we discuss more about his organization
and their rituals, let’s touch on his role as a trauma-based
mind-control programmer. Anton LaVey has openly advocated
the creation of android humans. Even more startling is a music
video shown on TV in which Anton LaVey personally gives a
graphic description of how Anton LaVey intends to make the
listener into his "mind-controlled sex slave". The audacity of
this is mind-boggling. But then LaVey has tended to be more
frank than other occult figures. The approach seems to be "I’ll
shock you so boldly, that you will not believe what I am saying,
but will think its an act." Taking inspiration from Orwell’s
1984 LaVey wrote, "Up is down, pleasure is pain, darkness is
light, slavery is freedom, madness is sanity..." This is actually
the language that is used at times in the mind-control
programming! Anton LaVey has been the mind-control
handler/programmer of a number of Hollywood actors &
actresses, including Jayne Mansfield and Marilyn Monroe, who
both serviced him as sexual slaves. Jayne Mansfield, who was a
High Priestess in the Church of Satan, shocked people when on
a USO tour in Vietnam she asked for a satanic religious service.
Sam Brody, one of Mansfield’s handlers, had a bitter struggle
over who would control Jayne, and one of LaVey’s followers
claimed to have tampered with Brody’s car. Anton LaVey has
also been the programmer of his daughters such as Karla and
Zeena and his son. An ex-member of a satanic cult in the
Ozarks said, "If LaVey says jump, you jump." Some of his
followers call him ‘‘Uncle Anton" as if they were programmed
by him. LaVey’s cover is that he is simply a showman, a
buffoon. His cover has fooled many people, the truth is the man
is not to be trusted and has a lot more evil power than people
have realized. LaVey has always had what some describe as a
"warm relationship" with police.
Page 285 ...
In fact, he was on the police force in the 1950’s as a
photographer. The police were reluctant to question LaVey
about the death of Jayne Mansfield (4/19/33-6/28/67) who was
one of LaVey’s high priestesses and slaves in his Church of
Satan. Her color was pink. Anton LaVey has been seen going
onto military programming bases, and was at the NORAD area
in Colorado for a while.
Dick Russell interviewed Anton LaVey with his approval.
Russell wrote up the interview in "The Satanist Who Wants To
Rule the World", (Argosy, June 1975, p. 41) that the Anton
LaVey believes that he and an elite force of Satanists will rule
the world. LaVey took an obscure occult tract from the 30’s
and some thoughts from HG. Well’s book The Island of Dr.
Moreau for a ritual. From this, he came up with a ritual which
includes these stanzas:
"Man is God. We are men. We are gods. God is man."
When the reader is done reading this book, he will see how this
ritual can fit in perfectly with trauma-based total mind-control.
In fact, when people attend the Church of Satan’s secret rituals,
once people enter the ritual room two hooded guards prevent
people from exiting prematurely through the closed doors. The
rituals have been reported as being very disgusting. It well
publicized that LaVey uses naked human altars for rituals, after
photos were published of his satanic baptism of his 3 year
old-daughter Zeena in May 1967. Does the Church of Satan
involve summoning demons and worshipping Satan. Yes, most
definitively. For instance, here are the some of the words of an
important invocation used by his satanic rituals:
In nomine Dei nostri Satanas Luciferi excelsi! In the name of
Satan, the Ruler of the earth, the King of the world, I command
the forces of darkness to bestow their Infernal power upon
me!...By all the Gods of the Pit, I command that these things of
which I speak shall come to pass! Come forth and answer your
names by manifesting my desires! Hail Satan!" LaVey’s book
The Compleat Witch (NY Dodd, Mead, 1971) p. 266 advocates
that one achieve self-understanding and "embrace and cherish
the demon within him." In LaVey’s book The Satanic Witch
(LA: Feral House, 1969) he states that a witch to be successful
must make a pact with the devil. His church loves to chant
"Hail Satan". They like Crowley’s law, Do What thou Wilt.
LaVey & some of his members teach that at the core of each
person is a demon waiting to be released. LaVey loves Black
Masses and desecrating anything sacred to Christians. LaVey
urges people in his books and talks to bring out their "darkest"
urging. He hints at human sacrifice in his Satanic Bible, by
having a section on it, but is careful not to go too far out on a
limb publicly. He always publicly denies that satanists should
do human sacrifices. One of the doctors of the San Francisco
Church of Satan is said to have brought LaVey’s church a
severed human leg from the hospital he worked at, which was
basted in Triple Sec and eaten by LaVey and his group. Most of
the rituals are done in secret, there are no way to confirm
rumors that they eat human flesh, but knowing the mentality of
some of his church members, they would do it just to check it
out as a new experience.
Illuminatus William Randolph Hearst gave Anton LaVey some
big help. His Avon Publishing published his Satanic Bible in
1969 (it was first released in Dec. ‘69). Since then it has
reportedly gone through over 30 printings. LaVey’s next book
The Satanic Rituals also was published by Hearst Avon in
1972. It talks about the power that blood sacrifices give the
magician. Hearst’s papers also gave him publicity.
LaVey is always thinking of ways of promoting his theology.
Years ago, he had a
Page 286 ...
topless witches sabbath on San Francisco’s North Beach. In
1990, the Church of Satan went into the Heavy Metal music
business. The Church of Satan puts out a monthly magazine
The Cloven Hoof which for most members is their main
indirect communication from Magus LaVey.
WHAT TO LOOK FOR.
One of the most asked questions is, "Fritz, what does one look
for?" One of the best covers for Illuminati kingpins is religion.
Another is philanthropy. Philanthropy ties in with Illuminati
beliefs that your good deeds must balance your evil deeds to
gain power--it’s a gnostic cabalistic view point. The Illuminati
kingpins are great philanthropists even though much of their
philanthropy is self-serving. Perhaps giving an example of a
family that is suspect due to their circumstances would help
illustrate this point. There is such a family which has gone
almost undetected for years, and although some people fear
them, they have not been reported on. Just because the police
place a person on the suspect list, does not mean that the person
is guilty. Everyone deserves the right to treated as innocent,
until proven guilty. One of the groups that concern this author
are the rich ultra-secretive ultraconservative Talmudic jewish
groups. This exclusive group keep their children away from
contact with the outside world and send them to exclusive,
semi-secret schools. An example of this would be the
Reichmanns of Canada, who are billionaires, and have had
some connections to the Rothschilds of England. It’s not that
this author has problems with people observing their religious
beliefs strictly (or in the ultra-conservative Talmudic groups,
"ultra-strictly" better describes their extreme strictness). It’s
great that people have standards of belief and conduct.
However, the author sees the same patterns of legalism and
secrecy that pervade Old Order Amish groups, -- except in the
case of families like the Reichmanns, the potential for mischief
is great, because they are not involved with milking cows, but
international banking. While most people are simply ignorant
about the Amish but are not fearful of them, people who know
rich billionaires like the Reichmanns scared to death of them
and a heavy cloak of secrecy envelopes them. Renée
Reichmann was the great matriarch of the Reichmanns of
Canada who are Talmidim Chakham, followers of the Talmud.
They are not hasidic. She is a descendent from King David, and
King Solomon. She lives in Toronto. Her great-grandfather, a
Gestetner, was one of the wealthiest men in Hungary. Most of
her family lives in Montreal, two of her sons live in Toronto.
Her children are Eva, Edward, Louis, Albert, Paul & Ralph.
Samuel Reichmann is the father of the dynasty in Canada. In
1929, his egg business made him rich. He learned how to work
finances and currency exchanges between different countries to
make money by tricks to circumvent legalities. Their family has
also gotten Rothschild financial help, and during W.W. II they
worked with Koppel, who ran the Rothschild’s City Bank in
Gibraltar. Their family did a great many things during W.W. II
from the trading center Tangier in North Africa. Tangier was
located in a position to trade between the Axis and the Allies.
Also during W.W. II, under the direction of the Bank of Spain
the Reichmanns and others kept the Spanish currency
artificially high, by creating an artificial demand for the
currency. The Reichmanns made perhaps millions of dollars on
currency exchanges during the war years. Don Eduardo
Reichman was the administrator of del Real Estate &
Commercial Bank of Tangier. Eva Reichmann married a British
merchant banker. Albert Reichmann is President of Olympia &
York Developments Ltd. Paul sits on the board of the Canadian
Imperial Bank of Commerce (CIBC) & on the board of
Rockefeller Center Properties, Inc. (a real estate investment
trust for some of the Rockefeller properties in Manhattan.)
Albert sits on the board of the
Page 287 ...
Mt. Sinai Hospital in Toronto, and on the board of Landmark
Lands Co., Inc. which owns some of the great golf courses in
Palm Springs, CA. The Ontario Ministry of Consumer &
Commercial Relations has offices in buildings owned by them.
They tried to buy banks in Israel. Their sect of Judaism has a
Yesodeh Hatorah school for ultra-orthodox boys. Their children
have very little exposure to outside world. Their children do not
have access to newspapers, television, or radios. Ralph and
Paul were privately educated in England at Gateshead. It’s a
perfect setup for trauma-based mind-control. Shmuel
Reichmann is known among his kind of Jewish sect as a
philanthropist who supports Torah institutions. These talmudic
families consider pedigrees and genealogies very important,
which is very much in line with the Illuminati’s mind-set. The
reason that this family is mentioned is that the Reichmanns
haven’t been mentioned in my previous books, and the
circumstances that pervade the family have the earmarks for
what this book is about. It may be that this family of
billionaires consists of only wonderful people, but it is a given
that most of the readers would be considered animals by these
strict talmudists, who would never allow any of us of the wrong
bloodlines to be accepted into their "in" group. Obviously the
Rothschilds are of the right bloodline. Likewise, international
bankers tend to be a Machiavellian clique, (that is not this
author’s opinion, but the opinion of honest hearted person who
have ran in those circles.) Why has this clique accepted a
family like the Reichmann’s from such a narrow-minded
judgemental sect into their fold? This paragraph is not written
toward anyone specifically, it simply calling our attention a
family of billionaires that no one knows about, which lives in
veil of secrecy, and a religious setting that would make
mind-control as easy as imaginable. (The Reichmanns would
deny what’s been written here.) There are victims of
mind-control coming in to therapists from conservative jewish
groups, and at least some of these are Illuminati. The religious
front could just as easily be Christian. Some of the readers of
Vol. 2 reported back that the book helped them unveil the
religious fronts that had helped derail their suspicions of
puzzling situations that don’t add up. The next programmer to
be written about uses the front of being a leader of a Satanic
Cult. I say front, because Michael Aquino has created a public
image for his satanic cult, and hides behind that public image.
Anytime someone wants to reveal the ugly truth about him, he
hollers to the effect that he is being persecuted by a wild
witchhunt. He hollers that people are just having a knee-jerk
reaction to his satanic occultism, and that he is really safe.
MICHAEL AQUINO, a military/cult mind-control programmer
An OVERVIEW. Michael Aquino has been a trauma-based
total mind-control (Monarch) programmer for the DIA
Psychological Warfare Division. He is also a prominent public
satanist. A photo of Aquino in his military uniform is in the
center picture section of Carl A. Raschke’s Painted Black (San
Francisco: Harper & Row, 1990.) Other books contain various
pictures of him in satanic garb with ritual items. Most of the
programmers have chosen to remain in the background, Aquino
with his enormous ego, has chosen otherwise. Senator Byrd
(KKK leader & Freemason) and Aquino have done a great deal
together over the years, and have been like a team. With the
legal expertise of U.S. Sen. Robert C. Byrd, Aquino established
the Temple of Set, a satanic cult as a legal religion recognized
by the U.S. government and the U.S. military. This exclusive
cult was designed to give these unchallenged criminals of the
Network A. a legal organization whose membership consists of
a mixed group of slaves and handlers, B. a market outlet for
their illegal drugs and porn, C. a good public, legal, openly
satanic front with which to attack
Page 288 ...
all media coverage of ritual abuse. The controlled media could
now excuse itself from covering ritual abuse, by saying that
they had been threatened to be sued by the Church of Set.
Although the Church of Set has had the entire power of the
establishment protecting it from investigation and criminal
prosecution, the climate of control over the United States is still
not complete enough for satanists to openly get away with their
mind-control. By identifying itself so intimately with the
Church of Set, U.S. military intelligence has given the world an
open trail of clues to help whistle-blowers expose the
mind-control that has been going on throughout most of this
century. Michael Aquino openly associated with men like
President Ronald Reagan at the White House, again giving us
the leverage to expose the secret satanic philosophies of
America’s leadership. Most of these men lead double lives, and
due to the mind-control it has been hard to establish (except for
eye-witnesses) that they are secret satanists.
HIS CAREER
The army has known about Michael Aquino’s satanism from
the beginning, clear back in 1968. Aquino (and some of his
satanic lieutenants) received a High security clearance
(reportedly level 6), and he served with the World Affairs
Council. A dozen leaders within the Temple of Set were
Military Intelligence officers (for instance, Capt. Willie
Browning and Intelligence Officer Dennis Mann). Aquino
wrote "From PSYOP to Mind War: The Psychology of
Victory" published in the establishment’s prestigious Military
Review magazine. Aquino writes in this "From PSYOP to
MindWar..." article, "...we shall create MindWar. The term is
harsh and fear-inspiring, and so it should be: It is a term of
attack and victory..." Aquino is a sadistic programmer, who
loves to inflict pain on others. Aquino has a doctorate in
political science. He has two masters degrees (one is in political
science, Univ. of CA, Santa Barbara, where he also got his
doctorate). Aquino is Airborne qualified. He studied at the U.S.
National Defense University. He was in Military Intelligence in
Vietnam & Germany, and the Presideo. He was a Defense
Intelligence Agency attache, and taught political science on the
university level. He reported directly to the Joint Chiefs of Staff
and worked one on one with the Secretary of Defense Cheney.
He is a pseudo-intellectual whose ego and astronomically-large
pride gets in the way of real learning. He was the former
national commander of the Eagle Scouts Honor Society. (The
Boys Scout system is heavily influenced by Freemasons and
contains unfortunately some perverts that try to take advantage
of the system for their own perversions.) There was a massive
coverup in the Presideo Day Care scandal in which Aquino was
involved in. There were hundreds of witnesses of the abuse.
The military and intelligence put strong pressure on the San
Francisco police to get them to back down from doing anything
to Aquino. During that time period, the Pentagon transferred
Aquino from the Presideo back to the National Defense
University, Wash., D.C. (And later he wound up in the St.
Louis area.) During the investigation of the Temple of Set, the
FBI claimed they had no record of such an organization. The
military at the Presideo, had a spokesperson tell the press that
Aquino was a good soldier who did his job. Aquino hides
behind his religion. In his Scroll of Set Aquino accuses the
father of the girl who pointed him out as her abuser as
persecuting him because he is a satanist. Aquino writes, "Also
relevant is his profession as a Christian clergyman; I certainly
doubt that he would have made such an outrageous accusation
against any Lieutenant Colonel who was not known to be a
prominent Satanist." (p. 4 Oct. XXII) The truth that everyone
will realize on their own is that any loving, caring father when
he discovers some pervert has severely sexually molested and
tortured his
Page 289 ...
daughter is going to go to the police no matter what religion the
villain belongs to. In 1985, U.S. Army major Grady McMurtry
of Berkeley, CA and Kenneth Grant’s OTO got into a legal
battle over who was the actual chartered OTO lodge in the U.S.
Col. Michael Aquino of U.S. Military Intelligence watched the
legal battle, and wrote these comments in the Scroll of Set Vol.
XII no. 5, Oct. ‘86, "While sitting in the courtroom watching
Judge Legge preside sternly over the slug-out, I couldn’t help
wondering if he had any idea he was ruling on which group had
legal claim to anal sex as the supreme religious sacrament in
the United States." Witnesses report that one of Aquino’s
favorite types of sex is necrophilia, which of course can also be
carried out with alters that are in a death state.
PERSONAL HISTORY.
Michael’s father was an Italian Catholic. A canadian police
document that this author has indicates that Michael’s mother
was Betty Ford. Michael’s wife is Lillith Sinclair. Besides
being a Satanic High Priest & Ipsissimus, and an Military
Intelligence Officer in Psychological warfare, Michael was a
stockbroker for a while. In 1970, he joined the Church of Satan,
and led a grotto in Kentucky. Michael gave lectures on
Satanism at the University of Louisville, and used his house in
Louisville for rituals. Aquino claimed to be anointed as the
Second Beast, the one that Aleister Crowley prophesied in The
Book of the Law. (See Aquino’s The Book of Coming Forth by
Night.) While LaVey shaved his head and wore horns to look
the part, Aquino cut his hair in a widow’s peak, plucked his
eyebrows, and had a 666 tattooed under his scalp.
UNDERSTANDING ThE CHURCH OF SET
His Temple of Set was set up using ranks borrowed straight
from the secret Illuminati--Priests or Priestesses, Adepts,
Masters (Magus or Maga), and Ipsissimus or Ipsissima. (The
Order of the Golden Dawn also uses the rank of ipsissimus. His
cult uses new terminology such as Setian for Satanist. It’s a
common tactic of cults to use new terms to separate the cult
followers from the external world. In Aquino’s bi-monthly
periodical The Scroll of Set (Vol. XIII, No. 5, Oct. XXII, 1987,
pg. 2 Aquino states, "Christianity is finished as a serious
contender for the minds of intelligent humans." Aquino’s brand
of Satanism attempts to pre-date Christian ideas and goes make
to Egyptian Hermetic magic and mythology for its symbolism.
Aquino also studied the Black Order and the SS in Germany
and attempts to incorporate Nazi occultism and symbology into
his satanic orders. The Temple of Set advertised in occult
magazines, computer bulletin boards, and ads in the San
Francisco Yellow pages. When the Temple of Set expanded to
Britain, David Austen from Kent, England, became Aquino’s
High Priest in Britain. To let the reader see just one more
example of collaboration behinds the scenes of the Network, a
Jesuit member of the Temple of Set continued teaching at a
Catholic School after he joined the Temple. Aquino coined the
word Xeper (pronounced keffer) to mean the process of
evolving a higher consciousness. Scientifically conducted
research by Graphoanalysts has determined that a
preoccupation with x’s means a preoccupation with death.
Aquino and some other satanists show their preoccupation with
death by their fascination for words that begin with the letter
"x". Aquino’s girlfriend Linda Blood has supposedly left the
Church of Set and was at a conference that this author attended.
She was very antagonistic toward the victims of mindcontrol at
the conference, and acted in every way like a cult plant. She
was very disruptive of what the victims of mind-control were
trying to gain at the conference.
Page 290 ...
He has written in favor of black magic and left hand path, but
since most people don’t know what black magic & left hand
path is, buzz words. Aquino stated on Ophray’s show that
Satanists work "for the good of humankind." How? By
exploring the "freedom of the will." The undercurrents of his
writings in his publication The Crystal Tablet of Set is that he
and his followers have power while the rest of us are basically
wimps. Witnesses report how actual human sacrifices have
been alternated with faked sacrifices in the Temple of Set so
that it is difficult for witnesses to tell the real from the fantasy.
The Temple of Set, like the Illuminati have strict rules that
members are not allowed to keep incriminating items. Their
precautions to go undetected resemble the Illuminati’s
precautions.
UNDERSTANDING SOME OF AQUINO’S
PROGRAMMING.
Like so many programmers, Aquino flies all over the country,
and has victimized people in numerous states and military
bases. Michael Aquino’s programming is standard military-type
programming. Aquino puts in his own spirit guide into people.
He likes to use his own version of Star Wars, with himself as
Darth Vader, for his programming scripts. He programs in
sexual and death (suicide) programs--such as the Rivers of
Blood suicide protection program, and all the rest of the various
types of programs. His Temple of Set functions as a
programming vehicle. The rituals are designed to break the
practitioners gripon reality and logic and take them into the
world of visualization, and creativity. Members of Set take on a
magical name, they attempt in rituals to become another
persona, which is a magical double of the person called "KA".
And this ka work is done on the astral plane. Aquino is friends
with Paul Kantner who is part of the mind-control scene and
who put out an obvious programming song entitled White
Rabbit. In the Vol. 2 book, the significance of Leviathan was
covered. The Church of Set has an Order of Leviathan headed
by James Lewis VIº of Baxley, GA. Michael Aquino is familiar
with all the standard programming, the Wizard of Oz and the
other fairy tale themes. He is very proficient at programming,
having many years of experience. In 1981, he used Cathy
O’Brien to make two HOW TO films for training military
officers in the skills needed to program slaves. These two
training films were entitled "How to Divide a Personality" and
"How to Create a Sex Slave." (See Cathy O’Brien’s monograph
"Dick Cheney and Reagan’s ‘Hands-On’ Mind Control
Demonstrations" written/released 6/92.) President Reagan
respected Aquino and encouraged the military to learn his
programming techniques.
Aquino likes to work with Catholic mind-control victims. He is
proficient at manipulating the concept of hell and of doing
satanic reversals like the Black Mass.
On the following pages are a little of the paper trail on
Mind-control Programmer Michael Aquino:
· Some favorite photos of Michael Aquino in satanic garb.
· A two page letter of Aquino showing his fascination with
Darth Vader. He rewrote his own version of Star Wars to use as
a programming script. Programmers are given the freedom to
decide what scripts
they want to use.
· last page of a letter by Michael Aquino showing his
preoccupation for Hitler and Nazi things.
· two pages showing the trauma that therapists discovered in
children that Aquino had sexually traumatized at the Presideo
Day Care Center. As readers are aware the Judicial system
never pursued the case
against Aquino.
· A page from the police report where the girl who claimed she
had been sexually molested by Aquino was interviewed.

Page 291

Click here for picture

Page 292

Click here for picture

Page 293

Click here for picture

Page 294 ...

....... of women, is as much an act of violence as it is a sexual
violation, it is argued here that the abuse reverberates in a chain
reaction of violence-related responses in the child victim, in his
or her family, and in the mental health system that is meant to
serve the child. The Presidio case was made particularly
poignant by the sctting (the U.S. Army) and by the necessity for
the victims’
families to face simultaneously the abuse of their children and
the failure of goodness of the government that serves them.
BACKGROUND
At the Presidio Child Development Center. in 1986-87. a single
incident of suspected child sexual abuse led to a full-scale
investigation during which all the parents were informed that
their children may have been victims of sexual abuse at the
Center and were invited to come to the army’s Letterman
Medical Center if they observed any unusual physical or
emotional symptoms in their children. Here the children
received medical and psychological evaluations by U.S. Army
representatives. Over time, the army, the FBI, and the San
Francisco Police Department became involved in the
investigations. Accusations of ritualistic abuse were made
against a teacher (G) and a lieutenant colonel ("Shamby") and
his wife (Mikey’): Shamby was also a high priest of a satanic
sect. It was attested that children had reported group sexual
activities with other children and with a doll: playing ‘games"
in Mr. G’s bed: and being brought to a house with a black
room, where sexual activities of an occult nature ensued with
Shamby and Mikey. Both boys and girls reported acts of
fondling and penetration by Mr. G. their teacher. Clearly, this
was a newsworthy event and it was quickly picked up by the
media across the country. Three years later, the army had made
out-of-court financial settlements with the families of the
alleged tims and the teacher was reported dead of AIDS. This
case-study analysis is based on the author’s participation as an
evaluator of and psychotherapist for the girls (boys were
assigned to male therapists) who were alleged victims. The
author’s in vol vement began two years after the occurrence of
the alleged events. when a team of lawyers was filing suits
against the army on behalf of alleged victims and their families.
Using process notes and evaluation records from the
assessment and treatment of two of the girls (aged 3-4 when
they were allegedly abused) and their families, along wish
anecdotal evidence from other cases, this ar-tide addresses the
consequences and sequelae of institutional molestation for the
child, the father, the mother, and the family system
(consultation with therapists of the male victims revealed
similar overall findings). More specifically, it underscores the
unique features of sex and violence in the nursery when the
perpetrator of the abuse is that historic symbol of patriarchal
protection, the military establishment.
SEQUELAE OF ABUSE
Finkelhor and Browne (1985) proposed that the experience of
sexual abuse should be analyzed in relation to four
trauma-causing factors: traumatic sexualization. betrayal,
powerlessness, and stigmatization. In addition, they
recommended assessing both the preabuse and postabuse
situations in determining the psychological effects on the child
victims. In the case of extrafamilial abuse, this model is
applicable to the victims’ families, as well as to the victims
themselves. According to Finkelhor and Browne’s model, the
preschool child who is a victim of sexual abuse is at risk of
severe levels of trauma, of which, in addition to the obvious
· All the victimized children who received a medical evaluation tested
negative for the IIIV virus at the time of their initial evaluation. Recent
research, however, indicates a possible incubation period during which
negative test results can be found.

Page 295 ...

sexual traumatization. betrayal and powerlessness are
particularly salient factors. Often, when a child enters a day
care center, it is his or her first contact with the institutional
world outside the family. At a young age, the child is asked to
trust a stranger for care, succor, and daily guidance. The child
relies on the parents’ assurance that this unfamiliar situation is
safe and healthy. Given such assurance, the child typically
allows an attachment to develop with the day care provider or
teacher and literally puts him- or herself in that person’s hands.
At the Presidio, it was that very person who victimized the
children, first by violating them sexually and then by warning
them that, if they ever told their parents. great harm would
come to them and their families, and that they would probably
never see their parents again. The majority of the children did
not tell their parents, who did not find out about the situation
until the Center sent a letter warning them that their children
may have been abused. As with incest, the preabuse situation in
which the child has trusted an adult who then accosts that child
creates great emotional and cognitive confusion ("If this person
is caring for me and I am totally dependent on him, he couldn’t
possibly be doing anything bad"). In addition, it engenders
strong feelings of betrayal when the child comes to recognize
that this person did do something bad to him or her and that
mother and father did nothing to stop it. The severity of the
trauma for children at the Presidio was immediately manifested
in clear-cut symptoms. Before the abuse was exposed, parents
had already noticed the following changes in their children:
vaginal discharge, genital soreness, rashes, fear of the dark,
sleep disturbances, nightmares, sexually provocative language
("Go down on the doll-69." "Get it up the butt," "Lick the doll’s
twat," "Hump on the doll"), and sexually inappropriate
behavior (a four-year-old girl grabbing her older male cousins
genitals). In addition, the children were exhibiting other radical
changes in behavior. including temper outbursts, sudden mood
shifts, and poor impulse control. All these behavioral symptoms
are to be expected in preschool children who have been
molested (Haugaard & Reppucci. 1988:
Mac Vicar. 1987: Sink. 1988). Of particular note were the
children’s responses when they were first asked by their parents
if something bad had happened to them at the day care center.
One child screamed and ran out of the room. Another
whimpered, "They’re going to hurt you if I tell," and still
another said, "I can’t tell, or they’ll kill you." Only later, after
they were reassured that they would be protected, were the
children able to report that "Mr. G touched my private parts,"
"Mr. G had me touch his penis," "We passed around a doll and
were told to touch the doll in certain parts," "Mr. G took me to
his house to see his beds," "I had to do something embarrassing
in front of all the kids." These responses highlight the second
salient feature of the children’s trauma: their sense of
powerlessness. The children had felt powerless to tell their
parents because of the grave harm they believed would coma to
their families if they did. This was not paranoid or fabricated
fear a trusted adult, a representative of the U.S. Army, had
actually told them so. But, left to the deviccs of their own
fantasy lives at the age of magical thinking, the children
elaborated on these rears, sometimes to a bizarre degree. Their
only choice was to channel the anxiety and trauma into
formation of symptoms, until their parents, on the basis of the
warning letter, began to question them on the matter. Only
later, once the children entered the mental health system, did
the full cycle of trauma, terror, and rage unfold. This
phenomenon can best be understood by tracking the children
and their families through the postabuse process, from
discovery to treatment.
Page 294

Click here for picture

Back to Contents Appendix 2
Page 379 ....

APPENDIX B.

THE PROGRAMMING SITES

Some MAJOR MIND-CONTROL PROGRAMMING SITES with

explanations of their programming. (Fritz Springmeier originally exposed
many of these sites in 1993, so it is possible they have made some changes
since they were originally exposed. Most of these operated for years, and may
still be operating. We are aware of that some of their programming bases have
been moved after exposure.) Besides these major programming sites, there are
countless minor ones. For instance, some of the programming sites for
water-beach tortures have been visited by the co-authors, but are not listed. The
massive Boeing Plant in the Seatle, WA area with its large amount
underground tunnels has been used for programming, as well as the ARCO
Beaver Valley Plant in Pennslyvannia. So has the chapel at the Coast Guard
Academy at New London, Conn. which was built by A.W. Mellon of the
Mellon Illuminati family via their Mellon Foundation. This list is not put forth
as comprehensive. Without question, this list is only the tip of the iceberg.

29 Palms, CA-

Area 51 (Dreamland, Groom Lake), NV--Area 51 is also known as

Dreamland. There are a number of extensive underground facilities in the area.
This was one of the first genetic research facilities in the U.S. and perhaps the
first major genetic research facility. The people/workers & victims are brought
in by airplane and tube shuttle. The worst cases of UFO/alien type of Monarch
programming is coming out of Area 51. The eggs from slaves are being
harvested and weird genetic creatures are being developed from human eggs
which have been genetically mixed with other things.
Bethseda, MD--The Bethesada Naval Hospital

Bingham, UT--A red brick house, which was a closed House of Prostitution.
The building was used for KKK programming. Child porn was produced in the
basement, and upstairs programmed child slaves serviced KKK members. The
KKK activity in the area connects in with the Illuminati controlled Kennecott
Copper Co. (aka Utah Copper Co.) Russell G. Frazer, head of Bingham’s
Klavern & doctor for Kennecott Copper Co. did the electro-shock to split
personalities.

Black Forest, Germany--Because the U.S-U.K. and Germany do so much

programming, and some of the people in the U.S. were programmed in the
U.K., Germany or Russia, it is worthwhile to mention some of the German
programming sites. A number of witnesses report about castles in the Black
Forest which are used for programming & ritual. Basal, Sw. on the border with
Germany is a important Illuminati center. Frankfurt, Berlin and Zurich are all
important programming/ritual sites. The Jesuits and the Catholic churches are
very active in programming in Germany.

Boulder, CO--The headquarters for EMC, a type of electra-magnetic mind

control that is being broadcast to modify the thinking of Americans, and to
control slaves.

Butner, N.C.--Center of Correctional Research, all types of mind control are

carried out and experimented with on the inmates.

Camp Peary, VA--The CIA’s The Farm is located on a narrow strip of land
between the York & James Rivers near Williamsburg, VA, used for
programming CIA slaves. It has red brick buildings, and looks similar to a
small college. The official crytonym was ISOLATION. People who are
brought in who don’t know where they are for training are called Black
Trainees.
China Lake Naval Research Base (Inyokern), CA--
This facility had a country store, and hangers, and a hospital (address for the
hospital is the code- 232 Naval Air Weapons Station) which all provided sites
for programming. This site has been operational since the early 1950s. Large
numbers of children (batches of 1000 or 2,000 or 3,000 children were run
through this facility at a time. This facility did much of the original traumas
and mind-splitting tortures that created the MPD. Other facilities then
specialized in further programming that was then layered in on top of the
original China Lake programming. A great deal of dehumanization in cages
was done to large numbers of tiny children at China Lake Naval Facility.
Nimitz Hospital did drug testing of the children prior to their programming.

Colorado Springs, CO--The ALEX system programming and end-times

Military programming is coming out of Colorado Springs and is connected to

Page 380 ....

NORAD. One of the Colorado sites is doing alien programming with mock
UFOs.

Dillsboro Nike Base--Monarch programming of many kinds

Disneyland, CA--Disneyland has been an off hour site for Illuminati and
satanic rituals for years.
Programming has gone on using Disneyland as one big prop for programming.
Many of the Disney movies are used for programming, and some Disney
scripts are especially tailored for Monarch slave programming. The Peter Pan
programming can use the ship. The space programming can use the space
props. The satanic programming can use the castles. Lots of mirror
programming is done at Disneyland, and Disneyworld. There is also Magic
Mountain programming, and programming using the Around the World Dolls,
and its theme song. Some of Wizard of Oz and the Cinderella programming
was also done at Disneyland using costumes. Preverbal children are taken to
Disneyland to get them ready for the scripts.

Disneyworld, FL--Disneyworld was created as the eastern counterpart to the

Disneyland programming site. One of the rides in Disneyworld plays "It’s a
small, small world" which is Disneyland developed programming theme.

Ft. Campbell, KT--Base programs are placed in here.

Ft. Detrick, MD--involved with medical/biological experimentation

Ft. Holabird, MD--This site is no longer in existence, but was the Army
Intelligence School. CIC used the school. The place was known as "the Bird."

Ft. Hood, TX--programming involving military uses of Delta Monarch slaves

was done here.

Ft. Huahuachua, AZ--HQ for Army Intelligence.

Ft. Knox, KT --The 1st Earth Batt. was developed here.

Ft. Lewis, WA--involved with the Psychic warfare part of the Monarch
Programming.

Ft. McClellen--Ft. Meade, MD--The National Security Agency was

created on 4 Nov 1952. Its headquarters were Fort Meade, VA. The National
Security Agency (NSA) employs tens of thousands of employees and has a
budget larger than the CIA. It has also been kept far more secret, while the CIA
has been used as the fall guy to protect the National Security Agency’s
reputation. In the late 1960’s, under Operation Minaret and Program Shamrock,
the NSA and its British counterpart GCHQ began monitoring much of the
communication within the USA and UK. The NSA monitors all american calls
via computers using trip words, specific names, specific addresses, specific
telephone numbers, etc. NSA has several computer to record all the millions of
conversations which the computers have examined and deemed worthy of
recording. How the NSA can get any use out of millions of recorded telephone
conversations is beyond me? What intelligence agency could adequately
process so much information?
These organizations now monitor all communications within both countries. At
least one congressman got upset that his phone was bugged by the NSA. (see
David Corn’s article, "The case of the bugged senator" in Nation, Feb. 6, ‘89,
p. 152.)
The NSA has developed a fiberoptics network called Internet computer
network. An orange book is used to specify some of the NSA’s security levels.
An informant in the National Security Agency states that establishment
newspapers like the Wall Street Journal and the New York Times are used to
communicate secret messages which are placed within want ads, buzz words in
editorials, and via other methods. Because of some of what this person told me,
I have given some possible examples in this newsletter of how people might be
using the papers for secret messages. For instance using Michael Jackson with
his hands making some type of sign might be a signal. Manfried Adler and the
US Senate Committee investigating the CIA found that 90% of the CIA’s
secret messages are transmitted via the media, with the aid of coded texts and
pictures.
A raised forefinger or two raised forefingers while a speaker is talking means
that the message is a masonic message coming from a masonic speaker.
The Illuminati uses code words within the large establishment papers to warn
their people what they are going to do with the economy. In this way, people in
the Illuminati can take appropriate responses.

Goddard Space Flight Center--NASA mirror-theme programming

Grissom AFB, IND--

Hollywood, CA--One of the programmers/handlers in the Hollywood area is

surprisingly Anton LaVey. This

Page 381 ....

is one reason Anton LaVey has followers who will carry out his very wishes.
LaVey’s children of course were programmed too. His own girls have been
participating in the nude in satanic rituals since little children.

Homestead AFB, FL--

Kirkland AFB, NM--Lampe, MO--This has been the site of a CIA near-death
trauma center where slaves are programmed. It is an R&R center for the CIA
where they can have any sexual perversion or drug they want. This has been a
large cocaine supply depot also. Hal Meadows was director of this center
which is deep in the woods surrounded by cabin chalets overlooking a small
deep lake. A gravel road leads to the site which is fenced and well-guarded. Hal
Meadows address was Box 27, Lampe, MO 65681.

Langley, VA-- Slaves for the wants of intelligence.

Las Vegas (sites in and around Las Vegas), NV--MGM’s Grand Hotel and
Theme park were built for programming, but there are also some sites outside
of the city used. In the general area of Las Vegas in remote sites, the elite
gather for slave auctions once a year where Monarch slaves are sold and traded.
One of the favorite slave auction sites was 20 miles out of Las Vegas and 10
miles off the main road into the site. The Mob is involved with Monarch slaves
in Las Vegas. A blue-eyed 11 year old girl will go for $50,000. Toronto,
Canada is another regular site for Monarch slave auctions.
McClellan AFB, CA - Very bad Child and adult porn using Monarch victims
is distributed through this base as well as the other bases listed in this list. A
T.W. Sanderson worked with Monarchs at this base.

MacDill AFB, FL --Near Tampa, FL

Maxwell AFB, AL --

Montreal, Que., Canada -McGill Univ., McGill Psychiatric Training

Network, Allan Memorial Inst., St. Mary’s Hosp.- The Zombie Room (Sleep
Room) in the basement, the Isolation chamber and the Grid Room at St. Mary’s
Hospital were used for programming.

Mt. Shasta, CA--Underground facilities around this hugh mountain in the

Lake Shasta area are putting out Monarch programming that makes the people
think they are in communication with aliens. This facility is for torturing &
reprogramming captured runaway Monarch slaves. People are brought into the
area via helicopter, plane, or flying saucer. This site is probably the largest
mind-control programming center. It is in a remote wooded area. It is heavily
guarded, has fences, and a large contingent of black helicopters. Mt. Shasta is
equipped with state of the art high tech programming equipment.
Mind-controlled slaves who are soldiers are programmed and trained at the Mt.
Shasta facility.

Nashville, TN--These sites work with the Country Western Music Industry
which is actually a CIA front for moving drugs to finance their dirty black
activities. Fiddler’s Inn, Nashville fits in with the Monarch
Programming.

Papillion, NE--
Patrick AFB,--Portland (Old OMSI, New OMSI, Bldg. Near Monarch Hotel
at 8800 SE Sunnyside Rd., Mormon Temple, etc.), OR. The Old OMSI
building had a back door on the west side in which slaves were taken in to the
bottom floor and reprogrammed. Although security guards aren’t visible, they
are there with electronic surveillance. The people running OMSI are tied in the
Illuminati. The DC-3 airplane outside of the building was used in the
programming as a hypnotic trigger. The submarine docked outside of the new
OMSI building is also used as a programming hypnotic tool. The new Mormon
Temple has an extremely high tech underground tunnel facility for
programming built underneath it. Witnesses have collaborated their testimony
on this high tech programming site under the Portland Mormon Temple.
Although building plans are to be public information, the city of Lake Oswego
makes it very difficult to view the temple’s building plans. The plans show that
the foundation walls are far thicker than any conceivable earthquake would
ever call for. The reason is that the foundation helps house an underground
arena for the Illuminati & and their guests to watch perverse shows.

Presideo, CA (incl. Alcatraz, San Francisco)-- The Illuminati and various

Satanic cults used the Presideo for their programming. Split-brain & other
programming was done at Letterman hospital. Fort Point was used for
Illuminati ritual & programming, as well as a number of churches, underground
gun emplacements and the large circular Greek column art building at the
Presideo. Alcatraz, abandoned as a prison, was used for water tortures and
other

Page 382

programming. Tunnels connected buildings, and the Mule/Horse buildings and

the cemetery also were used. This is one of the older programming sites.
Psychic warfare activity also was experimented on in this area. Letterman
Hospital has been used for the initial drug testing of the infants before
programming. Lots of isolation programming in damp cold places was done at
the Presideo. Lots of porn and military programming have also been done here.
Redstone Arsenal, AL-- San Antonio, TX-- Salt Lake City (Mormon
Temple)--This underground facility works in conjunction with the Mormon
hierarchy who are allowed to create slaves. The Illuminati put in base
programming that still gives them ultimate control beyond the control that the
Mormon programming has.

Scotty’s Castle, Death Valley, CA-Mengele (Dr.Green) programmed in some

of his "internal boxes" as well as other Illuminati programming was done at
this site. Mengele had a large circular red bed in the castle which he stocked
with his little girl slaves, who already had kitten sexual alters. Scotty’s Castle is
a castle located in Death Valley CA. It has a very interesting history. To reach
the castle one is required to drive through many miles of desert. If one drives to
lnyo County, CA, the same county that has China Lake Naval Testing Grounds,
and Inyokern, and then you drive on Hwy. 190 into Death Valley National
Monument (it is not a park or forest, dead valleys are called monuments), next
you go north on a road after Stove Pipe for 35 miles. The man who built
Scotty’s Castle was Walter Perry Scott (1872-1954). Walter P. Scott was the
son of an alcohol distiller and horse breeder in Kentucky. Walter did not get
any formal education. He left home and went west where he worked as a mule
driver, and a water boy. From there he became a horse wrangler. Because of his
talent with horses Buffalo Bill made him the feature rider along with Annie
Oakley in Buffalo Bill’s family show. The show travelled and Scotty was with
it eleven years. During this time, Scotty made many important friendships with
men of power and wealth. In 1900, Walter married and left the show. He got a
loan from Julian Gerard, a NY banker, to go prospecting for gold which he
failed to pay back. Julian Gerard was repeatedly sending people to hassle
Scotty to get his money back. In 1905, Walter Scott ("Scotty") scattered gold
nuggets and $100 bills from N.Y. to L.A. Where he got all this gold and $100
bills is a mystery, but it wasn’t from prospecting. The idea of finding a secret
mine was very obviously a cover for however Scotty managed to get his
money. Scotty is well-known for his penchant to throw away $20 gold pieces
as if they were candy wherever he went. Nobody believed he had a mine,
strangely the IRS never got interested in Scotty. Why? The IRS went after
Charles Caughlin who was exposing the elite, the bankers, the Freemasons, etc.
in the early 1930’s on his radio show. There was no reason to suspect Caughlin
of any cheating on his Income Tax, and the audits found the IRS actually owed
Caughlin money. However the national papers printed front page stories of the
IRS investigation, and practically ignored that the man was exonerated. Yet,
the IRS left Scotty alone. Hmmm. Although Scotty was married, he became
intimate friends with Albert Mussey Johnson (1872-1948), a Chicago
millionaire, who was v.p. from 1906 to 1926 of the National Life Insurance Co.
Albert M. Johnson was born in Ohio, and lived in Arkansas and Missouri
before moving to Chicago. Johnson came out and stayed in Death Valley. The
stay helped his health, and he and Scotty remained close friends. In 1924,
construction secretly began on a castle in Death Valley. The best of materials
were used and the materials had to be hauled clear out in the desert by truck to
Grapevine Canyon where the castle sits. Hundreds of workers were hired. The
castle got its kitchen tiles from Spain. Special rugs were made on the European
island of Majorca for the castle. Tiles for the incompleted pool came from the
Mediterranean. Many of the furnishing of the castle came from cathedrals and
palaces in Spain and Morocco. Draperies made for the castle were hand-tooled
in selected sheepskin leather. Sixty hand-carved panels, each of a different
design, were installed in the music-room ceiling. A Welte Mignon organ
reported to have cost $160,000 --the finest of its kind in Western United States
was placed in the music room, even though Scotty could not play the organ.
Twelve bathrooms were installed. Several kitchens were installed. Tunnels and
secret rooms were built under the buildings. Around $2 million (dollars of that
time period) were spent on building the castle, supposedly from Scotty’s "gold
mine." The castle became known as Scotty’s Castle. It is ideal as a Satanic
ritual site. It can accommodate numerous people. It is remote. It has hidden
rooms and areas and tunnels. Tavistock, England--This has been the primary
programming center for England. The Rothschild programmers work out of
Tavistock. A large number of slaves in America have been programmed there.

Page 383 ....

Tavistock has been doing mind-control since before W.W.ll. Under the
supervision of London’s W Board & 20 Committee MI6 and MIS’s Section
BIA ran double agents and mind-controlled spies/couriers during W.W. II. MI6
has had an office at Century House, No. 100, Westminster Bridge Road. MI5
offices have been in part on Curzon St. MI5 has operated behind a number of
fronts, incl. their fake travel agency Casuro Holidays. MI-5’s address for mail
is Room 055, The War Office, London. Special Intelligence Service (SIS) dealt
with all types of mind control. Tavistock was under SIS. The British
government has had their own telephone exchange with a 222 prefix, which
was later linked to another secret exchange YTAN. Outsiders could dial 222
8080 to get into the secret govt. exchange. Men like mind-control
expert/hypnotist Eric Trist worked for Tavistock. A six-man team which wore
black berets also helped w/ mind control at Tavistock. Two people who became
terrorists after their visits to Tavistock are Angela Davis and Stockley
Carmichael who went to a conference at Tavistock entitled Dialectics of
Liberation in 1967. It’s main building is a bland 6-story building. The address
is The Training Office, The Tavistock Clinic, 120 Belsize Lane, London, UK
NWs SBA. Tel. no. 071-435 7111. The chief exec. is Anton Obholzer. The
Chair of Prof. Comm. is Nicholas Temple. Both are skilled in psychology. The
Tavistock Clinic was founded in 1920, and in 1946 the Tavistock Institute was
created as an independent body to assist the Tavistock Clinic. The Institute
does more of the research. The Royal Free Hospital at the University of
London works with Tavistock Clinic, as well as the Science Policy Research
Unit (SPRU) of Sussex University. A large number of Britian’s psychologist,
social workers and police get their training at Tavistock. Tavistock has set
themselves up as the authority on ritual abuse and MPD (DID). In other words,
the primary programming site, is pretending to be the leading institution trying
to solve the problem! That’s a good cover.

Tinker, AFB, OK--Tinkerbell programming is carried out here. This

programming makes alters think they are like Tinkerbell in that they will never
grow up or age.

Titusville, FL--At the Kennedy Space Center. Mind control testing is done,
and base programming such as the Wizard of Oz programming is done here.
Also NASA high tech programming is done here.

Tulsa, OK—Believed to have an Alice In Wonderland theme to their

programming. Oral Roberts University is used for programming. The
programming to infiltrate and capture the Christian church via the
healing/charismatic movement has centered around Tulsa and Oral Roberts
University.

Utah State Prison--The prison has carried out mind control for over 30 years
on their inmates for the intelligence agencies with the help of the U.S.
government’s power to cover it up.
Versailles, IL—Brain implants are put into Monarchs here.

Washington, D.C. area--The basement of the Pentagon and other facilities

around Washington D.C. such as the Jesuit Georgetown Univ. Hosp. are
involved with Mind-Control. Presidential Models are moving in and out of
Washington, D.C. carrying messages and performing their sexual acts for the
lusts of politicians. There is also a NASA Mind-control Programming Center in
Washington D.C. Secret tunnels connect the White House to other buildings.
These tunnels are used to bring in slaves. Some secret rooms in the lower
White House are set aside for rituals.

Wright-Patterson AFB--Near Dayton, OH, Virtual reality programming is

carried out here.

Youngstown, OH--The Youngstown Charm School has been run by

Illuminatus Prosser Seward Mellon along with a U.S. Congressman named Jim
Trafficant. The old stone building originally belonged to one of the railroad
elite. This school is for Beta models and gives them advance sexual charm
training. This school produces about 6 new Monarch slaves every three days.
Mafia deals are carried out on the second floor of the charm school. A slave
who is being trained/programmed at the Charm school will take a course that
last a few days. The first day may be spent hanging in a dungeon which was
once a basement wine celler. The torture dungeon has all the traditional torture
devices, a stretching rack, whips, hanging chains, etc. In the dungeon rooms
were a black Nubian goat "Satan", a small donkey "Nester’, and a small white
pony "Trigger", as well as dogs and snakes. The slave is taught silence in the
dungeon as they are subjected to bestiality.
Click here for picture 1

Click here for picture 2

Click here for picture 3

Click here for picture 4

Click here for picture 5

 Click here for picture 6

Click here for picture 7

Click here for picture 8

Click here for picture 9

Click here for picture 10

Click here for picture 11

Click here for picture 12

Click here for picture 13

· We have just touched the surface of the vest network of programming sites. Two examples of an entire series of
programming sites--1. the Coast to Coast campground resorts & 2. the Jesuit-run institutions, which are often
programming sites incl. Jesuit College, WV. An example of the former is the Park City Diamond Caverns. KT Coast to
Coast resort, which has had a sensory deprivation tank, headphones for state of the art harmonic programming. etc.
These membership camp sites are used to program children. Nor have we touched upon the large numbers of
programmed Russians & Eastern Europeans that are coming Into this nation. When this book was written more people
immigrated to the U.S. from Russia than anywhere else. Europe is teeming with prgmg sites. incl. the Vatican. Sebulun
Zuflucht in Marienheide, Ger. is about the only european attempt at deprogramming.

Back to Contents
 Click here for picture

APPENDIX 3. CLONES,
SYNTHETICS, ORGANIC
ROBOTOIDS AND
DOUBLES
Page 307 ...

PUBLICLY ANNOUNCED GENETIC EVENTS

1890-- A rabbit embryo was successfully transplanted to a
foster mother rabbit’s uterus.
1944-- A human ova was fertilized in vitro, that is in layman’s
terms an egg was artificially inseminated in a test tube.

1952-- Briggs & King in Indiana University clone a frog.

1970s-- Rand Corporation predicts that "para-humans" will be
genetically created to do menial tasks in the future. In a totally
different affair, Lord Rothschild, who is a physiologist who has
studied genetics, warned that self-centered fanatics might set up
cloning shops privately. Lord Rothschild suggested to genetic
scientists that a clone controlling organization with world wide
jurisdiction to license cloning be set up to protect the world
from evil men who might want to clone people for evil
purposes. He called his suggestion ‘Commission for Genetical
Control."
1977-- Announcement of the first successful cloning of a
person, which was done for someone very wealthy. This whole
affair came under strong attack by the establishment. The book
giving the shrouded details came out in 1978. The author went
into hiding, and our Congress had a parade of establishment
research doctors testify at a hearing to debunk the book and to
reassure the public that medical researchers were too concerned
about ethics to clone people. The author was convinced of the
veracity of the cloning event, although the media/establishment
doctors claimed the author wrote the book merely as fiction.
1980-- Twinning (bisection of an embryo), which is a form of
cloning was successfully done with horse foals, sheep and
cattle had -already been cloned in this fashion in the previous
years.
1981-- Mice are cloned. And embryo transfer for cattle
becomes a thriving business.
1983-- A water buffalo embryo was successfully transplanted
to a foster mother buffalo.
1984-- A human embryo was successfully transplanted and
born with a human foster mother.
1997--A successful human clone is publicly announced.
Scientists working in secret got serious about cloning in the
early 1960’s. Abortions began to be performed wholesale at
this time to provide fetal tissue for their cloning work. The
young generation of Americans are asking, ‘When will cloning
of people take place?" The answer is that it already has long
ago. An article recently written by Andrew Kimbrell that was
placed in many leading daily papers across the U.S. is quite
revealing. He comes right up to almost telling people what has
been going on. The article was entitle, "Science is about to
Deliver." (June 22, 1993) "...most Americans are unaware of
the real-life exploits of current genetic engineers, science facts
which in many cases are as chilling as any science
fiction....Pigs have been genetically designed to contain
human-growth genes in the hopes of creating "super pigs" that
would have more meat. "...U.S. government and private
researchers have expended billions of taxpayer dollars in the
creation of tens of thousands of genetically engineered animals
never before seen....One prominent scientist predicts that we
may soon see "five-ton cows and pigs 12 feet long and 5 feet
tall. "Genetic engineers.. .have cloned higher mammals,
including cattle....One writer notes that "genetic engineering
has the potential to create a vast army of identical clones, each
produced to some preset specification. Canon fodder, scientists,
opera singers, all could be manufactured to order..." "The New
York Times has editorialized, ‘Life is special, and humans even
more so, but biological machines are still machines that now
can be altered, cloned, and patented.’ " --(WOW! Readers do
YOU REALIZE THAT BETWEEN THE LINES THEY ARE
TALKING ABOUT BIONIC ROBOTOIDS--the robots that
are now being created to take the place of people in high places.
And the chilling idea that human-like machines will be
produced that will not be treated as anything but machines--that
is a chilling idea too.
In this author’s September, 1993 newsletter there were two
article by this author on cloning, one entitled "Clones,
Synthetics, Organic Robotoids, and Doubles" and the other
article "Dulce Genetic Research/Cloning Facility." In the
month following my September ‘93 newsletter’s release, the
establishment came out with stories about humans being
cloned. [I felt that this was confirmation that God’s had
directed me to publish the information I had on cloning 1/2
months before the secular media came out with their stories
about the "first" laboratory duplication of a human embryo.]
This ‘93 cloning was the first publicly revealed & publicly
accepted human cloning, but the truth is that it had already been
done for about 30 years secretly. In December, 1993’s
newsletter I had a followup article on cloning where I reviewed
what the media was telling
Page 308 ...
people about cloning after the ‘first" human cloning had been
announced. My article also discussed the novel Multiple Man
which is about how exact copies of the President are made. The
book has some surprising similarities with what they actually
did with President Carter! Finally in September of ’96, this
author’s newsletter came out with its fourth article on cloning.
This appendix is not the final word on the topic. The whole
topic about clones, synthetics, robotoids and doubles could
have a great deal more said. This appendix is merely a review
of what those four articles contained. Cloning also relates in a
big way to the cranial/body manipulation that was introduced in
this book. It also relates to the group mind/proxying that is
being done. Perhaps at some point this author can go into the
deeper intricacies of cloning, but for now this appendix will
provide its information in the following format:
Section A. The "Future Shock" that this topic subjects the
common person to.
Section A. Instructions on how to clone a person.
Section B. The four types of "clones" that are used by the
Illuminati,
1. actual clones,
2. synthetic people,
3. organic robotoids,
4. doubles (look alikes)
Section C. How the memory of a person is transferred for the
organic robotoids.
Section D. Secret cloning sites (See also Appendix B, where
D.U.M. bases are listed.)

Section A. The "Future Shock" that this topic subjects the

common person to.
What happens when a technologically backward people are
suddenly confronted with a technologically advanced people?
What happens is that people are called on to change, in many
cases the stress is what Alvin Toffler described and called
"Future Shock". The overstimulation of new ideas, new
decisions, new ways of looking at things can cause great
distress to the mind and body. Radical changes to adapt to the
new situation are demanded. In the case of the Navajo, one can
see pickups parked beside hogans. In Nepal where I lived, the
Nepalese had never gone through a horse and buggy era, so
they had no word for drive in their language. When cars
suddenly appeared--the first was carried into Katmandu on the
backs of porters, they had no word for "drive", so they used the
words they had "sit and go." So where we say "Let’s drive to
town." They would say literally, "Let’s sit and go to town."
The American people have in general been kept in the dark
about the limits of scientific developments. The known reasons
people have not learned are varied. The Cold War was one
reason. Capitalist corporate advantage is another reason. They
call it trade secrets. Scientific pride and the ability to outstrip
other researchers is another, and for the public just their
technical jargon is enough to prevent people from closely
watching the level of research going on. But underlying most of
the coverup is this: that the overall satanic plan is to keep
people ignorant of these scientific advances BECAUSE they
are being used quite often to control and manipulate the world.
What has developed is a situation where the American people
are no longer in touch with where the elite’s secret technology
is. It is clear that the elite know this and are aware that some of
the "Future Shock" needs to reduced if they don’t want to
self-destruct society. You need to be aware (mentally prepared)
that most of the readers of this will experience future shock
when they read that cloning of humans is possible & has gone
on for decades. The elite had a dilemma. If society isn’t moved
forward to match their secret scientific advances, it will soon be
like cave-men meeting modern-day men. Society won’t be
capable of adjusting--only self-destructing. On the other hand
they certainly can’t tell us what they are already doing, because
they are using this technology against us to control us. For this
reason they are giving us movies that show us things that they
have already invented--but these are put forth as fiction in these
Hollywood films. They hope to lesson the Future Shock, which
their own secrecy has greatly contributed toward creating,
while maintaining control over the general population.
SOME OF THE FILMS THAT SHOW EXISTING
TECHNOLOGY:
Clone--cloning; Jurassic Park--cloning
Genesis II--underground genetics laboratories that are
connected by tube shuttles.
Terminal Man--brain stem implants
Star Trek--various items. In addition to some of today’s secret
technology being shown, the attitudes and beliefs shown on the
two series, especially Star Trek the Next Generation are the
attitudes the Satanic elite want people to have.
READERS PREPARE FOR FUTURE SHOCK
The Scriptures give strong indications that genetic monsters,
the half-breed Nephalim will exist in the end times. God’s
Word also forecasts that the mark of beast will be needed for
buying & selling.
One item conveyed by the Bible’s book of
Page 309 ...
Revelation is that totally unexpected sudden change will
characterize the end times. Christians need to be prepared for
unusual big changes. So great will these changes be that the
nations will be distressed, and men’s hearts will fail them for
fear (LK 21:25-27). The Bible predicted that knowledge shall
increase in the last days before Christ returns. (DN 12:4) But
that knowledge will be used for evil, because the Bible also
says that the world will be totally corrupt as in Noah’s time
(MT 24:37)--which was a time of the genetic monsters, the
half-bred Nephalim. It also says men and horses will be out of
work. (ZEC 8:10) And it is believed that Nahum 2:3-4 must be
describing automobiles, and that Isaiah 31:5, and 60:8 are
describing and prophesying airships in the last day. The
description of the "mark of the beast" is startlingly accurate in
describing the microchip which is being inserted into people’s
hands and foreheads. The information that is allowed out for
the public to access has been heavily censored. Still in spite of
all the intense secrecy, if a person takes the time to dig and to
find key items written by scientists, enough of a shadow picture
develops to allow a person to realize that they already can
produce several things the public is unaware of. Many times the
articles will discuss only a tiny aspect of a larger process, or
will say we have the knowledge to do such and such but the
actual doing is years away. And somehow people swallow that
we could have the capability to do it, but aren’t. For instance, in
a book that was published in 1979, Robert Gilmore McKinnel,
Professor of Genetics and Cell Biology, College of Biological
Sciences, University of Minnesota, wrote "It has been reported
that mice and some large domestic animals have been cloned.
Humans have not. Because the reproductive biology of
humans...is similar to that of mice and other mammals, it is
likely that humans could be cloned." Some of the men who
know what is actually being done, are afraid to tell what they
know. However, I do not have neither a professional reputation
nor a job to guard. I have never taken any oath of secrecy to
any of these organizations of the establishment. I can simply
tell you the truth without fear.
Section B. Instructions on how to clone a person.
For those who want the medical description of just one way that
cloning of people can be done (and this capability has been
around for at least a decade--and much longer secretly.) The
idea that we don’t have the knowledge to do it is simply a myth
for public consumption. Any microbiologist worth anything
knows that we have the knowledge and the means--they can
only claim that cloning of humans hasn’t happened because
supposedly no one wants to do it.
A TECHNIQUE--INSTRUCTIONS HOW TO CLONE A
HUMAN:
The ovulation and ovaries of the woman can be monitored. Just
before natural ovulation, there is an increase of luteinizing
hormone which is called the luteinizing hormone surge. This
can be detected by either blood or urine samples. The growth of
the follicle can be monitored by visualization with ovarian
ultrasonography. Ultrasound diagnosis will reveal on which
side of the woman’s ovaries the ripening follicle is found. This
procedure will allow people to know when the follicle is ripe
for the retrieval of the oocyte. When the time is appropriate a
hollow aspiration needle is inserted into one or several ripe
follicles under visual guidance of the laparoscope. The oocyte
is removed with some follicular fluid. Experienced
laparoscopists have a success rate over 90% in recovering the
oocyte. Prior to this, it is likely that the woman will have been
given Clomiphene citrate, or this drug used in combination with
another drug so that there will be several eggs that can be
retrieved at one time. The oocytes obtained from the ripe
ovarian follicles are not fertilized when retrieved, although
another process would be to fertilize first, before extracting. If
they don’t fertilize first, then they can take the harvested
oocytes and incubate them in a culture medium for several
hours to get maturation. They need maturation because they
have been taken from the ovary before ovulation, and are not as
mature as spontaneously ovulated ova. Thawed or fresh semen
is washed and certifuged so that it will be diluted to the proper
concentration to fertilize in vitro. The in vitro fertilization is
carried out. After some amount of hours, (about 12) both
pronuclei are identifiable for enucleation. The enucleation is
accomplished with either one of two well-established methods.
One method is to surgically enucleate it with a micropipette,
another is with a bleb of cytoplasm containing both the male
and female pronuclei. Either method has worked fine. These
nuclei by the way have been obtained from the inner-cell mass
of an early human embryo. This again is a well established
practice. Let us digress slightly and explain the method to
obtain the nuclei. The zona pellucida must be removed from a
cultured embryo, the trophectoderm separated from the inner
cell mass, and then, the cells dissociated with an appropriate
enzyme in a calcium-and magnesium-free salt solution. Going
back to the cloning process, there are several methods for joing
a donor nucleus (obtained from its source using the just
mentioned method) with enucleated cytoplasm (obtained from
the woman’s in vitro fertilized ovum). One might be to
surgically implant it with a micropipette, another is fusion with
an inactivated Sendai virus. Whichever way is considered most
viable by those performing this will be used. And then the
human nuclear transplant will be cultured until it can be placed
into a human foster mother. When the
Page 310 ...
clone has reached the 8 - to 16 cell stage it will be transferred
into the foster mother. If needed, the transfer can be done later,
and the clone is simply frozen. When the transfer takes place,
the clone is drawn into a fine plastic tube (a catheter) which,
then in turn, would be introduced through the cervical canal
into the interior of the uterus. --- This is just one process for
successfully cloning humans. Other more refined techniques
may well be in use.
Section C. The four types of ‘clones’ that are used by the
Illuminati:
Cl. Actual Clones. This is a person who has been grown from a
test tube (called "in vitro") or implanted womb, which has the
identical genetic makeup to another person--an identical twin
so to speak in terms of genetic makeup. The genetic coding has
reproduced, and a new person who is an identical twin is now
in existence.
C2. Synthetic People. These are "persons" who look everybit as
real as a real person, but simulate human beings. Certain tissues
extracted from cattle are the starting point. (This is part of the
reason for cattle mutilations.) The process is an advancement of
a process discovered in the late 1950’s. This 1959 experiment
was reported in a book in 1968 called The Biological Time
Bomb by Gordon Rettray Taylor. Taylor describes the
experiment done in France, "They had extracted DNA from the
cells of the khaki Cam phells and had injected it into the white
Pekins, thinking that just possibly the offspring of the latter
might show some character derived from khaki Campbells. To
their astonishment the actual ducks they injected began to
change. Their white feathers darkened, and their necks began to
take on the peculiar curve which is a mark of the khaki
Campbell." The scientists working under the auspices of the
Rothschilds, (who are directed by Satan himself) developed this
process by working at secret breakneck speed. They developed
an advanced development of the process they discovered with
the DNA chicken experiment. By the late 1970’s, synthetic
people could be produced by the Illuminati.
C3. Organic Robotoids. This is an "artificial life" form that is
created through processes that are totally different than cloning
or synthetics. Organic robotoid technology is being made to
make exact as possible copies of important people such as
Presidents and some of their staff. For instance, the Jimmy
Carter who came to Portland a few years ago who I stood two
feet away from and examined visually was not the Jimmy
Carter that had run for President. On Easter, 1979 the first
robotoid model of Jimmy Carter replaced the man Jimmy
Carter. By the time "Carter" was seen by me, they must have
been on at least robotoid no. 100. This is why a friend of mine
who was recently in Washington D.C. almost bumped into
President Clinton jogging. My friend was surprised by the lack
of security. Kaiser Aluminum News which is put out by Kaiser
Aluminum & Chemical Corporation put out a series of articles
to a specialized audience in the 1960’s. This material was also
published under the book title The Dynamics of Change
(Prentice-Hall: Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1967). Under the title
heading "GENETIC MANIPULATION" we read, "The ability
to control the formation of new beings may be one of the most
basic developments of the future. Recent discoveries about the
nucleonic acids, the basic building blocks of life, have led to
the belief that man may some day be able to treat genes in such
a way that desired characteristics can be realized..." Under the
heading "MAN-MACHINE SYMBIOSIS" we read,
"...Computers exist which can learn, remember, see, seek goals,
reason, walk, sing on key, talk, be irritable, play games, grasp,
adapt to an environment and even design improvements in
themselves.. .man-like computers may one day contain plasma
circulating through a viscera-like envelope, allowing them to be
self-healing." Under the heading "HUMAN ROBOTS" we
read, "...An electronic circuit that imitates two neurons, the
cells of the human brain, has been built, and has enabled a
robot to deal with some unexpected situations, but the neuron
structure was bulky. The brain has billions of neurons, meaning
an incredible miniaturization job will be necessary before truly
‘human’ robots are developed." As the reader knows since the
1960’s when this was written an incredible miniaturation job
has been done in computers. What the public knows of that
minituration is incredible and that is only part of what has
actually occurred. In fact, scientists are now able to manipulate
DNA to create computers. A basic thing that is needed to create
a computer is material that will consistently change given some
type of "signal". This is because the computer works off of base
two--or what is simply an on--off switch system, or a 0 or 1
system of numbers. Living biological material is superior to
other material for making computers because the heat created
by the methods in conventional computers slows the speed. For
super-computers to work at great speeds they need to use
biological material that will not heat up. This type of
miituration has already been done. It creates computers far
beyond what we are familiar with. Organic robotoids are
amazingly humanlike, so humanlike that it is hard for the
scientists who have created them to get used to the idea that
they are not humans. Biological computer brains for the
robotiods
Page 311 ...
came as a result of research into holograms. If you tear up a
conventional photograph you ruin it, but if you tear up the film
that produces a hologram, each piece still contains almost all
the same image. This is why part of the brain of people can be
removed and the brain regain what it had lost. A holographic
image of a person’s brain is made, and then when the brain of a
robotoid is made, the biological computer in its head is caused
to form according to the holographic record of a person being
copied. Some deviations from the holographic record are
needed, because the "person" is a robotoid and not a person.
The brain of the robotoid has almost all of the correct memory
of the person reproduced, but the robotoid brain is really a
computer made from biological material which is programmed,
it is not a human brain. First, "Clinton" has the energy to jog
because it may well be a robotoid, and second thing, an
assassination of a robotoid is not so serious. These robotoids
have a biological computer-brain that is programmed. They can
think in the sense a computer thinks, but secret advances in
understanding the human brain, have allowed the makers of
organic robotoids to have the memory of a person at a given
point in time transferred to an organic robotoid. The key then
for making what appears to be a clone--but they are not a real
clone--is to capture the person to be copied and make a
holographic copy of the brain memory and transfer that to the
robotoid.
C4. How the memory of a person is transferred for the organic
robotoids. In order to successfully make human organic
robotoids--in a sense to make bionic robots--the ability to
simulate the personality of the person being copied was
necessary. The only viable solution was to learn how the brain
coded memory and duplicate that process. The brain is entering
into its memory about 10 million bits of information a second.
The incredible storage capability of the human brain which
weighs on the average 3.25 lbs in human males and 2.9 lbs in
human females is incredible. The brain can easily store 100
million billion bits of information. It’s no wonder we don’t use
it all. All the computers in the world put together do not
compare with one intelligent person’s brain. Numerous tests
and experiments from many different angies all showed
investigators that the brain stored information as a hologram.
The place in the brain where a memory is stored isn’t in just
one location. Memories are stored in synapses in sequence, but
they are stored in a holographic method. From what I
understand, rhythmic pulses radiate from a small area of the
brain like a stone creates ripples in a pond. Waves go through
the cerebrum, in the way that laser light is used to create a
hologram. Different frequencies are used by the brain and
different neuron impulses are used to reference (tag) the
different details. These tags are the brain’s own codes or
reference standards for cataloging information. The brain has to
be able to access the encoder/decoder (holographic code
standards) for a particular piece of information to be retrieve
for the conscious. Brain injuries can destroy one decoder, and
leave other decoders for a memory intact. When a multiple (a
person with MPD/DID) is created layers and layers of amnesia
walls (actual walls) are built into the brain, and then specific
codes are created which cause the mind to bring these
compartments of memory to the surface. Each compartment is
built into an alter (personality) or a functioning part of the
System (built somewhat like a series of computers). Where a
normal person may be aware of a conscious and a somewhat
subconscious track running simultaneously, the mind of a
multiple runs several tracks at once. On a local level within the
brain, researchers have called a memories storage unit an
engram. Polypeptidenucleic acid holds a piece of information,
such as a trauma memory. Proteins and other substances are
involved in the memory process. How a person eats can
influence their mental abilities. But it must be born in mind that
a memory is retained holographically in countless locations in
the memory storage area of the brain, just as the ripples of a
stone dropped into water flow throughout an entire pond. The
mind will have a number of reference points from which a
particular memory can be decoded. The information that is
stored in the brain is both dynamic and holographic. It is not
stored like a book. If the dynamic impulses of the brain cease,
so do the memories. Freezing and reviving a human brain will
serve to erase its memory. I will try to explain things in clear
terms if the reader will bear with me. The reason that we
recogmze objects so quickly is that the brain performs what is
similar to what researchers call a Fourier transfer. Messages are
transmitted through Fourier-transform messages. What is a
Fourier-transform message? A Fourier transform is a
mathematical method where a complex wave, or a complex
pattern is broken down and converted into a basically longer,
but precise signal of simpler frequencies. In other words a
squiggly line is hard to communicate, but via the Fourier
transform it becomes a string of numbers which is quite easy to
transmit. In other words, a complex squiggly line and a straight
line after the conversion are both just as easy to record. The
brain stores information in a form similar to a Fourier
transform, so that when it must look for similar patterns, it can
quickly overlook everything but another identical Fourier
transform pattern. A mental comparison is done so quick that it
gives the ability to the brain to "instantly" recognize people
who one hasn’t seen for years. The Holograms of memory that
the brain makes
Page 312 ...
are transmitted through Fourier-transform messages.
Holograms are hard to destroy, for each piece contains the
whole. Rip a holograph in half and you still have the same
picture. Rip it in half again and the same picture remains. After
a great many cuts in half the holograph begins to get a little
fuzzy, as it loses some of its detail, but the entire picture is still
there. That is why memories begin to get somewhat fuzzy,
because we are only puffing up a small piece of brain that
recorded the memory. However, if we can pull up more of the
holographic image of the memory we get a more distinct
detailed picture. It was secret research into holograms that gave
Illuminati scientists the ability to copy the memory of an entire
brain. A holographic image is made of the host’s brain and that
is transferred into the biological matter functioning as a brain of
the robotoid. Since the body and brain of the robotoid are not
identical to the original person being copied, adjustments have
to be taught and programmed into the mind of the robotoid. The
entire process is sophisticated, but then so are many
manufacturing processes today.
C5. Doubles (look alikes). There is an ongoing program to find
look alikes for prominent people, as well as a program to create
secret identical twins (which are separated at birth and never
see each other). George Bush’s double was promiscuous, while
George Bush is a pedophile. His double was living in France
after Bush was no longer President. By the use of doubles, (or
one of the synthetics or organic robotoids) the elite are able to
sneak away and perform satanic rituals. On certain occasions, if
Clinton or Bush only needed to do low level tasks in front of
the public, they could have their double substitute for them.
The Illuminati working with several organizations has had a
look alike operation where doubles of certain key people are
found and then used. In the book Desert Shield and The New
World Order pub. by Northpoint Tactical Teams, Topton, NC,
if you look on page 32 you will see a picture of the original
FDR who had a mole over his eyes and then you will a see a
picture of the double of Roosevelt who they used, who had no
mole and had different ear lobes. Roosevelt may have died
prior to when it was actually announced. Over the years I have
seen numerous photos exposing either the Robotoids or the
doubles that they use. This author’s previous S' ’93 article had
some pictures about the dead Pope Paul VI, who my Be Wise
As Serpents book said was murdered. This recent Pope was
replaced with a double who had had plastic surgery. As a
double gets older the plastic surgery will not look as
convincing, because time changes people differently. One
ex-Catholic said the whole thing sounded like science fiction. It
does sound far out at first, but the evidence is there for people
to see. For myself, the ex-Illuminati have told me about the
double’s program. From what I understand the double or
look-alike program has been more successful than the robotoids
and synthetics. The reason is that people live longer and are
more dependable in some ways. The project to find look alikes
for prominent people has been very successful. Plastic surgery
has also been done to help touch up the doubles.
Section D. Secret cloning sites (See also Appendix B, where
D.U.M. bases are listed.)
Ada, Oklahoma’s underground facility is being used to clone
humans. The other cloning facilities are turning out weird
creatures. Due to the processes involved they give off lots of
gamma radiation (Gamma is at the far end of the
electromagnetic wave spectrum--it is even a longer wave than
ultraviolet). Because they give off Gamma radiation, these
facilities must be dcep underground. The cloning is done at
level 7. The average depth (according to one of the men who
built these Deep Underground Facilities - D.U.M.) is 5,600’.
The secret government has been building them no stop since
W.W. II. I personally have only been in an underground city in
Oahu, HA, but I have spoken to others who are wanting to save
humanity and stop the NWO, and these witnesses know a lot
about the underground facilities. One of the men who betrayed
the human race and helped with the cloning was Austrian born
Simon Wiesenthal. Simon Wiesenthal, was a US intelligence
agent with a photographic memory (perhaps a scarred brain
stem). Wiesenthal seriously hunted Nazis that were not on the
CIA’s payroll or CIA associated groups. Simon Wiesenthal,
under the disguise of being a great Nazi hunter, actually
assisted protecting the FBI’s and the CIA’s agents who were
Nazi criminals. Wiesenthal tried to stop CBS from doing a
show exposing the FBI-Nazi connection. Jewish Intelligence
(the Moussad) knew all about the hundreds if not thousands of
Nazi War criminals that worked for American Intelligence and
the FBI, but never went public about it. Instead they
occasionally used the information as leverage against American
intelligence. One of the code no.s for Simon Wiesenthal given
by a Monarch slave was something like 063 097. If someone
else knows the full and correct code for him, go ahead and
share it. Unholy Trinity is a book written about how the
Vatican, the US State Department, and MI-6 smuggled Nazis
out of Germany at the end of WW II. An entire book could be
written about the thousands of die hard Nazis who have been
working for American intelligence, however Simon
Wiesenthal’s name is mentioned here because he helped start
the cloning for the worst elements of the NWO.
OREGON’S UNDERGROUND SECRET CLONING
FACILITY
Page 313 ...
In at least one of my newsletters, the secret cloning facility at
Bull Run near Mt. Hood, OR was discussed. Bull Run is a large
tract of forested land with some water reservoirs/lakes that is
set up to help provide water for the Portland Metro area. My
house on Lincoln St. was also near 8 reservoirs that were built
at nearby Mt. Tabor. These reservoirs at Mt. Tabor were for
Portland drinking water too. The Mt. Tabor reservoirs have
simple single fences on their perimeter, and people are able to
throw garbage into these reservoirs if they want to be nasty.
However, the Bull Run water supply which is very isolated is
extremely well protected. It is rare that people would stray up
into the area anyway. People are told that this large tract of land
is simply for Portland’s water supply, and yet several years ago
a Patriot military unit reconned the area after getting info from
me. They were able to identify 3 strongiy guarded rings of
defense at the Bull Run reservoir. The area has lots of
electronic surveillance, etc. It is either the most valuable water
on God’s green earth, or there is something else in the vicinity
of Larch Mountain (south of the famous Multnomah Falls
which sit on I-84)--something besides a water reservoir. Of
course, those in the know, know that it’s an underground
facility which the CIA use. It’s not an accident Tektronics here
in the Portland area does work/research with holograms.
FURTHER INVESTIGATIONS AT DULCE’S
UNDERGROUND CLONING FACILITY
My article about Dulce [which I investigated in person on foot]
also sparked a small group of dedicated Christians to try to
retrace my steps and find the Duke facility. They reported back
to me that they found nothing and that the reservation police
and the local people claimed they’d never even heard of any
underground facility. All I can say is that, doesn’t that strike
you as fishy that all kinds of people have been up in that area
looking for the site, interviewing the Jicarilla Apaches that live
in the area for years, talking about Dulce over Art Bell’s Radio
show, etc. and locals have never heard anything about it?? At
the very least they should know that other people looked for the
site. The reservation and town of Dulce, NM have a small
population. There is little that everyone doesn’t know about
what goes on in the area, and yet they are surprised by the topic
of an underground facility? The whole thing smells like the key
people in the area have been convinced to keep their mouths
shut & pretend they know nothing. My comments: sometimes
when you’re looking for a rat, you’ll smell it before you see it.
According to someone who has worked in the Dulce
Underground Facility the openings on the north and SW face
(Aztec Cliffs) are still in use. Actually the cliff that has a face
that looks like an Aztec on Mt. Archeleta has been cemented
shut because hikers kept straying into the area. A deep needle
detector which could detect metal or magnetism deep down
could reveal the Dulce Underground Facility--but people who
get this close often disappear.
SUMMARY OF THE FOUR METHODS.
This Appendix covers 4 different methods that have been used
to make copies of people, these were cloning, creating synthetic
duplicates, creating organic robotoids, and finding look alike
doubles. [Programs for all four of these methods have had
almost unlimited funding by the intelligence/Illuminati elite.]
Next, the basic principles for creating a synthetic human were
covered. Synthetic humans were in some ways found to be
superior to the robotoids that were created. The first few years
of robotoids were fraught with problems. [Since my inside
information is somewhat dated, I cannot give readers the status
of current robotoid abilities, however, I believe from what I’ve
seen that the program continues.] The synthetics were people
who had their genes altered to look more like the person they
were to copy. The robotoids were the formation of new beings
that look human but are actually bionic robots. Their memories
were created by using living "brain tissue" which is some type
of programmable living biological matter, and programming
this material as a sophisticated computer. In order to get the
memory of the person being copied, a holographic image of the
person’s brain is made and transferred to the robotoid. Because
the robotoid "brain" is not functioning like a human (although
the end result is nearly identical so that viewers have to know
what differences to look for), there are of course some
adjustments that have to be made after the holographic image
of the host is transferred to the living biological matter that will
function as the brain of the robotoid. Lord Willing, this author
may write some more on this topic later. The ability of the
Illuminati to copy people using the 4 methods listed above, are
not going to be the deciding factor in their moves to control the
world, but it does give them a great deal of flexibility in their
operations. This author frequently reflects on the words of the
Illuminati Grand Master who told Cisco, who was then a child,
while touring a cloning facility, "Never, never think you are
seeing who you think you are seeing.’
Page 314 ...
FINAL NOTES. As this author’s reflects back on what’s gone
into this first part, he can’t help thinking about how God will
reveal all things that are secret. (See Dan, 2:22 and other
verses). The prophet Daniel called him the revealer of secrets."
The secrets which are revealed in this book are minuscule
compared to what God Almighty will reveal in His day. And as
this author reflects back he realizes that there is so much more
that could be said. This author has neglected to get my
information about the Clintons into this. For instance, this
author interviewed a woman who went to school with Hillary,
and two of Hillary’s mind-control victims. Our establishment
media have neglected to tell the American people about Bill
Clinton’s roots & ties in Hot Springs, Ark. Hot Springs is a city
that has forty-seven thermal springs which have brought the jet
set from all over the world. The mafia syndicate & their
nightclubs made Hot Springs a hot bed of vice, gambling,
prostitution. During the 1920’s the territory so popular with
organized crime, that they classified the territory "neutral
ground" like they did Hollywood. In the early 1960’s, Hot
Springs had the largest illegal gambling operations in the entire
U.S. Billy’s uncle Roy was a politician in Arkansas’s
legislature connected to all this mess. And Bill Clinton’s uncle
Raymond Clinton, who had a Buick dealership, was tied to all
this corruption. Bill & his brother Roger’s cocaine habits are
well known by those familiar with them, as well as their wild
parties at the Coachman’s Inn, Little Rock, Ark. What are not
known are Hillary & Bill’s membership in the secret Illuminati.
And for some reason some of their more intimate associates are
also not known, such as Charles "Chip" Whitmore, a Satanist &
programmer. Chip & Bill have met often on a weekly basis
over the years. This continues, for instance when Bill was in
England so was Chip, when Bill went to florida so did Chip.
Chip played drums with mind-control programmer Jerry Lee
Lewis. He was also a friend of Jack Ruby. (It’s a small world at
the top of corruption.) Chip owns Cash McCool’s Tavern. He is
5’6, glasses for his poor eyesight, has good hearing, and has a
filthy mouth. He changes the car he owns & drives every 3-5
months. Chip had a programmed girl murder a man, and then
the Network got him off of his murder charges. Chip’s family’s
Villa Mare in Little Rock was pictured in the opening shots of
Designing Women. Chip Whitm ore has been in charge of
assassinations in his area, and controls the local law
enforcement in Arkansas. Jack Stevens, said to be the largest
investment banker in Little Rock, is CIA/part of the Network.
He exchanged information with Chip via their mutual black
cleaning lady. Further, Whitmore & Stevens tie in with a string
of corruption that extends into the Assembly of God churches
& other parts of Churchianity. Over Chip is a Dr. Paul Palmer.
The media just gives us glimpses of the depth of occult
corruption. For instance, Insight magazine Feb. 26, ’96, page
48, in an article by Suzanne Fields had a photo of Hillary’s
backside wearing what appeared to be a golden dragon on her
black coat when she went to court to talk about the Rose Law
Firm billing records. She has sometimes been called the Dragon
lady for good reasons. Will today’s modern equivalents to
shamans, our psychiatric community help protect us from
murderers like Chip Whitmore? Not likely. The Biographical
Directory of Fellows and Members of the American Psychiatric
Association reveals that in 1957 there were 7,104 American
members in the American Psychiatric Association. Of those
7,104, a total of 1,253 had moved to America from Germany
and Eastern Europe. This helps us understand the enormous
influence Operation Papercip had on America. Operation
Papercip was the CIA’s project to smuggle Nazi criminals into
our nation, some of which have now made Penn’s campus
infamous. No wonder the False Memory Spindrome got started
at Pennsylvania University. We were warned by a psychiatrist
in a Weekly World News story of Jan. 9, 1996 about a strange
new sleeping disorder where people die after seeing a hooded
robe figure chase them. This new "Deadly Dream Syndrome"
sounds strongly like mind-control. Perhaps there is no way to
have given the readers anything but a drop in the bucket. Some
of the details that got left out on the way include: the
Seventh-Day Adventist church’s secret cooperation with the
government to supply young men (1,500) for government
experiments called Operation Whitecoat; how the Dept. of
Energy set up hotlines for victims of radiation experiments, in
other words the fox is in control of where the victim goes for
help; Peter A. Petito, "Mr. Intelligence" in Italy, and his
connections to the Network; William Randolph Hearst’s
costume parties and his half dozen homes like San Simeon;
Torrance, CA’s Penthouses and Disney’s mind-control; the
Masonic peace sign of uplifted hands with wrists crossed in the
film 1984; the movie Army of Darkness with its mirror image
programming, "London Bridges falling down" programming
ditty, etc.; how FEMA works with the 6th Army that Aquino
was part of, how Voodooism uses Waterfalls for healing such
as at Sardo, Haiti; how Mothers of Darkness alters are trained
to love a marble, fed the marble, care for it, and then to shatter
it with a hammer until its fine like salt and then to repeat the
process and only split the marble but not crush it as part of their
training to program; how a certain torture is done to make the
victim think they have a butterfly as a head with the head of the
butterfly in their third eye area; how scribbling is used to
anchor programming in child victims; programmed soul-ties to
aliens; Mr. Greenjean’s (of Capt. Kangaroo) talk of Mr. Moon
& how it was used for programming; the blood sacrifices under
the Temple Mount on March 13th this year; the Masonic
corruption in Arcadia, FL and the G. Pierce Wood Memorial
Hospital; how secret meetings of the CIA have studied how
UFOs could be used as "clever hostile propaganda" trick to take
advantage of the populace’s gullibility; how Mengele’s family
never claimed his bones--they knew they weren’t the real ones,
and how the International Red Cross gave him an I.D.S. to
travel with; South Africa’s occult Shu Shung Palace... maybe
someone else will pick up where this author has left off, the
mind-control is all around us!
Back to Contents Part 2
Page 314

When our system first began doing collages as therapy, the

third collage we did of our system was this one of the Gems,
the Grand Druid Council hierarchy, the daisy chains and the
fairy, and yet it was one of the last to be understood. When our
deeper alters got done with the collage, our front alters didn’t
understand what they had done. It took several years to learn
what all the pieces in the collage meant. What the picture
shows are the deeper workings of the system, which are run by
early splits. In the background is a veil. In front of it are gems,
and diamonds. There are two kinds of gems. One are the gems
which link to the computers, and the other are the diamonds in
the rough, the clean slate alters which have yet to be
programmed. A diamond in the system (pyramid) acts as a
radio crystal to receive direction and energy from Satan. The
energy is then distributed via the crystal and the gems to the
system. This diamond is encapsulated within a gold
womb-shaped crystal.
The gems in the system (ruby, diamond, topaz, onyx, emerald,
sapphire, opal, amethyst, obsidian, turquoise, etc.) are linked to
the book of Revelation’s Heavenly City. The 12 gems send out
signals according to their color coding, which are then
transmitted by the correct color of ribbon to the correct colored
coded alters. Their messages, the scripts, are acted out on the
stage of life, which is portrayed behind the erect gold or
platinum statue (AntiChrist figure). Gold represents divinity in
the Illuminati. In front of that is the clock with the hierarchy.
The clock is a crystal pyramid representing the pyramid in the
middle of the Grand Druid Council (aka Executive Control
Board). It’s 12 hours are the 12 positions of the Grand Druid
Council which link to their 12 job responsibilities or
characteristics and the 12 colors. The 13th number is Satan’s,
and it is color coded platinum. The Grand Druid Council like
the Knights of the Round Table sit around a circular table. The
pyramid is meant to have 13 stairs to it. The daisy chains were
used to link our early parts to their master. Our Daddy would
make daisy chains for us.
Most people would never suspect something like this being
mind-control reinforcement. These daisy chains were delicate
and very sensitive to touch. We were not to break or touch the
daisy chains. Our internal daisy chains link to small 3 year old
child alters. The daisy chains represent soul ties and the
artificial programmed love they wanted us to have toward our
master. A severe pain in our head, like a hole being drilled into
our head, was refrained by the programmers as being a hole for
the sun to shine through to raise daisy flowers for Daddy.
Flowers are important family links in the programming.. The
bud protects a daughter. The root and stem the mother figure.
The soil ceremony protects the grandparents, and is grounded
in the earth. The Fairy alters are involved in the hour glass and
are the creative force within the system. Here Whisper
(Tinkerbell figure) sprinkles Star dust on the light side. The
yellow brick road, like a whirlwind that pulls the vehicle, leads
to divinity, a mother goddess figure. A gold crown rests upon
this stone statue. A tree runs through the entire situation. Those
who are familiar with the trees in the system, realize that they
are used to hang all the programming. The willow and oak
roots run through the collage. Although it is somewhat difficult
to notice, off to the right side of Satan are 9 chambers, which
represent the various chambers on the Cabalistic tree of life.
Interconnected bubbles are interconnected worlds and galaxies
in the system. The numerous butterflies are a ring of light that
lay at the base of the neck.

Page 315
To Contents Next
Page 321

Back to Contents Introduction

Page 322 ...

INTRODUCTION

WHY should we bother struggling to save victims of

mind-control?
Why should we bother with working with victims of
mind-control? We can think of a number of excellent reasons.
First, if we as a people do not stand up to the World Order’s
mind-control, then we are giving them a green light, a free
ticket to keep on doing it. And if victims of mind-control do not
see people wanting to rescue them, then they will not fight the
mind-control, and if they do not fig/it they will not get free. It’s
that simple. Each of us by only trying to rescue one or two
persons is opening the door to freedom for all victims of
mind-control. Do we want the door left open, or the door to
freedom shut? It is our choice. Second, the person you save
from mind-control may have been someone who would have
been used in some secret operation to seriously hurt someone
else or to seriously damage the fabric of a free society by
smuggling guns, or dope or laundering money. By helping
victims of mind-control you are making life a better place.
Third, by helping a mind-control victim you will learn who you
are, what gifts God has placed within you, how the human mind
functions, as well as having your own weaknesses exposed so
that they can be worked on. There is nothing more powerful
than watching God Almighty answer prayers of desperation
with miracles. Bottom line, you will be a better person for
helping those who are in such desperate need. Fourth, by
learning how the mind-control operates and exhibits itself you
will be able to prevent others from infiltration by damage
agents, and to prevent parents from unwittingly allowing a
day-care center or other institution to program their children. In
other words, we will be in a better position to prevent the
myriads of harm that come from the wide-spread customs of
mind-control. Intellectual awareness of how the mind-control is
done is not the total solution, but it does act as a buffer to help
us fight this mind-control madness.
We still have much to learn, but we hope to pass on what we
have learned to others that we might all make the soonest use of
the best help available for mind-control victims. If you know
Almighty God, then you know that His strength is perfected in
our weakness. He will take our few loaves of understanding,
and multiply it.

THE HARVEST OF WEEPING

‘Be not deceived: God is not mocked: for whatsoever a man
soweth, that shall lie also reap. For he that soweth to his flesh
shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that soweth to the
Spirit shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting." Galatians 6:7-8
The mind-control that has been carried out secretly in this 20th
century on such a vast scale has left us with a harvest of
weeping. The children of this dispensation cry after the virtues
and the oneness within the family unit. Their hearts have
become broken through the lack of knowledge, and instability
of not knowing the security of a father’s love. Within this rising
generation, many c/iildren walk in a famished land where there
is no real love. They receive only the remnant of broken homes
and relationships, and overworked parents.
Page 323 ...
When the heart has gone out of the family, broken lives become
as fragments of broken glass. For many children feel as though
their hearts have been washed away in the silent tears of their
incompleteness. Having no voice within the kingdom to say
"peace be still,, they suffer from the scars of emotional
abandonment. In bondage they are unable to see their way
through the journey of life. Where do they go when they feel
there’s no place to turn? Who do they talk to, when there’s
nobody who wants to listen? Who do they lean on when there’s
no stable foundation? The Spirit of Darkness soon covers this
generation with shattered dreams. In this pool of contamination,
parents rise against parents. Brothers and sister become pulled
between their loyalties within the family, causing a severing
within thie heart of the family unit. In the turmoil of confusion
and uncertainty comes a brokenness wit hun the hearts of the
offspring, which causes the soul to bleed with the emotion of
inner loneliness. Through a grieving process, the scars of
neglect turn in rebellion, screaming with a voice of ‘PLEASE
SOMEBODY LOVE ME." In planting of a bad harvest, come
the reward of "I looked that I should bring forth grapes, but I
broughut it forth with wild grapes." For when the kingdom has
fallen and the hedge is gone, the harvest will be overtaken and
trodden down. The landscaping and cultivation will be a thing
of the past. There will be briers and thorns in the vineyard and
the harvest will cease to produce fruit of quality. Woe unto the
man thiat has rewarded evil unto his children. As the
extortioner is in the land, so the young will turn in sorrow and
in anger and know him not. He made me not, he had no
understanding, I do not love him. As the children of yesterday
and today were overthrown in the wilderness, so will come the
weeping for the fathers, for man’s glory becomes his shame.
Our leaders have planted pain and sorrow, and now we have a
harvest of weeping. We think of the countless child victims
who waited for the parents to come, who waited for love and
acceptance, but were never good enough for the programmers. I
want to weep for the humaness that hias been stolen from so
many child victims of mind control. I weep for every scream
that was never allowed, and for each child that could no longer
fight for themself or their own mind. I weep for the silent tears
that were not allowed. And I grieve when I think of how
grieved Almighity God must be. I grieve that the cycle
continues, and that there is no voice for the new cycle of
victims, the new generation of victims who are receiving
sophisticated high-tech mind-control that has been perfected
over centuries and in the Nazi concentration camps,
universities, hospitals, labs, and secret underground facilities.
This book is meant to be a voice for those victims who have no
voice.
But this book is not only concerned about what has been stolen
from the victims of mind-control, but also about the sacrifices
that sincere therapists and support persons have endured. This
next section is written in hopes that it will help therapists in
their struggles. We make no claims that this information will
work for therapists, we are merely passing on what we have
learned from one friend to another friend. Best wishes, and may
God bless your work
Overview of
Back to Contents
Therapy
Page 324

An overview of what the support

team faces
When the victim first comes into therapy it will typically be for
some other problem, such as an eating disorder. An astute
therapist will notice the clues which signal that mind-control is
very probable, & then will follow up. There are four areas of
therapy that should not be neglected:
a. safety issues
b. helping the victim get to know themselves,
c. building positives such as love, care, the Word of God into
the recovering victim’s life.
d. dismantling the PDE (the primal dissociative experience),
along with the programming foundations.
As a little method to remember these things, we came up with
the word S-I-N-C-E-R-E, which stands for Safety, Information,
and, Creating positives, Ejecting, erasing, expelling, the PDE &
internal computers, R realizing, Emancipation. Each of these
areas are essential for success. What do we mean Realizing
Emancipation? When we are talking about mind-control,
freedom is a state of mind. The victim must free their mind
from the control of the world and realize who they are as God
intended and planned. It is not enough to erase the bad, one
must realize one’s identity and birthright in God that was
stolen. In fact, as our book points out, a mind-control victim
will not let loose of their mind-control unless something better
is adopted. We sincerely pray that those victims who want out
will find Jesus Christ, and realize the emancipation that is
found in Christ Jesus. Let us recap the four essential areas of
work. If the victim is not totally SAFE, then very little work of
substance will take place, even though the client might display
a great healing (which is a cover program.) If the victim, does
not get to know who they are, what has happened to them, and
what mind-control is all about, they will likely go into denial
and leave therapy.
If the programming is not worked on, and dismantled, it will
torment the person until they are too beat down and too
tormented & intimidated to continue. If the victim is not given
positives and positive reasons to live, if they do not experience
love, they will not value themselves, and will not be motivated
to work through the horrendous work that must be done. They
need to have positive worthwhile goals to work toward. This
book is not the final word on this subject. This book will give
the reader the most indepth look into the therapy of
trauma-based mind-control to date. There are only a few
therapists who have worked with PDEs. These are dangerous,
& it is hard to present the successful techniques on how to
break the deeper programming without giving the other side the
knowledge on how to prevent such therapeutic work. May God
grant the strength & courage you need.

Page 325 ...

ACCESSING
Before the support team and the victim can work on accessing
issues, they need to understand HOW a mind-control slave can
be accessed. Allow us to give a summary of some of the more
usual methods of accessing, that is making contact with a
mind-control slave. (In fact almost all of these were standard
methods used on the author.):
MEDIA: access codes/colors/story schemes/pictures in the
newspapers, television, Christian television, ads, radio, and
news events that are broadcast in all fashions.
PERSON TO PERSON: Eye winks, eye blinks, hand signals,
body gestures, clothing, colors, words, karaoke song selections
sung, other victims of mind control, taps such as 3 taps, and the
arrival of particular persons, one’s children, one’s boss, one’s
relatives.
TECHNOLOGICAL: Sounds in morse code, break lights done
in code, head light flashes, gunshots in area such as 3 gunshots,
blank telephone calls, recorded messages left on answering
machine, telephone tones, late calls from master, airplanes
flying certain patterns in area, helicopters flying certain
patterns, and lights on helicopters.
ITEMS: Keys, business cards, certain tokens or certain bills,
letters such as chain letters, colors on cars, statues at sites,
signs, houses, and colors on houses, buttons.
SPIRITUAL: Astral projection, telepathy.
(Students can refer to our other books for more information on
accessing methods and codes.)
As the casual reader of the above will realize, it is almost
impossible for a victim of mind-control to be isolated from
being accessed. This is why it is essential to remove the victim
from their ordinary environment and get them to a safe place
where they are secure and can be worked with, without
interference. Up to now, only a handful of victims in history
have ever received this, and then only temporarily.
Because it is so difficult to isolate the victim from everything
that might be a code, a few knowledgeable sincere therapists
have resorted to desensitizing the codes, and putting safety
mechanisms that cause the victim to get angry if someone tries
to access them, and allows them to block out the codes.
However, this is only part of the answer, because if they
physically get a hold of an ex-victim, they can traumatize that
part of the mind that is resisting the codes and destroy it so that
they break the safety mechanisms. The first step in
desensitizing the codes is to look at them with the alters, to go
over it consciously and know that it is a trigger. Once the
conscious mind knows something is a trigger, it is harder for it
to work. Most of the triggers, codes and cues work at the
subconscious (or unconscious mind). I write
unconscious--because they hit the mind at a very deep level.
These codes are not something sitting close to the front of the
mind. A skilled victim that is undergoing therapy, may want to
play along with the abusers so that the Illuminati do not have a
clear idea of where the system is rather than bucking the system
cold turkey. Again each situation for each victim is unique &
calls for some clever responses. Running from the abusers
rather than confronting them when they publicly try to secretly
access the victim may send the wrong signal that the victim
fears the abusers. The abusers love to see fear; fear only
encourages them. Hopefully, the support team can develop their
own strategies, without us having to spell it all out, & then
having someone mechanically "do it by the book." As a final
note, we encourage readers who want to understand the subject
of accessing better to review various related parts in our books.
For instance, there is also some information in our twinning
article that might be helpful.

Page 326 ...

BOUNDARIES & ROLES

Because the therapists speak a special language, and are
recognized as experts, they have exercised a monopoly on
providing information on mind-control. People want to believe
that the experts have answers, and therapists have played the
part. The public may have underestimated how much they have
wanted their image of their therapists to be true, and how
reluctant they are to admit the shortcomings of their experts.
We are calling for a re-evaluation of the treatment of
programmed multiples, and suggesting the formation of support
teams to assist programmed multiples in gaining their freedom
from mind-control. Dr. Frank Putnam, one of the most famous
psychiatrists who is recognized as an expert by the psychiatric
community and who worked as part of the DSM-IV Work
Group on Dissociative Disorders, wrote in his book Diagnosis
& Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, pp.
133-134) "Very few of us have had any formal training in the
diagnosis and treatment of MPD. Although some therapists
become ‘instant experts’ upon seeing their first case, most feel
that they do not have the skills necessary to treat these
patients." While having self-doubts about their abilities, the
professional therapists have been very resistent to admitting to
nonprofessionals their shortcomings. For instance, in 1995, one
of the leading professionals told our co-author, who wanted to
share the material of our Vol. 2 and this book with the
therapeutic community that "you have absolutely nothing to
teach us." Maybe a good place for all of us to start is with
humility and a spirit of teachableness. It is probably safe to
assume that if you are reading this book, you already have the
desire to learn. We believe that the climate for learning has
changed, and that the initial frosty reception that our material
received many years ago will not be repeated by those who are
sincerely interested in helping victims. This section contains
some valuable suggestions on how to begin working with a
programmed multiple. Some therapists/ministers are under the
misconception that they do not have to work with "alter
personalities" to help these victims of mind-control. What they
do not comprehend is that the person they know and see (who
is the host alter) IS also only an alter. They generally work
under the misperception that the host personality IS the person,
and that other alters are "the alters" (which these misguided
therapists/ministers perceive as "the problem"). So rather than
work with any alters, they work with the host alter. Their
misperception, which leads to such unwitting contradictory
behavior on the therapists’ part, would be hilariously funny, if
it were not for the gravity of the situation. Host alters can be
extremely resistent in admitting that they are multiples. In fact,
rather than argue and debate the issue with host alters, skilled
therapists come in the back door, by simply relating matter of
fact, what all the other alters have been doing during therapy.
The accumulation of evidence over a long period of time will
eventually convince the host alter through the back door that
they are part of a multiple system. On the flip side, many less
visible alters may carry anger toward the host for the host
alter’s denial of their existence. Do not expect straightforward
evidence of a transcript of a session where several alters of a
multiple appear, or a camcorder tape of a session showing
different alters to automatically convince a host alter that he/or
she is a multiple. Host alters will often study the available
literature about DID (MPD), and will often challenge the
therapist to debates to prove to the therapist that they are not a
multiple. Even though the
Page 327 ...
therapist has witnessed the multiplicity, it will be hard to
"prove" anything to the doubting host alter. Remember the
doubting philosopher who after long thought finally realized "I
think, therefore I am"--if a person is emotionally invested in
doubting something, the mind has an amazing ability to think
up reasons to doubt obvious facts. The support team for a
multiple will need to be skilled in getting the multiple to see
things via "back door" techniques rather than head-on debates.
It is a traditional therapeutic practice to establish contracts with
Multiple Systems. Generally, therapists attempt to establish a
contract with as many alters as possible. They will endeavor to
explain in the language that the child alters understand what is
being agreed upon when a contract is negotiated between the
child alter and the therapist.
The primary area that the therapist is concerned with is "hurt"
by the Multiple to anyone else or the Multiple System’s own
body. The American Psychiatric Association’s contract reads at
one point, "I will not hurt or kill myself or hurt or kill anyone
else, internal or external, on purpose or accidently, now or in
the future." The other major area of concern is setting limits
regarding the treatment. Traditionally, the therapists have
limited the client’s time to their help, the number of phone calls
they are allowed to make, etc. This works fine for the
therapists. However, the therapeutic community is in denial or
under its own delusions that it is making significant progress
with the programmed multiples that are coming in for therapy.
By and large, the therapists are simply working with the front
worlds of very deep and complex systems of alters. The cults
are continuing their use of essentially all slaves that are
undergoing therapy today. The time has come to turn that
situation around and get genuine help for these suffering slaves.
The therapist will become the parent image for a mind-control
victim’s alters. Is this good or bad? Should the therapist fight
this transference issue? Please understand the dynamics. 99%
of the alters in an Illuminati system are child alters. Granted,
that some professionals report working with alter systems that
they claim are 100% adults, but this only shows the limits of
their understanding of their client’s alter system. These child
alters have NEVER had a parent. They have had cult figures
who oversaw their mind-control. They have had big giant
adults in their life who have manipulated and used them, but
they have not had a genuine parent. The therapist can and needs
to perform the role of a loving parent for these child alters so
they can grow to maturity. The intense desire of many
therapists/ministers to integrate all alters again shows their
limited understanding of the situation. Hopefully this book
(along with our other books), by providing the details of what is
going on, will encourage relatives and outsiders to have more
patience with therapists who are not coming up with instant
micro-wave-speed answers. Most of the heavy programming
traumas are done to the victim when they were a child.
Obviously, thousands of dissociated pieces of the mind which
have had no chance to experience life day-to-day as the host
alter(s) has, have had no chance to grow up. Integration of an
entire system of child alters who have not grown up is only
asking for problems. Integration of the real core with child
alters is asking for problems. The overall situation that
trauma-based mind-control places the victim and therapist in, is
extremely complex and difficult. The victim will transfer their
feelings for their abusers to the therapist and support team.
What else can they do? As past traumas are uncovered, the
victim may even hallucinate during a drug memory abreaction
and see the therapist as the programmer. The therapist may say
or wear things that also
Page 328 ...
trigger transference. Depending upon how the various alters
handled abuse, may determine how the different alters then act
when they perceive the therapist as another abusive person.
Again, this presents another reason why support teams are
worthwhile. Traditionally, therapists have set spoken and
unspoken limits to the time they will give the victim. Therapists
have limited time in two ways, one is the amount of time per
week, and the other is the length of treatment that the therapist
will devote to the victim before dropping him/her as a client. If
the client perceives that the overall treatment time is limited,
they will not raise the deeper issues. Because most clients with
mind-control only see their therapists for short periods of time,
they also can get by with letting the therapist only work on
surface issues. After having interacted with numerous
mind-control victims and therapists, the authors of this book
have seen firsthand that most therapists do not see a clear
picture of what they are dealing with DURING THE
THERAPY TIME. Putnam admits in his book Diagnosis &
Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, p. 149), "I
have discovered, much to my chagrin, that many of my patients
are very different out in the world than they appear in my
office." In fact, the real secret sides of their clients are far more
profoundly shocking than most therapists up to now have been
willing to imagine. The therapists encourage the superficial
approach mentioned above, because many of the best
professional therapists will not deal with anything except the
issues that the host or presenting alter brings up in the therapy
session. In other words, many professional therapists REFUSE
to guide the therapy. The client is then double-binded. The
client is somehow supposed to know the issues that they are
programmed not to know. It’s a
"patient-diagnose-and-heal-yourself approach". Amazing result
do occur, because the mind doesn’t want to face its problems.
The mind comes up with superficial solutions, declares itself
better and moves on. (Unfortunately, the mind-control
continues, only now it is simply better hidden.) A great deal has
been written about how clients sabotage therapy and
double-bind their therapists. The books that have covered this
subject have not even begun to cover this subject. Books could
be written about this. But an even less understood problem, is
how the traditional therapeutic methods double-bind the client.
The traditional therapeutic/& ministerial methods are
double-binding the clients from escaping the mind-control. For
instance within the Christian deliverance approach, if a client
fails to get an instant miraculous healing during a deliverance,
then they are told they lack faith, and they are told that without
faith they cannot heal. In other words, they must deny the
problem if they want the solution. Are the therapists (or support
teams) willing to put as much effort & attention into the victim
as the Illuminati or other programming cult? Except for minor
exceptions, therapists have NOT been willing to spend the
same amount of time as the cult spends. The Illuminati have
Grande Dames that continue ongoing guidance for the adult
slaves. They also are willing to have their best programmers fly
in from Europe and other locations to reprogram a slave with
the best equipment and technology available. The commitment
level by the Illuminati to their slaves has up to now been many
times greater than any of the professionals. Don’t kid yourself
that the slaves don’t recognize this. That is why only superficial
issues are being dealt with. That is why so many slaves appear
to be getting better from the professionals, but the professionals
are not being eliminated from practicing. The original
Mother-of-darkness who works as a programming assistant
with the head male programmer is putting in trees
Page 329 ...
internally that are designed to last for the entire life of the slave.
That’s a long term commitment on the part of the programmers
and their programming. The fruit (programs) that are placed
upon the trees (which are used as programming file systems),
are to last the life of the slave. The slave knows that the fruit
has been given his internal worlds for his lifetime. An example
of a healthy productive role the therapist can take would be the
following: The therapist assures the mind-control victim that
they will have as much commitment to examining and taking
off the fruit, as the other side has of keeping the fruit in place.
The victim doesn’t know what the issues are, so the therapist
uses the back-door approach to let the victim learn about
themselves. The therapist asks, "What do you think about trees?
Would you spend the next week(s) drawing trees, talking to me
about trees, and going out and talking to trees. Please journal
what you talk to the trees about." The client may come back
and say, "Trees are very important to me. I don’t want to talk to
anyone about trees. Trees are very sacred to me, and they are
deeply rooted in my mind, I am their caretaker?" Then the
therapist continues the backdoor exploration, "What do you
mean you are their caretaker?" Eventually, the mind begins to
unravel. The journaling can be an important vehicle to track the
unravelling of the mind. Due to the heavy infiltration within the
therapeutic community, some disinformation has been
assimilated into the beliefs of therapists. One of these is that
victims of mind control (who they call "survivors") shouldn’t
spend time together. Actually victims are able to understand
each other and trigger important information. They can be very
helpful to each other, once the host alter has done some basic
stabilizing. Another myth that the therapists hold to, is that the
therapist will be perceived as a benevolent caretaker by the
victim and the Illuminati will be perceived as abusers.
Generally, it is quite the opposite. The Illuminati have the
ability to give pain, but they have the ability to take it away.
The therapist has the ability to give pain, but seldom the ability
nor the time to take the pain away. There often is little closure
to the mess therapists start, and most victims are very silent
about the struggles they go through, in part because they blame
themselves for problems. The master or handler is generally
seen as a benevolent dictator, a wonderful god, and a friend all
rolled up into one. The therapist, in order to maintain their aloof
therapeutic role, does not want to be a friend to the victim.
They like to stay emotionally distant, perhaps puffing on their
pipe. The therapists are still missing an obvious given, which is
that most multiple personalities have parents who are multiples.
Page 330 ...

COMMUNICATIONS ISSUES
Communication issues come in all shapes and sizes. The first
that must be dealt with, and which will never fade away, are the
issues between the victim and their therapist. The victim and
therapist do not start this marathon to communicate at the
starting point. They must work hard just to get to where most
people begin. This is because the victim has been betrayed by
every important person in their life. Trust is the foundation for
communication, and before the therapist can establish a shaky
trust in the victim’s mind, little deep communication will occur.
The victim must establish internal communication lines. This is
equivalent to trying to get a city of people to all like and talk to
each other. The answers to how a multiple can communicate
with so many diverse people should be used to help society at
large. The same answers that multiples have been discovering
for their internal work, could help society at large. Along with
developing better internal communication is the task of
developing common goals and learning how to control a
system’s internal switching. Common goals and control over
one’s switching are major positive steps. Initially, an alter
system will not have these. To develop cooperation in
switching will also relieve some of the tension that comes from
alters competing for the body. The next area of communication
problems is in the area of what alters present themselves when
the therapist wants to work, and which alters does the therapist
work with. The temptation is to get rid of troublemaking alters,
but sometimes the troublemaking alters are the ones the
therapists really needs to work with. The standard hour-long
therapeutic session does not promote communication with an
alter session. Traditionally, alters will appear as the session is
closing, perhaps subconsciously hoping that their important
appearance will force the therapist to extend the therapy time.
Many therapists stick to their time schedules, and simply advise
the alter to appear at the next session. Many opportunities to
develop lines of communication are lost due to the limitations
of the traditional one hour session. Many alters only show up at
special occasions, so a support person who is around the system
for long periods of time is in a strategic position to really
facilitate some good communication developing. The
programmed multiple’s system will almost overwhelm the
therapist when they find out that they have a listening ear. The
therapist will have an entire city of people wanting to give their
opinions and to voice their concerns. The needs of the alter
system are so great, that it is no wonder that many therapists
have terminated their clients because they feel overwhelmed at
the system’s need to be heard. What is breaking is a dam that
has held back in silence decades of severe abuse. In the best
interest of the overwhelmed therapist and the overwhelmed
victim, we suggest support teams deal with programmed
multiples, because the issues really demand that much help.
Page 331 ...

DENIAL, how to deal with the therapists or ministers

A popular question with ministers who have not worked in the
area of programmed DID’s is, "Why doesn’t God have an
instant miracle for these people?" There are many parts to the
answer, but before getting into the answer, perhaps these
ministers should ask Almighty God why he has not chosen
simplistic answers to so many things in life. If a room full of
smokers are prayed for by any minister, how many will no
longer be smoking in a month’s time? Smoking is a trivial mild
addiction compared to the programmed of a complex
programmed multiple. Those ministers who ask this question
need to ask themselves if God is so powerful and they know
how to pray, why haven’t they themselves cleared out this
nation’s hospitals. The traumas that have put people in
hospitals are generally mild compared to the programming
traumas. While most licensed therapists are in denial that the
systematic programming of thousands of infants is going on in
this nation, and that SRA exists, if they look at history every
element of the programming has been carried out and
historically documented. Should we automatically dismiss any
suggestion that those in authority may occasionally conspire to
obfuscate the truth? Consider this, most people can barely make
it through the day at work without engaging in what are
effectively low grade conspiracies. Perhaps they tacitly agree
with another coworker not to report the co-workers
misbehavior to the boss. So why should we expect things to be
different in the corridors of power? addresses and locations)
and think to ourselves how many millions of people are
practicing witchcraft today--doesn’t it seem incredible that the
FBI doesn’t believe any of these witches are capable of killing
someone for their religious beliefs. Christians, Moslems, and
Jews are capable of killing for their religious beliefs, but
somehow the FBI thinks witches are incapable? Doesn’t that
smack of a cover-up? The victim doesn’t have time to deal with
bull-headed counselors who are in denial. The denial could be a
sign that the therapist are mixed up in the world-wide satanic
conspiracy him or herself. The victim should not try to
convince the therapist about what is happening, the victim
should find a listening ear, and take their needs for help
somewhere where they will get real attention. Every major and
most minor religious group in history have had members that
have killed other humans. And yet the FBI officially claims that
SRA doesn’t exist. If we look at the list of thousands of covens
(and our co-author Fritz has many of their
Page 332 ...

DEPRESSION (initial client complaint)

Depression is mentioned, because the original complaint of
many victims of total mind-control is a depression that they
can’t figure out. Depression comes in different types. What the
therapist wants to identify is a. what kind of depression is
occurring and b. what are the causes of the depression and c.
what kind of treatment modalities can be applied. Often
depression will be experienced as a feeling of defeat, or a
feeling of a loss, or a feeling of no hope. Sometimes depression
is a symptom of programming going off of a total
mind-controlled slave. If this is the case, unless the client is
well into therapy for his or her DID (MPD), the client will
rarely have a clue about the real source. Some drugs have the
effect or side-effect of causing depression. These include
codeine, high-blood pressure medicines, indomethacin,
steroids, and tranquilizers. The client should mention what
medicine they are taking, and the side-effects of these noticed.
Sometimes clients with depression can get involved in physical
activities and get involved with others and this will clear up a
depression. Sometimes clients can determine the underlying
spiritual problems and significantly help their depression by
working on root spiritual problems or doing a deliverance. A
few proper questions will soon discover if there are root
spiritual problems causing the depression. If the person had a
breakdown of communication with their parents, this will
eventually if not corrected lead to open rebellion, and then
several steps later this will lead to a suicidal depression. The
original sequence of events was created by the lack of
trustworthy communication by the person’s parents and needs
to be addressed at that level to pull it out by the roots.
Sometimes depression is simply a reaction to a sad event. This
is not likely to cause someone to come to a therapist, but such a
triggering event should be ruled out if other causes are to be
treated. One of the most effective ways of dealing with
depression is to realize how it is a lack of faith and a selfish
self-focus and a sin toward God, who will provide just what we
need in life. If the client is open to seeing that depression is a
sin, then this sin can be confessed, and all spirits attached to it
delivered from the person. If the client is a total
mind-controlled slave, the front alters may get some relief from
such a miniature deliverance, but will still need to address the
deeper problems. The therapist can administer to the client a
dissociation test, to determine if the client may have been a
candidate for total mind-control. If the client tests positive, then
the therapist will need to do follow up work. Causes for this
depression may be very deep rooted & take some serious long
term investigation and work. The therapist can also serve in the
role of listener. If the client gets some of his pent-up emotions
& problems out, he may feel some relief. If the client sees that
someone cares, that can also have a positive effect. The client
can also be encouraged to talk about the situation to another
trusted person. The therapist will want to find out what kind of
support system (team) can be used to help the client.
To Contents Next
Page 334 ...

DETECTION OF MIND-CONTROL
The therapist, the victim and others have several avenues they
can use to detect mind-control. One avenue in diagnosing
mind-control which has not been touched upon by the
professional psychiatric literature is to look at the subject’s role
in life. The reason that the professional literature is unable to
discuss this avenue, is because the professionals have had very
little understanding about how the World Order is constructed
and ran. In fact we were thankful that God brought into our life,
one of the few outsiders that had a grasp of how the Illuminati
controls the world. An understanding of how the Illuminati uses
front organizations, what those organizations are, how they
interlock, and how control over the various sectors of life is
managed by the Illuminati would greatly help therapists
identify people who have to be Illuminati members. It is an
extremely high chance that Illuminati members are multiples,
and an even higher chance that they are under some form of
mind-control. Even John DuPont, who recently was head of the
DuPont family, was plagued by implants. To identify people
under mind-control see if they are people with specialized
training. Next, identify if they are in a highly structured job,
where there is no room for grey--everything is black or white.
Multiples do very well in positions that call for black or white,
structured thinking. Look for educators in principal positions,
reform schools, catholic and military schools, boy and girl
schools. These are places that the Illuminati control in order to
use them for auxiliary programming centers. Many of your
porn stars, some of your movie actors, almost all of your brain
surgeons, some of your CPAs, many of your politicians, all of
your CIA field agents, and most of your religious leaders are
under trauma-based mind-control. If you actually have the
subject come in for an interview, ask questions about the
person’s personal history. The host alters of multiples have
some very typical methods of handling personal history
questions. Don’t expect the host to make it easy for you to
determine that they are a multiple. What you can expect is that
you will have a difficult time with most multiples of getting a
coherent history of their life. You may discover contradictory
information in what they tell you. For instance, one multiple
that we interviewed said his father was a. a nazi submarine
captain, b. a jewish scientist that worked on the Montauk
project from 1941 onwards. The information was obviously
contradictory and contradicted what his ex-wife said about his
father. The personal history contradictions of many multiples
won’t be this dramatic, but they might be. When the host
personality remembers the details of their life they may say,
"they tell me that... Frequently, a person won’t remember if a
detail happened before or after another event in their childhood.
If you find chronological problems and frequent
inconsistencies, then you can highly suspect DID. But you must
continue. The MPD really is apparent, when there are lots of
specific differences between the therapist and the subject in
how they remember what the client has said. The different
episodes are hard for the multiple to remember although they
are confident of their perception of the event. The dissociative
thinking makes it very difficult for the multiple to see the
differences, and they will be very convinced that the therapist is
trying to deceive them. The experience can be frustrating for
both parties, but it is one more red flag that indicates that
mind-control is likely present. Multiples will frequently explain
their
Page 335 ...
lack of detailed memories on having a "poor memory". They
will often say, "I don’t remember", which is truthful, and is
better than the occasional situation where some multiples try to
invent something to say to hide their lack of personal
information, or to placate the wishes of the interviewer. They
are also great at saying nothing but sounding like they have said
something, and another trick multiples have is saying
something that appears to be one thing but is another. Some
multiples have figured out their multiplicity, but are secret
about it, in fear that others will think that they are crazy. Over
the years, probably many more times than not the professional
psychiatrists and psychologists have misdiagnosed MPD. Some
of their favorite disorders to use when misdiagnosing are:
Adjustment, Affective, Anxiety, Bi-Polar Affective, Borderline,
Drug Abuse, Eating, Histronic, Organic Mental, Paranoid
Schizophrenia, PTS, Psychosis, Schizoaffective, Somatization,
and Transient Amnesia. When multiples takes an MMPI, they
have historically answered the same way a schizophrenic
answers on items 156 & 251. (At least 3 studies have
documented this.) These two questions elevate the Sc scale
which has been taken to indicate schizophrenia. Some of the
tipoffs that a person is misdiagnosed in a mental hospital is that
the interact a lot with the staff, but have erratic behavior, that
generally leads to the staff being upset. They may be
responsible for a while and then surprise everyone by not being
able to function or handle a responsibility. Typical questions
that help the therapist expose the programmed DID include
questions about whether their school grades were erratic,
whether they have gaps in their memories of school days, if
they remember getting test results on tests that they don’t
remember taking, and a grade-by-grade year-by-year history of
their life. Bear in mind, that the programmers are trying to
fine-tune the programming by layering in cover memories. Still
an experienced therapist should be able to see through the
shallowness and the confusion of cover memories.
Mind-control comes in many appearances. With the more
recent victims, implants are being used to distract victims from
realizing their DID (MPD). The detection of MPD (DID)
underneath the incessant manipulations and voices of the
implants is a challenge. The "noise" created by the implants is a
strong dissociating mechanism. There are strong natural
defenses of the mind that the programmers count on to keep the
mind-control hidden. For instance, the victim has been bonded
to the programmer/master. To admit mind-control is to
experience abandonment, and even death (because many alters’
self-identity is wrapped up with the perpetrator.) It is not easy
to kill oneself, which is often the mind’s perception of what
admitting mind-control is. Detection of trauma-based
mind-control by the therapist will usually encounter strong
denial mechanisms by the victim. The therapist should ask
about flashbacks. If the client reports flashbacks that are not
drug-related flashbacks that is a good sign that MPD may be
present. However, most flashbacks do not begin suff acing until
the programming and dissociation begins crumbling. Some
undetected adult victims of mind-control, when they are having
sex with their spouses get intrusive flashbacks and images that
scare them. This is another red-flag that the person may be a
victim of mind-control. Victims of mind-control will often have
all kinds of issues around relationships and sex. Another red
flag is when a person reports abilities or information that they
have no idea where it has come from. For instance, all of a
sudden one day they could
Page 336 ...
understand someone speaking German, or all of a sudden they
got the words to a song, or all of a sudden they just intuitively
knew how to play a piano, etc. The opposite of this also hits
DID mind-control victims. They may have an ability that
somehow strangely disappears. It takes time to realize that
these are co-conscious alters. Victims of mind-control have
great survival mechanisms. They are experts at changing the
conversation to hide what they don’t want to talk about. If the
therapist has the skill at being gently but firmly assertive in
getting what they want, the ability to be gently persistent can
pay off.
The therapist needs to become acquainted with detecting alter
switches. This involves eye shape changes, eye color changes,
eye movement changes, blinks, body posture changes, voice
pitch changes, word usage changes, perception and value
changes, mood changes, etc. Upon detection of this, the
therapist may gently ask, "Do you ever feel that there is another
part of yourself that comes out and does things that you would
not do?" "Do you ever feel that when you are alone, someone
else or some other part of you is watching you?" Any answer
except a definite "no" is a red flag, that reconfirms the
switching clues, and other clues that the therapist has
assembled. Not all victims of mind-control have extensive alter
systems. In our previous books, we have covered situations
when this does not occur. Another way that therapists can
determine mind-control would be to interview people close to
the victim, and to visit the victim’s work place and home. Some
victims of mind-control surround themselves with objects that
pertain to their programming. For instance, the therapist may
find a man who has a passion for Mickey Mouse objects, or a
woman who loves white rabbit figurines or star trek objects.
Page 337 ...

EATING DISORDERS (as an Initial problem, and as a

Deeper Issue)
AN INTRODUCTION
Eating disorders exhibit themselves as initial problems for
victims coming in for therapy. For instance, they may find
themselves having an irresistible urge to overeating followed
by vomiting or purging, or they may be starving themselves, or
have phobias around certain foods. Eating disorders also may
develop as problems as the system of alters work through their
memories and programming. These eating problems do have
the possibility of becoming life-threatening. Many victims of
mind-control suffer from eating disorders. There are certainly
many factors which cause mind-control victims eating
disorders. The more difficult disorders which resist treatment
are often created by multiple factors. This section will make an
attempt to provide the therapist some of important factors
behind eating disorders of mind-control victims. Eating
disorders are not limited to victims of mind-control. However,
many individuals who are referred or on their own come in to
therapists for bulimia or anorexia, are actually suffering from
the severe effects of trauma-based total mind-control. For some
therapists, the first primary complaint of mind-control victims
will be their eating disorder. They will be totally oblivious that
anything else could be wrong. Researchers who like to work
with statistics have noticed that there is a high incidence of
people with eating disorders who have problems with abuse,
depression, and self-identity. Since mind-control will bring
with it abuse, depression and self-identity problems it is a given
that the mind-control victim will have some eating problems at
some level of their being. Modern American culture as well as
many of the slave handlers are obsessed with females being
thin. The pressure that females feel from society and their
handlers that they are "a "dog" unless they...." makes many
slaves identify thinness with overcoming their self-esteem
problems. Unfortunately, if the host pursues starvation thinking
that it will overcome low-self esteem, they almost always are
disappointed that it doesn’t help, and if anything, starvation,
only exacerbates the original low self-esteem. On the flip side,
in order for the host alter to feel that she has some control over
just one thing in her life, she may resort to starving herself to
regain some sense of power over her own body. When striving
for freedom, the mind may think that starvation gives at least a
fraction of power over their body, after it has been stripped of
choice, beaten, and raped, and electroshocked. One reason why
some bulimics and anorexics have eating disorders is that they
have difficulty identifying their feelings, and have little
confidence in their ability in relationships. They feel they must
do the right thing to avoid disapproval and rejection. They have
an artificial idealized image of what they should be. For
instance, one teenage girl was frightened that she was changing
from a girl to a woman. Others due to their abuse have a hatred
of their body, as well as a fear. There are some young altars that
may not want to have breasts and hips. Another person felt that
they were naughty if they ate, and she became increasingly
disgusted with herself as she ate.

WHEN MIND-CONTROL VICTIMS WITH EATING

DISORDERS FIRST COME IN CONTACT WITH
THERAPISTS
One way victims come in to therapy is that they are referred by
someone for their eating disorder. Anyone who gets a referral
should explain clearly why the person is in for a consultation. If
the client is living at
Page 338 ...
home, it goes almost without saying that the support team
should explore with the client the possibility of someone
supportive from the family participating in the consultation
phase of things, so that a more complete evaluation can be
obtained. Another frequent scenario is when a female
mind-control victim is raped during the normal course of life
and it triggers their mind to remember previous sexual trauma.
This may kick off an eating disorder, which may drive the
person to come in for therapy. Because the problem is not
really an eating disorder, the person doesn’t have a clue as to
what they are stepping into by asking for therapy. If someone is
trying to trick a person into coming in for treatment, experience
shows the tricking will quite consistently backfire in the long
run. Rather, than scheming behind the victim’s back, the
therapist should see if there are good support groups in the area.
After the victim or the victim & their family experience a
support group, they are often more willing to come into
therapy. Depending on the situation, getting the victim in to
work on their eating disorder may even be perceived by the
slave’s handler as a positive, rather than a threat to his control,
because it may be helping to stabilize a problem within the
slave. The patient with an eating disorder is often going to be
resistant, embarrassed, and apprehensive. The therapist can
establish rapport by being warm, acceptable, honest,
empathetic, and interested. Different people will click with
different therapists, for instance, teenage girls often prefer
female therapists. This is where teams are beneficial, where one
person can act more as a consultant, which the therapist who
has rapport can deal with the person on a longer basis.
(Therapists can establish report by using the language of the
person, mirroring where they are at, etc.) If the therapist is
going to try dealing with only the eating disorder, there are
several approaches that can be taken. However, whichever path
the therapist goes down, it would be advisable to gather an
understanding of what is going on. Whether it is bulimia or
anorexia, the therapist will ask the person to describe their
eating patterns both during the week and the weekend. There
are ways to get information from people which use the
"back-door" so-to-speak. For instance, if the person has been
referred for binge eating but won’t openly discuss it, the
therapist might ask, "When people go on a diet to lose weight,
they sometimes feel so hungry that they are tempted to eat a
whole lot. Have you experienced that?" If the person is not
forthcoming about vomiting, a gentle back-door approach
might be, "Have you ever tried to lose weight by any other
means?" It is important to track the details around the
episodes--such as how often, when, the most common times
they occur, how long they last and the types and amounts of
food eaten. It is also important to note what thoughts and
feelings were attached to the various episodes. Don’t be
surprised if the person doesn’t say, "I don’t know why I did it."
The therapist can ask, "How do you view that particular food?"
It could be that the cool-aid triggers the mind to think of blood.
It could be that raw meat triggers the person’s mind to think of
sacrifices. It could be that certain smells relate to certain
traumas. Vomiting may have a cleansing effect on the mind of
person coming in for therapy.
The therapist may also ask the person about their thoughts and
feelings related to sex, and whether they are interested in sex.
This may provide some significant clues as to what one is really
dealing with.
What is the image of the person
Page 339 ...
concerning her or his body? Later, as one deals with more than
the host personality, this will continue to be an issue. With
initial clients suffering mind-control, the therapist will need to
ask the full range of questions, such as asking about symptoms
of depression, low motivation, panic attacks, sleep problems,
feelings of suicide and hopelessness, and feelings of being
trapped or worthless. The full range of initial intake questions
will need to be dealt with such as levels of dissociation,
compulsive behaviors, addictions, psychotic thoughts, etc.
Therapists can save time if they want by using some of the
standard evaluations that other professionals have developed
for interviews. For eating disorders there are for instance:
· Garner & Garfunkel’s Eating Attitudes Test,
· Johnson’s Diagnostic Survey for Eating Disorders
· Structure Clinical Interview according to the DSM’s section
on eating disorders. Therapists may also want to use such
interviews as

· Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children by Costello et. al.

· Beck’s Depression Inventory

It almost goes without saying that Eating Disorders come from
a complex array of factors, including such possible problems
like structural brain illness, an infection, or endocrine
malfunction. It is not possible for this book to provide detailed
information on these other possible causes. The therapist needs
to get a feel for what is happening, for what the therapist is
qualified to do, and if need be, get the client to someone who
specializes in what the client needs help in. What this section
can help with is in providing insights into eating disorders as
they relate to mind-control victims, and their programming,
their programming-traumas, memories, and the general
side-effects of a life-time of abuse.
Page 340 ...
EVALUATION FORMS
PURPOSE & SHORTCOMINGS
Evaluation forms are nice crutches in some situations. In a
formal therapeutic situation where time is of the essense, forms
can be given that will decrease the time that the therapist needs
to begin gaining a feel about the new client’s situation. We
have provided an excellent form on the next page that will take
approximately 5 minutes to fill out. It is a non-threatening
"Getting to Know You Better" form, which can help lead into
deeper discussions. The therapist could make a cup of tea for
the client while the new client fills it out. Another way that
forms might help is where a non-professional counsellor or
friend is trying to get some better clues as to what the subject’s
problems are. Another benefit of forms is that it desensitizes
questions that otherwise might make the subject feel defensive,
because the subject’s mind can see that the question is simply a
standard question on a standard form, and not a personal attack.
In dynamic counselling sessions, a good therapist will be
sensing and asking questions in a dynamic manner that is
responding to the cues and clues that the subject is providing.
Obviously, the dynamic approach when done by an experienced
person who knows what he is looking for is much quicker,
much more appropriate, and better tailored for the victim’s
situation. If you were interrogating a P.O.W. which would be
more effective? to go by a list of questions in a book, or to ask
questions in a dialogue between the interogator and P.O.W.?
Likewise, an interview on television by Barbara Walters will be
well thought out, but will still have an element of dynamic
interaction. Likewise, there is no substitute for a live dialogue
between a therapist and their new client. In a dynamic
evaluations, the entire procedure is a skill. However, there are
several areas that will be probed.

SAMPLE QUESTIONS IN AREAS OF INQUIRY

· For instance, "Have you ever lost time?" The counsellor is
careful not to define time, and will see how many examples the
person provides. If the person doesn’t provide examples, the
counsellor might say,
"By losing time I mean to look at the clock at 9 o’clock and the
next thing you realize is that its 4 o’clock." During periods of
boredom or extreme concentration most people will lose track
of time, but in the
case of multiples they often have frequent lost periods of time.
However, we want to remind the reader that back-up amnesia
(you forget that you forgot) will cover much of the time lost.
· "Do you remember calling yourself other names or having
other people call you other names?"
· Another area that can be probed are questions around
depersonalization and derealization, such as "Have you ever
had the feeling you were looking at someone else in your place
[or at yourself from a
distance]?"
· Another area is to ask specific questions about their family
history, such as "Tell me about the first five years of your life,
the significant things you remember such as your home life,
your friends, your
relatives, and starting to school. Be very thorough and give
examples of how you interacted with the important people in
your life." This is to determine how fragmented their memories
are. The Illuminati are
trying to give people cover memories but these cover histories
are still not as tight and real as most people’s.
· "When do your memories become continous?"
· Inquiries can be made to see if the person has been connected
to any of the groups who were exposed in Vol. 2 or any of the
bloodlines exposed in Vol. 1. "Did anyone in your family ever
belong to a
government agency, or the Freemasons?" "Do you know your
family’s background or genealogy?"
· "Do you sometimes hear voices in your head, or does
someone answer you when you talk out loud when alone?"
Such questions are so direct that the host alter may deflect
them, rather than open up.
· "Are there certain times of the year which feel unsafe for
you?"

EARLY WORK
Some of the better therapists, when they suspect MPD, like to
make their initial question and answer session lengthy, in order
to wear the host alter down and make switching a sure thing.
An alter system can prevent switching over a short period, but
over a several hour session, the skilled therapist will work with
the system enough that switches will begin to occur. After
getting some history from the client, the skilled therapist can
teach the client how to put memories on a screen and then can
go back to a significant early point in the person’s life and
begin working dynamically with the event.

Page 341

NAME
___________________________________________________
Address
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

Fill in circle on items that pertain to you

o Abused as a child
o Adopted
o A failure
o Anxiety attacks
o Army brat
o Auto accident
o Bad habits
o Black & white thinking
o Blackouts
o Class President
o Compulsive activities & behaviors
o Depressed
o ESP
o Erotic dancer
o Ex-member of a cult
o Extrovert
o Feelings of being choked
o Feelings of being isolated
o Forgetful
o Flashbacks
o Genius in family
o Good grades in school
o Great faith in God
o Have a twin
o Have an imaginary playmate
o Have several close non-sexual
friends of the opposite sex.
o Headaches
o Inability to believe in God
o Insomnia
o Intelligent
o Interest in the occult
o Irrational anger
o Knew what you were going to be
as a child
o Little trust in other people
o Love Disney movies
o Love Star Wars
o Love to collect (or hoard)
o Loving
o Minister for a father (or mother)
o Moody
o Multiple Sclerosis
o Never dishonest
o Nightmares
o Panic attacks
o Participant in a religion
o Perfect father
o Phobias
o Physically attacked
o Premature sexual development
o Restlessness
o Rich parents
o Secretive
o Serious Health problems
o Single
o Skipped school
o Strange clothes in closet
o Strange pains with no explanation
o Strange voices
o Sudden attitude changes
o Supernatural experiences
o Tonsillectomy, emergency
o Tried narcotics
o Trouble learning in school
o UFO abductions
o Unable to enjoy sex
o Unexplainable things in personal
life
o Visions
o Very vigilant
o Work for the Government

Back to Contents Next

Page 342 ...

FEAR, how to handle

Fear can be triggered by senses, such as smelling smoke. There
is a powerful spiritual dimension that works with the mental
dynamics. Thoughts are powerful things, if -thoughts of fear are
allowed to take root they will grow and spread. The spirit of
Fear paralyzes many victims and many support team members
from dealing with what needs to be done. Fear can be compared
to dandelions in a yard, they spring up everywhere and they are
so hard to weed out and to dig up by the roots. Fear clouds the
mind of person, so that the higher areas of thinking shut down.
Before long, the victim of fear is making unwise decisions and
becoming a wimp. One of the best reasons for a person to dump
their fear is that the enemy watches for fear and tries to give
exactly that thing that the person fears. The fear becomes a
magnet attacting the very thing that the fearful person is
dreading. (The abusers are trained to key in & identify fears.)
The Spirit of the Lord brings boldness and a sound mind (cf. 2
TIM 1:7), but the Spirit of Fear brings a curse. Fear has at its
foundation, the preservation of life. But we are warned in
scripture that if we attempt to save our life we will lose it, but if
we give to God what we can not keep to gain what we cannot
lose, then we have made a wise choice. In other -words, fear
has at its foundation death. The ancient wisdom of Prov. 18:2 1
says, "Death and life are in the power of the tongue; and they
that love it shall eat the fruit thereof." Some people choose
death and call in the spirits that support an agenda of death.
Fear is on that death team. Fear creates a mental bondage. Fear
is often the underlying reason behind many of our bondages,
such as cigarettes, drugs, overeating, and stealing. People think,
"If I don’t do this, then such and such will happen to me." "If I
don’t steal, I’ll starve." "If I don’t do drugs, I won’t be able to
mellow out and face life." "If I don’t smoke cigarettes, I won’t
stay calm and thin."
Secular therapists do not want to hear that fear is a spiritual
problem. But recognition that it is a spiritual problem is
important, because the answers to fear which is hope and trust
are spiritual answers. What gave the shepherd boy David the
courage to face Goliath without fear? Was it because he was
hypnotically worked on by a therapist? Did he visualize and
through self-hypnosis convince himself that he could beat
Goliath? No, he defeated Goliath because he had a spiritual
reason to confront Goliath, "...For who is this uncircumcised
Philistine, that he should defy the armies of the living God." 2
SAM 17:26
The cold hard facts of the matter is that Fear is a lack of trust in
God. God certainly cuts us a great deal of slack. But if you are
"in Christ" you are in His protection, and He has promised that
"I will never leave or forsake you." HEB 13:5 Doubts about
God lead to fears. Because fear is a lack of faith, Fear opens a
portal, a legal foothold for Satan to bring what we fear into our
life. God must respect this free will choice on our part to doubt
His grace. God can spiritually protect us, but when we fear, we
remove by our own free will God’s protection because we have
called into question His Word. We can see this spiritual law
working clear back in the oldest book of the Bible, Job 3:5,
"For the thing which I greatly feared is come upon me, and that
which I was afraid of is come unto me." When Job feared,
Satan used that to go before God and petition for the right to
torment Job in those ways. God was only respecting Job’s
freedom of choice, when He allowed Satan to torment Job. But
God did turn that negative into a positive, because even though
Job had some fear, he was a righteous man. Each person must
resolve not to be in bondage to fear again. It is one thing to be
have foresights and concerns, but when we speak of fear, we
are speaking of when the survival part of the brain clicks in,
and the higher parts of the brain start shutting down.
Understanding how deeply God wants to help us, the
magnitude of His abilities & promises to help us, will help us
refuse the Spirit of Fear.
Page 343 ...

FEAR, what f. issues do victims have? (f. is an initial issue

for victims)
Traumas are applied as a base to lay in the programming. They
work because of the victim’s fear. The more types of
programming, the more types of fear. Victims, who have the
older programming or excessive programming will exhibit
more phobias than the normal person. Victims of mind-control
will, for instance, often fear water (drowning tortures), heights
(torture over cliffs, & down wells), fire (fire tortures &
traum-as), noises (from programming tortures), black birds
(from their programming significance), red kool-aid (from
ritual programming events), etc. The victim must also fear their
abusers. These fears concern issues such as: being reaccessed,
being reprogrammed, receiving a traitor’s death, losing
someone close as punishment, being publicly defamed & losing
their occupation. The victim will quite often fear losing the
approval or "love" of the abuser if he/she faces the truth about
the abuse. The victim will also fear their own mind: the fear of
the unknown, the fear of knowing the truth, the fear that they
won’t differentiate between tricks, cover programs, false
memories laid in by programming and what actually happened,
and the fear of the never ending pain. The victim’s alters who
want to move toward health will fear the internal programs, the
mazes, the vortices, the traps in the mind, as well as alters who
are abusive to the body & alters who have internalized the roles
of the abusers, such as judge alters. The victim will also fear
the heavy demonization that controls their lives, as well as
experiencing the heavy fears that the demons instill within
them. The victim will fear their support team, because they
have only experienced betrayal from their past significant
people. The victim will fear that he will not be believed, that he
will not be loved, that he will express too much fear, anger, or
strange happenings and be rejected. He may even fear that the
therapist will lock him up if the truth comes out. Because of the
way a system of alters is created, the front alters may be able to
dissociate from some of these fears, & put on a very good front.
Once the therapist scratches below the surface, he will uncover
lots of unresolved issues & tidal waves of fear that roll through
a system of alters. Many victims of mind-control fear there is
no hope. This fear incapacitates them. This fear has been
developed in the victim’s mind by programming scenarios
where the Network makes the slave feel they are always being
watched, and that any thought or action of betrayal will be
immediately known by the abusers. FEAR robs the victim of
moving toward freedom, working on issues, learning from their
internal world, working with their support team in a positive
manner, and of enjoying life. Perhaps the largest thing FEAR
robs from victims is HOPE. While God & His perfect love cast
out fear, fear has a way of driving away the work of God in a
person’s life, incl. an unhealthy fear of God. Fear is the
opposite of faith & trust in God. To deny one’s problems does
not equal faith. Neither fear of problems, nor denial of
problems is faith. Both are a lack of faith. Faith means to
believe that there are answers and to continue pressing on until
answers arrive or are discovered. Faith is directly connected to
our trust that God is good and will reward good things to His
creation. God will prove Himself to those who trust Him. "Oh,
taste the Lord and know that He is good." In the previous
article fear was dealt with as a spiritual issue, which it is
primarily. However, it can be treated from other angles too. For
instance, the book Kicking the Fear Habit by Manuel J. Smith
(Dial Press, NY:NY, 1977) treats fear as a Behavior Mod,
problem.
Page 344 ...
1. ASSOCIATIONS with BAD MEMORIES (TRIGGERS)
which could include fear of: water, heights, fire, noises,
animals, foods.

2. Things the ABUSERS might do, which could include the

fear of: rejection, reprisals, reaccessing, and reprogramming.

3. Things the VICTIM will do to him or her self, which could

include: falling into internal mind----traps, failing to get the
truth, finding out the truth, never getting rid of the pain or guilt,
having to be subjected
to demons, having to go into the unknown.

4. the SUPERNATURAL, which could include: Almighty God,

demons, aliens, & what they consider to be their destiny.

5. the FUTURE, which could include: the coming New World

Order, that there is no hope, that there are no answers, & the
fear of an alien takeover.

6. the SUPPORT TEAM, which could include: the fear of not

being believed, the fear of not being understood in the
complexity of a programmed multiple, the fear of betrayal, the
fear of rejection, and the
fear of hurting others.
PROBLEMS FEAR CREATES:
1. INCAPACITATES the Victim to work on issues.
2. MAKES IT DIFFICULT for the support team.
3. ROBS the victim of the joys and pleasures of life.
FEAR interlocks with many other issues that will be discussed
in this book. It is a pervasive problem that interlocks with many
other issues. It is not a single issue that can be easily cast out
like a trick knot that can be undone by a clever pull, but is a
serious series of emotional knots that will take persistent
undoing. There are so many fear issues, that this is one reason it
is impera-tive to get the victim to a safe place to reduce their
fears to a working level. Along that line, a safe place is best
which has the minimum of fear triggers in their life. Sometimes
it is helpful for clients to understand the dynamics of fear.
There are fear reduc-tion therapies that can be applied to
specific phobias which may allow the victim to function freer.
Page 345 ...
HOPE
"How can I get better?" It’s the common question. Even deeper
is the question, "Can I get better?" There are plenty of people
who are willing to offer false hopes. If we are to discuss HOPE,
we must also be willing to be honest and frank, and not offer
placebos. Victims of mind-control have been lied to --enough,
they don’t need to be given false hopes. There are two types of
mind-control victims, those who have their humaness totally
snuffed out and are simply robots that function in order to
survive, and those who have a tiny spark of their original life
still tucked away somewhere within themselves. For us that
tiny spark or original humaness would show itself when we
secretly prayed to God that he would save the victims we were
assigned to program. We gave tiny mustard seeds to those that
we helped program in hopes that that mustard seed of faith
would free them some day. We tried to weaken the
programming with those who were strong minded enough to
possibly break free someday. We did our job, but quietly within
us, was still a spark of humaness (or one can also call it hope).
It is that spark of hope that the Illuminati try so hard to snatch.
If they can accomplish killing that residual spark of hope, then
they will work hard to keep their victim alive, because they
know that they now have a robot. The humaness (the hope) has
died, or at best is totally apathetic. The child himself becomes
apathetic, and quits looking for hope. It only functions in order
to survive. In our experience in the Illuminati, there is no doubt
that God was there with some children. Most everyone is aware
that Jesus Christ came to destroy the works of the devil (1 JN
3:18). Our life is testimony that the power of Christ to perform
miracles is not dead, no matter how much the Illuminati scoff at
it. With some children it seemed God had drawn a line, and
Satan could not go past that line. Some child victims had as
much as three God-given guardian angels. God has kept a spark
of hope alive in some of the mind-control victims out there, in
spite of the incredible amount of sophisticated torture and
mind-control that they have had to endure. Our system would
define hope for a mind-control victim this way: hope is when a
piece of the child has not sold out to the Illuminati. God will
take that piece and even though the victim is in darkness, God
will take that spark of life and He will work with it. If there is
any light, God is in a position to raise that light up. When God
brings a person into a victim’s life who sincerely cares, and
loves and is committed to helping the victim, somehow an
appreciation for that love and committment reaches down deep
into the person’s mind, and helps that spark of hope grow into a
flame. Even though the victim does not understand what is
happening, they will grab ahold of that help with a strangle
hold. The person who wants to help can encourage the victim to
tap into that survivor instinct, that strength that they have to
survive, that survivor spirit that they had to have to endure the
brutal trauma-based mind-control, and apply that spirit of
survival to their fight for freedom. Go back to the hope that
kept them alive. Without hope, the victim is not going to fight
the pain and the programming to get free. The victim has come
from a world with little hope. If the victim can not consciously
see hope, the support person can keep their hope safe for them,
and help them to see that there is a tunnel and the tunnel has a
light at the end of the tunnel. We can pray that God will reveal
to us the roots of our slavery. We can pray that Almighty God’s
spirit would breathe the life-giving medicine of His Spirit of
Life into us.
Page 346 ...
We know that God can seem awfully distant and aloof. We
know the fear that comes from looking in the mirror and on one
hand seeing an old person and on the other seeing a young
person. Reality seems such a drag. All the trivial headaches add
up to one big pot that is boiling over. This is where a prayer for
an inner transformation of joy can bless a person. The
realization that God does care, can lift a great deal of the
burdens of reality. This is where a walk out in the sunshine
through a park, where we experience the beauty of creation can
remind us that life does contain many beautiful things. If a
person is in a pitch black room, groping for the door handle in
total darkness, it is very easy to panic and believe that one will
never get out. Once the person has reached the door handle,
even though they do not have it opened, there is a way for that
door to open. If the mind-control victim has reached someone
who cares and understands how to help them, then they have
reached befudled therapist is going to help them. There is a
creative power for good in this universe, call it what you want,
but know that this power comes from a good Creator that loved
His creation, and that He has put time limits on how long evil
can exist. There is coming a time when evil will be abolished.
Until that time we can know that Almighty God has the power
to turn any evil into good, and one of the proofs of this is the
life, death and resurrection of Christ. God has high hopes for
us. His disciples were so excited about this good news, they
were willing to die for it. We are excited about giving hope to
others, enough that we are also willing to pay that final price.
that door knob. They need to hang on and know that when that
door swings open, it will surprise everyone. The door seems
stuck, but it can open. When we are in the dark, let us call out
to the God of Comfort who can see us in the dark. A victim of
mind-control when he or she regains freedom has a noble and
powerful ministry available to them. Who else can listen to and
look at another survivor of mind-control abuse and convey deep
empathy without saying a word. God has great things that He
wants to do with your future. We must not let the enemy steal
our hope, as he has tried so hard to do over the years. We spoke
up before a conference of therapists and gave our testimony
that Jesus Christ brought us freedom. We want to encourage
therapists to see that a victim needs to have a hope that a power
stronger than themselves and stronger than the
Page 347 ...

INITIAL QUESTIONAIRE
_________________________________________________________
Does the client have?

a. dissociative behavior (see checklist pg.

b. intrusive thoughts
c. physical complaints with no medical reasons
d. relatives in any intelligence organization
e. relatives associated with perpetrator groups (see list Vol. 2
pg.) -------- IF NO TO ALL OF THESE, LOOK F0R
SOMETHING ELSE
f. memory lapses unexplained by ordinary forgetfulness
g. UFO or alien experiences
h. the presence of childhood trauma’s in one’s life
i. feelings like there is more than one person (or voice) inside
_________________________________________________________

IF YES, GO ON TO THE QUESTIONAIRE BELOW

_____________________________________________________________
Has the client?
a. ever lost time
b. found strange items in their closet
c. heard words by others associated with mind control
d. uncontrollable behavior despite strong efforts to control it
e. relatives who belong to Illuminati or elite bloodlines
f. unexplainable scars (when examined under a black light)
g. heard voices
h. a feeling of being possessed by some power, or a living, dead
or evil person.
i. unexplainable bruises
j. been adopted, lived in a foster home or orphanage
_____________________________________________________________

↓
YES
_____________________________________________________________
Are there?
a. strange reactions by what seem to be total strangers
b. unexplainalbe fluctuations of skills and abilities
c. intelligent parents with a wide disparity of abilities between
them & the client
d. times the client feels suicidal
_____________________________________________________________

↓
YES
_____________________________________________________________
Is the client?
a. missing most of his/her childhood memories
b. engaged in espionage, professional sports, exotic dancing,
psychic activities,
Delta forces or any other profession that might link the victim
to mind-control
c. a member of the Catholic Church, Jehovah's Witnesses,
Mormons or
Charismatic Movement
_____________________________________________________________

IF SOME OF THESE ARE YES

↓
Suspect Total Mind-Control & Implement Actions for Mind
Control

Page 348 ...

The issue of insomnia is a major issue in terms of
deprogramming. Therapists have typically neglected the impact
that lack of sleep has on the victim, as well as the positive
impact a well-thought out program to provide sleep & to create
new improved sleep habits. We can’t tell you what will work
for you, we can only tell you what has worked for others. A
good sleep will help counter the effects of mind-control,
unfortunately good sleep is a rare commodity for victims of
trauma-based mind-control. It is very common for their support
person to have to hold them and comfort them night after night
as the programming breaks down & the horrible memories
begin surfacing. Good sleep will also have a domino effect on
improving other areas of your life, such as personal
relationships and productivity. Victims of mind-control have a
terrible time getting decent amounts of sleep. The reasons for
this are many, including heavy programming not to sleep more
than 3 hrs/night, body pains, chemical imbalances, anxiety,
panic attacks, & surfacing memories. For such a difficult
problem, the most powerful over the counter medicine that
some victims have successfully used is a combination of
ibuprofen and Chlorpheniramine Maleate. Ipuprofen can be
obtained in - 200 mg. caplets and Chlorpheniramine Maleate
can be obtained in 4 mg. tablets (or 8 mg.-time release tablets.)
The combination of 400 mg. of Ibuprofen with 6 mg. of
Chiorpheniramine Maleate taken together is the most powerful
(yet surprisingly gentle for the power it packs) medicine we
know of. Those who have used this found that after a period of
time, like with all drugs the effects begin to wane, and they
would up the dosage slightly. Perhaps what is most effective
program over the long haul is to have more than one method to
get a good night sleep, and to intermix the various methods so
they all remain viable and healthy methods. The liver produces
lysozyme to protect itself against all foreign chemicals. The
increasing presence of lysozyme enzymes is how the body
increasingly destroys the effectiveness of any foreign chemical.
The high rates of lysozymes in the liver are very hard on it.
After about 3 weeks, a person taking a chemical has pushed the
liver to about the maximum that is prudent. The person must
then back-off from the chemical intake in a slow withdrawal
lest they trigger a reaction in the body-mind. However, the
extreme sleep problems that victims of mind-control have,
usually seem minor to the side-affects of drugs to help them
sleep. Medical science warns that a long-term use of any drug
for insomnia will eventually intensify the problem it initially
cures. This is why we advocate an attack against insomnia from
several different directions, and that the different solutions be
intermixed at different intervals. A prudent practice is to
consult a reference book such as Drug Handbook (pub. by
Springhouse Corp.) in order to find out the interactions, the
nursing considerations, and the contraindications of a particular
drug. Pregnant women are especially limited in what they can
and can’t take. The therapist and the support persons should be
aware that the victim may well be programmed not to accept
any meds, and it is counterproductive to scare the victim about
the dangers of drugs, because that will only play into the fears
that are already there. People react differently to meds and the
goal is to calmly and wisely find what works for the victim
without increasing their programmed resistance. In terms of
herbs, Calms Forte (valerian, aka garden heliotrope) can be
helpful to relax a victim. Valerian even comes
Page 349 ...
in tea-bags. Some of the over-the-counter newer sleep meds are
gentle, and have been effective for some victims. The
advantages of taking something that induces a mild gentle (not
drugged) sleep state is that it gives the victim a chance to
recuperate and to begin to pull out of what’s called the "alpha
state" that their minds constantly exist in. An alcohol-induced
sleep prevents REM sleep from occurring, and some of the
symptoms of hangovers are simply the direct result of REM
deprivation. (See below where REM sleep is discussed.)
Bensodiazepines such as Valium are sleep-inducing drugs that
should be given under a doctor’s supervision. They will only
provide a short term solution, but again as many victims of
mind-control will agree, the severity of the crisis is often such
that such meds are welcome even if they are only going to be
temporary relief. Any short R-and-R is better than no R-and-R
in the battle for freedom. The body produces it own chemicals
to induce sleep. These are released by the body is relation to
how much physical work the body does. A good day of hard
physical work will certainly assist in the body chemically
putting its own brain to sleep. When the victim remains in their
normal highly aroused state of fear, with its high production of
endorphins) it is hard for the body to relax and sleep. Young or
physically active victims of mind-control can do aerobic
exercises to counter the chemical arousals in their bodies, to
improve their bodies’ natural ability to sleep. This is one of the
safest long term approaches, if the recovering victim has the
physical makeup to safely exercise. The victim should try and
pick a comfortable position to sleep in, because the less one
moves around in sleep the less the brain is stimulated and the
better one sleeps. If no position is comfortable, pick the best
choice, and lay as quiet as possible. The fear of insomnia is as
dangerous as other fears in preventing sleep. Self-acceptance
and acceptance of life are positive ways to relax better and to
get to sleep. The support person can talk to the victim prior to
the time they retire and let the victim experience acceptance
and love. This will encourage the victim to let their mind dwell
on unconditional self-acceptance, which will encourage the
mind to relax and sleep well. A great deal of mischief can
happen during sleep hours. Cult-loyal alters will wait until the
other alters have gone to sleep, and then they will snatch the
body and try to contact their master, or "go home" to their
master. As the trauma memories surface, hundreds of new
dissociated pieces of the mind float to the surface. If a young
new child alter finds itself in a strange environment, their
instinct is to run. If the support person is there to simply say,
"its O.K., everything’s going to be O.K., relax...", then the
support person may greatly prevent small alters from running
out of the house as they look for something safe, and actually
getting the system into trouble. A great deal of therapy can
actually be done at night, and in relation to the sleep state. This
again is an area that is greatly missed by the traditional hour at
the therapist. In fact, experience has shown that most DID
clients who initially go into therapy will not open up and
explain to the therapist why they get poor sleep. The therapist
needs to be competent enough to draw out this information.
Initially, before deprogramming, the victim will most likely be
able to get to sleep, but will sleep only three hours, and will
have reoccurring "nightmares" and flashbacks. Once the victim
begins deprogramming and working on issues, they will often
like to sleep in because they sleep best in the early morning
hours. Again, we have seen this to be common among
recovering victims of mind-control all over the U.S. Many alter
systems have a few alters who specialize in sleeping well. For
instance,
Page 350 ...
Presidential models as they fly to foreign countries to deliver
messages may have an alter who is proficient at sleeping during
the flight. During time periods when good sleep is needed, the
system may be in a position to pull up alters that sleep well and
let them hold the body, so that the body gets rested. During
periods of intense deprogramming it is good for the system to
get good sleep. Poor sleep weakens the victim physically and
mentally. Poor sleep inhibits the problem-solving abilities of
the mind, which is the very thing that victims need to resist the
handlers. It will also over a period of time deteriorate the
victim’s health, (but understand the people who use slaves
could care less about their health, they often use people like
they would a straw from a fast food restaurant. The handlers
also know that a healthy slave means a higher risk that the slave
will rebel.) Normally, a sleeping person goes through 5 sleep
patterns (called stages) in sequence and then the sleeping
patterns repeat themselves (although stage 4 may drop out after
the first cycle, and the person goes through the progressively
deeper stages of sleep 1-2-3-5.)
These stages are
STAGE 1: about 5 minutes
STAGE 2: the first stage of deep relaxation, lasts about 45-50
minutes.
STAGE 3: a short stage where the brain waves slow down
STAGE 4: the stage where the brain produces delta waves,
sleep walking and nightmares occur in this stage.
STAGE 5: REM (rapid-eye-movement) sleep, most normal
dreams occur during this time, which in a normal sleep pattern
would last 15-30 minutes, the body doesn’t move, but there
may be sexual arousal during this period of sleep, the muscles
in the ear act as if they are listening intently. The REM dreams
are mainly a right-brain product. The mind protects the body
from acting out the dreams, by shutting down the body.
Knowing this will help the victim realize that when they are
thrashing about in a memory in bed, they are not in a REM
sleep dream.
This process will then recycle once or twice again as the night
proceeds. Interestingly, the mind develops sleep habits, just as
it develops habits for other habitual tasks. If a person develops
poor sleep habits as a fretful child sleeper they tend to carry
these habits with them into adulthood. This means that victims
of mind-control are having to break long-term habits. Readers
can refer to what Fritz wrote on ‘‘cognitive demon processes’’
in Chapter 4 in order to understand how the mind develops
relationships in its "cognitive demon processes in order to
relegate repeated tasks to unconscious mental processes
(habits). The therapist may also have to do some work around
fear of sleep. Victims of trauma-based mind control are very
fearful to lose control of their minds by going to sleep, and they
have a fear of nightmares and other horrible things, such as
ghosts appearing etc., that all add up to create a terrible fear of
sleep. The victim wants to remain vigilant to protect themselves
against whatever might happen at night. This is why an alert
support person is needed in the vicinity to help calm the victim,
so they can relax at night from their fear that something terrible
is going to happen. This also means the support person must be
vigilant during the night to help protect the victim. If the victim
can begin to break down the irrational automatic thought
processes that have been programmed into the mind, by using
and strengthening the rational logical parts of the mind, they
can begin to regain control over their own lives. Automatic
thoughts that have been programmed into the non-rational part
of the mind will attempt to control the mind. Gradually, the
hierarchy of irrational thought processes will be challenged and
their power taken away. This will give the
Page 351 ...
mind a chance to regain its natural composure, and will help the
victim regain their own mind so that they can relax and begin to
have healthy sleep habits. The use of journals, where the
rational parts of the mind can be brought to bear on the
irrational thought processes, can be a help in regaining
self-control. This will also help the victim regain the ability to
have proper sleep. Some victims have had success in reducing
their mental stress by journaling for 30 minutes prior to
attempting to sleep. Worrying doesn’t resolve itself if left to
rattle around in the brain unattached to anything solid, but once
our worries are put onto paper, they have been dragged through
the rational part of the brain and can be organized and
challenged. When disturbing thoughts surface, the outline that
can be used for journaling is this:

• What are the WHO, WHAT, WHERE & WHY, & HOW?

• What THOUGHTS COME AUTOMATICALLY?

• What are RATIONAL THOUGHTS ASSOCIATED with

these thoughts?

• What are the FEELINGS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?

• What are the THOUGHT ERRORS or DISTORTIONS IN

THIS THINKING?
WHERE did these thoughts come from?
One little known fact, is that the fear of not being able to sleep
can create such a strong fear pattern that a five-second arousal
during the night, that would normally not threaten a person’s
sleep, causes the fearful person to wake up and stay awake. If
you do wake up and are fearful of not sleeping (or fearful of
going to sleep)--the best advice is to leave your room, do some
other quiet activity until you feel sleepy again and then go back
to sleep. Don’t lay in bed and allow your mind to fuss and to
internally fume. This will create a negative association in the
mind between the bed and fussing and fuming in fear of
sleeplessness, and will only aggravate the long term situation.
Dealing with spiritual problems, not just surface issues but deep
issues will also help a person’s sleep. Learning to let go of
issues is also beneficial.
L-Tryptophan is an amino acid that aids the brain in the
manufacture of serotonin, and serotonin is used by the brain to
reduce the brain’s feeling of stress. Bedtime fats and milk
actually reduce the amount of L-Tryptophan in the brain. Food
does cause blood to go to the abdomen, and reduces blood in
the brain. Vitamin E causes restlessness in some people if eaten
within short periods before sleep. Saltine crackers have been
found to be the overall best snack to encourage L-Tryptophan
levels. Each individual is a complex array of processes. It may
be that a nice snack calms a person down, even though it
subtracts from the L-Tryptophan level. In review, we have
suggested a multi-pronged assault on insomnia. This assault can
take the form of: direct temporary drug intervention by over the
counter or prescribed meds, specific tasks that a support person
can perform before & during the sleep period to help the victim
deal with a variety of issues, specific tasks that the victim can
perform spiritually, in terms of diet, in terms of attitudes, in
terms of dealing with internal fears, in terms of which alters
sleep and which stand guard, in how to journal so that issues
are resolved for the mind to rationally relax, and a number of
other positive suggestions. If these suggestions are followed in
a concerted fashion, they will reduce the problems with
insomnia, and help the victim destroy one more aspect of the
mind-control.
Back to Contents Next
Page 353 ...

Multiplicity, understanding
When an entire alter system is looked at, it appears very much
like a city of people. A city of people will divide itself into
different tasks. If a city lacks a plumber, someone will fill that
nitch. If a city lacks a judge, someone will fill that nitch. Joe
may know everything about Charlie, but Charlie may know
little or nothing about Joe. Sue and Sally may converse and
share their lives with each other. Some people in a city will
know each other well, know of someone else, but by and large
most people will be strangers. An altar system is structured. In
many countries, such as Russia, a city is also very structured.
The people do not change jobs very frequently. A therapist may
observe a particular job and behavior pattern of an alter and
forty years later observe the same behavior. Alter systems have
families of alters and generations of alters, just like a city of
people would have families and several generations. In fact, as
most readers already realize, a structured multiple will have
teachers, libraries, castles, rivers, houses, jails, airports
(runways) and many other things in their internal worlds that
correspond to what a city would also have. If an alter itself
could be examined under these two authors’
"psychological-processes microscope", it would be possible to
see how an individual alter before therapy is a complex set of
mental processes that responds to life- as it was designed. After
therapy, the alter begins to reflect some mental processes that
the person’s brain has chosen to incorporate on its own. If the
brain is thought of as a machine, it is a machine that has
billions of pieces and is incredibly intricate in its capabilities
and design. The brain makes complex machines look very
simple in comparison. If survival of the mind means
compartmentalizing trauma memories so that these memories
don’t interfere with everyday life, the mind is quite capable of
the task. It is quite capable of attaching memories and trained
behavior patterns and habits to those dissociated parts of the
mind. The programmers work with the mind. They program
alters according to their natural bent during the trauma process.
In order to function, the brain automatically develops several
items. First, the brain develops K-lines of processes (which are
called habits). The brain also develops a self-image(s). When
the mind is fractured, each piece can be given its own
self-image and its own habits. But it is important not to lose
track of the larger picture. Just like a person in a city is not an
island unto himself, an alter is part of a system. A person in a
city may find himself called for jury duty, drafted, taxed,
monitored, spied upon, and other things. Likewise, an alter will
have to function within the larger context of the alter system
and its programming. Even the front alters will be tainted in
how they perform in their daily lives by the side effects of
multiplicity and their own programming. A multiple will not
know anything but the world that they have been programmed
to see and the role they have been programmed to function in.
But therapy will begin to break down the programming. Yes,
alters can learn and can change. The mind can change the
programmed "habits" of action and thoughts of an alter, just
like it can change the habits of any person. The difficulty lies in
the fact that habits take time to change unless hypnosis is used
to by-pass the mind’s natural build-in mechanisms of stability.
An alter can learn a new behavior. The therapist should know
the history of an alter so that he or she knows the platform and
scripts that the alter works under. Then the therapist can change
the way
Page 354 ...
that alter works within their role. For instance, a sexual alter
can be given a new way of looking at sexual boundaries so that
the alter changes its behavior within that sexual role. In other
words, modify a habit of thought or action, rather than
rebuilding from scratch. "You can take the boy out of the farm,
but you can’t take the farm out of the boy", is a common
expression about how hard it is to completely remake the
thinking of a person. It will be difficult to remake the thinking
of an alter. The foundation (the platform) upon which they were
created will continue to serve as the framework of that alter.
Either that framework is painstakingly collapsed by joining
(integrating) that part with another part that it was associated
with, or the framework is built upon to change the ways that
alters acts and thinks. To make an analogy, it is harder to get a
man or woman to quit thinking like a man or woman, than to
recognize a behavior and modify their behavior in more
productive direction. This is what successful marriage
counselors are doing, for instance in the book Men are from
Mars, Women are from Venus. Perhaps someday someone will
write a book Gatekeepers are from Uranus, and Mothers of
Darkness are from Saturn. Rainbows are important, for many
alters only live over the rainbow in a world of make believe.
These alters were created with a foundation of imagination and
psychosis. In this case, these alters need deep therapy. They
live in trance, and it is silly for Christians to think that these
alters should not have hypnotic help, when their thinking is
always hypnotic thinking. Some alters because they are a
special purpose alter come out and take the body with
"exaggerated" behavior--they are very shy, or very aggressive,
etc. It makes only good sense that if a particular alter is
dangerous, the people who live around the multiple should
identify how that dangerous alter is triggered and then refrain
from triggering it.
Page 355 ...

Panic attacks, suggestions

Panic is when one loses control of one’s fear. The brain must
struggle to regain control, so that reason prevails rather than an
out-of-control response. During a panic attack, the
mind-body-and soul are all living in the panic attack. The
therapist might experience the client having a panic attack by a
series of numerous repeated calls. The victim might experience
a panic attack as the need to cut themselves to feel pain to
prove to themselves that they are real. For recovering victims of
trauma-based mind-control, panic attacks bubble up into the
conscious mind on their own. They may even surface during
the dream state. So what do you do? If the panic surfaces,
remind yourself that it has always been there, nothing has
changed, its just surfaced into the conscious mind. Relax, its
always been there, waiting to be triggered or pulled to the
surface. Nothing has changed but a person’s awareness of the
panic. Next, remind yourself that panic represents knowledge
and that knowledge represents understanding. Panic represents
an awareness, whether physical or mental, that something has
taken place. If we want to understand that awareness, we can’t
stand in it. We must encompass that panic. We must take our
control back. We don’t run from it, we address it. If we address
the situation, we stand a better chance not to reshatter. How can
we address the situation? If it is a memory, put it up on a
screen. (Go to the section on avoidance of abreactions.) If the
panic concerns a real life situation, the mind must be prepared
that anytime an emergency triggers panic, that the rational mind
must be given back its driver’s seat. The mind should be trained
to give the rational part of the mind control, if panic begins.
This is the training of the mind. Perhaps a logical alter can be
found to hold the body during such times, while others work
with that logical alter to help keep things calm. If one knows
that one will be approaching a situation in life that will panic
certain alters, place them in protective sheltered rooms, or put
them to sleep. In fact, fear of an upcoming situation can be a
trigger for a panic attack. Support persons need to realize that
panic attacks which begin with one alter can spread through a
system. An activity that a front alter thinks is going to be fun,
may trigger panic in little child alters. The panic will be so
overwhelming as it leaks back into the awareness of the front
alter, that it distracts from the fun of the activity. Panic is not
always programming going off. Panic attacks commonly occur
when the victim finds out that they are a multiple, and when
they have to face "You mean someone abused me?", "You
mean someone carried out mind-control on me?" Another
aspect of panic, is that the alter which is panicked may likely
switch. One of the common tricks of deeper alters and internal
programmers, is to panic an alter with coded memories that
surface upon a code being thought internally. This is an easy
way to move alters that are holding the body out of the way,
when deeper cult alters want out.
On the flip side, a good Illuminati programmer never allows the
slave to have uncontrolled panic. He will allow controlled
panic. The programmer will watch for splits from panic,
because the survival fear that goes with such splits will make a
good warrior alters for ceremonies.
Page 356 ...

Understanding programming
START WITH THE CORRECT ATTITUDES
It almost goes without saying that the commitment by the
members of the support team (therapist, guard, deliverance
minister, friend, etc.) has to be that the victim is the center of
concern, and the center of importance. We of the support team
must endeavor to make the cure less painful to the victim than
the problem. A Christ-like commitment to lay down one’s own
life for another person needs to be felt. This does not mean that
the support team must destroy themselves to save the victim, on
the contrary, by being Christ-like and employing their skills the
members of the support team can find great joy, satisfaction
and purpose in life. Programming has gone on for centuries,
and it’s only been in the last few years that significant progress
has been made to deprogram, so let’s not lose hope just because
the evil side continues to progress.
REMAIN FLEXIBLE
In dealing with mind control as a support team member it is
important that you understand there is a variety of mind-control
techniques, for instance DID, implants, and skull manipulation.
Because there is such a wide-variety to mind-control and
programming, nothing is routine in delivering a person from
mind-control. For many years, due to the heavy infiltration
within the fields of psychiatry and psychology much of the
information put out in this area has been disinformation. The
support team needs to erase any myths they have picked up
from the mainstream of these professions, and focus on what
they discover from the client. Hopefully, some of the guidelines
and criteria provided in our 3 books on mind-control, especially
this section, will be helpful to obtain the correct diagnosis.
When a therapist has used only one approach and reports
consistently getting 100% success-rates, that may be a tip-off
that this therapist (or minister) is exaggerating his/her success
rate. Until you can watch a victim 24 hours a day, 365 days out
of a year for several years, and you can confidently say the
person has fully integrated and has no alters working on the
astral plane, nor any alters involved in any other way with the
controllers, then there is no sure way to pronounce a victim
fully recovered from the mind-control. And even then, if the
victim has implants, it may simply mean that the implants are
temporarily not being used. When the reader has studied this
book and the Vol. 2, he will have discovered that some mind
control is done via a variety of techniques such as: ELF waves,
some by implants, some by genetics, some through peer
pressure, some by skull manipulation as well as other
techniques. Common sense will tell you that one method can
not provide the solution to such varied techniques. This is why
this book’s co-authors are stressing the need to assemble teams
of people to work with victims. Some victims of mind-control
during initial therapeutic screening have had their memories,
mind control, & programming rejected as being false because it
didn’t fit with what the therapist had already encountered. The
victim endures a great deal of pain to have their lives and
programming probed, so it is beneficial if the therapist is aware
of some of the various types of mind-control and their
combinations that the therapist may encounter. As the therapist
picks up tell-tale signs of one particular type of programming
or another, it will make it easier to understand what the overall
situation might be. There are similarities between the
programming of the 1940’s and ’50’s and even
Page 357 ...
into the ’60’s, but as time progressed the programming
sophistication has grown by leaps and bounds. One change over
the years has been the level of specialization which the
programmers have developed. When a particular type of
personality is identified within a child, the programming has
become very specialized and sophisticated to work within the
natural makeup of that mind-set. The last few decades has also
seen the introduction and perfection of sophisticated
mind-control technologies that allow the trauma-based
mind-control to be fine-tuned and then hidden behind more
obvious technologies such as implants. There seems to be a
trend, at least for some types of professions, that less splitting
of the mind is carried out today than was done in the ‘50’s and
more fine-tuning and high-tech used. This appears to be done
because it results in more stable individuals, which due to the
improved superior abilities of the more modern programmers,
are still just as reliably responsive to orders. The goals are to
produce slaves that produce better results with less maintenance
and supervision by the handler. Computers are believed to be
the key to modernization. Still there are principles that define
how the mind works and hopefully therapists that understand
those principles can continue to discover ways to help the more
recent victims.
TAKE NOTE OF WHAT TYPE OF VICTIM YOU HAVE
At the lower end of the victim-caste-system are victims who are
brought into this nation from South or Central America and
who are programmed to be expendable slaves. They are only
treated as slaves, and never experience a good life. Beautiful
white women taken to Saudi Arabia at times fall into this
category, where they are kept hidden in slave conditions and
are as expendable as a piece of furniture. The victim may not
even know who they are, they may be "Dorothy" all the way
down the line. The next level are victims who are not members
of the Illuminati, who are allowed to function in everyday life
as common people. They suffer greatly, but often have what
appears to be a common life, albeit somewhat strange to those
close enough to them to notice the strangeness to their lives.
These are people used as guinea pigs, as spies, as assassins, and
sexual slaves. Often their abusers are branches of the
government. The top level slaves are going to have their pride
attached to the Illuminati. They will be allowed to share some
power, they will have an elaborate belief system that makes
them feel superior to those on the outside of their elite special
group. They will be given peers and "twins" who are
programmed like themselves to make them feel like they
belong to this wonderful group which has some wonderful
charismatic leader. The group will validate their identity that
comes from being a member of this elite group. The leadership
may wine and dine this slave. The leadership will share some
power (actually delegate, they hold the final strings) with the
victim. For instance, the victim may have a magic wand and a
staff. The victim will be allowed to merge with the great leader
through sexual rituals. The group dynamics will alleviate the
guilt that an individual might develop on their own. This is the
description of someone who has been part of the Illuminati
hierarchy. You can expect your Illuminati victims to have pride
in their elite status. You can expect them to tell you about
banquets, and limousines, and masked balls. Their abuse will
be covered over by manipulative love, status, and pride. The
Illuminati are skilled in knowing how to cover abuse with love.
The loving parent that is reported by a child to be "able to do no
wrong", may well be the child’s primary abuser in the worst
way. The foundation for all the "good benefits" for a hierarchy
slave is PURE DECEPTION. The charismatic leader will
Page 358 ...
only be a image, a fantasy. If the victims will stop to remember
the details, they were coerced on threat of the penalty of death
to join the group of people they belong to, they are not allowed
to really have real relationships to their sisters or brothers in the
cult, and the cult’s supposed new light and deep teachings are
simply a collection of ancient babblings of lost and confused
people that have been repackaged as powerful new revelations.
In review, it might be said that the expendable non-hierarchy
mind-controlled slave is held in place without the trappings of
grandeur that are given to the hierarchy victims. The Illuminati
lay great stress on the victim’s joining of their own free will.
Sometimes that does occur, but often the victim has been so
stripped that they no longer exercise free will. You as a
member of the support team can point out that the victim’s
support for their abusers has been constructed on a foundation
of deceit by the abusers. Rather than denying that the slave was
wined and dined, show how everything was done for purposes
of manipulation. Every gift came with a price tag.
HOW THE MIND CREATES A PROGRAMMED REALITY
The idea of consciousness vs. subconscious are difficult to
describe but are fundamental to how the programming works.
What mental activity is occurring in the mind of an individual?
Most mental activity is unconscious. Many of our activities in
life are done unconsciously. If our attention is directed
somewhere else, we can perform an activity without a
conscious awareness. Some mental activity surfaces from the
subconscious. Day dreaming has been recognized as beneficial
in a person’s well being. Delinquent teenage boys have been
found to seldom daydream. The mental activity of thoughts,
emotions, perceptions and memories are all embedded into the
mind. The structures of the mind are built by thoughts and
emotions. A chaotic jumble of impressions is organized by the
mind into something cohesive and useable. Our minds fabricate
a reality from our thoughts and emotions. The programmer
steps into the picture and makes that reality designing a team
activity. Emotions, hallucinations, moods, phobias, sensory
perceptions, trances and visions are not part of cognitive
conscious data-based knowledge, but are more like the ROM
memory that runs a computer which is permanent and
untouchable. These are important foundational structures of
thinking. They lay in the subconscious. The subconscious mind
is like a cess pool. The subconscious mind accepts whatever
has been allowed by the mind to reach it. Once something is
accepted in, the subconscious mind doesn’t evaluate it. That is
why hypnosis and illusion are so powerful. Using hypnosis, the
programmer can place an idea into the subconscious that would
take long periods of time for the mind to naturally screen and
then accept into the subconscious. Briefly described, thoughts
and emotions create the mind’s reality. The programmer wants
to be able to tamper with how the mind’s reality is created. The
front alters, who hold the body day-to-day, will have to face the
shortcomings of whoever is their system’s programmer, cult
leaders, or handler. For some slaves, say for instance, Anton
LaVey’s or Michael Aquino’s, their programmer is their cult
leader and their handler-- all three wrapped up in one
individual. The victim’s front alters will experience the
shortcomings of their controller. Rather, than fight against what
the mind will see and hear, the programmer will reframe it.
They want the front alters to see the human aspect. They want
them to see the "faults", but accept the weaknesses as a normal
function of the humanness of the person. The faults are
refrained as merely human frailty
Page 359 ...
and negative external circumstances. Let’s give an example:
The victim is encouraged to think: Yes, he drank, but so what?
He was a social person and of course he had to drink.... Yes, he
made a mistake, but it was someone else’s fault. The negatives
of the programmer are refrained as natural positives by the
programmer. The victim’s mind will feel very comfortable with
these rationales. This is an example of how the programmer has
tampered with the mind’s perception of reality. This tampering
is part of the subtle hypnotic programming. Do the
programmers do this type of subtle programming? Yes, it is a
standard thing to place this refraining in to protect the father
"Daddy" and Mother Programmer images. As Illuminati
programmers, we were taught to use thoughts, emotions,
comfort and discomfort to mold the mind’s reality. (The mind
decides if it is in a state of comfort or discomfort. At some
extreme point, the mind can do a reversal and decide that pain
is pleasure. In such a reversal, the mind will move in the
direction of comfort, i.e. pain. In our example, we are not
describing such an extreme situation. It is quite normal for the
mind to whitewash its image of an authority figure; this is an
in-born natural comfort zone.) Now let’s say that a therapist
wants to tamper with that programming. The therapist can
attack the programming head on by saying, "Your programmer
was an evil man." But this approach plays into the hands of the
programmer, whose manufactured reality will resist such a head
on approach. The therapist may want to use the back door
approach to side step the resistance. The backdoor method
prevents triggers. A backdoor approach might be:
THERAPIST: "What would you have liked to have seen in the
life of [controller’s name]?
SLAVE: "I wish he would not have drank so much?"
THERAPIST: "How did that affect you?"
SLAVE: "I didn’t get taken care of."
The backdoor approach frees the victim from having to make a
judgment call that the controller was right or wrong, good or
evil. It makes the issue into an "I issue", "I would have liked..."
The victim doesn’t have to step out too far from the mind’s
comfort zone.
THE VICTIM’S POWER ENDS WHERE FEAR BEGINS
At the point the victim begins to fear is where the victim gives
the programmer power. This is a basic principle well known by
Illuminati programmers. The programming is built upon this.
Some children actually intuitively grasp methods to not fear the
programmer. If the child does this, the child becomes harder to
program, because A Person’s POWER Ends Where FEAR
Begins. At the point of powerlessness and fear, the world
around the victim becomes more like a dream. Eventually, fear
becomes a comfort zone for the victim. A visual representation
of powerlessness is the teddy bear, who has no genitals, no
hands, or feet. (The Teddy Bear finds its way into our
Illustrated Guidebook. Some therapists have found the visual
images of the Illustrated Guidebook helpful.) In the previous
example, the victim at first will feel strange and uneasy to
question their life. They are moving out of their comfort zone
of simple existence into the life of choices. Many alters need
help as they take their first wobbly steps toward freedom of
thought and action. When FEAR enters the mind, perceptions
of reality are altered. Fears can be conditioned into the mind.
The programmers know how to introduce fears. FEAR taps into
the death circuits of the brain and activates "death related
reflexes". The programmer is like the conductor of a symphony
of fears, at one point orchestrating one area, at another
Page 360 ...
point bringing another fear to a crescendo. The programmers
know how the mind protects itself. The free will of the brain is
orchestrated out of existence to the "tune of dependence upon
the programmer". The natural flow of how the mind perceives
reality is drowned out under the influence of fear. The
programmer can interrupt natural perceptions of reality by
introducing fear. The fear creates fragments in the mind, and
denials in the mind. In the end, the victim of programming has
pieces of reality that appear out of nowhere and seem
unconnected and like a dream. Is fear bad? When a person is
stripped of trust in God and man, where do they turn? Fear
seems comfortable to the victim, who cannot say "nothing
ventured, nothing gained, I’ll walk right through this situation."
The instinct of the brain is to run toward its image of comfort,
fear. How does the victim rise above the fear? There are ways,
but they generally involve the victim getting outside help. The
therapist will want to stay one step ahead of FEAR. Different
people will have different kinds of fear. Males are born wanting
to be protective and strong. They are designed to face the
outside world and lovingly protect. The programmers break
their male identity. They are stripped of it when they see that
they are powerless to protect other children and powerless to
protect themselves. They further feel unprotected by their
mothers when they are tortured as infants. This brings in a
strong sense of rejection. They know they are weak and
helpless. Their in-born desire to want to lovingly protect is
destroyed, because they develop the subconscious attitude that
love can’t protect. Because LOVE CAN’T PROTECT, these
men become hardened. At the root of their hardness, is the fear
that they can’t love (accepted by the subconscious through their
inability to lovingly protect) nor are they worthy of love (built
in by their feeling rejected of their mom’s loving protection).
Once the subconscious attitude is accepted that they can’t love
nor be loved, they die emotionally. They run from emotions
because of a subconscious awareness of the trauma. When men
run from their emotions, they find it natural to tap into their
intellect. In summary, the male is born to have strength to
protect what it loves. When traumatized, the male feels
helpless, and develops a fear of love and emotion. Love
becomes a negative to subconsciously run from. The
programmer only needs to tap into the mind’s own methods to
protect itself. The mind will protect the programming much
better than the programmer ever could. After FEAR is well
established as a foundation, the programming team will layer in
with repetition the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR messages
over and over. They will repeat "DO NOTHING TO HURT
THE FAMILY [family means the Illuminati, or at times
another cult]." If left to its own devices, the mind has the ability
to sort things out, and right itself. The programmers are fully
aware of how the mind might right itself, and pull itself out of
the programmer’s lies. The Illuminati teach their programmers
"not to let the conscious become conscious, not to let the
intellect become intellect, and not to let love become love."
What this means is that what consciously happens in external
reality, is not permitted to be internalized as conscious reality.
The programming tricks to prevent this could fill a book, and
many are mentioned in our Vol. 2 Formula book. Love
becomes love when the self knows the true self. Therefore, the
task of the programmer becomes to HIDE THE TRUE SELF
FROM THE MIND. Some of the greatest philosophers have
said that the greatest goal of life is to KNOW THYSELF. The
goal of the programmer is to make sure of just the opposite, that
the victim does not know themselves. They are trained in
Page 361 ...
techniques to do this.
If we understand that the programmer is trained to program the
mind TO FORGET ITSELF, then of course it is clear that the
therapist needs to help the victim to REMEMBER who they
are.
GIVING THE VICTIM HIS OR HER IDENTITY BACK
Countless therapists and ministers have trapped mind-control
victims within their programming by advising them to let
bygones be bygones, let the past and the skeletons of the past
be buried, forgive and forget, etc. etc. This traps most of the
victim’s mind in their programming. Of course this feels safe
for the front alters. After all, who wants to discover the horrors
underneath them, that their mind has forgotten? It would be
helpful if ministers would remember that God encourages
self-examination in numerous scriptures. "Whoso loveth
instruction loveth knowledge, but he that hateth reproof is
brutish." PROV 12:1. "The spirit of man is the candle of the
Lord searching out the innermost parts of his being." PROV
20:27 "If we would judge ourselves we should not be judged."
(1 COR 11:3 1)
In other words, if we want to be more than animals, we need to
examine ourselves and love to learn. It is God’s candle for a
man to examine his own innermost parts. And when we find
problems with ourselves, we are to deal with them, and then
God won’t have to. The therapist needs to reverse what the cult
has done. Give the victim his or her identity back. Equip his or
her consciousness with what a person’s mind would normally
be conscious of. Give the person back the intelligence that
belongs to their entire mind. Equip the person with a love for
God’s plan for their life and an appreciation for God’s design of
things. Give the person their life back by letting them know
themselves, and if possible, by letting them join into the whole
person they were intended to be by the real God in heaven.
Interestingly, the programming is not able to snuff out the
person’s original personality entirely. The programmers prefer
to work within the natural abilities of a mind. This is just good
common sense. Horse trainers do the same. The trainer uses a
standard bred horse which has been bred to pull carriages to
pull carts & buggies, a draft horse to pull farm equipment, & a
pinto to ride. If the victim has abilities, he can rightly take
ownership of those abilities. It is much more likely that the
programmers have suppressed many of the victims abilities in
order to control them. Rather than creating the slave’s abilities,
the programmers have simply exploited their natural abilities.
TYPICALLY A VICTIM HAS PROGRAMS:
· to tamper with the senses: to confuse or stop the senses, make
the senses feel like they are in some drugged state, to destroy
one’s sense of balance, cause pain, a sense of hot or cold.
· to tamper with the spirituality of the victim, to relieve their
guilt, to destroy their humanness, to get them to subscribe to
occult or atheistic philosophies, to hate God, to lock demons
into place,
· that are codes using alpha-numeric words, colors, music,
rhymes and sounds.
· that tamper with memory, cover programs, false histories,
hypnotic surgeries,
· that control with the emotions, so that they can be triggered to
be happy, sad, angry, tired, guilty or afraid.
· that control actions, such as anorexic no-eat programs, no-talk
programs, assassination programs, mute programs, no-cry
programs, return-to-cult programs, sexual programs, specific
assignment programs,
suicide & self-mutilation programs, trigger other slave
programs.
· that control the mind, such as memory flooding, phobias, go
insane program, be confused etc.
· that control the body: such as heart rate programs, body
temperature programs, to prevent helpful medicine from
working programs.
For a good list of the different programs see the Universal
Function Codes on page 80 of our Vol. 2 Formula book.
Page 362 ...
These programs can be triggered several ways, from both
internal and external triggers. By learning that an emotion,
thought, or action is a program, the victim gains conscious
control over what is happening. The cue may still cause the
subconscious desire to fulfill the program, but the victim is
beginning to take back his/her life. It becomes harder and
harder for the programs to work, when the conscious mind is
aware of what they are, and the conscious mind does not want
to submit. Memory work on how the program was laid in, and
desensitization work will also assist the victim to regain some
power.
Charting (notetaking) about everything that can be observed
about the victim, will assist the support team in the long run.
This is nothing more than what was done while they were being
programmed. The doctors and programmers during
programming expect every little detail to be charted. Charting
will also assist with mapping, which is discussed later. Charting
will assist the therapeutic team to build - a frame work to the
puzzle they are working on. Don’t expect the victim to be able
to explain their programming. The mind-control programming
team has traumatized a child victim enough that by the age of 3
1/2 they will cease asking "why?" Instead they are taught that
everything outside of fantasy is bad, the outside world is bad,
they are only to do what they are allowed by the programming
team to do. From then on, most of the victim’s alters (if not all)
will lack the freedom to ask and discover the complexity of
what has happened to them. As the reader has seen,
programming is designed to manipulate the actions, the body,
the emotions, the memory, the mind, the programming, the
senses, and the spirituality of the victim. This is why we have
decided to call it "total" mind-control. This type of
trauma-based total mind-control will cause shattering and much
damage to the soul (mind, will and emotions). The therapist
will have to deal with lots of distortions and fragmentation in
this area. It will cause lots of medical damage to the body, for
instance weak bowel and bladder control. The medical damage
can only be addressed by trained medical persons who are
sensitive to the needs of a victim of mind-control. Considerable
damage is done to the spiritual life of the victim, and the victim
will have to take a bath in the redeeming blood of Christ’s
atoning blood. Many of the words and symbols of Christianity
will be difficult for the victim to hear. For instance, the words
sealing, blood, and Jesus may have totally different meanings
and emotional content to the victim than to non-victims. This
can be worked around by experimenting with workable
terminology. They will have to relearn who the real God in
heaven is, rather than the cult’s imitation god that the cult
talked about, as well as their misrepresentations. Finally, the
support team will have to deal with whatever structured and
programmed DID is present in the victim. Is it easier to see why
we are advocating support teams rather than a lone individual
to help the victim? If the spiritual part of the programming,
which is the most secret part, which we referred to as Gamma
programming in our Illust rated Guidebook, is not addressed,
then complex MPD systems will not make much headway
against the programming. Many complex MPD systems have
worked hard for years and then give up hope due to the slow
progress and the lack of any end in sight.
Page 363 ...
Other complex systems have seen dramatic results when
deliverance methods freed the deeper sections from demonic
bondage. The new freedom allowed them to progress on the
other issues that they had gotten bogged down in and made no
progress on prior to the deliverance. Obviously, not all
programming is the same, it is determined by what group is
programming, who their programmer is, what the dissociative
abilities of the victim are, and what talents the programmers are
wanting to create or exploit. Sometimes a programming cult
does not get all the time they desire to carry out the
programming. In this case, the programming will be limited.
However, in most cases the programmers have as much access
to a victim as they want, especially if both parents are in the
cult. In cases where the victim does not hypnotize & dissociate
easily, their systems will be far less complex. It has been
correctly determined by various researchers that a person’s
ability to be hypnotized is a gauge to determine how much a
person will dissociate. However, front alters will be heavily
programmed not to allow themselves to be hypnotized, so the
gauge will not always work for determining how much splitting
the programmers have done. The two abilities, dissociability
and hypnotizability, are simply different aspects of the same
thing. It does hold true that if the victim is predisposed to
dissociate, that the programmers can build more complex
structures. If a skilled therapist can get some handle on how
dissociative his client is, he can- get an early guesstimate on
how much splitting and structuring the Illuminati or Illuminati
front group may have done to the mind-controlled slave.

Protection, spiritual
Page 364 ...
Before one can see the value of spiritual armor and those things
that would protect a person spiritually, one has to be able to
understand what is being protected. This book has dealt with
how Satan builds his structures within his mind-controlled
servants, but what does God build within His people? Satan is a
corruptor and an imitator. Knowing that will give the reader a
clue that what Satan has designed is a corruption and in part an
imitation of the structures God builds. The spiritual armor that
God directs godly people to employ are designed to protect the
structures that God creates paradise out of.
At this point it would be worthwhile to display the basic
structure that God builds within both a person and His Body of
Saints, in comparison to the basic structure that Satan builds
within a person, as well as society. These structures are basic
patterns that reproduce themselves at different levels, the
macrocosm and the microcosm of the spiritual world. The
programmed multiple will have a justice system (judge alters),
it will have values (satanic and occult knowledge and wisdom),
it will have possessions (such as its birthright, their illusion of
health, their titles, etc.), and it will have its false truths (the
programming). The leadership of a system will provide a
miniature state with a hierarchal structure run by Lucifer and
his internal Grand Druid Council. - Within God’s children, He
builds Truth and Life. God’s true ministers are life-givers. That
is why Christ said he came to save people, not to judge people.
By building consistency in a person’s life, God is fashioning
that person not to be double-minded, not to be a hypocrite, not
to be wishy-washy, not to be undependable, but to be more like
Himself. God is unchanging. He is the same yesterday, today
and tomorrow, and therefore he treats all people equal, it rains
on the just and the unjust; or in other words God is
EQUITABLE. He doesn’t really play favorites, but because He
is God, He doesn’t explain what seems like arbitrary decisions
to us. God will build order, justice, life, truth and equity into
His servants. These elements (diagrammed out for the reader on
the next page) make up the elements of Paradise and the
attributes of God as described in the Word of God. These are
the elements, the spiritual structures, that the armor of God
described in Ephesians 6 are designed to protect.
Some people think that spiritual protection comes from prayer.
But if we look at the word of God--and also learn from great
spiritual warriors, we discover that the spiritual armor that God
describes--TRUTH, FAITH, SALVATION etc. are great tools
to protect us. For instance the truth does set a Monarch victim
free. But it isn’t enough to have "the Truth", the Word of God
says only the love of the truth will protect us. (see THES.) For
a mind-control victim to know that they have salvation, gives
them great leverage to defeat the attacks of the enemy. If a
victim has a alter or alters who can have total faith in God, and
can move forward in that faith, that faith will literally become a
force-field around them that will move the enemy out of the
way, and cause them to back off or surrender. Prayer is not the
answer in itself--but prayer built upon the structures that God
builds in a person, prayer built on love, prayer built on faith,
and hope and life and truth--these prayers will have power.
From the great reluctance of many church going people to learn
the type of truthful information that our books are revealing, in
spite of the horrible truth that these issues affect their lives in
big ways, shows that many people do not realize the spiritual
protection that truth gives its holder. We are born into a world
full of deceptive symbols. It takes a conversion to begin to
break away from the deceptions that trap humankind, but many
of the churches take their people right back into the same
mind-traps.

Back to Contents Next

Page 366 ...
The Belt of Truth mentioned as spiritual armor in Ephesians 6:3
is like a girdle that pulls and holds things together. Belts or
girdles held things together for the ancient warrior, as well as
holding the scabbard. The Word of God says, ‘Gird up your
loins..." which means to pull yourself into the wholeness and
integrity of God. The Belt of Truth is more accurately described
as the Belt of Integrity. Integrity means being stable, without
being double-minded. Satan divides and conquers. He uses
division everywhere to defeat the godly person. Integrity means
an individual’s private life lines up and equals his public image.
There is no duplicity, no division of purpose in this Belt. It
means the wearer of this belt is solely one-minded toward God.
The Belt of Truth defends God’s ORDER of things. The Sword
of the Spirit is the Word of God. The Spirit reveals to us truth,
both the truth of God’s scripture and the truth about other
things of God’s creation. The Sword of the Spirit protects the
Bible from being misunderstood. We are to pray that the Spirit
of God reveals and teaches us TRUTH. The Sword of the Spirit
then protects TRUTH. God is truth, so if we seek God, we will
find Him where truth is. No wonder it says that the Truth shall
set you free!
THE UNIQUE POWER OF THE TRUTH, "YE SHALL
KNOW THE TRUTH AND THE TRUTH SHALL MAKE
YOU FREE"
In any type of bondage, if the full truth could be understood by
the right persons who need it in that situation, it would make us
free. In Romans 1:16, Paul states, "The Gospel is the power of
God unto salvation to the Jew first and also to the Greek".
"Salvation", and being made "free", basically have to refer to
the same condition of deliverance from bondage. Jesus Christ is
"The Way, the Truth, and the Life, no man cometh unto the
Father but by Him." The "Truth" and the "Gospel" that says
"Jesus saves to the uttermost, those that come unto Him by
Faith," are mutually inclusive and if you really know one, you
will also know the other. Is the truth impossible to find? In
Romans Ch. 1 we are told that we are all without excuse
because God has given us in nature enough evidence of His
power and Godhead that we are automatically responsible for
the way we seek after more light or hide in the darkness. The
Word of God says that men hide from the light because their
deeds are evil. Living in the dark makes it easy for the
"enemies" of God to capture the servants of unrighteousness
who have yielded their bodies in one way or another to the
desires of the fleshly nature with which we were all born. If we
didn’t die to our old life when we were born again, we are like
Mary’s brother Lazarus who was raised from the dead, but had
to be loosed from the grave clothes in order to walk and carry
on life. Some people are still bound in grave clothes and need
to be set free. It takes obedience to the Gospel to be set free,
and it takes some people months or years to understand and
accept all the terms of their pardon as purchased by the
precious blood of Jesus, and they live in bondage to the extent
that they fail to claim all of their spiritual inheritance, and the
gifts that come with them. When they learn the whole truth,
they find they are set free.
OTHER ITEMS OF PROTECTION
This article has just touched briefly on two of the spiritual
armors that the Word of God says will protect us, the Belt of
Truth and the Sword of the Spirit. The Shield of Faith will
protect the victim of mind-control from the worship of idols,
from worshipping the wrong things in
Page 367 ...
our life like our handler, and will protect our true love for
Almighty God, our real creator. The Helmet of Salvation will
protect the victim, when the accuser of the brethren tries to
heap guilt and insecurity upon us. It will also help the victim to
protect their birthright given to them as a child of God. Each
victim as a child of God has a wonderful birthright to some
great things, but the enemy will steal it if they don’t protect
their godly birthrights. Some victims ignorantly given their
birthrights away like Esau. As a born-again believer the victim
has a legal position IN CHRIST that makes the person a
joint-heir to the resurrection (ROM 6:3-11, EPH 2:1-5) and a
joint-heir to reign with him (2 TIM 2:12, COL. 3:4). The
Breastplate of Righteousness will protect the victim’s
relationships with their support team, and the world in general.
It will mean that they will treat their fellow man correctly in
financial dealings, legal dealings, and any other dealing where
fairness is involved. The Breastplate of Righteousness will
defend justice and equity. Equity, which is fairness, means
treating people equally. This will encourage the programmed
multiple to treat people in the same fair way that they want
others to treat their system.
We have just briefly touched on these spiritual protections. We
hope that this will stimulate the reader to search and learn more
about these spiritual weapons and how they can protect the
victim from the attacks of the enemy. Now for instance, if the
reader listens to a sermon where he is told that spiritual warfare
calls for him to reject false values, repent of sin, and resist
deception, he will realize the minister is managing to hit upon 3
of the substitutes for the 5 elements that make up God’s
structure.
SPECIAL SITUATIONS WHERE SPIRITUAL
PROTECTION IS NEEDED
· As internal work is done, spiritual protection will be needed to
protect the system from the warfare and counterattacks of the
internal forces.
· The victim of mind-control will also need protection from
astral projections of their master. This protection is provided
for, by a support person using the principles of the spiritual
world to slam the astral
body back into its physical body.
· Spirits of fear, mistrust, contention, suicide and despondency
will try to attack the victim on a regular basis. The victim and
the support persons need to be aware of these daily attacks and
develop a mind-
set and a determination to spiritually refuse these spirits. The
support person should be gentle but firm in assisting the victim
to dislodge and cast out such demonic attacks. All prayer
should be grounded
upon the structures of God, which are life, order, true love,
justice, equity and truth.
God is the life-giver, the creator, the healer, the savior, the
father, the peace-maker, the consoler, and the sustainer. Our
prayers to Him should be grounded in the reality that He is all
these LIFE-GIVING ROLES. This may help you understand
what it means to ground our prayers in the structure of LIFE.
We are called to imitate God & also be life-givers in the fullest
sense of the word.
WHERE WILL THE ENEMY COUNTERATTACK
AFTER PROGRESS IS MADE?
The enemy will send in false teachers (1 TIM 4:1-3), or he’ll
try to give a false reputation to the world by slandering the
person before men & before God (JOB 1 & 2 as well as other
scriptures), he will attack the person’s confidence, their beliefs,
their relationships, and their walk with God. In other words, if
one looks at a cross, one spoke is prayer to God, one spoke is
our walk (righteousness) before God, one spoke
Page 368 ...
is our witness to others, and one spoke is our fellowship with
others. Satan will attempt to weaken anyone of these 4 arms of
the cross. He and his forces (demonic and human) will
generally look for and attack the weakest link in our defense. If
we think things through it makes sense that if Satan were to
attack God’s people the best place to attack them is in their
churches. A fierce war is being waged in the churches today to
destroy all true believers. This war is very well conceived and
well coordinated. It is not happening by accident. One of the
major weapons that the enemy uses is religious spirits of
judgement. Judgement brings death. It is one thing to expose
evil, so that healing can occur, that is godly. But the religious
spirits that judge are out to hurt and destroy. These judgemental
religious spirits are out to divide, so that Satan can conquer. We
feel safe in saying that until our books came out, including this
one, the Christian churches were totally ignorant about
multiplicity and what it entails. We have watched many
multiples suffer from judgemental spirits in the churches. These
religious spirits are not from God, so don’t let them hurt your
relationship to God. But why can Satan attack? There are a
number of spiritual reasons WHY. First, is that the programmed
multiple is traumatized and programmed during their life time
to create footholds (legal loop-holes) that give Satan the legal
right to attack. Eph. 4:27 says, "And do not give the devil an
opportunity." The word opportunity in the greek is Topos,
which literally means "foothold". These footholds are also
referred to as strongholds in the mind (2 COR 10:4) which are
like fortresses that Satan keeps operating in enemy territory that
allow him to attack vulnerable lines. They are like secret holes
that serpents can live in to crawl out of into your nice garden.
The spirit that crucified Jesus was the religious spirit of
judgement. It will attack you with a vengeance. The victim and
the support team must not allow themselves to become subject
to these religious spirits. The judging religious spirits are trying
to provoke the person who is the target of their attack. These
evil spirits want a reaction from their target. The godly person
can do exactly what Jesus did, let these judgemental spirits rant
and rave and after all these antics keep one’s peace. The
reaction will be, aren’t you going to do something about this?
Just say, its a moot point, it’s not relevant. I don’t give it
credence and move on. Each victim must seek life-giving
answers for their own situation. Don’t let the religious spirit of
judgement steal you of your chance for life. Just remember
Jesus’s words, "Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites!
For you shut up the Kingdom of heaven against men; for you
neither go in yourselves, nor do you allow those who are
entering to go in." The Pharisees of today will find all the right
answers to justify their position. You as a victim must seek
truth, you must seek life, you must seek love. Forget these
religious men that bind big burdens upon people and strain at
gnats. You as a little child, and what programmed multiple isn’t
mostly a child, are what the kingdom of God is made of. If you
retaliate against the Pharisees then you have lost, because that
is what these religious spirits want, is to get you into a battle on
their territory. Even if you win that battle, you’ve lost, because
you had to leave your territory--the peace of God, to enter back
into Satan’s domain. Don’t fight religious spirits, they are a sly
trick of Satan to get you to step back out of God’s domain into
Satan’s boxing ring. At that point, you will participate in the lie
that the boxing match is the real contest. Don’t trust in yourself,
even if you can win in that boxing ring. If you know that God is
with you, stay with Him in peace.
Page 369 ...

SAFETY ISSUES, of slave

This section is an attempt to coordinate information scattered in
many different articles and chapters, as well as discuss ideas
that come under safety that are not addressed in other places,
such as how to work with child victim’s of mind-control. Other
articles that pertain to safety include:
· The Accessing article deals with safety from the abuser’s
contacts.
· The Triggers article deals with safety from all the
programming & memories that activate irregardless of whether
the original abuser is around or not.
· The Self-inflicted harm article deals with safety issues that
derive from the victim’s own threats to themselves.
· The Communication & Trust articles deal with the safety of
the therapist-recovering slave’s relationship.
· The Deliverance & Salvation articles deal with the spiritual
safety issues.
· The Surveillance article deals with safety issues concerning
harassment and continued cult interference in life.
· The Mazes and Mirror articles deal with the safety issues of
tackling particular programming.
Safety tips will be discovered scattered through all of our books
on mind-control. The abuse of a victim is ongoing,
unfortunately it was not just yesterday, but is here today. That
is why this book’s two authors have made a point of referring
to victims of mind-control as VICTIMS, and not as "survivors".
The word "survivor" is very popular among therapists, and the
word "victim" will cause some therapists to go into convulsive
uncontrollable rage. The word is not popular. But the word
"survivor" comes along with all the denial and whitewash of
the establishment therapeutic community, that somehow this
abuse happened to a poor helpless child and now that the child
is an adult, they have survived this abuse. First, this ignores
completely that the Illuminati continue to access and use
essentially all mind-control victims that are trying to get
therapeutic help, and it also ignores the fact that 99% of the
alters have no concept that they are an adult, but if anything
still see themselves as children. The high percentage of child
alters is never realized by novice therapists, because the adults
protect and hide them. A safe house is a place where a victim
can go to stay from dusk to dawn in safety or even better a safe
place to live. Generally, when safe places have been discussed
it has been the goal to keep plans discrete and only on a need to
know basis. A safe house will not take the place of a hospital,
but the option of placing victims in hospitals is a very risky last
resort. It would be great if safe houses could be set up with
qualified therapists and trained volunteers who recognize the
unique safety needs of victims. This would give recovering
victims an opportunity to gain strength as they fought the
internal lies and the dissociation. Such issues as How much
does it cost?, What does the victim bring?, How does on keep a
victim from acting out programs?, Do you force the person to
stay if they want to leave, Do you have inhouse rules?, Who
handles the medication? Can the victim receive visitors? and
who and when? What kind of special dietary needs does the
victim have? A safe house can not possibly cover all the safety
needs of a victim. The Illuminati have traditionally threatened
their families, their pets, their reputations and their jobs. The
author has seen the Illuminati make good on some of their
threats, but generally they threaten and intimidate more than
actually act. A major issue is feeling abandoned and alone. A
support person will achieve the best calming effects if they can
maintain a constant
Page 370 ...
presence with the recovering victim. When the support person
or therapist is absent, life becomes a terrifying experience, and
the fear the victim lives in while alone can make a few hours
seem like eternity.
THE SAFETY OF CHILD VICTIMS
Fritz & this author Cisco have had to resist the opportunity to
help some young victims of mind-control because we knew that
helping them would put their lives at great risk. There are
certain ages that if the child or teenager has not progressed to
the point that they are expected, they will be killed by the
Illuminati. Children who are multiples have treatment needs
that are different than adults. The first problem that must be
faced is that the child’s parents or caregivers should be
involved in the treatment, but the odds are extremely high that
they are dirty and part of the abuse, no matter how well or to
what extent they deny it. It goes without saying that the
therapist needs to be able to handle the emotional trauma of
helping child abuse victims. It may be harder than working with
adults, because the therapist is face to face with the
helplessness of the child, who is confronted with a powerful
evil system of enormous magnitude. The skilled therapist will
study the child’s interaction with others, on the playground,
with other children, at home, and when the child is alone. They
will watch for strange aberrant interaction between the parents
and the child. The therapist will also watch the child’s eyes to
see how they interact with other people, or if the child tries not
to look at adults. The child may have a dull apathetic
dissociative look to their face, or simply a blank look, or a
glazed look. Check to see if they have puffy bags or dark eye
circles. When the child has suffered the abuse of the
trauma-based mind-control hallucinations, a desire to hurt
themselves, and disturbed responses to heat, cold, pain and
enclosures. A multiple will have erratic grades and abilities,
their grades may be low compared to their 1.0. And they may
be tired or hyper in school. Popular cover stories to cover
programming sessions for children are tonsillectomies, esp.
emergency tonsillectomies. Also sending the child to specialists
may be a cover, or taking the child to a "funeral". The child will
be shown funeral pictures and told that it was there. They like
to isolate the child from playing with other children too. The
poor child victim of mind-control will not have the words to
sort out the coexistent feelings of love and hate for the victim’s
abusive parents. They also do not have the language
capabilities to describe their feelings and emotions. Guilt may
simply be expressed as, "It just doesn’t feel good." If the
therapist is going to help a child victim of mind-control they
need to communicate to the child that as a big person they will
be gentle but that they have the unchangeable strength to
protect the child and care for the child. "I will help you be
O.K., and I will protect you." The therapist should also convey
to the child that "I know it was not your fault." "I am able to
hear what you have to say without being wiped out or
shattered." "We will do this together." "I know you are going to
be O.K." If the child realizes that he or she can be safe with the
therapist, the child may begin to warm up to others too. As the
child feels valued, it will feel safe enough to talk about things a
little.
Page 371 ...
SAFETY ISSUES, of support team
During the many years that your author Cisco has observed
people trying to help programmed multiples, we have seen a
range of counter-attacks by the World Order.
PRECAUTIONS
Find out how the Network operates and what organizations are
part of it. Fritz has some excellent information on this. Do not
trust law enforcement. We have seen victims get conned by
seemingly "well intentioned" law enforcement people who deal
with cults as part of their job. If you feel like our warning is
hysteria, then you are welcome to "reinvent the wheel." An
example of how victims of mind-control will be treated is told
in the front of Mark Phillip’s and Cathy O’Brien’s book
Transformation of America. In the front of their book they
provide the business cards of some of the law enforcement
people who were dirty and stabbed them in the back as they
attempted to get her daughter free and to get justice. Cathy and
Mark travelled all over this nation in search of justice--it isn’t
there. We will not provide a long litany of horror stories, for no
amount of proof will convince those who are still trapped in
their own mind-control that the our judicial system still works
for the people. The Illuminati’s Network is victimizing
America at will. Do not trust the establishment media. They are
great at manipulating stories to discredit the truth. The
institutions that America has trusted in have long been
subverted by the Illuminati.
THE BAD NEWS
Typically, the Network (what the abusers call themselves) will
try to publicly discredit anyone who opposes them. Today, a
popular way to do this, is to infiltrate a programmed multiple
(who is programmed with an ulterior agenda) into therapy and
then take the therapist down with the cry "false memories were
implanted". The victim needs to be worked with in such a way
that they recover their own memories and the therapist has this
validated. Several conferences around the country have gone
into detail about the ins and outs of legally protecting oneself.
Fritz & this author provide our assistance to victims gratis. We
suggest that others might consider simply doing this. The
therapist may get their office files broken into, and in a few
extreme cases the therapists have actually been murdered.
Some support people (incl. therapists) have had their personal
lives disrupted. Their spouses leave them, they are poisoned
(such as what happened in L.A. as well as other places), their
automobiles break down (sometimes with obvious signs of
tampering), and they find opportunities in the world shutting in
their faces.
THE GOOD NEWS
The persecution of good people exposes to the world what is
going on. Recently, a person who only half believed our
material showed it at the university where they taught. The
immediate & overwhelming negative persecution that came
was so obviously an overreaction if the material had been false,
that the persecution made a believer out of this truth-seeking
person. Every time the enemy exposes himself to persecute our
side, he exposes himself. In a war, the enemy exposes his
position when he shoots at you. You can fool some of the
people some of the time, and some of the people all of the time,
but you can’t fool all of the people all of the time.
PROCEDURES for an Assassination The Illuminati members
must get the
Page 372 ...
Grand Druid Council’s approval for an Illuminati assassination
of one of their slaves, etc. Therefore, the Illuminati handlers
often get other groups like the Mafia to do the dirty work. In
other words, the Illuminati is not just running wild wiping
people off the face of the earth. Their control is very planned
out and systematic. Up until recently, they had never lost a
slave to freedom, so they still don’t really consider our side to
be a viable threat. While our side painstakingly rescues an
individual here or there, they continue to program tens of
thousands. They have stayed ahead of their opposition, and
even created much of their own opposition. They will take
advantage of a person’s weak points. They will put a great deal
of study into where a person is weak, and take him or her down
at that weak point. They will also look for routines. A routine is
something that is a natural setup for exploitation. They will also
try to divide and conquer. If they can separate a person out and
isolate a person, they will go in for the "kill."
BALANCE
The support team needs to develop a strong spiritual walk
where they are not a leaf in the wind to every scare tactic the
Network carries out. The Illuminati’s Network thrives on scare
tactics and fear. On the other hand, the support team needs to
have a well-informed understanding of the capabilities of the
other side. There is nothing to be gained from being reckless.
Prudent precautions are worth a great deal. The saying a ounce
of prevention is worth a pound of cure is very accurate. If the
support team is negligent or sloppy just one day out of the year,
it will be that day that the victim is reaccessed. The Illuminati
will watch for months, waiting for their chance to grab the
victim. Most people don’t realize that they will exercise that
much patience. The therapist & victim figures if they haven’t
been bothered for a while that they are out of the woods. The
support team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped
of their ability to see danger from their abusers. This is so
important it bears repeating: The support team needs to realize
that all victims have been stripped of their ability to see danger
from their abusers. Those on the support team should not let
their guard down simply because other victims don’t seem to
have to protect themselves. First, the few victims that are public
may not be telling what happens to them. And second, if
victims are not telling about constant surveillance, constant
harassment, and constant attempts at reaccessing and
reprogramming, then please draw the obvious conclusions.
Page 373 ...
First, it should be recognized that every victim of mind-control
has to make a choice whether to fight for freedom or not. If
they do not make this choice at some level, they will not have
the commitment to try and counter the powerful self-destruct
programs that are layered in. Freedom for a mind-controlled
slave can only result from total commitment to the slave’s
freedom by the therapist and a strong commitment on the part
of at least a few alters within the system. Neither the slave nor
the therapist can do all the work. Therapists are often totally
surprised at how intense self-destructive system-persecutor
alters will hate the host alter and how determined and intensely
they will inflict harm upon the body. This is because they are
still not realizing how almost all DID victims are programmed
structured MPD (DID) slaves. Nor have most therapists come
to grips with how intense the programming is that created these
"system persecutor" alters. The "system persecutor" alters
believe that they are protecting from greater harm, and in that
sense they are more accurately described as "protectors’’. Most
protectors are simply frightened children who are filled with
rage. They may also surface with obnoxious belligerence, for
instance, they may spit in the therapist’s face. The therapist or
support team member must simply stay calm. Try to "bore the
protector alter to death" with your calmness. The therapist
needs to dig deep into their surplus of love and compassion and
realize that this is just a wounded, hurting programmed child.
The therapist needs to validate their role, and their feelings.
They are not designed to hold the body for great lengths of
time, and will get tired holding the body for long lengths of
time. Many protector alters if they are allowed to surface, and
ventilate their thoughts, and work through their feelings, fears
and programming can return to the internal world with their
destructive programmed behavior defused. If the therapist
makes the mistake of trying to lock such an alter up, rather than
negotiate and work them through their programmed destructive
misbehavior, then a serious power struggle and a bigger mess
could result. Sometimes if they are allowed to act out, for
instance, a cutting alter is allowed to cut--but with dull plastic
scissors, they can feel like they have done their job and go back
inside. The protector alters believe that they are doing their job
by protecting secrets. This lie can be exposed when working
with them. Because they may have strong demonic elements
attached to them, they will usually need some spiritual
deliverance. Many therapists have asked their systems to make
contracts "I will not hurt myself..." It is important that the
therapist establish groundwork, a platform upon which to work
from. Contracts have been more successful than not having
contracts, but the therapists need to go beyond simply making
contracts. Contracts only work with the front of a system, and
the host alter is usually very dissociated from the deeper part of
the system. First, the therapist needs to work with the front, the
host personality, to make them aware of the self-inflicting-harm
programs that will go off. It is important that the host
personality learns his or her triggers, learns how to help identify
protector alters within the system, and to help creatively
discover methods to negotiate with the protectors. The host or
therapist might ask, "Do you really think you need to inflict
harm? Are you really bad or have you just been told that? Do
you know that even [clowns, rabbits, kittens, horses...] do not
hurt themselves?" Try to find the human part of the person. It is
always there - even though it may be very remote. Work with
the survival instincts of every alter. "Did you know that kittens
don’t hurt themselves?" Try to get them NOT to act like the
cult, but to have new behavior. Try and reframe the abuse
cycle,
Page 374 ...
so that they see it in another light. The little protector alters
may present a hard outer shell, but deep down are just fearful
little special purpose fragments that are doing the job they have
been trained by behavior modification to do. The entire support
team as well as some of the alters can cooperate in repeating
triggers so that they can be defused. It is important that triggers
are not found out the hard way. What will be automatic
triggers? Across the board, the programmers have put in
heavy-duty protector alters and self-destruct programs to
protect the victim from dealing with all past mother and father
issues, in other words from really seeing their childhood. As
long as the host alter stays in the here and now, they are "fine"
in terms of not triggering the self-harm programming. This is so
that the host (front) alter will not go down through the layers.
Two other important areas that have lots of protectors are the
core, and the no-talk programs. Of course, the abuse will create
many of its own natural "self-hate" problems for alters. One
way to defuse the self-destruct programs is for the therapist to
take the victim down to a level 4 trance or deeper and use the
Universal Codes that were given in Vol. 2. Those are the actual
universal (standard) codes, but they only work if the therapist
has the alter deep enough into trance. The programmers have
built in a wall that will bounce the codes off, if the alter is not
deep enough into trance. (As far as we know, these universal
codes haven’t been changed. This is part of the problem with
giving answers, is that before the therapeutic community picks
up on the answers, the other side has had time to react.) The
programmers create jokers and scrambling alters to insure that
code words said above a level 4 trance never have effect. The
code words become merely garbled words, that bounce off the
system. When triggers do go off, they trip off a domino effect,
so that soon whole groups of alters are immersed into all kinds
of self-destruct programs. The therapists need to understand
that when a single trigger goes off, there is likely to be several
self-destruct programs triggered. Most therapists are not aware
of what happens deeper in the system. Internal and external
abuse is often triggered on a regular basis by the work that is
being done, and the therapists and the host personality are
generally oblivious to it all. The host may be so dissociative
they do not know why their leg or foot hurt. They may not
realize why it hurts to urinate. Female slaves often cut their
vagina up. Male slaves often simply shoot themselves. There
are few male slaves that survive the suicide programs, due to
the cold logic of their programmed minds. Front alters may not
know there are suicidal parts, they then fall asleep, out pops a
suicidal alter and the system may die of a heart attack. The
potential for self-inflicted harm is present across the board in
everything the victim tries to do. The victim will sabotage their
credibility, their therapy, the love and trust of others, and their
own successes. The therapist needs to be prepared for such
things happening and not let them side-track the therapist from
what needs to be done--WHICH is to show love, and care
toward the victim. The therapist may feel like this is calling for
superhuman endurance, and sometimes it does, so the therapist
needs to learn new behavior--how to endure in the face of
repeated failure, and keep on keeping on. When fresh memories
surface, and when new alters surface, the programming has the
same fresh power as when it was originally put in. The stronger
alters need work done with them so that they will be prepared
to handle the burden of the power of new self-destruct
programs hitting the system when new material and new alters
are revealed. The few strong front alters can create safe places
internally where they can nurture
Page 375 ...
more vulnerable "weaker" alters. These safe places must be
deep enough so that they don’t trigger whoever is holding the
body. (To get to this point, pre-supposes that the therapist has a
few strong front alters that can help out in therapy.) The
feelings of abuse and anxiety of the new alters can be placed
into a box while they are in the recovery room. The recovery
room system can be similar to how hospitals take the person out
of surgery into monitoring rooms, and then finally to their
hospital bedrooms, and then finally they are let out for
outpatient observation. The internal recovery room can have
pillows, and other gentle things within it.

SPIRITUAL ISSUES
There are numerous Spiritual issues that confront the victim,
and many of these issues may be the most critical factors in the
improvement and healing of the victim. However, it has been
hard for most people to separate religion from spirituality. One
of the most powerful tools of the Illuminati for controlling
people are the various religious fronts that they have created.
The mainstream religious groups are but fronts to control
people. Within religion you will find controlling spirits, judging
spirits, spirits of denial, spirits of guilt and shame, and spirits of
obesity. Not all obesity is from a spirit of obesity, but obesity
(gluttony) seems to be the sin that is used to substitute in for the
other things that are rejected as sin. God’s creative force works
within the universe. We are meant to be like God. He gave each
of us some creativity. We can creatively take responsibility for
our own lives and our own walk with God and our own
spiritual growth. God gave each of us free will. Sad to say, but
these important gifts, are often surrendered by religious slaves
to whatever organization controls them. They give up their
creativity and free will. They seem to think God wanted them
to be a little puppet. The

(SPIRITUAL ISSUES)
puppet mentality likes black & white orders, and black & white
thinking, because it removes responsibility for the puppet’s
actions away from the puppet. Again God made it clear, He was
going to make each person accountable. There is no one else
who can answer for you, when you face God. Religion can be
one of the best covers to hide the stench of trauma-based
mind-control. Under the guise of religion, the pressure to look
good--to look like the organization’s "approved solution"
conspires to cover up the truth, real feelings, failure, and sin.
Religion can be so stiffling it becomes a pressure cooker. In
order to make reality fit the religious mold a great deal energy
is put into fantasy and denial. A great deal is done in the name
of God that has nothing to do with Him. A great deal of how
the Illuminati keep their slaves in place under their control is
that they overlay the deeper levels of mind-control with the
absolute control over the front system by one of their numerous
religious denominations, such as the Catholic Church, the
Mormon Church, the Watchtower Society, many Pentecostal
groups, authoritarian New Age groups, and other religious
groups too numerous to mention here. These groups
emotionally strip their victims, and create a dependence within
their members upon their church hierarchy. Christ came to set
the captives free, and from his ministry it is clear that many of
the people he set free were captives to religion. One of the
greatest spiritual steps is to take back what God gave you and
use it like He intended. Many mind-control victims can’t move
forward toward freedom, because the religious group that
controls them won’t give them their basic God-given freedoms,
abilities, and free-will. The Illuminati doesn’t have to depend
solely upon the mind-control programming, their religious
groups will do the day to day work for them all in the name of
God.
Page 376 ...

STRUCTURING, how it is done, its consequences and its

treatment (an intermediate issue for helpers)
It is important that the people helping a victim of total
mind-control understand that the slave has had his or her mind
and thinking totally structured. Structuring means that the
person’s mind is complex. Illuminati slaves usually have
thousands of alters. Usually, therapists play around with the
surface alters of a front world, who even after a decade or two
of therapy will have very little idea of the full story of how their
body and mind is being used. Structuring is the bracing that
holds the programming structure in place. If the programs are
the plywood, tile, shingles, and the other material, then
structuring is the engineering, the design, the bracing that puts
the materials together in a firm workable manner. Another
article "Multiplicity, understanding it" will deal with aspect
of understanding the parts that build the house. Structuring
means that each alter has its script or way of thinking.
Everything is cut and dry, black and white. If life challenges the
alter’s thinking it will either a. dissociate the information it
can’t reconcile with its script, or b. switch to another alter who
can deal with thoughts. The switching is so ingrained within the
mind, that it is hard for the mind to prevent it, but the mind can
be trained to stay in place; not dissociate and learn material
outside of its script, but it takes effort and time. This is why is
good to journal, map the system, and keep other written records
because the mind of an alter of a slave has a powerful tendency
over time to continue dissociating whatever is not part of its
script. The black and white thinking makes it difficult to deal
with complex issues. An example of that would be for instance,
a critical comment by a therapist on one tiny aspect of work
which may be interpreted by the victim as rejection of their
work. Structuring means the victim (the victim’s alter system)
is not allowed to know or see anything but what they are to
know and see. The concept of Multiple Personalities is difficult
enough for the therapist to manage, let alone the puzzle of a
labyrinth system of alters who are entangled in thousands of
secret scripts that all work as one vast interconnected machine.
In understanding the structuring, therapists should be aware of
dual and triple functions. The external function of an alter will
not coincide with the internal function. The alters will relate to
each other in a complex way, similar to the complex ways a
city of persons relate to each other. Each system will have its
own internal political setup, and sometimes internal politics as
alters begin trying to change the structure. Everyone hates to be
stereotyped, even alters. Even though alters are programmed
and structured, so are most people in the external world, and no
one likes to be told they are programmed and structured. But
just as a mother acts like a mother, and a prostitute acts like a
prostitute, different alters which are common features of all
systems will be recognizable. And although the host alter will
quickly be known, often the host alter is actually several
co-conscious alters, who will emerge with their own identity
during treatment. The host may be one of the hardest alters to
get to admit to the MPD (DID). One of the primary bracing
devices used in structuring is FEAR, for instance,
Page 377 ...
fear of being found out and considered insane or a criminal,
fear of remembering the traumas, fear of the pain. Another
primary bracing material is the dissociation from one’s
emotions. Without the emotions around a memory, the memory
is a stale fact with no more impact than some statistic about
Outer Slavakia, and the programming remains intact. When the
affect (the emotions) return to the alters when they do memory
work, it re-humanizes them. Humans have emotions, and that is
what the alters need to regain. Emotions make the memories
real. During the structuring, alters that had to have special
responsibilities in the outside world, or had to have special cult
responsibilities have had to have special programs tactics done
so that they will not have emotions. The mother cats will have
special shadow alters that take their emotions. The alters that
take the affect of the trauma, are not but to sleep, because they
need to be handy to continue siphoning off the emotions of any
new experiences. The emotions must be kept separate by the
Programmers so that there are no weak links. The spinners will
have absolutely no emotions. Deep down in the spinner area
each cat family will have some emotion alters carefully hidden.
The alters systems are structured not to have emotion. Logic
(luciferian logic) is a great stabilizer. Much of the beginning
structuring to remove emotions from the alters begins in the
cages, where the dehumanization starts. The child in the cages
(this trauma is described in several places) is deprived of
everything, isolated, whipped, shocked, prodded, raped, etc.
After that period in the cages, the child moves on to the next
stage where they are caged near animals (such as cats) which
are treated wonderfully. The child is encouraged to act like a
cat. The child is behavior modified to become a cat. This early
part of the programming is designed to split off the emotions
and take the alters back to their animal survival instinctual level
of thinking (that means thinking with only their reptilian brain.)
In order to regain their emotions, memories may have to be
seen with their emotions from a great distance, and reviewed on
an ever-closer screen many times, until the alter(s) are
desensitized enough to the memory to look at it close up. To get
in touch with one’s emotions, will cause alters to be suicidal.
The therapist will have to separate out mirror images, and the
false memories that have been laid in. (Unfortunately,
memories usually surf ace with a lot of baloney.) Then the
therapist will have to encourage the feeling parts to come up.
The feeling parts weep, sob, have broken hearts and much
suffering. They may have anger, fear, and panic. The hurting
part may be a screamer. It may not have a name, or might even
be called screamer. It is probably a small child stripped of its
identity. This small child has never had a chance to express
itself. It probably feels that if it expressed itself. it would drown
the world in tears. The structuring is designed to incorporate
anything that will help create a feeling, an atmosphere of
helplessness. If the therapist can give power back to the alters,
this will help them take responsibility for themselves rather
than looking to the master.
Page 378 ...
Without a doubt, people who have been subjected to
Illum./govt. mind-control have suffered and continue to suffer.
It’s no surprise to find suffering in these people’s lives; they are
masters at suffering. They often have very high pain tolerances.
The fact that they are continueing to suffer, creates a multitude
of spin-off problems for the victim. Rather than deal with the
spin-off problems, the therapist or helper may want to deal with
the issue of suffering itself. The Word of God says, "Many are
the afflictions of the righteous." PS 34:19. Therapists &
ministers should be careful not to blame the victim’s problems
on victim. Ministers need to be reminded that not all suffering
is the result of personal sin. Much of what happens is simply
the result of living in a fallen world. In real life, many of life’s
stories do not have a happy ending. Bitterness toward God is
dangerous, because it leads to all types of problems
emotionally. The therapist & victim should avoid blaming God.
If the client wants to delve into having a deeper understanding
of why evil & suffering exists, then they should by all means be
encouraged to find a book that answers this, or to contact this
book’s authors. In the beginning God described everything as
"exceedingly good", but the fall of man has echoed down the
centuries. A deep understanding of God’s justice will explain
why suffering exists. A deep understanding of God’s love
explains why God allows suffering and pain. We can not
assume to know the answer to each tragedy or pain, yet we can
still help alleviate the suffering. Today, pain clinics teach
people ways to cope with pain, and so does this page.
First, dear therapist, treat the person who is suffering as you
would want to be treated if you were undergoing what they are
experiencing. Unfortunately, few therapists have had much
inkling of the extent of the trauma & suffering that their clients
who were victims of trauma-based mind-control continue to
experience. This is very evident, because until recently,
therapists have had little concern for the safety of their clients
once they have stepped outside the therapist’s office. Ongoing
victims of mind-control have been popularly labelled
"survivors of SRA" by the therapeutic community, and yet so
far neither Fritz nor this author, Cisco, has ever seen someone
who is past having to suffer. These are not "survivors" of some
past abuse, they continue to be ongoing victims, and not of their
own choice. The helper should evaluate the suffering, its
causes, its purposes & benefits. Although all things work
together for good to those who love Almighty God, not all
things are good. It is not wise or benevolent to lecture the
sufferer on the edification he will receive from the pain he is
experiencing. In the long run perhaps the victim will see that
the suffering can bring joy, enhance one’s future glory, yield
greater wisdom, produce true humility and true comfort. If the
victim is a devout Christian, they may already be able to see the
silver lining to the cloud. However, the helper/ therapist wants
to find ways to alleviate the emotional suffering & lesson the
pain. Ignoring or belittling it, or heaping more shame or guilt
upon the person is like rubbing salt into the wound. Once the
suffering is identified, the therapist should free the victim from
their shame. After Adam & Eve sinned & got their lives into
trouble, God still made clothes from skins to hide their shame.

Back to Contents Next

Page 379 ...

SUFFERING (client complaint)

Allow client to express his pain.
Treat the client as you would want
to be treated in similar circumstances.
↓
Let the client confront their own pain.
↓
DO: a. allow people to express their pain. b. let people confront
their
own pain, c. be with the sufferer in silent caring. d. be a
cheerful heart,
give kind words for the health of the body, mind and spirit, e.
free the
client from the shame of suffering.
↓
DON’T: a. assume you know the answer to every tragedy or
pain,
b. lecture the client about the blessings they will receive from
the
suffering, c. shame the client.
↓
FINALLY:
Point the person to the goodness and strength of God, for: IF
THE
LORD DOES NOT BUILD THE HOUSE, THOSE WHO
LABOR
BUILDING IT LABOR IN VAIN. No client can resist the
suffering in
their own strength, they need the strength and consolation of a
higher
power, God.
Page 380 ...

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

Suicide is an ongoing threat to ALL victims of total
mind-control. All victims of total mind-control have strong
suicide programs that are activated if they learn or talk about
anything that has gone on in their life, except what the
programmers want the victim & world to know about.
Therapists have greatly underestimated how suicidal victims of
mind-control are once they begin moving toward freedom.
Most alter systems are designed to have a calm front. The front
alters can be very calm and stable, while all hell is breaking
lose on the inside. Nor do the front alters have the ability to see
what is happening behind/under them. Threats of suicide can be
broken down into immediate threats that require immediate
intervention, & long term therapy. Because all victims of total
mind-control are suicidal 24 hours a day once they begin work,
therapists should assume that ALL VICTIMS are always a few
thoughts & seconds away from suicide. This is why a support
person should be around a mind-control victim 24-hrs a day to
support the client & to protect the client from his own suicidal
tendency. Suicidal thoughts & suicidal alters are programmed
into a slave. These pose an ongoing threat. BUT there is
another threat that can overwhelm the victim. This is the
accumulation of all the horror & trauma that the mind is dealing
with. The victim must also deal with his own guilt, with the
abuse cycle which kicks in & says, "It’s all your fault." Suicide
may a fear of living, a feeling of hopelessness. When it comes
to suicidal thoughts, sometimes mind-control victims display
the same clues as non-victims. These clues might be the verbal
clues such as "life is not worth living", "I’m in the way", and "I
would be better off dead." Indirect talk of having a friend who
wants to commit suicide might also be a clue. They might also
have the behavior clues of being depressed, buying a gun,
drugs, or a rope. Another clue might be writing a will while
depressed. The victim of mind-control will also display in their
handwriting a number of clues showing depression and suicide,
such as a higher than norm frequency of "x’s" throughout the
letter formations. The immediate response of some therapists is
to place the mind-control victim into a hospital, but hospital
settings usually back-fire & trigger even stronger suicidal
behavior, due to many programming/memory issues involved.
The hospital should be a place of last resort, and then only
under the most ultra-extreme cases. Hospitalization has its own
set of considerations to be taken into account for the victim.
During an immediate crisis, a suicide alter can be given
something in which to act out their suicide desires, such as a
plastic gun to do russian roulette, or they can be dealt with so
they feel they have done their job well enough without actually
killing the body. The therapist/support person needs to have the
love to listen to the victim, & show genuine concern. The
support person can determine what pressures (prog., emot.,
work, financial, memories, etc.) have built up to cause the
suicidal tendency & see if some of these can be diffused. If a
non-suicide alter is contemplating suicide, they can be
temporarily distracted until the crisis is over by asking them to
genuinely help the support person with something. This alters
self-esteem should be encouraged, because the alter is probably
tapping into all the negative images they have had drilled into
the system’s head.
Page 381 ...

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

IMMEDIATE SUICIDE THREAT
Genuinely listen to the person with love and
concern.

↓
Deal with this special
purpose alter by getting it to
Is this a suicide alter
restrain from killing the body
or a despondent
and to return inside the body.
non-suicide alter →YES→
Be sure to praise this alter,
thinking about
who is most likely a highly
suicide?
programmed child purpose
alter.

↓
NO
↓
Size up the situation:
· Listen for verbal clues to suicide
· Look at how much agitation & stress exists
· Watch the person’s communication for goals, for feelings of
rejection, or guilt
· Ask about behavioral clues to suicide, such plans &
equipment
· Ask about pressures that could have built up to cause the
suicidal thoughts, incl. med. pressures and drugs.
· Brainstorm how you as a support person can bear this person’s
burden (GAL 6:2) & how others might help relieve some of the
pressure driving the person to suicide.
· If inspired pray, if nothing else give HOPE.

Give:
· Hope & emotional strength & praise
· Positive encouragment
· Positive distractions, such as ask for help from the victim.

LONG TERM WORK

Work on:
· Dealing with hurting, rejected or crying parts
· Learning how to cope with what’s been done
· Seeing what is behind the suicidal depression
· Untangle the confusion of feelings
· Pace the disclosure of traumatic material
· The no-talk messages and the no see messages.
· Seeing programs and memories via journaling, art, etc.
· The many fears, esp. the fear of one’s own anger.
· Rage issues, trust issues, denial issues, spiritual issues.
· Realize that the suicide thinking can be helped more by one’s
attitude than hoping to change the external situations of life.
· Find the positives, "It’s a positive that I’m taking this little
step." Live minute by minute.
· Don’t worry about tommorrow. If you make it thru today, then
its a. good chance you’ll survive tomorrow.

Page 382 ...

SUPPORT TEAM, organizing one
The ESSENTIALS OF SINCERE HELP
S Safety
I Information
N And
C Creative
E Eject, erase, eliminate, expel the PDE/computers
R Realize
E Emancipation

ATTRIBUTES of a SUCCESSFUL TEAM

T Together
E Easily understood goals
A Attainable but challenging goals
M Measurable goals

G Good solutions
O On the spot rewards
A Applied creativity & risk taking
L Loytalty to team & goals

The slogan "If you want to get something done right, you have
to do it yourself’ reflects the independent spirit of Americans.
In some situations, the rugged Rambo is the best solution. The
overwhelming needs of a programmed multiple who has not
just cities but worlds of alters are too much for a single support
person. The overwhelming needs of the multiple to stay safe 24
hours a day are too much for a single support person. The skills
needed to tackle the challenges soon wear out a single person.
There is great wisdom is setting up teams (whether formal or
informal) to work with programmed multiples. Fritz and I have
done this quite a few times in therapy. The rewards have been
extremely gratifying. We still have a great deal to learn. Fritz
and I are working as a team on this book and on this article.
Other people have assisted us too. Fritz brings his skills and I
bring my skills and together our contributions are worth much
more than if we each worked separately. Teamwork brings
varied experiences and complementary skills together. The mix
of skills and insights enriches the therapeutic process, and adds
flexibility to the process. Teams can respond to a changing
situation far better than an individual. Over and over we have
seen that one person catches a clue to what a victim is trying to
say, while another team member is mentally distracted or fails
to catch the clue. A team is not created to create a team. A team
is created as a means to an end. A team needs a goal and needs
to perform. A team can handle one victim at a time. One thing
that we have seen work well was to make a large banner of the
goal for the victim during a particular session. For instance,
when work was done with our gatekeepers who were locked up
in heavy programming the goal was "To discover the true self."
When goals are chosen they need to be results, not activities.
The victim and the team will perform best if they have goals.
When working on a goal, seek quality rather than deadlines,
because the foundation of the team is performance. If the team
performs, it will build everyone up, and foster more team spirit.
If the team doesn’t perform its very reason for existing is in
question. When setting goals, perhaps the goal can be defusing
a particular type of programming. Or perhaps the goal is to
uncover the multiplicity of the victim. The team members need
to be given a chance for personal growth. The team should
share ideas. The team should have fun together. The team can
switch roles, or help each other learn. Each person on a team
needs to be given some status. The alters of a system also are
part of the team. Each individual is valued for what they can
contribute. Don’t forget to assign each team member a
significant role, and to assign meaningful significant goals for
the team. Divide up job responsibilities so that success can only
result if everyone pulls together. As time goes on
responsibilities can be rotated so that personal growth between
Page 383 ...
various specialists occurs. One person on the support team can
reward the alter system when they achieve a goal. A trip to an
aquarium, or to a park, or something special that the alter
system has never been able to do may be a significant reward.
The therapy should be fun. When teams work around the clock,
they need to be very wise & careful about how hard they push,
and when stopping is too soon. (When one is in the middle one
has to continue to a breakthrough.) An alter system can only
process so much so fast. After several days to accomplish a
goal, and a day to reward the goal, then a break should be taken
before hard work again. The recovering victim may also be able
to find a situation where they show to themselves their new
growth. At present some therapists are working several days
alone to achieve major breakthroughs, at least this is what has
been reported. However, we have never heard of any follow-up
for these victims. Without proper followup and long term
protection and long-term work, we seriously doubt that much
will really be accomplished beyond an impressive yo-yo effect.
The Mungadze Association (817-354-1389) & Care, Inc., are 2
groups using Christian principles & support teams & safe
houses to help programmed multiples. The two groups are
some of the best examples of what has been done. Who is
qualified for a team? The most important criteria is
commitment to the goal. If someone is seriously committed to
contribute toward a common team goal, then they are worth
having on the team. But Americans (including the American
churches) tend to want short term answers. Short-term
patchwork jobs just do not hold up in deprogramming slaves.
We need to have concern for the long term for anything
effective. That takes commitment. A programmed DID does
not want to "expose their guts on the operating table if the
doctor and nurses are going to walk out in the middle of
surgery." If a team member is seriously committed to the goal,
they will work harder to overcome the barriers and obstacles in
working with other team members. When the team overcomes
an obstacle, a natural outgrowth of that is team spirit. Team
spirit isn’t artificially made, it is a by-product of a successful
team. To focus on "building a team" is the wrong goal. The
commitment (strongly willed) is to the therapeutic goal. Teams
that are highly committed to each other personally are the best
high-performance teams. Too often we have focused on the
head (talents), or the hands (work produced) and not seen the
heart (spirit). The love and good spirit of a support team are
really the best leadership qualities that can be brought to a
team. Don’t misunderstand, a team will invest in creating an
ongoing committed well-skilled group, but they don’t make the
team an end in itself. Bring together team members who have
deep trust and respect for each other. Bring together a female
mother-figure therapist and a male father-figure therapist. At
some point team members must have some type of discipline
and accountability. There has to be some type of structure. (A
team member can’t do a job half-way and then decide that they
are finished. Nor should other members try to push other team
members off the team before the goal is achieved.) That doesn’t
mean the structure can’t be flexible. A team should be what is
needed for the job. Numbers are not important, commitment is.
Of course the therapeutic team needs to take into account that
the spiritual dynamics, the psychological dynamics and the
safety needs of the client need to have specialists who will be
committed to these jobs. The most successful team will be one
where there is no rule "Don’t do anything wrong." Everyone on
the team will make mistakes, but that is O.K. because those
mistakes can be learned from and can promote personal growth.
The team needs to promote
Page 384 ...
the personal growth of its members too. The team should not
waste time on small risks, but go for the gusto. Be creative.
Create an informal environment where everyone is relaxed.
Take risks, but don’t be foolhardy daredevils. The team needs
to be committed to new innovations. Pride in what a member
knows will go before the fall. Programmed multiple systems
are full of surprises. What if team members argue? Get them
together immediately and ask them how this conflict is going to
help the victim? "Let’s work together. The victim needs to see
the people she looks up to being committed to the victim’s
freedom, and not some non-relevant viewpoint." Competition
between the team members will be counterproductive. The
team is not being assembled to win a contest or a race. The
victim will contribute lots of ideas, and a great deal of
sensitivity and patience needs to be forthcoming from the
support team to allow the recovering victim to be the center of
the teamwork. However, an alter system is not set up to help
itself, and it will need some external input. Devote time to what
is successful. Brainstorm alternatives. Ask team members how
they feel they can contribute to a goal. Ask the client, "What
would you like to do that we aren’t doing?" If the place to work
provides a nearby spot to relax, it will provide the client and the
rest of the support team a chance to relax and diffuse some of
the tension. The means creatively looking for good safe houses
or good offices to use for therapy. Treat each other on the team
with equality. This doesn’t mean that a person’s skills are not to
be respected, it means that all have a shared sense of mission
and all are important. The example of team work and
cooperation will also be beneficial for the alters. It will give
them examples to build on, that they can apply to creating
internal
cooperation. Somehow the team needs to give space so that
members can vent their concerns. Some of the problems
therapeutic teams can develop is when concerns are stifled.
This means others must be restrained from interrupting.
Practicing a forgiving spirit between team members will also
give alters a good example to draw from. The team needs to be
as open as possible without any secret agreements between
people. The recovering victim needs to see that they are part of
the process. In many cases, it is very difficult to speak about
particular therapeutic paths, when that will only trigger
resistance and programming prior to the onset of a session. For
this reason, goals can be stated but particular methods are best
devised as the process unfolds. It is not productive to make the
recovering victim feel powerless. On the flip side, some alter
systems will entertain a spirit of control, and this spirit will
have to be firmiy and gently rebuked. As the team works on
their goal, they will have to navigate through the following
rapids, how do we deal with differences of opinion?, What do
we do when one is upset?, What do other team members like?
How does one handle feelings? In the end, these are all issues
that alter systems have to work out amongst themselves too in
order to succeed. Remember the four essential areas of help:
Safety, the Victim getting to know themselves, Building the
positives, and dismantling foundation programming & the PDE.
The support team needs to determine how the victim can
establish safety 24 hours a day, 365 days out of the year. Make
sure that all the helpers in this area are very aware of what the
safety issues are. One victim had the Illuminati come directly
into a Christian safe house and take the victim out with them,
without being stopped. Fritz & I hope that we have stimulated
you to investigate forming a support team for your general
geographic area. We welcome your comments and questions in
this area.
Page 385 ...

TRAUMAS, FOUNDATIONAL TRAUMAS, How to

master understanding what has been done to your
mind-controlled client
An Olympic athlete wants to learn every detail about his sport
he or she can. There is a fine line difference between success
and failure, and each understanding we gain brings us closer to
the expertise we want. There is a big difference between
playing war or watching war on television and being on the
front line. There is a big difference between hearing about the
birthing process and giving birth to a child. There is a big
difference between reading about an eskimo and being one.
Numerous therapists have commented that they were totally
unprepared by their training for the depth of horrors that their
programmed DID (MPD) clients have experienced. How does
one bridge the gap? Most mothers will tell you that you can
read all the books you want on giving childbirth, but
experiencing a childbirth as the mother is the only real teacher.
This book (and our two previous books) have laid out the
horrors of the programming for several reasons. One is to help
you get in touch with the victim you want to heal. While this
book can not transmit the full depth of the horrors of
trauma-based total mind-control, only a survivor of that trauma
has the possibility of knowing--and in most cases it was too
horrible even - for them to remember--this book (and
particularly this section) can GIVE YOU THE
UNDERSTANDING to prevent clumsy therapeutic mistakes
that stem from a shallow understanding. One principle of
success in life is to plan ahead. If a carpenter were going to take
out a wall in your house, he would know how to use his tools,
he would know what the wall was made of, HE WOULD
SHORE UP THE REST OF THE HOUSE so it didn’t all
crumble when he took out that wall. Time and time again,
programmed multiples find their therapists "experimenting" on
them. In other words, the person whose hands they have placed
their life into, doesn’t know the tools, what the situation is, nor
how to shore up the other parts of the house before they do
major destruction on their programming structure. Many clients
are irrevocably damaged. The last two decades of therapeutic
work with programmed multiples is littered with the failures of
"experiments". We shouldn’t make excuses for these failures,
nor do we need to brood with guilt, life is full of failures; we
simply need to come out of denial about the high percentage of
failures, and make the corrections needed to succeed.
Generally, the victim, who has been victimized by the
experimenting is further victimized by being blamed for the
experiment failing. So the therapist had best plan ahead, and
this section is written to help the therapist do just that.
Two foundational pillars upon which the programming works is
dissociation and fear. In order for the traumas to work they
need to be as severe as possible. The worse the trauma, the
better the dissociative walls needed for programming. These
traumas are so severe that they splinter the mind, they are not
ordinary traumas. Such traumas are so severe that to describe
them creates automatic denial mechanisms within the listener.
In fact, most victims prefer to live in denial too, which is more
comfortable. Going back to our carpenter analogy, there are
issues that the carpenter must know about and other issues that
aren’t important. For instance, "is the insulation in the section
of wall being pulled out good or not?" is not an important issue.
Likewise, too much emphasis is put on whether the trauma
memories were real or staged, or put in with hypnosis.
Unfortunately, most of these disturbing memories are
Page 386 ...
probably actually took place. But whether they took place
exactly as remembered or not is not an important issue. The
issue is that they exist as reality for the victim, and they need to
be dealt with. We are dealing with the mind and its
programming--that we can change, we can not change what
historically happened. We must identify what the mind thinks
and deal with that; and remind ourselves we are can not tamper
with the past no matter how it happened. If the therapist has a
hard time coming out of their denial, perhaps they are not
suited for this work. The therapist needs to work with the
reality of the memory in the mind--rather than trying to make a
judgement call on what happened. There is a place for making
historical judgement calls, but it is not the important issue in
working with a victim. Those who have suffered the traumas
know that others can not understand them. Only by living the
birthing process does the mother fully know the experience.
Only by being on the front lines does the soldier know the
horror and stench of death. So the therapist is going to help the
client work through repressed memories. These memories are
like BOILS OF THE MIND. They rise from the subconscious
to the conscious and then they are "lanced" so-to-speak so they
can heal. The root of that boil is FEAR. When the trauma is
embedded, it is covered over by love. This is intentional on the
part of the programmers. It creates the double binds that they
are so famous for. REJECTION OF THE PERSON feeds the
boil, that is rooted in FEAR and hidden by the DOUBLE-BIND
OF THE PROGRAMMER’S LOVE. (If the reader feels unsure
that he or she totally grasps this, no problem, it will be clearly
explained as the reader progresses through this section.) The
mind-controlled slave’s mind is like a deep vault holding
information and
trauma memories. The victim’s soul carries intense deep
grieving, and their body carries body memories of trauma. The
deep vault of the mind goes back to the traumas that took place
before the child victim was verbal. The fears and dissociation
which provide the foundation for the mind-control, were
responses by the mind to PROTECT itself. Some Christians are
trying to cast out alters as demons, when the fracturing and
dissociation was a gift from God that allowed the victim not to
lose their mind when faced with overwhelming trauma. The
little child to protect itself from the threat and fear of death, the
lies, the double-binds, the guilt, the shame, and the confusion of
drug states guards its mind by building its structure of
dissociation. When the therapist sees a structured DID (MPD),
he/she should equate that with "intentionally done." At some
point, the victim needs to see their structuring as something
INTENTIONALLY DONE. It was an intentional crime against
everything they were - an intentional crime upon their entire
being, body, soul and spirit. A little child is born pure and
clean. The betrayal of what that child was, is embedded deep in
its thinking. No child can withstand the full impact that comes
from realizing the extent of the betrayal of that child by
humanity. After years of protecting itself by dissociation, there
is no way that a programmed multiple can face the
COMPLETE AND FULL IMPACT of a trauma memory
without resplintering the mind. Before the dissociative wall is
pull out, the therapist needs to place in methods to allow the
victim to bring up memories without the full impact.
Journalling, art work, mental television screens holding the
memories at safe distances, etc. are some of the bracing
equipment that successful therapists put into place to prevent
the full impact of the memones. DEATH speaks to everyone.
No one is an island to himself (themselves) when it
Page 387 ...
comes to the subject of death. It is an undeniable fact of life,
that most people try to stay in at least partial denial of. The
MYSTERY OF DEATH reveals itself in many forms. The
therapist needs to understand that he/she is facing multiple
kinds of death. A study of Trauma-based mind-control could be
renamed a study of Thanoteros. In fact, the man reported to be
the world’s present-day best programmer has a degree in
Thanoteros. After experiencing several types of death, many
victims of mind-control prefer death over the reality of life.
Your job as a therapist is almost that of a resurrection. You
must give life, where there is only death. This is why we
believe that victims need life-giving godly people in their
recovery. The mind-control victim may experience death in a
grave. The victim may find it in a death, burial, and
resurrection programming ritual. It may be experienced in the
cages where the mind was split, it may be found in the isolation
of a well or closet. It may be found when a child is setup to
watch another child or pet that they identify with, and then be
made to feel responsible for its death. Death may be for the
godlike programmer to die, or for the programmer/master, to
whom the victim is trauma-bonded, to turn his back on the
victim and walk out of the room. Death may be to find oneself
in a strange hospital room with white masked strangers and a
strange doctor hurting you. When the important people in a
child’s life reject its life as important--howls the child to value
itself. It is taught to value only that life that the master gives.
The therapist needs to show the victim the value of life, so the
victims will want to take back what was devalued by the
programmers. Death brings GRIEF. The survivor is dealing
with different kinds of death which are shrouded in mystery.
The therapist is not dealing with normal grief. The therapist
will be dealing will overwhelming grief when the memories are
birthed. The programmer has worked to take the child victim to
a place beyond restitution. He has also built in a base of fear
with layers of fear, shame, guilt and grief. The therapist can
save herself and the client difficulties if the client isn’t put onto
the defensive. Don’t attack what the client is saying and make
the client’s parts defend what they are saying. This will only
result in them avoiding the issue. Whether the therapist agrees
or disagrees, a judgmental attitude will insure that the deeper
alters will go into hiding. They will close up tight, and these
alters will take the path of least resistance and they will stay
silent. Silence is what their programming is demanding that
they do. And the programming will feel safer than challenging
both the therapists skepticism and the protective
suicide/confusion programs that will trigger when they talk.
The programmers have programmed many alters to believe no
one would listen to them, and a skeptical therapist reinforces
that programmed conviction. If the therapist can begin to
understand that the hours of programming traumas ran into
days, and the days ran into weeks, and the weeks ran into
months, and the months ran into years, they will begin to get a
sense of how the programming has been layered in. It took lots
of hours and money to put it in. Its going to take the client and
support team as long or longer to deal with the issues and to
resolve them. To hurry is not better. The therapist and the
victim will have repeated problems with denial. The therapist
will have to accept and work with the victim where they are at.
Neither the victim nor the therapist will want to believe that
trauma-based mind-control has taken place, but both need to
accept where they are and where the therapy is going. That’s
the reality of life. The survivor of the mind-control will run
basically two tracks. During Illuminati
Page 388 ...
programming these are referred to as the right hand path and
the left hand path. The left hand path is the path of the satanic
cult, and the right hand path is the outside world, which has
been portrayed in the worst way by the programmers. The mind
of a trauma-based mind-controlled slave will naturally think
about the thoughts that have been repeatedly drilled into its
mind, via all kinds of programming methods and
reinforcements. The mind-control is basically a type of
death--the human has died and a robot has replaced it. Humans
were designed to have meaning and purpose in life--not to
follow orders without purpose or direction. The programmers
use fear of death to motivate the slave, but fear is based on
death, not life. Fear does not give true life. However, the human
spirit is almost impossible for the programmers to kill. If the do
break the human spirit, they risk eventually losing the slave to
apathetically losing interest in life. The human spirit will fight
to live and breathe. It will fight to overcome what it doesn’t
understand. It will fight to live and to have a life of meaning. It
is important for the support team and therapist not to
underestimate the power of either of these two tracks. The
programming is extremely powerful. And surprisingly the
human spirit is extremely powerful. What results is an
extremely intense, overwhelming tug-of-war. The client’s
actions will not coincide with a single plan. The client’s actions
will lack harmony. One minute they may sabotage therapy, the
next they may give a key to help unlock the programming.
(Because this author lived through being programmed, and in
turn learning to program others, I am in the unusual place to
understand the consequences of the various types of
programming situations that victims are subjected to. I hope to
take what Satan meant for evil, and use this knowledge for the
benefit of humanity. Please allow me to share some my
insights.) An example of one of the standard programming
traumas will provide many lessons about the nature of
programming and deprogramming. By going over just this one
example, it is hoped that the mechanisms that drive the
programming will be exposed, and that the therapist will see
how to curb the power of the programming trauma. This
programming trauma is based upon Genesis 37 in the Bible. In
this Bible chapter the patriarch Israel loves his son Joseph best.
He makes for him a coat of many colors (vs. 3), but this special
act of love causes his brothers to become jealous. His brothers
then strip him of his coat of colors and throw him in a well
which had no water. The Illuminati like to carry out this
standard programming trauma when the victim is three years of
age. They will place a coat of many colors on the child, but this
is to familiar the child with programming colors. Their robe is
not described as a robe of pride, but a robe of shame, and the
child is told "you’re bad", "look at what you did" and is
rejected by a group of people and made to feel alone and
shamed. Once the child has been clearly rejected by the group
carrying out the programming, then it is lowered into a very
deep well. They are trying to build a foundation of guilt and
fear for the programming. The well is deep and either hot or
cold. A lid is placed over the well and the child is left in
isolation after being shamed and made to feel guilty.
Occasionally the group may throw down body parts and feces,
urinate, and make noises from the top of the well to continue
the shame and rejection. For three days the child is left in the
well totally naked. The programmers want to make sure the
child feels no worth and rejected by mankind. It is important
that the child feels alone and stripped. That isolation from
mankind, will help insure the programming isn’t tampered
with. It helps insure that the child won’t
Page 389 ...
develop self-value. The well experience teaches the child
FEAR and that IT IS ALONE. The child feels the fear of being
alone. It knows that it is nothing except what the cult wants it to
be. In fact, more specifically, it knows it has no life nor value in
life except what the programmer wants it to have. It has been
stripped emotionally and physically. After tormenting the child
for 3 days with no food and no water and occasional verbal
abuse, the child is in shock and at a crisis point. The group
raises the child up. At this point it is critical to the
programming, that ONLY the programmer/handler be the
person to bring the child out of the well and tend to its needs.
The programmer will give the child water to quench its thirst
and food to feed it. The programmer will pick up the infant and
calm it. This programming experience is to build upon the
traumas in the womb and the original fracturing (which is
referred to as splitting the core) trauma. In other words, if we
were to number the sequence of traumas we get, 1. womb
traumas, 2. splitting the core trauma(s) 3. the well trauma. The
coat of many colors-well trauma is very severe. Many children
are lost during the trauma. Some children go inside and become
autistic. A medical team is present so that the child is kept alive
when it is brought to the surface. The child will be in what is
called a vegetable state when it is retrieved. After the
programmer gets the child to the surface and calmed, the child
will be nurtured by its mother or mothers-of-darkness. The
child will be left alone after the well trauma for 3 to 6 months.
The child needs this time before it is tampered with. After it has
recuperated, the programming team will begin working with the
child. They will build a chronology of how it felt during the
entire sequence. This chronology will define for the
programming the sequence of dissociation, so that the
programmers can identify what types of pieces the mind has
developed out of the experience. Those different dissociative
pieces each have different characteristics, and those
characteristics will be important to determine what that
dissociative piece will be used for. For instance, if the child
spends some time in fantasy that it’s parent really loves it even
though the reality of the well experience contradicts that
fantasy--those parts of the mind can be used to build alters
whose love is based on fantasy. It is difficult if not practically
impossible to dissuade these alters that their love does not line
up with reality because the foundation is a trauma where this
part of the mind survived on fantasy. It is also important for the
therapist to realize that often the Illuminati (or other cult
involved with the programming) will separate out the parts of
the mind from the splitting the core trauma (remember this core
trauma often includes a rape by Satan/& a rejection by someone
pretending to be God, i.e. a black mass), and make sure the
pure positive parts of the mind are put to sleep via drugs and
hypnosis before the well trauma. When the mind (the core) was
split part of the mind remained positive and in love with the
Lord. That is the part that is the most dissociated from the
trauma. That part is preserved and usually not subjected to the
well trauma because they want it to develop into the Christian
front. It will experience only the original shattering of the core
trauma, and then in some cases be left basically trauma-free.
They realize that once this part is indoctrinated into Christian
doctrine it will be almost impossible for it to ever deal with the
mind-control. That is because Christian doctrine from most
mainline denominations will teach that part to forgive and
forget the past. That part of the mind--which will be used to
front the system will live in the pleasant atmosphere of
Churchianity--where nothing un-nice is allowed in. It will not
want to look
Page 390 ...
at what has happened to other parts of the mind-because its
attitude is forgive and forget and move on. Remember, this
front part derived its separateness from the rest of the system
precisely because it was the part of the mind that stayed in
denial of the seriousness of the trauma, and held onto its
polyanish thinking in spite of the overall reality of what
happened. The mainline denominations will continue layering
in teachings that will make it difficult for this front part to
participate in freeing the rest of the mind from bondage. This is
why it is important for the churches first to realize what is
going on when trauma-based total mind-control is carried out,
and second how to divide the Word of God correctly so that
people realize that the Bible’s warning that a double-minded
man is unstable in all that he does--needs to force the church to
revise their teachings so that their teachings apply to the reality
that encompasses programmed multiplicity and the healing of
programmed-multiplicity. Now that the three trauma periods
have taken place (fetus, core split, and well trauma) and a
recuperating period of time has occurred, the programming
team can begin structuring. The structuring will involve
‘‘moving’’ parts around so that they are "positioned" to carry
out their role in the grids and systems that are to be built. This
is similar to how files in a computer can be move from
directory to another without changing the file. When the
programming and structuring begins, the child will be
questioned so that the programmers know how the mind split
during the trauma. The programmer will then take the child’s
parts deep into hypnosis and instruct them to forget the well
experience. They are only to remember the good part of the
experience--the worthwhile lesson that the programmer loved
them. They are to forget everything except "YOU’LL NEVER
FORGET HOW MUCH YOU WERE LOVED". The final split
of the mind that was in fear will be found and developed into a
protector. This part of the mind which lives in fear, will never
allow the love part to remember. The FEAR parts are left intact
with their fear, they will insure that the memory is dissociated.
There is a point during the well trauma when the child’s mind
will fall asleep but continue splintering. When the child is
sleeping the mind finds it difficult to discern whether its
thoughts are dreams or real. Have you ever had a dream that
was hard to separate from reality? The splintering during this
period produces dissociative parts which can be used for
gatekeeper alters. Gatekeeper alters are often the most deceived
and most programmed, and have difficulty knowing reality.
This is because they have been built from this dream state
during the well-trauma.
Page 391 ...
If the therapist has a very strong logical front alter, that alter
can be used to provide a protection for the system. This alter
can receive hypnotic alarms that will make the system angry if
anyone tries to use codes on the system. This strong alter can
also train his or her mind to have enormous thick concrete walls
behind them, so that the rest of the system is blocked off from
hearing anything through this alter. In this way, a system can be
protected from a verbal access code. However, there are ways
to get around such a defense. When alarm systems and blocking
walls have protected a system, the Illuminati will physically
abduct the victim, and take the victim to a nearby site where
that strong alter will be "destroyed"-shattered by electro-shock
and hypnosis and put out of commission. We suggest that if
defensive mechanisms are put in, don’t advertize this fact,
because it only escalates the battle. The actual codes and
triggers are generally buried deep in the subconscious, and the
support team is going to have an extremely difficult time ever
getting to any of these. We have tried to greatly help people out
by publishing what we can in this area. Because the codes are
buried so deep, it is really difficult to erase them from the mind.
The mind is trained to switch automatically upon certain cues.
Perhaps the most effective way to protect a victim of
mind-control is to have a knowledgeable support person with
the victim, 24 hours a day. The co-authors have heard a number
of therapists say that having someone assisted 24 hours a day is
impractical, and we reply that trying to free someone (mentally
& physically) without 24 hour/day protection is impractical.
There are prayer strategies and powerful prayers that can be
made to receive supernatural help to overcome the triggers.
There is certainly power in prayer, we have seen this first hand.
Over time some of the codes can lose their power through
desensitization. It always helps when alters are aware of what
the codes are so they can be alert to them. But the power of the
codes should not be underestimated, and to tell someone they
are protected from the codes by prayer, is similar to telling
soldiers that bullets can’t hurt them because they have been
prayed for. While we do not discount the power of prayer, we
also recognize that prayer needs to be grounded in reality. If we
pray for a house, we can imagine that the house has magically
appeared, but that is not faith, that is merely self-deception.
Some victims have been told incorrectly that codes will not
work with their system anymore because they were prayed for.
Who wouldn’t want to believe this, and yet we feel compelled
to warn people that in the case of programmed multiples, there
are seldom easy answers. On the flip side, positive triggers can
be put in, such as a cue word that will call up a helpful front
alter in case the system and the therapist needs help. Sometimes
this can simply be the alter’s name.
Page 392 ...
As the alters of a victim of mind-control go through life, they
will inadvertently trigger programming and memories. Initially,
there will be fear around the activation of triggers. The novice
therapist may think the victim is setting off triggers just for
attention. Actually, that is not a major issue for therapists to
worry about, even though on the outside it may appear to be an
issue. However, it is true that a slave may be programmed to
trigger their own programming as a macro-program goes off to
get the slave to do things to activate so many triggers that the
system self-destructs. It is no exaggeration to say that life is one
big trigger for victims of Illuminati mind-control. The
programmers have intentionally linked the external
environment of the slave to their programming in order to
manipulate the external world into becoming one more
reinforcement for the mind-control. The programming traumas
have taken place over in so many different geographic locations
for most slaves, under so many different circumstances and
with so many different programming props that there is not
much left in life that doesn’t trigger emotions of fear and
horror. After reading the Illustrated Guidebook, the Vol. 2
Formula book and now our Deeper Insights book, readers
should be aware of why airplanes, animals, birthing issues,
blood, caves, colors, crying by children, death issues, fire,
foods, heights, holidays, insects, lightening, masks, occult
paraphernalia, snakes, sounds, and harsh weather such as
tornados, and zoos will trigger a recovering victim of
mind-control. Phobias can be mentally linked to certain items,
or may simply be free floating. For the victim to get in touch
with their emotions is in itself very triggering. Any time the
victim tries to touch things at a personal or emotional level,
they will trigger him or her self. The harder the victim works,
the more they trigger themselves and the more fragile they
become. In working toward freedom, pain becomes gain. But
the victim and the therapist are not going through the pain for
sadistic reasons, but because part of the power of the
mind-control is to separate pain the consequence of pain from
the sources of pain. Trauma memories are so abundant that
abreactions lurk in the background, ready to spring to life as the
victim tries to go through live. When the victim tries to shower,
eat a meal, or have a pet or visit with a little child, the alters
may well abreact. The traumas and abreactions do weigh down
a person, but many recovering victims, simply run two tracks,
one for the world to see, and the other which is full of pain and
confusion. This happens too frequently in therapy. It allows the
therapist to fool him or her self that the victim is doing much
better than is actually the case. Sometimes an alter can be put in
charge of the body, while the rest of the alters are busy trying to
deal with all the pain and emotion that the trigger has
generated. Only by gaining the trust and knowing how
programmed DID’s think, can the therapist begin to get a more
accurate picture of how the slave has been triggered. Many
therapists mistakingly think that if their client who is a
programmed multiple will not experience victimization if they
don’t refer to themselves as "a victim". It is a fad to blame
victims for their own victimization. The thinking goes like this:
Somehow the person set himself up--&/or---it must have been
bad karma. This is the pop psychology of the ‘80’s and 90’s,
that is not grounded in reality. The origins of this thinking are
also suspicious. This quack thinking reflects the human’s
mind’s need to have things make sense. Many times life is
senseless. Many
Page 393 ...
times people suffer senselessly. They do not set themselves up
as victims, and all the word games in the world aren’t going to
stop what going on. To pretend that the multiples that are
coming into therapy are "survivors of abuse" is just one of
many ways that the therapists deny that they are not dealing
with the real issue, the client’s safety--which is not something
in the past, but the most important issue in the present.
Therapists have most victims conditioned to call themselves
"survivors". How many people on a ship that continues to sink
call themselves a survivor? The pitiful health conditions that so
many victims of ongoing mind-control have described to the
two co-authors, and their desperate cries to have this ongoing
abuse stopped make the word ‘‘survivor’’ a mockery of their
ongoing desperate attempts to hold onto some kind of life.
Every time the victim of mind-control accidently triggers a
trauma memory or programming they are being victimized
by their past. Of course, some therapists and ministers have
managed to hide the MPD, because they have mistakingly
informed the victim that the MPD (DID) is the problem. The
DID is NOT the problem--but abreacting trauma memories or
trying to prevent a suicide program from actually taking place
is a major problem, and one that most survivors are going to
have to deal with by themselves, because the triggering will
take place so quick and frequently. The therapist needs to give
the victim the mental and external resources to at least cope
with these challenges. The greater the trauma, the greater the
amnesia wall. When trauma memories break through those
walls into awareness, the distress to the victim can be
overwhelming. The victim will be frightened, ashamed,
depressed, fearful, suicidal, and have feelings that they are
going crazy. No patient is eager to discover that he/she has
been violated by people they loved and trusted. The false
memory people are not portraying the way the mind works to
the public. The mind tries to protect itself, and it is inclined to
deny harsh memories, rather than latching onto trauma
memories because of some therapist’s suggestion of abuse.
Uncovering a victim’s history, does not depend on a single
memory. New memories are blended with old ones and new
explanations for what has happened reconsidered, until a
verifiable more accurate chronology begins to present itself. At
the onset of therapy, if the victim doesn’t know, the therapist
can warn at the onset of therapy that hand gestures, hypnotic
patterns, lights and codes words will trigger the subconscious
mind of the victim. The field of what might be called "aromic
therapy" is still in its infancy, but has great potential. The
sensations of smells are closely linked with emotions in the
mind. If a therapist is trying to trigger a particular memory and
emotional content, smells associated with the memory will
work better than anything to pull up the emotional content. This
is because of the way smell is processed by the mind which
first perceives it by the smell setting off a combination of
"detection codes" in the olfactory bulb that are then relayed
through the limbic system. The memories of smells are very
closely attached to emotional memories. This only makes sense
in a way, because smells are used by a newborn child to
identify its mother, they are used by lovers, and in other
situations where the sense of smell plays an important role in
our emotions toward something. The use of smells to trigger
and to heal multiples is wide open for exploration.

Back to Contents Next

Page 394 ...
We believe that we may have some new slants on the Issue of
trust which might help both support teams and their client. In
order for the therapist and support persons to work with a
programmed multiple system they need to establish trust. This
means that the programmed multiple’s alter system not only
feels the support person will be honest, but that they will
protect the multiple physically and the multiple’s
confidentiality. It also means that the alters trust the abilities of
the therapist to accomplish something positive. For some front
alters, they simply need to see that the therapist/support person
cares, is a kind person and has credentials or a history of
working in this area. For deeper alters, trust is a demanding and
complex substance that has to be won by lots of hard work,
consistency, respect, proficiency, and availability by the
therapist. Many of the deeper alters have never seen a person
try to protect them before. Many of the little hurting alters have
never had any one to tell their pain to. Many of the alters are
convinced that no one can love them, that they destroy
everyone they touch, and that they can’t have a good
relationship with any outsider. The therapist will have to prove
these attitudes wrong, even in the face of the client carrying out
actions to self-fulfill their expectations. This last paragraph was
from the therapist’s vantage point. On the other side of the
healing process is the programmed slave. Once the therapist
opens up their system, they will be processing memory 24
hours a day--even though the front alters may not know it.
Once therapy opens up a system all kinds of things start coming
unraveled. The host alter, who probably has been thinking (and
generally destroying all evidence to the contrary) that she/he is
a single person, now has become a complex system of
competing personalities. As the programming loses its power,
more of the multiplicity appears. (Family members are often
devastated, because they lose the person they knew for an entire
tribe of personalities.) As the system tries to move against the
programming, every step that would take a unit of mental
energy for non-multiples is perhaps carried out only with 1,000
times the mental energy. Instead of one person changing his
habits, you have an entire city or world that must be changed,
and they must change in the face of overwhelming resistance
from many others in the system as well as the programming and
external threats. While trust seems to be an easy thing for the
therapist, trust becomes one of the struggles that seems a no
Many of the issues seem like no-win issues. Remember that the
child victim initially resisted with all it had against being
programmed, but at some point, the programmers broke the
child and its resistance completely. That brokenness is a solid
part of the child’s thinking. The victim will fall back into that
broken "its-a-no-win thinking" very easily. The programming
leaves the victim’s mind operating in a survival mode. This
means that much of the survivor’s thinking comes straight Out
of the first brain, the reptilian brain. The victim will try very
hard to see what the therapist is trying to say, but before long,
they find they have fallen back into the old way of thinking?
Why? Let’s say the therapist has worked on teaching the kitten
alters that they are really not cats. Let’s also say the therapist
has worked hard on trust issues. Now all of a sudden the judge
alters and the programmers apply pressure to the kitten alters,
and before they realize it, they are seeing themselves as kittens
and distrusting the therapist. They are saying to the therapist,
"You’re telling me I’m
Page 395 ...
not a kitten, but I see myself as a kitten when I look in the
mirror, and beside I don’t want to be a human, because humans
get hurt." What has happened? When the mind learns it builds
K-lines. K-lines are like highways that connect many different
things in the mind. K-Lines can connect cognitive demon
processes, memory bits such as visual maps stored as a
memory. K-Lines are what create a mental state of
consciousness. A mental state is really nothing more than a
K-line or interconnected series of K-lines. When a highway
(K-line) is built in the mind, it is essentially permanent. It is
similar to the Apian Way that leads to Rome. The same road
that allowed the Roman legion to move its troops still is being
used today. The same purported street that Christ walked on in
Jerusalem is still in existence today. In fact some of the old
stones from Roman times with the ancient Roman marks are
still in place. The road on top of the Great Wall of China still is
used in some places. However, if a road is not used, it can fall
into disrepair and its use will be abandoned. Likewise, the mind
never normally loses a K-line, they simply fall into disuse. By
employing Behavior Modification in the most extreme forms,
alters are trained during programming to develop particular
K-lines. Those K-lines will never be gone. Just like an
alcoholic will always have an ability to go back to being an
alcoholic. What can be done, is to build new K-lines that get
more use. Since most deprogrammer are not willing to subject
their clients to the same behavior modification techniques
(based on survival & fear) that the programmers used, they
must resort to building new K-Lines in the higher brains. The
programmer’s K-lines remain dormant in the reptilian brain, the
new behaviors that are taught to the alters are attached to the
higher brains. Now what happens when an alter feels
threatened? When their survival is at stake, the reptilian brain
shuts off the higher brains, and the mind searches around for a
K-Line that it can use. Lo and behold, the mind finds the old
K-line and reaccesses it. This is why safety of the slave is so
important to have a chance to develop strong new K-lines.
When the victim reverts back to their old thinking, the victim
will think that all has been lost, and that years of work have
been lost. They may tell the therapist that they no longer trust
the therapist and that years of work have gone down the drain.
This is not so. The new positive K-lines are in the mind still.
They will always be there. They simply need to be reaccessed
and strengthened by use. When the survival instinct is triggered
-- "danger, danger" -- no reassuring and no reasoning are going
to break through, the mind under the control of the first brain is
shutting down the higher thinking processes and putting its
thinking energy into survival. Feelings are not facts, but the
mind will be resistent to information that is coming in from the
higher brains--unless it has been trained to let these higher
thinking processes override survival instincts. This will help
people understand why Jesus said that if you are not willing to
mentally let go of the need to survive (your reptilian brain) and
give your thinking to God (a higher conscious type thinking)
you will not be able to have the spiritual walk needed to see
God. (If you try to save your life, you will lose it. You must
pick up your cross daily, that is sacrifice your survival instincts
daily, and allow God to work His will in your life.) Christ also
said that fear and trust are incompatible. He said that perfect
love for God will cast out fear. In other words, a fearful person
will have a hard time loving God. We must learn to conquer our
fears by strengthening the higher brains (what people call
higher levels of consciousness). The fifth brain processes
concepts, works with abstract thoughts, and can pull up
Page 396 ...
thoughts from various parts of the mind and do comparisons.
The fifth brain is a reflecting meditating type of brain. It is
capable of integrating many concepts together. In a sense it
lives, it feeds off of thoughts. Marijuana triggers this brain.
Guided drug trips in sensory deprivation tanks can be used to
program this brain. The higher brains can develop dominance
over the lower brains to such a degree that the survival instinct
can be overridden completely, cases in point, Jesus and his
apostles allowed their own martyrdoms, the Anabaptists under
Menno Simon’s teachings on the Bible peacefully allowed their
own deaths, and modern-day Christians under Bill Gothard’s
teachings in Uganda allowed themselves martyrdom under Idi
Amin rather than fleeing. These were all deaths for a higher
cause, not deaths from mind-control. An alter who suicides the
system is acting under the confusion of behavior modification
where it is acting under the programming lie that it is protecting
the system from greater harm. This is simply a misguided
survival instinct. What this means is that safety and trust are
inseparable issues. If front alters trust a therapist who is not
protecting their system from their mind-control abusers, then it
shows that the front alters are dissociated from the ongoing
abuse. The alters that are not dissociated from the ongoing
abuse are probably the ones that are helping hold up the
therapy! - Why don’t they trust the therapist? The front alters
trust the therapist? After reading this, the reader can see why
the deeper ones don’t have trust. If the system sees that there
are higher concepts at stake, that they have a role to play in
helping other victims, they may be able to override their fears
with thoughts from higher brains. Trust is in part going to be
established by building up the higher brains. This is why
spiritual issues should not be neglected in helping a victim. The
first brain can also be worked with by working with the body.
The body memories of torture can be worked on to help work
out some of the body tension that helps stimulate the strong
survival danger signals. Massage and some types of rolfing or
yoga might contribute to re-orienting the first brain. The first
brain’s thinking sometimes show up in body symptoms.
Page 397 ...

TRUTH, discernment of
[For this section, we decided to let Fritz offer the reader some
helpful hints about seeking and finding the truth. Then we’ll
add a few comments at the end. Fritz has a reason for
approaching the subject as he does, so try reading through it
first before judging it.]
Everybody has their own methods for figuring truth out. Some
are finding it better than others. As with other things, there isn’t
one set way for determining truth. The procedures are going to
vary from situation to situation, but there are certainly some
useful tips that can be passed on from one truth seeker to
another. Finding truth is not a matter of taste. One doesn’t
investigate the one-true god by deciding what god suits our
tastes best -- but lots of people do this anyway. As we set our
personal criteria for what is truth, we will find others in
disagreement with us. Ultimately, real truth is not something
personal but something all truth seekers can agree upon. This is
why Jesus Christ’s words are so powerful, they are eternally
truthful. They are as much truth as they were when they were
spoken. Even though truth is not relative, but is an eternal
objective truth, God has given us free choice and a mind with
which to choose what we want to believe. Many have
mistakingly considered one’s religious views as a matter of
taste, not a matter of truth. That is perhaps the first hurdle to
correctly jump in the search for truth--Is this a matter of
personal taste or is it a matter of truth. What I eat for breakfast
is my choice, which of the foods is most beneficial for my body
is a complex issue of truth. Because the Watchtower Society
teaches that knowledge about God is an issue of truth not taste,
the JW’s believe that they can apply rational thought in their
search for God. The Jehovah’s Witnesses have a book
Reasoning From the Scriptures. The idea behind the title is a
good one. There is a place for reason and logic, but we must be
careful to
place the Word of God as the foundation from which we
reason. Unfortunately, that is not what the Jehovah’s Witnesses
do. They reason that the God in 3 persons is unreasonable,
because there can’t be both one God, and 3 Gods, so they reject
the Triune nature of God, even though the Scriptures are very
clear that the Father is God Almighty, Christ is God Almighty,
and the Holy Spirit is God Almighty. Three persons, one God.
Sometimes we don’t have enough understanding to reason
from. The concept of three persons in one supreme being seems
outrageous at first, and yet that is exactly what MPD (DID) is.
That is one reason some people can not except multiple
personalities either. If we reason from our past understandings,
we may not be able to adequately explain new phenomena. The
parallels between MPD and what the Bible says about God are
enormous, once a person really gets a handle on how MPD
really functions within the mind. There are so many
misconceptions about MPD, and misconceptions about the
"Trinity" (the word doesn’t appear in Scriptures), that this
subject really needs a book in itself to explain the parallels. But
the bottom line is that we believe what God has written to us,
and then we reason from there. If God says He exists in three
persons, we accept that and then reason from there. We don’t
reason away what God Almighty says. This is where so many
of us get ourselves into trouble. The Pharisees were able to
make the Word of God to have no effect, by thinking out
things. Thinking doesn’t always take us in the right direction
even if it makes sense. This is probably why some people have
rejected logic and reasoning in their Christian walk. Logic is a
function of a clear mind. The Scriptures show godly men
reasoning things out.

Page 398 ...

Being a reasonable person can be a good testimony for Christ.
But we must always humbly bear in mind that our minds only
have a small part of the facts and understanding about the
universe and life that exists. If I understand one-billionth of
what can be known about my situation, I suppose I am
fortunate. God understands so much more. If His Word states
something that seems unreasonable--I would rather trust His
Word, than my own feeble understanding. However, if I begin
to have thoughts that are contrary to the Word of God, and
contrary to how I normally think, then logic helps me realize
that these are not my own thoughts--they are the thoughts of
demons. This is an example of how reasoning from Scriptures
can spare us from trouble. When we mentally review how we
have obtained certain thought patterns, if we acquaint ourselves
with how evil spirits influence a man’s thinking via our actions
opening up portals and strongholds, then we can logically
separate out those thoughts that are from God and those
thoughts that are from Satan. Most fears are ungodly, and they
come from Satan’s kingdom. Hope and faith come from God.
Discouragement and depression are not given to us from God,
they are given to us from our adversary Satan. There may be
exceptions to this, but in most cases it is clear that Satan’s
kingdom is here to steal from us peace, hope, love and faith,
and is here to give us hate, fear, and discouragement. We have
to learn to be happy. We have to allow God to bring us peace.
Logically, if you want a happy life, you must go to the
Kingdom that wants to bring you peace, joy, love, and
happiness. People look for happiness in the strangest places!
Logic-and reasoning will tell you that Satan can’t bring you
happiness. Logic can be helpful to us in our Christian walk.
Examples were given of how that is true. We must be cautious
in how we use logic. Logic is not to be used to overturn the
Word of God. None of us are brilliant enough to challenge
God’s Word. Logic & reasoning is how we protect what God
has already taught us & placed into our hearts and consciences.
As we gather information, we can take best advantage of that
information if we separate the chaff from the wheat. Is the
person giving this information speaking in generalities, or is he
speaking about an exception to the rule, or is he speaking about
a specific case? When someone speaks about their private
thoughts, how they love someone, or have heartburn, their
thoughts are private, we must accept that we only can
approximately understand exactly what they are feeling and
thinking. When we witness a car accident with another person,
our perspective of the accident is our own private perception of
the event--BUT other people can also witness the event. The
car accident is NOT a subjective event, even though there is
some subjectivity in people’s perception of it. The accident is
not an idea it is an objective event. Modern philosophy has a
hard time accepting this, even though it makes common sense.
The events of that objective reality can be distorted or
misreported and not reported in many different ways. However,
the accident is an objective real event. More than one person
can experience that reality. If we dream about an accident, then
that is a concept. Concepts and what our judgement calls about
what our senses have reported are two different things. We
normally don’t doubt what we apprehend. We normally do
question the existence of what we mentally create (our ideas);
that is until we come to someone who has been programmed
and taught via behavior modification not to trust their own
senses. The programmed slave loses the ability to discern what
is a concept, merely an idea the brain has imagined, and what is
actually something that has an external reality and has been
apprehended. Hallucinations will mask themselves as
perceptions, when they are not perceptions at all. Further, they
are very
Page 399 ...
suggestible. They have shut down their critical thinking and
have an unconscious agreement with the programmer that
whatever he says is truth. The movie/book 1984 which was
written many years ago describes a time when society as a
whole was under the mind-control of Big Brother. When the
main character steps out of line, he is reprogrammed, by
torture. The goal of the programming was to get this
thought-offender to accept whatever truth the programmer
wanted from him. The programmer wanted him to get to the
point that when the programmer held up 4 fingers, the man
didn’t know what he saw, but if the programmer said that the 4
fingers were 5, then the victim would actually see 5. This is
exactly where the programmers get their victims, and is part of
the reason they no longer can trust their own senses. Can
several people have a simultaneous hallucination? Yes, and
during the programming and during the life of the
mind-controlled victim, hallucinations that are experienced by
several people are a fake perception that is even more difficult
to reject because our normal basis for deciding if something is
an external reality that is being apprehended, versus our own
imagination, is that other people can also see (or experience) it.
When several other people experience something, that is a
common test that the event happened in reality. (This is the
concept of having several witnesses.) However, witnesses can
be mistaken. The victim of mind-control must be given more
than a Bible --"Here, take this, this is the truth." The victim of
mind-control must take back what was stripped of them. They
must learn to have that critical facility that has been stripped
from them--the ability to ask is this an external reality that
everyone can experience, or is this a perception, or a grand
illusion that several people are only thinking.
Today, it is a fad to say everything is subjective. It is not. There
is a reality. Our memories may or may not correspond to
something that did exist. Memories can be perceptions and
imaginations also, that mask themselves as experiences just like
our hallucinations can. We can be skeptical about whether we
have a concept in our mind that corresponds to what others
could experience, or whether it is an imagination. But we can
not accurately be skeptical of the existence of reality and truth.
Since total skepticism of the existence of reality is
self-defeating, the occultists have charged off in the other
extreme, an equally wrong direction, and declared that if the
mind has an idea, the idea must be attached to some reality,
even if that reality is actually another magical sphere
somewhere. This turns all fictions, visualizations, dreams,
imaginations into some mystical perception of some supposed
alternate reality. The truth is that these "magical realms" are
shared hallucinations. No matter how many people have the
same hallucination, that does not make that hallucination
become a representation of some external reality. Reality is the
world we live in together. The programmed multiple lives in
their own private worlds. The therapist may have to enter that
private world and bring the person back to the external world
that humanity lives in together. If there is anything that
highlights the differences between the external world of reality
and the internal world of hallucination it is programmed
multiplicity. Because the differences are obvious for the slave,
there is no reason why they can’t return to the world of reality.
The problem that lies for some non-multiples (especially some
psychotics, but for many people in general) is that they can’t
see the two tracks, they can’t see the two worlds. I have seen
Americans watching soap operas, sitcoms, and other shows,
and then tell me that the shows are real events, and no argument
would dissuade them. In fact, the philosophers Locke and
Descartes both shared the same problem, even as philosophers
they could not see the difference between external reality that is
apprehended by our senses, and our own
Page 400 ...
head-trips. As our senses gather in their sensory input, our
minds go into gear to compare what they are sensing to what
the mind has cataloged already. In other words, the mind is
trying to make sense of what it is receiving. This is why we can
"talk over someone’s head" or why I say that the common
American has no frame of reference (& no world-view) to hang
my information on. If we are unable to compare what we are
sensing to anything else, it is unintellible to us. So learning is a
building process, of comparing and building bridges from one
item to the next. Our minds are masters at seeing relationships,
but it still has to be a building process--whether the process is
quick or slow. Some people want to jump over necessary steps
of the building process, and read advanced level material before
they are ready for it. That is one reason this book should only
be read after a certain level of understanding is achieved.
Detecting what is going on in the environment around a person
is only part of what the human mind can do. It can also
anticipate, plan, think, imagine, calculate, etc. The senses play
only a limited role in our thinking. Sometimes we need to use
common sense and realize a thought is merely a thought, and
nothing else. Just because the thought develops in our mind,
doesn’t mean there is any external reality to it. Feelings are not
facts. Recovering victims of mind-control should remind
themselves of this one frequently, feelings are not facts. On the
flip side, there are certain phenomena is life which demand
explanations, such as how did an extremely well-designed
incredibly complex system of life as well as an incredible
planet come into being? This is a fundamental question of
reality. Although the answer "There was an Almighty Creator"
calls for us to employ our imagination to visualize what we
can’t see, that doesn’t subtract from God being an external
reality. Something is not negated in its existence just because
we can imagine it, or haven’t experienced it yet. Jesus in a
sense argued for the existence of the Holy Spirit, by saying it
was something not seen and yet it was something experienced
and something that created tangible results like the wind
blowing through the trees. He was essentially saying, yes, the
Holy Spirit (Holy Ghost) is real. Aleister Crowley, a self-made
satanist who revealed much more about the occult world than
the Illuminati families would have done, based his Thalamic
law, "Do what thou wilt, is the whole of the law" upon the
underlying idea that pleasure is good. Common sense will teach
people that pleasure and good are not equal. This philosophy is
hedonism, and leads to self-destruction, which is what
Crowley’s philosophy did to himself and others around him.
Where this philosophy goes astray, is that Wisdom is good, but
may not be obtained through simply pleasure. We may be
pleased when we obtain Wisdom, but that pleasure in obtaining
wisdom IS NOT wisdom itself but a by-product of having
obtained a desired need. While thinking himself wise with all
his satanic hedonistic cabalistic drug-sex magic, Crowley was
going down a dead end. This is so obvious, that some modern
thinkers try to revise the concept that pleasure is good, to the
underlying idea that what is desirable for a man is good. But
again this makes a mess out of things. People differ in their
desires and this means what is evil for a victim of mind-control
is good for the abuser. Betrand Russell connected to the
Illuminati stated, "Ethics is the art of recommending to others
what they must do to get along with ourselves." This fits with
the basic viewpoint of many people today who think that there
are no moral truths, everything is relative and subjective, just
an opinion. If we approach the subject from an understanding
that the way we as human beings are constructed by God, our
very human nature has created needs within us. If we make a
moral judgement it is not relative but it is grounded in the truth
that we have a real need, and these
Page 401 ...
morals express a desire for the good that satisfying that need
brings. For instance, a glass of water in the desert is a need, it is
good. A glass of whiskey at the bar is a want, it appears
good--but it is not a genuine need of the body. We ought to
desire more of the things we need, but we often sacrifice these
for our wants. Common sense teaches us a foundational moral
law that we should desire what is really good for us. Good
being defined as what mankind needs. If we know we that truly
need something, then we know what is good, and we should
desire having it. What sustains the universe? If we realize that
God sustains the universe, then God is realized as a need, not a
want. This explains why mankind is so busy with worship.
Monkeys do not worship. Fish do not worship. But man tries to
worship. Neither fish nor monkeys feel guilt because they do
not sin. But man does, because man was given the free will to
do what was right. What I am doing is laying the groundwork
to show the reader that all these modern philosophies that say
there are no absolute rights or wrongs, are not grounded in truth
& reality. We as humans have needs, and to desire those real
needs be met is good. Since the fall of man, which was the rise
of religion, a great deal of muddying the waters has occurred.
The fall of man paralleled the previous fall of Lucifer. The
trauma-based mind-control is a mirror image of the fallen mind
of Lucifer. At this point, - some of you readers will consider
this to be wild preaching--because it is very unpopular to view
the mind-control as something religious in nature. Because
Luciferian gnosticism & Satanism are religions, it’s popular to
ignore the religious side of the programming. To associate the
occult with trauma-based mind-control seems to some secular
therapists unnecessary. They want to sidestep the religious
nature of the programming with the mistaken idea that they can
sterilize what happens to the victim in strictly scientific terms.
But if we don’t dismiss the existence of good & evil, God &
Lucifer, and we understand the mind of Lucifer/Satan, then we
amazingly "just happen" to have the greatest explanation for
understanding the trauma-based mind-control. [Now Cisco will
pick up from here.] Lucifer wanted to steal God’s identity.
Lucifer in his fall was stripped of his birthright, his identity and
his rank, and was separated from truth. Lucifer goes forth to
steal the identity & birthright of children, and to separate them
from truth. This is just a small part of how the mind-control is a
reflection of the mind of Satan. An entire book could be written
on this subject alone. No matter how painful it is for a
mind-control victim to realize what Satan stole from them, once
they have acknowledged that, and begin to take back what God
originally gave them, then the wisdom God will give, will bring
knowledge. And that knowledge will bring understanding. And
with that understanding the eternal life force (spirit) that the
Creator gives each person can look into the deepest pit of hell
and it will still see the light of that truth. And Lucifer knows
that when you put light on darkness, there is a light at the end
of the tunnel which will continue to break down the darkness.
The day one seeks truth with his whole heart, is the day he will
find it. That light will be a light on the hill that will prevail over
darkness. You can be sure that if you are dealing with
mind-control structuring, you are dealing with Satan the father
of all lies. When the victim can acknowledge the crimes that
were done against him or her self, then he is able to
acknowledge what Satan is, the Father of all lies. If evil is
recognized as evil, then seek the goodness of truth. The truth
will open a doorway into the mind that brings growth, maturity,
stability, assurance, a new awakening, and other exciting
things. The battle for your mind is between truth and evil.

Back to Contents Next

Page 402 ...

ABREACTIONS, avoidence of
OVERVIEW. The original programming traumas are
perpetrated by the programming cult because these traumas are
dependably severe enough to cause the mind to split. Later
traumas are the result of ongoing abuse by the slave’s users.
They may cause splits because the multiple has developed
splitting as a natural mental reflex to difficult situations.
The original programming traumas are so severe that if the
slave remembers them, the memories of these traumas are
enough to splinter the mind again. Traumas that result from
ongoing perpetrator use of the slave may not be so traumatic,
but they will also bring with them painful body memories,
confusion, and the potential to splinter the mind.
Until recently, the major thrust of the therapeutic community
has been to try to push the victim towards abreacting the
trauma, which is actually causing more psychological stress and
harm than good to the victim’s mind.

The correct Goal & some Basic Techniques.

Memory work needs to be done with the goal of preventing
abreactions. Memories can be looked at by journaling, being
placed on internal movie screens (or VCR players), by artwork
and a number of other techniques. Of course the programmers
are now a step ahead of therapists and are placing in programs
to prevent these non-abreactive memory techniques. We will
review some of the techniques for dealing with - abreactions.
They basically follow common sense. When a person has a
memory:
· they can be distracted to pull away from it,
· they can intentionally encase the memory in some box, vault,
safe, room or other storage unit,
· or they can develop ways to slow down and tone down the
affect of the memory so that the mind is cushioned from the
severity of the memory.
As an alter struggles with memories, another alter can be
intentionally shifted to hold the body. Some therapists will also
develop a temporary safe room where an alter can retreat from
memory work for a temporary respite. It is going to be nearly
impossible for the victim not to suffer from their memories, in
fact, every victim we know has suffered incalculable torment
from their memories. The slogan "no pain, no gain" seems to
have been written for their situation in life.
Page 403 ...

ABREACTIONS, understanding
MEMORY FLASHBACKS. A review of history will show that
victims of torture/trauma can potentially get memory
flashbacks for the rest of their life. These memory flashbacks
can be triggered in a number of ways, and the memories may
lay dormant and hidden for any length of time. The
disadvantage of having memories is that they often bring fear,
body pain, and loss of sleep. They are like
nightmares--although technically memories are different than
nightmares in that they are more closely rooted to an actual
torture/trauma. The person experiencing these flashbacks
typically thinks they are going crazy. It is important for you to
realize that millions of people who have been tortured have also
thought they were going crazy, but that what was really
happening is that they were having just like you a normal
reaction to some very frightening events. To get flashbacks
means that the mind is again trying to overcome a bad
experience. Flashbacks are not a reason to panic---they are
normal---and if a person can remind him/herself to stay calm as
possible, one will get through them better. It may be difficult to
stay calm during a difficult memory. But staying calm is one of
the goals which can be worked toward and achieved. One
reason that flashback occur during sleep is that the mind’s
defenses are weaker during sleep so the resistance to the
memory coming is reduced. There are a number of positive
things that can be done in response to memory flashbacks.
Although the memory flashbacks on the surface appear to be
negative experiences--there also can be some positive benefits.
If the memories are correctly handled they can break down the
dissociation. The memories can be used to protect the person
from future danger. What I suggest as a plan of action is that
you accomplish several goals:
1. reduced and eliminate the feeling of passive helplessness that
comes from not being able to control memory. I will suggest
ways to control memory.
2. take measures during the memory to restore your contact
with present reality.
3. continue to breakdown dissociation.
There are a list of things a person can try when flashbacks
occur. Some will work and others won’t. One may try these in
the order listed:
a. Try to think of something that is opposite of what the
memory is about or something that is incompatible with the
event. If the event is centered around hate, think of an event
that is centered in love.
b. Next, one might try to think of the negative consequences of
going through the memory. This might encourage action to
sidestep it.
c. Try an activity that will distract the mind.
d. Find out what triggered the memory flashback and then try to
remove the flashback via the memory-on-a-movie-screen
method or the memory-locked-in-a-safe-box method.
e. If nothing else try pushing it back from the mind--see if
clenching your teeth and pushing your tongue hard against your
palate will help.
To gain control of the flashback when it occurs here are some
suggestions:
a. Learn and know of what situations cause certain flashbacks.
This will give you a greater sense of control and lessen the
panic that comes from certain flashbacks. Gaining control over
flashbacks can seem
like one step forward and one step back but eventually control
is gained--sometimes without the person realizing the progress
they have made.
b. When in a memory--first move a finger then bit by bit the
rest of the body. Then start controlling your breathing (this can
all be practiced anytime). Then get up and look out the window
to prove to yourself
that you are at home and not in the memory. Then write down
the memory. This will help in several ways including the
dissociation. If it gets difficult to write the memory--then
interrupt yourself with
Page 404 ...
quiet deep breathing. After writing down the memory--don’t
reread--but go get something to drink which will be calming
such as a cup of coffee. If the relaxation is practiced and can be
achieved in response to bad memories it will give you a sense
of control over the memories. c. The victim can talk with their
support person about what the trauma was and what it meant to
you at the time it happened. This will allow you to achieve an
assimilation of the experience into yourself. If you can discuss
the event in full and the personal meaning you have a greater
chance of conquering and controlling the flashback. It has been
reported that memories that are too difficult for people to talk
out because they have contradictory feelings, embarrassment
etc. regarding them, will repeat themselves and the mind will
often become obsessed with those difficult flashbacks. Talking
them out can be healing. Why deal with memory flashbacks?
One reason is that flashbacks intrude into the present and mean
that you are pulled away from enjoying the present reality into
reliving something in the past. Relief from flashbacks will help
you, the healing victim, to concentrate better, get more pleasure
out of being with others, and make life more enjoyable. Bear in
mind also, that everyone who has been tortured goes through
periods in time when they disconnect from others. This has
been called different names such as "emotional anesthesia" and
"psychic numbing" so don’t be hard on yourself if you
temporarily lose the ability to feel close to others. The torture
was aimed at breaking the victim’s personality. Accepting that
that was a goal of the perpetrators of the mind-control
programming is a step in restoring the identity that could have
been there. This leads to the next area of concern: the
dehumanization.
DEHUMANIZATION. Because devaluation of another person
makes it easier to torture them, devaluation normally occurs in
the minds of torturers. They dehumanized not only to control
you--but to build up their own image enough to partially justify
torturing you. They most likely were also devalued and
dehumanized in their own lives and passed on that devaluation.
Realizing the reasons why dehumanization was carried out may
help a person overcome the process. Another help is to set
yourself up in situations where you have positive experiences
using your talents and skills will help you overcome the
negatives of dehumanization.

Back to Contents Next

Page 405 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· goes into denial
· learns a. not to trust anyone incl. self, b. since trust is the basis of
communication they also learn not to be in touch with the world.

VISIBLE CLUES:
· emotional distance
· collecting spirit
· clingy behavior or independent behavior
· learning difficulties

INTERNAL CLUES:
· lack of emotions
· denial of abuse
Page 406 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· to guard itself it creates free floating fears
· to further guard itself withdraws from people or acts aggressive toward
others
· splits off a part to take the trauma
· tries to remedy by reaction in the other direction, i.e. becomes an obsessive
caretaker of others
· learns a. help & support do not exist, b. that there is no power against the
programmers.

VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:

· eating, sleeping and bedwetting disorders
· nightmares
· phobias
· withdrawal or aggressiveness from others
· obsessive caretaking

INTERNAL CLUES
· DID (MPD)
· Suicidal thoughts
Page 407 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· preserves a sense of the world—I must be bad. It was my fault.
· preserves self-respect—Since I didn’t resist, I am at fault.
· preserves good image of abuser—I can continue to love him, because I was
at fault.
· preserves happiness—What a thrill to be abused, I must have wanted this for
being so bad.
· learns to have a. a comfort zone of self-blame, b. to become a caretaker
which sets the victim up for more self-blame when things go wrong, c.
fantasize to stop the pain.
VISIBLE CLUES IN THE VICTIM:
· wants to punish one self
· sabotages self achievements & acts of love by others
· isolates

INTERNAL CLUES IN VICTIM:

· guilt, shame, & a "bad" self-image
Page 408 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· mind accepts the violations
· concludes that all touching is a sexual come-on
· learns a. confused & inappropriate behavior and values, b. perceives its
value from being a sexual object
VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:
· far too-early sexual development
· strong negative or positive feelings/reactions to sexual issues
· confusion about sexual norms

INTERNAL
· lots of sexual issues
Page 409

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

·decides not to tell about the trauma, becomes secretive
· believes it has a guilt to punish
· either it decides to quit risking failure by reaching for success OR over tries
to succeed but never feels successful.
VISIBLE CLUES:
· secretive
· self-destructive behavior

INTERNAL CLUES
· feelings of guilt, shame, self-hate, and isolation
Page 410 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· creates amnesia walls & splits the mind into dissociative parts
· the mind disowns the body
· learns to a. dissociate as a defensive habit & b. to copy others in cult as role
models.

VISIBLE CLUES:
· no sense of danger
· dissociative behavior
· phobias
· eye-rolls
· sleeping disorders
· inconsistent behaviors
· lost time
· denies acts that others have witnessed
· moody
· uses pronoun "we"

INTERNAL CLUES:
· helpless feelings
· no confidence
· DID (MPD)
· depersonalization
· emotions locked up
Page 411 ...

ABUSERS, confrontations or not

Several victims of mind-control have said that they felt the best pay-back that
they could give their abusers was to get well. This is probably right. There
wouldn’t be any punishment that would do justice to the crimes that have
been committed. We victims should try and fight evil with something
positive, something good. But what about confronting an abuser, and letting
the perpetrator’s system know the suffering they’ve caused, etc. Just because
the victim has worked through some issues, doesn’t mean the abuser has. The
abuser had to sear his mind years ago. What abusers do, is that first they sear
their consciences and then they develop justifications in their mind for what
they do. They are deeply entrapped in their own rationalizations. The
Network has prepared them excellent alibi’s to "prove" they could not have
done it. Talking to an abuser about your mind-control issues is like talking to
a cement wall. All it will do is get the therapist and the victim into more
problems. In some cases, the False Memory Syndrome has helped the abuser
and the therapist ends up getting taken out of commission. Keep the therapy
work private. Go toward health quietly. The world is not even ready to
understand the healing of the victim. And the abuser is even less ready to be
understanding. The abusers simply feel threatened. Some victims have a deep
drive to make their abusers understand. They are struggling with the effects
of the mind-control, and have not yet realized that the abusers are NOT their
friend, but another multiple who is also deeply trapped in what they are
doing.
Page 412 ...
ALTERS, how to work with deep Illuminati alters (issues for therapists)
Up to now, therapists have chosen therapeutic modalities that resulted in
avoiding dealing with the deep Illum. alters. One of the most acclaimed
centers for helping programmed multiples only works on issues that
presenting alters have, and uses electro-shock techniques to try to wipe out
deeper issues in the mind. Other prominent psychiatrists who have travelled
& trained other therapists how to deal with MPD/DID have incorrectly taught
that right brain-left brain issues are simply a program. Therapists have by &
large ignored Illuminati religious beliefs, which has insured that deeper alters
are not going to present themselves to be ridiculed. Others have attempted to
cast the deeper alters out, which in reality buries them deeper into the
subconscious, where they carry out their influence at an even harder-to-find
level. In fact, when this is being written in 1996, most therapists still remain
ignorant of or in denial that the Illuminati exists. Our system has
unsuccessfully looked far & wide for a professional who understands the
deeper Illuminati alters. We believe this material will make a fresh and
valuable contribution in the work needed to free Illuminati slaves. Therapists
are in a difficult position to work on Ipsissimus/Grand Master alters or Grand
Dame or Mother-of-darkness levels, because, before they can learn how to
work with deeper parts, they must forget many things they have been
incorrectly taught. Therapists need to see the interrelationships between
Illuminati cosmology & beliefs and the programming that is carried out.
Witchcraft rituals of the Illuminati are a form of deep level programming.
This is why it is ludicrous
for Wiccan counselling centers to help mind-controlled slaves, & yet there
are a number of licensed wiccan centers counseling’’ multiples with
programming. The very teachings of witchcraft are intertwined with the
programming that needs to be disassembled. Several elements that are
common to all forms of witchcraft are: a. the stimulation of an awareness of a
hidden side of "reality", b. the awakening and training of hidden powers of
the mind, c. the intense training and discipline of the various levels of the
subconscious mind. For instance, psychic abilities and astral projection are
basic components to witchcraft. Witchcraft at the higher Illuminati levels is
the skill to work in the subconscious mind & change consciousness at will.
Witchcraft, especially the cabalistic and hermetic-based witchcraft of the
Illuminati, understood how to work with the subconscious mind long before
modern psychology existed. Modern psychology is actually based upon
cabalistic doctrines. There is a one-to-one correspondence between Freud’s
theories and Jung’s theories and the older witchcraft philosophies. The child,
adult, parent of transactional analysis is simply the maiden, mother, crone
triple goddess of the Illuminati. And these three parts of the mind have been
well understood and manipulated in rituals for centuries. 2 important steps to
take in order to help deeper parts are: a. realize that the deeper parts are
centered in a trance state in their internal world, and are developed not to
function in the conscious world, but are highly skilled to function in the
subconscious mind, b. dream state therapy should be developed to help the
deeper parts unravel their programming.
Page 413 ...

CLONES
When the core is split, the dissociated parts that split when the child was in a
rage are used to make clones. These little child parts are very small, and have
not had a chance to grow up. The creation of clones is described in Vol 2.
After they are discovered by the programmer he uses hypnotic magic to drop
a robot suit over the child alter. The suits are made of different types of metal
and there are a number of different types of suits. Often the children turned
robots are given serial no.s. They may perceive themselves as military units.
Clone splits are formed into armies that come to the front of the mind to
protect the programming. They are like a nursery of screaming children. It is
impossible for the front host alters to calm these clones down. What has been
found to work on the clones from the 40’s through the 60’s programming is
to put water on them. Water paralyzes them. Then one can go around to the
back and find wires or switches on their suits. A switch may shut them off.
Or perhaps the wires can be tampered with. When these little children are
looked at, these parts still have probes and needles in them. These child alters
need to go to an internal hospital, where they can mentally go through some
care to get them relieved from the state they perceive themselves in. After
they are out of their suits, the robot suits can be vaporized.

JUDGE ALTERS
Judge alters are alters who enforce the laws of the system, which of course
are the guidelines & programming established by the programmer. In
witchcraft paradoxes are used. Each split of the mind is valued. The alters,
such as the judges, are mirroring their abuse. Fear is the basis of their
obedience. They have seen the worst terrors. They have seen things others
haven’t seen. They are structured along the lines of demonology, and they
believe that they must answer to Lucifer. They have no doubt that they are
going to hell. They believe the better they obey, the better life they will have
in hell. Their obedience in keeping the rest of the system in line with the
programming is their desire for a better life in hell, which they already have a
foretaste of. Much of their programming was put in during the sensory
deprivation, so they don’t fully comprehend why they do what they do, they
just believe that what they are doing is for their survival. Many of the deeper
alters are functioning with a survival of the fittest attitude, where only the
strong and obedient survive. They have been given the Spirit of War & they
war for the system. They carry the full force of demonic possession. The
starting point for many of these deeper alters is to realize they were
programmed to their script. MIRROR IMAGES.The script for the mirror
images came from God floating over the water in the Bible’s Genesis.
Mirrors of an alter are simply fragments of some alter. They are taught they
are separate, but the separation is an illusion. There are several programming
tricks they do with the child such as "This is your hand" trick, to confuse the
child’s mind about the mirror image. The splits are done in front of mirrors.
"ITS THE MIRROR IMAGE ThAT IS GETTING HURT, AND HAS
BLOOD ALL OVER IT, NOT YOU." After the child accepts the mirror
image as real, they put it into hiding with hypnotic suggestions, & they tell
the child the mirror image split doesn’t exist. The mirror image will take the
programming traumas & the anger.
Page 414 ...

HOW TO WORK WITH DEEPER ILLUMINATI PARTS (deeper

issues for therapists)
The following are things for therapists:
STUDY:
· a. how liluminati beliefs intertwine with programming
· b. how the external Illuminati is structured
· c. how to do dream therapy and to be sensitive to dreams

BE AWARE OF:
· a. the Illuminati reinstates (reprograms) sealing programs over the dream
state approx. every 3 years to stop revealing dreams from surfacing.
· b. how Helping Alter can work deep in the subconscious to pull memories
and to interact in a positive way with deeper parts
· c. how programming hits at a subconcscious level. It may seem benign to
the conscious mind, and yet be building up subconscious momentum and
growing power.
· d. how complex it is for deeper alters to separate objective & subjective
realities.

TREAT WITH RESPECT

· a. the training in programming that the deeper hierarchy alters have
· b. that the deeper alters will respond in a manner that reflects their position,
staus and training.
Page 415 ...

BACKACHES, suggestions for body aches

Body aches, especially backaches, can keep the mind so preoccupied with
pain that the rest of the mind doesn’t work on other issues. The body, mind,
and spirit all need healing. When building an alter system, the Illuminati
programmers build in protective programming by using spinal surgical
techniques. This kind of programming is usually done in a hospital. It is done
by specialists who know the spine and the nerves. There are several
variations of what is done. They will attach this spinal pain to a hypnotic
trigger that if you remember such and such, you will relive the intense spinal
pain. The variations on this, are to paralyze someone from the waist down, or
a leg, or an arm. Using surgical drugs and procedures, they can even make a
person "blind" by hitting certain nerves and this can be used to create blind
alters, or blinding programs. Simple electroshock to parts of the back can be
painful. The Illuminati also lay in the spirit Leviathan which lays on the
spinal column and causes intense pain if the victim goes toward health. A
number of Illuminati victims have gotten relief from intense back pain by
deliverance from Leviathan. What this means is that a support team that is
working on issues may want to have a good chiropractor on the team, and
maybe a masseuse. Working the muscles of the body will free up trauma
pains, and alters that get locked up throughout the entire body. Needles that
are still mentally in the body are also locked up in body pain too. If a victim
hits programming that flips them into pain, the alters will of course be
preoccupied with the pain in the body and they will lose sight of the memory.
Go directly to the pain and work on the pain issues, because the memory is
sheltered in the pain.

Back to Contents Next

Page 416 ...
The following inventory can be worked on by a victim of
mind-control as home work or the therapist can use the
questions as a means to build rapport and understand the client
better. In order to save printing costs this section will not
provide room to write the answers down. Sheets of paper or a
tape recorder are needed to record answers. Questions are
numbered for easy reference. This inventory is for the
therapeutic process--which means ultimately it is for the victim.
The questions are meant to be a guide, feel free to speak about
anything that pertains to each biographical time period. If
something important happened that you want to report, you
don’t need a question to talk or write about it.
EVERY ONE HAS ROOTS. The following questions are about the
client’s roots. Roots are important, we need to know where
we’ve come from to know where we’re headed. Understanding
the client’s family may reveal a great deal about the client.
Learning one’s roots can reveal important clues as to why
things occurred in your life.
· 1. Tell the story about how your parents met and fell in love?
· 2. Tell a story that would show what your mother was like.
· 3. What can you say about your mother, do you know where
she came from, where she was born and what her life was like
before she met your
father?
· 4. What are some of your mother’s emotional traits, was she
warm and loving, or strict, or nagging, or unstable, or
humorous, how was she?
· 5. What was the best thing about your father?
· 6. What was the worst thing about your father?
· 7. What do you know about your father’s bloodlines, his
genealogy?
· 8. What do you know about your mother’s bloodlines, her
genealogy?
· 9. Was there anything unusual about your mother or father?
· 10. Did your mother ever give any sex education to you, what
was her attitude towards the subject in your view?
· 11. What was your father’s work?
· 12. What kind of bedtime stories did your father tell you?
· 13. Is there something important to say about your
grandparents or greatgrandparents?
· 14. In what ways were your uncles and aunts important to
you?
CHILDHOOD (pre-school) This section will be one of the most
critical. Don’t be embarrassed if you don’t remember, just be
open & frank, because this inventory is for you. The therapist
needs to watch for protectors to surface with the "approved
solutions", & watch the different slants that are given by the
client at different times to the same subjects.
· 15. What is your earliest memory? How old were you? Where
did you live?
· 16. What do you know about your birth, were you pre-mature,
were you c-section, were you tiny or frail?
· 17. Did you have older siblings who helped raise you?
· 18. What was the neighborhood like that you grew up in
before kindergarten?
· 19. Did you ever get into trouble when you were between 3
and 5 years old?
Page 417 ...

· 20. Were you ever sent to your room, or made to stand in a

corner in your first few years?
· 21. How did your parents punish you?
· 22. Who disciplined you the most?
· 23. What kind of religious experiences did you have as a small
child?
· 24. Who was more religious, your father or your mother?
· 25. Who was your first grade teacher?
· 26. What was your first grade teacher like?
· 27. Can you describe your first day at school?
· 28. How would other people have described you when you
were a small child?
· 29. What kind of chores did you have as a child?
· 30. What kind of games did you play as a small child?
· 31. Do you think you had a happy childhood?
· 32. What are some of your favorite childhood memories?
· 33. What is your worst childhood memory?
· 34. How did you feel about going to doctors when you were
little?
· 35. What did you want to be when you grew up?
· 36. Do you remember putting your teeth under the pillow for
the tooth fairy?
· 37. Do you remember Christmas or some other holidays?
· 38. Did you know any crazy people when you were little?
· 39. What did you think about people who were a different race
when you were little?
· 40. What did you think about Halloween when you were
little?
· 41. Did you ever get sick when you were a little child?
· 42. Did your family go on any vacations, could you describe
one?
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL DAYS. If the client is talkative, let
them provide as much as they want. When dealing with victims
of mind-control everything about their life tends to be a clue as
to what has gone on. The therapist can trust their own curiosity
and ask further questions. For some victims, their host alter will
not have memories below the age of 18, or their memories will
be spotty. However, the newer mind-control victims are getting
better childhood cover memories laid in so that their
mind-control is not so obvious.
· 43. Do you remember the first book you read?
· 44. What kind of things did your parents like to read?
· 45. What kind of toys did you have in elementary school?
· 46. What were some of your favorite games during your
elementary school days?
· 47. Did you learn to play any musical instruments?
· 48. What were some of your favorite songs during that time
period?
· 49. Did your family move a lot, and how did that affect you?
· 50. What was the worst experience that you can remember
from your school days?
· 51. What was the best experience that you can remember from
your school days?
· 52. Did someone in your class of the opposite sex have a crush
on you?
· 53. Can you remember what was the most memorable gift that
you gave as a child?
· 54. Can you remember what your favorite gift that you
received was?
· 55. Did your family take vacations during your school years?
· 56. Did you have any strange people in your school or in your
neighborhood, and how did you feel about them?
Page 418 ...

· 57. What kind of pets did you have growing up? What
happened to them?
· 58. Do you remember your tenth and eleventh birthdays?
· 59. List the names of your elementary school teachers.
· 60. Describe your elementary school building on the inside &
outside.
· 60. What was the name(s) of the Junior High that you went to?
· 61. What was the most influential teacher that you had during
your school days?
· 62. Did you hang around with any kids, and if so, what were
they like?
· 62. What kind of neighbors did you have?
· 63. What kind of trouble did you get into?
HIGH SCHOOL & TEENAGE YEARS. The high school years
are years when the child is meeting interesting members of the
opposite sex, preparing for their future, and working at their
first jobs. It’s a time for new beginning as well as turmoils. It is
also a time when the victim will be in many secret rituals, and
will be used for many mind-control assignments. There are no
right or wrong answers, if the client thinks of something else,
besides what initially comes to mind, then it is quite alright to
have several "most" events in answer to a "what is the most...?"
type of question.
· 64. What was the craziest thing you ever did in high school?
Why did you do it, and what happened?
· 65. Who was your favorite person during your high school
days?
· 66. Who were your best friends during high school?
· 67. What is the funniest thing that happened to you as a
teenager?
· 68. What did you expect to do when you graduated from high
school?
· 69. Did you go to your high school prom?
· 70. Do you remember any of the nicknames you had for your
teachers?
· 71. What was your favorite subject in school?
· 72. In your opinion, which did you like more in high school,
sports or intellectual pursuits?
· 73. Could you describe what the high school building looked
like?
· 74. Were you active in a church during your high school days?
· 75. Did you do any great activities with other teenagers in
some religious club or sunday school group?
· 76. Were you a leader of any activity during your high school
days?
· 77. What was it like going to the movies as a teenager in your
area?
· 78. Who were your heros during your teenage years?
· 79. Who were the heroes of your peers when you were a
teenager?
· 80. Did anybody ever accuse you of being dishonest as a
teenager?
· 81. Did you try to pattern your life after anyone, if so who? do
you still admire the qualities you saw in that person?
· 82. What kind of conflicts did you have with your parents?
· 83. What kind of conflicts did you have with your teachers?
· 84. What kind of conflicts did you have with your peers?
· 85. What was your attitude toward drugs and smoking during
your teenage years?
· 86. Was there ever a point in time where you went against
your parents wishes? tell the story about how you managed to
get your way.
Page 419 ...

ADULT LIFE. It almost goes without saying that the therapist is

trying to build rapport with these questions not to interrogate,
not to judge, but simply to listen and learn. Find out what was
the most important thing(s) in the person’s life. Find out what
the client remembers that was interesting.
· 87. What kind of things were you involved in after high
school?
· 88. Where did you go to college or trade school?
· 89. What was it like to leave home, to go to higher education
or to be on your own?
· 90. Did you join any fraternity or sorority?
· 91. What was your major field of study after you left high
school?
· 92. Did you have any part-time jobs, after you got out of high
school?
· 93. Who were your best friends during the first few years after
high school?
· 94. When was the first time you met your spouse? Describe
the meeting.
· 95. Where did you live after you first got married?
· 96. How much did it cost for different items when you first
got married, for instance, a packet of bacon, a gallon of gas, a
dozen eggs, a
hamburger?
· 97. What did the future look like when you graduated from
high school?
· 98. What did the future look like when you graduated from
college, or a trade school?
· 99. Do you think attitudes about sex have changed for the
better or worse over the years? Why do you think attitudes are
changing?
· 100. What did your family think about your first spouse?
What were their reactions?
· 101. Did you have any common interests with your first
spouse, & if so, what?
· 102. Who would you have liked to have married that you
didn’t?
· 103. How would you describe yourself in your twenties?
· 104. From where you are today, when did you decide upon
your career? When did you first entertain thoughts of this
career? Were the seeds of
where your life has ended up present in your early life?
· 105. What do you consider your most important achievement
so far in your life?
· 106. How do you feel about God, and could you please
describe your image of what kind of person God is?
· 107. Did you have military service, and what was that like?
· 108. Are you a flashy dresser, conservative, sloppy,
well-groomed dresser?
· 109. How important is it to dress well?
· 110. What kind of pets did you have in adult life?
· 111. Do you think much about death? Do you fear death?
· 112. What do you think happens to people when they die?
· 113. Did you ever have an ESP experience?
· 114. Did you ever have a ghost experience?
· 115. What do you think about magic?
· 116. What kind of foods do you like? What kinds of foods do
you detest and why?
· 117. What did you think about Watergate?
· 118. Where was the edge of the city when you graduated from
high school, has the city grown since then?
· 119. Is there something that we have failed to talk about that
you feel is important?
There are reasons why each of the questions was selected and
why it was placed in the order that it appears. Those reasons are
based upon
experience with mind-control victims. To prepare this list of
questions we looked at several books that were designed to
inventory a person’s
life. We were greatly assisted by William Fletcher’s book
Recording Your Family History. Berkeley, CA: Ten Speed
Press, 1989. The book
is an organized guide to asking family history questions. This
or other sourees might provide more ideas on reconstructing the
client’s bio.
Back to Contents Next
Page 420 ...
We will let our support person Fritz write about how a support
person can deal with burn out: Allow me to start by saying, if
you’re feeling stressed at this moment, take a deep breath, close
your eyes for a moment and then exhale and relax. Burnout hits
people who have nothing more to give. When you have been
stressed to the max, the rewards are not there, and you have all
these nagging agitating issues. Even a well-working piece of
equipment will eventually rust--so don’t be too hard on
yourself. Working with programmed multiples & implant
victims will give a person long periods of distress, pressures
from all angles, & a nauseating feeling that you are stuck and
not going anywhere. I have always found that it’s healthier
mentally & physically for me to be actively doing something,
no matter how small against the mind-control, rather than being
passive in difficult times. In fact, military units often find that
their men handle stress better being on the attack than sitting
around in a defensive mode waiting for the bombs to drop. I
manage to keep a healthy positive outlook by continuing to take
steps, even tiny ones. Attack the problem? You may feel like an
ant against an elephant trying to bite off more than you can
chew. There are indeed limits to what a single person trying to
fly solo against the mind-control can achieve. Try to find some
support from a few intelligent listening people. One therapist
cries her heart out to God. Tears are not a bad idea. Did you
know that tears contain stress hormones, so that crying actually
empties the body of stress hormones. (Now wouldn’t we like to
see our clients do more crying?) If it doesn’t seem like anyone,
the client, friends, or God is listening to your difficulties,
unfortunately your body quietly is. Emotions are the bridge
between the body and the mind. Interaction between the two
need emotions. Remember the reptilian brain controls the body,
and is connected to emotions. The higher minds control
thoughts, and they too are connected to emotions. Your body
will respond to stress, with symptoms like higher blood
pressure. Mine doubled in one year. Obviously, there is a price
to pay for such challenging work. So where does this leave
you? If you can connect with the tragedy of what is happening
to your client, then therapy will take on a purpose. The price
you pay will be worth every drop of sweat, or every diastolic &
systolic number on your blood pressure. You may have to learn
how to blow some things off. Multiples will say a lot of things.
Everyone has buttons. Don’t be hard on yourself that you have
buttons. My favorite ones are:
· Nobody listens.
· You can’t count on anyone.
· It’s never good enough.
· Don’t tell me what to do or think.
· Is anybody thinking?
Can you identify with any of these, what is on your list of
buttons? Some of us are like ballistic missiles. When our
buttons are pushed off we go. Realizing that we have buttons,
and how the firing mechanisms got put in during our lifetime,
can be helpful to diffuse these. A person only has so much
energy and when they are constantly going ballistic they burn
up a lot of energy quick. And if you stuff it under the emotional
rug--you will still bum out, because your body is connected to
the rest of you, and all those unused stress chemicals are still
there. In fact, support team members should look at symptoms
like pain in the gut, headaches, pain in the neck and realize
some of these are simply the stress of all that is being dealt
with. Do you have unresolved emotional or physical pain, that
are visible as buttons and pain?
Perhaps you are wearing down because you have self-doubts,
and negative expectations. Who wants to be like the greek
mythological
Page 421 ...
Sisyphus who pushed a boulder up the hill, only to have it roll
down again and again? Don’t devalue your little forward steps.
Keep taking those steps forward, and recognize your
accomplishments. Perhaps you need to write out what has been
accomplished for you the support person and the client. I
discovered that progress reports have been very-encouraging
and well received. Often when I thought that success was
self-evident the system was not able to see any until they read
the progress report. Each of us are unique, and I am in no
position to tell you what will or won’t encourage you or your
client. However, some people have been helped by writing out
all their self-doubts and then dumping them into a trash can.
Let’s face it, bad news is often not as bad as it seems; and good
news is often not as good as it seems. Throw your doubts away,
but do try and get some support. Even if you are creative and
capable, when you begin to get exhausted you will begin to lose
that creative edge to meet the latest challenge. Does the
problem still seem too big to fix? Trying to figure out how to
deal with all kinds of alters as well as people in the external
world is a big chore, and the work keeps accumulating of things
that need to be worked on with your client. I don’t have all the
answers, but part of the answer lies in remaining flexible,
learning how to negotiate and communicate clearly with alters,
and part of it lies in just accepting that some things come with
the territory. The trust issues with programmed multiples are
difficult and persistent. They will wear a person down, in the
same fashion that having a boss looking over your shoulder the
entire time gets old. Blow it off. It comes with the territory.
And again, I can’t repeat this enough we need to work in teams.
I have been greatly revitalized by working with others.
If you think you’ve got problems, put yourself in the victim’s
shoes! With several victims who have just begun, their alters
asked how long it would be until they were well, & I’ve told
them, ‘Your beginning a long journey, like walking from New
York to California. If we have to walk the entire distance, it’s
going to be a long journey. If we can do some flying it will go
quicker." I was trying to balance the enormous amount of work
that needs to be done, with the actual truth that some of the
better methods can get a great deal done in short intense
periods. I want the victims of mind-control to see the hope. In
order for victims of mind-control to obtain better results, and to
minimize burnout among therapists/support persons, I suggest
that we carry out an ongoing process to weed out self-defeating
habits and behaviors, we continue to learn new techniques for
helping mind-control victims, and that we continue to give
ourselves a chance to grow, and learn too. After all therapists
have needs too. I think the lack of recognition by people that
therapists are people contributes to "therapeutic chronic
fatigue". While the client is wanting to discover their feelings,
the client is expecting the therapist to bury the therapist’s own
feelings. I think that it is healthiest for the support persons to
actually touch base emotionally with everything that is
happening to both the client and the therapist. In the long run, I
believe that burn-out will happen lots slower if the support
persons are emotionally invested in the work, rather than
simply being a paid automaton. Therapists will have less stress,
when they have someone that can mentor them. Victims are
tough, they are survivors of a lot of abuse, & they often survive
incompetent therapists. What may seem like a tragedy for your
multiple may not derail the therapy as much as the novice
might expect. I not suggesting an uncaring attitude, I’m just
saying that experience brings some calmness. Perhaps you’re
not in position to put the time & energy into the client that your
client wants. Sometimes we don’t have perfect answers. If you
are giving it your best shot, who can complain? Be kind to
yourself.
Page 422 ...
If all alters had the same thoughts and were in agreement, this
book would not be needed. The essence of why trauma-based
mind-control is so successful is that their are substantial
differences between the various alters. Those differences allow
the Illuminati to create good front alters as covers. Those
differences allow the Illuminati to maintain control and prevent
the system from finding their freedom. Incompatibilities and
conflicts between alters is a given from the get-go with a DID
client. The support team may hear of light and dark sides to a
system. Internal persecutor alters are a given. Alters that
self-mutilate the body have been programmed to do it.
Psychologists have been baffled at the hate that some alters
have for other alters or for those other alter’s body--which they
don’t perceive as their own body. The longer the programming
goes on the more established the self-persecuting alters
become. When dealing with such alters, the support team must
not be judgmental. These are simply hurting child alters doing
what they have been programmed to do. They are simply trying
to do their job right. Without reinforcing these alters dangerous
behaviors, it is possible to give them some attention and
friendship. They are not used to holding the body and will tire
of holding it after a few minutes. Having them out regularly
may diffuse some of their rage. The therapist should not scare
them by threatening to get rid of them, or kill them, although
occasionally they need to be restrained by a support person, for
instance if they are trying to mutilate the victim with a knife.
These persecutor alters can have their identity validated, they
were just trying to help the system by doing the job that was
expected by the programmers. The persecutor alters may often
be the ones that took the pain for the "a" alters that function so
well in life. When the host alter acknowledges the existence of
the persecutor alter, and the persecutor alter’s pain & needs, it
helps remove some of the animosity in their relationship. Alters
can write each other letters. Because most systems are creative,
they can use their creativity to think of some way to resolve the
conflict, if they try. However, the answer that may occur to
some readers, to internally lock up persecutor alters is not a
good idea. Someone in the alter system must be the light on the
hill, that moves toward freedom. Generally that will be the
front host alter that came originally came into therapy. It may
not be. Sometimes the original "person" who came in for
therapy, dissolves into a mass of different personalities, and the
therapist has trouble knowing who now is the client. The
answer is the entire system is, they just don’t know it. And who
speaks for the system? For instance, one alter says for the
therapist to quit working with the system and another says they
want the therapist to work, but only the non-cooperative alters
show up for the sessions? All of our old ways of looking at
people are obsolete, and the support team will encounter
difficulties that boggle their mind. One way to overcome some
of this is to treat a system as a city. How did God treat the
church of a city? How does one relate to a city of people? How
does one get cooperation in a city. Within an alter system, the
change for health has to come family by family. One family of
alters after another family must make the choice "I want to
change direction. I don’t want to be like my abuser. I don’t
want to conform to the programming." Many alters will not
really know what is going on, they will only have a sense of it.
They will sense, "Something is wrong here." That may be
enough for them to make a decision for a change of direction.
Persecutor alters can learn not to act out. Alters can be given
another script. Each alter can be shown that the system has
gratitude for the part they played in the system’s survival.
Things that are helpful for alters are good reading, good
friends, support groups, and
Page 423 ...
learning from each other internally. Some alters can clearly see
the good from the bad, some have very limited understanding.
The system can begin taking their power back. The alters can
work as a team, and become co-conscious. Responsible alters
can be given the care of other alters who need attention. It’s
somewhat like how a teacher may delegate some children to be
leaders so that they can help the troubled children. Internal peer
pressure can work for good too. And alters can pray for each
other too. Light side alters can form prayer circles or prayer
chains. Even non-multiples have ego-states that can present
problems, such as the part of you that wants to eat too many
sweets. How is this overcome? By mental discipline. It will
take some mental discipline for the victim to grow. Alters need
to change their thinking from "I can’t to I can." Get rid of
"I can’t." Getting rid of fear is a big step in overcoming
alter conflicts. This is just one more reason why safety for the
system is so important.
Most competition for having the body by alters occurs during
the following times:
a. when cult programming goes off, and part of the system is
trying to go to a ritual or a drug run, and the light side alters are
holding the body.
b. when something exciting or fun is happening and everyone
wants a piece of the action.
c. when alters are in conflict over goals or in conflict about
what the system is doing in therapy.
Originally, the alter switches were subconscious and carried out
mainly by the handlers. After getting to know one’s internal
system better, the alters can begin to control their own
switching. The alters need to build harmony. If they change the
internal job description, or give an alter an external job, then
that alter needs to be allowed to have that role. The alter can be
asked internally, "What would you like to do?" and then give
that alter a chance to develop that. Give everyone an important
role. After a while of working together, the alters begin to get
co-conscious. After alters are co-conscious, the conflicts will
cease between them.

Back to Contents Next

Page 424 ...

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
CORE ISSUES
The core issues are issues that concern the basic survival of
the mind. Therapists have blamed victims for not
cooperating in integrating the core, when a fuller
understanding of the dynamics of programming shows that
the victim is only attempting to protect himself. In 1960,
J.D. Sutherland at the second Tavistock seminar on
mother-infant interaction in London presented his work
which was entitled "The concepts of imprinting and critical
period from a psycho-analytic viewpoint." This was
reprinted in a book Determinants of Infant Behavior II.
Sutherland discovered that traumatic frustration
experiences in a child’s early development set up
subsystems in a person, which continue to seek expression,
and are relatively little influenced by subsequent
experiences. The formation of social relationships by an
infant relates to the concept of imprinting. Researchers
have not sorted out all the complex processes, but
imprinting researchers feel confident that imprinting in
humans has some parallels to precocial birds. They found
that newborn babies less than a day old will follow a real
face much more than a mannequin. This proved for
instance that babies are programmed prior to birth to
respond to human faces. There are obviously some built-in
mechanisms to human thinking. The human brain is
actually 7 brains. The lower three brains are: one, the
medulla; two, the pons; and three, the cerebellum. On top
of the pons, is the fourth brain, the mid-brain. The
mid-brain is the central brain linking the 3 higher and the 3
lower brains. It relays messages back and forth. It regulates
the life force, and serves as a regulator to states of
consciousness. Secretions in the fourth brain create the
emotional construct of "me’. If traumatized, such as during
the splitting-the-core trauma, the mid-brain does not
secrete the peptides or endorphines which relate to the
self-sense that is attached to a sensory experience. In other
words, when the core is split, the mid-brain ceases to secrete
the peptides that emotionally connect its potential sense of
self to the sensations of the body. The mid-brain is also the
area that is imprinted with roles. Each one of the 7 brains
that make up the entire structure called the human brain is
capable of having feelings. This is one reason why we can
have "mixed feelings" about one item. What seems to occur
during the splitting of the core (referred to as the Primal
Dissociate Experience PDE), is that the mind decides that
survival is dependent upon not identifying with what is
happening. In a sense it decides that death to the self is a
type of survival. The mind creates dissociated "ego states"
(what Sutherland called "subsystems") to deal with these
difficult situations that it refuses to accept into its memory
as happening to itself. Deep level ISH (internal
self-helpers--perhaps Guardian angels) have been
successfully used to reintegrate the PDE held in that special
part of the mind back into the mind.

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
 powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 425 ...
When the brain’s senses try to record the PDE, the mind
disconnects itself from the experience. Body memories remain
of the experience, and dissociated memory fragments. The
mind disassembles its concept of self. It decouples itself from
existence and goes into hiding. The rest of the victim’s life will
be spent by the "core" retreating deeper into hiding. When the
mind, decouples itself from the body and takes itself into
hiding, it permits dissociated pieces of the mind to pick up the
abuse. One of the positive pieces of the original splitting
experience will be used to create a host(s) personality. This is
the person that will front the system. (Shortly an entire
explanation of all this will follow.) The retreating "remnant of
life", after it has let the self die and the mind be splintered is
really only that part of the mid-brain which regulates the
life-force and the soul. There is no alter that is the real core.
ANY alter that claims to be the core, is a false front developed
by the programmers. The real core is an essence--the soul, the
deep part of the mind that remains alive when the central
controls of the fourth brain completely decouples itself from
identifying with life. In reality, the area of the brain that is
normally imprinted by the events of life and grows up with a
concept of self has decided to separate itself from external
reality and goes into hiding. A variation of this is autism. In this
case, the complete mind retreats from reality, rather than the
soul. Many therapists ignorantly set their primary goal with
DID programmed multiples to be the integration of the core.
They are ignoring the fundamental issue for the victim’s mind.
The fundamental issue is that the core’s survival demanded
separation from external reality, and the creation of separate
dissociative states to contain the traumas being heaped upon the
victim. The driving motivation at the deepest level of the mind
is to preserve the safety of this elusive core. Traditional
therapies have worked against helping victims, because these
therapies attempt to expose the core to reality, which
aggravates and strengthens deep resistance by the victim to
therapy, because the decoupling from reality is the imprinted
survival mechanism of the mind. The Illuminati try to insure
that the core never wants to rejoin the world by:
a. programming many alters to believe that they will go
psychotic or kill themselves if the core is touched,
b. that trauma keeps the core distant, therefore, the greater the
victim’s ongoing abusive relationship with the cult, then the
greater the "safety" of the core.
c. internal worlds are created with walls protected by demons
and suicide programs to prevent alters from reintegrating or
connecting with anything else such as the core.
d. internal conflicts are set up to keep the alters fighting and
disconnected from each other. Alters which fear the abusers
must somehow resolve their fear with alters who identify with
and mimic their abusers. The mess that is created, sets up an
environment that places the core in an impossible situation. If
the sense-of-self were ever to return to rejoin reality, how
would it ever resolve all these conflicts or live with such a mess
in reality? The sense-of-self may subconsciously give its
energy to part of the mind, but it is not doing so in a conscious
manner, because it has detached itself from identifying with
what is going on.

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 426 ...
The Illuminati perceive the core as that soul, that breathe of life
that God breathed into Adam, to make him a living soul. This is
not entirely off-base. The energy of an alter system comes from
that 4th brain which is also that area of the brain that is
involved with one’s sense of self. The programmers perceive
that the core’s existence only remains in its ability to create
parts of the mind to maintain its life. The core is like a
soul--perhaps it is the soul of a person, and it creates alters to
maintain its own integrity and safety. The Illuminati carry out a
final ritual when a hierarchy person is ritually murdered where
the successor sucks the dying person’s last breath out in order
to capture the soul. Whatever the exact substance and nature of
the core, whatever the detailed mechanics within the brain were
when it dissociated itself from reality, the core still remains a
very touchy issue for therapists. Therapists should approach
alters that are core splits with great gentleness, honesty, love
and kindness. Back door techniques should be used for talking
through to a system of alters without attempts to go directly
toward the "core". Attempts to go directly toward the core will
most likely be frustrated and stopped by the victim’s alter
system, but the energy that is wasted in such a move is not
healthy. If a child victim were never to suffer trauma after the
initial core split, the programmers discovered that at some point
years down the line, the core will want to reconnect to reality.
Now that we have explored some of the basics concerning the
core, it is time to discuss the deeper realities of what happens to
the core during programming. This information has never seen
the light of day. We are able to provide it, because sad-to-say,
our system had a level of programming alters who programmed
and helped with the tests that showed what we are about to
reveal. Until recently, the world (with the exception of the
programmers) was too iguorant to be able to understand what
we will reveal. We trust that there are a small group of
therapists that are now ready to utilize the deeper secrets of
what happens to the core. Remember, that the Vol. 2 book
discussed the PDE, the Splitting of the Core trauma. This is
actually a long series of traumas, that culminates in the mind
deciding to split itself with dissociative barriers. This original
PDE trauma provides some parts of the mind that love their
master and some parts that fear (fear as in raw terror) the
master. These two themes--LOVE & FEAR-- are skillfully used
by the programmers to build a protective shield around the core
for the front part (host part) of the system. The front part is
built from the first PDE and then it is left in relative "peace" so
that it has enough stability to function in the real world. That
doesn’t mean the front has a life of ease, it just isn’t subjected
to what the deeper parts have to endure.
The deeper parts will be derived from the second major
programming trauma of the system. But before we get into that,
let’s briefly touch on the LOVE/FEAR issues that protect the
core. The love that the core has for its primary caretaker (refer
back to Vol. 2, chptr. one, where it describes the excellent
caretaking

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 427 ...
& love bonding) is powerful and pertains to parent-young
imprinting learning. There is a susceptible period that is built in
during those first two years, where the psychic organizer
emerges. (Refer to Hess, Eckard H. Imprinting Early
Experience & the Developmental Psychobiology of Attachment,
p. 340.) It has been clearly demonstrated by scientific research
that the baby has an innate drive for love from a mother figure.
This love is a primary need of the infant--without this love,
some babies give up and die. This is not surprising, many
people can realize this without the specific scientific proof.
That primal need for love is exploited by the programmers. The
parts of the mind holding this powerful primal love will split
from the parts holding the raw terror of the PDE. When one
tries to approach getting to the core from the host level, the
alters holding the love of the master will protect the core. What
has been discovered then is that the fear then protects that love.
There are lots of silhouetted parts brought into this love-fear
relationship of alters. This love-fear relationship has defeated
the best therapists, because until the therapist can unravel such
situation and these issues the mind will not let them get to the
real core. Because the basis for the original splitting was RAW
TERROR on the part of the core, it goes into hiding. It is very
difficult for the core to be accessed, because he/she will only
appear if he/or she has absolute and great trust in who is calling
it up. As far as we know, there has never been a genuine core
accessed by anyone outside of the Illuminati/& other
programming cults. The Illuminati must have a very caring
Mother-of-Darkness establish a trust relationship with the core
BEFORE the PDE. This tender loving Mother-of-Darkness
then can be used to pull up the core for work. Because our
system (your author Cisco) was noted for its tenderness, we
often received the job of being the "Mother" for systems which
were being programmed. That is why we can pass on so much
of the real secrets of what the core is all about. Hypnotic access
codes are given to the core, which work only if used by that
individual which the core greatly trusts. Working with the core
splits which have the love/fear dichotomy does not establish
rapport with the core. The real core has retreated far into the
mind--under the basement of the mind, and lays under the hell
pit that is built by the Illuminati at the basement of the mind.
(What this means is that some of what was written in Vol. 2
about the carousel was cover programming. Splits from the
core are strategically placed in the system to make those who
work very hard think they have gotten to the core. This is not
just for the protection of the programming, but this safety
feature also protects the very life of the programmed multiple.
It is not a safe thing for a programmed multiple’s core to be
played with.) When a tender mother pulls a core up, what will
she find? The core comes up in its fear. Centuries of Illuminati
programming experience have clearly demonstrated that the
core is the only part of the mind that has a true awareness of
itself, such as its age, and a reality of its own. However,
because the core stays in the basement of mind, it does not
experience life. When it is pulled up, it will look around, notice
that it has aged, wonder where the years have gone, but it
doesn’t go into denial or into psychotic fantasy or some other
defense.
 WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 428 ...
It will simply accept reality, and reject all the fantasy. The core
will NOT remember its memories of abuse. It may have some
issues regarding some things, but its thinking is healthy and
true to itself. Again the core is the only part that is true to her or
his self. The programmers do use the core for some types of
programming, but not in the sense that they use alters. The host
(front) personality that lives in the day-to-day world will be
strongly grounded in reality, but in a different way than the
core. With the exceptions of the few host personalities that
experience life day-to-day and the core, who can somehow
access the truth when it awakes and comes to the front of the
mind, MOST of the alters live at the age they were created at or
have been hypnotically assigned. They do not experience life in
a 3-dimension matter-space-time world. Life is 2-dimensional,
without a concept of time. The Illuminati prefer they don’t wear
watches for this reason. After lots of integration work, trust
work, and memory work, it may be possible to access the core
through some of its closer splits. Before discussing the second
major programming trauma to the core, it is extremely
important to disclose a major secret that the Illuminati
programmers came up against. In fact, due to their prideful
beliefs that they were gods, it was a rather touchy sensitive
subject to talk about when we worked with major programmers.
In spite of it being a touchy subject, it was such a major subject,
we did have some conversations concerning it. The
programmers called it "THE ETERNAL LIGHT". It was also
referred to as "the SOUL". Different programmers speculated
about what this light was, a few thought it was the Guardian
Angel that God assigued to each person, one thought it was the
part of man that would face Almighty God on judgement day,
and "bow its knee". (If it’s hard for the reader to conceive that
Illuminati programmers know Biblical verses such as "all knees
will bow before God" and theological concepts, then read
Aleister Crowley, who as a Satanist, knew Bible concepts and
theology in detail. Also remember, some Christian ministers
have a secondary vocation as Illuminati programmers.) It can
be understood why programmers (who of course were
Illuminati masters & adepts) would call this LIGHT "the soul"
because they were steeped in Greek philosophy. The concept of
the immortality of the soul was an idea of the mystery religions
of Babylon, and was elaborated upon by the Greek philosopher
Plato. This greek philosophical idea of the word "soul" clouds
the biblical meaning for the word. In the Hebrew scriptures the
word "soul" is the Hebrew word "nephesh" and in the Greek, it
is "psykhe". In the Word of God, Genesis 2:7 states, "And the
LORD God formed man of the dust of the ground, and breathed
into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living
being (nephesh)." What is significant here is that man was not
given a soul (nephesh), but rather "became a living soul". The
Greek scriptures also say in 1 COR 15:45, "The first man Adam
BECAME a living soul (psycke)". It is clear from many other
scriptures that soul (nephesh and psykhe--psykhai in plural
form) meant the body and mind of a person. This nephesh can
die. EZE 18:4b states, "The soul

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
 powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 429 ...
(nephesh) who sins shall die." However, though the soul (mind
and body) dies, the spirit returns to God, who gave it. ECC
12:7, "Then the dust will return to the earth as it was, And the
spirit will return to God who gave it." The Bible uses the
Hebrew word ruach and the Greek word pneuma for our word
"spirit." It is very clear in numerous scriptures that the spirit is a
powerful active force which has intellect. It is a person. The
Holy Spirit could be blasphemed, and lied to. In turn it taught,
and spoke and comforted. If a spirit can speak, teach and
comfort, what is it? In programming, we programmers came in
contact with this spirit that God places in each person, and it
caused us fits. Each person’s God-given spirit was a powerful
light that had intellect which attached itself to the core, but
could be separated from the core. When the core comes up, this
attached light form (the God-given spirit) would come up with
it. This God-given spirit had no memory of abuse, it simply had
energy, intellect and a power to protect the core. The essence of
this God-given spirit was impossible for pre-verbal children or
young children to describe. It has been the object of scientific
research. One thing that the Illuminati have long known about
this God-given spirit--it never works, it never takes on any
responsibilities, like the entire rest of the system will do. The
rest of the system will be a system of dissociative pieces of the
mind, and alters who often have some type of job. This isn’t the
case for the God-given spirit, or what the programmers called
THE ETERNAL LIGHT. From experience it is also clear that
the eternal light, although it wasn’t the core, somehow was a
reflection, a total reflection of the core. We knew these things
as oath-bound Luciferian programmers, long before we ever
contemplated getting to know the Christian God. The Spirit was
an intelligent life-force, a preserver of life. When the major
programmers got into big trouble and their child slave was
going to die, go insane or was splintering uncontrollably, even
though they disliked the ETERNAL LIGHT because it was
more powerful than they were, they would call it up, and get it
to assist in bringing healing, life, and integration to the victim.
This God-given spirit was like God’s own spirit, in that it gives
its help to the good and bad alters, the just and the unjust alters.
It is reminiscent of Christ’s words, "Your Father in heaven...He
makes His sun rise on the evil and on the good, and sends rain
on the just and on the unjust." MT 5:45 The Eternal Light can
integrate parts of the core or as far as that goes any alters that
have split. It is so powerful that the Programmers know that if
they pull it up and attach it to alters that they are torturing, that
it will provide a protective covering so hard that they can’t
cause the mind to splinter. Another thing that centuries of
programming experience has shown is that the eternal light
does not know that it is connected to the core. The God-given
spirit needs to be taught if it is know that it is connected to the
core. The programmers of course do not teach this to it. The
Illuminati have done lots of tests (and we observed some of
these) where the core and its God-given spirit were allowed to
spend positive time with a portion of alters. The core and its

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 430 ...
spirit would automatically integrate all these parts back
together. Therapists spend hundreds of hours trying to get
cooperation between alters, and yet the core and its spirit can
integrate them in a flash if given a safe opportunity. Now
you’re beginning to see the power of a safe environment for the
core. However, the top therapists (Dr.s of Psychiatry) are out on
speaking circuit teaching that it doesn’t matter if your client is
safe, you can still accomplish good. As a victim would you like
to cross the Pacific swimming or flying in a 747 jet? Or to
make the analogy more accurate, which choice would you want
if you couldn’t even swim? When Fritz, our co-author worked
24 hours a day to provide our system a safe place, numerous
therapists and deliverance ministries came out of the woodwork
to publicly attack him. A few wise people are beginning to
realize that safety of the victim IS THE NUMBER ONE
ISSUE, AND THE BEGINNING ISSUE. If the victim is left
alone in safety and with trustworthy loving people, at some
point the core and its God-given spirit could integrate
everything back in an effortless manner. Certain people are
beginning to realize that the main part of a treatment plan is
safety. (Unfortunately, the safety issues are far more vast than
therapists care to admit. This book and the Vol. 2 Formula book
are laying the foundation down for how varied and
technologically advanced their control is. An afternoon with a
Christian minister is not going to provide the security for the
mind to let down its protective mechanisms. What is happening
when skilled Christian ministers access what they think is the
core, is that they are getting at best core splits. Having core
splits heal is very powerful. That means that foundational
sections of programming are automatically ripped up. One
major drawback that is preventing more success is that the core
is not understood, and the issues of safety are not being
understood and addressed. When the God-given spirit joins
itself to a group of alters, the Illuminati testing shows that it can
take on a memory, bring the core along, and make that section
the leader of the pack in the mind. In fact, knowledge of this is
going to be used unfortunately for great evil, rather than for the
good of humanity. Soon the Anti-Christ is to take power. At
pre-arranged points in time, the hierarchy alters are to be given
the core and the Eternal Light, and the rest of the minds of
these slaves will be placed hypnotically under the hell-pit,
where the cores are presently asleep. This means thousands of
hierarchy Illuminati members will switch from their Christian
host personalities, into people who day-to-day have very strong
luciferian personalities which serve the Anti-Christ. Therapists,
who have spent years in agonizing patient work using primitive
often-damaging methods to help their programmed multiples,
are going to see their work go down the drain literally
overnight. A therapist, who has spent 10 years piddling around
with stabilizing a few front alters, will find they no longer exist
within the working part of the client’s mind. Some of these
therapists are even targeted to be killed. Some of these
therapists are Illuminati multiples themselves, who will go back
to continue helping with the large-scale operations of
mind-control programming.
 WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 431 ...
In order to deceive both the therapists and the victims
themselves, the programmers carry out several well-designed,
excellently executed deceptions. An early split of the mind is
pulled up which will perceive itself as light. This part will be
shamed and called "bad magic, and treated like it is the core. It
will then be placed in a box and sent into the outer-space of the
victim’s mind. A few young watcher alters will see this, and
believe they have spotted the core being placed in a box. This
light will be allowed to come up to help the system when it is in
trouble. Because it is not the real core, it can’t protect other
alters. When the alters in trouble see that they are not being
helped, they feel betrayed by the core, and feel helpless. They
have no idea how powerful the real core can really be. In fact
some alters are programmed to believe that the core is
responsible for their problems. Some of the alters walk around
internally with a bad attitude toward the core. The programmers
put the core to sleep with the sleeping beauty story.
Another early core split will be placed in the carousel, along
with 3 demons ask to function as a false trinity, and many
mirrors for entrapment. Other core splits will be placed as
blackmail in special castles. These will often be called ‘the
core" by the programmers in order to confuse the victim. The
second major core programming trauma takes place in a
sensory deprivation tank under a controlled LSD trip. Readers
can consult Chapter 3 of this Deeper Insights book, approx.
page 28-32 for a description of how the sensory deprivation
tank programming under LSD is carried out. The initial sensory
deprivation trauma is done with the core and it shows no mercy
upon the mind of the victim. The Illuminati want to have the
victim go through the eight emotions and the five senses, in
other words 13 categories of splitting. During the sensory
deprivation experience they want the victim to go through love,
fear, anger, confusion, pain, shame, despair, self-hate, and then
the loss of each of the five senses (one by one) taste, hearing,
pain, hot-cold, seeing, and finally a sense of being nothing. The
mind of even the child victim is vast. As the lonely isolation
and torture begins in the isolation tank, the mind finally reaches
a point where it begins splitting and splitting. When the child is
splitting due to fear, at some point the mind reaches exhaustion
of this feeling, and begins entering into another response,
perhaps anger. The mind will unravel in dissocation with the
new emotion until again the mind switches and tries another
response to its entrapment. The body is wide open for demonic
forces to take advantage of the pained/drug state of the child’s
mind. The Illuminati work to demonize the child while it is
suffering under the full impact of the sensory isolation tank.
Gradually the child begins to die. As the mind under LSD
begins to feel its molecules evaporating into nothinguess, the
child approaches death. The mind gives away the body. Then
the spirit--the Eternal Light leaves the body. After years of
experience, the Illuminati has scientifically figured out how
long they can wait after what they call the "soul"--the
God-given spirit leaves, before they hit the child with
electroshock to revive its life. The core really believes it has
died. (Chapter 10 of this book addresses the manipulation of
near-death experiences by the Illuminati.) The Illuminati
literally snatch the life of the child back into its body.

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
 material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 432 ...
Now the job comes to take the 13 different stages and to build
alters from those different dissociative states. From the state
where the core has given up identity with its body, no longer
sees itself as human, and considers itself dead, the Illuminati
will take these hundreds or thousands of dissociative pieces and
program them to see themselves as butterflies. In the sensory
deprivation tank they are like tiny fficks of light. But the
hypnotic suggestion is given that they are butterflies. This is
just one of many reasons why the term Monarch programming
is appropriate. These parts of the mind will make up one of the
most secret parts of an Illuminati system. We are now revealing
this secret grid for the first time. The butterflies are placed into
the first grid of alters near the core. This grid forms a net
around the core. These butterflies are floaters, that encircle the
core. This is the sixth grid, but in Illuminati programmer
parlance the grid is called a "DIMENSION". These protective
butterflies are dehumanized and hold the victim’s final fear as
the victim died. Only four strong splits from this time period of
the tank trauma are not made into butterflies. They are made
into four cornerstones (also called the "FOUR GATES TO
HEAVEN", north, east, west, and south. These become the
points of the compass upon which the system of alters will be
structured. The four gates to heaven create a foundational
pattern for an internal clock, a compass, and a seasonal/ritual
clock. Another set of alters that will come from the tank
experience are the gems. The gems are discussed in Vol. 2.
They will be placed in the first dimension, along with a
carousel. From the gems, ribbons will be created that run to the
internal computers. The ribbons will have to learn access codes
and other codes to mediate between the gems and the
computers on each of the levels (dimensions). Each of the six
main dimensions (also called sections on the alter grids that the
handler carries around), will have a mirror. Of course the
programmer can create any configuration he wants, but the 13 x
13 x 13 cube is a very common Illuminati system. Other
common configurations area sphere, and a double pyramid. The
Illuminati like to give a 3-D effect to their alter systems. The
sequence of splitting alters from alters goes horizontally and
vertically and downward. To chart out a genealogy of the time
sequence on how alters arrived becomes a series of breaks in
several directions. Needless to say, the programmers do chart
all these breaks. They also keep a resevior of unused clean slate
alters. The programmers are unable to touch the God-given
spirit. This Eternal Light remains unsplintered and powerful
throughout the life of the victim. It is hidden along with the
core to prevent integration of the victim’s mind. While it is
possible for the cult to bring the core up, it doesn’t serve any
purpose for them to injure the core after they have created a
system. There will always be a part of the core they cannot
reach unless they destroy the individual.

WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read
by any victims of
mind-control, no if's, and's,
or but's. Reading this
material may be highly
lethal -- it will trigger
powerful suicide programs
in some victims of
mind-control!!!
Page 433 ...
Theories that the most cult obedient and mean alters are those
farthest from the core are not based on reality. There is some
partial correctness to the concept that those victims who have a
better connection between their core and their alters heal better,
but when the actual programming sequence and methodology is
laid out for the reader as we have done in our books, hopefully
the reader will realize that most of the time the core is sleeping
(Sleeping Beauty) and thinks she is dead and waiting for her
Prince to kiss her and bring her back to life. She is not lurking
in the background cognizant of every conversation like some
therapists have begun telling each other. A sound strategy for
working on the core issues, would be to get the system in a
place of complete safety, and then work to stabilize the system
of alters, and then begin doing memory work and building trust.
When the mind is ready, then some core split alters can be
healed as a potential gateway to lowering the fears of the core.
Some of the readers of this book will not have a Christian
perspective. We encourage them to see the healing power of
forgiveness, and love that a Christlike view offers to victims. In
the reality of the real world, all men have sinned and come
short of the glory of God. The core was not evil--it was simply
a helpless innocent victim of overwhelming abuse. Of anybody
who can understand pain, it is the Son of God (Emmanuel) who
suffered innocently like-the core did. As the ministers preach,
we are all guilty of the death of Christ. This means that terms
like "man of God", "perpetrator" and "victim" begin to lose
much meaning as we approach the glorious brilliant light of
Christ. Without forgiveness, we are all sinners worthy of death.
But we are also the apple of God’s eye. There is nothing that
can stand in the way of His forgiving love if we want it in our
lives. One of the biggest proofs of that redeeming love of God
Almighty, has been carefully hidden by the programmers--it is
that Eternal Light, that God-given spirit that the programmers
have never conquered.

Back to Contents Next

Page 434 ...

DELIVERANCE, understanding
Today, we live in a dark age. We trust that you will find some
exciting liberating ideas within this article. Christ wondered if
he would find any faith left when he returned. The answers we
will provide you in this article are not something you will find
in the establishment churches, but are fresh revelations from the
throne of God. Fritz & I have worked together on this article,
and this article will reflect what we have been taught by the
Holy Spirit. As anyone, who has read about total mind-control,
can realize, victims of ‘total mind-control are in the greatest
need for deliverance that one could imagine. Why don’t victims
just choose health? Why don’t victims simply walk out and
grab their freedom? The answer goes back to understanding
love and free-will. God gave free-will to that part of His
creation that can know good & evil, especially humankind.
That was His sovereign choice, and it was an action based on
the nature of God which is love. Love does not seek its own,
but seeks to build others up. The Kingdom of God has as its
foundation love. We are called to speak truth in love. Satan’s
Kingdom is built upon fear. How many churches operate on the
foundation of fear? Sadly too many. Satan constructs all his
governments, whether judicial, political or religious on a
foundation of fear. He then takes that foundation of fear, and
applies it in such a way as to get fear’s maximum leverage
power to motivate people. While applying trauma along with
drugs and hypnosis to people’s lives, Satan gets the maximum
leverage out of their fear. He uses the greatest power he can get
out of fear to harden the points where people have free choice.
Imagine a piece of farm machinery that has been allowed to
rust and harden. The joints, the hinges no longer have freedom
of movement. They are rusted into one position. The joints
have lost their freedom of choice. Now the farmer comes along
and applies a lubricant to clean and loosen those frozen joints.
The deliverance minister is finding the juncture of choice and
he is pouring kindness upon that frozen juncture, and that oil of
kindness lubricates it free. Now the person has freedom of
choice. A spirit is love applied to the frozen hardened joints of
life is a deliverance ministry. Sometimes unfortunately, the rust
is so hard that the person must be broken, because the place
where the free-will, the place where their options were stolen
can not be restored. Satan knows that people would naturally
choose paradise, would naturally choose love & good things.
First, God created man in His own image, and we still have a
built in desire to do saintly things, although our perfect nature
has been corrupted. Satan must trick, and tweak, and loop and
snake our free will, to the point that we will give up our
freedom, that we will give up our free will, and that we will
agree to his life of bondage. That is what Fritz’s half of the
book was about. In Fritz’s half, he showed how Satan destroys
that free will, how he shifts and snakes, he deceives, he
manipulates and bends, and muddies the waters until a person
doesn’t know where he is, nor what his choices are. After all
the horrendous programming, the victim "willingly" wants to
give up their free will, but at that time the alters do not even
realize what they are giving up nor what is going on. God
continues to gently call people to Him. It is a wooing. A man is
wooed by a pretty girl, not compelled. God’s beauty
compellingly woos us. However, some churches because they
are not on the right foundations, see something wrong with
someone and they come over and lay their hands on them and
knock ‘em down. The idea of coming up to people and
attacking their demons is spiritual rape. The demons do have to
obey certain
Page 435 ...
spiritual laws, but "raping" people was not Christ’s method of
deliverance. Let’s look at the way Christ dealt with people and
demonic problems.
· The mother of Zebedee’s son comes to him, and he says,
"What do you wish?" (MT 20:21)
· The multitudes come to him, and Christ says, "What do you
want Me to do for you?" (MT 20:32)
· James & John come to Christ, and he says, ‘What do you want
Me to do for you?" MK 10:36
· A blind man on the road to Jerico comes to Christ, and Christ
asks, ‘What do you want Me to do for you?" MK 10:5 1, LK
18:4 1
· Two of John’s disciples approach Jesus, and Christ asks,
‘What do you seek?" JN 1:38
· At the marriage supper, a woman asks a favor & Christ asks,
‘Woman, what does your concern have to do with me?" (JN
2:4)
Christ told his disciples that whatever they asked in faith, that is
what their heavenly Father would give them. (MK 11:24)
Christ is very similar to the Father, he waited until people asked
and explained what they wanted. The entire course or tenor of
Christ’s life was a savior who waited until a person’s free will
was ready for a deliverance. Christ wooed people to God. There
is no wooing people to God, when demons are forcibly
eradicated without a person’s consent. Does that mean that
there is no place for aggressive deliverance? If we wait for
some people to ask for freedom, they may never ask. With
victims of mind-control, the controlling demons are sealed over
and hidden quite deeply and Lucifer allows other demons to
protect him in the system. Jesus went in and cleansed the
temple of the money changers. Here was a situation where
God’s temple was being desecrated. Most people are not aware
of how the money changers were desecrating God’s temple, so
allow us to explain this. The nation of Israel was to be the light
of earth through which God poured His blessings out on
mankind. The nation of Israel was to bless the world. Instead,
the religious spirits lorded over the nation. The Israelites
scorned everyone else (the Gentiles) as unclean. The temple’s
outer court was where the gentiles were to be ministered to &
were to come to God. Instead the Jews gave it over to a Spirit
of Mammon. Money changers were blocking the purpose of
that area of the Temple, which was meant to be the salvation of
the unclean, not the enrichment of the self-righteous. Notice the
religious judging spirit in the Temple rulers, for soon
afterwards they were judging Jesus for spending time with
children in the Temple. Jesus was hoping they would learn a
lesson, he said, "Yes. And have you never read what is written
in the Psalms, ‘Out of the mouth of babes and little ones, thou
hast made thy praise perfect?" There is a place in God’s hearts
for child alters & baby alters. And this then leads us to one of
the best illustrations of deliverance in the Word of God. Jesus
told the story of a man on the lonely road to Jerico. He had
been attacked by a gang of robbers and left in the ditch for
dead. Two religious men came by and judged him as unclean.
The judging spirits that were in their hearts convinced these
men of the lie that you get better by avoiding the unclean,
rather than ministering to the unclean. (We have seen our share
of ministers who have hated to see people working with
programmed multiples. Fritz lost most of his Christians friends
in order to work with us. Some of them got angry that someone
would want to help someone like us.) But there was a
Samaritan that came along. Now remember, the Samaritan was
considered unclean and a dog by the men with the religious
judging spirits. The religious judging spirit doesn’t want to
enter into a real walk with God, and it will do all it can to
prevent others. But this Samaritan who was considered unclean
by the religious, comes and pulls the man out of the pit, and
dresses his wounds, which means squeezing out the dross. He
gives the man food and water to promote life. He pours in all
this stuff into the
Page 436 ...
man’s wounds. Then he binds the wounds so that the skin will
form a protection. He took what had carried him through life
(his own donkey or horse) and took him to a place of safety and
protection. But the Samaritan didn’t consider his deliverance
over. He wanted to get the man to the end point. So he gave the
inn keeper money, and told the inn keeper to take care of him,
and if he ran up a bill, the Samaritan would take care of it on a
return trip. THIS was a real deliverance ministry. This was a
real deliverance. The religious heap the burdens of the cross or
many crosses onto other people. The real deliverance ministries
are like the "religiously unclean" Samaritan. When the religious
leaders of Jesus’ day came to him and asked him on what
authority he did his good works, Jesus told them a story. "But
what do you think? A man had two sons, and he came to the
first and said, ‘Son, go, work today in my vineyard.’ He
answered and said, ‘I will not,’ but afterward he regretted it and
went. ‘Then he came to the second and said likewise. And he
answered and said, ‘I go, sir,’ but he did not go. Which of the
two did the will of his father?" They said to Him, "The first."
Jesus said to them, "Assuredly, I say to you that tax collectors
and harlots enter the kingdom of God before you." Today, we
have a entire class of professional ministers (master pastors)
who are ministered to by their congregations. They consider the
idea of stopping to bandage up the unclean to be repulsive. The
broken souls of the programmed multiples are those who Christ
came to deliver. He cameto set the captives free. The
deliverance ministry will visit those who are in the prisons
created by mind-control programming, they will give food and
water to those in these "prisons" and liberate them. Deliverance
is love in action. The oil and wine that the Samaritan put on the
man’s wounds are symbolic of the power & authority of God
that we minister to people. They are also symbolic of the grace
and truth. Another parallel meaning to the oil & wine is the
anointing and the new life that are given to those that the world
has left for dead in the gutter. Deliverance is a restoration. The
goal of the restoration is new life, the ultimate goal of
deliverance is the ultimate new life in Christ. The new life in
Christ is when Christ is on the throne in a person’s life. That is
a distant goal for some programmed multiples. However, we
must not elevate the process above the goal. In deliverance
ministries today, many of them have elevated the process above
the goal. We must keep the authority of Christ as the number
one issue, and keep beholding him as an example to us. As the
correct foundation is built, a godly structure based upon the His
five attributes comes into being. (See the article on "Protection,
Spiritual") then the lower level demons can’t handle the heat
given off by the light of truth and they rise to the surface as
dross and can be dealt with. The deeper big daddy demons are
going to take a special deliverance similar to Christ’s cleansing
of the temple. When the Holy Spirit has a claim on someone’s
life, then a Temple cleansing may be in store. We must insure
to lose good spirits to replace evil ones. The Children of Light
do not negotiate with darkness. Darkness does not want to
negotiate with light anyway. The Child of God walks in peace,
because he is secure in who his Father is. This does not mean
that he tempts God by bungy jumping every situation. It means
that he doesn’t walk in fear, but that he takes with him the real
keys to the Kingdom of God which are light, life and love.
Love, light and life in their fullest meanings will open doors to
riches that the slave could never dream of.
Deliverance is not a short term work. For a programmed
multiple it will be a life of healing. When God continues to
build his structure in you (see page 365), replacing the satanic
structure, God will begin resting more
Page 437 ...
of His glory within His structure. God’s glory will expose and
help cleanse the Temple. It will make the victim want to work
hard to keep the Temple clean. Some people think that God
simply wants to put His anointing onto people. He is trying to
build His structure within His willing children. After that
structure (His nature and character is built) then the anointing
has a place to rest. Prayer, which is based upon the five
elements of God’s structure, is like an offensive lance. The
armor of God listed in Ephesians 6 includes 6 items. It does not
mention anything that is clearly offensive. Prayer is offensive
and aggressive in nature. It is seeking that which we do not
have. Prayer can deliver a wound into the enemy through which
supernatural love can be poured in to melt the hard spots that
Satan has created. One of the five elements of God’s structure
is life, which means growth. The healing victim if they are alive
must keep growing, because that is the nature of life. The Word
says that God’s Kingdom will always increase. We go from
glory to glory. We grow up and grow up and grow up. If we
stop growing, we can rest in God, but if we are not resting in
Him or growing, then we are in a death process. We are to
occupy until the Lord comes. While we occupy the land, God
comes and builds His structures within us. What gives life to
the victim of mind-control? There are various approaches to
demons. Some say that they are only psychological illusions,
they pass by on the road to Jerico. Some say that although
demons exist, they are rare, so it is not likely that the victim has
a serious problem. They pass by too on the road to Jerico.
Others pass by and say, "I’ll pray for you." Others shout the
name of Jesus and pass on. Others use their psychic abilities to
notice from a distance what the demons are. In other words,
they identify the problem, but pass by expecting that a few
words will bind up the half-dead man. The other approaches are
various ideas on how to help the man in the ditch. What we
have been trying to do, is give people an idea on how half-dead
people can be mended. This is somewhat of a spiritual first-aid
class. There will be situations that people will need our help in
deliverance. They simply can’t mend their own wounds, nor
even see them to clean them. Deliverance prayers and
supplications can be made that God would enlighten the victim,
that God’s angels would provide protection, and that evil spirits
would be contained or kept away. Because demons are in ranks
and in hierarchal structures, it makes sense to try to go to the
top to do business. The ranking demon may be asked on what
spiritual grounds he has a right to be present. The legal right for
that demon can be confessed and removed. Long story made
short, demons must submit to the authority of Jesus Christ of
Nazareth and His blood. If the deliverance minister walks in
that authority, he can command that demon to leave. The
response by demons when commanded to leave is varied. They
will play many tricks to try and stay or to try and protect their
leaders. Followup is important and the goal is a complete
cleansing. If you are going toward the rest room, to take two
steps in that direction is just not going to do the job. Go all the
way. Keep praying and commanding and confessing. Having a
prayer group in support helps. With victims of mind-control we
are dealing with big daddy demons that the normal person has
not had to deal with. The Illuminati programmed multiples are
the pride of Satan. They don’t surrender easily.
Page 438 ...

DENIAL, identifying and dealing with defense mechanisms

Part of the reason that the Monarch trauma-based
mind-control’s programming is successful is because the mind
will naturally defend itself against threatening ideas. This
defense is usually on a subconscious level--that is, people often
do not even realize that the mind is putting up defenses. This is
because the human mind is SO GOOD at defending itself. If
our minds were to allow us to realize our minds defend
themselves from something--then that would in itself indicate
that what is being denied was real--so even the denial is denied!
Denial is a natural part of the mind’s abilities. However, denial
can often prevent us from moving forward and facing the issues
we actually need to face. There are several forms of denial and
we need to identify and recognize these forms in order to
identify and recognize these forms in ourselves. I will now list
some of the kinds (forms) of denial that a person can have.
· SIMPLE DENIAL: Pretending that something does not exist
when it really does, for instance ignoring & discounting
physical symptoms that may indicate the presence of problems.
(For instance, the host
personality of a programmed multiple will destroy evidence of
the existence of any other alter.)
· MINIMIZING: Being willing to acknowledge a problem, but
unwilling to see its severity. (For instance, the front alters will
acknowledge their ways some past abuse, but they will
minimize the extent of the
abuse, and they will not acknowledge that the abuse is
ongoing.)
· BLAMING: putting the blame on someone else for causing
the problem; the behavior is not denied, but its cause is
someone else’s fault. (Examples, are blaming one’s parents for
your adult behavior,
blaming one’s husband or wife for one’s overeating. In terms of
programming, an example would be that some alters perceive
that other alters are the cause of their problems, but that they
are just fine.)
· EXCUSING: Offering excuses, alibis, justifications and other
explanations for our own or other’s behavior. For instance,
calling the boss for a friend and telling the boss the person is
sick when they are
really drunk. (This is a built in mechanism of the mind-control.
For instance, an assassination alter will be told that the target
they killed deserved to die.)
· GENERALIZING: Dealing with problems on a general level,
but avoiding personal and emotional awareness of the situation
or conditions. Example is when we might sympathize with a
friend’s "flu"
problems when the real problem is a drug problem. (Some
alters tell the therapist, "I’m not in therapy, the other alter is in
therapy." The problem of mind-control is not being addressed
as mind-control, the
real issue is being disavowalled. Some therapists contribute to
this because they don’t understand the dynamics of
mind-control, and they mistakingly think that their client is the
host alter. They are failing to
see the bigger picture.)
· DODGING: Changing the subject to avoid threatening topics,
this includes being adept at small talk, never getting to real
issues. (Alters love to talk about non-threatening issues with
their therapists, as great
deal of busy work can take place without much progress.)
· ATTACKING: Becoming angry and irritable when reference
is made to the existing condition, thus avoiding the issue. This
includes being unwilling to share one’s feelings.
Page 439

ALL OF US NEED TO SCRUTINIZE OURSELVES--WHAT

TYPES OF DENIAL TO WE PRACTICE TO PROTECT
OURSELVES FROM WHAT IS PERCEIVED AS
PAINFUL??
Children and even adults will perceive certain new foods as
dangerous and painful. They will do anything and make any
excuse not to eat what they don’t want to. At times there are
legitimate concerns, but in general what is perceived as
threatening is not. If the child ate his broccoli or his peas he
would in fact be getting better nutrition. Denial seems to protect
us--but often it protects us from what we really need to deal
with.
Back to Contents Next
Page 440 ...

DREAMWORK, understanding
We believe that this section may present the reader with the
best look into
programmed MPD (DID) and dreams that has been published.
This Dream Work
section will be divided up into the following subtopics:
· Part A: The Meaning of Dreams
· Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD
· Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams
· Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research
· Part B. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work
· Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams
& memories

Part A. The Meaning of Dreams

Everyone dreams, and many people are fascinated in dreams,
the difficult part is what do individual dreams mean? In a
biblical study that our co-author Fritz made of the entire Word
of God to determine how God communicates with mankind, he
found that in an overwhelming percentage of cases, Almighty
God used dreams to communicate to mankind. Joseph and
Daniel got recognition by interpreting dreams (called
oneicromancy) correctly. Joseph interpreted the Pharaoh’s
dream about seven years of plenty and seven years of famine.
On a stone tablet in front of the Great Sphinx, another Pharaoh,
Thutmes IV, records a dream he received that his reign would
be long and fruitful. This was one of what the ancient
Egyptians called "divine dreams from the gods". On the flip
side of things, the rational thinkers of the 18th century claimed
that dreams were only the result of indigestion or cold drafts,
and were meaningless. Obviously, not all dreams are a message
from God, nor are they all simply the result of poor indigestion
of pizza. or an open window at night. The priesthoods of the
ancient mystery religions began research into dreams and began
using them in various capacities. In the healing temple of
~Esclepius, the priesthood would place sick people on a couch
in the temple, and would instruct them that a god would give
them in a dream the remedy for their illness. The suggestion
that the dreamer would learn of his health problem in his dream
often worked. Modern researchers would not blame any
particular god for this being successful, they would interpret it
as the unconscious mind releasing information about the body
that wouldn’t normally surface in the waking conscious mind.
This ancient practice is similar to modern researchers who have
had great success in placing hypnotic commands into people
(where the subjects were told not to remember the command) to
dream about particular things, with the result that then the
researchers have observed that the subjects do indeed create
dreams about the suggested subject matter. The resulting
dreams are about the suggested matter according to the
subject’s mind’s own tastes. It’s been documented that people
who have suffered traumas, such as refugees, soldiers, and
victims of SRA have nightmares that are a direct result of their
traumas. Some therapists do dream work with refugees,
post-traumatic stress disorder and DID clients. When multiples
get memories that surface as dreams, these dreams repeat
themselves and they leave the victim with profound feelings,
often the strong sense of depersonalization. Several
therapists/researchers (see Cushway & Sewell, 1992 and
others) have discovered that nightmares can be used as a key
indicator of PTSD (which is a problem that DID victims face.)
(Non-multiples, of course, also at times experience
auto-biographical dreams.) One dream researcher (Wunder,
1993)
Page 441 ...
discovered that siblings of disabled children had many common
themes in their dreams, including the desire to be a type of
"saviort, dreams of guilt that they were normal, the idea that
something or someone (such as a fairy godmother) would
change things, and sorrow about their siblings disability.
Programmed multiples are also going to have dreams surface
that relate to inner concerns.
Yes, the imagery of our nightmares and dreams do have
relevant information about our deep concerns. The high
frequency of nightmares has been directly shown to be linked
to unpleasant life experiences, especially recent ones. Common
sense would teach us many of these things, but it helps that
people have validated these in studies, so that some of these
things go beyond the realm of opinion.

Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD

Psychiatric journals have been publishing for several years
documented, authentic, scientific, controlled experiments where
telepathic messages have been sent to and received by people in
the dream state. On the one hand, while most people believe
these kinds of things happen, they will also generally, when
asked if such things happen, say that they do not believe they
happen. This is because there is a strong scientific-cultural bias
against the fact of telepathic messages occurring in the dream
state. Common scientific awareness hasn’t caught up to both
common sense and specific research into telepathic dreams.
The natural response designed to protect those with "politically
correct views" is to ask, "How does one distinguish between a
telepathic dream and a lucky coincidence considering the
numbers of dreams sent?" "At what point does one realize that
a dream is not mere coincidence?" These are legitimate
questions, and there has been legitimate research which has
legitimately answered them. The original scientific work in this
area was done by the British Society for Psychical Research,
who did most of their work with the elite British aristocracy
beginning in the 1880’s. Their initial findings were written up
in Phantasms of the Living. Since then, a great deal more
research has been completed. The two types of telepathic
dreams that are quite frequently experienced are death
messages and in-trouble messages. Some of the documented
cases of telepathic messages between total strangers are
absolutely amazing. While the public is still debating the
existence of such already scientifically proven phenomena, the
Illuminati have been constructing telepathic and astral
projection capabilities into their hierarchy slaves. Whether the
therapist is at a place to admit the existence of these phenomena
or not, they will have to face the fact that deeper hierarchy
alters believe they have these capabilities, & they will resist
treatment and resist the success of therapy because they believe
they are still participating fully with the Illuminati cult during
sleeping hours. Nor will the therapist make significant progress
by trying to debunk these capabilities, when these alters have
personal experiences of having learned and travelled to rituals
on the astral plane. A beginning point for therapists to learn
about Dream Telepathy would be the book Dream Telepathy by
Montague Ullman, M.D., Stanley Krippner, Ph.D. and Alan
Vaughan.

Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams

Because the potential benefits through dream therapy are great
and still to be discovered, this section is covering the topic in
greater depth than some of the other topics. For those who want
to check the professional literature concerning dreams and their
relationship with MPD (DID) we provide the following list:
Page 442 ...
Franklin, J. (1990). "Dreamlike thought and dream mode
processes in the formation of personalities in MPD."
Dissociation, 3(2), pp. 70-80
Gabel, S. (1989) "Dreams as a possible reflection of a
dissociated self-monitoring system." Journal of Nervous and
Mental Disease, 177, pp. 560-568.
Gabel, 5. (1990). "Dreams and dissociation theory:
Speculations on beneficial aspects of their linkage."
Dissociation, 3(1), pp. 38-47
Leviton, H.L. (1967) "Depersonalization and the dream."
Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 36, pp. 157-171.
Marmer, S.S. (1980) ‘The dream in dissociative states." In J.M.
Natterson (ed.), The dream in clinical practice (pp. 163-175).
NY: Jason Aronson.
Myers, W.A. (1976). "Imaginary companions, fantasy twins,
mirror dreams and depersonalization." Psychoanalytic
Quarterly, 45, pp 503-524.
Peterson, E., Gooch, N.L., & Freeman, L. Nightmare. NY:
Richardson & Steirman, 1987.
Sidis, B. (1918) "A Clinical study of a dream personality."
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 13, pp 137-1 57.
Ullman, M. (1989). "Commentary: Dreams as a possible
reflection of a dissociated self-monitoring system." Journal of
Nervous and Mental Disease, 177, pp. 569-571.

Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research

One study (Hartman, 1984) showed that people who normally
have recurrent nightmares have more permeable mental
boundaries between fantasy and reality, and are confused in
their self-image. This principle would certainly apply to people
with DID. Cernovsky (1988) did research into the dreams of
those who suffer from Post-Traumatic Stress syndrome. And
Jeans (1976), Gabel (1989, 1990), Marmer (1980), and Salley
(1988) did research into dreams and therapy of MPD clients.
Worthy of comment here, is that Gabel was exploring the
dreams of DID clients as repressed memories. Not only does
this make common sense, but as an Illuminati programmer, our
alters who were programmers were very aware that memories
can surface as dreams. We were taught to make sure that the
victim’s mind was properly prepared so that it would not allow
trauma and memory to surface in dreams. We will discuss
indepth the mind-control programming in this area later in this
article. Another therapist/researcher who did a great deal of
work with dreams to help DID (MPD) clients was S.S. Marmer.
He was able to help alters understand how their systems were
built by using dream therapy, and was able to use dream
content to help break down the dissociation. He believed that
each alter is able to create its own dreams separately from other
alters. Dr. Frank Putnam found that he was able to get valuable
information from the dreams of his multiples that he couldn’t
get from hypnosis and hypnosis-with-the-affect-bridge. Putnam
discovered that the repressed memories surfacing as dreams
were so traumatic that his clients were dissociating the dreams.
This author (Cisco), as a recovering multiple, has personally
experienced this. Also we have discovered that fragments of the
dissociated dream may linger, and these fragments may be
helpful to go back and recover more of the memory. We also
discovered that it is helpful to have a support person record and
relate what the system is screaming during sleep, or saying
during their sleep so that the memory is not lost. Putnam states,
"When listening to this [MPD dream] material, I treat it as a
dissociative experience similar to, for example, an out-of-body
experience. The details and setting of these repetitive traumatic
nightmares seem to be more clearly based on actual settings
than are most dreamscapes and can often be used to determine
what age the person was and
Page 443 ...
where he or she was when the trauma occurred. One can search
the personality system for alters who were created during this
time period in the patient’s life. The postdream residual effects
are also important and can be used as a starting point for affect
bridge work. MPD patients seem to be more willing to share
and work with dream material than with other forms of memory
for trauma." (Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality
Disorder, p. 202) Oaklander, who used work with dreams to
assist therapy, wrote, "In general, dreams serve a variety of
functions for children. They may be an expression of
anxiety--things that worry them. They may express feelings
that children feel unable to express in real life. [bold added]
They may depict wishes, wants, needs, fantasies, questions and
curiosities, attitudes. The dream can be an indication of a
general stance or feeling about life. It may be a way of working
through feelings and experiences -situations that children are
unable to deal with directly and openly." (1969, p. 150)
Therapists have been using dreamwork (dreams) as a source of
information that helps them to understand how the victim is
processing horrible experiences, problem-solving, and adjusting
to changing personal and social circumstances in life. An
example of how dreams relate to these things, is Zaya’s study
in 1988 that showed that expectant fathers went through three
stages of dream content in anticipation of their new child. Here
was a good example of the unconscious preoccupation of
fathers toward the new child expressing itself symbolically in
their dreamscapes.

Part E. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work

The therapist is going to have to differentiate between symbolic
meanings (for example a dream image of a "broken egg in a
nest" which in one case represented a situation of family
violence), and actual memories coming to the surface. The
therapist is in a position of helping the victim move from
making "no sense" of a dream to a place that it "makes sense".
The type of questions that may be helpful would include, "how
did you feel when...? or, "how do you feel now about...?, or
"what color was...?" or, "have you considered how
such-and-such might relate to such-and-such in your daytime
life?" The therapist is facilitating the victim in discovering
possible avenues of enquiry. For instance, in a dream having a
baby in it, the victim might be asked, "What do babies mean to
you?" Although this type of exploration may seem slow, when
done by a skilled therapist some valuable work can occur. It
may also be possible to influence victims to become more lucid
dreamers. Lucid dreaming is when a person is conscious that
they are dreaming & asleep, while still in the REM sleep state.
Unfortunately, the current vocabulary of words are unsuitably
very primitive for discussing different altered states of
consciousness & unconscious mental activity. "Awake",
"asleep" & "dream" are very crude terms to describe the various
states that the mind can place itself in. A variety of techniques
in training the mind while it is awake, have proven to result in
changes in the remembrance and perception of dreams. While
these are too extensive to try to cover here, there might be some
possibilities to explore in this area for helping DID.
A mother while asleep will still have a mind that is scanning
her external environment. She may sleep through her husband
coming home from work, but wake up at the slightest noise
from her baby. This type of behavior shows that the dreamer is
still scanning his or her external environment. Most people do
not have well-trained minds when it comes to states of
consciousness.
Page 444 ...
Swami Rama, an expert in putting his body into different trance
states, had worked with his various states of mind so well, that
even during clinical studies while Swami Rama was in deepest
sleep states (where people are "dead to the world"), he was still
aware of everything going on in the room. Most multiples,
because their mind is so traumatized and ever-vigilant, will
never completely go to sleep, but will have an external alter
awake in trance while the other alters go into a trance-sleep.
The example of Billy Graham, a programmed multiple, who
only sleeps in a zombie-trance state with his eyes open, was
reported in the Vol 2 Formula book. Each time a slave goes to
sleep, internal alters bring trauma memories to the sleeping
alters as dreams, and condition the slave to fear sleep. Dreams
may indicate that the part that holds a particular memory is
ready to work on the memory that came up in the dream. REM
sleep, the place where most dream occurs, is the most similar
type of sleep in brain wave patterns to the waking brain.
However, dreams that are carried out in the non-REM sleep
phases have been discovered to be closer to reality than REM
sleep dreams. This applies to everyone. Because the dreamer is
still in contact with his environment, (granted that this contact
is different than being awake), the dreamer can have his or her
dream influenced by externals and internals. Gas on the
stomach may be interpreted as a nightmare, internal bladder
trouble may be dreamed about as a trip to the restroom, an
alarm clock may be dreamed about as a church bell, the smell
of smoke may cause one to dream of a building exploding, and
the smell of cologne may cause a dream of a perfume factory,
etc. This is why listeners can identify with the joke about the
dreamer who dreams he ate a giant marshmallow and wakes up
missing his pillow. Many dreamers have the ability to dream
about things that are suggested to them, such as in a hypnotic
suggestion, before bed time. Victims of mind control can, if
they want, via self-hypnotic statements suggest to themselves
that they would like every dream that night to be about a
particular theme. The mind will decide what it has that matches
during their sleep that night the suggested theme, so this
method is not going to contaminate the mind, it is simply
telling the mind what mental files or associated mental files to
allow to drift up from deep in the mind into the dream state. A
support team member can repeat personal names during REM
sleep, and this may trigger the mind to bring up some mental
files that relate to that name. Again, because the mind is not in
a conscious logical state, the relationship between the file and
the name said may not be the typical type of relationship
experienced during waking hours. For example, the name
"Stan" said aloud to the dreamer might evoke a dream about
stamps. Another possible method to elicit dream material for
work is to trigger the system. The alter system can be triggered
via movies or by going to particular settings where they were
traumatized. The movies that trigger certain auto-biographical
dreams may trigger the dreams in a way that only appear to
have remote connections, but at the deeper levels of the mind
are connected in some way by the mind. In other words,
triggering by watching negatively-charged movies may be
helpful to therapy, but the memory & feelings which are pulled
to the surface (evoked) may be completely unexpected.

Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning

dreams & memories
The programmers put into place a system of alters whose
function is to control memories. These alters are created from
Page 445 ...
the purely logic side of the brain, and have been logically
programmed, and tend to be perfectionists in their work. They
have been programmed to see themselves as unicorns, pegasi
(winged horses), and horses. We have touched on these horse
alters in our Illustrated Guidebook and the Vol. 2 book, for
instance, the Vol 2 book reports that JER 37:3 is used to put in
the programming that if a certain boundary is crossed, the
horses are activated to protect the system. The horses work at
night when an alter system goes to bed. They dump their
memories into the dream state for various purposes.
The base imagery to create the unicorns, Pegasi & horses is laid
in with the film Fantasia (see Chapter 5). Later when the
specific approx. 4-year-old alters are given their scripts, they
choose alters who are heartless and purely logic to tell a script
like the following one. A typical script for the horse alters
during programming would be as follows: "Pegasi are
handsome winged horses who graze in the treetops and have
their home in the gourd. The gourd is an alternate world where
black pearls store memories. Because the horses are magical
they can fit their big selves into a tiny gourd. They are black
and their eyes glow faintly. They are led by a stallion Trojan,
who is also known as the Dark Horse, and who commands all
the spirits who lack bodies. He rules the kingdom of dreams. It
is the job of the night mares to carry the dreams that are made
in the gourd to all the sleepers of the outside world who need
them. The reason that the night mares give dreams to people is
so they know what they have done that is bad. Night mares
have no feelings. Those who gain feelings are soon no good for
their work. Souls with feelings are not able to be tough like the
night mares must be. A night mare must be careful to frighten
with the fewest possible images so that the dreamer will not
think the dreams to be a common everyday thing. If they have
trouble doing their jobs, if they get bored, then the night mares
can let their little colts take over their jobs. Night mares can not
speak out loud, but can make dreams of a nonfrightening nature
to those who are awake, and to those who say what the night
mare wishes to talk about. They only come when people are
asleep. They can go through walls and solid things under the
cover of darkness. The moon & the horses go together. Night
mares must flee from the sun. They only are safe travelling at
night. Each night mares’ hoofprint is a the spot one sees on the
moon. Those spots on the moon were named after each mare,
such as Mare Imbrium, & Mare Crisis & Mare Frigoris. It is
very bad to be seen by anyone when a mare delivers her
dreams. The Mare Imbrium had to leap through a wall, and to
become invisible. She had almost been caught. She must go
home before the dawn comes. When she gets home she can
relax all day until night comes again. Trojan reports to Mr.
Moon & Mr. Green. When the messenger mare galloped up to
Mare Imbrium she told her to report immediately to Trojan,
who is a handsome, midnight black mare with enormous power.
He is the smartest of horses. He rules the Powers of the Night.
He was very impressive when the mare met him, & he told her
how to do her job better. The difference between night mares
and day mares is that night mares have no emotions & days
mares do. The day mares have no bodies. Day mares have to
work with shadows, & shadows are very strict that the sun
shines so that the shadow can work. Day horses project dream
visions to people, but these day dreams are not as powerful as
the night dreams." The programmers give such alters names
like Abaddon, Dark Horse, Mare Imbrium, Mare Nectaris,
Night Mare, Night Stallion, Pegasus and Trojan and other
Page 446 ...
appropriate names for horses. These alters must report to the
overseers, not the internal programmers. The overseers will be
clones of the main external programmers. These horse alters
carry all the memories. They are programmed to believe they
have no souls (emotions), and that they can not speak (although
they may "neigh" to the therapist and alters may hear the stomp
of their hoofs behind them). These night mares carry the
memories to other alters (which is their "dream duty"), and
because they have no emotions (soul), they can be heartless in
what they give and in what they must carry. Lacking emotions
they carry the memories like a movie projector. They are really
beasts of burden for the entire system. These beasts of burden
are created early in the verbal stage. (Vol. 2 briefly reports
about their creation.) The alters who see themselves as the
primary abusers, who are overseers of the system will ride these
horses. The horse for the front of the system has to be a gentler
natured horse because they don’t want the front of the system
finding out too much and they want the front of the system to
be able to function. And now you understand the collage in our
illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind Control Programming
(1995), p. 68, where a White Horse and a Black Horse do battle
over a grave yard. When we were trying to get our memories, a
battle was raging with the horses as to how much memories we
were to get. - (You’ll notice that a high percentage of our
collages have horses in them. One example, on p. 54, is Alice
riding a white horse. Another is our system’s two overseers Dr.
Green & Dr. Black riding a fierce night mare on p. 38. The
horses are attached to the computers, but they are neither good
nor bad, they simply are beasts of burden carrying out their
assigned tasks. They try to balance what they give the alters.
When an alter goes into the dream state, the horses fill that
dream state with a memory. Because the memory never gets
attached to the original emotions (affect), the horses can bring it
night after night to terrorize the alters. If a horse gets too close
to the memories that it brings, or entangled with the alters that
it gives memories to, then the horse will lose its job, and
another alter, perhaps a clean slate made from the horse itself,
will take its job. Most alter systems will go into a trance like
sleep between 12 and 4 in the morning. During this time a lot of
mischief can happen. The internal programmers may be
working hard to reprogram the system, or the handler has
arranged a quick stop at the house to help with the
reprogramming. Meanwhile most therapists have a rule that
after 11 o’clock the client can’t call. So during that time period
when therapists are out of reach, is when the programming cults
move in & do a lot of work. During the dream state, no one is
really holding the body, and programs surface for contact alters
to go "home" to "get fixed". The handler may be waiting in a
sidestreet or back alley a block away. Flooding programs are
released in the dream state. Flooding programs were created
when a drug was given that takes down all the dissociative
barriers, and the memory of this flooding trauma is then carried
forward by a mare and given to the appropriate non-compliant
alters to scare them into not wanting to go toward health. The
reader has seen how the programmers take advantage of the
dream state & control the dream state. The support team has to
be alert from eleven p.m. to five a.m. for that is when most of
the accessing mischief takes place. The support team has
numerous ways that they can encourage the dream state to be
productive, & they now know the alters who are responsible for
turning those dream states into nightmares (pardon the pun.)
Page 447 ...
Validation is important especially at the early stages of therapy.
Our experience, as well as many others who understand the
dynamics of MPD, is that extended family members are NOT
good sources of validation. If the dynamics of abuse are
understood in the context of families who abuse their MPD
children, it will be clearly understood that extended family
members will deny the truth, misrepresent or misinterpret past
events, and may even be involved in trying to reprogram and
reaccess the victim. Because some therapists attempt such
validation, we feel it is important to issue a warning. Until
recently, programmed multiples have lived in a world that was
hostile to admitting their existence. They ran many risks from
being exposed, & the trend has been for most therapists to deny
the existence of mind-control. The victim has had so much
fantasy structured into their mind that they don’t know what to
believe, but they do know that they feel safer if they could find
some validation. It is not uncommon for some alters in a system
to realize the MPD, while other alters hold out for more
validation. Within in an alter system DENIAL is extremely
strong. Denial has been a tool for survival. The mind does not
want to believe the horrendous things that have happened to it.
The mind wants to protect itself from these trauma
memories--not admit them. As therapy progresses, the way the
mind unravels itself, becomes a validation for the system.
Alters may talk about things that are in their mind, which the
therapist can point out are standard programming features, such
as ruby slippers, a dollhouse & rainbow. Denial is a force that
pulls the mind away from the truth. Validation gives the mind
something external. Without that external place to land, it is
hard for the mind to accept its own thoughts. In a sense,
validation (ext. proof) brings a balance for the mind. The victim
doesn’t feel like he or she is standing alone. Something else
agrees with them. Dates can be helpful for validation. Victims
who have identical structures can be validating. Other SRA
victims from the same coven or same team can be validating.
Recent books showing how different alters have different PET
brain scans, as well as changes in regional cerebral blood flow
as switches occur, have helped programmed DIDs to trust that
MPD (DID) even exists. Many churches are still denying its
existence. At a certain point in the therapy, the mind has
reached the top of the hill in its quest for reassurance from
external proofs. At that point, the mind knows, and has
acknowledged it to the point that that knowledge has become
part of itself. The external programmers will not try to stop this
awareness, because it is something that permeates the mind,
even though some alters will remain in denial. However,
admitting that the multiplicity exists, is still a long ways from
proving to others that mind-control is being carried out on a
wide-and big scale, and that the recovering victim was abused
by many of the "finest" figures of the establishment. It is hard
to see that programming, mind-control, and control of society
exists UNTIL you swim against the stream. As long as
someone is flowing with the river (the programming) the
current is not perceived. Everything goes easy like running with
the wind at your back. It is when you step out of line with the
programming, when you step out of line with how society is
programmed, do you feel the weight of the programming.
When people are hired, their bosses hire them for how they
think. And their boss’s boss in turn hired them for the way they
think in an approved fashion. Much of today’s thinking is
simply drifting with the stream of what is "politically correct."
Try swimming against the tide, and you’ll discover it is there!
Page 448 ...

FAMILY, rebuilding a shattered family

Everyone needs to belong to a family. Everyone needs love &
acceptance. To belong to a family & to be loved gives a person
an identity. The victim’s deeper alters have few opportunities
for this, unless the support team makes an effort to address
these vital needs. When you begin working on a programmed
multiple, chances are high that the multiple has experienced
extreme inconsistency in the actions of the parents or
guardians, and extreme contradictory expectations (often
double-binds) from the parents too. Most families, that
multiples come out of, are extremely guarded and secret,
although they may put on a good front. The good front may
simply be an agreed upon good cover. The multiple’s deeper
alters have been programmed not to have a regular family, but
to only know their cult family or their internal family (other
alters). The therapist will have to investigate: Who is your
family? Name your family? How do feel about them? The
multiple’s deeper alters will have to be shown there is an
external world. After they were programmed with the NO
TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR, they were then programmed with
the DO-NOTHING-TO-HURT-THE-FAMILY programming.
Why do programmed multiples (or their therapists) sometimes
want to contact actual family members? It may be for
validation, for justice, for more information, or for
reconciliation. First, extended families are poor sources for
validation. Second, there is no justice that would be appropriate
for the crimes done, such as a lifetime of torture, except an
eternity in hell. Forget getting justice. Third, sometimes
relatives will provide more information. Generally, victims of
mind-control attempt to pry information from relatives, and to
read between the lines. Worthwhile information can be gleaned
from relatives, just realize that it be work getting it.
Often it works the other way, intense pressure is put upon the
victim to protect the family’s secrets. Fourth, because most
parents of multiples are multiples themselves, all victims of
mind-control need to be extra cautious about spending
unsupervised time with the parent figure. So where does the
victim go to rebuild a family? The support team can become the
new family. Or the victim can find some brothers and sisters in
Christ that are not-judgmental and legalistic who will
appreciate the victim for all the positives they have, in spite of
the multiple’s inconsistent behavior. The multiple has quit
asking why after about the age of 3 1/2. The Illuminati have
built fantasy scripts for them so they don’t ask why. The victim
only asks why in the context of fantasy. The victim child may
explain their parents multiplicity in magical terms. Child
victims will often be aware that they have several daddies and
several mommies. They as a multiple will switch to adjust the
parental switches. Children may even take advantage of the
parent’s multiplicity, although it usually works the other way.
The therapist may have to intervene to try & spare the child, if
the situation warrants it. It makes sense to point out to victims,
that people have to be accepted in the reality that they exist, and
that all the wishful thinking in the world is not going to change
them. If we want a good father, rather than destroy ourselves
wishing, a victim can find a surrogate father or a spiritual father
that has the attributes they feel a father should have. If the
surrogate or spiritual father wants the role, that’s even better.
Rather than beat one’s head against a wall that won’t change,
walk around the wall and get where you want to be. This is not
denying the power of prayer, it is simply facing the fact that
even Almighty God can’t make everyone conform to the image
He’d like them to be, because people have free will.
Page 449 ...

FLOODING, how to deal with

One of the hardest problems to deal with was flooding with
memories. Part of the flooding of memories is the result of a
flooding program that is put. The method that is used to
program it in is discussed in Vol. 2. Flooding is often the result
of improper maintenance of the the victim’s therapy. The
therapist wants a controlled release of memories and effects,
not a flood that will drown the victim in a sea of overwhelming
trauma and emotions. Remember, the amnesia walls were put in
by the mind as a survival mechanism! Removing the walls is
like removing the dikes of Holland. When the floods come they
bring dizzyness. all kinds of fears, especially the fear of death,
difficult breathing, chest pains, delusions, confusion, chills, and
heat flashes, and a terror at losing control over one’s self. When
memories come, if they can’t be processed then they can be
stored in a box. Or the memory can be shrunk by the mind to a
mote, and then kept small until the mind is strong enough to
deal with it. Then it can be enlarged to real life proportions and
processed. Another method that works well once alters have
learned it, is to place their memories on a screen. The screen
can be moved closer, or pushed away. The memory is placed on
the screen like a movie. The memory can be slowed down,
speeded up, made into a silent movie, made into a black and
white movie, freeze framed, and the sound turned down on it.
In other words, the movie screen gives the victim control over
their memory, so they can process the trauma, and regain part
of their life. The victim can relieve some of the overwhelming
nature of the flooding by having someone to talk to, even an
understanding friend such as another victim is helpful. Some
are able to journal their emotions, or do some physical activity
to blunt the effect. Standing up and getting busy, will help place
some distance between the alter and the memory. For a small
minority of alters they are capable of using prayer, meditation
or scriptures to regain encouragement and calmness. The
articles on abreactions may help in this area also. Christian
therapists will pray with their clients that memories are released
in God’s timing and not in a flood. Different programs and
memories occur at different trance levels, so the victim can go
either below or above the memory to escape an abreaction.
Therapist like to encourage victims to remember their cognitive
memory (actual event) before their affective memory (emotions
attached to the event). It is important to get the entire memory
for memory work to be effective, but the alters that can process
information logically (but not emotionally) can play an
important role in the early processing of powerful painful
memories. The emotional front alters are too easily
overwhelmed. Many people would like to avoid the pain and
have an easy salvation; unfortunately, the flesh has to be
crucified (in a sense) daily, and the victim has to face the reality
of what has been done to them. Christ warned his followers that
the life of freedom would not be easy. Sometimes victims start
pulling up emotional pain without the memories. They may
respond by turning to alcohol, compulsive eating, drugs and sex
to escape the pain. Often these escape routes are programmed
into them by the programmers. When they start acting this way,
they often quit therapy. The therapist might beat the
programming to the punch and warn their client that this may
happen, so that they don’t get discouraged, but realize it is a
common side effect or programmed effect of the emotional pain
surfacing.
Page 450 ...

GRIEF
Our father was also our programmer. As our programmer, he
set himself up as our savior, our creator, our god, and our
master. One day during our therapy, Fritz (our co-author) said
at a very timely point one of the most powerful things ever said
to our system, "Your father had a beautiful little girl, he didn’t
want a beautiful little girl. He wanted a robotic slave." Those
words cut to the marrow of the programming. Those words
reverberated down through our system for the next few years.
What was stolen from the mind-control victim that you are
working with? Their identity? Their beauty? Their life? Their
honor? Their intelligence? Their humanness? Most slaves never
get to the point that they ever realize what was stolen from
them. They never get to grieve their losses. The victim has had
the truth stolen from them. During therapy they may grieve
over this. In therapy, the victim may grieve that their master &
programmer was not the image they were programmed to see
him in, but was a sadistic person who delighted in cruelly
hurting innocent children. The programming for front alters is
meant to short circuit grief, front alters are to forgive and
forget. The therapist can give grief a voice. Grief is not an
Illuminati issue. The Illuminati bloodlines have sacrificed
humans including their own children for centuries. With such
practices there is no room for grief. Illuminati doctrines allow
the mind to trivialize death. In our notes we wrote, "The circle
or web of life is like a celtic cross looping back upon itself, and
intertwined through its own twisting and turning. The
continuity of existence is an unbroken chain linking all the
elements of the universe. In the web of life, all things share in
the same power and can exchange power, life, and
consciousness." You will find out in higher Illuminati doctrine
that a person’s being is considered simply a nucleus, a particle
of the vast universe, which creates its own light, and you lose
your separateness from the universe. When the
Mothers-of-Darkness ritually sacrificed a popular Queen
Mother, we’d miss her, but our belief (that she’d left all that she
was to the next generation, and that she’d be reincarnated, and
that she’d voluntarily given up her life), prevented us from
having a deep grieving. We would say things like, "We miss
Queen Mother, do you remember when she taught such and
such, we must not let that teaching die." We had internalized
the Queen Mother to quite an extent through the programming
and the cult, so that when she died, it felt like she lived in us.
One of our Mother-of-Darkness’s describes further how grief
gets swallowed up in the Wheel of Life philosophy of the
Illuminati, "The real or unreal are merely opposite ends of the
continuum on which reality can be stretched to include what is
normally considered unreal. Even better, the continuum, like a
flexible rod, can be bent, curved, and shaped into a circle where
the end points of reality and unreality met and become the same
point." Reality can be "demolished then reconstructed,
becoming that one part that must maintain a balance, between
the internal worlds of oppositional force, unity and
interdependence with all." When something is lost, this
philosophy doesn’t perceive it as a loss, but a refolding back
upon itself of reality. When a person chops up a potato and puts
it in a soup, you do not grieve the splitting up and death of the
potato, it is joining its life to the eater. When things are taken
apart, or die, the particles will reconstruct themselves into the
fabric of the universe, life loops back on itself linking all
elements. There is no loss. Belief in reincarnation and this kind
of philosophy eliminate the type of grieving that other people
may experience. The Illuminati (and other satanic groups) do
not allow grief. It is not an issue that is brought to the surface.
But grieving
Page 451 ...
does occur. It is buried in the emptiness of where the alter’s
hearts have been taken out via hypnotic surgery. Grief lays
silent without a voice in the mind and body. Grief lays in the
silence of hopelessness and powerlessness. When the cult
forces a child to kill another child, many children internally
grieve for the child they have been forced to kill. To save the
child’s soul, you will find that some alters will take on the pain,
the characteristics, and even the child’s soul and identity as part
of their silent grieving process. During programming, grief may
display itself as a child in a fetal position, in contrast with an
angry child yanking on the cages screaming, or a child
crouching in fear. An important key to the success of the
programming is the resignation/decomposition of the child
victim’s mind. Life inherently has fight built into it. The sperm
fights to fertilize the egg. The child fights to survive the
birthing process. The difference between resignation to a
debilitating auto accident and a struggle to survive can mean
life or death. The programmer wants to strip the child of this.
He wants unconditional surrender of the mind. When the
child’s mind enters its last struggle for its own life it is termed
DECOMPENSATION. When the mind quits fighting, and all
mechanisms of defense or escape crumble, it is called
RESIGNATION. A full-blown psychosis results from the
breakdown of the personality. Total surrender to overwhelming
events is a survival mechanism. The child surrenders to the
forces that control it and the new reality and script that are
given it. The Illuminati call this "BREAKING REALITY". The
Illuminati programmers want to take the child victim from
Reality to fantasy. At this point the child can manipulate his life
however he wants to stop the pain. The child has surrendered to
fantasy. Does a soldier grieve surrendering to the enemy to save
his life? The depth of surrender by the child is so deep, that
grief lacks a place in the new mind. The old life has been
unconditionally surrendered. Unveiling the "BREAKING
REALITY" process to the therapist is important to explain to
the therapist why the therapist will not find grief floating
around in a system. Instead, the therapist will find happy bird
alters, happy singing tree alters, happy bee alters humming and
a menagerie of other happy alters content in their fantasy
worlds. So where did the grief go? The broken spirit has moved
into the fantasy world, and the grief is so profoundly deep and
buried internally so deep that it won’t be seen. The grief goes
into the dead parts who die (a deep grief so deep that it is death)
and these parts end up in the internal graveyards, concentration
camps and other deep burial grounds. The programmers make
sure they skim off any dissociative parts that have humaness
and grief and bury them. One method to bury the grieving parts
is to have "pac-man" alters that "eat" and internalize these dead
parts come and clean them up. After the "pac-man" alters do
their job, they are put to sleep. After the grieving parts are
hypnotically buried, only the psychotic fantasy parts are left to
build the large alter systems. The programmers want the child
slave to look like other children, and the front part of the
system may be allowed to have a grieving part. For instance,
one grieving alter who held grief kept her tears internal and felt
like if she let them out of her bag of tears, which weighed
hundreds of pounds, the flood of tears would drown everyone.
The therapist may find a grieving part like this. How do you get
this part to express the grief that has been kept secret for years?
Also, the front parts of a system that hold the body day to day
may have the same griefs that other people feel. The host
personality needs the support of friends like anyone else, even
if the front parts appear very stoic. Perhaps an article Fritz
wrote on grief will be helpful to front alters who have grief to
Page 452 ...
work through. The article is meant to be a tool that can be read
by anyone to work through their grief.

BENEFITING FROM GRIEF by Fritz

Grief, each of us has our own unique trauma to grieve
about--and yet there seems to be a great deal in common in the
grieving process for everyone. Grief, it is a challenge. It comes
with feelings of sadness, guilt, anger, confusion, and fear. The
first feelings may be disbelief and confusion. Then we find that
we want to get things off of our chest, a release of the feelings.
A good friend can really help when we want to talk. Finally, the
day comes when we are able to accept what has happened and
move on with life. This doesn’t mean we no longer care about
what we grieved about, nor does it mean we’ve forgotten, it
simply means we have worked through the feelings associated
with the grieving process. There is a light at the end of the
tunnel, there is hope, there is freedom from emotional pain, but
each person has his or her own timetable and sometimes the
journey seems impossibly long. Have you tried to think things
through, and it just doesn’t happen. Grief is a releasing process,
and a healing, the heart and spirit of a person are the players to
watch, don’t expect the analytical part of the brain to score a
touchdown in this situation. The heart of a person will push
through to score, even though the analytical part of the brain
schemes and schemes. But many of us are afraid of our
feelings. We hold back our feelings, when the tears and the
grieving are what we need to heal. Blessed are those who weep,
for they will find comfort.
When we grieve, we often feel our world is falling apart, its
gone. We are isolated in a confusing world. The world made
sense, but now it doesn’t. Now we see ourselves in such a
different world. We need to be patient with the world. Faith is
the victory that overcomes such a frightening world. We must
have the faith that eventually there will be light at the end of the
tunnel. The world that has shattered like a broken mirror seems
like it can not be reconstructed. But miracles do happen
everyday--and those shattered pieces will miraculously mend
themselves in a mysterious way. When we first grieve, many of
us want to retreat from life. We find it hard to talk and be
around others. We just get through each day. Often we can
handle the truth only is small packages, so we turn to denial,
either partial or full denial to get us through. Sometimes the
best we can do is incorporate the truth at the speed that we can
internally deal with it. We know this happens to other
people--but when we grieve it seems to be an aberration.
Slowly the mind breaks down its denial. But while it does, we
wake up feeling like we’re in a nightmare. Can this really have
happened? On the one hand we want to disbelieve, yet on the
other a small voice tells us--YES, this terrible thing did happen.
One shock after another. We take the shocks as fast as we can.
Someday the denial will be gone, and the grieving will be gone.
But until then the process continues. Our feelings of love, our
good feelings are responsible for us grieving. If we had no
feelings we could not grieve. Grief is a testimony that we can
love. Grief is a neon sign that we can care for others. Grief is a
memorial that we can get close to someone. Those same
abilities to love are now causes for our pain. The weight on our
backs from the grief is really the weight of the proof that we
cared for and loved another. When we wrap our world and
intertwine our world with another, the world seems empty
when that person is gone. The disciples were heartbroken when
Jesus left them. The Holy Spirit was sent to be an
Page 453 ...
eternal comforter for mankind. Not only is the Holy Spirit there
to comfort us, but many of our brothers and sisters have gone
through suffering so that they can minister comfort to us, as
they were comforted. Maybe the world isn’t so lonely after all.
Reaching out to someone else who has suffered the same pain
as we have is often soothing. If we let people minister comfort
to us, we are giving them the chance to be like God the Holy
Spirit, the comforter. This will strengthen them spiritually as
they walk in the same direction that the Holy Comforter moves.
Some who we thought suffered with us, may not be in a place
to provide comfort. They may not realize that with only a little
better grasp of what grief is, a little extra time, and the
willingness to listen they could be so helpful. We must give
them space too. But if we reach out for help when we grieve, it
is a chance for us to feel needed and loved by the living, rather
than staring off into space, and a chance to talk, rather than
hoarding our feelings. We must give people the space to not be
helpful too. Unfortunately, the type of feelings we are hoarding
are often the same type that our friends are secretly denying
themselves. They are not able to face true emotions in anyone.
The most helpful friends are those who will take the time to
find out what we need, and will participate in helping with
those needs. A vague suggestion to travel, is not going to help
as much as if the friend gets a ticket for us and travels
somewhere with us. Sometimes while grieving we enter those
periods where we need to be touched, to be hugged, to have a
pat on the back as a friend passes by. This can mean the world
to us. When we grieve it is natural to feel alone. However,
when we grieve we can honestly come to realize that others
have also had the weight of grief on their back. So go ahead
and grieve. Grieve and grow stronger through the hours, the
days and the months. The road we each travel is our own--and
yet to be honest with life--we each must travel down a road,
and each road is filled with things to grieve about. Let us travel
down our own road. It is ours to travel. But we must be kind to
ourselves if we hope to travel down our own road, because it
will take determination and spirit to get through. We must
recognize and take care of our needs. If our needs conflict with
what others expect, we may have to clearly state our needs
without apologizing. It is our own road to travel not theirs. Its
O.K. to get help from friends. We just need to learn to verbalize
what it is that they can specifically do. Vague comments for
help during a grieving state, may end up frustrating everyone
involved. To shut ourselves off from others who can help is not
wise. When we grieve, we float through the day. But people are
resilient. They don’t sink, and after a while the floating numbly
through the day, becomes soaring and flying through the day.
The entire person grieves, the body, and the spirit and the mind.
We must minister to all of these. And yet all of these parts seem
so numb. Yet, we must allow these parts to feel. The body,
spirit, and soul need to express themselves. They need to each
groan in their own way. The body feels tired, not just
occasionally but most of the time. We must sleep and we must
eat if we are to have the strength to continue on this journey.
Even if we don’t immediately want to do these things, to
neglect our sleep or meals will only make the journey harder.
On the other hand we need to be sensitive to our new
limitations. Under the stress of grieving, we may not be up to
going to the store like we used to, but we can console ourselves
with the fact that this will only be temporary. Grief is an
emotional surgery to the heart, body, soul and spirit which
needs time to heal. Before our loss, we had settled into life a
certain way. When we lose it, our confidence in life is jolted.
And that lack of confidence develops into fear. This fear can
come from
Page 454 ...
seemingly out of nowhere, and rob us of the safe secure
feelings we had. There are many people who will ask us
questions, give flippant advice, and if we let them, they can
hurt us. However, we can choose to understand that often their
pity is the best they have to offer us, and their questions,
however thoughtless, are an outgrowth of their interest and
natural curiosity. If people say worthless things to us, then we
can discard these words into the trash. We want understanding
from others, then we need to give understanding. There are not
many people who will nurture us in silence, and just be there
silently with us. And sometimes during grieving we want to
talk, or to be talked to, but sometimes we just want silent
companionship. Grieving is healing. When we lose something
externally, sometimes we then try to internalize it. It’s as if we
are saying, "Now I’ll place it in myself and then I won’t lose
it." We may adopt the mannerisms of the person we lost, we
may in an effort to stop the pain substitute something for them.
After we heal, we will still be vulnerable to surprise triggers,
which will trigger us to remember our period of grief. First, we
must get over our loss, and then we will have to get over the
grieving memories. As individuals we have to wrestle with
powers that are greater than us. Changes in life, caused by
overpowering uncontrollable events in life, may produce strong
feelings of loneliness. If this is equation on life is written in
another way, it can also be reduced to the statement loneliness
equals a fear of life with its uncontrollable changes. The only
way to win against overwhelming situations is to take baby
steps and to deal with those situations that we can and keep
moving forward even if its only at a snails pace. Gradually, as
we step through and over the small problems, we will gain the
confidence and inner strength to face the bigger ones. Life is
brief. Many generations have come and gone. And just as a rain
storm is made up of little rain drops, God Almighty’s big plans
and His big purpose is produced through each of us tiny drops
on the panorama of time. At some point in the recovery phase
of grieving, we relearn our own happiness. We salvage what is
good in our life, and we recognize how to be happy and we
allow ourselves to be happy and move forward. In recovery we
find ways to record the past so it is not forgotten, and then turn
the focus of our minds onto the present. We can not be happy in
the past or the future, for we live only in the present. It is
possible to let go of the past without giving up caring. We can
go forward into changes, while our memories carry all that was
good of the past that we want to bring with us. Finally, as we
recover, we get to the point where we are now equipped to
comfort others. As we move forward to help them, we find that
in helping them with their grief, we further heal ourselves.
What a healing it is when we are able to be thankful for all the
wonderful things we have experienced. Some of us have had
hard lives, but most of us (there are exceptions) have something
that we can appreciate. Thank the good Lord that the earth
hasn’t jerked as it has revolved around its axis. If it had just
once, we might have seriously been hurt. We take so much for
granted. Our grief feels like it will rob us of joy forever.
Nothing seems to console. We don’t think we could ever love
anyone in the future, like the people we miss from the pass. In
the early stages of grief, we were in a fog and it was frightening
not being sure how to travel. But we learn to be patient with
ourselves, and to balance self-improvement, solitude and
involvement with others. Day by day our emotional lives
stabilize.
More and more, we bloom like a flower and we open up to the
sunshine all around us. We find new sources of love and joy.
And as we finally recover, we are amazed at how
Page 455 ...
much grief has silently taught us. We never knew we were so
strong. How did we persist in persisting. How did we get past
just floating numbly through the day? When we recover, we
surprise ourselves at that inner strength and patience we always
had but didn’t know was there. Finally, the value of choice
shines so bright. How wonderful God was in giving us choice.
Thanks to grief, we have stopped to reflect upon our lives, and
we have realized what is important. The chance to make good
choices is important. Now we realize how important. Now we
realize that we can choose and design our lives like we choose
with the new strengths we discovered through the grieving
process. We are survivors, and survivors are strong people.
Survivors have better-defined goals, fresh views, and stronger
views. We have thrown away oor masks, and we are facing life
with a fresh understanding of who we are. As we grieved we
recognized those things in life which gave us life and strength.
Now we appreciate those life-giving things. As recovered
survivors we no longer need to ask why we live, we realize the
value of living life to its fullest potential. Now we are ready to
be used of God. We are content to be alive.

GUILT, dealing with (also see art. on "Self-forgiveness)

a. In a deep contrite spirit confess your sins
b. Review the story of the prodigal son
c. Understand how Christ’s sacrifice attoned and paid for all
guilt
d. Make restoration, restitution, and reparation to those injured.

Page 456 ...

Why have millions, if not billions of dollars, been spent on
research into the mind-body interaction and hypnosis? Many
believe self-hypnosis is a tool for making changes in your life.
Others see hypnosis as a mystical hocus pocus tool to be
(mis)used by people to control others. Part of the reason
hypnosis is such a controversial subject is because the powerful
elite that control the establishment know it is extremely
powerful, that it works, and they want to keep its power out of
the hands of the people. Another reason that hypnosis is
controversial is that spiritually discerning people have realized
that there is a demonic element involved with the process. They
realize that hypnosis opens up portals in the mind for demons.
This section will attempt to lay out facts, and allow the reader
to draw their own conclusions and use whatever techniques that
seem to have the best therapeutic potential. Hypnosis is a state
of mind in which suggestions are accepted and acted upon more
powerfully than they are under normal conditions. The
Illuminati rank hypnotic trance depth from 0 to 10, where 0
equals being totally out of the trance state, and 10 equals a
comatose state. This scale is called "Jacob’s ladder". You will
find top-notch hypnotists will refer to trance depths as steps.
The reader needs to bear in mind, that the Illuminati
programmers can number the descending trance depths either
"1 to 10" or "10 to 1". The choice of which -way to number the
depths when training an alter depend on several factors. When
training a small child, they may be able to count 1 to 10 but
may not be able to reverse the count. The programmer may use
the count "1 to 10" because it is what the child can count. The
programmer may use the 0 to 10 method, as a reversal to what
other hypnotists do in the world. The programmers will use one
induction method in one area of an alter system and the reverse
(or another type) in another area to throw a therapist off track.
(For those unfamiliar with hypnotic inductions, it is common
for psychiatrists/hypnotists to induct people down
"10...9...8...7..." on down to 1. When bringing the subject up,
hypnotists at times actually refer to these levels as "steps." In
training the child to go down into trance, climbing and
descending stairs while counting is used, and the game "Chutes
and Ladders" is played. The child has often learned to trance as
a reflex to the trauma it has received even while in the womb,
so the assistant programmers only need to give these already
acquired trance states numbers. Under hypnosis, a person can
access and control areas of the mind that are normally out of
reach of the conscious mind. This also applies to victims of
mind-control, who can use the trance state to work their way
through the amnesic barriers to work with parts of the mind that
the conscious mind can’t reach.
The hypnotic trance is a naturally occurring phenomenon. Most
modern Americans walk around in a slight hypnotic trance. The
stress of the rat race, television, video games etc. contribute to
the overall trance states that Americans walk around in. Have
you ever come into a room full of people who have their eyes
wide-eyed glued to the television? They are in a trance state.
Have you ever thought about an important problem while
driving to work. You were in a trance state. Your mind was
operating on two levels at once. The spiritual danger that is
inherent in hypnosis is that it opens up the spiritual portals of
the mind. The true loving Creator of the Universe doesn’t seek
His own, because love doesn’t seek its own, but is
self-sacrificing. Yahweh God is a gentleman (so to speak) who
gently knocks at your door, and wants your conscious mind to
voluntarily decide to serve
Page 457 ...
him. The Kingdom of Demons operates just opposite of this.
Demonic entities are always trying to capture the subconscious,
to trick the mind, and to force the person into servitude. When
the mind relaxes, and lets down its natural barriers to the
subconscious, it is an open door for demonic attack. For
Illuminati programming, the best hypnotic results occur at
about 7. Some people can be hypnotically programmed at 5-6,
but some children will fight it at that level. Most will cooperate
by 7 and everyone else will be cooperative by 8. Beyond 8, the
mind and body are in a very dangerous deep trance. It may
surprise some to learn, that ALL major programs are put in at
the deepest level, level 10. The base level 10 is used for the
foundations of every program. Why? Because this level is
associated in the mind with the primal functions of life, and the
only way this programming can be tampered with is to use
drugs and a medical facility which will monitor vital signs the
entire time. Once the Illuminati have programmed in the basics
to all the programming they want, they will refine and build
upon that deep programming at other trance levels. The
programming is like an octopus with its head at level 10 and its
tentacles reaching up into the lighter trance states. Most alters
within a system will learn to stay in the mind at a level 5 trance.
The programmers will teach the alters to stay at whatever
trance level they want that alter to function at. They want the
alter to maintain its trance state. A few strong front alters may
operate at a 3 to 4. Since most people are unfamiliar with
trances, front alters appear to be normal to the outside world.
Most memories of a slave occur at a 3-4 trance state. Some
memories from deeper may float up to a 4 trance state. The
programmers are intimately aware of how memories are
connected to trance states, and they have a number of standard
tricks to prevent therapists from getting anywhere. One
standard hypnotic trick by the programmers is called a TRAP
DOOR. A program or a memory will be placed in at various
hypnotic levels. Let’s say the programmer places in a memory
at a level 4. They will then stop in the middle of what’s
happening and take the alter(s) down to an 8. The therapist
comes along and is getting parts of the memory at four, and
then the alter(s) remembering can not get anything more
because they hit the part that’s been put in at an 8. The reverse
of this, is when the programmer programs various alters that if
they hit a certain memory they are to trance deeper (or trance
higher--depending on what the programmer wants). When the
alter reacts as it has been trained, the mind skirts around the
memory and never comes to rest where the memory or program
lays. These tricks can also be coupled with the use of two
opposite induction counting systems, in other words "Jacob’s
ladder" get changed. Like moving on a ladder, the mind climbs
up or down. Should the therapist decide to use hypnosis with
the victim, they should consider using a hypnotic tone of voice
that is appropriate to what the victim will respond to.
Sometimes hypnotists take control in a military voice as if they
are the father figure, and some times they are very soothing as
if they are the mother figure. In general, the maternal approach
works best, although Hollywood and stage hypnotists like the
more impressive authoritarian approach. Hypnosis can be
related to the unconscious memories of being put to sleep as a
child. This is why the programmer or handler will place himself
into the role of putting the child victim to sleep. Brahm’s
Lullaby is a favorite for hypnotists for inducing a trance. There
is a strong tendency in many people to be submissive and to
look for a savior figure, a daddy figure to guide them through
life. Self-hypnosis has at times lessened the dependence upon
the victim for the authority figure that comforted and
Page 458 ...
soothed the victim with his hypnotic voice during the
programming. Don’t forget that the victim has been
trauma-bonded with the hypnotic programmer, and has had a
programming experience where drugs and hypnosis were used
to give the victim a feeling of blissful, ecstatic merging with the
programmer. The alter trusts the programmer totally. The alter
will transfer that trust to the therapist, or if taught control over
their own trance states learns to transfer power back to
themselves. If a mind-controlled slave works toward
developing the ability to self-trance so that they can regain
power over the slave’s system, the person will have to
overcome several obstacles. The programmers lay in
programming to prevent alters from doing their own thing, or
allowing other people to hypnotize them. Imagery which uses
the senses of smell, touch, hearing and even taste are powerful
for hypnosis. Being able to construct visual images in your
head is also a valuable tool of hypnosis. If the therapist and
victim decide they want to use self-hypnosis to gain control
over the victim’s life, such as learning to change negative
self-talk into positive self-talk, to overcome fears and anxiety,
or to quit a programmed habit, then imagery and visualization
will work in the same powerful manner as they did when they
were used in a negative way to enslave the person. Finally,
there are some victims who will have serious qualms about
hypnosis. They object that it smacks to much of being
"cult-like" and that if-has demonic side-affects. If the victim
does not feel comfortable with hypnosis, the therapist needs to
respect that. It is quite possible that hypnosis falls into the
category of things one doesn’t strive to do, but sometimes is
needed. In the Old Testament, God didn’t want to have to kill
His Creation with a flood, indeed He gives as one of the Ten
Commandments "Thou shalt not kill." and yet, He inspired
Solomon to write, "To everything there is a season, A time for
every purpose under heaven: A time to be born, And a time to
die; A time to plant, And a time to pluck what is planted; A
time to kill, And a time to heal; A time to break down, And a
time to build up...A time to love, A time to hate; A time of war,
And a time of peace." ECC. 3:1
The ministers who have rejected hypnosis, even self-hypnosis,
as a possible tool to help victims of mind-control usually have
little concept of how much of the victim’s splintered
dissociative mind lives and operates in trance. We would
encourage people to view self-hypnosis as a trance state that is
to be used as a means to freedom, not a way of life. As to the
objection that the trance state opens one up for demonic attack,
so do many other things in life, such as travelling as a
missionary to a pagan country. The bottom line is that the
missionary opens himself up for attack because he is trying to
give life, and the use of hypnosis can only be justified if it is
being used in a way that is consistent with giving life and
freedom, and life-more-abundant.
SERIOUS UNADDRESSED ISSUES AT THE DEEPEST
HYPNOTIC LEVELS
At the time this is being written, there are millions of people
world-wide with end-time programming. This Illuminati
mind-control programming has been put in at the deepest levels
of the mind. The end-time programming concerns those events
that are to happen to usher in the reign of the Anti-Christ. This
author is sad that she obediently played a role of helping
program this end-time programming into young slaves. What
has this to do with hypnosis? Because so far therapists and
ministers have only played with the surface issues. Therapists
will only deal with issues that clients talk about, and most
ministers only deal with surface issues they consider important.
There are lots of slaves and Vietnam Viets, who have
programming layered in at the deepest hypnotic levels for the
end times, and no one is doing anything about it.
Page 459 ...
End-time programming will resemble the following. Some
teams will assemble to carry out missions, sometimes the
missions will be one-way missions like the Manchurian
candidate. Some individuals will perform acts of violence and
may end up getting themselves killed. Some of the hierarchy
systems will go back to the cult and flip their system from
being Christian into being day-to-day Satanists. The world will
have an anti-Christian fad, where everyone will seem to be
turning to the occult and hating Christians. Systems, which
have Christian fronts, believe that they can pray and resist the
final call-back. These type of prayers are similar to praying for
someone else. It will still be that other person’s choice as to
what they do, and in this case, the persons (alters) with
end-time programming have this programming attached to the
primal part of the mind, that part which regulates such things as
the heart beat. Faith overcomes the world (& by extension the
New World Order.) Just as people we pray for still travel
directions we don’t like, unfortunately alters with end-time
programming may well travel directions contrary to our
prayers. Still total faith in an omnipotent God is far better than
no faith. The mind of the survivor is like a computer where the
operator snaps the mouse on an icon and then shifts into
another enviroment, and continues to move into subsequent
areas of programming. Hypnosis could be used as a tool to
move down through these "Monarch mind-control computer
icons. Although lots of victims of mind-control have come in to
therapists for help, very little work has been done to go down
the various computer paths and get into the hidden information
that is stored everywhere within an alter system. Deliverance
work has been done with a number of victims by a number of
Christian therapists, where the Christian therapists were able to
use spiritual techniques to break down the walls to get into
areas of a system. The co-author’s of this book believe that
some deep work with end-time programming may need
hypnotic drugs and medical supervision, in spite of our
experience in seeing some success without going to this
extreme.
Page 460 ...

IDENTITY, discovering it
All non-multiple persons as children have ego states that
develop and are integrated as time goes on into a more and
tighter cohesive package. Most of the lines between the
different states disappear after age one, and the child goes on to
develop a single identity. With programmed multiples, the
deeper alters, such as spin kittens, will be depersonalized to
such an extent that they will have no sense of self. They will
also have no sense of reality. Some alters have a 2-D world,
where time does not exist in their concept of reality. However,
deeper kitten alters, for instance, will not even have that. They
have been stripped of even a concept of reality. When they hold
the body everything is surreal and clouded by the hypnotic state
they exist in. Out-of-body experiences, feelings that everyone
else in the world is unreal, thoughts that one is dead are all
classified in psychology as depersonalization. A normal
Illuminati system will have many parts that are depersonalized.
Reality for a spin kitten is but a facade. Can you blame such an
alter? Whenever they are used they receive tremendous abuse
in the outside world’s reality. It is better that they consider
reality to be the walls that they live in along with the internal
world they have created for themselves. Reality is being pulled
between life and death, and they need to try and find a balance.
-These deeper depersonalized alters need a new birth into the
truth, they need an exodus experience out of their identity as a
slave, into a new promised land. This again is why the safety of
the slave is essential for progress. Why should a severely
traumatized alter, which regularly receives the worst abuse
imaginable when they hold the body, want to give up the
comfort of their internal world, and come live in the rest of the
world’s reality--if it means more abuse. The children of Israel
wanted to go back to Egypt where as slaves they had some
certainty. To get a new identity away from slavery is a
challenge. There are many parallels that can be drawn between
the children of Israel finding their freedom and identity as a
people and a group of alters discovering who they are.
Sometimes alters can help each other, and sometimes families
of alters get into internal feuds. Sometimes a single alter can
sabotage the hard work of many alters. Notice how God had
Moses give the tribes back their history and ancestry. Soon
each person could identify himself as a member of a family that
gave him a sense of belonging. Each tribe had a flag. God also
insisted that they break from the past. The alter who has lost its
identity needs to learn to walk, to feel, to see, to hear beyond
the programming. It needs to learn the who, when, where &
how of who he or she is. The therapist may say, "You are not a
princess," or "You are not a snowy fluffy white kitten." "Your
identity is your birthright." "You’re human, that’s really where
the truth is." It will be hard for such an alter. Everything they
thought was real, was fantasy. And reality is extremely painful,
so painful that it is beyond words, it is but a deep anguish. But
the alter needs to break its old ties to the slave’s master, break
all soul ties, and unshackle himself or herself from the lies.
Then the therapist can teach them their strengths, and they can
begin to find some self-respect in who they were when the
system was born, and who they are becoming, and who they are
as God sees them. Therapists will try to promote the humanism
within an alter, by referring to it in human terms, such as saying
"family of alters" rather than the cult’s terminology "litter of
kittens". Doing this may be helpful to the overall cumultive
effect of showing alters their humaness, but it doesn’t need to
be done in a legalistic fashion.
Page 461 ...

IMPLANTS, dealing with

The people who are using implants for mind-control aren’t
about to tell us what they are doing, and they certainly haven’t
obtained the victims’ permission for their sadistic behavior.
They haven’t spent trillions of dollars researching, designing
and installing these black budget and secret projects, if they
weren’t convinced that they work. They are trying hard to get
implant technology to the point it is tamper proof.
The controllers seem to think they are above accountability.
The various implants aren’t the stuff of sci-fi or delusions, their
reality can be documented from real sources. Tracking implants
are being put into our children and our dogs by people who
want to "help" us not lose anything. Any bozo can purchase
human tracking implants today & use them on their fellow man.
After you’ve gotten over your denial that this is happening you
are ready to deal with the unfortunate reality that we live in.
The achilles heel of the NWO is that they have too many things
to control and keep track of. This is why they use computers.
Computers with artificial intelligence may be able to play chess
and make decisions, but they are not superior to the human
mind, and you as a human still have a chance to outsmart them.
The human, whose mind is being read, can think in codes and
speak in codes. The NWO does not have the manpower to
control their implant victims with human handlers 100% of the
time.
IDENTIFY WHO
Thousands of implants victims (& electronic mind-control) are
looking for help, some of them have approached the two
co-authors for help. Some have given up fighting the implants.
Some have bought into the flimsy cover stories that their syntel
handlers try to give them to cover up who is actually
controlling them. For instance, implant victims, who obviously
have American handlers, are being told that their handlers are
Iranians who hate America, or the Japanese who are trying to
repay America for Hiroshima, or the Russians, etc. The first
step is to recognize who your handlers are. 100% of the implant
victims in this country who knew enough clues to provide clues
were victims of American organizations. The Germans, the
Swedish, the English, the Russians and who knows who else
are all putting implants into people. Fritz has lived in several
continents and can spot Americanisms immediately. One of the
victims which we know, Carole Price, is also aware of
Americanisms. The handlers of implant victims in this country
have been obviously Americans. So the first step is to recognize
that if you are an American, and your problem developed in
this country, don’t blame aliens, whether from overseas or from
outer space. The supposed alien implants in this country that
alien abductees keep discovering have continually gotten more
sophisticated. The hard fact is that it is our own secret
government as part of the NWO, not aliens that are subjecting
us to these implants. Now we have identified the basics of the
question "who?". Refer back to the list of abuser organizations
in Vol 2 page 18 for a comprehensive list of specifically what
organization might be involved. Yes, there is even evidence
that groups like Division 5 of the FBI are involved in this type
of mind-body control. Also realize that many syntel implants
are being controlled by artificial intelligence in computers most
of the time. Try outsmarting the machine by doing
unpredictable things.
IDENTIFY WHAT
If you are an implant victim begin journalling what is
happening to you. Begin sharing your experiences with other
people who understand that implants are being used. Go to a
spectrum analyzer and find out what signals are being sent. Go
to an anechoic chamber and
Page 462 ...
find out where the signals are coming from. Get heat
thermography done of your body and find out the locations of
implants that way. Map out where the pain occurs. Pin point
where your master implant is located. Knowledge of what is
happening will help you and others fight what they are doing to
you.
DE-ACTIVATING IMPLANTS
Because a variety of implants are being employed by the NWO,
there is no set answer to what is going to work. A person is
going to have to discover if the implant is metallic, plastic, a
virus, carbon-based or whatever. If you can identify how the
implant is working--you have a chance to counter it. If you can
get yourself to a location where they cannot get signals to &
from the master implant, then they will lose track of you. Every
few minutes they monitor the exact location of where the
victim is. Their tracking computers will soon learn if they have
lost track of where you are. That is fine. When they lose track,
stay out of their signals long enough to get over 25 miles out of
range, and they may lose track of what area you are in. How
long you as an implant victim can remain out of their signals
depends on where you are willing to go and what you are
willing to do. A code activates some of the main implants on a
body suit of implants. Many have some kind of safety feature to
prevent someone from activating them who is a non-approved
user. It is speculation at this point, but some of these implants
may self-destruct if a person is able to make the implant think it
were being tampered with by a non-approved user. If the main
implant that controls other implants of a body suit is shut down
it might bring a general relief to the victim. FOR VIRUS
IMPLANTS. There are some antibiotics, some colloidal metals
like colloidal silver, and perhaps some juices like cranberry
juice that may destroy a virus implant. Certain juices or
substances might change the body’s chemistry. An implant
victim might test several things and see if they can find one that
throws the body’s system off.
FOR METALLIC LIKE IMPLANTS.
There are a few honest surgeons (they are far more rare than
any one would at first imagine) that will take out implants.
Although Fritz and I have heard of a number of these surgeons,
we do not give out their names.
FOR ELECTRONIC IMPLANTS. Some victims have blasted
their implant(s) with some type of electromagnetic energy to a
degree that they blew the implants. Other victims have found
some relief from lead shields. The woman who makes lead suits
to protect people is:
Shirley S. Still, 680 W. Rose St., Lebanon, OR, 97355. The
company that produces lead shields using her patent #5,038,047
is Shielding, Inc. International, P.O. Box Z, Madras, OR
97741-0069. ph. no. 541-475-7211, Fax 541-475-6628.
COVERING ONESELF.Implant victims have covered
themselves with cages of various metallic substances & other
things to isolate themselves from the electronic control. The
newer implants are nearly impossible to isolate from, but
implant victims should certainly try.
FOR FIBER OPTICS. Fiber optics are often like hairs. The
victim should look for suspicious looking hair, such as in the
pubic area--better yet, simply shave. Some victims have pulled
or shaved off their fiber optic implants.
One victim of implants provided this list to search out &
destroy implants:
1. Electro-Magnetic Forcefields of Interference
a. by going to a cable co. & walking around the area of the live
satellite dishes. At a safe point, place both hands onto a live
satellite dish.
b. try the same at a telephone co.
c. to a utility co. electric transfer Pt. & walk around the area.
If the victim’s implants respond to this type of countermeasure,
they will experience a pulling sensation, which is a positive
sign. Standing near a TV as it is repeatedly turned on & off
may create interference with the implants too.
Page 463 ...
2. Full Body Electo Magnetic Scanner
3. Full Body MRI with contrast
4. Gas Chromatography, Toxic Light Chromatography, Mass
Spectrotography, & Blood analysis.
5. Mason Receivers
6. Non Linear Detectors
7. Pherigen Test
8. Spectrum Analyzers.
This victim recommends that if you have a telephone charging
device in your home, reprogram it if possible each day, for the
telephone can be one of the main power sources of implants.
THE BIGGER PICTURE.
Most victims of implants need to get the bigger picture. They
need to find out what the Illuminati are and who the Illuminati
bloodlines are. They need to learn who to trust and who not to
trust. They need to learn about trauma-based mind-control
because our experience has been that most implant victims are
also victims of trauma-based mind-control. They need to realize
that ALL phones in this nation are listened to. They need to
understand that voice identification programs allow computers
to identify who is talking over a phone by your voice.
We wish we had all the answers, but we don’t. We can report
that we have seen some victims get some temporary (short
term) relief from implant control, which gives us hope that if all
of us pull together and exchange what we are attempting to do,
and what we learn that we will defeat them. Unfortunately,
many implant victims are people who they have identified as
isolated and without a support system. Perhaps the first step
might be for victims to break their isolation, learn how to be
good friends with others, and step out of the corner that the
NWO has backed each of them into.
INTEGRATION, understanding
For years the goal of therapy has been "to integrate" the
multiple. We believe that a more realistic and advantageous
goal would be to allow the victim’s system to decide upon what
form of functional unit they want to be, whether that is a
well-organized company, or a close-knit family, or a single
identity. The goal is to stabilize and create a functioning
"person". Everyone, non-multiples included, consist of
competing parts in their minds. Even the great saint Paul, who
God used so powerfully, said I do that which I don’t want to do.
Hollywood movies and several popular books have promoted
unrealistic expectations that programmed multiples can simply
do some integration work and be done. Support people use two
words "integration" and "fusion" to describe various stages of
the crumbling of dissociative barriers between alters. At one
end of the spectrum is what is called "an apparent partial
fusion" and at the other end is "full integration." Many
programmed multiples terminate their therapy before the
therapist has much of an idea what the therapist is looking at.
Because the front parts of a system are amnesiac to the deeper
levels, there have been numerous cases where clients fully
believed they were integrated, but the client was unaware of the
numerous levels of alters hidden away. Nor will they probably
ever detect these levels. Is multiplicity the real problem of
programmed slaves, or is their slavery the real problem? The
therapists have had a tendency to want to rescue the slave from
their multiplicity while not rescuing them from their slavery.
The multiplicity is the slave’s principal survival mechanism for
enduring the slavery. The issues of safety for these DID (MPD)
slaves are still not being addressed, even after over a century of
examination by psychologists on DID. Not only do we have
problems within DID clients, but we have problems within the
professional community.
Page 464 ...
Some therapists have decided that multiples are refusing to
integrate because they like the attention they get from the
therapist (or others) being a multiple. While this may occur, it
strikes us as premature for most therapists to judge the victim
this way, when they still have such a limited grasp of the
programming and the other features of mind-control. Most
therapists still do not even recognize that there is a World Order
that is controlled by the abusers. Some Counselling courses are
teaching their students that multiplicity gives a person a
superiority over people who are non-multiples, because it gives
them a broader repertoire of actions and abilities. When Fritz
took counselling, his college instructor encouraged all
would-be counsellors to create a pseudo-type of multiplicity.
When a multiple system develops a high degree of internal
cooperation and communication between various alters and
levels, they may feel compelled to hold onto the system’s
multiplicity because it gives them such a wide amplitude of
actions, and makes accountability more difficult. Even though
there are distinct advantages (or at least what appear to be
distinct advantages), there are times for all programmed
multiples when their multiplicity is simply "hell". Fusion is
generally a process. It is similar to two people getting to know
each other’s lives. A full integration is when they become one.
Is this becoming one like two people marrying, or is it like two
bodies/brains actually physically merging? A full integration is
the complete merger of the two dissociative parts of the mind,
however, much of what is called "integration" is really more
like the marriage of two individuals--and the reader knows that
divorces do happen, in the external world and they also happen
between alters that "integrate" in this fashion. The longer the
marriage the more chance for the union.
While it is true that as long as there is dissociation left and
alters, the Network has a foothold to exploit; but another reality
is, even if the person integrated fully, the threat that the
Network could grab the person and manipulate his or her mind
still exists. Again the question must be asked, "What is the
primary problem, the multiplicity or the slavery?" The primary
block to integration is programming. And the programming is
held in place by demonic entities, lack of safety, dissociation,
force of habit, alters who believe they want the programming,
and the core splits and the core. While we will not go into the
full details of how integration-blocking programs are put in, the
therapist needs to understand that the client has received lots of
heavy programming not to integrate. Trying to integrate doesn’t
feel like moving to safety, it feels like moving toward death,
and if the support team is not careful, trying to integrate alters
could easily result in triggered suicide programs actually being
acted out. The therapist tells the client in glowing terms how
happy they will be to integrate, but the client only feels the
death programs that are attached to any thoughts of integration.
It seems that therapists could be more discrete and get what
they want to accomplish through the back door, rather than
tearing down the house trying to get through a booby-trapped
front door. One of the best ways is to tell a story (such as Jesus
did, and Milton Erickson did) that by-passes the grid of mental
resistance and reaches the subconscious heart of a person’s
thought processes. Creating these kinds of stories allow the
therapist to develop his or her own creativity. The stories do not
even need to be fiction, they just need to be anecdotes that
evoke the subconscious to make the connection to the moral,
without the mind’s resistance to change being triggered. For
instance, there was once a man who found a piece of glass
while he was walking. It was so beautiful. Later, he found a
gemstone while he was out in the woods. Over a period of time
he found many beautiful things and he put them together in a
mosaic. The different colors of the gems worked so well
together that they created a masterpiece, for the unified whole
was far superior to the beauty of the individual pieces.
Back to Contents Next
Page 465 ...

INTERNAL INFORMATION, how to get i.i.

The great philosophers have encouraged men to "Know
thyself." Self-awareness is easier said than done; it is hard for
anyone to crawl into one’s own head to see how it works. Our
conscious minds reveal precious little about how our conscious
thoughts surface from deep in the mind. Whether one is a
multiple or not, the mind does a great deal of thinking without
thinking about it. Many of the important articles of my second
half to this book have been devoted to how to get internal
information, for instance:

· Communication Issues
· Fear issues
· Trust Issues
· Alters, deep, how to work with d. a.
· Biography
· Dreamwork
· Hypnosis, self, ins & outs
· Mapping
The material we have provided on structuring will give many
insights into how the Illuminati slave’s system is set up. As you
may know, things begin with the four elements & then are
layered outward like an onion. The entire thing fits together like
a 3-D puzzle. The grid that the handler carries with him, will
spell out the who, where, what and why of the system.
Everything in the system represents something. Simple things
can often be important pieces. This article deals with learning
how the client’s mind works. We’ll provide a few more specific
insights on how to get internal information, in addition to the
above articles. Initially, the client’s mind is working on trust.
Information will begin flowing once some trust is established.
Build the trust first. Initially, the therapist will be trying to
establish if the person is a programmed DID. Once that is
secure in the therapist’s mind, the therapist can begin assisting
the client to discover what he can not find without the aid of the
support team about how the client’s mind is working. And a
giant puzzle begins to be assembled. One of the most difficult
things to achieve is a coherent chronology of the person’s life.
As more and more information is journalled and recorded the
puzzle will piece itself together. Of course, the therapist needs
to take good notes, or have an assistant do this. It is often
beneficial for the principle alters involved in therapy to see the
notes. Another way to do this is to have the sessions tape
recorded and let the system go home with the tape and see if
they can build upon what was in the session. The slave’s mind
is programmed to believe that they will die if anything about
the internal world is learned or seen. When information is
recovered and they survive its recovery they expose the lie. It
will be uncomfortable for alters to go against the programming,
but they will soon demonstrate to themselves that they will not
be dead the next day for learning about their programming.

Assisting the victim to see.

Some therapists are having great success teaching primary
alters how to do self-hypnosis in order to trance deep. By doing
this, alters can go down and retrieve information. Another way
to get information is simply to speak through to the
subconscious. The therapist wants to make each alter feel
relaxed. Alters in deep trance states & deep kitten alters may
feel more comfortable with dim lighting. One can’t
automatically assume that alters will feel most comfortable
laying on a couch. Sometimes that feels too close to when they
were programmed. Alters should be allowed to choose where
they feel most comfortable, on a chair, a couch, or in a corner.
They can be allowed to find the place they will feel safest in.
Often when the client goes looking, the host alter simply does
not see its internal world. During the therapy, there will be a
sense that
Page 466 ...
something exists there, but the client will not know how to tag
it. You know how you have a nagging thought that you have
left something behind, but the description of whatever it was,
has not surfaced? Many times all the victim is aware of, is that
something seems to be there. To deal with this, the alters can
turn lights on, shine the light of the Holy Spirit on things, put
windows in, reconfigure mirrors so they can be rotated, or are
made from 1-way mirrors into 2-way mirrors. Then the images
that come through 2-way mirrors can be enlarged until
something comes into view. Many times, with the Alice In
Wonderland programming, things behind mirrors are small
specks in the grass. Perhaps they see only Mr. Nobody. Like
the song, ‘Your nobody called today...", the fact that Mr.
Nobody is there is a clue that he is there. (Figuring out Mr.
Nobody is common sense, he is mentioned just to remind us
how things are hidden.)
Difficulties, pre-existing & created.
As a programmed multiple is worked with, they may seem calm
on the outside, while all hell is breaking loose on the inside.
One of the triggers that therapists often unnecessarily push is
that they talk about how the alter is part of the whole. The alters
will discover this for themselves. But every time the therapist
verbalizes it, they trigger programming, and then various alters
get triggered & upset. They feel like their I.D. is being taken
away. They do need to learn that they are part of a whole, but it
can be learned quietly over a period of time. The mind will
slowly assimilate the reality of it. Occasionally, alters will give
a therapist a concocted answer to deflect more questions.
Another difficulty is that the therapist and alters will almost
always discover the cover story & the cover programming first.
There is an art to asking questions to multiples and an art to
interpreting the answers. It’s O.K. for the victim to only have
pieces. It’s O.K. for the victim to change things as progress is
made. Initially, the front alters will be trying to work through a
great deal of false memories, planted thoughts, and
programming. There is a knowing in the mind, between a
planted thought and a real one. This knowing is hard to
describe, but part of this knowing is the difference in impact a
real trauma memory has in comparison to a false memory
attached to a stringer of programming. The false memory will
have emotions attached, but the intensity is much less, and
these emotions do not linger like the impact of real traumas.
After a while the victim will begin to discern the difference
between the real and the false. A standard trauma for children is
to lock them in a trunk, and dump the trunk into a body of
water where a.the trunk fills with water, b. the child drowns,
and c. is resuscitated in time to not suffer brain damage. How
does the victim’s mind remember this? The young child doesn’t
have a fully developed ability to anticipate. They have been
locked in boxes before. From having debriefed children of
these traumas, it is manifest that they never remember
the drowning (which takes anticipation), what they remember
crystal clear is the terror of being locked in a dark box (which
connects with their memories of similar traumas). The
emotional affect of this trauma will be dissociated. Another
reason why information processing slows down is that
information is not processed with its affect, its emotional
content. After the therapist asks, "What do you see?" he can
ask, "How does this make you feel?" By encouraging the
feelings, the memories get worked on rather than being stuffed.
When memories get stuffed, then the next layer of memories is
harder to reach.
At times when a particular area of a system is worked in, the
client may feel certain feelings. "Why do you feel certain ways
when you work on certain areas?" And if that feeling is "I’m
bad", then rewrite a reverse program, so that each time the alter
hears "I’m bad", it hears
Page 467 ...
& thinks "I’m good." The programmers depend upon the mind
not wanting to believe itself. When one dissociated part of the
mind creates something, the other parts are not in touch with
that creation. For instance, parts create their home or
environment that they live in. If another part were to try to get
in touch with that internal home, it all seems like hearsay,
second hand information. If you were the fourth born son, you
would not remember the first few years of the first born son’s
life! It is no different for the fourth split to try to get in touch
with the first split’s history. It was created afterwards & it has
none of the early memories of the first split. The client asks the
therapist, "You want me to believe I have rivers, if there are
rivers there, then why don’t I know?" If the therapist is not
careful, the client (unable to see the internal world) may think
the therapist is a wee bit crazy. You may get responses such as
"What’s a castle?" "Why would I want to go into a graveyard,
and dig up old bones? That’s scary." Some directions are not in
the best interest of the therapy. It is not advisable to get the
castle librarian. It is more important not to destablize the
system, than any good that would be achieved in this direction.

Where to search for information.

The multiples’ mind will play a mental hide and seek with the
therapist. The therapist is looking for holes in which to work
through the system. Make a guess, and investigate it with some
shrewd test. Try by-passing programming roadblocks with
ambiguous statements, that the victim’s mind has to put into its
own context. Much of what we hear in life is ambiguous,
except that it is said in some context. Without a given context,
the mind has to find one of its own. This is the science of how
the mind represents ideas inside its mind. The therapist can gain
insights if they will talk to the fear & talk to the anxiety. These
emotions may be hiding parts behind them. When a particular
alter is having a panic attack, the particular alter may not be
able to see the alter with the panic emotions behind it. When
you find an alter, main alters may have several roles for the
outside world, and several internal jobs. Special purpose
fragments, who have no history, are simply parts for a
particular job. The therapist can ask questions such as, What
does such & such smell smell like? The therapist can talk about
their phobias & about their reactions to different foods. If the
system has done or will do art work, and if the therapist will
talk long enough about it, then they are likely to get someone
pop up who can tell you about it. Questions like, "What do you
see in the mind?" encourage the alters to start seeing what is
happening in their internal world.
Therapists should look for the blue rooms, which are balancing
points and a good place to start on each level. The magical
room is a room full of gidgets and gadgets. There will be 26
rooms, two for each color. Look for the trees, such as "Do you
have any trees in your system? Ask your mind." One novel way
to gain insights into a client, would be for the client to give a
signed release to the therapist on paper that the therapist can
come to the client’s house and observe in order to understand
better what the client is all about, and what the situation is for
the client. Another novel way to by-pass programming and to
give dehumanized alters a sense of who they are is to give their
handwriting to a graphoanalyst for a handwriting analysis.
Page 468 ...

JOBS, new ones for alters

During the work on a system, there are different opportunities
to encourage alters to step away from their programming, and
carry out another job, role or task. Sometimes when the
programming has collapsed, it has been appropriate to give
alters new garments & new internal jobs. (This is also useful in
delineating between demonic alter imitations -demonic
constructs--and real alters.) In cases where the programming
has entirely collapsed but the alters are not at a place to
integrate, mt. schools can be set up for alters to get to know
each other & learn new ideas. In terms of working with a
particular alter, the therapist can inquire about what the alter’s
internal job & history is, and what the alter can do besides that.
Often the alter will say that there is nothing else he/she is
interested in. But if the alter has creativity, the therapist may be
able to direct that creativity in a new direction. If the alter is
afraid of a particular task, the therapist might be able to use the
alter’s creativity for he/she to mentally rehearse the job that it
fears, where the alter takes control & has a positive outcome.
This mental rehearsing may be enough of a calmer for the alter
to successfully succeed at the new but feared non-programmed
task. If an alter learns a new job, or role or task, he/she in turn
can be an internal team leader to teach things to other alters. He
can be the eyes for those alters that still need to learn how to
function in the outside world in some task. Deeper alters will
have only experienced the outside world in a programmed state.
To take the body in an unprogrammed state will be a sharper
experience, and the body will feel different. They will need to
have their confusion over norms and boundaries clarified. They
will have to slowly learn that they can handle a new
responsibility. The rest of the alters will watch, and they will
have to show that they can earn respect in the way they take on
the new responsibility.
Page 469 ...

JUSTICE SYSTEM, dealing with the broken j.s.

The reader is probably not surprised that anyone who has the
audacity to write about how to deprogram multiples also has an
article on how to deal with the justice system. Writing about the
justice system could take a book, and choices of titles might be,
"How to ride a dead horse." "How to jump into quicksand." or
"How to win by trial and error." We really don’t have any good
advice about "justice", in fact in terms of legal advice we don’t
have any--except to say stay as far a way from legal problems
as possible. And most of the readers already knew that. So now
that the reader knows that we are all on common ground--or
should we say, legal quicksand, we are relieved of any burden
to actually accomplish anything in this article, which is about
the way you will feel about the legal system once you get
involved with its fast-as-molasses process. When dealing with
lawyers, it helps to repeat the following mantra, "My time is
not important. Time is very important for lawyers." Most
people have poor methodology when searching for a good
lawyer. Looking for a good lawyer is like looking for a good
therapist, and if you don’t find the former you may want to find
the latter. Since most people have plenty of time on their hands,
we suggest that you go down to the courthouse and watch
lawyers in action. This is probably the best way to see how
your prospective lawyer functions. Lawyers are modern-day
gladiators, at least that is what we want them to be. One
supreme court justice said 50% of the lawyers are incompetent
to work in the courts, and the bar association defended lawyers
by counter claiming that the figure is only 20% are
incompetent. Whatever figure you want to believe in is
irrelevant, because the blindfolded lady who was holding the
scales disappeared long ago while the lawyers had their backs
turned litigating. If you poke and prod a gooey mess on the
ground, you will finally figure out what the solution is. We
figure that with enough prodding, the reader will finally figure
something out. Most of the time, they conclude that the lawyer
ripped them off. The lawyer didn’t create the mess
(well--maybe they did historically--but your lawyer didn’t
personally create the mess the judicial system is in--he is just
like you, trying to figure out how to ride a dead horse. The only
difference is that he gets paid a large fee to do it.) You have to
watch your lawyer bills, some lawyers have abnormal
calculators. Try to find a lawyer that you can communicate
with, and who is honest, and who is on the same wavelength as
you. At this point you’re probably feeling that you’re in a lot of
trouble. And that is the whole point of this, we’re in a heap of
trouble. The roots of our freedoms are being killed. The Bill of
Rights is essentially a dead tree, waiting to be cut up and hauled
off. So what are your chances of success with the legal system?
I guess we all need to take a hard look at our dead horse, and
give it a proper burial, and see if we can substitute a live one
into its place. The problem is that the legal system is in the
unique position of being granted the power to justify itself
legally. If you thought you were going to get an answer on this
page--well, we did experientially, you got as much here as you
will likely get in the justice system, and it cost a lot less. Now
how’s that for a great deal!
Page 470 ...

MAPPING
The subject of mapping a system concerns the task of putting
down on paper how the mind of the victim has been structured.
It goes almost without saying that the therapist should be
familiar with what has been written by the authors of this book
in both this book and the Vol. 2 Formula book. The information
in our books will take out lots of guesswork on mapping a
system. If one understands programmed DID (MPD), one will
immediately know numerous items & alters that a system will
have to have. Just as common sense teaches us that a particular
type of farm will have particular items, likewise an IlIum,
system HAS to have many of the items we have described in
detail. For instance, on a regular 13 x 13 grid of programs, the
first square typically named 6.6 will have the program SEE NO
EVIL, DO NO EVIL, HEAR NO EVIL--No-talk type messages
linked to a suicide program. The alters will have both an
internal world created for them, as well as a secret code grid. ln
both the internal world and within the grid, will be demonic
interjects, demonic constructs. Within both the computer grids
and the alters worlds, there will be a center point upon which
things will collapse, but can be rebuilt by the subconscious
mind which is still programmed. The structuring is a layering
effect. The assistant programmers will have the small child
write scribbles, because the scribble designs are important for
the subconscious. The structuring begins in the subconscious.
There are many reasons why mapping is important. First, many
alters will be in denial that they are part of a multiple
personality system. They need to break their denial to move
forward. Second, many alters are unaware of how their system
is constructed. They need to discover their structure to begin
alter communication. Third, for the skilled therapist, there are
approaches that can be taken to get past surface programs to
erase large sections of programs. Fourth, as the therapist tries to
organize the vast amount of information & notes they take, it is
very helpful to be able to use the preexisting organization of the
client, in order to file information. If the therapist does not keep
track of the structure, they will have a pile of disorganized
notes. Fifth, mapping will expose positions of alters, who may
otherwise remain undiscovered due to their oaths of silence.
Initially, the therapist must build trust. The therapist may want
to work at this before the entire support team is brought
together. Trust is the foundation for mapping. It will flow down
through a system and work like a protective cover. The victim
needs to begin to journal, do art work, or if possible talk to the
therapist. There will be powerful "no-talk" programs, like the
one just mentioned on the 6.6 cell on the alpha grid. Somehow,
in whatever fashion will work, the victim will need to
circumvent the no-talk programs and the suicide programs, to
begin to discover him or her self. The alters can begin to do a
history, who are they, what has happened to them, what is their
job, why were they "born", how old are they, etc. Many of the
front alters will at best only be aware of 4 or 5 of themselves.
All parts of a programmed multiple are important to recovery.
Each part needs to discover what family of alters it belongs to,
and how it can interact & communicate with others. Becoming
co-conscious with each other is a powerful step toward
defeating the programming. Alters can not truly be eliminated
from the mind of a programmed multiple, because they are a
dissociated part of the mind. That is why the programmers
build dumping places for "dead" alters and other unusable
parts, and fragments. Demonic introjects can be cast out, and
indeed need to be. Ministers that try to tidy up the mind of
programmed multiples by casting out alters have caused untold
misery to many victims. At best, they have simply caused the
Page 471 ...
front host alter to go into denial that the system still has many
alters. This greatly aids the programmers and handlers, because
this is what they want to happen. Working on an alter system
with programming running is very difficult. It is like working
on an airplane that is flying. The therapist begins to feel like an
acrobat, trying to carry out skillful stunts. It is understandable
how for temporary purposes, the therapist may tell the victim:
"your mind created that, it can do away with that." Alters,
landscapes, programs, etc. are simply constructs of the mind. If
the person’s mind will accept the removal of a mental image,
the therapist may want to use such abilities to gain some control
over the "flying airplane" that they want to ground so they can
work on it. But removing alters, computers, programs etc. are
not easy answers. Alters are actually parts of the mind, and the
mind naturally uses its survival instincts to protect each part.
Computers and programs will rebuild unless their anchoring
mechanisms are taken out. Erasing memories is another trap.
Memories are coded and laid in on the grids too. Again the
simple solution seems to be to delete the memories--but that
again is not the answer. That simply drives the memories
deeper, just like alters will secretly hide deeper if they think the
therapist wants "to kill them". The victim’s mind is very skilled
in moving its dissociative pieces around, so it will stay a jump
ahead of the therapist. Memories can be "washed" with the
negative emotional parts of them saved in a jar. In order to
map, the therapist may want to teach alters how to construct
safe places in the mind. Experience has shown, that if a
hypnotic-created image of a safe place is constructed, the
internal programmers can usually figure out a method to
destroy the safe place in approximately 24 hours. With ongoing
work, the imagery may survive several days. As the reader has
begun to see, the solution to mapping is simply lots of hard
work. Most of the short cuts do not work. There are skilled
methods to access deeper alters who know the maps of the
systems, but remember the internal worlds are mental
constructs that can be shifted by the mind. If there is a skilled
member of the support team who is around the victim most of
the time and who can take notes, then a great deal can be
learned. During day-to-day life, many things will trigger the
victim, and as the programming falls apart the MPD will
become more visible.
To those who are unfamiliar with programmed DID (MPD),
especially relatives, they may view the therapy with horror,
because instead of a single person (the front host) now they
have a team, or a group, or a world of alters who come and go.
It seems that the therapy has created the multiplicity. The
therapy has only uncovered what was hidden in secrecy by the
programming, but those unfamiliar with programming
generally don’t understand what is taking place. Many alters
will only show themselves in specialized situations. This is why
a variety of activities, a variety of triggering movies, and a
variety of hours/days/months are needed to begin to spot and
identify new alters. This is where the limited time that the
therapist sees the client greatly limits the therapists ability to
understand what their client is about. The host alter may come
into therapy for years, even though the deeper parts are coming
out at night, when nobody else will spot them. There are a
variety of methods to get alters to surface, and a variety of ways
to get them to dissociate. If a therapist needs to get beyond an
alter, they might try talking about something that will cause the
alter to dissociate, and then doing things that encourage the part
they want to come up. Mapping will call for trust, ingenuity,
patience, and good notekeeping. We recommend it.
Page 472 ...

HOW TO DEAL WITH MAZES

The internal structures of an alter system will have mazes
constructed. Mazes are power structures to reinforce feelings of
being helpless. Mazes reinforce the helplessness a victim feels.
When a child undergoes the horrendous traumas that it is
subjected to by sadistic programmers, it knows completely that
it is helpless. The child is placed into small enclosures such as
isolation booths, boxes, ice boxes, cages, caskets, caves,
corners, closets, drawers, hung in isolated forests, stuffed into
laundry hampers, holes in the ground, refrigerators, soundproof
rooms, tin rooms, under sand, in car trunks, under water, and
wells. Some victims of mind-control have endured all of the
above list and perhaps more. The mazes connect to those
memories of isolation and helplessness. When the alter gets
trapped in a maze, all the strong child memories of isolation
and helplessness flood the alter, and immobilize it with fear.
The mazes are attached the mote of nothingness sensory
deprivation memory, where the child victim was totally
trapped. During a panicked state, the child was placed in a
maze. The maze was put in during trauma, go back to what you
know as truth, the programming is a lie, do a reversal. To get
through the mazes the recovering victim needs to
a. stay calm,
b. remember that the maze is a hypnotic suggestion.
c. take your power back by acknowledging that the maze is
only a hypnotic suggestion, and you don’t need to play this
mind game.
d. common sense & calmness will get you out.
e. shrink the maze down, because the maze will seem tall to the
child. Shrink the maze down mentally until you can step over it.
Start at the top until you can step over the image. When the
image of the maze is as small as a speck of dust, blow it away,
or sweep it away. If the alter must, use a magic wand, or star
dust. Or if the alter is Christian use prayer.

HOW TO DEAL WITH MIRRORS

Illuminati multiple personality systems are structured with
many mirrors. As an alter attempts to move in the mind to try to
connect with another part (alter or world) of the mind, they
often come up against mirrors. The mirrors are guarded by
demons, and may have alters attached to the mirrors too. The
therapist should never have the client break the mirrors, unless
it is done in a very specific way.
The victim’s mind is able to visualize a glass room. A mirror
that needs to be broken can be placed within a glass box made
of 2-way mirrors itself. Then the demons within the mirrors
will be confined in the box when the mirror is worked on,
rather than have them scatter throughout the entire alter system
wrecking havoc like a herd of pigs. The alters which are part of
the mirror will also be contained. Once a glass room (box) is
created around the mirror, the box can be flooded with the
blood of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Any demonic forces attached
to the mirror will be forced to leave, while the alters will stay
behind. This way the damage is contained & confined. The
authority & power of Christ, who is the victor, is powerful if
properly used. The demons can be respectfully commanded to
obey & go back to Christ their Creator for orders. Demons are
under an authority structure and understand power & authority.
The demons are not objects to ridicule, even though we do not
agree with what they stand for & what they are all about. They
will not respect your authority nor mine, but they will respect
the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Please do not use some
other name like Buddha. If the mirrors are not broken in this
fashion, all hell breaks loose for the alters near the mirror. At
times, mirrors are constructed within a system so that they are
attached to trap doors & tunnels. The mind can be asked to tell
whether the mirror is part of a tunnel system or something else.
These systems are designed somewhat on the style of the Great
Pyramid, in that there are secret tunnels, chambers and trap
doors. "Dead" alters may be buried in places.
Page 473 ...

PROGRAMMING, foundations, destruction of (as taught

by an ex-Illuminati programmer)
Everyone comes upon a particular scenario in life, with their
own understanding, their own perspective, their own set of
things they consider to be foundational truths.
If we really want to understand the mind-control programming,
we need to see it in the same context that the Illuminati
mind-control programmers see it. Up until now, there has never
been any Illuminati programmers who saw any purpose in
breaking their oaths and revealing programming from an
Illuminati programmer’s viewpoint. I have decided to take a
bold step and allow you to see how my programming alters
understand the programming. This section is like the fragile
breath of a baby beginning to test a new world. Each time one
sees the miracle of life, as a fragile baby tests out the air of the
world with its first breaths, and discovers a new world beyond
the womb, it is a powerful testimony of what our God-given
life is all about. Our traumatic birth from the cocoon-like world
of slavery into freedom is a miracle of Life. Life has a force of
its own, and so will our own struggle for freedom.
We can say at the outset of explaining things, that we are not in
a position to prove what we have seen and experienced. We
could rummage through the dark books of magic to show a
paper trail, but if the reader wouldn’t believe our personal
testimony of what we experienced, then why would they
believe the papertrail? What we write in this section are the
inner secrets that throughout our life as a programmer we were
involved in to do the programming. We understand that some
readers may object to certain ideas, and we want to let the
reader know that it is O.K. to question what we write. However,
this may be your one and only chance to really understand the
programming as an Illuminati programmer sees it. So, in the
spirit of being helpful to the countless victims of Illuminati
mind-control,
and in the spirit of hope and openness, we are baring our secrets
to the world. Therapists who read this are welcome to send us
feedback when they find what we say is validated. If they don’t
find this validated in their work with the very deepest secrets of
a system, then there is a good chance they just haven’t gone far
enough to find it yet.
Perhaps nothing is more baffling than how our minds work.
Life is so complex that most of us give up trying to understand
it. It is meant to be this way. The elite who have been gathering
the mysteries of life for many thousands of years have wanted
the common person to feel confused and overwhelmed. They
have wanted the powers of darkness veiled from the people, so
that they can use their supernatural evil powers without
competition. They have hoarded the best of science, magic,
psychology and spiritual knowledge to themselves, and given
mankind the crumbs. This isn’t something new, they have been
keeping secrets from the bulk of mankind for thousands of
years. In a sophisticated divide and conquer strategy, the
mystery religions were created to hide from the masses the
existence, power, and worship of Lucifer. The Illuminati were
not going to expose their power base. The Bible is correct that
Lucifer was appointed a position of great authority. He
understands what an anointing is. And he is skilled in copying
that anointing. The Bible writers Isaiah and Paul (in 1 TM 3:6)
wrote about how a jealous Lucifer was not content to cover
God’s throne, but he coveted God’s throne. He was a cherub
full of wisdom and perfect in beauty (EZ 28:12,14,15) At one
point, he was the highest being created by God, and certainly
far more intelligent than people imagine. Before we talk about
what that intelligence has been able to do, let’s hear from the
other side of things. One of our Vol 2 readers wrote Fritz the
complaint, "You give much much good
Page 474 ...
information, but one wishes you would keep your religious
beliefs out of it." Since Fritz did not push any denomination or
organized religious group, one must assume that the chapters
that quoted scriptures and spoke about demons bothered this
reader. For the sake of discussion, let’s assume that demons,
ghosts, aliens, and angels do not exist. Let’s assume for the
sake of discussion that all the thousands of documented
encounters with such beings did not exist. And finally, You are
a therapist, and you sincerely want to help your client who has
DID mind-control programming, but you don’t want to deal
with such things as demonology. Have you ever wondered what
the deeper alters think? The deeper cult parts are not going to
talk with you, because they know that they will not be listened
to. It is extremely doubtful that you will ever meet the deeper
hierarchy parts. We have seen therapists scare hierarchy alters
away from therapy in just this fashion. The therapist will not
even know of their existence, even after years of hard work. As
an agnostic or secular therapist, have you always felt
antagonistic toward the supernatural? We can appreciate your
fear at confronting something strange, new, and unbelievable,
this is the same kind of issues that those of us who are DID
must confront every day, as we work on the lies that have been
programmed into us. Men are sent to the electric chairs on less
evidence than has accumulated over the centuries about the
existence ghosts, spirits, and demons. But we aren’t trying to
convert anyone to believe they exist. -But think about this, if
you, the agnostic therapist, do get a hierarchy part who has
been practicing powerful magic for years, learning on the astral
plane, observing demons control ones s mind-control slaves
who are under your authority, etc. what does the agnostic
therapist have to offer the hierarchy alters? The hierarchy alters
have power and prestige. They are not the alters that take the
punishment and abuse. Why should they give up their spiritual
power, for what? The point is, if therapists are not willing to
give their hierarchy alters something good to replace their dark
powers, and if the therapists don’t have a spiritual power and
spiritual plan that is stronger and better than the spiritual
powers and rewards that control the hierarchy alters, then the
therapists are not in a position to offer them freedom. By and
large, there are extremely few therapists that publicly let on that
they have a clue about spiritual captivity. Typically, they will
patronize a victim who mentions a supernatural encounter, and
add insult to injury by labeling the experience a hallucination.
If the supernatural is only a hallucination, one wonders why the
CIA has spent billions investigating the mind-control aspects of
voodoo, astral projection, ESP, and other supernatural
phenomena. The dark spiritual powers that control the lives of
the hierarchy alters are very real to these alters. And you will
not succeed in convincing them that demons do not exist, when
they have spent a life time working with demons, anymore than
you are going to convince a dairyman that cows don’t exist
because you have never seen a cow. So therapists had better
wise up, and get practical. Whether they believe in UFOs,
whether they believe in demons, is rather irrelevant, they can
still facilitate their client in obtaining help in areas that they do
not have expertise. In the last few years, secrets that have been
kept for many centuries are being released, but only in such a
way that the uninitiated disregard the secrets. While these
powerful occult secrets are being revealed, the masses are
throwing away the foundations of truth that God has provided
them through His Word. The masses see the power of the
occult in New Age techniques that use disguised demonic
power, but they do not see the dangers. As the world lets their
guard down, more and more occult power is being declassified
from the hidden mysteries.
Page 475 ...
While we were in the Illuminati, we witnessed numerous secret
libraries that contained secret books that no one has heard of.
Books like the 6th & 7th Book of Moses, The Spiritual Shield,
Abdul-Kadir’s Book of Power and recently publicly published
Necronomicon have spirits attached to them that make them
dangerous. To quote from the editor of the english translation
of the dangerous Necronornicon, "an inconsistency that is to be
found in many grimoires of any period and perhaps reveals a
little of the magician’s mentality; for there is very little that is
evil to the advanced magus, who cares not if he deal with
angelic or demonic forces, save that he gets the job done!"
(Necronomicon, p. xxxvii) During our years as a programmer,
we got the job done! Our programming alters did not get to see
the world outside of the Illuminati. But if you the reader want
to step into that world to see how the programmers think, you
are welcome to come with us on our guided tour. Let’s cover
some basics. We knew in the Illuminati that the earth was
created. There were very specific ideas on how it all happened.
Within Illuminati philosophy was the idea of dualism, that there
was evil and good, and that you tried to balance your evil deeds
with your bad deeds, as you climbed up the ranks of magic
(spiritual) power. The Illuminati system is based on rivalry
(free-enterprise in its most ruthless form), so there is no room
for failure. We ate of the tree of knowledge that Satan promised
to Adam that would make Adam into a god. The Illuminati
adepts think that they are gods. They are illuminated and
believe they are divine. When we worked with Illuminati
programmers, we were working with people who believed they
were gods and goddesses. They believed that they would be
rewarded with the control of the whole universe as well as the
means to do it. They also knew where their birthright came
from and what their inheritance was. We will explain that
shortly. In Exodus 20:5 we read, "...I, the LORD your God, am
a jealous God, visiting the iniquity of the fathers on the children
to the third and fourth generations of those who hate me..." One
of the teachings that has been lost (thanks to the infiltration into
Christianity by the mystery religions) has been who God meant
by "the third and fourth generations of those who hate me."
This was the third and fourth generation of those who rebelled
without repentance against God Almighty. The real foundation
for evil are the original generations that rebelled against God
and established the foundation of the rebellion. This was
Tubal-Cain, Zilah-bore and Jubal. This has been kept a secret
from Christians, so they only work against their father’s and
grandfather’s sins, rather than the real power base, which is
Cain, Tubal-cain, and their master/deceiver Satan. Remember
how important it was for Christ to atone for what Adam had
done. Christ had to go back and repair the damage at the
foundation, where the damage to mankind had begun. The
foundations of the rebellion against God are the foundations
that the programmers go back to. Our inheritance and authority
laid with the Powers of Darkness. Just as a Christian would
inherit his Father’s kingdom, we were to inherit the Prince of
Darkness’s kingdom. We served a powerful trinity made up of
Lucifer (the authority), Satan (the covering), and the Devil (the
evil spirit). This evil trinity of darkness was very well-known to
us. The programmers called up the forces of Darkness to give
us programming insights. The programming was the heartbeat
of Satan and the systems we built into people’s minds were
modelled on what the programmers understood hell to be like.
Every major programmer was a Grand Master or an Adept who
was working his way up the ranks in magic power. Obviously,
the lower level programmers could not command and place
Page 476 ...
into a victim, demons that they could not magically control.
This means that each system is going to reflect the spiritual
level of understanding and power that its programmer(s) had.
Let us step back and place our discussion of demonology on the
shelf temporarily. What builds the ideas of right and wrong,
good and bad within the human mind? The answer is certainly a
very complex answer. Our self-concepts which govern how our
minds make choices are very complex. In fact, the concepts of
what is sin, right or wrong, and what and who we are, are
simply vastly more complex than a child’s mind can
comprehend. Even common sense teaches us, that children are
born innocent. The child’s mind has been given the wonderful
ability to focus on one particular role model (usually a parent)
to put together a cohesive idea of values. Those values are very
much attached to the signals we get as children from the
important people we focus upon to learn values. Separating a
child from a role model (i.e. isolating it from any parent or
parent surrogate) produces disastrous results. The child has no
model upon which to learn values. Without a role-model, the
mind must revert back to unlearned, built-in instincts. Does the
reader begin to see how deep the destruction of the person is,
when dissociated pieces must revert back to functioning on
such instinctual unlearned values such as survival, because they
have had no chance to observe and assimilate values, and if
they do by chance assimilate values, they may well be those of
the programmers! When the human mind (or a dissociative
piece, or alter) functions and makes decisions only on the basis
of survival, can the reader see how this opens the person up to
control by fears? Deeper parts are prevented from establishing
values that would question the control that demonic entities
develop based on fear. The growth of mature thinking is the
result of a complex chronological series of learning
experiences. Even alters who have been hypnotically
age-progressed by the programmer to see themselves as adults,
have never had the opportunity to acquire mature thinking.
Their thinking remain simplistic, because there have not been
the complex learning stages that mature a person’s thinking.
Therapists do not realize that even "adult" non-host alters can
have thinking that is very immature and basically
survival-based. This doesn’t mean that the therapist should
initially confront the deeper adult alters by telling them that
they are merely programming or immature--that would only
damage communication. Given time out in the world on their
own, they will begin to realize this on their own. What we are
trying to say is that the demonology is attached to a defenseless
mind. The structures that would normally develop so that the
mind could ignore demon impulses have never developed. The
natural development of a child to grow from innocence and
purity into a rational moral person has been stopped. If it is
difficult enough for a rational mature person to wrestle with
demonic impulses, how much more so for a fragment of the
mind that operates purely out of the reptilian-brain’s instinct for
survival. During the programming, the Illuminati programmers
would call up certain demons to help with the building of this
hell in the victim’s mind. The programmers will also place
important demons into the victim that are attached to strategic
places and functions. Allow us to expose some of these:

Abbadon--Abbadon is sovereign over the bottomless pit.

Depending on what rank the programmer is at, depends on how
the programs are put in. If Abbadon is not put in as a protector
of the core, something similar will be done that mirrors the
abilities of Abbadon. The 18-month old victim has Abbadon
placed into them to "SEAL" (guard) their core. Oaths are given,
that provide Lucifer the legal right to capture and hide the
Page 477 ...
core away at this time. Abbadon will be tied to the
programming at the base of the mind. The core lays at the base
of the mind in a bottomless pit. This bottomless pit is cone
shaped--which is the hidden reason that hour glasses are used.
The hour glass is a cone shape that is similar to hell’s shape.
Hell is shaped like a cone. Surrounding the core will be River
Lethe. The Lethe River is also known as THE RIVER OF
FORGETFULNESS. This river surrounds the core, and protects
the core from any alter getting close to the actual core.
Depending upon who your programmer is, different imagery
will be applied. The programmers always use water as a
cleansing element to cause the mind to "clear itself’ (clear from
a deprog. viewpoint), "cleanse itself’ (so-to-speak from a prog.
viewpt.). The programmers will use waterfalls, swimming
pools, or other bodies of water as their CLEANSING RIVER.
To enter into the CLEANSING RIVER or the RIVER OF
FORGETFULNESS means that the alter will not know who
they are, what they know, or are seeking. If the core ever got
strong enough, the River of Forgetfulness Program would hold
her there in the base of the mind. The programmers will never
access the core through the RIVER, but will go under the river
or over it. The silver cord that is hooked to the core then is ran
under the RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS to every alter from
the core. In only one particular instance, when a programmer
was experimenting, did we ever see the silver cord get placed
running over the river. In 99% of the cases, the silver cord will
be run under the River of Forgetfulness. This has proven to be
the most effective way to prevent any alter from seeing the
core. The only connection between the core and the rest of the
system is through the silver cords. It is invisible, especially
since it is placed under the river, and assigned a spirit of
invisibility. To cut that silver cord is to separate the core (and
spirit) that gives life to the system. The system will die if the
cord is cut. As any alter goes toward the core which is in the
9th realm, the alter will bounce off of the River of Lethe, forget
what it went for, lose everything it is, and end up as clean slates
in the 8th realm. The story of the Ten Lepers (LK 17:12) who
came back clean is the programming story that pertains to this
programming. All the alters except the one (the core) will go
away as a clean slate, and only the one (the core) will return to
its master (in this case not Christ as in the Biblical story, but the
Divine Master, who is the programmer.) Should the core ever
want to escape it would have to go through the 9 dimensions of
Hell to free itself. While the therapists try to get to the core
outside-to-inside, the core must go from inside-to-outside. The
spirits are laid in from inside to outside, and we will describe
the sections of hell, and the rivers from inside-to-outside. But
the first barrier after the River is another River called "DARK
HOLES" or in our System "TIlE RUBICON". The name
Rubicon is so appropriate, because it is like Caesar when he
crossed the rubicon, you do not come back. The name Dark
Hole given by some programmers to this zone, is also
appropriate, because you are sucked in and do not return. To
cross the rubicon is to burn one’s bridges to return. This zone is
outer space, it is darkness, it is a pool of darkness. An alter
personality bounces off of this into a dark holding tank. The
rubicon has 10 spheres (or levels) to it, and its shaped like an
amphitheater. Another name for this layer is Malebolge. It
holds 10 spheres for 10 classes of traitors to the programming.
The spirit that hangs over this is Malebrinche with his evil
claws.
The dark holes are wells in the 8th realm. The wells are
guarded by Titan demons who will prevent the alter from
coming out if they are punished by falling into a dark hole
(well).
Page 478 ...
Within an Illuminati system, you will discover hell. You will
discover the rivers of hell which are the Styx, Acheron,
Phiegethon, the Cocytus, and Lethe (which was already
discussed.) Cocytus encircles the frozen marsh where the
monstrous Lucifer is frozen up to his breastplate. Over the
years when he tried to free himself, his giant wings produced
nothing more than cold winds that froze the ice hard. Deep in
an Illuminati system you may find the marsh land where it is
cold. Not every programmer has a clear idea of how hell is, so
the programming differs, but some type of equivalent of this
will be found very deep.
Before providing the names of other demons attached to parts
within an Illuminati alter system, allow us to explain how a
system is set up from the programmers viewpoint. The
programmer sees his inheritance coming from Lucifer. He
believes he will reign with Lucifer in hell. Who would want to
be a satanist if they did not think that they were going to get
advantages from it. Satanists (and Luciferians--actually
Illuminati hierarchy members are actually both depending upon
the time and circumstances) actually think that they will get
eternal rewards for what they are doing. They are very intent on
pleasing Satan, and he is a very demanding god. From the
programmers viewpoint, he is reproducing Satan’s kingdom
within the victim--he is reproducing hell in the victim’s mind.
The programming is very much intended to be the heartbeat of
Satan. The Illuminati at the top understand hell to have 9
realms. Recently a movie was made of the 7 deadly sins, a
strange killer decides to kill people to expose to the world the
horror of these deadly sins. Each of the deadly sins (pride,
avarice, lechery, anger, gluttony, envy, sloth) each are said to
have their own realm in hell. This has been a popular view for
hundreds of years.
The section grid sheets that list alter grids with codes and the
number of sections may not reveal the 9 realms pattern. The
pattern is there, but a single realm of hell can be given several
sections of alters if the programmer wants to. On the outer rim
of the River encircling the 8th realm lie the important castles.
There are 7 important Grandefather and Mother of Darkness
castles. Some of the castles have gold pillars. There are also 7
important temples, such as the Temple of Moloch, where
sacrificed babies are placed internally. The Mothers of
Darkness and the Grand Master alters have to be able to enter
into these internal castles, because they hold the spiritual
demonic strongholds for the system. A front set of castles will
be placed in the first realm to sidetrack deliverance ministries.
The Mothers of Darkness and Grande Dame alters live in the
7th realm of Hell. The 7th, 8th, and 9th realms are considered
lower hell. A ferry boat crosses the river that encircles the 7th
realm (and the 8th and 9th). The protection for the hierarchy
alters are the Delta alters that both male and female systems
have placed in the 6th realm. The Delta alters are deadly. They
will kill anyone including themselves! This is known as the sin
of wrath. It is known as the realm of gloom. This 6th realm is
protected by the river Styx. The 3-4-5 realms are not put to
match the traditional schemes of Hell. A central computer
section with programming alters and their accompanying
entourage of alters that make it all work, in a sense compare
with the 4th level of hell where there is great gnashing of teeth.
These alters have been extremely dehumanized in this area, and
many are totally dissociated from any sense of having a body.
Really most of them are beyond the gnashing of teeth stage, to
the out-of-body stage of dissociation. The second ring of hell is
the realm of lust, where the prostitute alters and strip-tease
alters are placed, including male child prostitute alters in male
systems. The sixth realm may have the capital city of Dis,
where fallen angels are reported to be able to have their R&R.
The River Phlegethan is filled with
Page 479 ...
boiling blood. It is filled with dead tormented souls. Titan
guardian demons guard the wells. The internal world will have
dark woods with wild animals lurking about waiting to attack
those who would be foolhardy to go through them. Somewhere
in the deep reaches of the hell that Satan has built within the
mind of the slave, there will likely be the capital city
Pandaemonium, which is a palace with many gates and a large
meeting hall. In fact, Pandaemonium may be an entire secret
world within a mind-control system. The first realm of hell is
the Limbo state, where non-satanic gatekeepers (who are pagan
in outlook) float around in mental limbo. The programmers
build streams and meadows and other things into this area.
There are front castles built into this quadrant. It is separated
from the front by the River Archeron. However, it is unlikely
that any of the front alters and gatekeepers know the name of
this internal river, because it is invisible and they are not told its
name. They may feel its effects though. Behind the River
Acheron will be kitten alters that have never lived outside of
programming. And setting on top of hell on the surface is the
front section. The front system in a typical Illuminati system
will be a reflection of the world at large as it known. The front
system will have anarchy-coven level witchcraft alters,
Christian alters, smart alters, stupid alters, child alters, possibly
a token opposite sex alter, and perhaps even a few animal
alters. In a sense the top is the widest part of the cone, that
retreats into deeper darker levels of the mind (and hell that the
programmer has created.) The front system will give the
therapist plenty to work with. The front system will look like a
chaotic but complete system. There will be a few witchcraft
alters that will surface to explain the SRA. There will be a few
abused alters who will surface to explain the abuse. All of this
will help deflect from the real truth and the real secrets. There
will be dozens of child alters to work with. The front system
will be designed to hide the design of the entire system. If a
therapist wanted to, they could easily spend the rest of their life
working on issues of the front system. Some therapists have
spent a decade on the front alone. The Illuminati generally
appreciates having the front alters stabilized so that they can
continue the horrendous abuse of the victim, without the system
self-destructing. Skilled therapists know how to work vertically
down into a system. There are methods, and we will not expose
trade secrets, on how to descend into a system to get a
particular alter. The reader can think to himself or herself, how
do you pull up an alter, and how to you get one to leave. For
instance, a non-sexual alter will dissociate and leave if you
speak about sex. Think about things for a while, and perhaps
you will realize how to get the deeper alters you want to work
with. Be prepared to get demonic constructs that pretend to be
alters, to shell alters, to get mirror images, as well as what you
really want. After developing some skill you may even be able
to begin to separate the demonic, shell alters and mirror images
from the real thing. The skilled deprogrammers know who they
need deep in the systems, they go for these alters, and then
work with them. But it greatly helps if the front system has
done stabilizing work, that has prepared them spiritually and
psychologically so that they can handle some "rocking of the
boat", if the therapist digs deep. There are certain alters that can
assist more than others in dismantling some of the programs.
There are two protector alters who are assigned to protect the
deeper parts of the system. They are Lucifer and Dameon. Both
of these protector alters (Lucifer, and the protector alter
Dameon) will know part of the system. But bear in mind their
assignment is to keep therapists away from the even deeper
Page 480 ...
parts. So if they do cooperate with a therapist, their cooperation
may be to sidetrack the therapist from the deeper parts, and
they do not know the entire system. Every Illuminati alter
system (100% of the systems while we were in) were
constructed with a Dameon alter, which identified with and
thought it was Satan/Lucifer. All male and female systems all a
Dameon alter. (We suppose now that we’ve revealed this
secret, they may change things, but for anyone programmed
before this book came out, their system will have a Dameon
alter.) The Dameon alter has three different names. In Fritz’s
section he mentioned Data Entry Points of a system. This is an
alter that can be used for quick access. During the child
victim’s early years, the Illuminati programmers will take one
of the first Gatekeepers, such as Gatekeeper 3 or 4, and will
hypnotically show them the entire system. This is so they have
quick access to the entire system. This is entirely done via
hypnosis (and hypnotic drugs), so that the Gatekeeper no. 3
does not remember that it knows the entire system. Only via
hypnosis can the programmer use this Gatekeeper to get to the
entire system. After the Gatekeeper does its job, it is
hypnotically told to forget.
What kind of thing might the gatekeeper know? The deeper
parts of a system would be the All-Seeing Eye of the pyramid.
The pyramid may rotate, and its rotation is controlled by a
computer. By rotating, secret passageways are aligned. These
pyramids contain "dead" alters (who think they are spirits) and
protectors such as egyptian soldiers. The Eye itself is a secret
passageway. Sometimes a 1-2-3 tap done 3 times opens the
passage. If there is a purgatory in the system, as one approaches
it there may be a silver veil wall, behind which may be hell in a
system. The high capital of Satan in a system is often
Pandaemonium. The palace has many gates and porches. The
demons assemble in the palace for councils. Every alter has
demons assigned and attached to it. Here are the names of
common ones in an alter system. These are really family
names, just like there will be a Susy 1, a Susy 2, a Susy 3, etc.
Sometimes satanic programmers put their own twists on the
way they pronounce names, these "play on words" help protect
the programming. The VoL 2 book provides information on
other important demons involved with the mind-control on pp
299-302.

Abduscius--This demon was involved with the tree programs,

the roots of all the trees, such as the willow, oak, ash,
yggdrassil, etc. The demon would be joined with the internal
Singing Forest of a system. One can look for a familiar spirit
connected to all this.

Abigor--This demon was involved with working with fragment

parts that make war upon the system of alters. The child armies
that protect the programming had this demon attached to them.

Abyss--This is a popular demon with Crowley devotees, and it

also goes by the names of Absu, Nar Mattaru, Cutha, Kutu.
This may be the internal underworld ocean. A system will have
a deep ocean where things are hid.
Archeron--This is a demon who looks like a monster with
flaming eyes. This demon was attached to the "eye in the sky".
A mirror image of this demon could be used to impart a mirror
image to a part.

Adramalech--This grand chancellor demon is the supervisor of

Satan’s wardrobe and provides a likeness of the himself to the
programmer. Adramalech is in charge of all the various
costumes and outfits that the occult world use, such as your
masonic ritual garments. Because there is one spirit over all
this, the various costumes all work together for
Page 481 ...

Agaliarept --this demon is very important in the structuring,

for this demon is used to call up the internal self-helper of the
victim. This demon works with the ISH and the system to know
what is going on in the internal worlds of the victim. The
person’s guardian angel (spirit) has been locked away to
prevent interference to demons like Agaliarept. The
programmers are very familiar with this demon. Another
demon that works with the cult’s ISH is Botis.

Aguares--These grand dukes of Hell are associated with dance,

and have familiar family demons with Aguares that help the
victim assume sexual gestures, special ceremonial dances that
have to be done perfectly, and other certain steps.

Aim--This demon may be attached to the alters who are

associated with fire, like Bonfire Child alters, Firechild, etc. He
is a fire demon.

Alastor--The demonic executor of court decrees in hell is a

guardian. When the system betrays the programming, he will
declare the judgements on the system.

Amduscias--This demon of disturbing music continually plays

the internal rhymes and riddles internally to reinstate the
programming if it is ever touched. This demon then is
responsible for the programs to continue running. This demon
is a unicorn whose internal music is in an alter system.
Amon--This demonic marquis family shows their faces to scare
alters. It may appear like a man with dogs teeth and a head like
a raven.

Andrealphus--If a victim has a peacock demon it may be

Andrealphus.

Asmodeus--This demon is attached to create lust in the system,

and marital discord.

Baal--This demon can make internal things go invisible. He

can look like a cheshire-cat. He matches how things disappear
in the Alice of Wonderland story, where only gold objects stay.
He speaks hoarsely, and can appear as a toad, a cat, a man or all
4 at once. He rules over 66 legion of demons. He is a king
demon ruling in the east, and important to Freemasons.

Baalberith--The is the chief secretary of hell who is attached to

the internal library of an alter system. He will keep the records
of the genealogy of the victim’s Illuminati bloodline.

Barbatos--When a mind-control victim says, "I talk to my

animals and they talk to me", this is the demon that carries out
the voice of other animals.

Beelzebub--(See the article on the spirit Hydra below.)

According to Illuminati beliefs, they must serve Beelzebub, and
he in turn will reward them with financial wealth so that they
can control and destroy the nations. They believe that
Beelzebub only wants to be addressed in Yiddish or Hebrew.
Beelzebub demands souls in payment for his favors. It is not
known, technically speaking, which manifestation of the false
trinity will be the beast who will be worshipped by taking "the
Mark of the Beast", but it may be Beelzebub who has
demanded worship since antiquity. The Illuminati Sisters of
Light are married in ritual to Beelzebub, while the Mothers of
Darkness are married to Lucifer. Beelzebub is important to the
upper levels of Freemasonry which do secret Luciferian rituals.
There are a number of secret manuscripts of the Holy Book of
Beelzebub located at important Masonic centers. The book is
large, written in blood on
Page 482 ...

Behemoth--This hugh demon who presides over feasting in

hell is attached to cannibalistic alters who must perform
cannibalism in rituals.

Beiphegor--This demon seduces men with wealth. He will be

attached when the programmers use blackmail and bribery to
insure that the victim goes the direction they want the victim to
go. In a sense, he is part of the carrot (in the carrot & the stick
tactics of the programmers.)

Blackwell--This demon is important for the mind-control,

associated with dissociation

Botis--This viper demon is attached to the cult’s ISH in the

internal system. He knows the past and present things within a
system.

Captaintto--A spirit involved with astral projection.

Changeling--This fairy demon is attached to child alters. The

actual mechanics are that the child alter presents itself as a
mirror of the child, and the child alter assumes that it is the this
fairy demon itself. The child alter takes on the fairy demons
identity, and then the fairy demon attaches itself. The end result
is that the child alter doesn’t know what it is, or where it begins
and the fairy begins. This creates an alter/demon construct, of
which there are many within a normal Illuminati system.

Crocell--This demon makes the noise like rushing water that

alters talk about hearing in their internal worlds.

Dantalion--A demonic duke who has many countenances. He

is a joker within the system.
Decarabia-Appears as a star, and Pentacles is also a star
appearing demon.

Flauras--This demon along with the demon Andras are

attached to alters who must commit ritual murders.

Foras--This demon is knowledgeable. It can teach logic, the

virtues of herbs, how to live long and supposedly how to
become invisible. It can appear as a strong man in human form.

Forneus--This demon gives men the ability to have speaking in

tongues and the ability to have gifted speaking abilities. He
works with Renove, who is a demon who assists with demonic
speaking in tongues and rhetoric.

Furcas--This demon teaches philosophy.

Furfur--This demon controls lightening, thunder and strong

winds. He is attached to internal programs that are connected to
internal weather phenomena. For instance, if a victim is having
internal earthquakes, if the support person knows how to call up
and command Furfur he can cast Furfur out, and stop the
internal earthquakes immediately.

Guardians--Enforcer demons are put in place to protect the

system.

Goblins--These are mischievous and ugly fairies that are

placed internally to protect the rivers and secret places in the
internal worlds.

Haborym--This is a demon of fire who is placed in control of

the fire around the internal hell pit.

Haures--This demon hold the history of the fall of creation

within the internal library.
Hydra-- In the Illuminati, a member takes oaths to three
demonic entities, Lucifer, Beelzebub, and Hydra. Who is
Hydra? In the Christian New Testament, Hydra is described in
the last book, Revelation 17:7-9. It is a beast with 7 heads. The
Illuminati do ritual worship where they do special chants, and
Page 483 ...
blood sacrifices, and bow seven times to obtain Hydra’s
presence. During rituals, when Hydra appears within the room,
one of the ways Hydra communicates is by taps. When it taps 3
times, this means the third letter C, which also can mean "see".
Later, after the child victim of mind-control has experienced
the horrifying ritual of seeing Hydra appear and tap out its
messages, the child victim can be taken in and programmed to
special codes that are portrayed as knocks (taps). The ritual
trauma memory is pulled up and used for a base for the
programming. This is how the traditional 3 tap signal came to
be. It is secretly based upon demonic communication. You will
often encounter mind-control victims who are programmed to
what they describe as morse code. The foundation for all this
morse code programming was communication with the
god/demon Hydra. Hydra by the way is also the god of
Freemasonry, because Luciferians control Freemasonry. Hydra
hisses like a snake. A partial quote from an oath to Hydra
would include, "...lead my arm, you have the supremacy of the
universe, because you move it, all is your creation. Heaven and
earth belong to you, which is fulfilled in your glory, which are
images of your greatness and superiority. You are helpful
protector of each of yours, you Enemy- of-the-crucified. In
your name I curse God, the Trinity, Christ...ln trust of your
revelations, in the faith of your might above all Creation;
visible and invisible things. I have the right to request and
receive from you what you know." Hydra is acknowledged as
the supreme master by a blood oath. You must sell yourself to
Hydra totally, even to the point of suicide. In return you are
promised honor, power, and wealth. The dragon also promises
to give confidence to the pact-maker. As the Illuminati
understand it, demons are only interested in soul-pacts or
sutleges (pacts written in blood on paper that are swallowed).

Klotilde--This spirit demands that the slave never get involved

in human love. To love with human love would be to suffer.

Knochers--These are tiny spirits who work in the internal gold

mines. They are the Keepers of the Jewels. What are the
jewels? The jewels are those parts created by master
programmers such as Dr. Mengele, which are left as clean
slates from which the programmers can build from later.

Leraje (Leraikka)--This demon is used for ritual battles.

Lucifer/Satan/Devil--This triad has Black/Red/Gold as their

colors.

Malebranche--This is the demon with the evil claws that is a

tormentor in the 8th realm. Readers will remember seeing his
presence in this author’s collages in the Illustrated Guidebook
to Monarch Mind- Control Programming.
Maleficia--This demon is not used internally, but is used when
casting spells to hurt others. This demon is also employed to
punish disobedient slaves.

Malphas--A builder of high towers. He may also get involved

with the hypnosis.

Mammon--His family of demons creates the internal worlds,

especially the palaces and towers.

Marax--This demon helps the Mothers-of-Darkness understand

astrology. A Mother will loose her powers if he is removed.

Marbas--Demon attached to help the system heal, or get

diseased.

Marchosias--This is a family of fighting demons. They work

well with fighting alters.
Page 484 ...

Melchom--This demon is placed internally to oversee the

internal treasures of a system. This demon is very secret and
understands the Grand Druid Council.
Mulciber--This is one of the builder demons who helps
construct the internal worlds. The programming scripture that
applies is "Unless the Lord builds the house, they labor in
vain." This scripture is misused to teach alters, that unless this
lord (demon) is involved in the construction of something
internal, the alters labor in vain, because it will only be a
superficial temporary structure. To insure that all structures put
in by a therapist are temporary, all kinds of alters and demons
will scurry about in a frenzy to figure out how to destroy any
internal structure that the therapist & victim’s alters try to build
to oppose the programmer’s control.

Murmur--This demon is in charge of the soul. He is connected

to core issues. (See the article on the core to understand the
core’s issues.)

Navky--This is a Spirit of Murder that is tied to the sacrifice of

unbaptized children.

Nebiros--This is a field marshall who is given command of the

little robots alters and fragment purpose armies.

Nysrock--This is a demon chief in hell within a system.

Osculum infame--This refers to the Sabbat ritual that Mother’s
of Darkness perform where they "kiss the ass" of Satan, also
known as the "Kiss of Shame".

Paimon--This knight spirit is very obedient to Lucifer and is

used as an enforcer in an internal system. He continues to
report back as to whether the internal worlds are intact or not.

Paymon--This demon is placed into alter systems of politician

to give them the ability to speak in public.

Phenex--This demon is a poet who speaks to exorcists but

supposedly does not need to obey exorcists.
Philatanus--This is a Spirit of Sodomy and Pederasty

Procel--This demon can make internal water freeze or boil.

Purson--This demon blows internal trumpets, and is believed

connected to the revelator to the AntiChrist. He also knows the
system.

Put Satanachia--Commander-in-chief of the call back army’s

in a system especially the army’s that ride on armageddon
horses. He will play an important role in the end times.

Raum-- He destroys internal parts or internal cities.

Sabnack--This demon is attached to death programming. If a

slave does the "unpardonable sin’’ against Lucifer and his
programming then Sabnack helps insure that the heart of the
victim will stop.

Seera--This demon is in charge of internal perceptions of time.

He can make time fly at whirlwind speed or to slow down.

Seraphim-- The highest order of the Heavenly host. Illuminati

systems will have seraphim placed into them.

Shaba lidoma--This demon bring depression

Shax--This alter works with deaf and dumb alters.

Sitri--This spirit is used in the covens for sexual enchantment

and nudity.
Page 485 ...

Speculum--This spirit is an internal crystal ball reader. He may

also use mirrors.

Succubus--A female demon who preys on men sexually. This

demon will be active during rituals.

Sytry--This demon is attached to stripper alters. It encourages

women to show themselves naked.

Uphir--This demon heals in the name of Satan. He is placed

into a system to help it heal quickly.

Volarire--A gatekeeper to a world or city, will play games to

protect that part of system

Watchers--Demons attached to flying monkey alters who are

used for observation in a system.

Zepar--This demon drives women insane. It is attached to

insane programming.
It’s really hard to describe spiritual things to those who haven’t
experienced similar spiritual things. We want to help people
begin to get a feel for what works and what doesn’t work. The
following is a few minutes of a transcript of a deliverance. The
deliverance minister has never been told anything about this
person’s alter system, but the Holy Spirit reveals that the
system is 13x 13. The deliverance minister speaks about grace
and love. He also does something very important: he teaches
the alters how to put a spiritual canopy of protection around
them so that they can sleep without spiritual attacks at night.
The spiritual canopy that is built by this alter system ends up
being helpful. Here is only a tiny portion of this deliverance
session.

Alter: You can’t love what isn’t.

Support Person: They’ve had their hearts and souls taken

away. Many of the things they need to be able to have a
relationship with Christ have been stolen from them.
Alter: How did I get this two-headed beast?

Deliverance minister: You got it from the time of conception

given to you by Dad. It is a two-headed demon. One of the
heads goes back 18 generations, that would be about 400 years.
The other head dates back 22 generations. Allow me to explain,
there are 365 levels of demons.... We need to walk in one
accord. I realize your system has many of you who don’t know
how to, and also that there are many who don’t want to.

Alter: God can’t love us.

Deliverance minister: God will remove all the curses, all the
spells, the garbage, the chains, the tar, the slime, the pain, the
bondage.. .All these things which carry bad feelings, pain and
unbelief will be taken care of. Each curse carries memories....

Alter: How did our light side even know Christ with those
demons?

Deliverance minister: It’s because of Grace, amazing grace.

[Then the deliverance minister explains how demons imitate
alters and play roles within an alter system.] Father we come
before your throne, strengthen the canopy about this house, and
purify it with your holy fire. We ask that you seal and cleanse
this room with your holy blood, and every object about us, and
each one of us. Seal and cleanse us with your blood. Purify us
with your fire. I acknowledge the diamond shaped head that
encapsulizes her head and is filled with your essence. Will you
fill that diamond head with the blood of Jesus Christ. I
recognize that this represents your eternal ownership of this
body. Father, we acknowledge that you love them no matter
what. Father, I’m glad you love them, even the alters who don’t
know that you love them. Remove any demonic shields from
these alters and send them to the abyss. Father, bind Lucifer
from interfering. Set some warring angels about us to help.
Thank you. Father, I ask for every
Page 486 ...
anointing that we need for this work. I ask you to acknowledge
all three of your servants. Order our thoughts. Keep this
floating diamond over her Lord. Now fill up her System’s 13
by 13 by 13 grid right now with your blood. [End of quoted
material.]
We have watched deliverance ministries in action, we have
visited and heard other deliverance ministries give reports on
what they have done, and we have seen what works for us.
What we have seen is that some of the better ministries are on
the basic right track and are able to help in some important
areas, but by and large there is little depth to what most
Christians are doing, and some blindsides. We can also add
some of our own first hand observations. Our own master was
far more concerned about deliverances being done to our
system, than he was for a psychiatrist to work with us. But we
also have a view of things from having been on the other side,
that is from the programmers viewpoint, and we can honestly
say, that the programming is so far reaching, that the
mind-control victim could use a chiropractor, a medical doctor,
a psychologist, a guard, a prayer partner, a friend, and a
deliverance minister. This is why we applaud the few groups
that have established safe-houses and teams of people to assist
mind-control victims. The type of issues we write about in
articles like this are enough to challenge support teams who are
working with well stabilized programmed DID’s who have
worked on issues for a while.
The removal of foundational programming can take several
different avenues, but there are several constants in how to fight
the programming. The stronger a person’s alters are spiritually,
the better they will do. The healthier a victim is, the more
chance they have to survive the debilitating effects of the
programming. The more humor, rest, and internal peace the
recovering victim has, the better they will do. Morale is
important. The morale of the support team is essential. The
therapist has to have a strong conviction that hope exists for the
victim, and the victim needs to have this hope conveyed to
them. The will to resist needs to be fed. We know that this is
nothing new, but it is so important that we don’t want to neglect
emphasizing it. The reader will find many suggestions and hints
within this book on routes to take to dismantle the
programming. Where there is a will, there is a way. Sometimes
the victim will loose the willpower, and that is where the
support team must pick them up. Let’s not kill our wounded,
instead let’s dig into ourselves to find the resources to minister
to them even more. We know of some ministers who have
justified dumping programmed-multiples because at some point
they didn’t met the minister’s criteria of wanting to work on
issues. There were times when our system didn’t want to work
on issues, but we’re glad Fritz didn’t give up on us. On the flip
side, we also believe that support teams and therapists need to
take a serious look at who they decide to invest time helping.
The unfortunate truth is that our time and energy is limited and
we should choose sincere candidates who are capable of
success.
Page 487 ...

RATIONALES, of the abusers

Persons, who are just getting into the subject of Illuminati
mind-control, naturally ask "Why do the abusers do what they
do?" and "How can the abusers mentally justify doing what
they do?" We will not attempt to give a comprehensive answer
to this question, which would take a book, but will try to give a
condensed version of why it happens, and how it is justified in
the abusers’ minds. First, we’ll look at what psychologists are
saying, & then we will build upon that to give a more accurate
sketch of why the abuse happens. Psychologists who have
studied parents who sexually abuse their children have
concluded that such parents are extremely narcissistic.
Narcissism means self-love. They go on to say that essentially
everyone is narcissistic, but the abusers are extremely so. The
psychologists are on the right track, but not quite there. (Hold
this thought for a moment.) The psychologists also think that
the sexual abuse is done to gratify the abuser’s need for a
reward, in the same vane that some are also alcoholics. The
mind-control abuser needs to be worshipped, which will gratify
the need to be desirable & important. Because children idolize
adults, and since children are innocent & powerless, the abuser
enjoys dominating the child sexually, mentally, & spiritually.
Because knowledge of the 7 brains has been kept away from
the public’s general awareness, the public and psychologists
don’t think in these terms. Knowledge of the 7 separate brains
that make up the human mind are how the Illuminati
successfully carry out mind-control. Psychologists carrying out
research have reported between 40 to 80 % of the abusers were
abused themselves as children. When it pertains to
trauma-based mind-control, we can assure the reader that
99.999% of the abusers have been abused themselves as
children. That abuse has locked the abuser into making the
reptilian brain their principle brain. The reptilian mind thinks
only in terms of survival. It thinks in terms of its own needs.
What the psychologists call narcissism is simply the
survival-type thinking (the self-love so to speak) of the reptilian
brain which we all have. The only difference is that some
non-multiples are able to develop their higher brains so that
they can develop their conscience and true spiritually
enlightened thinking as the guiding source of their actions.
Everyone has a reptilian first brain. Almost any male can be
made to tap into that survival instincts and can be made to be
sadistic. The programmers create clean slate alters which are
created in the crucible of survival. When a person fears for his
life, the higher brains are shut down. These alters are simply
working from the reptilian brain. They are power-based,
greed-based, survival-instinct-based alters. These alters are then
given scripts that morally justify this thinking, so that the
reptilian brain can block any future second thoughts from the
two highest brains. This is where Illuminati Luciferian doctrine
is important. The Illuminati teach their Grand Masters that they
are the elite of the world, that their rulership is their birthright,
and that Lucifer has taught them programming so that they can
be a god, and follow after Lucifer’s own heartbeat. They
believe that they are pleasing Lucifer by carrying out
mind-control on children and then presenting these "little
treasures" to Lucifer. These Illuminati programmers are not
going to say, "I doing this because I’m a sinner [which is a
higher brain concept]", but they are going to say, "I’m doing
this because I’m a god." Power is a need that stems from the
reptilian brain. Power can be directed into proper channels by
our higher brains, but due to the mind-control that the
Illuminati programmers themselves have received there is
nothing structured in the mind to veto this power-hungry
thinking. Also Satanic doctrines, like LaVey’s and Crowley’s
"Do what thou wilt", give the mind a blocker to prevent the
higher brains from
Page 488 ...
overriding the actions based on the reptilian brain’s selfish
survival based thinking. There are many other rationalizations,
for instance, "this is the way our fathers and forefathers have
traditionally done things", "no pain no gain", and "this child
(such as Marilyn Monroe) would have been a nothing, but by
carrying out the programming we are building the person into
something". The World System has set up dialectics such as the
Cold War, which gave lower echelon abusers the
survival-based justifications that mind-controlled slaves were
needed if their side were to win the Cold War, and protect their
nation.
They justify their criminal behavior by saying that most people
want leaders, and they are merely providing that leadership.
Most people have been conned into accepting the leadership of
others. Most people go through a stage in life like the hippies,
where they want to think for themselves, but just like the hippy
movement they end up taking the attitude if you can’t beat them
join them. But even the most average of persons has an
incredible computer between the ears, and are far more capable
than they are given credit for. At least the potential is there, if it
weren’t stolen by an education system that dumbs students
down, and the other hassles in life that steal so much potential
from people. Because the abusers have seared their
consciences, they often look at the abuse as a game (albeit a
sadistic one). At that point, several of them may try to outdo
each other and the abuse becomes an ongoing contest to see
who can outdo each other. In some cases, not only do the
hidden Luciferian doctrines support the abuse (such as
reincarnation), but the front alter’s religious views may also
support the abuse. Numerous passages in the Talmud, give
legal religious sanction for pedophilia, torture and other crimes.
Because this fact has been covered up, it would be appropriate
to quote some of the fuller Talmudic translations (because some
of the translations into english leave out passages that are in the
original Hebrew which promote such things as pediophilia and
sodomy. The book of Yebamoth of the Talmud, 2 Vols.,
London, The Soncino Press, 1936, page 397 states, "Harlotry is
not applicable to bestial intercourse." In other words,
intercourse with a beast is not regarded as a sin of intercourse.
Page 402 (as well as 403) of the same Talmudic book states,
that it is O.K. for a priest to have "co-habitation" with a girl
proselyte under three. It states, "A proselyte who is under the
age of three years and one day is permitted to marry a priest" or
the daughter of a proselyte is "eligible to live with a priest" and
have intercourse. In Kethuboth (another book of the Talmud)
pp. 54, 57, 58, 59 provide more examples of legal religious
justification of adults having sex with children. For instance, on
pg. 58 it states, "When a grown-up man has intercourse with a
little girl it is nothing.,, "Although the intercourse of a small
boy is not regarded as a sexual act, nevertheless the woman is
injured by it as by a piece of wood." This does not mean that all
readers of the Talmud practice such things, but it’s one example
of many of how religious beliefs & cultural beliefs give
sanction to abuse. Some deranged criminals are hiding behind
their religious covers, & these religious covers are across the
board. Some small size cults teach that ‘‘free sex" between all
persons is "liberation" and "love". In such cases, one has a
layering of rationalizations, from the front clear down to the
deeper levels. And as for the abuse, many of the handlers think
that it is O.K. because they have the ability to erase any
memory of the abuse from the slave’s mind, and make it "O.K."
They also rationalize that they are ‘expanding the mind of their
slaves. You’ve all heard the New Age clap trap that man is on
the edge of a new evolutionary leap forward, and they talk
themselves into believing they are part of that great leap
forward. Some of the leading mind researchers, who help
program seem to honestly believe this. As rediculous as this
may sound, people will believe rediculous things if it will
justify to their own minds, the cruelty they perpetuate on
innocent people. At the heart of all the mind-control, you will
find the heartbeat of Lucifer and the willingness of his
followers to do what they believe he wants.
Page 489 ...

REALITY VS PERCEPTION
This article will discuss the ins & outs of an alter’s perception
of things, and the external world. In many ways, it might be
helpful for the client and the therapist to view each other as two
beings from separate worlds who need to learn some common
means to communicate. Stephen Toulmin said, "All knowledge
bears the imprint of the mind’s own structure." There is some
truth that our minds help us organize our perceptions. A
newborn baby will turn its head toward a sound, even though it
has not had any experience in the world that would teach it that
anything important is in the direction of the sound. It knows to
do this because it is born with this ability. As the magician uses
a slight of hand, the programmer uses a slight of "the mind’s
abilities to learn". As we live in the real world, we grow up &
learn meanings to words. Our ideas are representations of what
exists in the world. The problem between the programmed
multiple and the common person in the street who is not
programmed, is that the programmed multiple’s experiences
indeed make his or her ideas representations that exist in the
reality that the programmers created for the various alters. One
might say that many of these objects in an internal world are
objects of a multiple’s imagination. This may be ultimately
true, but the programming has a reality of its own and may be
the best reality that the alter has had a chance to apprehend. For
instance, at one point Fritz hooked up a heart/pulse monitor to
prove to an alter that she had a heart. However, this alter was
programmed to trance out if hooked up to such a device. The
device read "no pulse", and the alter said "See I told you I had
no heart". Fritz was chagrined, but he didn’t give up. He
explained that the programming was causing this alter to trance,
so the alter tried hard not to trance and the next time, there was
a weak reading. The third time, there was even a better reading,
as the alter mastered the ability to stay grounded. When people
remember something or imagine something, one can not be
sure if these ideas relate to something that really existed.
Generally, when a person perceives something, unless he is
drunk, his perception is going to conform to reality. However,
the programmers mess with the mind of victims so much, that
the deeper alters only live in a deep hypnotic trance. They only
perceive as they have been programmed to perceive. This really
is a tribute to how incredible the human mind is. The human
mind can creatively design all kinds of concepts and can
function in an imaginary world if that is what it takes to
survive. One of the things that most of the alters need to
develop is a sense of external reality. This means that they need
to spend time holding the body and experiences life outside of
their external world which they live in. They will also need to
learn that truth is not whatever you make it. Of course, the
victim of mind-control already has many doubts and to realize
that they can’t trust their own judgement is difficult to accept.
Some of the alters will be left-brain and some will be
right-brain alters. The therapist will experience various
quasi-psychotic" symptoms, but there is no reason to be
alarmed by it. It simply comes with the territory. Because the
alters systems are complex, and may be subjected to
programming at a particular time, alters may not present a
consistent picture. The therapist may begin to wonder if the
entire thing is a very complex game for the client’s alters. Over
time the therapist will begin to sort things out. If the client does
not have the ability to communicate, there may develop many
incidents that are difficult to understand. Again, the therapist
needs to remind her or his self that there is probably a good
reason WHY the alters are acting the way they are acting. As
this book has repeatedly brought out, the phenomena of
programmed multiplicity has been very poorly understood by
therapists.
Back to Contents Next
Page 490 ...

RESPONSIBILITIES, tips to face new ones

The programmers succeed in what they do, because they know
how the mind works, and they work with the victim’s mind.
The support team must do the same. The programmers know
how the mind needs the stage set for it to learn new things, and
they will take the time and effort to lay the groundwork, the
foundation. Likewise, when the deeper alters begin
experiencing the real external life, they need to have the
groundwork, the stage set for them to learn new things. The
deeper alters can be encouraged to put their survival skills to
work. The deeper alters need to forget the "I can’t"s and
recognize that they have powerful survival skills that can be
redirected to make them successful in the external world. When
deeper alters who are learning about the outside world see a
need, they need to tackle that need. If one sees dirty dishes,
then wash them. If one sees a barren front yard, plant some
flowers. If one sees a hurting person, give solace. By using
their powers of observation the deeper alters can see needs and
address those needs around them. This will give them a sense
of accomplishment and power. They will then begin to
recognize their worth and their potential. After one looks
around for needs to address, the next step is to ask yourself
what you’d like to try doing. If you think you’d like to do
something, then try it. Go to a hobby shop, or to the library and
get some ideas on what new activity you can do. You will be
surprised at what you will be able to accomplish. Alter can help
alters, and can work together as teams on new projects. Deeper
alters need to have the goal of having a full range of emotions.
Emotions will help them achieve maturity. Anyway, who gave
the right to the programmers to say you can’t step outside of
programming?

SALVATION, obtaining it, issues for multiples

An infant will enjoy playing with a box, and later as a child will
enjoy trees. When the child gains an intellectual understanding
of boxes and trees as an adult, the simple fun of being with
these things is lost. Sometimes people would enjoy God more if
they didn’t become so intellectual about Him, and just played
with Him as a child. There are a number of people who insist
on quarreling about what has already passed. How could God
have done this? Why is God so cruel? Why is God so merciful?
Why does God love me a sinner? Why does God hate me a
sinner? With something so vast and big like God, He often gets
the same treatment accorded the weather, in that everyone has
their own opinion of how the weather should be. If we couldn’t
understand adults as children, why do we think we can
understand God? Wouldn’t it be more fun if we could crawl up
in His spiritual arms and experience His concern and kindness,
rather than trying to dissect His actions with intellectual
theories. But one thing God’s Word makes clear, our happiness
is not His goal for us in life, His goal is that we would be
conformed to the image of Christ. When we see our problems
in that light, we see that our problems are actually just what we
needed to develop the Christ-like ministry God wants for us.
Did you ever wonder why your parents wanted you to have
good habits?--you wanted to play, and they wanted you to have
good habits. They weren’t interested in your idea of happiness,
they were trying to develop character. But rather than fight with
God, why don’t we try to have some child-like wonder, isn’t it
amazing how beautiful life is? Watch a spider spin a web.
Watch the sunset. Watch a mother cat and her kittens. We
sometimes think that our own problems are unique. We like to
think that our modern world has its own unique problems.
Western civilization has been built upon the
Page 491 ...
ancient wisdom of the Word of God. The Bible records that in
ancient times there were: child sacrifices (for example see 2
KGS 17:17), satanic rituals where they did self-inflicted cuts
(for example I KGS 18:26-28), witches who used magic
paraphernalia like rings (EZE 13: 17-21), secret magic books
(ACTS 19:17-19), child prostitution (for example I KGS 14:24,
& JOB 36:14), and political leaders who were into satanic
witchcraft (2 KGS 21:1-16), and much more. On and on we
could go describing many of the same problems that people
face today--including mind-control. This does not mean
everything was exactly the same. The Roman toilets and
swimming pools looked similar to ours, but their elite had only
4 wheeled carts rather than cars. Obviously, a Roman senator
didn’t have to worry about a flat tire. But when it comes to
matters about the human soul, the human spirit, eternal
salvation, guilt, shame, greed and hate, and tax collectors the
issues are exactly the very same issues as they were thousands
of years ago. The ancient wisdom of the ancients which is
embodied in the Holy Bible is still as rich and powerful for us
today as it was in ancient times. That ancient wisdom said,
"Open your mouth for the speechless...and plead the cause of
the poor and needy" PROV 3 1:8. I wish we could find a few
Christians who would stand with us to open their mouths for all
the alter personalities of the 2 million mind-controlled slaves in
this country who do not have a voice, and that we could plead
the cause of these needy mind-controlled victims throughout
this land. What you sow, you reap. In street parlance this
translates "what goes around, comes around." If we want to
reap some salvation for ourselves, we had better sow some
salvation. What have you been planting? One of the most
difficult topics for programmed multiples and for those who
work with them IS THE QUESTION: HOW do
PROGRAMMED MULTIPLES GET SALVATION? We have
been saved, we are being saved, and we will be saved.
Salvation comes in many tenses. If one alter gives his life to
Christ, does that save an entire system? Can a system of alters
lose their salvation if the front is Christian and the deeper parts
are active in rituals where humans are sacrificed? How can a
person be two things at once? Does each alter need a separate
baptism? Is it wrong to baptize different alters of one system?
These are a few of the questions that have plagued multiples.
God is not a respecter of persons. Everyone will be treated
equally and equitably by God. There is not one standard for
multiples and another for non-multiples. The question is
JUST WHAT ARE GOD’s STANDARDS? It may surprise the
reader to be told that in spite of all the preaching that is going
on today--many of the teachings of Christ and the teachings of
the Bible have been lost, including many that concern salvation.
Christ said it was foolish to gain the whole world, but to lose
one’s own soul. By extension it would be foolish to gain power
over all the internal worlds of oneself or of another person, and
to lose one’s own soul. Don’t be foolish, don’t lose your soul.
Can you imagine a company building an exclusive ship like the
Queen Mary, installing many beautiful things, the latest
communication equipment, the best safety equipment and then
when it is completed, set the ship adrift without a crew to float
aimlessly around and to be tossed by each storm and to sink
without any purpose. The human is far more wonderfully made
than any ship. Our brains are still far superior in many ways to
the best computers. Do you think that God created mankind
(and crowned him with "glory & honor" according to His Word
in PS 8:5) just to cast mankind adrift? Some men have decided
that man is adrift. That man must chart his own
course--somewhat like the ship deciding to sail itself. Adam
Smith, a scottish intellectual of the 18th
Page 492 ...
century was convinced that science would save mankind from
war and superstition (which is how he viewed Christianity).
Science did not save us from war, nor have the teachings of
Christ lost meaning as some superstitious gobblygook, but the
Words of Christ are just as powerful today as they were 2,000
years ago. Christ said that the truth shall set men free, and those
words are no less true today than they were in his day. There
are plenty of philosophies that will convince you that you were
designed by God merely to be abandoned, that there is no
purpose to life. But why did the prodigal son feel miserable
eating with the pigs? Because he was a man and he knew that
he was meant to have a better life. People know that they are
called to something better. They are often not content to think
that their life is meaningless, because they know better. In the
sight of God the creator there are no common people, only
special important people that He ordained. Almighty God loves
us better than we love ourselves. Not Sally over here because
she goes to church several times a week, nor Sue over here
because she has the Bible memorized better than anyone else.
He loves us, all of us, good and bad, because He created us and
as our Creator He loves what He created in His own image.
Christ asked people to get to know him. He didn’t ask his
disciples to go to church on sunday. He didn’t give them a
Bible and command them to follow the Bible, he asked them to
learn from him and to follow him and to get to know Him. God
allowed a persecution to come upon the early Christians so they
would quit going to church and would go to the world and tell
them the good news that their Creator loved them and had a
plan for their lives. "That day a great persecution broke out
against the church in Jerusalem, and all except the apostles
were scattered. ..So the people who were scattered went from
place to place telling the good news." ACTS 8:1 The good
news IS NOT that you are unworthy, God’s Word says that all
are worthy
of anything good that He has. The good news IS NOT that we
are rejected and worthy of punishment. God’s Word says that
he suffered rejection and punishment so that we can realize that
we don’t need to. The good news IS NOT that we should be
ashamed of ourselves, and walk around in guilt, I’m sure most
of you were told at some point, "Shame on you, you are a bad
person." God sent his only begotten-son to love us, not to judge
us. Don’t you think He knew what people were like, when he
came to show us God’s love? The self-righteous and those with
religious spirits enjoy making people feel guilty. They threaten
you with rejection, punishment, and want us to lower our
self-esteem. After a while a person surrenders to their incessant
religious spirits, and decides that "I’m stupid, I’m worthless,
I’m bad, etc." But guilt is NOT the answer. Guilt is not the
good news. But you may be protesting--But isn’t that what the
Bible wants, doesn’t it want us to be guilty, doesn’t it say ‘for
all have sinned and come short of the glory of God."? Doesn’t
it say, "All of us like sheep have gone astray. Each has turned
to his own way."? Doesn’t it say, "For whoever keeps the
whole law, yet stumbles in one point, he has become guilty of
all".? Surprises of surprises, the Bible NEVER asks man to feel
guilty. The Biblical greek words that translate guilt (hupodikos,
opheilo and enochos), mean guilty in the same sense that if you
leave your car overparked and the meter runs out--you have
violated a law and are guilty of violating that law---BUT THAT
IS SOMETHING ENTIRELY DIFFERENT THAN FEELING
GUILTY. We have been told all our lifetimes by the modern
day pharisees that it is God who wants us to feel guilty. God
wants us to feel loved. God wants us to realize that He loves us
more than we can ever love ourselves. God is love, God never
tells us that God is guilt. I can do all things through Christ Jesus
who lives in me! Wow! How can God expect us
Page 493 ...
to have a low opinion of ourselves if He tells us that we can do
all things through Christ! He never expected us to have a low
opinion of ourselves. Jesus is called the most humblest man
ever, and yet he had no sins to castigate himself about. He
couldn’t crawl in the dust and plead for God’s mercy on his
wretchedness, so how did he get to be the humblest man?
Because humility is not self-denigration. We have been fed a lie
here too by the religious pharisees of our day. Humility means
knowing God’s plan for your life. God wants us to learn His
ways which are the ways of love. Religious spirits don’t want
to treat people with love, they want to judge them, they want to
hit them over the head with religion, they want to legalistically
find ways to prove that their fellow man is bad. They can
always show you how they are right and the other person is
wrong. They like to use the law--but they seldom use love. The
Word of God says that the letter of the Law kills, but the Spirit
of Love gives life. Yes man has fallen greatly, and mankind
sins greatly. But where sin abounds, God’s love and strength
are poured out in more abundance. Christ said, if God clothes
the wild flowers in all their beauty won’t he do more for you if
you have faith? On the one hand is the beauty of
mankind--bought with a price" "in the image & glory of God"
and "in the likeness of God"; and on the other hand this
beautiful image of God has wandered off in total rebellion to
his Creator. But even in that state of rebellion God still sees
worth and value in a man. The enemies of God, such as the
mind-control programmers, love to make people think that God
has rejected them because they are bad. And since our parents
didn’t listen to us, and told us we were bad, we think that God
acts like our parents. But the message that Christ’s disciples
gave was not one of guilt, and shame, and religious rules, but
sounded like this, "For David, after he had served his own
generation by the will of God, fell on sleep, and was laid unto
his fathers, and saw corruption. Be it known unto you therefore,
men and brethren, that through this man [Jesus] is preached
unto you the forgiveness of sins: and by him all that believe are
justified from all things, from which ye could not be justified
by the law of Moses." ACTS 19:36-39 When my deeper alters
thought about forgiveness, the programming kicked in and I got
suicidal. These alters had been programmed to think they had
no heart, that they were bad, etc. Forgiveness was a concept
that they could not grasp. But these alters were able to take the
first step of faith. (Allow me to switch to first person:) I told
myself, if God said it, I had to believe it, because God said
WHOSOEVER asks for forgiveness is forgiven. The day you
seek Me with your whole heart is the day you’ll find me. (cf.
PS 34:8-10, 2 CHR. 15:2, HEB 10:22). I stepped outside of the
programming and believed God was the integrity of His own
Word. I couldn’t rationalize the forgiveness, I simply accepted
it on the basis of God’s integrity. As the months past, I realized
that the Holy Spirit had quietly done His work, and had freed
me from the guilt that I had carried, and freed me from the
effects of the programming. I did feel forgiven. I didn’t
intellectually comprehend forgiveness, the programming
blocked me mentally, but it couldn’t block the Holy Spirit
working in my heart. Forgiveness came to my deeper parts by
standing on the Word of God. Now I was free to acknowledge
the things God had for me in life. If your prayers are not going
anywhere, and you feel like God is not hearing your
prayers--then quit praying, and start trusting that God knows
your situation. He knows the trouble your in. Place some trust
and faith in Him. Quit fearing, and start having some faith. An
innocent child is birthed out of heaven. The Word of God says
that Christ died for all men, the entire world. He was the lamb
of God who took away the sins of the world. He was the second
Adam, who corrected the curse that Adam brought upon
mankind. It is very
Page 494 ...
clear in scripture that you will only be held accountable for the
sins that you have done. Adam’s sins are not imputed to you.
The goal of the Illuminati is to take the innocent child and
perform mind-control upon it before it can know right from
wrong, before it has stepped outside of its innocence. The
perverted joy that Satan gets in marrying and polluting the
innocence of a small child is part of why things happen the way
they do. What happens when free-will is stripped from a young
innocent child? Those parts that do have free-will will stand in
proxy for those who are trapped. How did God judge a city?
God told Abraham he would spare Sodom and Gomorrah if he
could find a few righteous persons within them. God told
Abraham that if he could find 10 righteous men in the city of
Sodom, then he would spare it. If a person’s front alters have
free will they will stand in proxy for those who do not have
free-will. Persons are not responsible for action under extreme
duress nor are contracts valid legally if they are contracted
under duress. Likewise, those alters who have no free-will are
not in a situation where they can choose right from wrong.
They become accountable when they are free of the
mind-control and can choose between right and wrong. In other
words, front alters can indeed save a city of alters, if they are
the only ones with free will and they are righteous. But with
freedom comes responsibility. There are numerous cases of
non-multiples coming forward for numerous altar calls, and
repeatedly giving themselves to Christ. There are plenty of
cases of non-multiples receiving repeat baptisms. As much as
this happens, it seems strange that some ministers will deny
alters who come to Christ the chance to be baptized. If the alter
wants to make a personal public confession of faith, they
should be allowed to do it. And the co-authors will be happy to
help victims with this area of concern. If a person is really O.K.
with the Lord, do you think that going into the water and
getting baptized is going to injure that relationship? Does the
reader really think God is that petty and has that little
compassion. What kind of person do some people think God is?
And that is probably one of the big secrets to gaining
salvation--DISCOVERING WHO GOD REALLY IS, versus
what all the modern religious pharisees say about Him. You are
not going to find salvation by submitting yourself to an
organized religious group that takes your free-will away. Christ
came to give you free-will to seek God on your own. He came
to set men free of religious tyranny. Unfortunately, after setting
men free of religious tyranny, many have come using his name
and have established religious tyranny. And they usually justify
their tyranny by distorting the character and nature of God.
What you sow, you reap. If you want a spiritual life, you need a
spiritual birth. Its that simple. You don’t plant a natural life and
get a spiritual life.
OUR "SALVATION PACKAGE"
1. Provides for a full and complete pardon for all sins of
commission and omission of which a sinner might be guilty.
2. Provides for a cleansing from all unrighteousness which
results from said sinner’s behaviour. "If we confess our sins He
is faithful and just to forgive us our sins and to cleanse us from
all unrighteousness."
3. Provides for the Judge of all the earth, "Remembering our
sins no more".
4. Provides for the sins to be blotted out as a thick cloud, and
put away as far as the East is from the West.
5. Provides for clearing of the conscience by way of asking for
forgiveness, not just apologizing, and making restitution where
it is possible to restore the damages.
Page 495 ...

SANCTUARY (safe room), creating a s.

Therapists working in tandem with clients have built internal
safe rooms for alters to view memories together, or to work on
issues together in safety. They may also construct new living
quarters for alters as they work with the front systems and try to
stabilize, integrate and fuse alters. The concept of building safe
rooms internally to protect alters from internal attacks is a good
idea for therapists, but it has limited success. There is nothing
wrong with using internal sanctuaries, if the therapist realizes
the ins and outs of creating and using one. Safe rooms created
by the therapist & client work better for the front alters than for
deeper alters. Every change in the system comes with a price
tag. Programming has its own kind of security. The
programmers allowed alters to build their own internal worlds
and the homes they live in. They have felt safe in their internal
residences for years. When they abandon their internal homes it
doesn’t have a safe feeling, and then they are pounced upon by
numerous internal mechanism to not disturb the peace and
order of the system, such as judge alters with armies who
enforce the order of the system with pain and punishment. So
they have exchanged their comfortable internal home for a
palace with pain. No matter how beautiful the therapist makes
the safe room, it is still will be a place of pain. During
deprogramming, when we wanted to preserve temporary gains,
it was possible to creatively think of some type of internal
structure like an accessible mountain with a hollow oak to hide
in or an invulnerable space ship where an alter could have
refuge from the internal programmers. The problem is as long
as those internal programmers are operating, they are cagey and
they can creatively think of some way to overcome the imagery
of the new safe place. Generally within 48 hours they had
figured out some way to recapture the alter and had started
attempts to reprogram the alter. This means that every two days
a new safe hiding place has to be created, unless a sloppy job is
done and the system defenders break through very quickly, and
then a sanctuary may have to be built even sooner. And telling
this just underscores the need to work on why the alters are
making their changes in their life. Why are they fighting the
programming? They need to be reminded. If the support team
wants to create an internal sanctuary, and are aware of its
vulnerability, then the therapist needs to work with the alter
being protected to find out what the alter feels is safe. The alter
may have lived internally in a box and may not know what a
large room is. The alter may not even feel comfortable in a
large room. Perhaps the alter has been around numerous other
alters and has always heard noisy chattering. How will the alter
feel if the alter is now going to be isolated in a "safe" room.
The safe room may end up feeling more like maximum
security. In other words, the therapist needs to work with the
alter and the alter’s creativity to secure the best choice of
safety. Other supportive alters can help. Internal telephone lines
can be put in to keep alters in touch with each other.
Page 496 ...

SATANIC CULTS, understanding the practice of

For a certain part of mankind, the drive for power has
developed the power to fashion other men. But what power
controls those who have gained the power to fashion the minds
of men as they choose? Is that power which controls the
programmers merely the latent potential of the human mind? Or
is that power merely a mass hallucination, or an auto suggestion
by these programmers? Or to rephrase these questions more
bluntly: does Lucifer and his demons really control the
programmers? Or do they only half-way pretend that demons
exist, because if you believe in something, anything, then
supposedly it will work? For the power hungry, truth and
fiction are but tools to gain power. There is an appealing theory
that the CIA, Anton LaVey (a satanist & programmer), Michael
Aquino (a satanist & programmer), and others of the occult
underworld find witchcraft and spells appealing simply because
it gives power, and that they do not believe in an actual
character named Satan. LaVey and Aquino both convincingly
claim that they do not believe in Satan. They also lie
convincingly that they don’t carry out human sacrifices. Who
knows the hearts of these programmers? At the heart of evil is
the quest for power. That is what is at the root of the love of
money. At the heart of evil is a philosophy of death that must
act as if it is a philosophy of life. Because the Illuminati is not
able to see the true meaning of life, on the surface nothing
seems to count but personal power, but is there something else?
Yes, there is, and we know it for a fact because we were there.
These programmers are prisoners of their quest for power, but
they also believe that there is a greater power that they serve
which will reward them. Again the question begs itself--when
they are captured by their insatiable quest for power, have they
surrendered themselves to a neutral thing, or have these
programmers surrendered their life to a higher power?
Everyone is willing to concede that these satanic movers and
shakers are obsessed with gaining power. If these men want
power so bad, and have such resources available, would they
devote so much time and resources to something that didn’t
work? But the rational thinker can correctly answer, much of
magic is trickery, natural unknown forces in nature, or some
unknown power of mind over matter. The rational thinker
argues, it works, but not by supernatural forces. Psychic
abilities are merely untrained RV abilities.
But the surrender to demonic forces always brings with it a
desire for the irrational. If reason were to have a central place in
the magician’s world view, then much of what the magician
believes would have to be discarded. Castaneda’s occult classic
Tales of Power (NY: Simon & Schuster, 1974) p. 101 states,
"We, the luminous beings [the Illuminati], are born with two
rings of power, but we use only one to create the world. That
ring, which is hooked very soon after we are born, is reason,
and its companion is talking. Between the two they concoct and
maintain the world. So, in essence, the world that your reason
wants to sustain is the world created by a description and its
dogmatic and inviolable rules, which the reason learns to accept
and defend. The secret of the luminous beings is that they have
another ring of power which is never used, the will. The trick of
the sorcerer is the same trick of the average man. Both have a
description; one, the average man, uphold it with his reason; the
other, the sorcerer, upholds it with his will....the advantage of
the sorcerer is that will is more engulfing than reason....from
now on you should let yourself perceive whether the
description is upheld by your reason or your will." The child
victim while they are being programmed are told that if they
want something bad enough they can create it.
Page 497
Hitler, a secret satanist, never quit preaching the power of the
will. If the German people willed to win, then they could, was
Hitler’s magical perception. When individuals lost the will to
fight, Hitler held those individuals accountable, rather than
external circumstances for their lack of fight. Mind over matter.
This is the sorcerer’s world view. There have been and continue
to be plenty of gullible people who want to believe the
deceptions of the cults. What you see is not what you get. The
world of reason must be left behind to understand the
Illuminati. We must think in terms of willpower and power of
all kinds. We must think in irrational terms. We must grasp
what it is like to be addicted to power, and the quest for hidden
knowledge to gain more power, and power through deception.
The Mystery Religions (which continue today in their hard core
form as the Illuminati, and their more ceremonial symbolism as
Freemasonry) have had thousands of years to perfect their
deceptions. The victim of mind-control experiences the depth
of how powerful the perpetrators’ network of deception is. The
Illuminati and the Masonic Perpetrators of mind-control have a
system of secrecy so pervasive and well in place that you will
not see the obvious telltale signs that most people would look
for when they initially hear that something is amiss. Even the
visible front of the occult world is overlooked by many people.
Along this line, when a therapist or victim begins to catch on to
the mind-control, immediately the natural questions present
themselves, HOW DID THEY HAVE TIME TO DO THIS?
and WHERE COULD THEY HAVE DONE ALL THIS?
These questions may stem from genuine concern that the
person not jump to false conclusions, but they also are
predicated on a lack of understanding about how the Illuminati
and associated cults work. For reasonable people who are
disposed to learn, we can provide the inside story on how the
unexplainable can be explained. For those who have made up
their minds and are not interested, all we have to ask is this,
"How do you explain this present wicked world and how do
you explain how incompetent our government seems to be in
correcting problems? How is it that billions of dollars get
looted from the entire Savings & Loan industry by hundreds of
insiders and no-one ever gets punished? How is it that Russian
generals pilot our most secret Stealth bombers, but U.S.
airforce personnel get shot if they approach a stealth bomber
without authorization?" Actually, when we think of it, the list
of "anomalies" of this present system are endless. We could
honestly ask hundreds of questions of things that don’t make
sense, unless you understand how the Illuminati are running
things. Take a minute to think about how important power is to
the military and to the alphabet spy-agencies? Their quest for
power lines them up philosophically with the occult world’s
philosophy. Truth for warriors and spies is merely a tool. The
men who will rise to the top of such organizations are those
who will defend the satanic philosophy of using willpower to
create one’s worldview. During our time within the Illuminati,
we can say for a fact that Freemasonry and the Illuminati are
interlocked. The Masonic system has lodges and temples that
public can see, but don’t think that they are not smart enough to
create a system of secret lodges. They have a system of secret
lodges, and secret tunnels to temples that allow them to carry
out human sacrifices and sexual rituals without the mainstream
of lower level Masons even knowing what Freemasonry is all
about. In a female Illuminati system, the Sisters of Light alters
will be created before the Illuminati Mothers of Darkness. All
Mothers of Darkness have to have Sister of Light alters.
However, the Sisters of Light alters, which are used during the
body’s teenage years are extremely difficult to find?
Page 498 ...
Why? Because the Sisters of Light are created for extremely
abusive Masonic sexual rituals that are done in both visible &
secret Masonic Temples. The teenage girl may be used on
Friday, by quietly pulling the child out of school for a
preparation ritual by the Masons, and then on Saturday and
Sunday the teenage child Sister of Light alters will participate
in the actual full-blown rituals.

DEMONOLOGY, and its relation to mind-control and the

satanic cults.
If you investigate into the depths of darkness in the hearts of
men, where will it lead you? Your investigation will take you
into demonology. In its nicer forms, it shows itself as
mysticism and spiritism. It is upon demonology that the
Illuminati is founded. It is from demonology that the rituals and
the mind-control spring forth. Of course those who have no
previous knowledge of this will be the first to feel qualified to
pass judgement that magic and demons are merely urban
myths. In the rarified air of academia, denial of Satanic Ritual
Abuse is like an opium addiction. If corruption & organized
crime need satanic philosophies to justify their acts, then they
also need demonology to provide the spiritual power and
guidance. It all becomes one dynamic, sacrifice and gore are
necessary to harness spiritual power, secrecy is demanded to
perform such a blood lusting magical tradition, and control of
the outside world then is needed to hide the crimes done for
power. A mind-controlled slave’s hidden life is based upon the
spirit world. The science of dealing with spirits is called the
Cabala. Theurgy is a high degree of occultism where the
magician can evoke angels (evil), exalted spirits, genii, fire
spirits. Within the Illuminati, we were Luciferians (also known
as Gnostics), not Satanists. That does not mean that Satan
doesn’t play a role in the occultism of the Illuminati, it means
that Satanic cults tend to be deranged dabblers, and the
Illuminati are sophisticated blue-blooded bloodlines that view
themselves as the elite of the world. But whether one is part of
a Satanic cult or the Illuminati or some other occult group, the
foundation of what is done is demonology. With ruthless
dedication the upcoming Illuminati undertake to transform
themselves into magicians and witches who can control the
spirits. Controlling spirits gives power. Satanic dabblers are not
the only practitioners of necromancy, so are the Illuminati. You
will find the Illuminati in graveyards for some of their rituals.
Many of the Illuminati rituals are so severe only persons with
multiple personalities (or great dissociative abilities) could
endure them and maintain a functioning sanity. Although we
can write with authority about demonology and the Illuminati
and its relationship to programming, we hope to show a few
tidbits of the paper trail that could be amassed to add validity to
what we want to share. A member of the elite Stewart
bloodline, R.J. Stewart, provides a paper trail of what we also
experienced in the Illuminati, "The developing practitioner of
advanced magical arts must have grounding and experience in
the following disciplines: meditation, concentration,
visualization and ritual pattern-making. No advanced work may
be undertaken without training and experience in these four
skills. There are five fundamental arts or disciplines in magical
work, and the first four tend to lead towards the fifth, which is
meditation." (Stewart, R.J. Advanced Magical Arts. Longmead,
England, 1988, p. 8; this is also in Stewart, R.J. Living Magical
Arts. Blandford Press, Poole, 1987.) The same abilities that are
needed for advanced magic, (according to this great magic
adept and member of the scottish Stewarts), are the same
abilities needed for becoming a programmed multiple. The
mind-control with its abilities to endure pain, to go into
trances, to visualize is really a natural outgrowth of the
deeper black magical arts.
Page 499 ...
The eastern branch of the secret occult world is Indian Yogism,
and it is well known how they have developed total control of
their minds and bodies. They can go into altered states and
sleep on beds of nails or walk on hot coals. Because
demonology is based upon power, and power is obtained by
fighting to the top, a child victim is soon taught that if they do
not perform they will bring harm upon their cult bloodline. In
high level magic, there is no room for failure. The bloodlines
and individuals are locked in intense rivalries, and individuals
are expected to contribute to the competition. The child victim
is expected to blindly obey all orders within the family. The
victim is to never ask why or ask about the consequences of an
order. The victim is warned, "If you ever break this oath may
all the Darkness of the family fall upon you as the same
daggers pierce your heart through and through." After such an
oath the child will be ordered to worship Lucifer, and carry out
Luciferian chants. Some of the oaths, and secrets are beginning
to see the light of day. J.K. Huysmans wrote in La Bas (french
for Down There) that one of the Illuminati oaths at that time of
the French revolution (and still used) was, "Lightning does not
strike so quickly as the dagger which will reach thee wherever
thou mayest be."
Page 500 ...
SELF-FORGIVENESS, to achieve
One of the major blocks preventing deprogramming is the lack
of self-forgiveness that alters maintain. Some churches have it
backwards, they think that the victims need to forgive their
abusers from the start. The victims do not even recognize what
their abusers have done, and the victims generally blame
themselves (unfairly) for much of what was done to them. The
victim needs first to work on self-forgiveness, then learn what
has really been done, and finally when the memories are all
worked on, and the person has completely integrated, then the
victim can honestly forgive their abusers. Mouthing some
words about forgiveness without understanding what the sin
was that was done to the victim is only pretending to work on
the issue. The bitterness that is embedded in their hearts and
minds needs a proper release, and unfortunately most of this
bitterness is turned by victim themselves on themselves, not
against the abusers, who are the ones who really should held
responsible. Because self-forgiveness is such a major issue, it
has already been covered some in Vol. 2, p. 284, and in our
Deeper Insights article on "Salvation" Those who have studied
the professional literature on treatment of MPD/DID will notice
a deathly silence in most professional literature on the topic of
self-forgiveness. All Illuminati victims of mind-control have
been terrorized by their abusers about how God hates them and
how God will punish them for their badness. The mind has had
to accept the repeated messages that the programmers will drill
into the victim that the victim is bad. Why will the mind accept
this message so conclusively? The mind is pre-set to expect
love from parents. Every animal and every person expects care
and love from its mother when it’s born. When the child does
not receive what it expects then it has no choice but to
conclude, "I must be bad for so many people to treat me this
way." "These all-knowing big people must have a reason for
abusing me, and they say it’s because I’m bad, and all the
evidence shows that I’m bad, so I must be very bad." It’s a
vicious cycle. The programming makes the child feel defective,
and the feelings of being defective and guilty make the child
feel shame. All these feelings combine to make the person hate
him or her self. The victim of mind-control has had a
foundation of guilt and humiliation laid into their unconscious
mind. Memorizing a Bible verse and repeating some verse like
it’s a mantra is not going to root out that foundation which is
firmly embedded. Programs which attempt to show deeper
alters their identity in Christ will hit lots of strongholds and
triggers and may get bogged down in fierce resistance. The
struggle for self-forgiveness will be a process. It is a process of
sanctification that the Holy Spirit will work in a person over a
period of time. The mind needs time to process and sort things
out. The bitterness and self-hatred were not wired into the mind
in countless neural-synapses and K-lines overnight. It will take
time for the mind to re-wire itself. Here are some tips, and the
reader may have already thought of these: Study the Word of
God about self-forgiveness. Pray for self-forgiveness. Be gentle
and patient, it takes time for the mind to overcome its
foundation of self-hatred. Keep bathing the mind in positives
and washing away the negatives. Over a period of time a
healing will take place, and you will have regained the
self-respect that the programmers and abusers stole from you.
Page 501 ...

SPLIT-BRAIN PROGRAMMING
One of the most powerful programming tools is the use of
split-brain programming. In order to insure the continued
secrecy and success of the use of alters who function only from
one hemisphere, the Illuminati used their psychiatrists to spread
the notion that split-brain programming was simply a hypnotic
program, a trick of the mind. The reality is that one side of the
brain is physically drugged to sleep with an injection while the
victim is traumatized to create parts. Vol. 2 covers methods
used in split brain programming. After a single hemisphere part
(alter) is created, it can then be further programmed by each of
its two eyes viewing different films simultaneously. Actually,
the split-brain films begin during the splitting tortures. If a
programmer wants a part to assassinate a particular person, they
will often create a particular part for just that assignment. While
they are torturing the mind to get that part who will do the job,
they will be showing films of the crimes supposedly done by
the person who is the target of the assassination mission. The
programmer doesn’t know exactly when the mind will split a
piece so the films are run during the entire trauma-splitting
process. The crime films and what needs to be done will be run
during the process. The part that is created for this specific job
will be accessed after the mission and destroyed by shattering it
with trauma, and then the shattered parts will be locked up in a
concentration camp in the mind. This specialized type of
assassination programming is done usually with men.
Sometimes the programmers are too busy or don’t have the
patience and they merely put in a shattering program, that
self-triggers when the slave’s mission is complete; and shatters
that piece using the internal programming capabilities of the
slave’s mind. This works fine, but the risk of leakage is
somewhat greater. Special alters created for a single drug run or
money laundering run for an important politician will be
created and destroyed in a very sophisticated hi-tech fashion.
There will be no split-brain alter left for the therapist to work
with, only tiny fragments locked up in very deep secure parts of
the mind. However, the key to understanding why these
dissociative pieces (alters) are so good at their jobs is
SPLIT-BRAIN PROGRAMMING. That is why it has been
kept such a secret. Alters who have been created when only one
hemisphere was awake will either operate only on logic or
operate only on emotion. Alters who operate only on logic
serve in roles such as assassination alters just described and
internal programming alters. These alters will carry out
inhumane horrible atrocities upon others and themselves
because they have no emotions. On the other side, an alter
which has no logic can be hypnotically told to act like Betty
Boop (the cartoon figure) and they will emotionally carry out
this assignment, because they have no logic to tell them that
people don’t act like Betty Boop, a cartoon figure. An alter who
has no logic can easily be made into a door knob or some other
illogical form. These alters will only function from the side of
the mind they were created from. Over time, the Illuminati has
discovered that alters with split brain programming do not gain
the advantage of the other hemisphere, but remain stunted. This
is why it is so difficult for therapists to "contaminate" internal
programmers with positive thinking. Internal programming
alters can make themselves co-conscious with other alters who
want to be free of programming, and the programming alters
don’t sense the horror of the abuse with which they subject the
rest of the system.
Page 502 ...

EXERCISES TO REWIRE THE BRAIN’S

HEMISPHERE’S TOGETHER FOR SPLIT- BRAIN
ALTERS.
Brain Integration Therapy developed from the foundational
research of Dr. Glenn and Robert Doman and and educator,
Carl Delacato, and later Dr. Paul Dennison provides exercises
that will develop brain pathways for integration of the
hemispheres. An example of such an exercise is called "the
crosscrawl". The Crosscrawl stimulates both sides of the brain
and has a very positive impact on integration of the brain from
side to side. The exercise is basically marching in place with
the opposite hand touching the opposite knee. If it done to
music its more fun. A variation is is to try touching the opposite
hand to the opposite foot in the back instead of in the front. Or
one can try touching the opposite hand to the opposite heal in
the front. The exercises and advice that Dr. Paul Dennison
developed have solid research to validate them. This section
can’t possibly cover what several books cover on the subject.
Interested therapists should consult the following books:
Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Brain Gym, Teachers
Edition. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.
Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Personalized Whole
Brain Integration. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.
Hannaford, Carla. Smart Moves: Why Learning is Not All In
Your Head. Arlington, VA: Grat Ocean Pub., 1995. This book
was written by a neurophysicist/educator who has research to
validate the Brain Integration Therapy.
Some therapists have explored using music that both
hemispheres of the brain listen to in order to pull the two
hemispheres together. Whether this helps or not is not known.
Alters, who find they are only logic or emotion, can pair up
with the opposite type of alter and can work in teams. By
learning to co-consciously work side by side, they regain some
of the brain’s natural abilities to look at life both ways.
Page 503 ...

SURVEILLANCE, dealing with surveillance

SPIES IN THE SKY (This information is based upon Harold
Hough’s book Satellite Surveillance.) The FBI, SWAT teams,
and other law enforcement, the NSA, and the military all use
spy satellites. The best way to detect people from space is
infrared. Spy satellite KH-II (KEYHOLE-II) transmits its
information instantly to the ground. It can circle and view a
particular site every few days. Keyhole is the codeword for spy
satellites and each new generation gets a higher number. Low
level electric currents on the ground known as dark currents
interfere with their images. KENNAN, & LACROSSE spy
satellites are the newer generation spy satellites. LACROSSE
has radar imagining with a 3’ resolution. The Russians have the
ability to track spy satellite locations as they have circled the
globe. They could hide things as the satellites came around.
The normal person can’t do this, nor does the average person
have a great deal to hide anyway. So what if a spy satellite can
read a billboard from space?
How do these spy satellites work? CCDs are used in electronic
cameras in spy satellites (but the CCDs are blocked by cloud
cover). Radar from satellites is also used. Radar is used from
space to watch things, including what is happening in the
oceans. Passive radar can see through the surfaces of
underground structures. These kind of satellites are more of a
threat to the privacy of objects like cars & underground
shelters, than they are to people. They are not going to be able
to track you as an individual. But add in the factor of a tracking
implant, and the overhead satellite system becomes a
nightmare. The implants are a far greater threat than any spy
satellite with an electronic camera.
SPIES ON THE GROUND.
Some of the standard surveillance techniques are given in
Chapter 12. From our observations of their surveillance
methods, the Illuminati handlers use the standard techniques
that are taught by the military and the intelligence agencies.
Quite often people who are trying to mess with slaves will use
dealership cars that don’t have traceable licence plates. Over
the years, we have seen some clever ways for mind-controlled
slaves to elude their trackers. In fact, our system has had to
elude some with our car at times. The first step in eluding their
tracking is to realize they generally know where you are, and
they are looking for ways to exploit your weakest situation.
They will watch for your support person to leave. They will try
to access you on your way to your therapist. They will try to
access you when you are alone. They will disguise themselves
as JWs, a repairmen, as salesmen, and other disguises too
numerous to mention. Watch out for "friends". Try to keep your
business to yourself. Realize that everything you say over the
telephone is heard by the controllers. Fritz had a hard time
convincing us that the telephone wasn’t safe, because it seems
like such an invasion of one’s privacy, and to admit it, means
that one can no longer walk around with feeling that illusion of
safety. Finally, after years of evidence that the phones are not
private, we realize that if we talk on the phone, we need to
accept that others are listening. This seems like a simple thing,
but for Americans it is really difficult for them to realize that all
ordinary phone calls are run through 30 computers between the
caller and the receiver & that some of those computers record
all conversations. If the computer spots trigger words, your
conversation will get sent on to be listened to by humans. If you
don’t want your conversation listened to by a person, don’t use
trigger words. Much of what we would suggest is common
sense. We realize that the wise don’t need our advice, and fools
won’t heed our advice.
Page 504 ...

TIPS FOR THERAPISTS

One of the first things that therapists must acclimate themselves
to, is that the victim will go from one crisis to another, and
many times seem a hair’s breath away from death. This is
because they will actually bounce from one total disaster to
another calamity. The reasons for this chaos are many, but if
proper treatment through a support team can be mustered, the
length of this time period of disasters may be decreased. Please
don’t think that the victim is simply making this all up for
attention. And please don’t overreact and place the victim into a
hospital setting which will only create a new set of problems.
There is also a mistake on the part of some psychiatrists to try
to medicate the person to suppress the symptoms. The best way
to help a victim is to get the victim’s alters to creatively and
internally work on situations, after all, they were creative
enough to survive the most horrendous traumas ever dreamed
up by mankind. Another tip for therapists is that they should
not play favorites with alters. The therapist is in the same
situation as any leader, be he a sergeant or a kindergarten
teacher. In the long run, treating all persons with respect will
produce the best results. Not all systems are ready for
treatment. Some systems will bug out when their programming
kicks in.
"LOVE ME AS I AM."
A programmed multiple is probably the closest robot mankind
will ever design that approaches being like humans--why?
Because they are humans, and that is the horror of the thing.
Men can applaud when science makes true robots to assist
mankind, but mankind shrinks in horror and disgust to realize
that during the entire 20th century the Illuminati have been
creating robots out of people with the full secret assistance of
the British, American, French and German governments.
People, including therapists, shrink from the horror that slave
robots are being created out of humans, so they label us
anything but "slaves". People will tell you, "Love me as I am."
We saw one therapist tell an alter of a recovering victim,
"You’re nothing but programming." Are programmed feelings
any less than normal human feelings? Does it hurt any less to
be programmed that you lost a baby in child birth, than to have
actually lost a child? Is pain any less pain because it comes
from programming and not external reality? Is there any less
pain from being hypnotically convinced that they murdered a
child because of your disobedience, than if it were watched in
real life? Is the illusion of conscious thinking that the victim
has any less an illusion than the illusion of mainstream America
that common Americans determine who runs their government?
Is the victim of mind-control any less free than the average
person who must follow the dictates of their station in life, their
genetic coding, the dictates of society, the dictates of their own
lack of talents, and the subtle influences of peer pressure,
organized religion and mass mind-control, not to mention the
laws of physics? Perhaps there is more similarity between the
mind-controlled slaves and the rest of society than we choose to
admit! At any rate, the programmed thoughts and feelings of an
alter should not be given any less respect nor any less validity
than any other hurting person. It is time that psychologists quit
throwing labels on people, and love them where they are at.
Fritz and I have discussed what it is like for an observant
person to watch a programmed multiple. Programmed multiples
are not like other people. When you see some of the deeper
alters that carry out jobs in the real world you will notice
distinct differences between their thinking and
non-programmed people. The observer may find that the
unusual person
Page 505 ...
before them doesn’t laugh as they should, and they don’t follow
the cues of life in quite the right cadence. The unusual person
(the multiple) will seem to know about things, but when
questioned in depth will be found wanting. Specifics will be
lacking in explanations. It is typical of how a programmed alter
thinks. At times, in situations in which mind-controlled slaves
are prepared to function in, they can spew forth information
that will make them look above their peers in intelligence, and
at least look like non-programmed individuals. They will show
discipline and appear composed. But they will not carry with
them the baggage of half-baked ideas and useless memories,
and half-forgotten images. Reality of non-programmed people
is like a jungle full of tangled undergrowth. The programmed
multiple is like a well-manicured garden. What they know, they
know; and what they are ignorant of, they are ignorant of. Their
minds are more straight forward than non-multiples. Even front
alters have a way of being very on task and straight forward.
An observant person can use this as a clue. Learning behaviors
outside of the programming are more difficult, and provide the
appearance of "erratic" abilities. Many parts of the slave are
told they have no heart and no soul. They are told they are
robots, that they are slaves, that they are not human, etc. Just as
an ugly child knows in its being that it is ugly by the way it has
been treated by everyone in life, so also, the slave in its
innermost being, is convinced that it is something less than
human. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone cry
for them. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone care
about them. When the deeper alters are helped, who can blame
them for loving their rescuers? But again, the alters will ask
themselves, is this just another illusion? And anyway how can
anyone really care? We have hoped that by being brutally
honest with what a programmed multiple is really all about, that
there will be some people who can actually genuinely love
multiples in the reality of who they are. For instance, in our
Illustrated Guidebook we show a child involved in cannibalism.
We are calling for solid relationships between victims and
recovering slaves, not relationships based on illusions.
Although the thinking of the victim has been modified to suit
the Illuminati, that does not mean that victims are any less
worthwhile than anyone else. Today, we lavish time and special
attention to those who are handicapped and learning disabled.
But to think that any person is deserving of attention because
they are unusual is lopsided thinking. Our role in life to
facilitate people to be the person God had intended. Underneath
the superficial thoughts of the programming are special dear
people who hold many of the answers to the questions so many
of us ask, and to whom God has bestowed contributions and
abilities for the rest of mankind. In other words, love us for
being worthwhile humans, not for being an oddity, but love us
in the totality of what has been done to us to make us into
robotic mind-controlled slaves.
Page 506 ...

TRANSFERENCE, issues of
To be expected.
Transference issues are a given when working with
programmed multiples. It comes with the territory. The
programmed multiple’s mind naturally sets itself up for a
proxy. (A proxy is someone who stands in for another.) Instead
of seeing it as something to be feared, hopefully the therapists
can begin seeing that transference actually has a great deal of
positives. The person who suffers the most from transference is
the therapist, who will wonder at times if he or she is coming or
going. What is also interesting, is that not only is the therapist
the one who has to endure the brunt of the transference issues,
the therapist is also generally the primary trigger of the
transference problem. Transference issues are related to
memories, and the victim’s memories are very intense. The
programming memories are often abreacted in a drugged state,
so it is hard to separate the therapist from the abusers in the fog
of the memory.

Will be varied.
There are several types of transference issues. Transference
occurs when the client responds to their therapist or support
person based on some significant childhood figure.
Transference may also occur where the response to the support
person is based on several different important figures from
different points in the system’s past. The alter system may also
transfer feelings that should be directed toward their abusers
and internalize it. In other words, they treat themselves based
on some significant person in their past. (And then if this isn’t
enough, many therapists end up having transferences provoked
by someone in the system. This has a high chance of happening
because alter behavior is so exaggerated, and there are so many
different kinds of alters in a system, there is a
likelihood one of them will trigger the therapist. This is called
"countertransference".) Because an alter system is like a city
full of people (with lots of children), a large number of
contradictory transference issues may be going on at one time.
Let’s say Sally is a multiple going for therapy from therapist
Betty. One child alter of Sally’s system may see Betty as one of
her past Mother-of-Darkness abusers. Another may see her as
their abusive natural mother. Another may see her as a former
sexual partner. Another may see her as the programmer.
Another may see her as this wonderful kind teacher that the
system had in high school. The therapist barely knows at first if
she is coming or going, because so many alters are interpreting
and seeing her differently but all in the light of their varied past
experiences.

Can happen naturally.

Alters are very good at having transference reactions.
Sometimes all it takes for a transference reaction is the gender
of the therapist. A small alter when it takes the body may hide,
thinking that the therapist is one of its abusers from the past.
One of the sports that the Network of abusers likes to carry out
are hunts, where slaves are turned loose naked on large tracts of
private property like the Bohemian Grove and then hunted. If
an alter that was involved in a hunt is near the surface of the
mind, and a noise or sound randomly occurs that makes that
alter think that it is being chased, it may take the body and run
for its life. Transference issues happen so easily because the
multiple’s mind often runs two tracks, they may be in memory
while they are also carrying out other duties. The programmed
multiple will have feelings all over the place. Children (child
alters) easily see their
Page 507 ...
abuser all around them.
Can be manipulated for the abusers’ benefit. The abusers at
times can manipulate transference so that the therapist gets a
raw deal. This is another reason why victims need to be safe
before work is started. There are enough difficulties with
transference issues without the Network increasing them.

Can be worked with during therapy.

The therapist may want to take the feelings that the alters have
locked away and see if they can vent them. They might use a
dummy or mannequin to get in touch with their emotions.
"Who are you really angry at?" "What is the undercurrent of
your feelings, not what is on the surface, but what is below?"
"What have you remembered and not dealt with?" In this way,
the victim begins to learn to verbalize. To learn to redirect
transference is a sign of maturity. The guilt that is transferred,
can be dealt with. "You are not responsible for what was done
to you." If the victim acknowledges that they were powerless,
that acknowledgment will help with the fear. Facing the fears
and the lies saves the victim from internal transferences.
Dealing with this in turn will pave the way for the system to get
a clearer picture of programming. "I don’t have to personalize
it."

Transference issues call for teams.

Within an Illuminati system, you are going to find some alters
that work well with one gender, and some that work well with
the other. This is why it is advisable for teams to work with
multiple systems. A male therapist will simply never reach
some alters, and a female therapist will simply never reach
other alters. The therapist may feel like many of the
transferences are uncalled for or unfair, but the therapist must
go beyond personalizing the actions of the multiple. It is
common for the programmed multiple to assume that the
therapist will be cruel and sadistic just like their parents were.
The therapist may think that this misperception can be taken
care easily, but because of the way the multiple’s mind works,
the only way to change the misperception is over a long period
of time, such as a year or two of work. The therapist can make
headway in this area by being there for the client when the
system desperately needs help--which will happen. Gradually,
the system will see that the therapist was there. But the system
will never quit testing the therapist. It is the nature of children
to test, and most alters except for a few front alters have very
little experience in the world--even less than most children. It
really is a positive that they are questioning and beginning to
think for themselves. A child will be rebellious toward its
parent, because it knows that it can be its true self, it can show
its true colors, and still be accepted and received. Some of what
the alters do, is simply testing to see that the therapist will be
there and will continue to receive them.
Page 508 ...

a name="del115">TWINNING, understanding and dealing

with
Twinning is a critical factor to consider in the therapy of all
victims, and yet it has been basically a secret until Fritz, with
the help of some survivors like the author Cisco, began
exposing it in writing & talks in 1992. The reader will look in
vain at some of the best literature on treatment of MPD (now
DID) and not find it mentioned. The Illuminati via their dirty
psychologists have spread the false information that victims
should not be in contact with each other. For therapists who
have yet to get the word about twinning (or have heard the
disinformation that is being spread), this article may save the
life of their client.
Essentially all Monarch trauma-based mind-controlled slaves
are programmed to have a twin. The front host alter will
generally not know about the twinning unless they have had a
deep Illuminati alter teaches the host or they have read
something in our previous books. The Vol 2 book has
information on twinning on pages 83-84, 215, and 359. Our
Illustrated Guidebook has information on twinning on pages 45
and 47. During the twinning each victim will create parts that
internalize all the characteristics of the person selected to be
their twin. These parts have totally internalized the other
person’s identity. These parts are programmed to take
responsibility for what the twin does contrary to the
programming. If a victim goes into the hospital for therapy, the
twin system’s alters that identify with the victim will punish
their own system’s body and will report back to the master
what is happening. (A hospital stay will trigger the fear of death
in the twin, i.e. she’s dying, we’re dying.) The victim’s system
will not have to report back to the handler, their twin’s system
will do it for them. Twinning makes the subject of victim safety
and the prevention of victim accessing far more complex than
has been generally realized. Likewise, the victim of
mind-control who is attempting to move toward health and
freedom will experience lots of guilt in moving toward
freedom, when they know that this may be causing their twin to
commit suicide. The front parts (for instance the host alter) will
have no idea of the deeper torments that coming in to therapy
causes the deeper parts, because the host is oblivious to the
twinning. The therapist then double-binds the host by making
them sign contracts not to hurt the body, not realizing the
dynamics of why deeper parts are being pushed increasingly to
punish themselves for what is happening to or for what they are
doing to their twin system. We will review the various types of
programming scenarios that the programmers use to create
twins. The 12 sciences of mind-control that the Vol 2 and the
Deeper Insights book describe are all used to create twins. The
programming begins at about age 7, although the preparation
and selecting work may have taken place many years before.

SELECTION & PREPARATION.

a. One parent will have two children, but the two will be raised
independently of one another.
b. The eggs of a mother will be placed in surrogates to create
separate but identical twins.
c. A mother may swap her child with another mother.
d. The two will have generational ties.

TRAUMA.
a. The paired slaves will be trauma-bonded to each other, the
older will want to protect and nurture the younger, and will be
set up in situations to save the other from death.
b. They will torture each other, at times they are forced to
almost kill each other via torture.
c. They will go through almost all the death, burial and
resurrection ceremonies together. They learn to live and to die
together.
d. They will take & internalize each other’s pain when they are
tortured in the vicinity of one another.

DRUGS
a. Placed in front of mirrors under drugs to take on (internalize)
the identity of the other person.

HYPNOSIS
a. The full power of hypnosis will be used to twin the pair of
slaves.

DECEIT
a. The alters of both systems will be told elaborate lies to bond
them, to think they have common heritages, and also to create
scripts and conflicts.
Page 509 ...

STRUCTURING
a. They will be given identical structures so that they can have
the hidden keys to each others systems. The deeper parts of
most systems can’t be unlocked without the help of twins.
b. They will have identical structures (cubes systems, sphere
systems) to give them something in common.
c. They will have Mirror images of each other, and alters with
similar names, and alters who have the same identity as their
twin.
d. They are given programming scripts that intertwine.

BODY MANIPULATION
a. The twins are usually 3 years apart, unless they are special
purpose actual twins.

MIND MANIPULATION
a. They are given jobs and team projects that require the skills
of both, esp. jobs that require total compliance with the
twinning programs in order to survive.
b. They participate in ceremonies that require the joint abilities
of both.
c. They are programmed to be 1 in body, soul & mind. d. They
are set up in love-hate relationships.
e. They are set up in opposites-attract & opposites-repel
conflicts.
SPIRITUAL MANIPULATION
a. They are sexually mated together.
b. They are telepathically connected.
c. They are demonically connected.
d. Guilt will be created, when one twin knows something
important about the other, but is not allowed to tell, such as
Twin A will think her child is dead, and Twin B will know that
it is alive but is not allowed
to tell.
e. They will lie crown to crown (head to head) to pass psychic
energy (têtê-à-têtê).
f. Lying side by side, they’ll hypnotically sense intravenous
tubes mixing their blood to blood-bond them.

EXTERNAL CONTROLS
a. They are programmed to die if anything happens to kill the
other.
b. The peer pressure of the team prevents them from "breaking
the circle".
We have provided a more detailed look at how the twinning is
done, so that therapists & the support team can grasp that the
twinning is a major part of the programming. It is the
forerunner to the proxying and the group-mind that is being
created. Therapists need to understand that the twinning (as
with everything else) is a controlled bonding. The Illuminati
choose slaves that compliment each other in abilities, that is,
one tends to be logical, the other emotional. One tends to be
negative, & the other positive. One will be programmed to
accept love and the other not to. By having this dichotomy, the
Illuminati have something to manipulate to either join them or
separate them. The systems are also filled with false
information to keep them apart. The twins are set up to be
jealous of each other, for instance, one is jealous of the other’s
mental abilities, and the other is jealous of the other’s beauty.
There is always some method for the handlers to divide and
conquer the twins if they have to. Within twins, there will be
some alters that love the other person, and some that hate the
other person. This is meant to be this way.

ADVANTAGES GAINED FROM WORKING WITH

TWINS TOGETHER
Not all work with twins needs to have them in the same room
together. Their therapy can be coordinated without them being
simultaneously present. For instance, in the above example of a
victim being in a hospital in therapy, the twin could be talked to
by the therapist and calmed down, "It will be O.K." It is
surprising what a few kind words can do in some situations to
defuse the fears that are triggered in a twin. It has been standard
practice to exclude the twins from any knowledge of the other’s
therapy. Giving notice of what is happening to one person
about the therapy of another can raise its own set of problems
(such as jealousies), but it is suggested that rather than letting
that deflect support teams from coordinating the work with the
twin systems together, that this wrinide be accepted as part of
the job and that it be addressed. What are the advantages to
having programmed twins work together? The two twins will
not try to impede each other’s progress as much. When a victim
of mind-
Page 510 ...
control is in the hospital most therapists don’t realize that their
twin is going absolutely bonkers. The two twins will unlock
each other’s deeper systems. The two twins will help trigger
and help heal each other. The two twins will be a support team
for each other. The twins can work on mutual issues and mutual
memories together. The twins can validate each other’s
experiences and memories. Done properly, deprogramming
twins could speed up the time needed for deprogramming.

DEEPER CULT PARTS

It is the Illuminati ritual parts that know about the twinning.
Twins and teams consist of cult alters. The 4-person teams are
set up on a compass with an internal clock that links them all to
"circle" rituals. There are only 4 circumstances where the
Illuminati internalize other people during the programming,
which are: a. they internalize a Satan (a false god), b. the
internalize the programmers (more false gods and an internal
master), c. they internalize cult figures such as a Grande Dame,
the physical mother if she is cult, perhaps a
Mother-of-Darkness caretaker, perhaps the physical father who
is a cult member too (which provides internal false parents),
and d. the false sibling which is the false twin. These are the
few times that external people are internalized within alters
during the programming. This may help support team members
to see the importance of twinning.
A FINAL TRICK
A related programming trick is to tell a system that they have
given birth to twins, one was sacrificed and the other has been
secretly raised as an adept in some foreign country. The fear of
separation from one’s child that the mind experiences, also
overlaps into the fear of losing one’s own programmed "twin".
The mind doesn’t reason these things out, it simply responds
with natural anxiety that something has been taken from it. We
haven’t seen any proof that the supposed lost children who are
adepts actually exist, it is our tentative conclusion that in most
cases the stories are cult fabrications, but either way, it is just
one more anxiety that the victim has to endure.
Page 511 ...

WORLD, external, how to underatnd the external world

How did the reader come to understand the world, was it not
step by step? Let’s take a quick but close up look at this step by
step learning process. (If the following is a little too technical
bear with it.) Researchers have discovered that the basic
"frame-arrays" that allow the mind to begin this step by step
procedure to build a world-view are part of the original brain
already provided for us at birth. At that starting point, we begin
accumulating sensory input and building our understanding of
the external world. The mind for instance, orients itself
wherever it is located, by attaching some type of grid, such as
up-left, up, up right, etc. or south, east, west, and north. This
happens both in a normal person, and within the
mind-controlled slave whose orientating system
(compass/clock) is programmed in. In the mind, as it creates
"internal visual maps" of what the mind sees in a room, it
associates items in the room with prelearned frames, such as the
ceiling, the floor, the four walls. Then items are attached at the
neural level to these frames. While we can interchange & reuse
frames, the information attached to them remains fixed. As the
mind looks in a different direction a K-line, which has been
developed to record the finished visual maps that the mind has
created, is then activated. As the items are filed the mind
compares what has been "seen" (mapped) with previous
patterns & interconnects (overlays) the new memory. The
bottom line is that learning is a step by step process. The
programmers have given each alter exactly what they want that
alter to see and know, line upon line, precept upon precept.
They have finished that programming, teaching & training with
strict programming that the alters are not to question anything,
and that they are to accept what is there. They have closed off
the five senses to many of the alters. For years when
psychologists got non-host alters, they thought that many of
these other alters were delusional, psychotic, and insane.
Actually, there was nothing abnormal about these alters. Their
perceptions were totally in line with what they had been
allowed to learn and experience. Hopefully, at some point,
experiences like this will begin to restrain the therapeutic
community from attaching labels on people, rather than
understanding them. When the deeper alters hold the body, they
receive a cultural shock. The internal world is actually a
protection for them to prevent them from having to come in
contact with the external world. When they do take a peek at
the external world, they try to understand it from their
extremely limited viewpoint. The typical response for deeper
alters is to run back into the internal world and hide. They are
very skittish. They have been told that the outside world will
not understand them, and generally this is soon validated by
whoever they meet in the outside world. They are like an
American left to fend for himself in the middle of mainland
China. So how can the therapist encourage skittish deeper alters
to take a look at the world? Over a long period of time, deeper
alters will begin to get internal glimpses and hearsay messages
passed down the grapevine that so-and-so alter took the body
and it went O.K. Over a period of time, they will begin to
develop a trust that they can come out and not be hurt. They
generally do not know the simple things of life, such as how to
use a microwave, how to use a teller machine, etc. Even a
modern telephone may be a new thing. This is where a 24-hour
support team member who understands the situation can help
provide a safe loving environment for the deeper alters to have
as their first exposure to the world on their own. Now the
therapist/support persons need to begin to teach those alters to
ask questions, and to think on their own. They need to discover
emotions and their senses. They need to experience life in a
reduced trance state, so they see reality better. This freedom in
the
Page 512 ...
outside world will begin unshackling them from the internal
world. They have never had a taste of life, outside of the cult
world & hidden internal world. Contrary to what some believe,
alters are changed by their environment, although the
programming does inhibit change. Remember how small
children go through a stage where they cling to their mothers
and are afraid of strangers? How is this stage dealt with? The
child naturally grows out of it with exposure to the world.
Likewise, the deeper alters gradually lose their fear of the
outside world as they are exposed to it. Many of these deeper
alters have been locked away in their internal world for 20 or
30 or 40 years. There have been great changes over the years. If
they are to participate with the front alters, they will have to
take ownership to the front alter’s relationships, and the front
alter’s relatives. They will have to learn that they have a
telephone number, and an address. As they function more and
more in the real world, the pull to go home (home to the master
"Daddy") will decrease. The support team can give them a taste
of life. This is where they will need help. The deeper alters will
often show reluctance to experience new things, but if their
initial fears can be overcome, they may enjoy the activity more
than they realized. It really is a catch 22. Let’s say you want a
deeper alter to enjoy a birthday party. Birthday’s are
exceptionally big triggers, and all kinds of horrible junk will
surface in terms of memories. The child slave has had
"surprises" that has conditioned these child alters to hate
surprises. A small child may have been given a-head in a gift
wrapped box. Who knows all of what has been done to the
child on its birthday in the past. How does one reframe the
meaning of birthdays? Any attempt to reframe birthdays by
giving a happy celebration will simply trigger the deeper alters.
One thing that might be tried is to have a strong deeper alter
hold the body, and put most of the other alters to sleep or wall
them off from the birthday activities. After the one alter
survives the birthday without any major traumas, that success
can filter down through the deeper layers. That doesn’t mean
that the rest have had a good time. They have likely gone
through hell during the day. But at least a small step forward
has been taken, and gradually perhaps year after year, a slow
refraining process can be worked on. There is not any outside
activity which won’t have a sharp edge to it somewhere in the
deeper parts of the system. (This is one reason why it is
ludicrous to think that integration is the only answer, or that
lots of slaves have already achieved integration. If there were
ever a programmed multiple that got complete integration, the
integrated system would pull in so many phobias as they united,
that the system wouldn’t function.) There needs to be work to
reframe their view of life. There needs to be work on the fears.
Through conditioning by exposure to the joys of life, the sharp
edges of life can be blunted. The present methods of therapy (1
hour a week in an office) have no real mechanism to give the
deeper alters the safe, guided exposure to the outside world that
they need to stretch themselves. We hope we have
communicated that the needs of the deeper alters during an
everyday experience in the real world are extremely great. They
need a loving wise support person to help them in the external
world, this is not something that should be left haphazardly in
the hands of some friend of the client who doesn’t understand
programming and DID. Exposure to the world can greatly help
break down the lies of the programming and the power of the
programming, but this tool is being neglected today in therapy,
or thrown away by simply having perhaps an aunt of the client
take them out for a movie. Programmed multiple systems are
great at putting on fronts. It takes someone with an
understanding of the system to really take advantage of the
power of exposing the system to the real external world.
Finally, the alter system can develop internal processes to speed
up the exposure of
Page 513 ...
alters to the external world. They can teach each other and help
supervise each other as alters step out into the external world.
By doing this they can shorten the time it would take for so
many different people to reorient their thinking. The Illuminati
programmers will occasionally punish troublesome alters by
locking them mentally (internally) in a box, against these alters
wishes. This is just as traumatic for these alters as it would be
for the therapist to experience being locked in a box for
months. Therapists need to stay on top of these kinds of
situations and take responsibility to find missing alters who
have helped with therapy but have been punished by being
locked away. Some therapists have a policy of only working
with those alters that show up for therapy. They don’t
understand the internal structuring and how alters that
cooperate with them can be punished and locked up. Therapists
need to develop some sense of commitment to help rescue
alters that have "stuck their necks on the line" by working with
the therapist. In summary, although support groups and therapy
sessions are helpful, great opportunities to destroy
programming and expose the programming lies are lost because
skilled support people are not available to help guide deeper
alters into experiencing, understanding & coping with the
external world.
Page 514 ...

WORLDS, the destruction of

In order to do this subject justice, Fritz and I have collaborated
extensively in pooling our experiences and knowledge together
to write this article. The cold hard fact is that we have never
seen anyone totally free of all the effects of programming, in
spite of the pre-mature or boastful claims of many therapists to
the contrary. Not knowing what they are looking at, they do not
know that they are not finished. A small child may think for
sure he or she is finished cleaning a room, but in reality the
child has not even begun. Fritz and our system have patiently
waited for years to explain these things in a helpful spirit to
others, so now is our chance to express ourselves. In order to
understand how to take out the programming, one has to
understand the internal computers. In order to understand the
internal computers, one has to understand the early core splits,
which are: the gems, the Grand Druid Council, and the
Butterflies. The Butterflies empower and guide the computers.
Further, to understand the computers and these early splits, one
needs to understand the core. Although we have discussed the
core at length, we will need to go into this subject in greater
depth. In order to understand the core, we will have to
understand some secrets about how the mind functions. Many
of the things that we write about the brain are known, but they
are not being widely reported because knowledge of these
things gives the Illuminati the ability to carry out mind-control.

UNDERSTANDING THE 1ST HUMAN BRAIN, also called

the "Reptilian brain." The human brain is in reality 7 brains that
function together. Each brain is like an independent computer
which connects to the others. Each has its own intelligence, its
own subjectivity, it’s own sense of time and space, and its own
memory and other functions. The first brain, the brain stem is
that part of our brain that matches what a reptile brain. The
reptilian brain deals with breathing and the heart beat. Reptiles
are able to greet one another, forage for food, establish
territory, gather food, and work in social groups. Reptiles also
have awe for authority, and understand social peeking orders,
because that is associated with that level of thinking. The
human first brain, or shall we say "our reptilian brain" has the
same abilities that the reptilian brain has. A great deal of the
reptilian brain’s actions are preset and work very mechanically.
(By the way, alligators, snakes and other reptiles can be
hypnotized.) There are certain periods of time as a person
develops that the reptilian brain’s primitive thinking (call it
software) can be changed. These critical windows of
vulnerability are called "the times of imprint vulnerability." The
brain’s ability to allow imprinting is a survival mechanism that
allows the brain to establish the limits to which all future
learning and conditioning will occur. The reptilian brain is
concerned with survival. It is concerned with body survival and
body security. It is imprinted by the mother figure. (This
explains why the core is worked with by the victim’s personal
cult mother, who is chosen for her role by the Illuminati
because she is gentle and motherly.) The human first brain
(reptilian brain) retreats from anything predatory, a threat to its
life. The automatic nervous system is part of this first brain.
The basic thinking of the first brain is "what is safe, what is not
safe?" The primitive brain receives judgement calls from the
higher brains as to ‘‘what is not safe and what is safe’’. Money
issues can be a survival issue for the mind. Although reptiles do
not use money, they deal with other complex survival issues.
The other parts of the brain will contribute messages that
trigger the first brain to considered its survival threatened. If a
person has not developed his other higher brains, he may
simply be concerned with survival and money. Disapproval by
the mother figure is threatening to the first brain, because it
suggests death by
Page 515 ...
the loss of food supply and nurturing. The core of a
programmed multiple is not allowed to develop beyond a
reptilian brain focus, which is a fear-based survival mode. The
reptilian brain has the ability to shut down the other brains if it
senses danger. This is an important factor for the mind-control.
Most reptilian brain activity is unconscious or perhaps a gut
level feeling. Emotions are also stored in the second brain, and
in various ways in all the other brains too. Time, as our higher
consciousness knows it, is absent from the reptilian brain, it
operates on the cellular-environment circadian rhythm.
Thoughts (events in the mind) of tremendous importance can
take place in the mind and our conscious mind will not even be
aware of it. We may have high blood pressure and be totally
unaware of it. Heart rates and blood pressure have been
consistently controllable via bio-feedback teachings. Just like
the instructions that move your various arm muscles to catch a
ball are unknown to the conscious mind, they are known by the
reptilian mind and can be altered, although we don’t know
exactly how the mental instructions are rewritten in the mind.
Information from our organs is fed into our reptilian brain so
that survival of the body can be regulated. For instance, we will
sweat when it’s hot. We will want to breathe when carbon
dioxide builds up in our lungs, such as when we hold our
breath. Our higher brain can send competing messages to the
reptilian brain--keep holding the breath, we are under water.
The battle may be won by the reptilian brain when the person
goes unconscious and the person goes ahead and breathes,
which is fatal when underwater. The reptilian brain is capable
of paranoia. Let’s say that we convince someone’s mind that
some group of people, a particular minority, pose a threat to the
survival of that person’s nation. The widespread uneasiness will
cause the reptilian brain to feel comfortable in exterminating
that minority. Only a higher level of brain could check the
"animal instincts" of survival. The limbic system is connected
to the reptilian brain. Smell memories are connected to the
limbic system. In other words, our system of smell is closer in
touch to the reptilian brain. An example from everyday life will
illustrate how the different brains work separately. If you are in
turmoil, your body may show it, while your higher brains
control your speech and talk so that everything appears O.K.
Your body language which is controlled by your reptilian brain
reflects its fear-survival based thinking, while your words and
your consciously controlled gestures controlled by the higher
brains are in line with what those brains are wanting to
communicate. If the human mind was one monolithic brain it
could coordinate the body totally with what was being said.

MANIPULATION OF THE REPTILIAN BRAIN

Before the higher brains develop their abilities, and while the
Illuminati can imprint the reptilian brain, they begin with their
trauma programming with pre-verbal children. The traumas that
the Illuminati apply to the victim are not discomforts, they are
life threatening traumas. The reptilian brain is imprinted with
the idea of who its mother figure is, it is imprinted with the idea
that adherence to "the mother programmer" means survival.
The reptilian brain is connected to the heart. When the
Illuminati traumatize the child, and the heart stops beating, the
reptilian brain is being programmed. During the initial splitting
of the core, there is a period of time when the Illuminati
programmers stop the heart, and the person’s spirit (their life
force begins to leave the body.) The programmers know exactly
how long (how many millisec.) they can allow a person to
remain between life and death before they shock them with
paddles to bring them back to life. Thousands of splits in the
mind occur during this time between life and death. These splits
are found and put in a very secret grid of butterflies. Our
Illustrated Guidebook
Page 516 ...
shows a picture of butterflies. We have seen these swarms in
our dreams, and we know that they are put in because we
helped with the programming of victims. The first human brain
(reptilian) is connected to life and death. It is connected with
the spirit (life energy) of a person. This part of the mind has an
awareness of itself, but its awareness is totally on a survival
level. The programmers have linked in the victim’s mind the
survival of the person to its loyalty to its mother figure, and to
its obedience that the core should never be touched, and to its
obedience that the computers should not be touched. The core
is a dissociated part of the mind buried deep into the reptilian
brain level. If one tries to get to this level by going through the
higher brains, the higher brains will trigger the survival instinct
of the reptilian brain, which will react with what it has been
trained to do. The reptilian brain is not logical, it is quite
mechanical, and it will respond in its mechanical fashion.
Survival of the victim demanded that the victim build, maintain
and protect certain structures in the mind. The reptilian brain is
totally convinced that these structures are needed for survival.
During childhood, these structures were absolutely necessary
for the survival of the person. The reptilian brain can not see it
any different, because that is the way it is imprinted. Can the
reptilian brain be reached? Yes. Solomon Steiner & W. Dince
found & documented that with 8 to 25 hours of biofeedback
training a person can reliably control their heartbeat. (Steiner &
Dince. "Biofeedback efficacy studies", Biofeedback & Self
Regulation, 1981, 6:pp. 275-88). Anything less than this gave
unreliable results. That means that the programmers could train
the reptilian brain in 8 hours or more to control its heartbeat. D.
Shapiro & R. Surwit found & documented that operant
conditioning (behavior modification) could be used to maintain
biofeedback behaviors rather permanently. (Leitenberg, H. ed.,
art. "Learned control of physiological function & disease" by
Shapiro &
Surwit in Handbook for Behavior Modification & Behavior
Therapy. Prentice-Hall, 1976.) By using biofeedback with
dissociated alters who have received behavior modification the
Illuminati have heart programming within the reptilian mind
that is boxed up, virtually permanent, powerful and
untouchable. The very heartbeat of the person is totally
controlled by programming. For the butterflies to abreact their
trauma memory stored in the reptilian mind (as well as for the
other dissociated parts from that same splitting period) would
spell death to older recovering victims of mind-control whose
hearts could not survive going through the near-death
experience again, even if medical personnel were present. The
life of the individual is virtually wrapped up with their
programming. The reptilian mind will protect the programming
and its survival. It can not be reasoned with. While the reptilian
brain has lots of instincts and some openings for imprinting, the
other brains are more flexible in their growth. The higher brains
take time to develop, because they learn. Genetics determine all
seven brains. But the genetics of the higher brains are not like
blue prints--but are more like computer programs that interact
with the environment during the person’s lifetime. These genes
do not provide a fixed character, but the range of mental
modifiability and how the mind will modify itself (its
responses) to certain items in the person’s life. In the case of an
Illuminati programmed multiple, the victim’s core is locked up
within the reptilian brain tightly and does not fashion strong
links to the higher brains. Sometimes it appears that the
Illuminati cross that fine line in programming and impose too
much trauma on the child and the reptilian brain locks itself
tight and quits communication with the higher brains. This may
account for some programming failures becoming autistic
children. They were traumatized so much that
Page 517 ...
the higher brains are not used by the victim. When the child is
getting ready to have its core split, it is still in the self-center
"I" stage. This is the I-am-hungry--I-need-my-diaper-changed
type mode. The programmers at times in conversations among
themselves have noticed some similarities between the
fear-based survival-based 1st mind and the mind of the demons,
including Satan. Experiments have shown that some animals, if
they are imprinted to a particular mother figure, are far more
tolerant of pain from that source, without it bothering them.
The perception of pain and fear are relative to how the mind
has been imprinted. How much of a role this plays within
humans is hard to determine. There is a strong drive in little
children to attach themselves to parent figures. Even though the
programmers may not have all the research data to specifically
sort out the complexities of how the mind develops, many years
of success has given them the empirical feedback to know that
their methods work.

OUR IDENTITY
What is our identity? There is some life force within each of us
that is unique. Different religions have different names for it.
As time goes on, this life force expresses itself in its uniqueness
through our thoughts, our emotions and our physical
expressions. As everyone knows, our bodies and minds have
many unique features to them besides just our fingerprints. It is
well known that we also have sub-personalities and different
"selves". We have a deeper self, a spirit-self, that will go before
God Almighty. The hindus call this atman, the eternal self, the
eternal spirit. That deeper self, that life-spirit is connected to
this body, but should this body die, it will leave. That deeper
self in a programmed multiple still expresses itself--alter
systems vary from one person to the next, but the programming
is an overlay that hides and distorts the expression of that
deeper self. The reptilian brain, which is in charge of keeping
the body alive, will not allow the computers and the core to be
touched. No therapist, as far as we know, has ever touched a
real core. The programmers have placed core splits that pose as
cores to insure that therapists and ministers have someplace to
stop in their search for the core. Remember the core splits have
the same characteristics of the core, but only the core is able to
shut down all of the computers with her mind. Unfortunately,
the core also believes the computers are necessary for her
survival. She has been made fearful of the world without her
computers. The core has the ability to shut all the computers
down, which will automatically shut all the programming off.
But remember, the core is located in the base of the mind--the
reptilian mind. The core is very young when she or he is split.
The core has been offered the opportunity to love God at this
age, but does not understand the fine points of what is proper
and improper. I mention this, because the Illuminati teach the
core to view herself as the glory of God. The imagery of the
computers to make the computers starts out with "God’s
throne". The core is told she is like God and that from her/his
throne she/he can set up a universe like God did. And after that
universe is created, and the core is very dissociative, then the
core will be told that it will be God’s glory. God’s glory
permeates His whole creation and sustains it. So the core sees
itself as God’s glory. A theological student may see the
blasphemous nature of this, but the fine points of theology are
lost on a little 18 month old child. The child core then is told
he/she can manifest itself like a person, just like God
manifested himself as the man Jesus. The core is part of that
mind that functions with survival reptilian-type thoughts. [Let’s
say the core is female so we can use a single pronoun.] She
wants no knowledge because to survive means to give away
awareness of what is happening. She is not consciously aware
of the computers, but her energy does flow out like God’s glory
and sustains her system. After the core gets out of
Page 518 ...
the "I" stage, the programmers will teach it more of what they
want it to be. The throne is made into a tomb where the core is
put to sleep, like sleeping beauty. One of the things, that takes
place as a person develops, is that the brain is imprinted in how
much priority it will give the different brains. Most people
never develop beyond a second brain priority. The core & her
first splits never develop beyond a first brain priority. The true
core and her splits are always in a survival mode. That is why
they hide so well. If a person ever got the true core, the first job
would be to insure that the survival instincts were not triggered
and that the core developed a deep sense of trust. But the core
can not be reached by going through all the dissociated states
(pieces of the mind--alters) which are all linked to numerous
fears and programs. There are thousands of fragments of the
mind in all the various parts of the mind. No one can control all
of these dissociated parts of the mind at once, not even the
programmer--although the master programmer can come far
closer than the rest of us. Only the one person that the core
(which is in the reptilian brain) has been allowed to trust can
pull up the core. Some of those alters are going to have a fear
response to anything the therapist does, and this fear will
trigger the reptilian brain’s splits into their protective behaviors.
Any fear, even a subconscious fear, will prevent the core from
presenting. It is clear that the only effective way to get to the
core and the initial core splits is to use a medical team and deep
hypnosis. This would bypass all the garbage that would trigger
survival reflexes that are programmed into the reptilian brain.
However, once the core and her splits were reached, tampering
with anything could still trigger the programmed survival
reflexes of the reptilian brain. When the core is initially split,
the programmers take some of the early splits and make gems,
some get made into the Grand Druid Council and others into
the thousands of butterflies that are placed on the butterfly grid.
All this is extremely secret. Front Grand Druid Councils are
sometimes placed on every level. Also each major computer
will have its own real Grand Druid Council. The butterflies go
around and create the power grid that is structured like a grid
and tied in to the entire structure. The butterflies give life
energy to the system via the core in the reptilian brain. The
programmers have taken the life-force that would normally run
free like a river, dammed it up, and are harnessing it like a
hydro-electric dam to run the system.

HOW THE WORLDS ARE BUILT & THE COMPUTERS

REBUILD WORLDS & COMPUTERS
Various quadrants, worlds, galaxies, and sub-systems are
constructed within the mind of the victim. The victim may even
speak of their internal 7 wonders of the ancient world (which
may possibly be the programmer’s method of referring to the
seven brains). The various worlds have strong walls built
between them. Going through those walls triggers internal
earthquakes and other programming to go off. Generally, alters
do not have the mental strength to even want to attempt such a
feat. The worlds have been created to please the programmers.
They are built upon the early traumas. The programming is
layered in. This is why disturbing the early traumas by doing
memory work seriously disturbs the programming. However,
there is no way to destroy a world permanently without
destroying the computers and/or the demons that can rebuild it.
However, the computers themselves will regenerate unless they
are all taken out in sequence and in about the same time period.
But the computers can regenerate if the core and core splits are
not worked with, because they created the computers and they
can create them again.
Page 519 ...

HOW THE DEMONS PROTECT THE SYSTEM, & HOW

THEY IN TURN ARE PROTECTED
Whether one wants to admit that demons exist, or whether one
wants to maintain that they are only mental hallucinations,
either way, the fact remains that the victim’s mind is terrified of
these demons, and there is no way the therapist is going to get
the reptilian mind to relax when it perceives a life threat from
these demons. The therapist is going to have to calm the mind
that these demons which guard various structures are taken care
of. We are not talking about trickery--we are talking about
dealing with demons by the spiritual laws that govern demons.
Trickery will simply not work. Demonology is a spiritual
issue--but it also becomes a mental and a programming issue
because the reptilian mind will protect itself and will perceive
tampering with the programming which causes the demons to
get upset to be a serious threat to the life of the system. The
demons have the ability to tear the victim’s mind apart. That is
a threat that must be dealt with if serious work is going to be
done. The principal core decoy is a core split in the carousel.
This core decoy has a false trinity attached to it which we
described in the Vol. 2 book. However, a more powerful evil
trinity is linked to the gems and the Grand Druid Council. This
is the evil trinity of Beelzebub, Lucifer and Hydra, which were
mentioned previously in this book. Attempts to pull the big
daddy demons to the front of the mind and cast them out have
gone in the right direction, but were woefully inadequate,
because they stopped too quick. For instance, our system went
through four powerful deliverances at different points. One
allowed the front system to work. One allowed the middle
layers to work. One saved the system’s life from
self-destruction. One seriously destroyed all the front
programming, and the front demons. Where we failed is that
after these successes there were no strategic plans to take
further initiative to exploit these victories. Some reasons that
most deliverance ministries stop way too quick is:
a. they want instant miracles instead of commitment and hard
work
b. the demons are very intelligent and sly and they will do
everything they can to make themselves appear defeated. The
demons will hide, they will substitute one smaller demon for a
bigger demon during deliverance, and they will let everyone
think they have been defeated. One of their winning strategies
is to duck down low, and allow the enemy to pass by them,
so-to-speak.
WHAT PEOPLE IN THE PAST HAVE DONE, AND WHY
THEY HAVE NOT SEEN THEIR FAILURES.
When we write about the worlds and programming being taken
out, we write based on experience of what we have done and
what we have observed others do, and what their results were,
as well as relating all that we know about how the systems are
built. We have watched the results of many different
approaches. Just because a particular line of attack will not
bring ultimate success does not mean that a therapist may not
want to attempt it. Sometimes alters need to see some progress,
however small, so that they can see that there is hope. Second,
there is the synergic effect of chipping away from many
different angles that wears down the programming where it is
not as powerful. The overall wearing down may facilitate other
treatment strategies to work. Here are some of the approaches
and their results:
· The standard methods of psychology applied for years to
getting past the mirrors with no results; then encircling and
applying the blood of Jesus Christ to the mirrors with the
results that the mirrors were destroyed, their demon protectors
were controlled, and this allowed the victim to move into new
parts of the system and do memory work. What had
unsuccessfully taken years, took only a few minutes.
This was a step in the right direction, however this step was
never used in a comprehensive enough strategy to totally
dismantle the system.
Page 520 ...
· Going vertically deep into the system and doing those things
to get the Dameon (satan) alter up, and then working with
Dameon. With work and prayer Dameon is convinced to switch
sides. Using Dameon to help dismantle the system. Dameon is
a protector. He has lots of knowledge of the layers, but he has
no power. The core and her core splits have lots of power and
they can regenerate the system when they feel they need to.
Anything permanent and comprehensive is going to have to
control the regenerative power of the mind. Another problem
with working deep in a system is that the mirror images and
demonic constructs swarm in and most times therapists end up
working with the mirror images and demons.
· In the Vol. 2 book we gave the actual universal codes. There
are some standard features that are put into most systems.
Suicide programs and other programs receive master erasure
codes. A computer will have many programs that can be erased
at once. A slower approach is to get into the computer and
dismantling program after program. Or getting to a computer
and shutting it off according to the programming codes. These
methods did work (temporarily) even though they can be very
time intensive. The problem is that within two weeks the
computers and their programs will regenerate. The time period
may actually be the standard 72 hours, but the alters moving
toward health will often not realize when the internal computers
get back on line. Another problem encountered was that often a
cover computer activated, and new alters that appeared to help
the victim integrate were in reality well-disguised demons, that
the victim initially integrated but then realized were demons. In
other words, more times than not, the victim and therapist will
not even get the actual computer but only a front. When such a
front computer goes down, an LSD state will be activated that
makes colors seem more real tothe alters. The programming
will put on a good show to the therapist that they have
succeeded, but the cover program that success has been
achieved is actually "over dramatized" to the victim’s alters,
which have to be fooled also. The bottom line is that we have to
get to the bottom and work from the inside out. There are too
many programming defenses in depth. We need strategic plans
to overcome the concentric rings of programming defenses.
· Working with the internal Grand Druid Council. This is a
good strategic idea. However, up to now there hasn’t been the
skill and the knowledge and the teamwork to really implement
this strategy in the way it should be. The Grand Druid Council
is part of the power base. The problem with this is that there are
several GDC’s in a system and the therapist/deliverance
ministry must work with big daddy demons to be successful.
· Finding the internal programmers and working with them is an
extremely difficult proposition when one realizes how they
were created and function. Even if a therapist managed to work
with them, they are not in a position to dismantle what the core
wants.
· During the early rituals a simple 3 to 5 letter word will be
given to a 4 year old child which is known as the T Code. This
is the anchor for the programming, because the programming
must be anchored in the subconscious somewhere. The T Code
is also called the toddler switch. In systems that have few alters
each alter may have a T Code. In Illuminati systems created
with lots of worlds and complex alter systems, the T Code is
part of the primal programming trauma. There is a small period
of time (a few minutes) where that T memory or word occurs
upon which the entire programming structure is based.
Flipping that T Code or T Memory is like collapsing the entire
computer programming, but getting to alters (like core splits)
who are very deep & who can help with
Page 521 ...
this is going to take work. Again the problem surfaces, how
does one let the mind know that it is safe and does not need to
self-destruct to protect the programming? The best solution
would be to somehow get the core involved. It is possible to
remove the programming by flipping the Toddler Code, but it
should be done by someone who understands the bigger picture
of what is going on with the victim and the programming.

HOW THE GRAND DRUID COUNCIL IS LINKED TO

THE CORE (A BACKDOOR)
Perhaps the best back door to the core is the Grand Druid
Council. In order to work with the GDC one will have to be
prepared to bind the 3-generation curse, that is Adam, Cain,
Tubal-cain etc. that can be found by looking up this book’s
comments on Ex. 20. The support team will have to go through
the steps of Freemasonry too in their work with the Grand
Druid Council. Bear in mind that the evil trinity will need to be
commanded to return to God to receive directions from Him.
These big daddy demons only come out with authority. They
also need to be told to take their Luciferian form, rather than all
the deceptive forms they take. The deliverance minister and the
victim need to emphasize to the demons the spiritual heritage of
the victim based on their New Birth in Christ. Lucifer will try
guarding the backdoor between the Grand Druid Council and
the Core. He will have to be taken care of. The Grand Druid
Council is really just pieces of the mind that were split around
18 months. They have been heavily demonized, so that the
demons do much of the running of the GDC. The GDC splits
were created from a pre-verbal stage up to the age of 3. They
form a power base in the system. They are linked to the gems
and the ribbons. They are discussed in our other books. The
demons knows the authority of the Bible and Jesus Christ. It is
helpful to quote the exact location from the Word of God. It is
also important to be honest concerning one’s walk with the
Lord. Command them to the front of the mind and put the blood
of Jesus Christ around them. The demons should be
commanded to be honest, not use profanity, and to not harm the
body. They are under standing orders to destroy the "temple"
(the mind) IF they can’t deliver the person to the AntiChrist
when he begins his reign.
GETTING MEANINGFUL ASSISTANCE FROM A
SYSTEM
Therapists have been working with and trusting the front
systems to help them. They are working with fragments and
confused alters and they are getting a lot of misinformation.
They need to get to alters who know the power, spiritual, &
programming structures of their system. Fritz has published
diagrams of the hierarchy, for instance, the book that
accompanied his video of his lectures on a speaking circuit in
major cities has a hierarchy diagram. We have inserted it in this
book too. Alters that function at hierarchy levels would be
useful to therapists. The front alters and the gatekeepers are not
in a position to be really helpful. The strongest Christian alter
can help with spiritual things, but if the therapist could get a
hierarchy alter involved with wanting the mechanisms of
control dismantled, better progress could be made. Within
female hierarchy slaves, the Mothers-of-darkness levels &
above know programming and some about their own system.
Within the male hierarchy, the Grand Master levels and above
(Asmodeus, Ippsisimus, etc.) may know programming, and
likely know their own system. The reason the Grand Masters
may or may not know is that in contrast to the secrecy of the
Mothers & Grande Dame alters, the male hierarchy alters
function in the outside world. The very same alter that carries
out rituals in secret may be a cult leader, or an occult leader,
and may participate in many meetings in real life. If a Grand
Master were to play both a Christian and an occult role, it
Page 522 ...
means that the Christian front alters may not completely
dominate holding the body in the real world. For these men
their Christian alters might even get less than 50% of the body
time, and the hierarchy alter gets much of the rest. In
denominations such as the Lutheran, Catholic, or Episcopal
where religious functions are very ritualistic this works fine.
However, in churches which call for a spiritual walk, the
Christian alters have to be given a chance to be strong.

SUMMARY & FINAL COMMENTS

We have provided the reader with some remarkable secrets
about the foundations of the internal worlds. These specifics are
meant to be more as a type of shorthand to enable competent
experienced therapists to grasp what they are dealing with. By
knowing the basic patterns, inferences can be made in working
with a system. However, it is disturbing to think that any
therapist would view his or her client as a guinea pig or an
interesting new toy. The client has been the victim of enough
experiments. In the light of what we know, and hopefully what
the reader has learned, deprogramming needs to be handled by
teams of people. The programming has physically changed the
victim’s brain. Has the reader ever been in a depression that
they can’t break out of, no matter what the efforts? Hopefully
not, but some people do. It is possible for the brain to be
trapped in a physical change, a neurochemical change in the
brain that is hard to dislodge. The internal worlds can appear to
be collapsed, the computers can pretend or actually be taken
down-- and yet, the creative force in the mind that constructed
them for survival will rebuild them. Long term benefits of
destroying worlds will be best achieved when methods are
carried out that encourage the core and the core splits to
collapse the entire thing. That is why the core is hidden so well,
the Illuminati do not want their internal worlds tampered with.
We have written 3 books to provide a rough sketch of a very
complex subject. We trust that this book has given the reader
deeper insights into the depths of total mind-control that
contemporary mankind has plunged into. The subject is a deep
one, which can be compared to Mammoth Cave, for what one
sees on the surface is small compared to the depths and
breadths of a vast underground. Although our books have
explored and shined light deeper than previous explorations,
who knows how deep the subject goes? God’s Word says,
"Where sin increased, grace abounded all the more." When the
world was void and empty God put His light upon it, with only
a spoken word, & new life broke forth. He can still do this. He
is the same God, yesterday, today & forever. Mankind is
resourceful. He can do amazing feats. Mankind has been faced
with difficult situations in the past and has been competitent. If
mankind can do these things without God, what could we do
with God? If God be for us, who can be against us? Never,
never, never give up hope.
Back to Contents Next
Back
Back
Back
p_6-6.jpg (30687 bytes)

Back
p_6-7.jpg (159065 bytes)

Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
p_6-14.jpg (126761 bytes)

Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
This is a masonic drawing cailed "The Second Portal". it shows nude boys facing a
throne undergoing some type of magical rltuai. The drawing appears In The Hidden
Life in Freemasonry after pg. 198. in 1926, Charles W. Leadbeater, a 33º Freemason,
printed his book The Hidden Life in Freemasonry. This book was written for people
involved in Luciferian rituals In the higher more occult rites of Freemasonry. in the
preface, Leadbeater talks of butterflies (pp viii-ix), which has the double meaning in
the occult of souls (spirits). in the last chapter, chapter 10, he gives masonic rituals
to Invoke angels (demons) through egyptian magic. In these Masonic temples, the
checkerboard square is used in a similar fashion as a magic circie for a coven. This
picture is given as a paper trail to show the sex-magic rituals that take place within
various masonic groups.

The iliuminati Sisters of Light alters rarely appear in therapy because they are used
in horrendous masonic rituals, and must be buried very deep in the system.
Typically, a Sister of Light would be blindfolded and taken down many flights of
steps and through tunnels and would end up in an elaborate underground masonic
temple. She would be used as a nymph. in one ritual, for example, she’d be given a
golden circle band for her forehead, a cloak with a red lining, and a tunic of black
silk with golden rays. The hall would have important masons of society who would
be sitting in a semi-circle. The Sisters of Light are given to Beelzebub in an
excruciating marriage ceremony. There is a veil which fails into 4 equal parts, which
mean the 4 corners of the world. The sisters take oaths around the compass, so that
the victim feels locked in no matter what corner of the world they go to.

Back
Back
This was some early art work by Cisco to convey what her mind felt as a mind-controlled slave. What the
picture shows is the hand of the puppet master controlling his puppet. The puppet is floating--not grounded
in reality, but dissociated from the external world in order to survive. All the cities and internal worlds are
grids. Everything attaches to grids. The color programming can be seen in the Green, Blue, Silver, Gold,
Red, and Yellow colors of the grids. The puppet is totally in the hands of the puppet master and its hands
are in a submissive hold, while the puppet master has his fingers covertly wrapped around the left side of
the puppet's head.

Back
Back
Barbie Dolls are used for the mind-control programming. Interestingly in 1995, while fighting
over Barbie dolls a 6-yr. old girl in Modesto, CA stabbed a 7-year-old playmate with a knife
while telling her she was going to kill her. Police did nothing with the girl who had used the
knife except to have the parents take her. One wonders what was this all about. Meanwhile
Barbie Dolls have drastically changed and are now very occultic.
Back
p_12_eve1.jpg (187299 bytes)

Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
1. Fritz Springmeier in California
3. The 6th Army HDQT at the Presido with its satanic logo on the building.
The photo shows the hexagram in a circle logo with the anarchy A, which is the
logo for the 6th army. Numerous satanists have held high positions in the 6th
Army, including Col. Michael Aquino, a mind-control programmer and a
publicly known satanist.
4. This is the oak tree at the Presideo used hypnotically to
build oak trees into the minds of victims.
5. This is a building used for Illuminati ritual near the
Presideo.
 6. Ft. Point, Presideo. The small rooms and small enclosures were used for
torture during non-tourist hours. The forts parade ground and walls were also
used for heavily guarded rituals.
7. Mule barns whose second floors were used for torture and traumatization of
victims. Tunnels connected mule barns, and other buildings.
8. This immence cemetery at the Presideo has seen a lot of
Illuminati activity.
9. One of the Presideo's churches where Illuminati
activity/rituals took place.
10. This picture is taken looking across the bay from the
Presideo toward Alcatraz in the background. Alcatraz
Island was used for water torture
Wash. building which has high-tech secret entrance to tunnels below Portland
Mormon Temple, where Illuminati rituals, programming, and porn shows, and
gladiator matches occur.
Back
Page 385 ....
BIBLIOGRAPHY &
SOURCES

The co-authors brings lots of

experience and study with
this subject into the creation
of this book. The sources that
have contributed to their
knowledge would take a
book as long as this to list
every source that has gotten
them to their understanding
of the subject.
PRIMARY SOURCES ON
PRIMARY SUBJECT--
TRAUMA-BASED TOTAL
MIND-CONTROL
1. Numerous professional
papers.
2. Personal accounts about
slaves (published).
3. Unpublished paperwork,
tapes, interviews of slaves.
4. Therapists
5. Books on Mind-control.
6. Books on associated
topics, such as PTSD, the
Mind, hypnosis, drugs,
witchcraft, and the various
aspects of control.
1. NUMEROUS
PROFESSIONAL PAPERS.
Carole Goettman, George B.
Greaves and Philip M.
Croons put out a reference
book Multiple Personality &
Dissociation 1791-1992 A
Complete Bibliography, 2nd
edition. (Lutherville, MD:
The Sidran Press, 1994).
Co-author Fritz has gone
through the Bibliography
which lists in 150 pages
essentially all the articles
ever published on MPD and
Dissociation, and he has read
all that he could obtain via
the large research libraries.
Dozens of the articles, and
many of the books which
appear in this complete
bibliography have been read.
Most of the professional
literature on the subject is
trash. During the 1970s,
Americans got interested in
Multiple Personalities, after
having lost interest in the
subject as W.W. I got started.
I believe the therapeutic
community was probably
nudged by the
military/intelligence agencies
to lose interest when W.W. I
broke out, and that anyone
who did get interested got
scooped up into the
government during W.W. II
and the Cold War. Some of
the helpful professional
papers have been notated in
the book itself. A perusal of
the index will provide part of
the sources for this book.

2. ALL THE PERSONAL

ACCOUNT (AUTO
BIOGRAPHICAL
ACCOUNTS) THAT ARE
AVAILABLE.
The list of auto-biographies
(or biographies) of victims
which were consulted include
the following:

CHASE, TRUDY.
Chase. Trudy. When the
Rabbit Howls. NY: Dutton,
1987.

DORSETT, SYBIL ISABEL.

Schreiber, Flora Rheta. Sybil.
Chicago, IL: Henry Regnery
Co., 1973.

FORD, SUE.
Taylor, Brice with Patrick
Stone. (written as a novel).
Starshine. Huntsville, AL:
The Brice Taylor Foundation,
1995.

JONES, CANDY. (born

Jessica Wilcox).
Bain, Donald. The Control of
Candy Jones. Chicago:
Playboy Press, 1976.

LYNN, LORETTA.
Vecsey, George with Loretta
Lynn. Loretta Lynn A Coal
Miner’s Daughter.
Rockefeller Plaza, NY:
Warner Books, 1976.

MONROE, MARILYN.
Pepitone, Lena. Marilyn
Monroe Confidential An
Intimate Personal Account.
NY: Simon & Schuster,
1979.

O’BRIEN, CATHY.
O’Brien, Cathy with Mark
Phillips. Trance Formation
ofAmerica, The True Life
Story of a CIA Slave.
Nashville, TN: Global Trance
Formation Info, Ltd., 1995.
Also Cathy O’Brien and
Mark Phillips put out
numerous monographs and a
number of articles in the
Contact magazine, which
were also consulted in
writing this book.

STRATFORD, LAUREN.
Satan ‘s Underground: The
Extraodinary Story of One
Woman ‘s Escape., 1991.

WHEELER, CISCO.
Wheeler, Cisco with Fritz
Springmeier. They Know
What They Do, An Illustrated
Guide to Monarch
Programming-MindControl.
Oregon City, OR: Springme
ier & Wheeler, 1995.

OTHERS VICTIMS:
Casey, J.F. & Wilson, L. The
Flock. Alfred A. Knopf,
1991.

LaCalle, TM. Voices. NY:

Dodd, Mead, & Co., 1988.

Lancaster, E. & Polney, J.

The Final Face of Eve. NY:
McGraw-Hill, 1958.

Schoenewolf, G. Jennifer
and her selves. NY: Donald
I. Fine, 1991.

Sizemore, C. & Pittillo, E.

I’m Eve. Garden City, NY:
Doubleday & Co., 1977.

Page 386 ....

Smith, Michelle & Lawrence

Padzer. Michelle
Remembers: A Story of
Satanic Possession.

Thigpen, C.H. & Cleckley,

H. The three faces of Eve.
NY: McGraw-Hill, 1957.

3. UNPUBLISHED
PAPERS, TAPES, &
INTERVIEWS WITH
VICTIMS.
These sources will have to
remain confidential. Over a
dozen Illuminati slaves
provided notes from what
they have found out about
their lives and mind-control
systems. The co-authors have
interviewed and personally
known dozens more, who
have been visited with. Notes
were kept on some of these
interviews. Fritz taped some
of his interviews, and in more
than one case got a computer
disk of the person’s life story
with colloborating evidence.

4. THERAPISTS.
Fritz is appreciative to the
following therapists for the
help he received:
Dale Calvocade, Ukiah, CA,
who helped me understand
the religious covers better.
Dr. Carol Clifton, Portland,
OR, who helped me
understand the value of
patience, kindness and
listening in helping victims
help themselves.
Dr. Loreda Fox, Denver, CO,
who helped give a better
understanding of the spiritual
dimensions.
Catherine Gould, TX, who
helped me understand the
role of alters within
programs.
Denny Hilgers, Pasadena,
TX, who helped me
understand the deeper codes,
and the deeper systems
better, and t h e importance
of a person’s identity.
David W. Neswald, Irvine,
CA, who helped me
understand the primal
traumas better.
Randy Noblitt, Dallas, TX,
who helped give a better
understanding of overall
picture, and how some of the
codes are constructed.
Mark Phillips, Nashville, TN,
who opened up a deeper
understanding of how the
Network operates, and
provided some direction for
how we should approach
dealing with mind control.
Doug Riggs, Tulsa, OK, who
helped give a better
understanding of the
religious fronts, and who
helped tremendously
understand how this
trauma-based mind-control
fits in with the Word of God.

5. BOOKS (& LONG

PAPERS) ON
MIND-CONTROL
Bowart, Walter H. Operation
Mind-Control, original
edition and the totally revised
Researchers edition of 1994,
which carried the same title.

Chavkin, Samuel. The Mind

Stealers, Psychosurgery and
Mind Control. Westport,
Conn: Lawrence Hill & Co.,
1978.

Estabrooks, G.H. Hypnotism.

NY: EP. Dutton, 1957.

Lockwood, Craig. Other

Altars, Roots and Realities of
Cultic and Satanic Ritual
Abuse & Multiple
Personality Disorder.
Minneapolis, MN:
CompCare Publishers, 1993.

Marks, John. The Search For

The "Manchurian
Candidate" The CIA & Mind
Control. NY: W.W. Norton
& Co. (paperback version),
1991.

Mediaecco. When The State

Rapes, Part I & 2. Gorredijk,
Netherlands,

Thomas, Gordon. Journey

into Madness. NY: Bantam
Books, 1989.

White, John. Psychic

Warfare, Fact or Fiction?
(An investigation into the use
of the mind as a military
weapon.) Wellingborough,
Northamptonshire, UK: The
Aquarian Press, 1990(?).

De Laurence, editor. The

Lesser Key of Solomon
Goetia, The Book of Evil
Spirits. Chicago, 1916.

6. BOOKS ON
ASSOCIATED TOPICS.
Both authors have read many
books on tangent subjects.
The list of books that have
been read and researched
prior to writing this would
take another book to record.
The co-author Fritz found
himself consulting his own
books, Be Wise As Serpents
(1991), The Top 13 Illuminati
Bloodlines Vol. 1 (1995), and
Exodus 20:4-5 (1978). The
co-authors purchased and
read the 14 Oz books. They
also have a number of the
other books used for scripts
such as, Mother Goose
Rhymes, The Tall Book of
Make Believe, -Michael
Aquino’s version of Star
Wars, etc., Snow White & the
7 Dwarfs, The Island of the
Blue Dolphins, Through the
Looking Glass, etc. Fritz
purchased his own copy of
The Graphic Work of M. C.
Esher. NY: Ballantine
Books, 3rd edition, 1972. in
order to have on hand the
artwork which contains so
many mirror images and
inversions and is so often
used for programming.

As I, Fritz, sit down to

provide the sources for the
reader, it is apparent that the
task is beyond my time
restraints. Knowledge
accumulates. A random
sample of just two of almost
countless references looked
at to come to the author’s
level of understanding would
be Jean L. Sutton’s workshop
book Ritualistic Abuse of
Children Identification and
Case Management Strategies
which was used in workshops
for teachers and child
services division people on
Fri. Sept. 11, 1992 at 815
N.E. Davis St., Portland, OR.
Another example is The New
Yorker’s, May 24, 1993,
article "Remembering
Satan--Part II". Neither one
was referred to in writing the
book, but these two and

Page 387 ....

countless others over the

years form the accumulation
of understanding that is
needed to tackle writing a
book on Multiple Personality
Disorder (Dissociative
Identity Disorder).
To be able to write this book,
Fritz, the co-author has
studied material, books,
newspapers clippings,
articles, etc. from the
following ASSOCIATED
TOPICS with a close
estimate of the number of
items studied in each area:
Aliens & UFOs (40 items),
Amish-Mennonite (30 items),
Astronomy & astrology (25
items), Behavior
Modification (12 items),
Black religions in the New
World and Africa (6 items),
Brain (30 items), Caballa (10
items at least), Computers
(25 items), Computer
languages (8 items), Crime
(25 items), Demonology (30
-items), Druidism (20 items),
ELF waves (20 items), Fairy
Tales (7 items), False
Memory Syndrome (5 items),
Freemasonry (35 items),
Holograms (6 items),
Hypnosis (12 items),
Intelligence (20 items),
Jesuits (6 items), Ku Klux
Klan (15 items), Medical
technology (15 items),
Memory (20 items), Mental
Hospitals (5 items), Military
(10 items), Mind (25 items),
Movies (20 items),
NeuroLinguistic
Programming (6 items), New
World Order (50 items),
Particular Individuals such as
the Rothschilds,
Rockefellers, Collins,
Mengele, Cameron, Wheeler,
LaVey, Aquino, Elvis
Presley, Doris Duke, and
many others mentioned in the
book (50 items at least),
Personality (25 items),
Satanic Ritual Abuse (50
items), Spiritual warfare (40
items), Spying (25 items),
Underwater research (40
items), Voodoo (3 items),
Witchcraft (50 items). Some
of the books that would have
been cited if every detail had
been footnoted can be found
footnoted in other writings by
Fritz Springmeier. Also I,
Fritz, have spent time
examining the Word of God
to try to understand what
God’s written word revealed
by His Spirit would teach me
about this situation. There are
numerous Bible verses that
pertain to the information in
this book which are not
referred to in this volume.
The primary issues created
by the traumas are a. identity
issues, and b. issues
concerning fellowship with
God. Much of the trauma and
programming is cloud the
issue of who the person
really is, and how they can
have a beneficial relationship
to God Almighty. The Bill
Gothard Basic Youth
Seminar which the co-author
Fritz has attended 6 times,
has been very helpful to him
to understand what the
programmers do, and how
they strip a person of what
they need to be spiritually
strong. In fact, Fritz knows a
number of the programmers
have attended the Bill
Gothard Seminar themselves,
and know how to use
beneficial information for
evil purposes. Likewise, the
Christian can take the occult
knowledge of revealed in this
book and use it for good
instead of the evil that it was
designed for. The Institute
has a hard volume reference
book on Research in
Principles of Lfe as well as a
workbook. Cisco, the other
co-author, has studied MPD,
SRA, Bible issues, and occult
topics indepth. Her personal
knowledge added a depth to
the book that could not have
been achieved without her.
William Frost of San
Antonio, TX was a good
friend of a tall lean Texan
named David Hill. David Hill
had been taken in by Mafia
boss Joseph Bonanno, who
was as a surrogate father to
him. After David Hill
became a Christian, he used
his first hand knowledge of
the Mafia, the occult world
such as his Masonic
experience to put the pieces
together about the NWO. He
had just completed a very
detailed manuscript for a
book exposing the NWO,
when he was murdered. After
David’s murder, William
Frost was able to retrieve
David’s manuscript and sent
me a copy. The death was not
ruled a murder by the
authorities, but men who
have written lengthy exposes
on the New World Order do
not commit suicide before
they get their books
published. It was
keen-minded David Hill who
warned Billy Graham for
many hours about the New
World Order, only to be told
by Billy Graham, that Billy
was ‘a captive’ (Graham’s
own words) of the New
World Order. The
information William Frost
gave me about David Hill,
was later verified in many
ways by Joseph Bonanno’s
surprising autobiography A
Man of Honor, Simon &
Schuster, Rockefeller Center,
N.Y., 1983. It’s somewhat
unusual for Mafia chiefs to
write autobiographies. In it,
Joseph Bonanno says he
looked up to Billy Graham,
and that David Hill joined up
with Billy Graham. In 1974,
Billy Graham came to Joseph
Bonanno’s house in Tuscon
with David. Graham sent him
a Christmas card every year,
and called him soon after his
wife died to offer
condolences. These things
are mentioned on page 333 of
his autobiography. David
Hill’s manuscript was
encouraging to me, Fritz,
because he verified many of
the same things that I’d
found. His manuscript was
quoted in Vol. 1 concerning
the top families.
Information about the names
of programmers and
programming sites and the
Temple of Set membership
has come from recovering
victims of Trauma-based
mind-control. Information
about Illuminati bloodlines,
ritual sites, and important
buildings has also come from
Illuminati members who are
recovering from Illuminati
mind-control. Many more
witnesses to Illuminati
Mind-control will come
forward if people learn how
to help these people, and to
believe the things that have
happened to them. Now that
this legitimate information is
being circulated, it can be
expected that "witnesses"
with bogus
information/bogus memories
will come forward to detract
from the credibility of this
book.

next page Information on

Illustrations.

Page 388 ....

ILLUSTRATIONS

Chapter 2 title
page--Reproduction of the
cover of the program of the
Bohemian Grove Cremation
of Care Ritual. p. 45--Torture
device, drawn by a
recovering Monarch slave
used by permission of Denny
Hilgers, Pasadena, TX p.
46--Ritual stick, drawn by a
recovering victim of SRA,
used by permission of David
Carrico, Evansville, Indiana.
Heart in a Jar, drawn by
another recovering victim of
SRA, used by permission of
David Carrico, Evansville,
Indiana. Chapter 4 title
page--Hypnotic illusion
drawings, adapted from
uncopyrighted material.
p. 66--Spinning top, common
illusion, adapted from
uncopyrighted material.
p. 88--Section Chart of "A"
alters, created by Fritz
Springmeier
p. 91--Structure Chart, of
color codes, alter runways,
system structure, created by
Fritz Springmeier based on
information from a
recovering Monarch
mind-control victim.
p. 134--Cover Decision
magazine.
p. 168, 175-178--U.S.
Patent4,858,612, public
information, U.S. Patent
Office.
Chapter 7 title page--Chart
was drawn by Fritz
Springmeier, it is based on an
actual Illuminati Mind
Controlled Slave’s system’s
structure. The chart has
modifications from the actual
system’s structure, but
closely resembles it.
p. 195--Chart drawn by Fritz
Springmeier and Cisco
Wheeler of internal hour
glass, x-y-z axes.
p. 196--Worlds, domino
program arrangement,
solemetric--drawn by Fritz
Springmeier
p. 210-2 1 1-- "Common
Structures" Illustration
showing various internal
systems and their
relationships to each other,
done by Fritz Springmeier
based upon various reports of
recovering slaves whose
systems match each other.
p. 237-239, 241,
243--Designs. United
Nations identity Franz
Joseph. Star Fleet Technical
Manual TM:3 79260.
Ballantine Books: NY, Nov.
1975 (also on title page it
states 1st edition
STARDATE 7511.01.) The
title page to this manual at
first appearance seems to
indicate that it was really
printed by the United
Federation & the United
Nations, with a stardate year
given. The actual dates, and
actual publisher are almost
camouflaged on the title
page. p. 240, 242-- Star Trek,
the Next Generation
Technical Manual. Given to
Fritz by a recovering
Assistant Programmer.
p. 244-246-- Warren
magazine.
p. 248--Intergalactic
symbols, drawn by Fritz
Springmeier, based on what
slaves see in their heads.
p. 252--Histamine molecule,
graphics by Fritz
Springmeier. Chapter 10 title
page--Top picture drawn by
eyewitness Kim Stevens of
Satanic Ritual. Bottom
picture was redrawn from the
original drawing done by a
member of the Ordo
Saturnus in ritual, a German
branch of the Illuminati. p.
315-317--First Earth
Battalion’s Training Manual,
US Army written by LTC
Jim Channon.
Chapter 11 title
page--drawing of computer
generated by computer
graphics and done by Fritz
Springmeier p. 338--Portion
of Shari’s restaurant place
mat with a maze and Wizard
of Oz theme.
Chapter 12 title page--Bo
Gritz’s own campaign
broshure during the the 1992
Presidential campaign which
gives his biographical
information.
p. 361--Newsweek cover with
caption "Disney’s Dilemma
Can the Kingdom Keep Its
Magic?"
Appendix B title page.
Drawing by victim of mind
control from eastern U.S.
showing the skinning process
of person. This skill is put to
use for programming
purposes. Appendix B.
Photographs of Presideo by
Fritz Springmeier,
Photographs of Portland
Mormon Temple by Fritz
Springmeier, Photographs of
the Mother’s-of-Darkness
castle Chateau des Amerois,
Belgium by Fritz
Springmeier.

ALL ITEMS BY FRITZ

SPRINGMEIER,
COPYRIGHT BY FRITZ
SPRINGMEIER.